7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 1/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Committed
to quality
we are the leading IJK based storage tanlc contractori backett by more
than 40 vears ex,errcr(.,
in this fielcl antl su\tported by a skiltert nnrt tletticate(l team ofengineers, wiih the
abititv to
handle the diuerse requirements of the rejining an.(r storage industries.

We pritle ourselues in our approach - we recognise eaclz customer's needs are

different nrtd tt,e
prouicle indiuidually tailored solutions to match and exceetl those
reqttirements.

Leading the way Expertise in

In tecnntcal servtceS technical solutions
As the UK's number one full service supplier of
Feasibility studies fixed and floating roof field-erected srorage
Detail design tanks. McTay has
Fabrication drawings successfully applied

E ngineering specification this knowledge to

a wide range of
O -

ite i nspecti o n con su I tanc,

n s prolects and gajned
Complete e ng i neeri ng, procu re me nt
a reputation for
& construction management.
excellence in
Emanating from McTay,s traditional oil engrneering
and (hemi(al storage activities, we have non-standard tanks.
developed a strong capability and expertise
As part of international construction and
In the design of tanks and vessels for the
support servrces 9roup, Mowlem plc, you
storage of iiquid and petroleum products.
can be confident ol a fir5t class servi(e,
These specialist professional services are which also gives McTay ready access to the
provided through Mclay's 85 EN 9001 vast resources and mu lti-discipline
accred capabilities available
itation. within the group.

McTay - complete engineering solutions.

|ytclby

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
Regional offices: MOWLEM 2/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Guideto
tt
NAB
I tt 0il r$ t
=
t{]-r

The practical reference book and

guide to storage tanks and ancillary
equipment with a comprehensive
buyers' guide to worldwide
manufacturers and suppliers

Bob Long
Bob Garner
This plblication is copyrighl under the Berne convenlion and the International copyright convenuon. All rights reserved. Apart from any
fa|I deating for the purpose of
pfvate study, research criticism, or review as permitted lnder the copyright Designs. nd Patents Act 1 988: no pan may be reprodr.:cedl
transfitted.inanyform'byanymeans,e|ectfonic,e]ectrica|'chemicaLmdchanica-i,photocopying'recoroing,orbttren,vi(e,wito
stored in a-ny retrierial iystem,
owneI5'L,n|icensedmu|tip|e-copyingofthispubic"tion.isi||ega|,|nq iriessh
Northgate Avenue, Bury St Edmunds. Suflolk. tp32 6BW, UK.

o Roles and Associates Limited

tsBN 1 86058 431 4
A CIP catalogue forthis book is available from the British Library

whilst every care has been taken in the prepara on of this publication, the publishers are not responsible for any statement made in
thjs pubtication. DaLa, djscussion,
and conclusions develooed bv the Editor are for informatioi onty and are nbtintended for use wiihout inu"riidulon on tn" part of potential
users. opinions expresied ar-e those of fte Editor and not nece;sarity those of tne 'ncepenai:niiuosLniiiinj
tnstitution-Jr'naec-rrin;;;i6;];;;;;ilil]i:t1g;:"*'

Printed in Great Britain by Antony Rowe, Chippenham, Wiltshire.

h
)b
rofesslonal
Engineerlng
Published in
association with

Publlshlng FT-ilnE(q
LJIJIgEEEJ
Professional Engineering Publishing
Bury St Edmunds and London UK &t$stirh$

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 3/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Maior Contrastor of the Year 2003

Building Conlractor of the Year 2003

Stuart Driver
Chief Civil Engineer

[email protected]
taylorwoodrow,com

llaa

tlttfi
oylor Wo odrow
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 4/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Foreword
Steel storage tanks are an important and costly part of oil refineries, terminals, chemical plants
and power stations.
They should function efficientlyand be trouble-free attheir maximum storage capacity to ensure
that these installations can have their planned maximum production capacity.
A sudden, unexpected loss of storage capacity due to accidents will cause a serious handicap
for the production capacity of these installations and result in serious financial losses. lt is
therefore essential that accidents with storage tanks should be avoided as much as possible.
For this purpose it is not only essentialthat designers have adequate knowledge and experience
of the design regulations and limits of storage tanks but also maintenance engineers and
operation-personnel should be efficiently aware of important and crucial details of the storage
tanks to avoid unexDected oroblems.
Thousands of steel storage tanks are operating at ambient temperature for oll and chemical
products in almost every country in the world. The reported accidents with those tanks are in
most cases caused by human errors or operational mistakes. Investigations demonstrate that
in many cases they could have been avoided through adequate knowledge of the personnel
involved.
Refrigerated steel storage tanks, for liquefied gases, eg. butane, propane and LNG are
operating at storage temperatures of respectively - 6 'C, -45'C and - 165 "C. Theirnumberis
limited. The design and construction of such tanks is complicated and cosfly. Many special
requirements are given, in addition to or deviating from the regulations of tanks operating at
ambient temperatures.
For these tanks it is highly essential that designers, maintenance engineers and
operation-personnel should have adequate and accurate knowledge of all requirements and
crucial details. For such tanks, losses of capacity due to accidents would have very serious
consequences.
This book will be most helpful in supplying the knowledge required and should therefore be
available for designers, maintenance engineers and operation-personnel
The guidance given is essential to ensure a trouble-free operation of the storage tanks. I
therefore sincerely hope that this book will find its way worldwide.

John de Wit

Ex-tank specialist of Shell, The Hague

Previously chairman of the tank committees of:
The British Standards lnstitution, London
The Engineering Equipment and Materials Users Assoc/a'on , (EEMUA), London
The European Committee for Normalisation, Brussels.

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPHEI{T

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 5/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 6/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

About the authors

Bob Long HND (N/echanical & Production Engineering), CEng, Eur Ing, Fll\,4echE

Bob Long attended Woodbridge Schoolin Woodbridge, Suffolk, before moving tothe Nofth East
to take up a student apprenticeship with Whessoe Heavy Engineering Ltd in 1961. A four-year
sandwich course provided an HND from Darlington Technical College and a sound background
in both the white and blue-collar areas of the companys activities.
At that time Whessoe was a vigorous and broadly based engineering company working for and
with the nuclear, petrochemical, power generation, chemical and sundry other industries, both
at home and abroad. So there was plenty of scope for a young man, and a good place to start
was in the development department. A thoroughly enjoyable five years was spent finding
technical solutions to a variety of problems that emanated from the wide range of company
activities.
A move to the storage tank department brought exposure, at first to tanks for the storage of
ambient temperature products and then to the more exotic tanks for the storage of low
temperature liquids. This was an interesting time jn the evolution of low temperarure ranKs, as
they moved from single containment through to double and finally to full containment systems.
l\y'any new problems had to be faced and overcome, in the design office, the fabrication shops
and on sites in various countries.
The company's range of activities narrowed as time went on, but fortunatelyfor Bob, the storage
of liquid products and in particular of low temperature liquids became the main thrust of the
bustness.
Bob became involved with the writing of British Standards, EEMUA guidelines and eventually
European Standards in the field of liquid containment systems. He rose to become Engineering
l\y'anager and a Technical Director of Whessoe. He now works as a part time consultant for the
same company.
A one-company man, a rare beast indeed these days

Bob Garner HNC (l\,4echanical Engineering), CEng, N/llNilechE

Privately educated until the age of 15, Bob Garner left school and was taken on as office boy in

Preengineering
an department
National Certificate of Lever Bros. He aitended day release and night school achieving a
Diploma.
Bob was then apprenticed as a fitter/turner with C & H Crichton, maintaining the Ellerman City
Line's shipping fleet. During this time he undertook day release gain ing an 0NC in Mechan ical
Engineering and subsequently a HNC. Vocational training covered operatjng lathes, boring
machines and shaping machines, and the final year of the apprentjceship was spent in ihe
drawing office. He was then asked to stay to assist with estimating for work required by local,
land-based companies (as distinct from shipping).
At the age ot 22, Bob was involved in the building of steel lock caissons for the new
Langton/Canada Dock passage from the River Mersey. Spells as a draughtsman with the l\,4obil
Oil Company followed, during which Bob was approached by a newlt-formed storage tank
company,,l\y'cTay Engineering, and asked to prepare tankage calculations and drawings at
home for €1lhr. Being a newly-married man with a mortgage, this was a golden opportunity to
earn extra cash to enhance his life style, and his relationship with McTay flourished.

designed and ofyears

Alter a couple however,
built stone joined a completely
Bobmachinery
crushing
d ifferent engineering organisation that
for the quarrying industry.
He continued with his moonlighting for l\,4cTay until 1969 when he joined the company full tjme,
being involved in designing tanks, draughting, estimating for new work, visiting potentlal clients,
purchasing steel and tank components and assisting with technical backup on overseas visits to
clients
Bob Garner was made Technical Direclor in 1972, responsible for estimating, design & drawing
office and purchasing and inspection. After continuing with further studies, in 1974 Bob becam6
an Associate [,4ember of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers. (Associate Members later
became known as Chartered Engineers, which is the recognised tifle today.)
By 1977, expanding business opportunities took Bob to East Africa, The Falklands and America
as wellas much of Europe. His responsibilities during this time were principallyfor the operation
of the estimating and engineering departments. This work continued until 20d0 when. now as a
single man, he took early retirement.

He still works for McTay, on a consultancy basis as long as jt does not interfere too much with
holidays at home and overseas, cruises or qolf -

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT \/

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 7/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

be I Fr'i, r..ri ns

LNG Exoori Terminal Ha

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 8/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

How to use this book

Storage Tanks & Equipment is a practical reference book written for specifiers, designers,
constructors and users of ambient and lowtemperature storage tanks. lt has been desjgned to
provide practical information about all practical aspects of the design, selection and use of
vertical cylindrical storage tanks. Other tank types are covered but in less detail. Although the
emphasis is on practical information, basic theory is covered.
The book is aimed at everyone who has technical problems as well as those wanting to know
more about allaspects oftank technology and also those who wantto knowwho supplies what,
and from where.
Storage Tanks & Equipment is not intended to be a comprehensive design manual, but
sufficient information is included to enable the readerto understand the design process and to
identify potential problem areas in tank type selection, fabrication and erection. The princioal
Standards are covered and detailed comparisons between the main ones are given. The main
Codes* include: BS 2654, BS 7777, API650, API 620, prEN 14015 and DrEN 14620. Other
Standards include those such as NFPA. DOT, tp, CEtrt, HSE etc.
Storage Tanks & Equipment can be used in a variety of ways depending on the information
required. For specific problems it is probably best used as a reference book. The deiailed
contents section at the front ofthe bookand in particularthe Reference index, Chapter29, atthe
end ofthe book, will simplify finding the appropiate topic. The introductions at the start of each

chapterwillalso provide valuable guidance. Technicaland other references are listed at the end
of most chapters. Consulting these will lead to more references and hopefullv sufficient
information to satisfy those who need to know more on any particular subjeci.
As a practical textbook, though, Sforage Tanks & Equipment may be read from cover to coverto
obtain a comprehensive understanding of the subject. Of course, individual chapters may be
studied separately. Storage Tanks & Equipment follows a logical sequence, starting with a
general history of storage tanks, the design of tanks for the storage of products at ambient
temperatures together with sections covering material selection, fabrication, erection,
foundations, layout, venting, seismic design and operation of these tanks. There than follows a
parallel series of chapters which concern themselves with tanks for the storage of products at
low temperatures.
The various formulae used in Storage Tanks & Equipment have come from a large number of
sources and many of the formulae are well known, as is their use of the variables contained
within them. Rather than use a single system of variables in the book, which could give rise to
confusion, it was decided in all cases to define the variables local to the equations themselves.
Please note also that all pressures referred to throughout Storage lanks & Equipment ae
gauge pressures unless otheMise stated.
The Classification guide in Chapter 2S is an invaluable and important part of Sfo raqe Tanks &
Equipment.lt summarises ambient and low temperature liquid storage tanks, class'ifying them
according to tank type, size or capacily, materials ofconstruction, products stored, mateiials of
conslruction etc. Companies are listed alphabetically here and in the other sections including
ancillary products and services, by their country of origin. The information and data is for
guidance only. lt is strongly recommended that direct contact with all comDanies be made to
ensure their details are clarified wherever necessary.
'Extracts faom Bdlish Standards are Eproduced with lhe permission ofthe British Slandards Institution
under licence number 2003SK075. BSI publications can be obtained from BSI Customer Services. 389
Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL. Unitod Kingdom. Oet + 44 (0)20 8996 9001).
Email: cseNices@bsi-olobal,com.
Extracts from API Standards are reproducod courtesy of the American petroteum Institute. To purchase
these API public€tions, please contact clobal Engineering Oocumgnts on the Web at
htto://www.olobal.ihs.com.

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPHEITT "II

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 9/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

THINKTANK.
THINK MB ENGINEERING SERVICES.

Our areas of exDertise include:

mb
DESIGN ASSOCIATED GROUP ACTIVITIES
Engineefing Servic€s Ltd.
l\,,18 . RV Sizing and Selection . Welding & l,'letallurgical Services
Storage Tank Oivision . Storage Process Systems . llanufacturing of Tank Seals
Biggar Road, Cleland
l,4otherwell, [/L1 5PB
. Pipe Stress Analysis . NDT Testing
Tel: 01698 861332
. Finite Element Analysis . Inspection SeNices
Fax: 01698 860026 . Mechanical Equipment Selection . Provision of Skilled Labour
Email: [email protected] . Storage Tank Design
. Failure Investigation MECHANICAL
. Repair & Maintenance . Storage Tank Construction
. Storage Tank Repair & Maintenance

. LPG Sphere Construction & Repair

Turnkey Handling of Projects with
budgetary preparation & control

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 10/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Contents

l lntroduction 1 3.'1.2.1 Pan 1 20

3.1.2.2 Part2 20
2 History of storage tanks 3
3.2 Design data 20
2,1 lntroduction 4

2.2 Water storage 4 3.2.1 The BS Code 2654 20

3.2.1.1 Information to be specified by the purchaser 20
2.3 Oil storage 4
3.2.'1.2 Optional and/or alternative information
to be supplied by the purchaser 20
2.4 Storage needs of the petrochemical and
other industries 6 3.2.1.3 lnformation to be agreed between
the purchaser and the manufacturer 21
2.5 Gas storage o
3.2.2 The API Code 650 21

2.6 Refrigerated liquefied gas storage 6

3.2.3 The draft European Code prEN 14015 -1:2000 21
2.7 Above ground and in or below ground 3.2.3.1 Annex A (normative) Technical agreements 21
storage systems o
A.1 Information to be supplied by the purchaser
2.8 Riveted and welded structures A.2 Information agreed between the purchaser and the
contractor 25
2.9 History of the design and construction
regulations 7
3.3 The shell 26
2.9.1 American Standards 7
3.3.1 The design ofthe tank shell 26

2.9.2 British Standards 8 3.3.1.1 Failure around the circumference ofthe cylinder 26

2.9.3 The European Standards 9

3.3.1.2 Failure along the length of the cylinder 27
3.3.2 BS 2654 27
2.9.4 Other European national Standards 3.3.2.1 Principal factors determining shell thickness 28

2.9.5 Related Standards 13 3.3.2.2 Ptaclical application of thickness formula 28

2.9.6 The EElilUA Standard

'13 3.3.2.3 Exception to "one-foot" meihod 28
shell 29
2.9.7 Company Standards 3.3.2.4 Maximum and minimum thickness
2.9.7.1 The Shell Standards 13 3.3.2.5 Allowable steel stresses 29

2.9.7.2 The Chicago Bridge Engineering Standards 13 3.3.2.6 Maximum and minimum operating temperatures 30

2.9.7.3 The Exxon basic practices 13 3.3.2.7 Specific gravity or relative density of the stored
pro0ucl 30
2.9.8 Standards for other products 13
3.3.2.8 Pressure in the roof vapour space 30
2.10 References 14
3.3.2.9 Tank shell design illustration
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design 15 3.3.3 Axial stress in the shell 31

3.3.3.1 Derivation and assessment of axial stress

3.1 European tank design Codes 19
in a cylindrical shell
3.1.'1 European Standard prEN 14015-l : 2000 19 3.3.3.2 Allowable compressive stresses for shell
3.1.1.1 Pressure rating '19 courses 34
3.1.1.2 Temperature rating 19 3.3.3.3 Actual compressive stress 34

3.1.'1.3 Materials 19 3.3.3.4 Axial stress due to wind loading on the shell 34

3.1.1.4 Floors 19 3.3.4 Allowable compressive stress 35

3.1.1.5 Shells 19 3.4 Tank Floors 36

3.1.1.6 Yield stress 19 .4.1 Floor plate arrangements 36
3.1.1.7 Primary and secondary wind girders 19
36
3.4.2 British Code requirements
3.1.1.8 Roof-to-shell compression zone 19 3.4.2.1 Tanks up to and including 12.5 m diameter 36
3.1.1.9 Fixed and floating roof design 19 3.4.2.2 Tanks above l2.5 m diameter 37
39
3.1.1.10 Annexes to the Standard 19 3.4.3 American code requirements
3.1.2 The German storage tank Code DIN 41'19 20 3.4.3.1 Annular floor plates 39

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT IX

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 11/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

SN TECHNIGAZ

1,1

-
-/ .-\i

# *F
': -i:
:-, :tj
lft
.t- -
il lltl:
w t#ry

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 12/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contenls

3.4.3.2 Floors formed from lap-welded plates only 40 3.7.2.1 Effect of roof slope on cross-sectional area 81

3.7.3 Compression zones 81

3.4.3.3 Lapped floor plates, or annular plates
>12.5 mm thick 40 3.7.3.'l Compression zone area to BS Code 81

3.4.3.4 Annular plates >12.5 mm thick 40 3.7.3.2 compression zone area to API Code 82

3.4.3.5 Shellto-floor plate welds consideralion 3.7.3.3 BS and API Code differences of
for specific materials
- 40 allowable compressive stress a2
3.7.4 Providing the required compression area 82
3.4.3.6 Tank floors which require special consideration 40

3.4.3.7 Floor arrangement for tanks requiring 3.7.4.1 For the BS Code 82
optimum drainage 41 3.7.4.2 For the API Code 82
3.4.4 Environmental considerations 42 3.7.5 Establishing the compression area 83

3.5 Wind and vacuum stiffening 43 3.7.6 API limitations for the length of the roof
compression area 83
3.5.1 Primary wind girders 43
3.5.1.1 Refining the design technique 43 3.7.7 Calculating the compression zone area 83

3.5.1.2 Design example 3.7.8 Practical considerations 83

3.5.2 Secondary wind girders 45
45 3.7.9 lvlinimum curb angle requiremenb 83
3.5.2.'1 Equivalent shell method
3.7.9.1 Minimum curb angle sizes for fixed roof tanks 85
3.5.2.2 Number of girders required 45
3.5.2.3 Worked example 46 3.7.9.2 where
Cases do
requiremenb minimum curb angle
not aPPly
3.5.3 Vertical bending of the shell 47
3.7.9.3 Effect of internal pressure and tiank diameter
3.5.3.1 Example 47 on required comPression area 85
3.5.3.2 Shellto-bottom connection 47 3.7.'10 Design example 86
3.5.3.3 Rotation and stress analysis 48 3.7.10.1 Roof compression area 86

3.5.3.4 Beam analysis 48 3.7.10.2 Shell compression area 86

3.5.4 APt 650 51 3.7, 1 0.3 Rationalising the calculalion 86
3.5.4.1 General 51
3.7.10.4 Economy of design 86
3.5.4.2 Shell design stresses 51
3.7.'11 Positioning the centroid of area 88
3.5.4.3 Use of shell design formulae 53 3.7.'11.1 The BS Code 88

3.5.4.4 Shell plate thicknesses 53 3.7.11.2 The API Code Appendix F 88

3.5.4.5 Choosing BS or API shell thickness 3.7.11.3 Guidance on the positioning the
design methods 53 centroid of area 88
3.5.4.6 Worked examples 56 3.7.12 Cost-efiective design 88

3.6 The "variable design point" method 56 3.8 Frangible roofjoint, or weak roof-to-shelljoint 89
3.6.1 "Variable design point" method development 56 3-8.1 Introduction 89

3.6.2 The bottom shell course 57 3.8.2 Frangible roofjoint theory 89

3.6.3 The second course 60 3.8.3 The maximum compression zone area allowable 89

3,6.4 The upper courses 60 3.8.4 Other factors affecting the frangible roof connection 90

3.6.5 Detailed "variable design point" method calculation 63

3.8.4. 1 Roof slope 90

3.8.4.2 Size of weld at the roof plate-to-shell connection 90

3.6.6 Comparison of the thickness results 63
3.8.5 Formula as expressed in BS 2654 90
3.6.7 Shell stiffening
- wind girders 76 3.8.5.1 Additional requiremenb to BS 2654 90
3.6.7.1 Primary wind girders to API 650 76 3.8.6 Formula as expressed in API 650 90

3.6.7.2 Secondary wind girders to API 650 76 3.8.6.1 Additional requirements to API 650 90
3.8.7 Difference between Codes 91
3.6.7.3 Comparlson between British and American
secondary wind girder requiremenb 78
3.8.8 Conflict of design interests 91

3.7 Compression area for fixed roof tanks 80 3.8.8.1 "Service" and "Emergency" design condilions 91

3.8.9 Examples offrangible and non-frangible roofjoinb 91

3.7.1 Effect of internal pressure 80 3.8.9.'l Tank designed for an operating pressure
3.7.2 Derivation of the required compression zone area 81 of 7.5 mbar 91

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XI

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 13/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 14/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contents

3.8.9.2 Tank designed for an operating pressure 4.1.1.4 Determination of loads on the nozzle 106
of 20 mbar 91 4.1.2 The assessment of nozzle loadings 106
3.8.10 Tank anchorage a means to frangibility 92 4.1.2.1 Determination of allowable loads accordino
- to the API 650 approach 106
3.8.10.1 Ensuring a frangible roof connection
usrng ancnorage 92
4.1.2.2 Construction of the nomograms 107
3.8.'l 0.2 Determining anchorage requiremenb 92
4.1.2.3 Determination of allowable loads 108
3.8.10.3 Worked example 92 4.1.3 Concluding comments 108

3.8.10.4 Further design check 93 4.1.4 Method of analysis example 108

3.8.1 0.5 Other anchorage considerations 93 4.1.4.1 The problem 108
3.8.11 API 650 Code anchor requirements 93
- 4.1.4.2 The solution 109
3.8.11.1 Nlinimum bolt diameter 93
The stiffness coefficients: 109
3.8.11.2 Spacing of anchors 94
Unrestrained shell deflection and rotation at the nozzle
3-8.11.3 Allowable stresses in anchors 94 centreline 109
3.8.12 Further guidance on frangible roofs 94 4.1.5 Assessment of the nozzle loading example 109
3.8.12.1 EEMUA 94 4.1.5.1 Determination of the non-dimensional quantitiesll0

3.9 Tank anchorage further considerations 94 4.1.5.2 Construction of the load nomograms 110
-
3.9.1 Wind loading and internal service pressure 94 5 The design of tank roofs - fixed 113
3,9.2 Anchorage attachment 94 5.1 The design of tank roofs 114

3.9.3 Spacing of anchors 94 5.1.1 Basic types 114

3.9.4 Worked example 94 5.1.2 Differences between fixed and floating roofs '114
3.9.4.1 Completion of tank design 95
5.2 Fixed roofs 114
3.9.4.2 Shell wind girder calculation 95
5.2.1 Design basis 114
3.9.4.3 Maximum unstiffened height of the shell 95
5.2.1.1 Design loadings 114
3.9.4.4 Section size for the secondary wind girder 95 '115
5.2.1.2 Design methods
3.9.4.5 Shell-to-roof compression zone 95 5.2.1.3 Code requirements '115

3.9.4.6 Participating roof and shell plate area 96

3.9.4.7 Roof plating 96 5.3 Various forms of fixed roofs 116

5,4 Roofs with no supporting structure 116
3.9.4.8 Roof structure 97
5.4.'1 Cone roofs 116
3.9.4.9 Anchorage calculation 97
5.4.1.6 Folded plate type cone roof '118
3.9.4.'10 Overturning moment due to wind action only 97
5.4.2 Dome roofs 122
3.9.4.11 Overturning moment due to wind action 5.4.2.1 Simple dome 122
while in service 97
5.4.2.2 Umbrella dome 122
3.9.4.12 Design of the anchorage 98
5.4.2.3 British Code Design requiremenb
3.9.4.13 Check for frangibility 99 -
5.4.2.4 American Code Design requirements 122
3.9,4.14 Wind loading to API 650 99 -
5.5 Roofs with supporting structures, supported

3.10 Tanks produced in stainless steel materials 99 from the tank shell 123
5.5.1 Cone roofs
3.11 Semi-buried tanks for the storage of aviation fuel
5.5.1.1 Radial rafter type 123
100
5.5.1.2 Design example 123
3.12 References 101
5.5.1.3 Central crown ring 127
4 Nozzle design and the effect of 5.5.2 Dome roofs 136
applied loading 103 5.5.2.1 Radial rafter type 136

4.1 Nozzle design 'lo4 5.5.3 Other types 't41

5.5.3.1 Geodesic dome roofs 142
4.'1.1 The scope of the nozzles analysed 104
4.1.1 .1 The loading on the nozzle 105 5.6 Column-supported roofs 142

4. 1.1 .2 Definition of stiffness coefiicients 105 5.6.1 Column selection

4.1.'1.3 Shell deflection and rotation 106 5.7 References 1.1i

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPIIENT X

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 15/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

NI]<KtSct
N|KKISO pumps provide the retiability that ensures
no loss productivity
Many unique features from innovative designs

- Column
)/---",''''
, Vibration S€nsor

ilotor Shatt
Upper Ball Bearing

Balance Drum

lmpellEr
Foot Valve
Adaptor

Inducar

Foot Val ve

NIKKISO CO., LTD

CRYOGENIC PUMP DIVISION
www.nikkiso.co.lp

NtKKISO CRYO lNC.,

[email protected]

NIKKISO CRYO EUROPE

[email protected]

Duiyr 400m3/hr
2090 M Head
'1
150 kW
6600 VoJt
oto
Suction Pot Mounteo Nl
KKIScl
"Send Out Pump" festing lnstallation

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 16/296
 Contents
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

'183
6 The design of tank roofs - floating 153 6.5.14 Pontoon manholes

6.1 Introduction '154 6.5.1 5 Sample/dip hatch 183

6.5.16 Foam dam '183

6.2 The principal of the floating roof 154

6.3 External floating roofs 't54 6.5.1 7 Electrical continuity 183

6.3.1 Types of external floating roof 155 7 Tank fittings and ancillary equipment
6.3.1.1 Single-deck pontoon type '155 for ambient temperature tanks 185
155
6.3.1.2 Double-deck type 7.1 Tank nozzles 187
6.3.2 Other types of floating roof 155
tcc
7 nozzles
.1.1 BS 2654 requiremenis for shell 187
6.3.2.1 BIPM roof
7.1.1.1 Nozzles 80 mm outside diameter and above 187
6.3.2.2 Buoy roof 156
7.1.1.2 Flush type clean-out doors 188
6.3.3 Floating roof design 156
A cautionary tale '188
6.4 Internal floating roofs 156
7.1.'1.3 Nozzles less than B0 mm outside diameter 190
6.4.1 Types of internal floating roofs 173 7.1.2 API650 requirements for shell nozzles 190
6.4.'1.1 Pan roof 173
7.1 .3 European Code requirements for shell nozzles 190
6.4.1.2 Honeycomb roof 173
7.2 Spacing of welds around connections 190
6.4.1.3 Pontoon and skin roof 173

6.5 External floating roof appurtenances 174 7.2.1 BS 2654 requirements 190
7 .2.2 API 650 requirements 192
6.5.1 Roof support legs 174
7.2.3 Flush type clean-out doors 192
6.5.2 Guide pole 175
7.2.4 European Code requiremenb 192
6.5.3 Roof seals 176
6.5.3.'1 l\4echanical seals 176 7.3 Shell manholes 192

6.5.3.2 Liquidjilled fabric seal 176 7.3.1 BS 2654 requirernents 192

6.5.3.3 Resilient foam-filled seal 176
7.3.2 API 650 fequirements 192
6.5.3.4 Compression plate type seals 177
7.3.3 Eutopea^ Code prEN 14015'eqLrirenenb 192
6.5.4 Rim vents 178

6.5.5 Drain plugs 178 7.4 Roof nozzles '192

7.4.1 BS 2654 requirements 192
6.5.6 Fire fighting 178
6.5.6.1 Rim fire detection 178 7.4.2 API 650 requirements 193
6.5.7 Roof drains '179
7.4.3 European Code prEN '14015 requiremenb 193
6.5.7.1 A(iculated piping system 179
7.5 Roof manholes 193
6.5.7.2 Armoured flexible hose 179
7.5.1 BS 2654 requirements 193
6.5.7.3 Helical flexible hose 179
6.5.7.4 Drain design Codes 180 7.5.2 API 650 requirements 193

API Code 180 7.5.3 European Code prEN '14015 requiremenb 193

BS Code 180 7.6 Floor sumps 193

European Code 180
7.6.1 BS 2654 requirements 193
6.5.7.5 "The man who drained the floating roofs" 180
7.6.2 API 650 requirements 194
A cautionary tale: 180
- 7.6.3 European Code prEN '14015 requiremenb 194
6.5.8 Syphon drajns 180

6.5.9 Emergency drains 181 7.7 Contents measuring systems 194

6.5. 10 Bleeder vents '1 7.7.1 Tank dipping 194

81

6.5.'1'l The gaugers platform

7.7.2 Level indicators 195
142
7 .7.2.1 Float, board and iarget system 195
6.5. 12 Rolling ladder 182
7.7.2.2 Automatic tank gauge 195
6.5.13 Deck manholes '183 7.7.3 Temperature measurement 195

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XV

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 17/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

A MEMBER OF THE HSB GROUP

HSB INSPEcTIoN QUALITY LTD

NOTIFIED BODY EC NUMBER 0878

NOTIFIED BODY UNDER THE EUROPEAN PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE

**APPROVED FOR ALL CONFORMITY ASSESSMENT MODULES**
WE PROVIDE A COMPREHENSIVE RANGE OF INSPECTION AND ASSOCIATED SERVICES
.Design assessments
Pre and post commissioning inspections
. Quality assurance consultancy
. Audils
. Road tankers and tank container ceriification
. An approved body authofised by DETR and the United Slates Depadment of Trade
. Expediting
. welding certification services
SERVICES THROUGH GROUP COMPANIES
. Full range of engineering insurance products
. In-serviceengineeringinspections
. Environmental protection
. . Risk assessments
ASME services
*"THE COMPLETE ENGINEERING PARTNERSHIP**

HSB Inspection Quality Ltd, Cairo House, Greenacres Road, Waterhead, Oldham OL4 3JA
e-mail [email protected] Fax 0161 621 5680
-
FOR DETAILS OF HSB lQ's FULL RANGE OF COST EFFECTIVE SERVICES Telephone 0161 621 5670
-

mottlerrrell control

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 18/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contents

7.7.4 High accuracy servo tank gauge 195 9.1 Rectangular tanks 216
7.7.5 High accuracy radar tank gauge 196 9.2 Spherical tanks zlo
7.8 Tank venting 196 9.3 Horizontal vessels 217
7.8.1 Free vents 196 9.4 Bolted cylindrical tanks 2'tg
7.8.2 Pressure and vacuum (P & V) valves . 197 9.5 Factory-manufactured tanks made from
non-metallic materials 2't8
7.8.3 Emergency vents 197

7.8.4 Flame Arrestor 197 9.6 References 2',t8

7.9 Tank access 198

{0 Material selection criteria for ambient
temperature tanks 219
7.9.1 Spiral staircase 198
10.1 General 220
7.9.2 Radial staircase 198
1 0.2 Brittle fracture considerations 220
7.9.3 Horizontal platforms 199
10.3 The design metal temperature 221
7.9.4 Vertical ladders 199
'1
0.3.'t Minimum temperatures ,t1
7.10 Fire protection systems 200
1 0.3,2 l\ilaximum temperatures 222
7.'10.1 Foam systems 200
10.4 The requirements of the tank design Codes 222
7.10.1.1 Base injection 200
7.10.1.2 Top foam pourers 201 10.4.1 API 650 requirements 222

7.10.1.3 Rimseal foam pourers 201 10.4.2 BS 2654 requiremenb 225

7.10.1.4 Foam cannons 202 10.4.3 prEN 14015 requiremenb 226
7.11 Water cooling systems 203 10.5 References 229
7.11.1 Special case - Floating rooftanks 203
11 Fabrication considerations for ambient
7.11.2 Tank cooling methods 203 temperature tanks 231
7.11.2.1 Water spray and deluge sprinkler systems
11.1 Material reception 232
7.'11.2.2 Fixed and trailer-mounted water cannons 204
11-2 Stainless steel materials 232
8 Tank venting of ambient 11.3 Plate thickness tolerances 232
temperature tanks 205
11.4 Plate fabrication 232
8.1 Introduction 206
11.5 Roof structures 234
8.2 The tank design Code requirements 206
'f1.6 Tank appurtenances 234
8.2.1 APt 650 206
11.7 Surface protection for plates and sections 234
8.2.2 BS 2654 206
11.8 Marking 234
8.2.3 prEN 14015 207
8.2.3.1 Evaluation of the venting requiremenb 12 Erection considerations for ambient
from prEN 14015 207 temperature tanks 235
Liquid movement inbreathing 208 12.1 The foundation 236
8.2.4 APt 2000 209
12.1.1 Foundation tolerances 236
8.2.4.'1 The evaluation ofthe venting requiremenb
of API 2000 209 12.1.1.1 BS 2654 236
8.2.4.2 Means of venting 212 12.1.1.2 APt 650 236
8.2.4.3 Pressure limitations 212 12.1.13 fhe European Code prEN 14015 - 'l 236
8.2.4.4 Relief valve installation 12.2 Building a tank 236
8.3 Typical relief valve equipment 212 12.2.'1 Laying the floor

8.4 References 213 12.2.2 Erecting the shell by the traditional method 237

other types cylindrical tanks and

9 Non-vertical 215
12.2.2 foletances
12.2.2. 1 Radius tolerance
238
238

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT XVII

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 19/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

THE CONCRETE SOLUTION

reduced site programme and management
cost from a fast track erection
o factory controlled quality
a reduced design time and cost
o reduced life time cost to your client
o maintenance free solution
o optional wall height from 2m to 12 m
(increments of 0.1m)

optional diameters from 4.5m to 50m +

I I Please contact us for further information:

I I A Consutt - UK Sates Office

tl P.O. Box 4, Tuxford, Newark, Notts NG22 OeF
Tel:.01777 872900 Fax: O17i7 971122
-- TANK e.mail: [email protected] www.aconsutt.co.uk
AQUA.

HMT
Rubboglos Ltd HMT Corporote Office
2o Newmon Rood,
II\.JI 23832 Tomboll Porkwoy

IITI I
Bromley, BRl 1RJ, Englond Tomboll, TX 77375, U.5.A
Tef: +44 (O)2O 8464 7888 Tel: +'l 281 4Ol 7300
Fox; +44 (Ol2O 8464 7788 Fox: +1 281 351 8589
"INNOVATIYE SOLUTIONS TO T.{\K i\IAINTENANCE"

HMT Innovotive Solutions for your Storoge Tonk needs

O Turnkey Tonk Mointenonce Soluiions O Tonk/Flooting Roo{ Designs & Supply
O Inspec+ion & Engines.;6g gsrv;6.t O Internol Flooting Roofs (Pontoon/Full Contoct)
O Primory & Secondory Seol Systems O Flooting Suctions

O Accessory Seo ling Options O Retrofit oll Seol Poris ond Fobrrcs
O Roof Droin Systems (Pivot Moster@) o Vorious unique & Stondord Volves
a Fire Fighting Systerrs (Pivo'Moster@) ond Ancillories
O Cothodic Proteclion o 'Sump Mosler' ond 'Spill Check"'
O lnsu lolion o Secondory Conloinmenl

Quolity Monogement System Approved to: l5O 9001: 2000

Remember moke HMT your firsf coll for Tonk Products qnd Solulions
For further informolion e-moil us ol
[email protected]
or visil our website: www.hmttonk.com

XVIII STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 20/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

12.2.2.2 Peaking and banding 238 13.5 Site investigations 251

1 2.2.2.3 P late misali gnment 239 13.6 Soil improvement 252
12.3 Floating roofs 239
13.7 Settlement in service 252
12.4 Wind damage 239
13.8 Foundation types 253
12.4.'1 Safety measures against wind damage 240
13.9 Leak detection and prevention of
12.5 Shell welding sequence 240 ground contamination 254

12.6 Joints in wind girders 241 13.10 A cautionary tale 255

12.7 The roof structure 241 13.11 References 256
12.7.1 Roof plating 242
14 Layout of ambient temperature
12.7.2 Welding sequence 242 tank installations 257
12.8 Erecting the shell by the jacking method 242 14.1 lntroduction 258

12.9 Other forms of construction 243 14.2 Above ground tanks 258
1 2.9. 1 Column-supported roofs 243 '14,3 Fire walls 259
12.9.2 P te-fabticated roof section 243 14.4 Separation distances for small tanks 259

12.9.3 Air lifting a roof into position 243 14.5 Minimum separation distances for groups of
'12.9.4 Floating roofs 244
small tanks 259

12.10lnspection and testing the tank 246

14.6 Separation distances for large tanks 259
14.6 Separation from other dangerous substances260
12. 10.1 Radiographic inspection 246
12.10.1.1 BS 2654 246 14.8 Storage of flammable liquids in buildings 260
Shelljoints 246
Annular floor plate joints 246 14.9 Underground tanks 260
12.10.1.2 APt 650 246 14.10 Further guidance 260
Shelljoints 246
Annular floor plale joints 246 14.11 References 26'l

12.10.1.3 prEN 14015 - 1

246 15 The seismic design of ambient
Shelljoints 246
temperature storage tanks 263
Annular floor plate joints 246
12.10.2 Floor plate joint testing 246 15.1 lntroduction 264

1 2.1 0.3 Shell-to-bottom joint testing 247 15,2 The API 650 approach 264
12.10.4 Fixed roof plate joint testing 247 15.2,1 The basic seismic data 264
'12.10.5 Floating roof testing 247 15-2.2 The behaviour of the product liquid 269

12.10.6 Testing of shell nozzles and apertures 248 15.2.3 The overturning moment 270
'| 2.10,7 Hydrostatic tank testing 248 15.2.4 Resistance to overturning 271

13 Foundations for ambient 1 5.2.5 Shell compression 271

temperature storage tanks 249 '15.2.5.1 Unanchored tanks 271
13.1 Introduction 250 15.2.5.2 Anchored tanks 272
13.2 Design loadings 250 1 5.2.6 A lowable longitudinal compressive stress 273

13.3 Foundation profiles 250 15.2.7 Slosh height and freeboard considerations 273

1 3.4 As-constructed foundation tolerances 250 15.2.8 Other considerations arising from seismic
loadings 273
13.4,1 API 650 requirements 250
15.3 The BS 2654 approach
13.4.2 BS 2654 requirements 251
15.4 The prEN 14015 approach 274
13.4.3 prEN 14015 requirements 251
15,5 References 274

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XIX

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 21/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

From the start in 1944, Rodoverken AB has

grown into northern Europe's largest design and
assembly contractor for pressure vessels, LNG
tanks, atmospheric tanks, silos, misc. towers and
hot water accumulator tanks.

Rodoverken AB's unique working method

(Spiral jacking), from
(or dismantled) enables tanks
a fixed to be assembled
working station at
ground level. This method offers an extraordinary
safe, economic and controlled worksite/product.

Rodoverken AB can also offer a comprehensive

range of piping prefabrication and erection
services.

RODOVERKEN AB
P.O. Box 7
SE-444 21 Stenungsund
Sweden

Tel: +46 (0)303-897 00

Fax: +46 (0)303-897 97

Hot r:ater accunulator

[email protected] Diametur 2a tn Height 67.5 n

XX STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 22/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

16 Operation of ambient temperature 16.7 Heated storage l6J

tanks 275 16.8 Tank and bund drainage 283
16.1 Tank type 277 16.8.1 Tank drainage 2.:
16.'1.'1 Fixed roof tanks 277
16.8.2 Bund drainage 2a?
16.1.1.1 Fixed roof tanks with internalfloating covers 277
16.'1.2 Floating roof tanks 277 16.9 Tank maintenance 2U
1 6.9.1 Permilto-work systems 284
16.2 Product identification 277
16.3 Operation oftanks 16.9.2 Notice of issue of a permit 284
277
16.3.1 Filling rates 277 16.9.3 Working in tanks 284
'16.9.4 Work on equipment in operation
16.3.2 Prevention of overfilling 278 284
16.3.2.1 Procedures 278 16.10 Personnel and equipment requirements 284
16.3.2.2 Communication 278 16.11 Maintenance 285
16.3.2.3 Tank gauging and sampling 278 '16.11.1 lsolation 285
16.3.2.4 Internal floating covers 278
'16.1'1.2 Entry to tanks 285
16.3.2.5 l\4ixing of products 278

'16.3.2.6 Slops
tanks 278 16.11.3 Gas-freeing 285
'16.3.2.7 Rundown temperatures 278 16.12 Tank cleaning 285

16.4 The operation offixed roof tanks 278 16.12.1 Tanks which contain, or have contained
leaded products 285
'6.4.'1 Fixed roof tanks with internalfloating covers 279
16.13 Tank inspection 286
'6.4.2 Tank corrosion 279
16.14 Operational malfunctions 287
'6.4.3 Hazardous atmospheres 279
16.15 Further guidance 287
16.5 The operation of floating roof tanks 279
17 Low temperature storage tanks 289
-6.5.1 Rooftype 279
'17.1 The low temperature gases 291
16.5.2 Pontoons 279
17.2 General 291
16.5.3 Tilting roof 279
17.3 Historical background 292
16.5.4 lvlixers 279 '17.4 Tank sizing considerations 294
16.5.5 Access to the floating roof 279
17.5 Storage systems and containment
16.5.6 Venting 279 categories 295

16.5.7 Managing leg supports 28O

17.6 Single containment systems 297

16.5.8 Static electricity control 17"7 Double containment systems 298

280

16.5.9 Foam dams

17.8 Full containment systems 300
280

seals
16.5.10 Floating roof 17.9 Membrane tanks JVZ
28O
16.5.10.1 Vapour saving 280 '17.9.1 Development history 303
16.5.10.2 Vapour loss 281 17.9.2 Detailed description of the land-based
16.5.11 Effects of roof type on drainage 282 memDrane syslem 304
'17.9.2.1 The metallic membrane 304
16.5.12 Overflow drains 282
17.9.2.2 The insulation system 306
16.5.13 Collection sump details 292 17.9.2.3 The outer tank 306
16.5.14 Roof drain plug 2A2 17.9.3 Comparison ofabove ground membrane tanks
and conveniional tanks 306
16.6 Static electricity ZB2
'17.9.4 The lined mined rock cavern initiative for

16.6.1 Precautions to minimise or avoid static charges 282 future LNG storage 307
16.6.2 Earthing and bonding 283 17.10 Spherical tanks 308

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT XXI

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 23/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

rrrsflqrE\I FLUID TRANSFER D IVISION

Storag€ Tank
Equpment

tt-wowlEEil\t
,,PERT.O\T
S 1lone Industfies LLC
2501 Constant Comme.t Pace
Louisville, Kenrucky, 40299 llSA
Tel,: +l 502266 8767 Fax +l 502 266 5873

ww.sylone.com [email protected]
ErtlCO WHEATON GmbH
EnrcoslraBe 2 4 . 35274 Kirchha n Germany
Phone:+4964 22 84 0 Far:+49M2251Oa
vW €mcowhealo. de . [email protected] por\d
m^[\n4 A
Syltone France S A ' 'l
I 49 avenue Paul Va ant-Codurier, BP 50 OI drt\\uvurtvu
94251 Ge.ll y c6dex . F€nce
Phone +33i 4612414l Fdr+331461241 59
sles@sy tonefrance 1r

Setting the Standard for Storage Tank

Equipment
Fort Vale offer PED compliant
equipment across the full range of
relief valves and manlids.
'CE' Marked Relief Valves
. 1" Minnows
. 1 /2" & 2' Uniacts
, 1//' & 2/2" Twinacts
. 2%" Suoer Maxis

. 4" ADollo
Inspection Hatches & Manlids

. In/Out Oval (500 x 400mm)

XXII STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 24/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contents

'| 7.1 1 Concrete/concrete tanks 309 18.4.1.2 Nonliquid containing metallic tanks 340
'18.4.2 The API 620 Appendix Q approach 341
17.11.1 History of cryogenic concrete tanks 309
18.4.2.1 Liquid containing metallic tanks 341
17.11.2 Details of concrete/concrete tanks 309 '18.4.2.2 Non-liquid containing metallic tanks 341
17.11 .3 Arguments for and against concrete/ 18.4.3 The BS 7777 approach 341
concrete tanks 310 18.4.3.1 Liquid containing metallic tanks 341

17.12 In-ground tanks 3r0 18.4.3.2 Non-liquid containing metallic tanks 341
18.4.4 The prEN '14620 approach 341
17.12.1 ln-ground membrane tanks 310
18.5 Compression areas 342
17.12.2 Cave'n siorage systems 311
18.5.1 The API 620 approach (Appendices R and Q) 342
17.12.3 Frozen gtound systems 311
18.5.2 The BS 7777 approach 344
17.13 Novel systems 312
18.5.3 The prEN 14620 approach 344
18 The design of low temperature tanks 315
18.6 Roof sheeting 345
18.1 General 317
18.6.1 The API 620 approach (Appendices R and Q)
18.2 Tank capacity 317
18.6.2 The BS 7777 approach 345
18.3 Shell design 318
18.6.3 The prEN 14620 approach 346
18.3.1 The API 620 Appendix R approach 318
18.3.1.'1 Hoop tension 18.7 Roof frameworks 346
metallic tanks - liquid containing 319
18.7.1 The API 620 approach (Appendices R and Q) 347
1 8.3.1.2 Non-liquid containing tanks 319
18.7 .2 f he BS 7777 apToach 347
'1
8.3.1.3 Axial compression 319
18.7.3 The prEN 14620 approach 350
18.3.1.4 Wind and vacuum stiffening 324
'18.3.'1.5 Shell stiffening for external insulation loadings 328
'| 8.8 Tank anchorage 350
18.3.2 The API 620 Appendix Q approach 331 18.8.1 The requirements of API 620 Appendix R 350
'18.3.2.1 Hoop tension liquid containing tanks '18.8.1.1 Liquid containing metallic tanks 350
-
1 8.3.2.2 Nonliquid containing tanks 334 18.8.1.2 Non- iquld containing metallic tanks 351

1
8.3.2.3 Axial compression 334 18.8.2 The fequirements of API 620 Appendix Q 35'1
18.8.2.1 Liquid coniaining tanks 351
18.3.2.4 Wind and vacuum stiffening 334
'18.3.2.5 Shell stiffening for external insulation loadings 334 18.8.2.2 Non-liquid containing tanks 351
18.8.3 The BS 7777 requirements 351
18.3.3 The BS 7777 approach 334
'18.3.3.1 Hoop iension 18.8.4 The prEN 14620 approach
metallic tanks - liquid containing 352

18.9 Tank fittings 352

18.3.3.2 Nonliquid containing metallic tanks 335
18.9.1 The requirements ofAPl 620 355
'1
8.3.3.3 Axial compression 335
18.9.1.1 General requirements of API 620 section 5 355
18.3.3.4 Wind and vacuum stiffening 336
18.9.1.2 The particular requirements of
18.3.3.5 Shell stiffening for external insulation API 620 Appendix R 358
loadings 336 18.9.1.3 The particular requirements of
18.3.3.6 Addendum to BS 7777 on partial height API 620 Appendix Q 358
hydrostatic testing 336
18.9.1.4 The design of heat breaks 358
18.3.4 The prEN 14620 approach 337
18.9.2 The requirements of BS 7777 358
18.3.4.1 Hoop tension liquid containing
metallic tanks - 338 18.9.2.1 Outer contarner mountings 358

1 8.3.4.2 Nonliquid containing tanks 338 18.9.2.2 Inner tank and ouier liquid containing
tank mountings 358
18.3.4.3 Wind and vacuum stiffening 338
18.9.2.3 Connecting pipework between inner and outer
'18.3.4.4 Shell stiffening for external insulation loadings 338 tank connections 359
18.9.3 The prEN 14620 approach 360
18.4 Bottom and annular design JJ6
18.10 Suspended decks
18.4.1 The API 620 Appendix R approach 338
18.4.1.'l Liquid containing metallic tanks 338 18.10.'1 The requirements ofAPl 620

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XX

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 25/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

EBARA CRYODYNAMICS
THE PUMPING SOLUTION FOR LIQUEFIED CASES

tso 9001 - 1987

(ANS|/ASaC OS1 - 1987) SET OF INTANK
REGISTERED
AUAL]TY SYSTEM DISPATCH

EUROPE OFFICE EBARA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION ASIAN OFFIC€ EBARA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
CRYODYNAI\4ICS DIVISION CRYODYNAI\,1ICS DIVISION
THE PAVILIONS. 1 WESTON ROAD. KILN LANE NISSAY AROI\4A SQUARE. 5-37-1 KAI\,,IATA
EPSOIVI, SURREY KT17 lJG U.K. OHTA.KU, TOKYO 144-8721 JAPAN
fEL +44(0)1372 739666 FAX: +44(0)1372 748290 TEL: +81(3)5714 6638 FAX: +81(3)5714 6892

EBARA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

CRYODYNAMICS DIVISION
350 SALOIVION CIRCLE. SPARKS, NEVADA 89434, USA
TEL: +1(775) 356 2796 FAX: +1(775) 356 2884
wwwebaracryo.com

.\ ) MIxntG
(
The Key to Effi
Mixing Operati
r- soruilors
The CutlassrM Mixer incorporating the LancerrM impeller.
. PredictableBlendingPerformance
. Maximisation of Storage Capacity
o Minimised Environmental Risk

.. Reduced Operating Costs

Enhanced Tank Life
. ATEX Compliant
Fixed & Variable Angle for
. Product Blending & Homogenisation.
. Bottom Sludge & Water Control,
. TemperatureUniformity
Mixing Solutions Ltd, Venture House, Bone Lane, Newbury, England, RG145SH
Tel +44 1635 275300 Fax +44 1635 275375 e-mail [email protected] http://w vw.mixingsolutions.com/cutlass-ste/

XXIV STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 26/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contents

7777
'8.10.2 The requirements of BS 361 19.2.6.3 Polyurethane foam 387

'8.10.3 The prEN 14620 approach 362 1 9.2.6.4 Lightweight concrete 387
9.2.6.5 Composite systems 387
18.11 Secondary bottoms
'l
362
'19.2.6.6 Blast furnace slag 387
18-12 Bottom corner protection systems 362
19.2.7 Base insulation materials - peripheral area 387
18.13 Outer tank concrete wall and bottom liners 363 19.3 Wall insulation 388
18.14 Connected pipework 364
19.3.'l General 388
18.15 Access arrangements 365
1 9.3.2 General requirements 388
18.16 Spillage collection systems 365 '19.3.2.1 Insulation for the walls of single-walled
metallic tanks 388
18.17 Reinforced and prestressed concrete
'19.3.2.2 Rigid insulation for the walls of
component design 367
double-walled bnks 388
18.17.1 ceneral 367 Applied to the outer surface of the inner wall 388
'18.17.2 Tank bases 367 19.3.2.3 Loose fill insulation systems 388
19.3.3 Design Code requirements 389
18.17.3 Tank walls 368
18.'17.3.1 Above ground tanks 368 19.3.4 Wall insulation materials 389
Prestressed concrete wall wire wound type 371 19.3.4.1 Polyurethane foam 389

- earth embankment
Reinforced concrete wall with 372 19.3.4.2 PVC foam 389
7.3.2 In-ground tanks
'1
8.1 372
19.3.4.3 Other plastic foam materials 389
'18.17.4 Bottom corner details 372
19.3.4.4 Cellular glass 389
18.17.5 The top corner details 373
19.3.4.5 Mineral wool 390
18.'17.6 Tank roofs 374 '19.3.4.6 Perlite loose fill insulation svstFm< 390
18.'l8 References 374 19.4 Roof insulation 352
19 Insulation systems for low temperature 19.4.'1 Genefal 392
tanks 377
19.4.2 External rool insulation 392
19.1 General 379
'19.4.3 Internal suspended deck insulation 393
19.1.1 Basic requirements of the jnsulation system 379
19.5 Insulation of heat breaks and fittings 393
'1
9. 1.2 Insulation categories 379
19.5.1 General 393
1 9.1.3 Installation considerations 379
'19.5.2 Heat breaks for roof connections 393
19.1.4 Basic design and material requiremenb 379
19.5.3 Heat breaks for tank sidewall connections 394
19. 1.5 Design Code requiremenb 380
19.5.4 Heat breaks for tank bottom connections 395
19.2 Base insulation 380
19.6 Internal pipework insulation 395
19.2.1 General 380
19.7 External pipework insulation 395
19.2.2 The central area 380
19.8 Heat leak calculations 396
19.2.3 The peripheral area 381
19.8.1 Basic calculation methods 396
19.2.4 Design methods 381
1 9.8.2 Thermal conductivity values 396
19.2,4.1 lnner area 381
'19.8.3 The influence ofdifferent interstitial gases 396
1 9.2.4.2 P etipherul atea 38'l
19.2.5 Detailed design Code requiremenb 384 19.8.4 Calculation of the hot face temperature 399
1 9.2.5.1 EEI\.4UA 147 requirements 344
19.8.5 Overall heat leak 399
19.2.5.2 BS 7777 requirements 384
19.9 Heat leak testing 400
19.2.5.3 Draft of new Euronorm prEN 14620 384
'19.2.6 Base insulation materials central area '19.10 The use of the infrared camera
- 384 400

19.2.6.1 Cellular glass 384 19.11 Insulation problems from the past and
19.2.6.2 PVC foam 387 their lessons 400

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT XXV

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 27/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

ilr
s
t
I for all applications
SEETRU

Cookson
Premier
below ground
and of Zinn
manufacturers
tanks
storage
above and
and yessels

FuelBank - bunded storage systems,

rectangular or cylindrical units from
5,000 to 80,000 lit.es, complete with
cablnet, valves, pumps and gauges.

LPG wssels - from 4 o 30 tonnes

capacity, supplied with all necessary
v'alving.

Stainless steel tants and vessels - ior

ildustrial, chemical, {ood and

i"r5'"lx.a..1lg
Dhamaceutlcal use, From o.Ato 200

ISO framed tank - in mild and stainless

steel, for fuel. oils. chemicals and more.

Cookson and Zinn (PTL) Limked

i1'Hil;:ii1'5fJ'^ tA-
.,.,;--nrnaon
r,, ,nrozir a
Yt
-
--
) i,.,",,"i d* ..*,

XXVI STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 28/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment Contents

19.'l'1.1 Base insulation failure 400 21.3 Refrigerated storage of liquid ammonia 428

19.'l'1.2 External vapour sealing 409 21.3.1 Conventional systems 428

19.11.3 Bottom corners 409 21.3.2 An alternative storage system 430

19.11.4 Perlite settlement 409 21.3.3 Chemical Industries Association guidance

19.12 References 409 21.3.4 Recent developmenb 432

20 Ancillary equipment for low 21.3.5 Insulaiion systems

temperature tanks 411
21.4 Inspection and repair of liquid ammonia
20.1 General 412 storage systems 433

20.2 In-tank pumps and their handling equipment 412 21.5 Incidents involving liquid ammonia tanks 434

20.2.1 In-tank pumps 412 21.6 References 434

20.2.2 In-tank pump removal system 414 22 Material selection criteria for low
20.2.3 Pump columns 414
temperature tanks 437
22.'l General 438
20.3 Filling columns 4't5
22.2 The requirements of API 620 438
20.4 Base heating systems 4't5
20.5 Tank cool-down arrangements 417 22.2.1 API620 Appendix R 438
22.2.1 .1 Matetials for parts subjected to
20.6 Internal shut-off valves 4't7 ambient temperatures 438

20.7 Venting systems 419 22.2.1 .2 Maletials for parts subjected to

low temperatures 441
20.8 Fire protection systems 420 22.2.2 API620 Appendix Q 441
20.8.1 Detection systems 421 22.2.2.1 Matetials for parts subjected to
ambient temperatures 441
20.8.2 Safety systems
22.2.2.2 Matetials for parts subjected to
20.8.2.1 Fire water systems low temperatures 442
20.8.2.2 Foam systems
22.3 The requirements of BS 7777 i Part 2 443
20.8.2.3 Dry powder systems
422 22.3.1 Materials for parts subjected to
20.8.2.4 Local protection of vulnerable equipment 422 .dhia^i iAm^Ar.t' rrac 443
20.9 Instrumentation 422 22.3.2 Materials lot parts subjected to
low temperalures 443
20.9.1 Level measurement 422
22.4 The requirements of BS 7777 : Part 4 446
20.9.2 Pressure measurement 423
22.4.1 Parts subject to ambient temperatures 446
20.9.3 Temperature measurement 423
22.4.2 Pafts subjected to low temperatures 446
20.9.4 Level temperature density (LTD) measurement 423
22.5 The requirements of PD 7777 : 2000 446
20.9.5 Leak detection 423
22.6 The requirements of prEN 14620 446
20.9.6 lnternal cameras 423
22.6.'1 l\4aterials for parts subject to
20.10 Civil monitoring systems 424 ambient temperatures 448
21 Ammonia storage - a special case 425 22.6.2 Materials for parts subject to
21.1 General 426
low temperatures 448

22.7 An example of a material selection method

21,2 What makes ammonia storage speclal? 426 from the past 450
21.2.1 Flammability 426
22.8 References 450
21 .2.2 foxicity 426
23 Erection considerations for
21.2.3 Latent heat 427 low temperature tanks 451

21.2.4 Electrical conductivity 427 23.1 General 452

21.2.5 Stress corrosion cracking (SCC) 427 23.2 Air raising of tank roofs 452

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XXV

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 29/296
 fiEi::t' _":l
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Worklng tor tha lntarnatlonal oi, & Gas inductry

J
J{J4 rti\I,'J I c, c
#JJ$
L**"t

M.w.Kenogg LimitEd &ngr-

PLASTIC TANKS, BUNDS

AND FUME SCRUBBERS

ISO 9002 Registered Company

Manufactured to BS EN 12573
ldeal for aggressive chemical storage
Lightweight and easy to install
Custom design and fabrication to
individual reouirements

Wide variety ofpipes,

Prefabricated shapes and sizes
fittings and valves
a Site survevs

CPV Ltd
Woodington N/lill
East Wellow
ROMSEY Hants
so51 6DQ

Tel: ++44 (0)1794 322884

Fax:++44 (0)1794 322885
E-mail:[email protected]

Website: www.cpv.co.uk

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
XXVIII STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 30/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

23.3 Tank jacking (or jack building) 454 25.3.2.1 Otigin and Development of NFPA 59A

23.4 A fast track ethylene tank 454 25.3.2.2 lmpoundment 47e

25.3.2.3 The design spill 477

23.5 A fast track liquid oxygen tank 456
25.3.2.4 Thermal radiation 478
23.6 Spiral jacking 457
25.3.2.5 Vapourdilution considerations 478
23.7 The construction of tanks with reinforced
concrete roofs 459 25.3.2.6 l\,4inimum spacing requirements 479
25.3.3 EN1473: '1997 rules 479
23.8 Concrete wall construction 460
25.3.3.1 Scope 479
23.9 Wall and base liners 461 25.3.3.2 Scenarios to be considered 479
23.10 Modular construction and prefabrication 25.3.3.3 Design spill 479
techniques 461
25.3.3.4 Thermal radiation 479
23.11 Automated welding methods 461 25.3.3.5 Vapour dilution 480
23-12 Large in-ground LNG tanks 462 25.3.3.6 Minimum spacing requirements 480

24 Foundations for low temperature tanks 465 25.4 References 480

24.1 General 466 26 Seismic design of

low temperature tanks 481
24-2 Code requirements and guidance 466
24.2.1 APt 620 466 26.1 General 482

24.2.2 BS 7777 466 26.2 The basic seismic design data 482

24.2.3 prEN 14620 467 26.3 Damping 485

24.3 Some examples and problem areas 467 26.4 Directional combinations 485

24.4 References 468 26.5 The behaviour of the product liquid 485

25 Regulations governing the layout of 26.6 Natural frequencies 486

refrigerated liquid gas tanks 469 26.6. 1 Horizontal convective frequency 486

25.1 Introduction 470 26.6.2 The horizontal impulsive frequency 487

25.2 Regulations governing LPG storage 26.6.3 The vertical barrelling frequency 488
facilities 470
26.7 Ductility 488
25.2.1 NFPA 58 470
25.2.1.2 Refrigerated LP-Gas storage 470 26.8 Calculation of the design accelerations 489
25.2.2 NFPA 59 471 26.9 Product liquid pressures acting on
25.2.3 The Institute of Petroleum rules tank shells 489
471
25.2.3.1 General 472 26.10 Tank stability under seismic loadings 490
25.2.3.2 LPG pressure storage 26.11 Tank sliding 493
(Volume 1, Chapter 2) 472
26.'12 Liquid sloshing 495
25.2.3.3 Refrigerated
(Volume 2, Chapter 3)LPG storage 473
26.13 Seismic isolation 499
25.2.3.4 Storage tank spacing 473
26.14 The design Codes 500
25.2.3.5 Vapour travel requiremenb 473
26.15 Conclusion 501
25.2.3.6 Bunding requiremenb 473
25.2.4 APt 2510 473 27 Miscellaneous storage systems 503
25.2.4.1 Pressurised LPG storage 474
27.1 Gasholders 504
25.2.4.2 Refrigerated storage 475
27.1.1 Wet seal gasholders 504
25.3 Regulations governing LNG storage
facilities 476 27.1.2 Dry seal gasholders 506

25.3.1 DOICFR rules 27.2 Silos 507

25.3.2 NFPA 59A rules 476 27.2.1 Materials of construction 508

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XXIX

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 31/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

For tanks,
vessels, silos,
fabrications
in aluminium
and stainless
steel, and

manaSement
& installation
services.

WE KNOW ABOUT TANKS

Brimar Plastics Limited

Nodh Road Yate Bristol BS37 7PR. UK
Tel: +44 (O)1454 322111 Fax +44 (0)1454 316955
Email bimar@br rnarp ast Lr k k
Web: www brlrnarp ast cs.co.cs.co.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
XXX STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 32/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

27.2.2 Silo shapes 508 28.1 lntroduction 512

27.2.3 Product removal 508 28.2 Names and addresses 513

27.2.4 Silo design 509 28.3 Storage tanks 528

27.2.5 Codes and design guidance 509 28.4 Ancillary equipment and services 534

27.3 Elevated tanks 28.5 Trade names 540

509
29 Reference index 542
27.4 References 510
Acknowledgements 555
28 Classification guide
to manufacturers and suppliers 511 Index to advertisers 556

INTEG
RECINCO
Ir
STORAGE TANK INSULATION SYSTEMS SPECIALISTS IN STORAGE TANKS
Recinco is specialized in development
lnteg design and supply wo d wide :-
and on site application of PUF insulation systems
for storage tanks. o SITE ERECTED WELDEDTANKS TO 8s2851& AFI65o

. Oiltanks: - Shell insulation, - Roof insulation o SHOP FABRICATEO TAIIKS IiI CARBoN, ss & GRP

. o CYLII'IDRICAL BOLTED TAIIIKS tit CARBOI{ AI{D SS

Liquefied Gas Tanks; PUF insulation systems
for single containment, double containment and O RECTAIGULAR BOLTED TANKS ITII STEEL AND PLASTIC

.
full containment tanks. o
o
TANK COIIIDITIO SURVEYS AiID REPAIRS
Also Polymeric Vapour Barrier for concrete CERTIFIED TAiIK DESIGITIS FOR LOCAL BUILo
wall/floor of full containment LNG/LPG tanks.
Very specialized company, experience over 25 years, See ou unique web site at
active worldwide, large and successful track record. www,mc-integ.com
For Uices & specificatiot6 of vhtua y evety tank We
RECTNCO N.V.
MC I]'ITEG LTD
Hoogveld,s phone: J32152122.01.27 INTEG HOUSE
Iet:
fax:
+44 (01359) 270610
+44 (01359) 270458
9200Dendermonde fax: -132152122.61.18 ROUGHAM
BURY ST EDMUNDS
ema : [email protected]

Belgium E-mail: [email protected] SUFFOLK

IP3O 9ND

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT XXXI

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 33/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Operating from our well equipped

manufacturing site in Gainsborough we
NORMANBY
have developed market leading products Normanby Industries Ltd
Britannia Works
and services for the Gas, Petrochemical and
Spring Gardens
Energy Related Industries, We are able to offer
Gainsborough
the complete range of Storage Tank Services Lincolnshire
whether shop built or DN2I 2AZ
site erected, Telephone: 01427 611000
Facsimile: 01427 612000
E-mail : [email protected]
o Shop built and site erected storage tanks in carbon www no rm , an bywefco. co. u k
and stainless steels
o Tank capacities from 2Om3 to 20,000m3
o Comprehensive in-house design facilities
o Full tank repair and refurbishment service
o Tank jacking for base civil works
o Tank surveys
a All works carried out in accordance with
approved method statements and safe working
practices

BYGGWTK (U.K.) LTD Tank Division

WRAS"T***f
TANK JACKING AND
HEAVY LIFTING
for
NEW CONSTRUGTION

BASE REPAIR

Email: [email protected] .1.. trlanufactufefs of

one Piece Tanks
Sectional Tanks
Web site: www. byggwik.com Tank Refurbishment
GRP Covers and Lids
Te | : + 44 (0) 'l 5e4 87 5244
Faxi + 44 (0) 1584 875243
Tanks upto 40,000 Lltres as standard

XXXII STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 34/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

1 Introduction

Storage tanks are a familiar pari oJ our industrial landscape. They are used to store a mu titude
of different products and come in a range of sizes, from small to truly gigantic.
The transport of fluids such as oil, gas and water from their places of Droduction or collection to
the end users is rarely a continuous process. Even in cases where there seem to be direct links
between the point of production and the point of use, such as gas from the United Kingdom,s
suppliers in the North
the inability to matchSea where
exactly there is a to
production direct pipeline from
consumption the ofishore
means rig to the consumer,
that a pause in the overall
scheme must be introduced. Forwaterthe rate of collection isa weather dependent matterand
a pause is clearly a matter of necessity.
The ability to store large quantities of liquid and gaseous products was an essential element in
the development of a number of industries. The petrochemical industry and locally_based town
gas (i.e, g€s made from coal) manufacturing facilities are those which most immediately come
to mind. The movement of crude and refined oil products from their places of origin to tne
vanous m-arkets would not be possible without the existence of economic and safe storage
facilities. similarly from the mid 1gth century onwards, the ability to store large quantities-of
towns gas in gasholders was an essential link in the industrial chain. More recen v the liquid
natural gas (LNG) trade, accounting for the bringing to markets of some 20% of ihe worid s
natural gas, would not be possible without the development of large scale cryogenic storage
units at both export and imDort terminais.
In a processing plant such as an oil refinery, a chemacal works or a food processing factory,
production pauses are often necessary at stages in the process, perhaps to allow reactions to
occur at different rates, or because products from differing intermediate processes must be
brought together for a finishing process. At the end of the production process. the oroduct
cannot be immediately delivered to the customer and a further pause may be necessarv io allow
a suitable batch of material to be accumulated tor transport. All of these pauses createihe need
for bulk storage.
Storage tanks are to be found constructed above ground, in ground and below ground. In shape
they are most usually of vertical cylindrical form, but also come in horizontal cvlindrical.
spherical and rectangular forms. products range from gases, liquids, solids and mixtures
thereof. Tanks for the storage of particulate solids are more usually known as silos.
Temperatures range flgrn high temperature heated storage ianks (for prooucts such as
bjtumen) through to -'163 'C for the storage of LNG and -196 .C for liquid nitrogen.
A wide variety ofstorage tank types exist, jncludlng those with fixed roofs, floating roofs, internal
roofs, with single walls, double walls and insulated tanks to name but a few.

It is important to distinguish between storage tanks and pressure vessels. This at first appears
to be a difficult t3sk, bul help is at.hand in the form of the European pressure Equipment
Directive (97l23lEc) and the united Kingdom pressure Equipment Regulations. Both of these
regulatory documents define pressure vessels as those vessels witfia maxrmum alowable
pressure greater than 0.5 bar.
Note: AII pressures in this book are gauge pressures unless stated otherwise.
Thus it is convenient to define storage tanks as vessers with a maximum alowabre pressure
(wtrich h€s been loosely taken by the industry to mean a maximum design pressure) less
than
u.c Dar. r ne majonty ot storage tanks have design pressures much lower than this. For various
reasons which will be discussed later, low temperature tanks have increasingly tended to have
higher design pressures, but 500 mbar is still a sensible maximum. Various Uk and European
design codes share this view. The usA view is somewhat different and Apl 620 a ows a
maximum design pressure of 15 psi (approximately 1O0O mbar).
Pressure vessels are the subject of a companion vorume in this series of pubrications entifled
European Pressure Equipment written by Simon Earland, ISBN 1 860b8 34S g. pressure
vessels will not be discussed in this book.
The companion books in the European Series confine themselves to European practtces and
design Codes. In the case ofstorage tanks, this approach does not make sense. As will become
apparent, many of the major customers for the storage tank industry come from the
petrochemical industry which is very muchAmerican dominated. The majoriiy
ofstorage tanks,
including those constructed within the European Community, are speclfied and built to
lmerican Codes. Storage Tanks & Equipment lnercfore will seek to cover the practices and
Codes of the UK, Europe and the USA.
As mentioned above the majority ofstorage tanks are ofthe vertical cylindrical type, constructed
of steel or of steel ailoys and fitted with fixed or floating roofs for the siorage of liquids at ambient
or low temperatures. lt is to these tanks that this book will direct its main ;ffort. other tank types
will be discussed. but in less detail.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 35/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 36/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

2 History of storage tanks

Storage tanks in oneform oranotherhave been around fora long time. This Chapter includes a
brief historical background describing how and why the current types of tanks have evolved.
A few words are devoted to in{ rou nd tan ks and to th e transition from rivetted to welded tan ks.

The historical development of the relevant American, British, European and some company
specific design and construction Codes are reviewed.

Contents:
2.'t Introduction
2.2 Water storage

2.3 Oil storage

2.4 Storage needs of the petrochemical and other industries
2.5 Gas storage
2.6 Refrigerated liquefied gas storage
2.7 Above ground and in/below ground systems
2.8 Rivetted and welded structures
2.9 History of design and construction regulations
2.9.1 American Standards
2.9.2 British Standards
2.9.3 European Standards
2.9.4 Other European national Standards
2.9.5 Related Standards
2.9.6 The EEMUA Standard
2.9.7 Company Standards
2.9.7.1 Shell Standards
2.9.7.2 Chicago Bridge Standards
2.9.7.3 Exxon Standards
2.9.8 Standards for non-petrochemical products
2.10 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 3

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 37/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

2 Hist9 y9 : 989y 3 E

2.1 lntroduction
This Chapter provides a brief resume as to why the need for liq-
uid storage has come about and the driving forces which have
caused the storage systems to increase in size and change ln
form with the passage of time.

2.2 Waler storage

The need for the storage of water for domestic and other rea-
sons has played a relatively minor part in the developmeni of
modern storage tanks.
Water is easily stored in reservoirs making the best use of local
geographicfeatures, clay-lined excavations or indeed in under-
ground features accessed by wells.
Water storage tanks designed to provide a suitable pressurefor
local distribution systems are not uncommon. In the UK these
frequently take the form of concrete tanks on elevated support-
ing structures located at the highest point that the local land-
scape will allow. These are usually of relatively modest
capacrty. Figufe 2 2 Wire wound concrete water tank
Elevated rectangular steel tanks of the Braithwaite type are Cauftesy af Prelaad lnc

also a common sight in industrial settings and airfields, again

wiih the purpose of providing a suitable head of water l"_r.:6 .;EIeqF]rytr-€"
In the USA and in particular in the flat landscapes of the mid-
west. water towers have been used to advertise the products
for which the particular town is best known. Hence watertowers
in the form of beer cans, pineapples and other unlikely items
can often be seen. Figure 2.1 shows a typical example of such
a water tower.

Fjgure 2.3 A 45 m diameter water tank

Counesy ofwhessoe

in the number and size of storage tanks lies elsewhere. Figure

2.3 shows a water tank of 45 m in diameter at the Peterhead
powef station in Scotland.

2.3 Oil storage

The first successful oil wells in the USAwere generally agreed
to have been drilled in Titusville, Pennsylvania in 1859. In Rus-
sia and Romania the first wells were drilled in 1860 and in the

Dutch East lndies in 1865.

Oil-based products prior to the drilling of wells came from a vari-
ety of sources and were used in modest quantities. In addition
to animal and vegetable sources, the distillation of naturally oc-
curring mineral oil, often in the form of oil bearing shales, and
the residual tars from gasworks, were the starting off point for
the lighter oil products required for domestic lighting amongst
other uses.
The drilling ofthe first wells in the USAwere driven by the needs
Figufe 2.1 An unusualwater lowef for cheaper sources of oil-based products, in particular kero-
cauftesy af chicaga Bridge & lron conpany (CB & l) sene, or paraffin as ii is known in the UK. The dramatic expan-
sion of the oil industry in the USA following the drilling of the
The USA is also the main home ofthe prestressed concrete wa- early wells is well recorded. The formation of Standard Oil by
tertank. Usually these are of the Preload wire wou nd type Fig- John Rockefellef in 1870, led to this company dominating the
ure 2.2 shows such a tank. industry from wellhead, through the refining process to the dis-
tribution and marketing of the finished products. Standard Oil
Water storage for industrial use is common, especially at power not surprisingly eventually fell foul of the US antitrust laws and
stations but despiie this ihe real reasons for the rapid increase was broken up in 1911 into 34 separate and independent com-

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
4 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 38/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 2 Histoty of storcge tanks

panies. l\.4any of these companies continue to exist to this day Site

as household names such as Exxon, Mobil, Chevron, Texaco to
1896 Hull 78 30
name but a few. 1394 30 30
1898 70 30
Oil from the early wells in the US was placed in whisky barrels, 1497 30 33
these being a readily available receptacle at the time. The 1A9T 7A 30
1897 80 3a
wooden barrels were not entirely suited to the storage of oil. laga 86 38
They were originally designed forthe storage ofaqueousfluids 1899 35
1901 LATHOL 3g
whjch caused thewooden staves to swelland become progres- 1901 LATHOL 77 29
sively more leak tight. Oil did not have a similar effect and de- 1901 LATHOL 6a 30
1901 95 39
spite efforts to coatthe insides ofthe barrels with glue, leakage 1902 30

caused by lack tightness and mechanical damage was 1902 30

always a problem.of 1902
1902
110
s0
33

1903 Consolrdaled Pelroleum 90 30

A report of the time records that at Vacuum Oil's Wandsworth 1903 70 30
works in the UK, barrels were stored in a field and during the 39
1907
summer they would dry out and leak. Eventuallythe ground be- 1908 85
:JO

30
came oil logged and pits had to be dug to recoverthe leaked oil. 1904 60 30
1908 LATHOL 39
Figure 2.4 shows the piles of wooden barrels at Vacuum Oil's 1910 73 24
Millwall works.
Figure e 2.5 A list of early storage tanks supplied by Whessoe
Coutesy of Whessae

Slte Heioht
(ree0
1904 2 90 37
1
1905 90 37
1907 90 37
1907 2 90 37
1908 90 37
1910 2 90 37
1911 4 90
1913 2 90
1913 2 90 37
1913 17 90 37
1914 l 90 37
1916 1 7A 30
1916 1 82 30
1916 2 93 30
1919 1 90 37

: gure 2.4 Wooden barrels al Vacuum Oils Millwall Works Figure e 2.6 A list ofeady iank suppliels to the Admiratty
Caurtesy af Whessoe
:aurtesy of Amadeus Press Ltd

teresting book on this subject is entitled Oil on the rails (Refer

lespite providing
:cmers the drawbacks, woodenmeans
a convenient barrels of
were popularwith
storage; cus-
the general ence 2.1). Storage tanks of ever increasing capacity were an
-rle being that the barrel could be kept for one week before essential element of this business and the listing of early tanks
:narges were imposed. They were also of appropriate size and supplied by Whessoe (Figure 2.5) bears witness to this.
neight for the transporhtion systems of the time. Up to the turn of the 1gth century most non sailing ships were
fuelled by coal. Apart from the fact that "coaling" was hard and
-arge depots included cooperages, barrelling sheds and stack- filthywork detested by all involved, it also ensured that around a
'g 9rounds where wooden barrels could be steam-cleaned, quarterof anyfleetwas in port coaling up at any one time. In mil-
':-glued and siacked prior to being returned to service.
itary terms this was a matter of serious inconvenience. The Bri
-1e wooden barrels were eventually replaced by steel barrels ish Royal Navy prompted initially by Lord Fisher, the First Sea
:'42 US gallon capacity. The barrel is to this day the most Lord, and later by Winston Churchill as First Lord of the Admi-
.', dely used measure of volu me for oil based prod ucts. One US ralty, changed the fuelofits majorships to oil priorto the start of
:arrel = 0.159 cubic metres. the First World War Oil fuelling gave the added bonus of ships
:s late as 1921 it was reported that "..the barrel remains the being able to refuel at sea. The appearance ofthis new practice
:^e gave rise to the navalfuelling depots around the coast ofthe UK
'.-3ugh
means transporting
theyof are far fromand keeping oilin
satisiactory smallvolumes,
as regards al-
leakage. and the need for substantial reserves of storage capacity. This
is reflected again in the early list of storage tanks supplied by
- rglo-American alone have half a million barrels in circula-
_-1n......". Whessoe to the Admiralty, (Figure 2.6). Some of these tanks
are still in service.
-^e inconvenient fact that in general oil is found where there is
- r call for its immediate use, inevitably gave rise to the need to Increasing use of and trade in oil products gave rise to ever in-
:-ocess, store and transport the various oil based products. creasing requirements for transport and storage facilities. The
-eiineries were originally located close to the producing fields early trade in oil and refined products was shipped in loads of
around 5000 tons, carried in wooden barrels on tramp steam-
=-C the refined products transported to their markets. ers or sailing ships. The earliest bespoke ships were barges
: rginally the bulk of the demand was for "illuminating oil" (Ker- used on the Caspian Sea to transport oilwhich was poured into
::ene). As gas and elechicity took the place of this oil deriva- the hold. These leaked so badly that ballast was placed on the
' ,e. the demand turned to lubricating oil, fuel oil and motor decks to force the boat down and increase the water pressure
-r: it. The spectacular increase in demand forthe latter product to limit or reverse the leakage. Marcus Samuel of Shell ordered
:: to refineries being gradually moved to the market end ofthe eight bulk oil carrying vessels of between 5000 and 6000 tons
-:-:Cly chain, where the various oil based products were pro- capacity each, the first one in 1892. The subsequent burgeon-
:-.ed and distributed, largelybyrail in the first instance. An in- ing in the number and size of oil tankers brought in turn corre-

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 5

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 39/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
2 History af storage tanks

sponding changes in the number and size of shore-based stor-

age facilities.
1391 New@slle and Galeshead Gas Co 180

As refining activities moved from the producing end ofthe chain 1492 42
1493
to the supply end, refineries grew up. In the UK the flrst was in Durham Counly AssY um 60
19'16 at Shell Haven, producing bunker fuel oil for the British 3a
s6
1895 Blylh
Admiralty. Llandarcyfollowed in 1921 and in 1924 Shell opened 1896
45
refineries at Stanlow, Grangemouth and Adrossan, all refining 1396
1396
imported crude oil. 1496
1396 MaRet Weighlon Gas co. 42
The trend of increasing shipping capacity was for a while 1495

matched bythe capacities of land-based storage tanks, provid- 1897

1898
ing the convenience ofone ship filling one storage tank. The ar- 1903

rival on the scene of the Very Large Crude Carriers (VLCCS) of 1905
1914 119
up to 500,000 dwt brought this situation to an end.
The speed at which storage facilities were being required Figure 2.7 A list of early gasholders
Courlesy af Whessoe
around the world, particularly from the late 1950s up to the late
1970s gave rise the development of a standard range of tank
the last century would even have been considered a big tank
designs, an initiative by Shell. These pre-designed tanks
some 50 years later A 12 million cubic feet gasholder built in
speeded up the ordering, fabricating and erection timescale for
Sydney, Australia, during the First World War was considerable
the refinery builders and will be discussed later in Slorage
biggerwith a diameter of 300 feet. Wet and dry seal gasholders
Tanks & Eauipment.
are discussed briefly in Chapter 27 of Storage Tanks & Equip'
ment.
2.4 Storage needs ofthe petrochemical
and other industries 2.6 Refrigerated liquefied gas storage
The gradual appearance of the petrochemical industry around Products such as propane and butane were originally stored in
the world gave rise to the needs for storage of a much wider smallquantities in pressure vessels or spheres. As the require-
range of, mainly, liquid togetherwith some solid products. l\,4ost ment came to store ever larger quantities ofthese products, the
were stored above ground in vertical cylindrical tanks. The pressure storage option became increasingly expensive and
properties ofthe diiferent products caused the types oftanks to unattractive from a practical and safety pointofview Low pres-
vary widely. Hence the development of heated tanks for bitu- sure storage in refrigerated liquid form became the norm and
men storage, low temperature tanks for refrigerated liquid the development of these tanks in terms oftheir increasing size
gases, corrosion resistant tanks for aggressive products, clean and sophistication from a safety point of view witlbe covered in
tanks for water, food and pharmaceutical materials, silos for detail in later Chapters.
solids and special measures for toxic materials.
Natural gas is a methane-dominated mixture ofgases which is
often found with oil and used to be considered an inconve-
2.5 Gas storage nience to the oil industry Consequentlythe gas was often flared

The earlygas industryinthe UKwasbased onthe production of at the discovery site. Apart from being an economic nonsense
to waste such a useful and valuable raw material, it is now sen-
coal gas in gasworks. Rather than transport the gas for large sibly considered environmentally unacceptable to burn large
distances from producer to user, it was more convenient to quantities ofgas. The groMh of theworld's LNG trading from its
transport the raw material (coal) and manufacture the gas ciose early days between Arzew in Algeria, Canvey lsland in the UK
to the user. Hence the groMh ofthe gaswofks in most towns of and Fos sur Mer in France. will be considered in the low temper-
any size in the UK. ature section of this book.
As the production ofgas was at best a batch process and as de- As with the oil trading, the scale of activities has changed here
mand was on an uneven daily, and indeed often a longer term too. The first LNG carrier was Methane Pioneer which was a
cycle, there arose a need to provide for buffer storage of gas converted liberty ship with a liquid capacity of 5000 m3. This
There was also a need to maintain the gas in the distribution was folfowed by Methane Pflncess and Methane Progress
system at a small positive pressure and it would be clearly be each of 27,400 m3 capacity. The latest carriers are of up to
convenient to the user if this pressure could be relatively 140,000 m3 in capacity. Similarly the first LNG tank at canvey
consranr. lsland was of2000 m3 capacity whilst in Japan an above ground
largertanks
These two needs were admirably achieved by the evolution of tank of 180,000 m3 has been constructed and even
discussed.
the gasholder, once a familiar landmark of most UK towns, but are being
perhaps less so these days. lncidentally, the gasholder seems
to have become one of the very few forms of storage tank to
have achieved a measure of affectlon in the eyes of the public,
2.7 Above ground and in or below ground
several indeed to the point where they have become listed storage systems
buildings. The best known in the UK are perhaps the group The bulk of the world's storage capacity for liquids is in the form
which could be seen on leaving King's Cross Station in London' of above ground tanks of the vertical cylindrical type. lt is to this
although sadly only one seems to have survived the current type oftank that the majorityof Sforage Ianks & Equipmentwill
building developments in the area. be devoted.
The gasholders seem to have increased in capacity earlier and There are a number of areas where in ground storage is com-
faster than their liquid storage cousins and would have encoun- monly adopted. One of these is petrol station forecourt tanks
tered and solved the various structural problems associated storing petrol and dieselfuels for sale to motorists. These tanks
with size at an earlier date. togetherwiththe smallerabove ground tanks forthe same pur-
The list in Figl|Ie 2.7 of early gasholders designed and con- Dose are described in considerable detail in Wayne Geyer's
structed by Whessoe shows this, indeed the 180 ft diameter book (Reference 2.2). There seems little point in revisiting this
tank at Newcastle, designed and constructed around theturn of tvoe of tiank in this book.

6 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 40/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 2 i s:a-, a'a:a-.:: aa'. a

Another use for such tanks is for the storage of aviation fuel, involving modifications and revisions of Standard '124 ce s-:,
particularly at military air bases, where the above ground stor- pended". This was clearlythe end ofthe line for rivetea tan(s.
age of such flammable productswould represent unacceptable
The Standard was last issued in 1951 and any copy cure.:j
NSKS.
provided bears the legend "copy provided Jor historical pu:-
Various products including LPG are stored in below-ground poses only". The lengthy transition between the two metaljoin-
caverns. These caverns are conventionally mined in suitable ing techniques owed much to a suspicion within the more con-
rock and usuallyconsist of interlinked horizontal tunnels ofcon- servative operators of storage tanks that the newfangled
stant cross-section. These can have storage capacitiesofup to welding was an unsuitable technique. This was based on a
250,000m3. number of sudden failures of early welded tanks. Electric arc
In Germany, a substantial part of the Federal Fuel Reserve is welding was not the closely controlled and well understood
stored in caverns in saltdomes. Saltdomes are naturalgeolog- technique that it is today and the importance of toughness in
ical phenomena and can be mined by a technique known as preventing brittle fracture, particularly in the weld metal and the
-solution mining". These can be gigantic as illustrated heat affected zone. (HAZ). was not appreciated.
by
Figure 2.8. It is interesting that welded bottoms with riveted shells were al-
All of these in and below ground storage solutions are briefly lowed. This is perhaps a tacit appreciation that the tank bottom,
described in Storage Tanks & Equipment. with its very low operating stresses, is not susceptible to brittle
failure in the same way as is the more highly-stressed tank
shell.
2.8 Riveted and welded structures API 12C, first issued in 1935, covered welded tanks. This Stan-
Most of the early liquid storage tanks were constructed from dard imposed a "nick break test". This was a welded specimen
steelwith rivetedjoints. API Standard 12Awas the specification which had a notch or nick made in it and was then subjected to
for "Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells" (it allowed either riv- an unquantified beating with a hammer. Brutal though this
eted or welded bottoms) for tanks with capacities of between sounds, it was an attempt to ensure some measure of tough-
240 bbl (38 m3) and 255,000 bbl (40,545 m3). The maximum ness in the welded joint, something that would be done by
end ofthe capacityrange representsquite a big tankeven byto- Charpy V-notch testing today.
day's standards. Allowingfordead space atthe bottom and top,
Although riveted tanks are now only of historical interest, the
this is a tank of 55 m in diameter and some18 m in shell height.
reader ol API 12A cannot fail to be impressed by the skills wh ich
NIuch of the technology came from the shipbuilding industry
must have been required atthe design, fabrication and erection
Welding progressively took overfrom riveted construction from stages bythe personnel involved with this type oftank. Even the
the late 1920s and riveted tanks became unusualfrom the late simple shelljoints appearcomplex and fittings must have been
1930s. The foreword to API l2Astated "at the November 1941 a nightmare to produce. Caulking of the shell (outside) and the
meeting the tank committee agreed that all committee activity bottom (inside) is a requirement. Bottoms, as a matterof neces-
sity, had to be constructed at a height, and had the lower shell
course added and the whole assemblv water-tested whilst still
suDoorted.

- 1030
2.9 History of the design and construction
- 1100
regulations
1124
- The storage of large volumes of products which were in the
main highly flammable is a subject which was bound to attract
regulation and standardisation from a number of interested
partres.
- 1140

1Zn
- 2.9.1 American Standards
1220
-
Tank owners, tank makers, fire officials and insurers in the USA
were the first to address this subject and an association oftank
1260
- manufacturers, later to become the Steel Tank Institute (STl)
was formed in 1916. At or around the same time UndeMriters
1300 Laboratories Inc (UL) was developing its safety standards for
-
atmospheric storage tanks.
- 1320
The first Standard for above ground steel storage tanks was
produced by UL in 1922. UL 142 was entitled Slee/ Aboye-
_ 1360 ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Llguids. The
same organisation published the first edition of lL 58 entifled
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids in 1925, a reaction to the increasing num-
ber of urban petrol stations in the USA.
The National Board of Fire UndeMriters (NFBU) published
NFBU 30 around 1904 with the unwieldy title Rules and Re-
quircments forthe Construction and lnstallation of Systemsfor
- 1430
Storing 250 Gallons or Less of Fluids Which at Ordinary Tem-
4424O2040 peratures Give Off lnflammable Vapors, as Recommended by
Dianeter in m
its Committee of Consulting Engineers.

Figure 2.8 Saltdomes arc naturalgeologicaiphenomenatlhese can be Over a period of time the NFBU became the National Fire pro-
gigantic tection Association (NFPA), an organjsation which is familiarto

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 7

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 41/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
2 History of storage tanks

us today. NFBU 30 became NFPA 301 published in 1913, and E

today this document has become NFPA 30 (Flammable and :
Combustible Liquids Code) first published in 1957. NFPA 4O,OOO-6ARREL CAPACITY

Codes are influentialworldwide in both the ambient and the low :l

temperature storage industries.
The American Petroleum Institute (APl) was formed in 1919
and wenton to produce two ofthe most influential Codes in the
areas of ambient tankage (APl 650, formerly API 12C) and low
temperature tankage (APl 620). These documents and their in-
fluence will be discussed in later Chapters at some length. API
12C is one of a family of Codes covering liquid storage tanks.
The full set contains the following:
. 124 : Specification for oil-storage tanks with riveted shells.
This covers matefial selection, design, fabrication and
erection requirements for vertical, cylindrical, above ground
steel tanks with riveted shells in nominal capacities of
240 bbl (38 m3) to 255,000 bbl (40,545ms) (in standard
sizes) for oil storage. l

. 128 : Specification for bolted production fanks. This covers

the materialselection, design and erection requirements of
vertical, cylindrical, above ground, bolted steel production
tanks in nominal capacities of 100 bbl ('16m3) to 10,000 bbl
(1590m3) (in standard sizes) in-
I
cludes appurtenance requiremenb.for oilfield service. lt also
. 1 2C : Specification for welded oil storage lanks. This covers
the material selection, design, fabrication and erection re- t
quirements for vertical, cylindrical, above ground, closed
and open top, welded steel tanks in various sizes and ca-
pacities, for oil storage. lt also includes appurtenance re- Figure 2.9 Noded hemispherojds
quirements and recommendations for the use of low alloy
high strength steels, and aluminium alloys, in tank construc-
the noded hemispheroids shown in Figure 2.9. lt also contains
tion. The second edition of this part was published in 1 936,
two Appendices for low temperature hnk design. These are:
so it must have its origins at an earlier date.
. . Appendix R Low pressure storage tanks for refrigerated
1 2D : Large welded production tanks.fhis covers the mate- - covers design metal temperatures from
products. This
rial selection, design, fabrication and erection requirements +40'F to -60 "F. c
for vertical, cylindrical, above ground, welded steel, produc-
tion tanks in nominal capacities of 500 bbl (80 m3) to 3,000 . Appendix Q - Low pressure storage tanks for liquefied hy-
bbl (477m3) (in standard sizes) for oilfield service. dfocarbon gases. This covers design metal temperatures
down to -270'F
. 12E : Specification for wooden producfion tanks. This cov-
ers the material selection, design, fabrication and erection
requirements for veriical, cylindrical, above ground, closed 2.9.2 British Standards
top, wooden produciion ianks in nominal capaclties of
130 bbl (21 m3) to 1,500 bbl (239 m3) (in standard sizes)for The first UK Standard for welded steel storage tanks was
oil field service. BS 2454: Part 1:1956 Veftical Mild Steel Welded Storage
Tanks with Buft Welded Shelb for the Petroleum lndustrv:
. 12F : Specification for smallwelded production tanks.fhis Paft 1 Design & Fabrication.
covers the material selection, design and construction re-
quirements for vertical, cylindrical, above ground, shop- This was prepared for BSI by the Petroleum Equipment Indus-
welded, steel, production tanks in nominal capacities of 90 tryStandards Committee, which consisted of represeniatives of
the following organisations:
bbl(14 m3)to 400 bbl(63 m3)(in standard sizes uptoa max-
imum diameter of 12 feet)for oilfield service. Council of British Manufacturers of Petroleum Equipment
. 12G : Specification for aluminium a oy welded storage Engineering Equipment Users Association
fanks. This covers the material selection, design, fabrica- lnstitute of Petroleum
tion, erection and testing requirements for vertical, cylindri
cal, above ground, closed and open top, welded aluminium N/inistry of Fuel and Power
alloy storage tanks in various sizes and capacities. Oil Companies Materials Committee
The latest editions of the American Standards which interest Association of British Chemical l\4anufacturers
tank designers and builders are:
British Chemical Plant Manufacturers Association
. API650
- Welded
tion. November
Steel Tanks for Oil Storaae: Tenth Edi-
1998
British Electrical and Aliied Manufacturers Association
British lron and Steel Federation
. APf 620 and Construction of Large, Welded,
- Deslgn
Low-Pressure Storage Tanks: Tenth Edition, February Institute of Welding
2002 Tank and lndustrial Plant Association
API 620 provides rules for ambient tanks for pressures up to Itseems perhaps a little unnecessaryto listallofthe participa
15 psig and is not restricted to vertical cylindrical forms. lt has ing organisations in the preparation of this national Standard,
been used to produce designs for such interesting vessels as but it serves to illustrate the width of industrial knowledoe can-

8 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 42/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 2 Histoty of storage tania

. :ssed at that time and the size ofthe committee involved in the whilst the European Standard covering the same subject
: -oduction of the document. This is something which contrasts area was being prepared.
, :h the present day where it is often difficult to assemble a via-
For the storage of low temperature products, the British Stan-
: 3 committee to write or edit a Standard. dards followed the practice adopted by API in providing sepa-
--ls Standard classified tanks into a number of cateoories: rate rules fortemperatures down to -50 'C and for temperatures
from -50 'C down to -196 'C. Rather than using the API method
. Non-pressure fixed roof tanks
ofhaving two appendices covering the specific requirements of
. Pressure fixed roof ianks (limited to 128 ft diameter) the two temperature ranges with the main bodyofthe code ad-
dressing more general issues, it was decided to produce two
. Ooen{oD tanks
separate codes. These were:
: also proposed standard shell plate sizes and tank diameters .B54741 : 1971 Vertical Cylindrical Welded SteelTanks for
. . ing efiectively a standard range of tanks. This followed the
low temperature service. Single wall tanks for tempera-
:-ell approach, which will be discussed later This standardi-
tures down to - 50 "C. BSI London
::i on was a reaction to the level oJ tank building activity within
(now superseded by BS 7777: 1993).
:-e petroleum industry at that time. A range of standard tank
: zes which had in effect been pre-designed was cleady in the . BS 5387 : 1976 Vertical Cylindrical Welded Storage Tanks
-:erests ofthe industry in speeding up the fabrication and erec- for low temperature service. Double Wall Tanks for Temper-
--:n process and opening up the business to companies who atures down to 196'C. BSI London
::fhaps did not have the facilities to carry out the detailed de- (now superseded by BS 7777 : 1993).
,: Jn aspects of this work. These Standards only considered single containment storage
-1e tanks were referred to by a coding system, which contained systems. As will be described, various events created the need
-'ormation on the tank diameter, shell height, pressure cate- for a Standard which provided a framework for double and full
trry and plate width. Hence the customer needed onlyto order containment systems for low temperature products. Following
:= BNPB 1608, for the tank manufacturer to know that a the work of the EEIV1UA storage tank committee described in
-on-pressure fixed roof tank of 160 ft in diameter with eight Section 2.9.6, a new British Standard was issued in 1993 which
-:'ell courses each 7.25 ft wide" was required. Extracts from addressed all of the low temperature products and all forms of
:^rs Code are shown in Figure 2.10, explaining the coding sys- containment. This was:
::m and show a few of the standard capacity/shell plate thick-
-3ss tables. . BS 7777:1993 Flat-bottomed, veftical cylindrical storage
tanks for low temperature service: Pafts 1 to 4.
-rljke the API Siandard of the same period, the British Stan-
:a.d required a design product specific gravity of 1.00 in all 2.9.3 The European Standards
:ases. Thjs was quite deliberate and allowed for the tank to be
-sed for any product commonly encountered in the petrochem- Around 1993 the European Standard Committee TC 265 was
:al industrywithoutfear ofover-stressing the tank shell. lt is not
formed. The secretariat of this committee was given to the Bri
-ncommon for tanks to change their service from one product ish Standards Institution (BSl) and most of the meetings were
:l another during the cou rse of their operating lifetime and hav- held at BSI headquarters in London. The work ofthe committee
''rg tanks designed "bespoke" for particular product gravities
-"ns the risk of misuse, particularly when records are not well was divided into:
-'raintained
or dimmed with the passage of time. . A Standard for ambient temperature tanks entitled:
-he allowable shell stress based on the available carbon steels Specification for the deslgn and manufacture of site built,
:i the time was 21 ,000 lb/in'z and the joint efficiency factor was vertical, cylindrical, flat-bottomed, above ground, welded,
:.85 in all cases. The two further parts of BS 2654 followedi metallic tanks for the storage of liquids at ambienttempera-
ture and above - Parl 1 - Steel Tanks ( prEN 14015-1).
. BS 2654: Pan2: 1961 Site erection, inspection and testing
This covered tolerances, site welding, tank testing and in- Note: Part 2 is intended to cover aluminium alloy tanks and
spection in detail. Much of these Standards owed a great will possibly follow later. lt is currently suffering from
deal to the API Standards which Droceeded them. indeed limited industrial interest.
BS 2654: Part 2 gives a specific acknowledgement to this . AStandard for low temperature tanks entitled:
effect in its introduction.
Specification for the design, construction and installation of
. BS 2654: Part 3: 1968 Higher Design Sfresses allowed the site built, vertical, cylindrical, flat-bottomed steel tanks for
use of stronger steels and higherjoint efficiencies. BS 4360: the storage of refrigerated, liquefied gases with operating
1968 was published in the same year and added to the temperatures between - 5'C and -165'C (prEN 14620 -
steels referred
1501- 101) to inofBS
a range 2654:
steels withPart
differing BS 13 and
1 (i.e.strength BS
grades Parls 1l213l4l5)
Note: The prprefix indicatesa provisional Euronorm, i.e. one
and toughness measured by Charpy V-notch impact test- where the committee responsible has finished its com-
ing. Figure 1 first appeared in this Standard relating the min- plete draft which is then issued for public comment. The
imum design metal temperature during operation, the comments received are reviewed by the committee
minimum water temperature during hydrostatic testing and and the draft edited prior to the Standard being issued
plate thickness to the required CharpyV-notch testtemper- as a full Euronorm without the prefix.
ature. The higherjoint efficiency of 1 .0 was accompanied by
The work proceeded slowly, not least because of difficulties in
an enhanced requirementfor radiographicweld inspection.
resolving strongly held views from the various national delega-
The three parts of BS 2654 were consolidated into a single vol- tions regarding differing practices in the countries which they
ume some time ago and the current version is: represented. Indicative of the rate of progress was the com-
. BS 2654:'1989:British Standard Specification for the Manu- ment by John de Wit, then chairman of CEN TC 265, that a final
facture of veftical steel welded non-refrigerated storage draft of the low temperature document would not be ready until
tanks with butlwelded shells for the petroleum industry. the end of 1995.

This Standard has not been updated since 1989 as may The group working on the ambient tank Code issued a draft for
have been expected because of the "standstill" imposed public comment in 2000. Comments have been received and

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 9

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 43/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
2 History of storage tanks

B.S. 2654: Part | : 1956

BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR

VERTICAL MILD STEEL WELDED

STORAGE TANKS, WITH BUTT-WELDED SHELLS,
FOR THE PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
PART 1. DESIGN AND FABRICATION

FOREWORD
ThisBritish Standard, prcpared under the authority ofthe Petroleum Equipment Industry Standards Commi tee, isdesigoed
to provid€ the pelroleum industry with tanks of adequate safety, reasonable economy and in a mnEe ofsuitable capacities.
'ln the funher interasls of
ec5nomy, suppty?nd iniformiti of practice it is srroigly recomminded that the'sizes of
plates used for tanks of all capacilies shall be limit d to three (Clause 4). The slandard tank sizes vrhich result
adoption of this propolal are given ill Tables I to 8. from the
fhis.pan of the standard deals with design and fabrication of tanks; Pan 2 will deal with site erection, inspectioo
arld tcstinE.

SPECIFICATION
SECTION ONE: GENERAL
scoPE.

1. This British Slandard relales to tbe materials, design and

3. Standard rang€s of tank sires bas€d od tho plate siz€s
fabricatiod of vefiical mild steel cylindrical welded tanks
specined in Claule 4 ar€ given in the fotlowing tables:*
for tho p€troleum industry, for enection above ground, of fTable I Capaciry in cubic feet
the fo[owing d€signs:- Ttpe A (Mz,'jmum J faUte z Cafacir in cubic metrEs
plare width 6.00 ft) I Table 3 Shell plate rhicknesses
4. Non-pressuro fixed roof ta*s (all sizes)-
LTable 4 Heights irl feet.
6. Pre$ure 6xed ioof tanks (up to I 28 lt diameier onlr. fTabte 5 Capaciry in cubic feer
Ttpe B <Ma.rJmum JTable 6 Capacity in cubic metres
c. Op€n-top taDks (all sizes). piire widrh ?.25 fr) 1 Table 7 s U ptale lhicknesses
This standard sD€ciies the us€ onlv of butt.w€lded LTable 8 Heights iD fe€t.
shells and iDcludes ;ference to mountings, stairways and NOTE. Tabler of equivalent capacity in U.S. bancts and imD.riat
hardEilines. gallors are eiv.n in Appendics A, B, C and D.
This standard does not ioclude the oes,gn and con- In Tables I to 8 a maximum diameter of 200 ft and a
skuction of floating roofs, maximum height of nine courses ar€ given. Theee values
NOTE. Atlcnllon is drawn to Appcndix F *hjch rabul.res rhc may be exce€ded provided tle maximum shell plate thick-
information to bc suppucd by thc purctras.r on allcrnalives Der- n€ss OOeS nol eXC€€d l rl Ul.
mitFd by thi3 British Srandard.
SAANDAXI} PLATE SIZAS
4, a. GeneruL Tbe staDdard plate sizes. which fofm tbe
basisof the standard tank sizei and heighls in Tables t to 8,
are Prven Delowl
Z. a. Nonpresswe ran&s shall be suitable for \rorking at
atrnospheric pressure, but designed for an internal pressure
Lenerh
of 3 in, *ater gauge and a vacuuh as specified
Claus€ l4lfand for loofs in Clause 26 (see also for shells in
Clause 15). Thlclffst T "e B

b. Pressure tanks sball be designed for an interDal prcs- Inches Fcet F€cl Feet
sure of 8 in. water gauga and 216 \n. water g uge vacuum 3Ao or r/a 15 ? (5 7E fr) 5.m 5.00
(see Claus€€ 15 and 26). % up to br.rt
€xcludins % 25.13 (8 ? ft) 6.m 6.00
c. Tanks may be designed in accordance with this 25 ]J (8 ?
speci-fication lo withsland higher pressure and/or vacuum
t{ and over f0 6.00 7.L5

conditions, provided the allowable stresses gi €n in this Tho above plale sizes ma, be rnodilied by agreement
standard are not exceeded. between tle Durchaser and the manufacturer.

F qJ-e 210 ExlracL fto'lr BS 2651 PadI.paqe1

1O STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 44/296
 2 History of stotuge .."..
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

8.S,2654: Pa.t I : 1956

b. Rolling margins. Unless otherwise agreed betwecn calculated weight by more than the appropriate rolling
purchas€r and manufacturer, no plate shall be under the weitht tolerance as shown io rhe followin8 table:-
specified thickncss a any part,;or shall excled the jt
SCHEDULE OF PERCENTACE ROLLING WEICHT TOLERANCES FOR SHELL PLATES

widrt
O.der€d
Under
4t h. 60 ln. 12in 84 h, 96 in. IoE ln. lZ0lD.
{a in. 60 b. 12l^. t4 I'L 96 ln. t08 ln. 120 lt. 132 nL

Per Per Per Pcr Per Per Per

c€nt ocnt
%.e irl. Lo l0 10 l0 10 t0
und€r }/ in.

Y in. Io 5 5 5 7 I 12 L2
und€r %6 io.

%s in. to 5 5 5 6 10 11 t2
under'9d in.

X in. to 5 5 5 6 t1
undcr hs in.
'ha in. to 5 5 5 5 6 7.5 T2
undcr ].4 in.

,4, ib, ao 5 5 5 5 6 6 75 9 l0
undcr % in.

% in, to
undcr t4 in.
5 5 5 5 5 5 'l

Y in, ta 5 5 5 5 5 7
undcr L in.

I in. to 5 5 5 7
lX i ,
CODINC b. Thc above plefix€s to be follow€d by a type syEbol
5. For .asy refcrence to tank sizEs atrd typcs in cablcs and A or B dcnoting'thc rhaximum plat€ wia-O afbptfr, rec
corresponden@, etc., a coding systeor for ech rizc of Claus€ 4 a, toFtbcr with a nimber consisdn ol thc
tank is siven below. diaEetcr of the-Bnk in feet and number of couies.
The-code system consists of a lettef prc6x derotiag th€ c, Examples.
three desigG 6f tanks as listed below: ^ Pr€6sure roof, glaximum plate '/idth 6.00 ft 96 ft
dianreter four cours€s deop : BLPA 964.
a. Prefx. Non-prcssurc roof, mlximum plale width ?.25 fi
Fixed rcof tank, non-plessu.r : BNP 160 ft diaftc €r cight corllscs deep BNPA 1608, :
Fixad roof tallq prcssiire : BLP Opcn-rop, maximuE plato widrh 6.@ ft 80 fr dia-
pcn-top tank - BOT metor slr cours€s d€€D :
BOTA 806.

: gure 2- 10 Extract from BS 2654 : Pad 1 - page 2

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 11

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 45/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
2 History of storage tanks

B.S,2654rPanl:1956

s E

EF e
tl &

3
ll & B €
I

n
t I I
I

n
-l
*l 4 s
..n
4
I
s
a-6
FH
Ei zvte.F HI
t * I g I
-8 ,c

gFE€ al
al a g d,s
3 E3e tsI & +
^EtFt9 XX
EEEE HI
a
al E ts ff
''
3rf5 "l II
2l
ll
E F $ I g r
rE
:EE*
FH
H6
3Z
 . s
I
li
TT ss
I g EE
iitt B
 c
I
I I
- E it g
I

I
R
F I I

I e I s B

I
= I I

pl a
l9

Figule 2.10 Extract from BS 2654 : Part 1 - page 3

12 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 46/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 2 History of storcge ia'..

3fe currently being reviewed and where appropriate edited into 2.9.7 Company Standards
:re final text. The document is hoped to be issued as a
:uronorm (EN) shortly. As is the case with all new EN Stan-
Over the years, and for a number of reasons, some ofthe major
rards, the national Standards in the areas covered by the new
companies involved with the use oforthe design and construc-
Standard are subject to standstill. This means that they are in
tion of storage tanks found the need to produce their own Stan-
:ffect frozen at the point when TC 265 began its work. In this dards. This could be because they thought that the nationa
:articular case the standstill has been in force for much lonqer
Standards available at the time did not reflect their require-
:.ran was originally anticipated.
ments sufficiently, or for a need to standardise a range of tank
r terms of its contents the new ambient tank Standard will in the types or sizes. Some of these have become influential within
-ain follow the directions set by the earlier European national the industry and have attained the status of unofficial Stan-
3tandards, which in turn owe a great dealto the corresponding oaros.
-Pl Standards. The volume of fossilised experience in these 2.9.7.1 The Shell Standards
:aflier documents is both difficult and orobablv unwise to
lnore. The method ofcategorising and coding ofverticaltanks used in
-ne lowtemperature Euronorm BS 2654: Part 1: 1957, is almost identical to that used in the
following close behind its am-
is
:rent temperature counterpart and was issued for public com- Shell publication Standard Tanks, also first published in 1957.
-ent in March 2003. lt is hoped that the comments can be re- The closeness ofthe Shell and BS approaches in this matter is
, ewed and consolidated into this Euronorm rather more no realsurprise. John de Wit, the Shell tank expertfrom SlPl\,4 in
:Jickly than has been the case with the ambienttank Standard. The Hague, was Chairman of the British Standards Committee
CP12 (later PVE 15), which looked after ambient and low tem-
-gain, in terms of content it follows earlier European and API
S:andards as well as the EEUMA Standard discussed in Sec- perature storage tank codes. Shell always used BS Codes, un-
:.n 2.9.6. like much of the petrochemical industry which was firmly wed-
ded to Codes of US origin.
-re differences will be described and discussed later in Sfor-
.Je Tanks & Equipment. These
umes inStandards wereincluded
1962/3. They and republished
updatedstandard in three
desjgnsfora vol-
range of
sizes of fixed roof and open top vertical tanks, together with a
2.9.4 Other European national Standards
range of horizontal tanks. Notonlydid these designs coverthe
shell plating as the early BS, but they also included standard
','ost European countries have thelr own national Standards for designs for roofs, bottoms and a range of standardised tank fit-
i-nbient tanks (e.9. Germany has DIN 4119 Parts 1 and 2). tings as well. The roof types used were the folded plate cone,
-s these Standards are now about to be replaced by the two radial rafter cone, truss-supported cone and internally-framed
-ew Euronorms, there seems little point in discussing them fur- dome. An example of a 96ft diameter trussed cone roof tank is
shown in Figure 2.11.
Although these Standards were prepared for the exclusive use
2,9.5 Related Standards of the Shell Company to procure large numbers of tanks for the
refinery expansions ofthe 1960s and 1970s. The needto issue
-rere are numerous Standards covering a wholevariety of sub- the documents to tank building contractors ensured that they

:cts such
-ents, as issues,
safety etc site
materials, whichlayout and tank spacing
are necessary for tank require-
design- rapidly and
copied spread byothers. the
usedthroughout industry and
Consequently were shamelessly
they became an "un-
:'s and manufacturers and which will be mentioned in this official" Standard and are used as such to this day. Whilstthis
: lok. These come from organisations such as APl, ASTM, The may have been annoying for the company, it is a tribute to the
'.atronal Fire Protection Association (NFPA), European Stan- authors of these documents and to the sound and practical
:afds, British Standards Institution (BSl) and bodies such as engineering that they contain.
-re Institute of Petroleum (lP).
2.9.7.2 The Chicago Bridge Engineering Standards
-rese will be discussed as and when required.
Chicago Bridge & lron Company was responsible for numerous
significant developments in the storage tank field and licensed
2.9.6 The EEMUA Standard
its technology to a number of other companies over the years.
Its floating rooi designs were encapsulated in a series of partic-
- r to about 1976 refrigerated gases were stored in single con- ularly well-produced documents, which through the licensing
ra nment tanks surrounded by a low remote bund. An event in process filtered out into the tank building industry and were
'376 caused the industryto reviewliquid containment systems
again shamelessly plagiarised, becoming in effect the "unoffi-
':: these products from a safety point ofview The Standards in cial" Standard.
':'ce at the time (APl 620, BS 4741and BS 5387) considered
-'rly single containment systems and there was clearly a need 2.9.7,3 The Exxon basic practices
=ri a Standard which encompassed other forms of containment
The Exxon/Esso organisation published its own Standards cov-
:: avoid misunderstandings and misinterpretations. ering a wide range of subjects including storage tanks for a
-re Engineering Equipment and Materials Users Association number of products. These Standards were based on US Stan-
:EN,4UA) is a UK-based equipment users association and was dards and practices adjusted to suit the perceived needs ofthe
':rt to be an appropriate bodyto propose and draft a set of rules company.
:r coverthis regulatory shortfall. In 1987 EEMUAl4Twas pub-
shed, and after a period of time sufficient to allowfor the indus- 2.9.8 Standards for other products
:JS views of the document to be known, was given to the
lritish Standards Committee PVE/15 to form the basis of BS
-777 The foregoing has concentrated somewhat myopically on the
_

storage of flammable products, mainlyfor the petrochemical in-

-:re subject of the various containment systems for the safe dustry Indeed a number of the Standards discussed above
::ofage of refrigerated liquid gases will be discussed at greater have "petrochemical" or "oil jndustry" in their titles.There are
;.rgth later in Storage Tanks & Equipment. other products and some of these have their own Standards.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 13

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 47/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
2 History of storage tanks

The American Water Works Association (AVVWA) has pro- A\ /wA D100 has a particularty good seismic design section.
duced a number ofStandards on its own and some of these are This is not surprising as the chairman of the DIOO Revision
listed below: Task Force is Bob Wozniak, a tu/orld guru" in the area of seis-
ANSUAVWA Dl00-96 mic tank design and someone whose workwillbe discussed in
Welded Sleel Tanks for Water goraae detail in later Chaoters.
ANS|/AWWA D103-97
Factory-Coated Bofted geel Tanks for Water Storcge
ANSI/AM /A D110-95 2.10 References
grand prestressed
Wire
Waterand
Tanks Wound Circular Conuete
ANSYAWWA D1I5-95 2.'l Oil on the rcils, Alan Coppin, The HistoricalModelRaif
way Society and Amadeus Press Ltd of Huddersfield.
Circular Prcstressed ConTete Water Tanks with Cir-
Published 1999, ISBN 0 902 835 17 3.
cumferential Tendons
These are all interesting documents and theywill be discussed 2.2 Handbook of storage tank systems, Edited by Wayne
in later Chapters of Sforage Tanks & Equipment. B. Geyer, Marcel Dekker Inc., ISBN 0 8247 8589 4.

14 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 48/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

3 Ambient temperature storage tank

design
The design of vertical, cylindrical tanks for the storage ofliquids at ambient temperatures can be
divided into three basic areas:
. The shell
. The boftom
. The roof
The design of each of these is discussed in detail in this Chapter.

Contents:
3.1 European tank design Codes
3.1.1 European Standard prEN 14015 - 'l :2000
3.1. 1.1 Pressure rating
3.1.1.2 Temperature rating
3.1.1.3 Materials
3.1.1.4 Floors
3.1.1.5 Shells
3.1.1.6 Yield stress
3.1.1.7 Primary and secondary wind girders
3. 1.1.8 Roof{o-shell mmDression zone
3.1.'1.9 Fixed and floating roof design
3.1.1.10 Annexes to the Standard
3.'1.2 The German storage tank Code DIN 4119
3.'l..2.1 Parl 1

3.1.2.2 Pan2
3,2 Design data
3.2.1 The BS Code 2654
3.2.1.1 lnformation to be specified by the purchaser
3.2.1.2 Optional and/or alternative information to be supplied by the purchaser
3.2.'1.3 lnformation to be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer
3.2.2 The API Code 650
3.2-3 The draft European Code prEN 14015 - 1 : 2000
3.2.3.1 Annex A (normative) Technical agreements
3.3 The shell
3.3.1 The design of the tank shell
3.3.1.1 Failure around the circumference of the cylinder
3.3.1.2 Failure along the length ofthe cylinder
3.3.2 BS 2654
3.3.2.'l Principal factors determining shell thickness

3.3.2.2 Practical application of thickness formula

3.3.2.3 Exception to 'ons-foot' method
3.3.2.4 Maximum and minimum shell thickness
3.3.2.5 Allowable steel stresses
3.3.2.6 Maximum and minimum operating temperatures
3.3.2.7 Specific gravity or relative density of the stored product
3.3.2.8 Pressure in the roof vapour space
3.3.2.9 Tank shell deslgn illustration
3.3.3 Axial stress in the shell
3.3.3.1 Derivation and assessment of axial stress in a cylindrical shell
3.3.3.2 Allowable compressive stfesses for shell courses
3.3.3.3 Actual comDressive stress
3.3.3.4 Axial stress due to wind loading on the shell

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 15

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 49/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature sto@ge tank
design

3-3.4 Allowable compressive suess

3.4 Tank floors
3.4.1 Floor plate arrangements
3.4.2 British Code requirements
3.4.2.1 Tanks up to and including 12.5 m
diameter
3.4.2.2 Tanks above 12.S m diameter
3.4.3 American Code requirements
3.4.3.1 Annular
floor plates
3.4.3_2 Floors formed from lap_welded plates onlv
3.4.3.3 Lapped floor plates, or annular plates <-12.5
= mm thick
3.4.3.4 Annular plates >i2.5 mm thlck
3.4.3.5 Shell_to_floor plate welds _ consideration
for specific materjats
3.4.3.6 Tank floors which require special
consideration
3.4.3.7 Floor arrangement for tanks requiring
optimum drainage
3.4.4 Environmental considerahons
3.5 Wind and vacuum stiffening
3.5.1 Primary wind girders
3.5.1.1 Refining the design technique
3.5.1.2 Design example

3.5.2 Secondary wind girders

3.5.2.1 Equivatent shell method
3.5.2.2 Number of gjrders required
3.5.2.3 Worked examole
3.5.3 Vertical bending of the sherl
3.5.3.1 Exampte
3.5.3.2 Shell-to-bottom connection
3.5.3.3 Rotation and stress analysis
3.5.3.4 Beam analysis
3.5.4 APt 650
3.5.4.1 General
3.5.4.2 Shell design stresses
3.5.4.3 Use of shell design formulae
3.5.4.4 Shell plate thicknesses
3.5.4.5 Choosing BS or Apl shell thickness design
methods
3.5.4.6 Worked examoles
3.6 The "variable design point,, method
3.6.1 "Variable design point" method development
3.6.2 The bottom shellcourse
3.6.3 The second course
3.6.4 The upper courses
3.6.5 Detailed ,,variable design pojnt" method calculation
3.6.6 Comparison of the thickness results
3.6.7 Shett stiffening
3.6.7.1 Primary windwind
- girders
girders to Apl 650
3.6.7.2 Secondary wind girders to Apt 650
3.6.7.3. Comparison between British and American
secondary wind girder requirements
3.7 Compression area for fixed roof tanks
3.7.1 Effect of internal Dressure
3.7.2 Derivation of the required compresston zone
area
3.7.2.1 Effect of roof slope on cross_sectional
area
3.7.3 Compression zones
3-7.3.1 Compression zone area to BS Code
3.7.3.2 Compression zone area to Apl Code

3.7.3.3 BS and Apl Code differences of allowable compressive stress

3.7.4 Providing the required compression area
3.7.4.1 For the BS Code

16 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 50/296
 3 Ambient tempetaturc storage knk tusrgn
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

3.7.4.2 For the Apt Code

3.7-5 Establishing the compression area
3.7.6 API limitations for the length of the roof compression area
3.7.7 Calculating the compression zone area
3.7.8 Practical considerations
3.7.9 Minimum curb angle requtrements
3.7.9.'l Minimum curb angle sizes for fixed roof tanks
3.7.9.2 Cases where minimum curb angle requirements do not appty
3.7.9.3 Effect of jnternal pressure and tank diameter on required compression
area
3.7.10 Design exampte
3.7.10.1 Roof compression area
3.7.'10.2 Shell compression area
3.7. 1 0.3 Rationalising the calculation
3.7.10.4 Economy of design
3.7.11 Positionjng the centroid of area
3.7.1 1.'1 The BS Code
3.7.11 .2 The APt Code Apoendix F
3.7.11.3 Guidance on the positioning the centroid of area
3.7.1 2 Cost-effective design
3.8 Frangible roofjoint, or weak roof-to-shell joint
3.8.1 lntroduction
3.8.2 Frangibte roofjoint theory
3.8,3 The maxjmum compression zone area allowable
3.8.4 Other factors affecting the frangible roof connection
3.8.4.1 Roof stope
3.8.4.2 Size of weld at the roof plate-to_shell connection
3.8.5 Formula as expressed in BS 2654
3.8.5.1 Additionat requirements to BS 2654
3.8.6 Formula as expressed in Apl 650
3.8.6.1 Additionat requirements to Apl 6SO
3.8.7 Difference between Codes
3.8.8 Conflict of design interests
3.8.8.1 ,,Emergency"
"Service" and design conditions
3.8.9 Examples of frangible and non_frangible roofjoints
3.8.9.'1 Tank designed for an operating pressure of 7.S mbar
3.8.9.2 Tank designed for an operating pressure of 20 mbar
3.8.10 Tank anchorage a means to frangibility
-
3.8.10.'1 Ensuring a frangible roof connection using anchorage
3.8.10.2 Determining anchorage requirements
3.8.10.3 Worked examDle
3.8.10.4 Further design check
3.8.10.5 Other anchorage considerations
3.8.1 1 American Apl 650 Code _ ancnor requrrements
3.8. 1 '1.1 Minimum bott diameter

3.8.1 1.2 Spacing of anchors

3.8.1'1.3 Allowable stresses in anchors
3.8.12 Further guidance on frangible roofs
3.8.12.1 EEMUA
3.9 Tank anchorage further considerations
-
3.9.1 Wind loadjng and internal service pressure
3.9.2 Anchorage attachment
3.9.3 Spacing of anchors
3.9.4 Worked example
3.9.4.1 Completion of tank desrgn
3.9.4.2 Shell wind girder calculation
3.9.4.3 Maximum unstiffened height of the shell
3.9.4.4 Section size for the secondary wind girder

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT J7

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 51/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempenture stonge bnk design

3.9.4.5 Shell-to-roof compression zone

3.9.4.6 Participating roof and shell plate area
3.9.4.7 Roof plating
3.9.4.8 Roof structure
3.9.4.9 Anchorage calculation
3.9.4.10 Overtuming moment due to wind action only
3.9.4.11 Overtuming moment due to wind action while in service

3.9.4.12 Design of the anchorage

3.9.4.13 Check for frangibitity
3.9.4.14 Wind toading to Apt 650
3.10 Tanks produced in stainless steel materials
3.11 Seml-buried tanks for the storage of aviation fuel
3.12 References

18 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 52/296
7/18/2019 3 99
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 9 :E Ejg u,k d""is|

3.1 European tank design Godes mulae. This is similar to the Apl 650 ,,one-foot,, method excepi
-.re European Codes whlch will be discussed that:
here are as fol_
:,vs: . In the first formula, the design stress is
% of the material
. European Standard prEN 14015 -1 :2000 minimum yield stress and the formula includes the design
pressure (in the roof space) which can be neglected if < 10
. German Standard DIN 41i9 parts 1 & 2 mbar, and the corrosion allowance (if any).

3.'1.1 European
. In the second formula, the test stress is % of the material
Standard prEN 14015-1 :2000 minimum yield stress and this formula includes only the test
pressure (in the roofspace), which js higher than the design
-- s
is a draft
-: rlment document
procedure which
and will soonhas been through the public
be issued as a full European
pressure.
::3ndard. The content ofthe final version is not expected t,o dif- For both of these formulae, the maximum permitted design
-:- significantly stress is 260 N/mm2 (as is the case in BS 2654).
from the draft. The fulltifle ofthe Enqlish version
: Specification for the design and manufacture;f site built, The API 650 "variable point" method of shell thickness calcula_
:iical, cylindrical, flat bottomed, above ground, welded, me_ tion is not included in the Standard.
= c tanks for the storage of liquids at ambient temperature and 3.1.1.6 Yield stress
:: rve - Part '1: Steel tanks,.
- -: Standard appears to The yield stress shall be the minimum value specified for:
be based on BS 2654 and Apl 650, to_
.::rer with some informative Annexes and all together js a
:: rprehensive document. Some interesting aspects of certain
:::s of the Standard are ouflined below:
: 1.1.1 Pressure rating Yie d or 0.2 % prootsftess

--: Standard allows posjtive design pressures up to 5OO mbar

- -f,ur categories:
. \on-pressure, up to 10 mbar 3.1.1.7 Primary and secondary wind girders
r -ow-pressure, up to 25 mbar The requirements here are similar to that of BS 2654 and Apl
. 'ligh-pressure, up to 60 mbar 650 except that, for negative pressures more than -g.S mbar, a
design methodology has to be agreed between the tank pur_
. ./ery high-pressure, up to 500 moar chaser and manufacturer.
--: maximum negative pressure which applies only to Very 3,1.1.8 Roof-to-shell compression zone
-
:^-pressure tanks is -20 mbar. However the requirements
: . ^ n the Standard for shell stability are only valid for nega_ The requirements here are similar to ihat of BS 2654 and Apl
: : f,fessures upto-8.5 mbar, beyondthisvalue a suitablede- 650.
: :- .nethodology has to be agreed beiween the tank pur- 3.1.1.9 Fixed and floating roofdesrgn
r -:ser and the manufacturer.
The requirements here are similar to that of BS 2654 and Apl
'1.2
:'
--: Temperature rating 650.
:emperature range is from 300.C down to -40"C. For tem_ 3.1.1-10 Annexes to the Standard
::-::Jres above 100'C, the elevated temperature Vield stress
The following annexes to the Standard are worthy of mention:
- - i j of carbon and carbon manganese steels sh;ll be certi_
'r: ry the steel supplier. The Standard gives a table ofsteels to Annex B. Opemtional and safety considerations. Gives ouid_
:=-:ard EN 10028 - 2 & 3 for use at;levated temperatures. ance on the selectron of tank type. bunding requirementiand
::' :anks constructed in stainless steel materials, the vield fire Drotection.
,.s ,s raken as the ,l % proof stress for tanks subiect;d to
Annex E. Requirements for floating roof seals. Gives details of
i -: ent and elevated temperatures.
the type of roof seals, which are available.
:' 1.3 Materials
Annex F. Alternative steel specifications. Gives on the selec_
- : -: f,n and carbon manganese steels for use in the manufac_ tion of other national standard steel specifications and the re-
-': :'tanks are tabulated in the Standard. There is also a table quirements, which govern their use withjn the parameters
ofthe
: :-steniticand austenitic-ferriticstainless steels to Standard tank Standard.
- , ' :088-1. l\4artensitic stainless steels cannot be used.
: ' 1.4 Floors Annex H. Recommendations for other types of floors. Gives
recommendations for the thickness of floor plating, which is
--: ':quirements for tank floors is similar to BS 2654 and Apl supported on a grillage. Also gives methods for constructing
:: -',1inimum plate thjcknessforstainlessfloors is given as 5 double containment floors.
- - '3. Iap-welded floors and 3 mm for butt-welded floors. For Annex K. Design rules for frangible tanks. The rules here seem
.: -:: 'r steel floors
this are 6 mm and 5 mm respectivelv to apply principally to unanchored tanks and hence appear to
:' 1.5 She s be limiting in scope. Where frangibility cannot be achieved us_
ing the standard method given jn the annex, then the,,soecial
|, - r'num nominal shell thickness. The table of minimum
arrangement" is recommended where a weak upper sheil
': - -a shell thickness
for carbon steel tanks is similar to that rs proposed (as shown in Figure 3.71 , Section 3.9.12).
loint
. :S 2654 except that at the larger tank diameters, thinner
: :- -::han BS2654isallowed,althoughthisisstillthickerthan Annex L. Requirements for venting systems. Gives detajled
* :: - API design parameters forventing under normal product imoorvex_
650. A table of minimum nominal shell Dlate thick_
-i': : nctuded for stainless steel shefls. port and climatic conditions. fof tanks with and without
ihermal
jnsulation. Emergency venting causing
very high outbreathing
';::
:.::ulated shell plate the
: establishedfrom ihickness. Each shell course thjck-
greatervaluederivedfrom twofor-
capacities is considered, as in the case of a fire local to a tank.
or due to operational malfunctions, which cause a rapjd rise in

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 19

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 53/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature stomge tank design

internal pressure. The possible requirement for emergency tory) then, presumably DIN 4'119, together with any other Euro-
vacuum venting is also considercd. pean national Codes, will become historical documenb.
Annex P Heating and/or cooling systems. Gives advice on
heat transfer fluids and types ofheat transfer devices, together 3.2 Design data
with their insbllation.
At the commencement of a project it is important that the tank
Annex R. Surface finish. Gives general recommendations for purchaser clearly defines his exact requirements to the tank
the preparation ofthe internal and external surfaces of carbon constructor, in order that there can be no misunderstandings
and stainless steel tanks. between the two parties. To assist in this initial process, the de-
It must be remembered that the above information is based on sign Codes each devote a section, which addresses this topic,
the draft Standard and may be modified as and when the Stan- and they are discussed in the following Sections.
dard is finalized and published as an adopted document. Some of the terminology used in the following lists and data
sheets may not be familiar to those who are not fluent in tank
3.1.2 The German storage tank Code DIN 4119 technology but such terms will become apparent on reading
Storage Tank & Equlprnenf and Codes to which it refers.
DIN 4119 is issued in two Darts:
3.2.1 The BS Gode 2654
. Part 1 - Fundamentals, design and tests.
. Part 2 - Calculations. Clause 3 ofthe Code lists the appropriate information together
with references to other relevant clauses in the Code. to be ex-
The Codes does nottake the sameform as the BS, API or Euro-
pean prEN 14015 Codes, as it does not give specific formulae changed prior to implementing the requirements of this Stan-
dard and inspections by the purchaser during erection, and is
for designing the various elemenb of the tank.
oresented as follows:
3.'1.2.1 Pafi 1
3.2.1.1 Information to be specified by the purchaser
This advises on rules, which applyto: corrosion protection, ma-
The following basic information to be specified bythe purchaser
terial selection, fabrication, erection, welding and venting for
shall be fully documented. Both the definitive requirements
fixed roof tanks. There are also directives forfloating roofs. This
specified throughout the Standard and the documented items
part ofthe Code also lists many other related DIN Codes, which
shall be satisfied before a claim of comoliance with the Sian-
are referred to in the text of the Code. which are to be used for
dard can be made and verified.
designing the tank.
(a) Geographical location of the tank.
3.1.2.2Paft2
(b) Diameter and height or the capacity of the tank, including
This is an elaboration of Part 1 and defines: ullage. Where only the capacity of the tank is specified
1) The mathematicalsymbols, which areto be used in the de, ground conditions shall be included.
srgn process. (c) Whetherfixed orfloating roof isto be supplied and the type
2) Design loads, including wind loads and test loads. of roof if the purchaser has specific preferences, i.e. for

3) The principles for designing the shell, with minimum allow- fixed
roofs roofs (cone,
(pontoon, dome,
double membrane,
deck, etc.). etc.) or ior floating
able thickness Iimitations but does not oive a method for
the design of the shell. (d) Allrelevant properties ofthe contained fluid, including the
:
relative density and corrosion allowance (if, how and
4) The principles governing shellstability underwind condi-
tions, stating safety factors, which shall apply, but with no
where reouired). t
(e) The design vapour pressure and vacuum conditions in
method for the calculation of shell stability.
side the tank (see 2.1). It
5) The principles governing the design ofthe shell-to-bottom
(f) The minimum and maximum design metal temperatures
area, the shell{o-roof area and the requirements for
frangibility. (see 2.2).

6) Rules for the design of fixed and floating roofs. (g) The size, number and type of all mountings required
showing locations. Maximum filling and emptying rates
7) Advice on the design of the tank foundations and any specialventing arrangemenb (see 9.9).
Again, this part of the Code does not give any formulae for the (h) The minimum depth of productwhich is always present in
design ofthe various areas tank provides references
to many related DIN Codes ofthe
and learnedbut
papers on the subject. the tank (see 10.1(b)).
Also included in the list are the tank Codes API 650 and API
(i) lf the tank is to be thermally insulated (see 12).

620. 0) Areas of responsibility between the designer, the manu-

facturer and the erector ofthe tank when these are not the
The heading to both parts of the Code includes the following same.
statement "The design, calculation and construction of the
structural steel parts for tanks require a baslc knowledge of
(k) Quality ofthe water (particularly if inhibitors are to be pree
ent) to be used during tank water test (see 1a.4.2).
steel construction and tank construction and the accepted
codes of practice. Hence only companies employing experts (l) Expected maximum differential settlements during water
having such knowledge and ableto ensure proper construction testing and service lifetime of the tank (see AppendixA).
may carry out such work." (m) Other specifications which are to be read in conjunctio,'
This statement leads to the conclusion that any recognized with this Standard.
tank design code methodology could be used in conjunction 3.2.1.2 Optional and/or alternative information to be suF
with the stipulations regarding: loadings, stress values safety plied by the purchaser
factors etc., which are contained within DIN 4119. The following optional and/or alternative information to be su}
However, as and when the draft European Code prEN 14015 plied by the purchaser shall be fully documented. Both the d€-
becomes universally adopted (to which Germany is a signa- finitive requirements specified throughout this Standard arE

20 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 54/296
 3 Ambient temperc:,.a s:a.aa: .-. .::
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
:-e documented items shall be satisfied before a claim of com- (a) Aliernative maierials selection other ihan i^._i: ::: .
--
: iance with the Standard can be made and verified. in the Code (see 3.1).
a) Whether a check analysis is required (see 4 3.2). (b) Precautionsforavoiding brittlefracture durtng -. :-':':: :
3) Whetherthe weight of insulation is excluded from the mini- iesting (see figure 1).
mum superimposed loadings (see 5.3.2). (c) Alternative bottom plate layouts (see 6.'1.2).
:) Whether significant external loading from piping, etc. is (d) Spacing of the roof-plaie-supportjng mernbers io- ::- -
present (see 5.5). roof (see 8.3.1).
r) Whether seismic loading is pfesent requiring specialist (e) Any increase in roofjoint efficiency for tapped and ..: :::
consideration jncluding methods and criteria to be used in roof plates (see 8.3.6).
such analysis (see 5.7 and Appendix G).
(f) Alternative loading conditions for
: r Whether a fixed roof is required and if so: fioating
other than those specified in the Code (see 9.2.1 des:-
roof .4l
(1) if cone roof slope is other than 1 in 5 (see 8.2.2); (g) The operating and cleaning positjon levels ofthe suppc:
ing legs (see 9.10.1).
(2) if radius of curvature of dome roof is other than L5
times tank diameter (see 8.2.2); (h) Proposed method to hold the plates in position for we din 3
(but see 14.5.1).
(3) whether made as a double-welded lap joint or a
butt-joint (see 8.3.5); (i) The location and number of checks on shell tolerances
during erection (see 14.6.2).
(4) whether particular venting fequirements are specified
(see 8.6.'1 and 8.6.2). 0) Methods of protecting the shell during erection against
wind damage, etc. (see 14.9).
..
(k) lf fixed roofs are to be erected in the tank bottom, and
' Whether a floating roof is required and if so: raised into position by an air pressure or suitable means
whether floating roof is designed to land as part of the
( 1) (see 14.10).
normal operating procedure (see 9.1.1):
Sequence in which joints are io be welded (see 15.2).
(l) lf previously approved appropriate wetding procedures
(2) whether floating roof is designed for wind-excited fa- (m)
tlgue loading (See 9.3); are acceptable (see'18.1.3).
(3) whether top edge of butkhead is to be provided with (n) Test procedures to be used dufing the tank water test (see
continuous single fillet weld (see 9.S): 18.1.1).
(4)iloating roof ladderdetails (see 9.6.1 , 9.6.2 and 9.6.4);
(5) type of primary roof drains (see 9.7.1);
3.2.2 The API Code 650
(6) requirements for additional roof manholes (see 9.11); Appendix L of the Code gives four data sheets which should be
(7) for selection of seal materials-whether maximum aro- completed, these are shown jn Figure 3.1. On completion of
rnatic content of the product is greater than 4A% @lm) tank erection, the purchaser shall recejve from the manufac-
(see 9.13); turer a copy of these sheets, filled in to show the ,,as built,'
(8) requirements for the design
details.
ofgauge hatch (see 9..j4);

= An alternative type of manhole cover (see 11.3). 3.2.3 The draft European Code prEN 140,15 -1:2000
- Details of flange drjlling if not in accordance w jth BS 1 560
(see 11.7). AnnexAofthe Code lists the appropriate jnformation together
Details of painting requirements and whether pickling, grit with references to the relevant clauses in the Code, and is pre_
or shot blasting is required (see ,13.6.1, 13.6.3, and sented as follows:
14.12).
3,2.3.1 Annex A (normative) Technical agreements
D-etails of erection marks for plates and sections (see A.1 Information to be supplied by the purchaser
13.7.1).
The following information shall be fully documented:
' Wheiherwelding electrodes and/or key plating equipment
are to be supplied by the tank manufacturer (see .14.1). the design pressure and the design internal negative pres_
sure (see 5.1 and Table 5.1);
Alternative arrangements for provisjon of tank foundation
(see 14.3). the stainless steel grade, and the risk of corrosion (see
- 6.2.1.2\;
- Whether a welder making only fillet welds is
approved for such welding in accordancerequired
with BSto EN
be the requirements for ihe surface finish of stainless steel
287-1 (see 16.3.2).
- (see 6.2.1.4);
Whether tack welding of shell, roof and bottom is permit_ the value of the seismic load (see 7.2.11);
te^d-to be carried out by non-approved operators (see
-
the bottom type if not single (see 8..1 .1);
16.3.2).
the bottom is to be butt-welded (see 8.4.1);
: Whether pneumatic testing of reinforcing plates is re_ -
quired (see 18.3.1). the side ofthe roofthat is welded and the size ofthe over_
- lap (see'10.3.5);
:2.1.3 Information lo be agreed between the purchaser
i'1d the manufacturer the venting requirements (see 10.6.1);
-
- - e foliowing information to that emergency pressure relief is not to be included (see
be agreed between the purchaser - 1O.6.2):
: - l manufacturer shall be fully documented. Both the definitjve
-; ru rements the provision offloating covers (see 10.7);
specified throughoui this Standard and the docu_
-. rted items shall be satjsfied before a claim of compliance -
the provision of floating roofs
:r the Siandard can be made and verified. - 11); and floaiing roof seals (see

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 21

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 55/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature stonge tank design

API STANDARD 650 DATE

BY
STORAGETANK FILE NO
DATASHEET PACE ----------LOF

II{FOR AIION ITO BE COIPLEIEO BY PI,RCHASERI

1. PIIRCHAS€B/AOEI'IT

SIAIE-AP @OE P}€NE

2. lrsER
3. EFECnON$re N^MEOFPI,ATiIT
LOCAtrt
4. rAtKllO. MAXlirJi, CAPTATY {325.1) ( 0 NEIITVOFKINGCAPACrV t"3 (tt0
OVERFIIL PROtEcTld{ (APl-23stl- .n(bbD OR (n.}
PI'MP|iIG BATE$ II{ nfih (urr) oul rtf,h (bbl,lr)
'
O
-ms
MAXMI'M OPEAANNG IEIiPEEAIUNE 'c cD
7. PFDUCT STOBEO DEStGit SPEC|FC GaAv|TY_ Ar _ lc fF)
VAFON PFESSUT€
-
DESIGIMETAL'E P€FAIUFE-
SHE[-
TCCO
(n.) -
& CoFFGION AL o/VANCE: nn ROOF

EOTIOT mn(n,) STR CrUF^lfi nm(n)

9. $Cr OESIGN: EI 8A6|c ATANDTNDASO O APPEITDO(A CI APPBDUF -nun
OES|G PNESS'|NE kPh (6f/nq
10. FOOF DESIGN: o EAgcsrar{)aFD6S0 o AITFENE|XC|EfiEATALnOAI Gl
q AFPE|{DTX G {AlUU|l{Ji ItOilE) 3 APFEI{D{X H oMfEn
'lAl
F.oAllXc)
FR r\GIBIER@FJOINT? O YEs O NO

1r. nooF OCSICIN liFoFl'rAllolt

ur\{ffit uvE toao rPa (ttP)
sFECtAt LOADA (Pftyv|O€ g(ErC$ |tr. &fiC)
IN$'IATION LOAD l@a (tdtlc,
MA}II/T.iI OESIGN R@F IEMPEFA'TURE 'c (f)
G SES ITI lHE VAP€F SFACE
12. EAFIIII(IJA(E DESIGN? ] YES C IIO (APPENDIX E n@FIE RG (ar0.a.5)? C YES O Mt
gEISMC ZONE ri ,iPoRTAllcE FlcrclR
zol{E FAcToR (TABLE E-2) slrE coEfflclEl{T (TABLE E-3)
lAWND IOAD: VEL@ITY
PrcVDE INIEAi'EDIATE WIND GIFDER (3.9-7}'? ] YES 5 NO

Ia.ENVIROIIIIEIVTAIEFFECTS: MAX ,|JMIlAlNFAtl

lorasNow AcclJt rLAItoN nm (h.)
15, SZE FESTFEIEI{S: r4A)ort M t)|Ar,EIEri - m O)
MAri&ir H€Exr m(r )

i6.FCIJM}AIIO'I TYFE EABI}' O @iICBETE RNGWAII ] OftGN

EEIIIAFXS
'

Figure 3.1 Storage tank data sheet - page t

Fron API 650, Appendix L

22 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 56/296
7/18/2019
3 Ambient tempenture storage tank
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
&silp

API STANDARD 650 DA'E

STORAGE TANK F|LE lto,

DATASHEET PAGE 2 OF

CON9.rR'CTX'I{ DETALS fiO AE COWLETED BY XAITUFACTURER AI{OIOR PURCHASEEI

T. MAN'FICruRGF

sraTE _ zt? @oE_ PHotE

sEa[L l'|O.
FAarc toa
IDOF€SS
c|IY sT IE _ ZP@O€_ FHo{\|E
SErui|(l
9. MAIE TLSPECI:E IOn6:9lEt
mc
BOfIOtl
sBUCru [,8
1. ro.G$Er
PIAIE lrnDn€$D1}mtC{ESSES OGiuD| O @mo6ni lU-OrvANCE}, N rEn (|l,)
t_ 4
2-5
3-.*c
TA|{KE}IIOI* PLAET}ICI
PLAIE1}|q(NESS qtlAP o qJrt aE^lrs
A IO O Ft{I' CEI'IER
7- MD&I{,u WIOIHiI{0 I}IC(NESS dF Eorr€[, ANNU-IIR FtfiEa FS), tN |rlln trl]
8. mF-r(>$G[o€T [(F|eUEEFtt
9. |MIEMCDIAIE {IiD€INOEF? O YEg O |{) FOA USE AS lYrrxvt^w
IOP IyI'IEO|EEA O YES O ito
t0. R(bfIYPEr E g,PFOFIED O SEIfr9I,PFORIED q A-0ATII.16
6LCE OR RTDI'S (n)
ll. Roof RrrE: lHtq(NEss
'Y"n
dllnIh.) f IAP O BT'TI 3 JC'MT
12. P efi;
sltg' - DqER|oF? O YES f ito INTEfIIOR? C YES ANO
SNFACE FREPAMNON
ETICI'- uroEagnE? t YEs 3 NO |N'EAPB? O YES ONO
SI'RFACE PAEPAMTIOT\I
SITIJC'UAAT STEEL_ EXIEIIOA' 3 YEE f I{O NTEfNOF? C YES fiE
s€GcstcaTroN
13, IAt{raOTItt COAIt|'tq: |MTER|OF? t YES f {O MATEBiAL
AfPrrc^lbN siPECiFrCAIor{
ta. lit6:PEcTtcN gv: 880P RCT.D
 5. I4ELO E(^t t{aTK|N,r FIDPGAAPIT
gjfFtlrrE I Sf uouo PEt€IR^r{roa ttrrB soiltc
16. F|LMS Pfl(FEBlY.OF
1Z IEAXIESn e ETTOII
sHs.r
|a. MtI.lEStFEFdATe aFqrnEm
PI.AIE flBuqruRal.g fEs
I8. P|JnCHASEA€ REFEm\EE r'fiAV{iE
{} TAIIKSEE Olrrt€TEn n (10 tEtel{T m (n)
21. DA1EOF SI M) tO6soCfirEfl/AEVEtO.l
FE:M[AI(s

qrte 3.1 9orage tank d eta sheel - Ngo 2

r',n El 650, Appendix L

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 23

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 57/296
 7/18/2019
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

API STANDARD 650

STORAGE TANK FILE No.
DATA SHEET PAGE 3 OF

APfl'BTE{ATCES ('o g€ CO||PIETED EY I&US'FACII'REA AIOOS Purcrl^sE8}

I.SIANWAYSTYLE: O CIBCULAR O SIF^IGi{T ANGLEIO I.IOR@O tAL DBOFEES

IIDOEF
-
nft{tr} lFflGlH _ n(n)

coaAt/oFFs(arft srrldtato SPECTAL

4,E4TED D@F sr€ET? Cr YES O I,b(APPEIIOXAT4fIKSOXIY) o FArsEo I fursH

5. €CAFFOIO H|Tql
5. NTENML PIPING: sirclroN UNE
HEA'NG COI 9UFFACE AFEA fif (NC)

7. AOOF DRAIN: HOa€ Joll\ttED

& iK). Al,lo SlzE of SHEI M l[ Ol-ES -

9. NO. AND gZE OF ROOF MANHOTES
lo sflEl llozlEs (sEE FrernEss{8.3-5. AXO 9.? AND T ArES 3{.3{. AND}iO}:

FI'NCED IHAEADEO
oaitNT^lo{  €IGHT rual
l'lArFi( SEE ael o8t- SPL a D BOITOM sEBVtCf

1 R@F l{ozztEs lt{cLtSNG vEitTlNG @n'{EcrloN (sEE nqJREs 91'l attlo }15 aJ\D T sLEs }16 aI'iD l17):
1
I
oe|ENrAnOt{ DISTAiICE FFOM I G
SEE ETNGED TTfiEAO€D AS||FOaCEMEIfT CENIEA I SEFVEE
|
a
t
a
t
a
ll
D
.r
g(E
li
TIOIEI C*ES AND/Of, SEPABAIE S}GEIS UAY AE ATTICHED TO Gq'EF 6FEqA NEOT'FEM€HTs'
a
(r
a
|l
a
t
t
t
I
igure 3.1 Storage tank dala sheet - page 3
Fron API 650, Appendix L kF

24 STOMGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 58/296
 3 Ambient tempercture storcge tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

API STANDARD 650

STORAGE TAI\IK
DATA SHEET

.- Top ol sh6ll h€ighl

I
  mw op€dlng &lume dmhing h *tr ta.Ic

{bDl) d {ir)

-nr3 -mm
t, Overitl petetion ld.l (or volun.) dqliffttrli c API ll50.o
* Ss 16J,2.

ttre 3.1 Sto.age tank data sheet - page 4

Fan API 650, Appendix L

the amount of product to be always present in the tank the range of operating temperature (see Q.2.4);
- (see 12.1); -
the procedure, qualification and acceptance tests for ad-
the roof manhole cover (see 13.3.1); - hesive (see Q.3.3.1);
-
if the roof plates to be welded to the roof structure (see
- 15.8.4); - the insulation thickness or heat loss requirements (see
4.6.1);
the position of floating roof (see D.3.1)
- - the tank's external appearance and finish (see R.2.1).
the floating roof design and type (see D.3.4);
- - the painting system used (see R.2.2).
lhe additional roof manholes (see D.3.6);
- A.2 Information agreed between the purchaser and the
contractor
the support leg operating and cleaning positions (see
- D.3.13);
the additional requirements for roof plating nozzle re-
the gauging device (see D-3.14); - inforcement (see Table 5.1) and
-
if a rolling ladder is not required (see D.3.15);
- - the design methodology and fabrication tolerances for de-
sign internal negative pressures above 8.5 mbar (see
the roof main drain if not a hose or articulated pipe type
- (see D 3.8.1): Table 5.1);
if a trial erection and inspection of a floating roof is re- the steel to be used it not from Tables 6.1.1-1 to 6.1.1-3
- quired (see D.4);
- (see 6.1.1.1);

if floating roof rim seals are required (see E.1); the mounting materials, when different to the shell plates
- - (see 6.1.7.1);
the evaporation rate (see L.3.'1.1 c));
- the live loads (see 7.2.6);
- the maximum gas flow under malfunction conditions ofthe -
gas blanket (see L.4.3); the mncentrated live load (see 7.2.7);
-
the emergency flow capacity for other possible causes the value ofthe wind load ifthe wind sDeed is more than 45
- (see 1.4.4); - m/s (see 7.2.10);
the emergency vacuum flow capacity (see L.5); the anticipated settlement loads (see 7.2.13);
- -
STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 25

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 59/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempemture storage tank design

the emergency loads (see 7.2.14);

-
the bottom gradient if more then 1:100(see8.1.1);
-
the guaranteed residual liquid level to resist uplift (see
- 8.2.3);
the incorporation of annular plates (see 8.3.1);
-
the option to be used if the SG exceeds 1.0 kg/f (see
- 9.1.3);
the shell thickness for
- greater than 45 mm (see stainless
Table 9-steel tanks of
1.5 NOTE 3);diameters

- whether the underside welds of stiffening rings shall be q

continuous or intermittent (see 9.3.1.11);
the design methodology and load combinations (see
- 9.3,3.9); u
the span of roof suppoding structure for dome roofs (see
- 10_3.1);
the joint efficiency if different to the standard values (see
- 10.3.6);
Figure 3.2 Example of a tank imploding
the minimum size of manholes (see 13.1.1);
-
the details of non-standard nozzles (see '13.3.2);
- painting, had not been removed and the tank imploded wher
the method of heating or cooling the fluid (see 13.10); product was being drawn from it.
-- the non-standard distances between an oDenino and a The various stresses to which the shell of a tank is subiected
plate edge (see 15.5);
are as follows:
non-standard types of floating roofs (see D.2)
- Hoop tension
non-standard floating roofs (see D.3.1);
- The majorstress in the shellis hoop tension which is caused by
the specific requirementfor a floating roof (see D.3.2.4); the head of product in the tank, togetherwith any overpressure
- in the roof sDace of a fixed roof tank.
the alternative valuesfor live load when restino on its suo-
- port legs (see D.3.3); Axial compression
the method of assessing frangibility (see K.2); This stress is made up of the following componenb:
-
- the safety coefficient for frangible roofs (see K.4); . The self-weight of the tank, comprising the shell, the roof
the design offlush-type clean-out doors (see 0.1.1); the superimposed load on the roof and any attachments b
- the tank.
the proprietary system of insulation (see Q.1);
-
the insulation system to be used (see Q.2.1); The load due to any internal vacuum in llE
- . tank. compressive
the basis for the wind load calculations (see Q.2.3);
- . Wind load acting on the shellofthe tank causes a overturF
the type of foam insulation (see Q.8.2);
- ing effect and hence induces a compressive load on the lee-
the sequence offoaming and cladding (see Q.8.2); ward side of the shell.
-
- the means of checking the quality of foam (see Q.8.2); . Where a tank is located in a geographicalarea which issLS
the type of foam and its physical and thermal properties ject to earthquakes, then compressive stresses due to ti
- (see Q.8.3). seismic action can be transmifted to the shell. This lattsf
stress component is dealt with separately in Chapter 15 or
26 where seismic design is covered in debil.
3.3 The shell
Vertical bending
3.3.1 The design of the tank shell The natural elasticitv in the shell materialallows the shellto
pand radially when under service loading, but this expansior.
Storage tanks are often disparagingly referred to by construc- restrained at the shell-to-floor junction and therefore the
tors and users as "tin cans" and to some degreethis is true in as suffers vertical bending stresses in this area.
much as there are similarities in the ratios of the shellthickness 3.3.1.1 Failure around the circumfurence ofthe cylindet
to diameter of both items.
In orderto demonstrate how iank shells are designed, some
For example a typical soup can is 75 mm diameter x 105 mm sic engineering design principles must be considered.
high (d/h = 1/1.4) and has a wall thickness of 0.15 mm. A stor-
Figure 3.3 shows a cylindrical shell having a shell, whici"
age tank of 10 m diameter x 14 m high has a wallthickness of 5
comparatively thin, compared to its diameter, the ends
mm. lt can be seen that the thickness-to-diameter ratio for the
capped off and it is subjected to an internal pressure'p'.
souD can is 0.002 and for the tank is 0.0005. The tank ratio is
four times less than that of the soup can, which demonstrates D = diameter
how relatively flimsy the shell ofa tank really is particularly if it is
subjected to a partial vacuum condition as is demonstrated in
t = wall thickness
Figure 3.2. L = length
The scaffolding around the tank in Figure 3.2 was erected to al- n intarnrl nrac.,
low the shell to be painted. lmmediately after the painting was = 'ra
completed, the tank was put back into service but a plastic bag,
P = horizontal load on the cylinder
which had been put overthe roof vent valve to protect it during F = tangential load in the wall ofthe cylinder

26 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 60/296
 3 Anbient temperaturc storage tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

specific gravity of tank contents (non-dimen-

sional) - but never taken as less than unity for
desrgn purposes
design pressure in the vapour space above the
product level (mbar)
corrosion allowance which, at the discretion of
the tank customer, may be added to the de-
sign thickness (mm)
H = distance from the bottom ofthe course under
: t-:e 3.3 A cylind calshell consideration to a predetermined height at the
top of the tank, which is the limit of the fluid
height (m)
::nsider a failure around the circumference of the cylinder:
_:adP=pressurexarea The predetermined height at the top of the tank is either:

=pxnl4xD2 equ 3.1

. The top ofthe shell.

: to a circumferential failure= stress x area ofthe cy-

. The level of an overflow designed to limit the fluid height in
"sistance
-irical the shell.
wall.
xrixDxt equ3.2
. Whentheheightof theshell includes a wind skirt with over-
=f flow openings and/or seismic freeboard, the maximum
::Jating equations 3.1 and 3.2 product height for calculation purposes shall be the over-
pxnl4xD2=fxr.xDxt flow height, or the height less the seismic freeboard.

--en
. (H - 0.3) - The explanation of this term is given later in Sec-
lion 3.3.2.2.
r=ltD equ3.3 For the moment however, consider a tank having a shell of con-
4 xt stant thickness over its full height, based on the full head of
product in the tank represented by the simple term H (m).
: 3.1.2 Failure along the length of the cylinder
Note: The tank diameter D is generally taken as the diameter
-:lsider a failure along the length of the cylinder: measured to the centreline of the shell plating. How-
::-ceF=pressurexarea everforfloating roof tanks where it is preferable to have
a smooth internal surface for the roof seal to act
=pxDxl equ3.4 against, the diameter may be measured to the inside
: stance to a longitudinal tear in the cylinder wall surface of each course of shell plates thus avoiding
-=s
steps beiween adjacent courses.
= ::ress x area of the cylinder wall.
Equaiion 3.6 is re-arranged for t as foliows:
=fx2xlxt equ3.5
equ 3.8
::-ating equations 3.4 and 3.5 2xS
3xD xL =f x2xL xt Where stress f is represented by S and p is the internal loading
in the tank, which is made up of two components as shown in
Figure 3.4.
' PXD
xt
equ36 The flrst component is due to the head of product in the tank H
2
expressed as a height in metres.
:. :omparing equations 3.3 and 3.6 it can be seen that the
The second component is the pressure in the vapour space 'p'
- ; ^est stress is given by equation 3.6 and therefore a cylinder
- which is due to the natural gassing off of the stored product, or
- :er pressure will fail by tearing along a line parallel to its axis
from the use of a positive pressure inert gas "blanket" over the
than on a section perpendicular to its axis.
=:-er product. This pressure is controlled by the use of pressure and
--: gasic equation 3.6 is used in the tank design Codes for de- vacuum relief valves fitted to the roof and these are covered
:*ining the thickness for the tank shells. later in Chapter 8, Section 8.2.4.2.
--: way the British, American and European tank design In order for the above formula to work, the input data has to be
- ::es apply the above basic principles differ in approach. Ini- expressed in acceptable units as follows:
-: , the British Standard 2654 will be considered, then later,
: I fiering aspects of the other Codes will be discussed. P = N/mm2
D=mm
: 3.2 BS 2654 S = N/mm2
:: 2654 gives the shell thickness formula as: The first component ofthe pressure is converted from metres of
product liquid head to mbar by multiplying by 98 and added to
n.
: - 20.s( \
-- _ {98.(H 0.3)r'tr'p} .c.a. equ3.7 the second component, which is already expressed in mbar.
This combination is then converted to N/mm'? by multiplying by
-
_::e: 0.0001.
D is converted to mm by multiplying by '1000 and S is already
: = shell thickness (mm)
expressed in N/mm2
I = tank diameter (m)
Equation 3.8 is therefore transforr"6 1o,
S = allowable design stress (N/mm,) lror 1 PI
SXS

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 27

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 61/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc storage tank design

thickness but with each successive course being thinner than

the one below exceptthat for practical constructional reasons.
the top courses are governed by minimum recommended
thickness rules given in the Codes.
The use of courses with diminishing thickness has the effect
that, at the joint between two adjacent courses, the thicker,
lowercourse provides some stiffening tothetop, thinnercourse
and this causes an increase in stress in the upper part of the
lower course and a reduction in slress in lhe lower part of the
upper course.
Figure 3.4 Loading on a tank shetl The design Codes assume, on an empirical basis. that the re-
duction in stress in the uppercourse reaches a maximum value
.t- Dx 1000 rr,.,
" -_ii:" xw xsB)- o]o.ooor) , c.a.
at one foot (300 mm) above the joint and it is at this point, on
tL(H each course from which the effective acting head is measured.
This method ofcalculation is known as the "onefoot" method or
n v lr)nn - rule, (having evolved in an era when the lmperial measurement
t - -;=" {(0.00s8 xwx H)+o.oo01p} Fc a. system was in vogue).
The above explanation can be shown diagrammatically as in
t--D^{(g.a.*.t-t)r o.1p} - c.a. Figure 3.5.
zs(
The displacement of the shell courses is shown diaqrammati-
t-"^D.{1oe.w.u;*p}r.ca. cally in Figure 3.6.
equ3.e
zu.s '
'
The adoption of the "one-foot" method means that the shell
Earlier editions of BS 2654 limited the maximum allowable thickness formula given in BS 2654 is written as setout in equa-
stress in the shell plating to 21,000 tbs/in, (145 N/mmr) and tion 3.7:
also included a welded joint efiiciency of 85%.
.
I=
D r^^... _-_
The limitation on allowable stress has now been suoerseded. 20S lv6 {H-u.3)+P}+c.a.
as shown later in Section 3.3.2.5. Also, due to imoroved mod-
ern welding technology andjoint inspection techniques, as long 3.3.2.3 Exception to "one-foot,, method
as thewelding and inspection procedures given in the Code are
adhered to, the joint efficiency is deemed to be 1OO%. For ex- There is an exception to the "one-foot" rule and this comes into
ample, the welded joints are considered to be at least as strong use when steels ofdiffering strengths are used in designing the
as the parent plate. Due to this increase in joint efficiency, tank shell courses. In such cases, when the ratio of:
shells are now 15% thinner than their earlier counterparts.
height (H - 0.3), used forthe computation ofa given course.
3.3.2.1 Principal factors determining shell thickness divided bythe allowablestress forthat course, is equalto or
more than the (H -0.3) + S ratio for the course beneath,
It can be seen
thickness tankthe
of thethat are: factors, which determine the
principal
shell, then the advantiage of the "one-foot" method is deemed not to
. the internal loadings due to the head of liquid and applyto the upper course and this course shall be desioned us.
ing H instead of (H - 0.3). The mathematical form of iis is ex-
. the pressure in the vapour space. pressed as:
Adjustment may be required when axial, wind and seismic When:
loads are considered but there is no allowance made for anv
other external loadings whatsoever. lt is importantto remember Hu -0.3 H, 0.3
this, because on occasions, designers and constructors may suq,_
be asked to impose additional external loads on the shell, or to
allowfor externalpiping loadsto be transmitted to the shellnoz- D t.^^
,n"n r = w,Hu) + pl +c.a.
zles, particularly those in the bottom course of the shell where 2o.ar r,ro,
more oiten than not the thickness of this course is a design
thickness rather that a nominal thickness (the exolanation of wnere:
this difference is given later in Section 3.3.2.4). Hu = distance from the bottom ofthe upper course
Where additional loads are requested, separate consideration
to the maximum possibte filling height (m)
must be given to their effect on the stress in the shell. The
American Code API 650 addresses the effect of nozzle load- Su = allowable design stress for the upper course
ings in Appendix P of the Code but its application is limited to (N/mm2)
tanks over 36 metres in diameter This subiect is dealt with in
Chapter 4. Hr = distance from the bottom ofthe lower course
to the maximum possible filling height (m)
3.3.2.2 Practical application of thickness formula
Having established how the shell thickness formula was de-
SL = allowable design stress for the lower course
(N/mm'z)
dved, the practical application of the formula to a storage tank
can now be discussed. There is a further very important stipulation, which must be re-
membered during the shell design, and this is that, no course
From Figure 3.4 it can be seen thatthe pressure varies with the
shall be constructed at a thickness less than that ofthe course
head of liquid and therefore the shell thickness varies from al
above, irrespective of the materials of construction.
most zero at the top, to a maximum at the bottom. As it is im-
practicalto have a shellwith a tapering thickness, it is instead, There are otherfactors, which govern the use ofthe above for-
constructed of a number of plate courses each of a uniform mula, and these are now discussed.

28 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 62/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Pressure Shell thickness Stress in

diagram Shell
diagram

:+::3.5 Diagrammatic explanation ofthe thickness formula orthe'one-fool" method

=- --r
'1,)

/,ti; --/tt
'rt1 " I tr
drspra4ne / / I

/.$i

l^

^ll
UnGstricled di5p'acenenre Discontinuity lorces @qulr€d Final displac6m€nt3 whe.
ol a tour coorse rlnk for conP:tibility at each compatibllity is catored
change h courso thlclness

: l,_: 3.6 Displacement ofthe shell courses shown diagtammatically

L3.2.4 Maximum and minimum shell thickness No|nlnal tank diameter Minimum allowable shsll plate thickness
D {m) t{mm)
-',:< plates are known, under sub-zero temperature condF
12
:€.s. to be susceptible to brittle fracture. Tests made by the
",= s Wide Plate test method in 1964 concluded thatforopera- > 100

:c.: safety, storage tank shell plates should be limited to a

Figure 3.7 lvlinimum plate thicknesses according to Table 2, BS 2654

::-:re thickness of 40 mm.plating

-aLTUm
uppercourses ofshell the formula willgive quite 3.3.2.5 Allowable steel stresses
:- - 3late thickness which are impractical for constructional To keep the selection of shell plate material within the band of
:,-.=oses. The Code therefore specifies minimum plate thick- carbon and carbon manganese weldable steels the maximum
-'".s. which must be used, and Table 2 in BS 2654 gives these allowable design stress which may be used is 260 N/mm2 or two
r': s shown in Figure 3.7. This minimum thickness may in- thirds of the material, specified minimum yield strength at room
:,-,:e any specified corrosion allowance, provided thatthe shell temperature, whichever is the lower. This limit of 260 N/mm'
: :-Jwn by calculation to be safe in the corroded condition discourages the use of steels with a minimum specified yield
strength in excess of 390 N/mm2, because of their increased
|iominal tank diamater Minimum allowable sholt Plate thickn6s
hardness and reduced weldability.
D (m) t (mml

< 15 5
However, steels with higher yield stresses than this have been
used and this came about in the late 1960s and early 1970s,
6
when the impetus in the petroleum industry gave rise to a de-
30 io < 60 a
mand for larger tanks with a capacity of 1 million barrels
10 (159,000 m3) and greatet BP developed tankage on Das ls-
land, offshore from Abu Dhabi, where the largesttankwas 96 m

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 29

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 63/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3Ambient temperature storage tank design

diameter x 25 m high, having a capacity of 1.18 million barrels. future, unwittingly, being used for a product having a higher
This was possible because ofthe advances the Japanese had densaty.
made in the production of strong notch tough steels for their
growing building programme for seagoing super tankers. 3,3.2.8 Pressure in the roof vapour space
These steels were produced mainly in Japan in controlled roll_
ing and on-line quenching and tempering facilities.
The design pressure in the vapour space is limited to a maxi_
mum of 56 mbar and a maximum vacuum of 6 mbar.
Also, much more was known at this time on the subject of ,,brit_
tle fracture" and whilst the 4O mm maximum thickness rule was In the interests oi standardisation BS 2654 classifies tanks into
maintained, the allowable design stress was allowed to be % of three categories:
the yield stress but not to exceed 7: of the tensile stress. A . Non-pressure tanks
quenched and tempered carbon manganese steel, Welton 6O
having a specified minimum yield strength of 441 N/mm2, was . Low-pressure tanks
used for the siell. Using % of this value allowed a design stress
of293 N/mm,, which did not exceed SO% ofthe specified min . High-pressure tanks
mum tensile strength of 588 N/mm2. For more details see Ref_
erence 3.1. Non-pressure tanks
Also, it limits the radial expansion and rotation of the shell. Non-pressure tanks are suitable for working at atmospheric
which is especially undesjrable in the area close to the pressure, but are designed for an internal pressure of 7.5 mbar
shell-to-bottom junction where there is the added complication and an internal vacuum of 2.5 mbar. Howeverfor tanks with col_
due to nozzle loadings. This aspect is developed further in umn supported roofs an internal pressure of4 millibars shall be
Chapter 4. assumed. 4 mbar equates approximately to the weight of S mm
3.3.2,6 Maximum and minimum operating temperatures thick roof sheets and at this pressure the roof plates willjust
start to lift off their supporting structure.
The Code without
of 150'C limits the tank operating temperature to a maximum Note: When using equation 3.7 for the design of
any reduction in design stress. However, non-pres-
above this temperature consideration must be given to using a sure tanks, BS 2654 does not require the pressure of
lesser design stress due to the elevated temperature havino in 7.5 mbar to be used for p in the equation.
effect on the yield strength of the steel. Low-pressure tanks
BS 5500 contains tabular information on allowable stresses at
Low-pressure tanks are designed for an internal pressure of20
e{evated temperatures for a number of steel specifications. mbar and an internal vacuum of 6 mbar.
The minimum design metal temperature is based on official
weather reports for the tank site over at least the last 30 years High.pressure tanks
and is the lower of the lowest daily mean temperature, plus High-pressure tanks are designed for an internal pressure of56
'10'C. and the minimum temperature
of the tank contents. mbar and an internal vacuum of 6 moar.
BS 2654 states that for a tank constructed for service in the UK
Note: BS 2654 limits the internal working pressure to 56
where the shell temperature is controlled by ambient condi- mbar, but it is possible to design tanks for higher pres-
tions,
the minimum metal temperature shall not exceed O"C. sures by using the alternative Codes listed here:
For a storage tank constructed outside the UK and where no
long term data or weather reports are available, the desiqn 857777 (incorporating BS 4741 & 5397- Storage of
metal temperature shall be the tower of the lowest daily me;n products at low temperatures) and pressures
temperature plus 5"C and the minimum temperature of the up to 140 mbar. This pressure may be ex_
conlents. ceeded subject to agreement between the pur-
The minimum design temperature for the tank shall not take chaser and contractor but for large diameter
into account the beneficial effect of heated or thermallv insu- tanks the design of the roof-to-shell joint and
laied tanks. anchorage might be limiting.

It is interesting to note that the proposed European Standard API 650 Pressures up to 2y2lbs/in2 c (172 mbar)
prEN 14015 - 1, states a maximum design temperature of Appendix F
100"C. Design temperatures above this value have to comolv
with clause 6 ofthe Standard which states that the steel suooiie;
shall certify the yield stress values for steels used
API 620 Pressures up to 15lbs/in2 G (1034 mbar)
at elevated
temperatures. Alternatively, a list of appropriate steels is given
in the text. For design temperatures above 250.C, steels which
As is the case for BS 2654, these Codes also only allow for a
small internal vacuum to be present in the tank.
are proven to be unaffected by ageing shall be used.
3.3.2.7 Specific gravity or relative density of the stored prEN '14015 Pressures up to 500 mbar, and vacuum up to
Droducl
20 mbar. Except that for a vacuum condition
The specific gravity or relative density of the stored product for above 8.5 mbar, the design methodology is not
design purposes shall not be taken as less than unity (regard- given in the Code but it shall be agreed be-
Iess that the actual specific gravity (SG) of the stored product tween the purchaser and the manufacturer.
may be less than unity). The basis ofthis requirement is the fact
that the tank, on completion, is required to be hydrostatically A synopsis of the requirements of this Code were covered ear-
tested with water prior to being put into service. Also, as many lier in Section 3.'1.1.
petroleum and chemical products have a SG less than unitv
this gives an additional safety factor to the shell plating. Note: Whilst BS 2654 gives maximum values for internal vac-
ua, these values are not actually
Also, experience has shown that designing to a SG of 1 .O gives incorporated
design formula for the shell thickness, into theit
this is because
flexibility of usage and guards against a tank, which may have is assumed that the thickness derived from equation
been designed fora particular product density, sometime inthe 3.7 will be adequate enough to withstand the low vac-

30 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 64/296
 3 Ambient temperaturc storcge knk desg.
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Desion melhod fof Calbon St€et StoEoe TantG to BS 2654 : 1969 + amd.i ii997.
Cone roof Tanks

Client: A. Another Lld.

Site: Liv€rpool
Est. or ConlEct No : C / 001
Tanksize : 30.00 m. dia. r 16.00 m. high
Tank No : 001
Oale: 5/05/02

O€m€ler D= 30.000 n sh€tt- t2

Height H= 16.000 m
Specificgravit w= 0.900 1 oo io be .lsed fo. s hel design.
Inlernalpr€ss. p: 7.50 m.bar Intematvac 2.50 ft.bar
corosion allowances :- Shellplates 0.00 mm
Floor plales 0.00 mm
Roofptates 0.00 mm
Shellangles 0.00 mm, Totat. 0.oo mm off each flange thks
Dosign lemporature . lvsr. 90 OO .C
lv,n 0 00 .C
Steellyp€ :- BS EN 10025 S275
l,,linimumYield Stress =275.000 N/mm,for,t'<= i6mm
Oosign slress =183.333 ri.hrn? (2/3 x min. yietd)

shell thickness D20.s t98.w ( H, 0 3 ) + p) + 6a ( isnore p, if =< 7.5 m.bar )

The Code requiresa min. thickness 8.00 mm

Desion oflhe Shell.

Oesign Height'H
heioht (m) thks. (mm)
l 2.000 1

2 2.000 83.333
183.333 16.00
14.00 12.59
10.98
12.6
11.0
3 2.000 1E3.333 12_00 9.38 9,4
2.000 183.333 10.00 7.74 8.0
5 2.000 163.333 8.00 6.17 8.0
6 2.000 163.333 600 4.57 8.0
7 2.000 183.333 4.00 2.97 E.0
8 2.000 183.333 2.00 1.36 8.0
I
'10
1t
'12
Shell ht.. 16.00 \,,lin. lhks. = 8.00

This shellcalculation demonstGies howrhe rormuta poduces very ihin upp6r couFes.
TheCode rsqui@s a minimum thickn€ss of 8 mn tor this rank djameler.

:,"_-€ 3.8 Tank shelldesign illustration usjng equation 3.7

uum ratings, providing that suitable stiffening js pro- snow load, vacuum, wind and seismic loads, as applicable and
vided see Section 3.5.2 Secondary wind girders. also the possibility of uneven setflement of the foundation.
1.3.2.9 Tank shell design illustration Also any tank which has to carry high roof loads for example
=,3ure 3.8 demonstrates the use of equation 3.7. The followino due to heavy snow falls, as is the case in say, Canada, should
assumptions have been made: have the shell checked for stability.

A non-pressure cone roof tank

3.3.3.1 De vation and assessment ofaxial stress in a cy-
lindrical shell
Pressure rating +7.5 mbar and -2.5 mbar
The tank wall thickness has been determined using onlythe in-
Dimensions: 30 m diameter x 16 m hioh ternal pressure to which it is subjected together with a limiting
circumferential stress of260 N/mm2 or % ofthe applicable ma_
Number of courses: 8
terial yield stress. The axial stress should now be calculated for
Shell corrosion allowance - nil each course because the existence ofcompressive membrane
stresses in the shell could cause it to fail by buckling. The fol_
Design temperature: +
90.C and O.C lowing theory is, in part, taken from work bV the late professor
Steel specification: BS EN 10025 5275 having a minimum A. S.Tooth, Professor of Mechanical Engin;ering. University of
yield of 275 N/mm, Shathclyde, Glasgow.
-T is shell calculation demonstrates how the formula The theoryforthe critical buckling stress in a thin walled circular
Droduces
shell subjected to longitudinalcompression is given by Roark &
'ery thin upper courses. The Code requires a minimum thick-
-ess of I mm for this tank diameter. Young (Reference 3.2) as:

^1Et
C=.-X:X- equ 3.10
3.3.3 Axial stress in the shell J3 Jt-v'? r

-he design of the shell to cater for jnternal pressure loadino Taking E = 207,000 N/mm2 and v = 0.3 for carbon steel, then
,\ hich produces a tenslle circumferential stress in the
shell ha; Sc = 125.235 x equ 3.'11
f,een discussed. However, for large diameter tanks with low f
shell heights, the lowest shell courses mav be rather thin and

:nerefore the stability should be checked taiing into accountthe

/ertical loads resulting from the roof weight, shell self- weight, t is in (mm) and

STOR,AGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 31

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 65/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature stotage tank design

MAP OF UNITED KINGDOIVI

SHOWING BASIC WIND SPEED
lN m/s
Maximum gust speed likelyto be
exceeded on fte average only once
in 50 years at 10 m above the ground
in open level country

Lines are drawn at 2 nvs intervals

NATIONAL GRID IDENTIFICATION

60 mis

0 80 110 130 mile/h

FigLre 3.9 Basic w nd speed for uK localions
From the Met Office, United Kingdan

32 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 66/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempenture storage tank design

49

4A 51

45 46

50 38

Edinb Ah 50 52 45

46 43 46

51 45

45
40 45

43 43

43 45

A5 45

52 52 52

lh.3. valqes .pply to dU6 .nd lown. only and not tr.@larlly o ih. .urcundlng .re.i
::--e 3.10 Basic wind speed in metrcs per second for some UK cities and towns

'':- Bntish Standard CP3

Topography factor sl
The basic wind speed, V given in Figura 3.9 hkes account of the general level of lhe site above sea level. This does not allow for local topographic fea-
tllles such as hills, valleys, cliffs, escaDments or aidges which can Bignificantly affect the wind speed is theif viciniiy.

Near the summib of hills or lhe crests of cliffu esc€rpments or ridges the s/ind is acc€lerated. In valleys or near the foot of cliffs, steep escarpmenis oa
ndges, the wind may be deceleraled. In all cases the vafation of wind speed wilh height js rlodified from tbat appropriaie lo lev€l terain.

Where the average slope of the mound doe6 not exceed 0-05 within a kilometer radius ot th€ site. the tenain may be taken as level and the topography fac-
lcr 51 should be taken as 1-0.

Ii lh€ vjci.ity of local topographic features lhe faclor Sr is a function of the uplvind slope and the posilion of lhe site relative to the summit or crest, and will
De wjthin the range of 1 .0 < Sr < 1 .36. lt should be noted that 51 will vary with height above ground level, at a maximum near to the ground and reducjng to
-1 0 at higher levels.

ln cedain steep-sided €nclosed valleys, wind sp€eds mgy be less than in level tenain. Caulion is necessary in applying q values less lhan 1.0 and special-
'st advlce should be sought In such situations.

(1) y/ith
(21Op6n counlry wlfh 3cano.ed {3) counlty wllh many wlndbroak6, (4) Su.races wlt$ large and lrequent
Op.n country no obrlnctions snall toM3, outskirts o{ larg. cili.B ob3t ucdons, o.q. ciry contro.

a c B c B c
0.E3 o7a 0.73 o.72 0.67 063 0,u 060 0.55 056 0.52 0.47
0.8{t 0.43 0.78 o79 o74 070 0.70 065 0.50 0.60 0.55 0.50
-0 't.00 o83
0,95 0.90 0.93 0.88 o.7B 0.74 0.69 o67 0.62 0.58
-5 1.03 0.99 0.94 1.00 0.95 0.91 o89 0,83 0.78 o74 0.69

?, 1.06 1.01 0.96 103 0.98 0.94 0.95 0.90 0.85 079 0.75 0.70

100 107 .1.03

1.09 1.05 0.s8 1.01 o97 0.92 0.90 0.45 0.79

1.12 1.@ 1.03 1.10 1.06 1.01 1.05 1.01 0.96 0,97 0.93 089
1.10 1_06 112 1.@ 104 108 1.04 1.00 1.02 0.98

1.15 '1.12 1.08 1.14 1_10 1.06 110 1.06 1.02 1.05 '| 02 0.98
1.18 1.15 1_11 1.1-l 1.13 1.09 1.13 1.10 106 1.10 1.07 1.03
'-4 '1.20 1.17 1.13 1.19 1.16 1.12 1.16 1.12 1.09 1.13 1.10 1.47
':.: 1.22 1.19 1.15 1.21 1.14 '1.14 1.18 1.15 1.1',l 1.15 1.13 1.10
'1.24 1.20 1_11 122 1.19 116 1.20 117 1.13 1.17 1.15 1.12
1.25 1.U 1.19 1.24 1.21 1.18 't.21 1.18 1.15 1.17
..,: 1.23 1.20 1.25 1,U 't.20
1.19 1.23 1.17 1.20 1.19 1.16
:,:a 127 1.24 1.21 L26 1.24 1.21 1.24 1.21 1.18 1.22 1.21 1.18

:€ss A = All unlts of cladding and rooUng and their immediate irxings and Individual rnedbers ot unclad structures.

:ass B = All buildings and struclures where neither lhe greatest horizontal dimension nor lhe greategt vertical dirnension exceedg
50 m (165 fi)-

less C = All buildiogs and struclores whose greaiest horizonhl dimension or lhe geatesl vertjcal dim€nsion exceeds 50 m (165 ft).

:3ciors S1 and 52
Siandard CP3

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 33

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 67/296
37/18/2019
Ambient tempercture sto@ge tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

r is in (m) The axial stresses due to the wind load and any seismic load -f
Tests indicate that actual buckling occurs at between 40% and are a little more complicated to calculate. Seismic analysis is f
60% of the value obtained using the above theory dealt with later in Chapter 15 and the resulting axial stresses
can be derived from there.
{
3,3.3.2 Allowable compressive stresses for shell courses
 
3.3.3.4 Axial stress due to wind loading on the shell I
BS 2654 makes reference to BS 5387 "SDecillcation for vertical
The axial stress due to wind load is now discussed and this is
cylindrical welded storage tanks for low-temperature service
based on the "Engineering Bending Theory" where the circular
down to -196"C" and in particularto Clause 9-2-3 ofthat specifi-
shape is assumed to undergo smalldisplacemenb. This is con-
cation which gives a method for calculating the allowable com-
pressive stresses for the shell courses, measured at each sidered to be a reasonable assumption, in that the aim of the
horizontal weld seam as: design approach is to maintain a circular cross section at all
heights ofthe tank. This is certainly achieved atthe base, where

s"
(t*") the axial stress has a maximum value. r,
= rz.s equ 3.12
"cn The axial stress'ol due to the wind load, causlng a bending
where: moment'l\il' is therefore expressed as: .|
4.M
Sc = the allowable compressive stress (N/mnf) -- - n. D2 t
equ 3.14
t = the shell plate thickness at the point under
The moment M produces a stress d'z which is approximately
consideration (mm)
uniform across the wall thickness. On the windward side this
c = the corrosion allowance, if applicable (mm) axialstress is tensileand on the leeward side it iscompressive.
.f
t(
R = the radius of the tank (m) The value of M in equation 3.14 is determined from the wind al
G = the factor for increase of the allowable stress
loading on the tank. In following the BS2654 approach, this is I
derived by determining: 4d
for given
the loading combinations below (a) The geographical location ofthe vessel and from this the
I = the joint efficiency factor which is 1 .0 for basic wind speed, V which is the 3-s gustspeed estimated
butfwelded shells to be exceeded on average once in 50 years.
The following loading combinations decide which value of 'G' is (b) Four wind speed factors, 51, 52, 53 and S4 defining the to.
used in eouation 3.12 as follows: pography(Sl ), ground roughness (S2), a freak wind proba-
bility factor, (S3) and a directional factor (Sa).
(a) Dead weight above point under consideration + insulation
+ 50% pipe loads + superimposed load. Values of basic wind speed for UK locations and values for the
For this condition G = 1.0 above factors are given in British Standard CP3, Chapter V
Paft2,1972. They are reproduced in Figures 3.9 to 3.12.
(b) Dead weight above point under consideration + insulation
+ pipe loads + wind load + 50% of superimposed load. For areas outside the UK, the wind speed information can be
obtained from local meteorological sbtions.
For this condition G = 1.25
lf
c) Dead weightabove point under consideration + insulation t"
+ pipe loads + earthquake load + 50% of superimposed
toao. tt
cs
For this condition G = 1.33 fE
Note: The superimposed load = 1.2 kN/m'7 of projected roof ts
area which includes vacuum, snow and live loads. :
There is apparent similarity between equation 3.11 and equa- =t
tion 3.12 but equation 3.12 recognises the limitations ofthe the- ' ce
oreticalformula and also allows forthe various loading possibil-
ities given above and thus limits the allowable compressive
T'
stresses to well below the theoretical values which would be
7-
obtained from equation 3.11.
3.3.3.3 Actual compressive stress
4
Equation 3.12 gives the allowable compressive stress for each
cou6e and the actual compressive stress due to the various
factors given in Sections 3.3.3.2 (a), (b) & (c) must be com-
pared to this.
The actual stresses due to dead weight, insulation ioad, pipe
loads, and superimposed load are fairly straightforward to cal- 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50
culate as: Factor 53

equ 3.13
n.D.t
0 3t 60 1m 160 't80 2to 2& 270 300 330
where; 0.78 0.73 0.73 o.74 0.73 0.80 0.a5 0.93 1.00 0,99 0,91 o_42

actual compressive stress q.84 o.7B 0.74 0.79 o,7a 0.86 0.91 1.00 1.00 o.88
oz 1.00 1.00

summation of these loads (Coastal values of S. arc appliceble within 5 km of the cuast ior on-shore wiM
directions.)
D tank diameter Figure 3.12 Factors 53 and Sa
t thickness of the course under consideration

34 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 68/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempercturc stoage taak ces,j-

--ere is nowa alternative Standard which is used forwind load-

',;s
and this is BS 6399 Part 2. But as CP3, ChapterV Part 2
'as been used successfullyfor many years and as BS 2654 still
to it, its use will be continued here.
==e's
--e design wind speed Vs is given by:
Vs = VSjSrS3Sa(m/s) equ 3.'15
-- s is converted to a dynamic pressure by using
1-
a= equ 3.16
2PVs' Figure 3.14 EfJect ofihe horizontalwind force acling on the tank roof
._ere:
i s ihe density of air. The figure is the density ofair at 15.C and Fs =Cf q.D.H equ 3.20
-..:er atmospheric pressure, viz., r = 1 .227 kglm3. and:
-is:
Fr =Cf .q. fiD.h(for a cone roof tank) equ 3.21
q = 0.613vs'z (N/mr) equ 3.17
--e pressure varies round the tank in such a way that on the 3.3.4 Allowable compressive stress
r -dward side only t 40' the circumference of the tank is sub-
F:: to a radial inward pressure. The rest ofthe tank is subject to Using the data from the earlier tank design illustration in Figure
i-:tron i.e. an outward pressure. Details of this variation are 3.8, the axial stress in the shell bottom course, which is due to
the vertical loadings, and the wind load can be analysed.
: .en in British Standard CP3, ChapterV part 2. In view of this
.aiation the totalhorizontalwind load on the shellisgiven by: The allowable compressive stress from equation 3.12 is:
F= CiqA" equ3.18 (tn4 rcrr
s" = rz.s
._ ere:
Cr = the force coefiicient for the tank and takes into Where in this case:
consideration the pressure variation. lt varies
from 0.5 to 1.2 depending upon the heighudi- t = 12.6 mm
ameter ratio, the velocity of the wind and the
smoothness o1the tank, i.e. pipe projections,
c = omm
etc. (see CP3 and Figure 3.13). R = 15m

&= the effective frontal area. i.e. the area normal = '1.25 (using the loading combination (b) in Sec-
to the wind. tion 3.3.3.2 for this examDle)
:.her component parts aftached to the shell mav have a differ- r = 1.0
:-t factor. i.e. ladders, piping and equipment wilihave Cr = 1 .0.
-Jre Then:
= cross-section
:s throughout thechanges, then theEach
vessel length. effective frontal
section of area var-
the tank Sc = 13.125 N/mm2
::ould therefore be considered and the wind load calculated.
The actual compressive axial load on the boftom course ofthe
: s generally assumed that the dynamic wind pressure is con- shell is made up of the following componenb:
:?nt with the height ofthe tank so that the resuliantwind force.
: The weight of th_e roof plating: = 29.000 kg or 284.40 kN
acts at mid-height or alternatively it may be considered as a (assume to oe b mm thtcl( and
-:ilormly distributed force up the shell. Also it is general prac- the roof to have a 1:5 slope)
--:e to allowforthe effect ofthe horizontalwind
force, which acts
:1 the tank roof. Therefore the overall moment M on the tank The weight of the roof supporting structure:
ssumeto
Assume to be be 2F
5,800
A kg or 253.02 kN
=n be shown with the help of Figure 3.14 as:
M = + h/3)] equ 3.19 50% of the supe^rimposed roof
[Fs.H/2]+ [Fr(H load of 1.2 kN/m' 424.12kN
Ahere:
The completeweightof the shell 1059.31 kN

Weight of thermal insulation Nil

vs
Piping loads Say20.00kN
Total load = 981.54 kN
From equation 3.13:
qAl 54
oz= -:-: l::=0.827 N/mm'z
q ror hsight / breadth ralo 7r'JU.1Z.t

Ur
1 2 5 10 20 x0 Referring to the design illustration in Figure 3.8, the compres-
sive axial load due to the wind load on the tank can be found by
using data from CP3, Chapter V Part 2,
o.7 o7 0.7 o.8 0.9 l.o 1.2
where:
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 06 0.6 = basic wind speed for the tank site in Liverpool
is taken from Figure 3.10 and is 46 m/s
:13ff#"4"X11i""?i,.1iien1s crfor clad buildinss of uniform section (actins in
Sr = topography factor will be taken as 1 .0

STORAGE TANKS & EQUTPMENT 35

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 69/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
1jlttiglt tS.p:,"ty.:lyggg t t@t,

Sz ground rcughness factor is interpolated

from The floor plates, which are remote from
column 2 class B of Figure 3.11 and is found the shell, will not be un_
duly stressed unless there is an abnormalamount
to be 0.96 ofsetflemen:
in the foundation under them.
s3 statistical factor will be taken as 1.0
The area oJ the foundation immediately under
where the shel
directional factor will be taken as 1.0 meets the floor is particularly critical, because
differential set e-
cf menr nere can cause the tank to try and ,.bridge,,the
= forceTcoefficient is found from Figure 3.13
to tlement,.thus inducing undesirabie additio;l
area ofset-
;;;;
shell-to-bottom area of the tank. "tr;";;
From equation 3.15:
Out-of-plane, or differential set ement at the bottom edge of
The design wind speed Vs = 46 x 0.96 th€ tank can also cause flat areas to develop in
= 44.16 mls the shell o;tjno
which in turn can affect the conne"ting nojzf"s
From equation 3.17: pip *oikl
giving rise to additional stresses in rnese
areas. "nJ
The dynamic pressure q = 0.613 x 44.16,
= 1195.40 N/m' Floating rooftanks can also suffer a jack ofcircularity
From equation 3.20: at the top
of the tank, which can cause damage to the
seal and in severe
cases cause, the floatjng roof to jam.
Tlg]ged 9 the shelt Fs = 0.7 x j195.40 x 30 x 16 =
401,654.40 N
From equation 3.2.1; 3.4.1 Floor plate arrangements

The load on the roof Ft = O.7 x 1.i95.4 x 15 The floor plating may be one of two types:
x3 =
37,655.10 N 1) A.serie_s.of flat, generally reclangulat plates
with laooeo
loints. fillet-welded on the top sidL only.
Using equation 3.19, the total wind moment on the tank is: This type of floor is used for small tanks and the
N,4 = 401,654.40 x
.16/2
+ 37,655.10 x .16 + 3/3 in areas
where the tank shell passes over the outer lapped
ioints.
rne raps are Joggted and any gap at thejoggte is
l\.4 = 3,853,371.90 Nm hushed -
-- off
with wetd metat to form a Rii surface ioitie
From equation 3.14: 2) A,ring of peripheral plates known as floor annular
"i,eti
olates.
o,- 4' i99 Il,-9o .t3z.astza N /m: _ 0.433
which have a circular outside circumferen""
unO u"i.,ufiu
nx30. x 0.0126 N/mm, egular potygonal shape inside the tank, ur"
Ortl*JOiri"
together using backing strips. The inner floor ptatlnq-is
qescfloed above. but in this aJ
case loggiing G not
The.actual axial compressive stress due to
vertjcal loads and
necessary
wind loading is:
This type of floor is used for larger tanks where
the annular
plares allow the weight of the;hell t"
0.827 + 0 433 = 1.26 N/mm, b" ;i;;;
which is well within the allowable
"p;J stresses
l9 n99t'ol and.atso to carry the radiat bending
resu[rng trom
this tank. stress of 13.125 N/mm2 for the indlscontinuity
This is discussed of the shell_to-]loor joint.
Section 3.3.6.
of.any seismic toading on the axjat compressive
ll9
srress:ff""t
rs considered in Chapter 15.
The requiremenls for floor plating. especially
with regard to an_
nurar ptates. differ between the British and Americ;n
l:-r
Codes,
and these are explained as follows.
3.4 Tank Floors
3.4.2 British Code requirements
Seciion 3.3.2.1 explains how the shell is desjgned
for a given
set of conditions and therefore other conditioni,
which ma"y im_ 3.4.2.1 Tanks up to and including 12.5 m diameter
pose additional stresses jn the tank, must
be avojded.
This being the case then the successful construction The floors oftanks up to and including 12.5 m diameter,
and oper_ unless
ation of a storage tank relies on the tank belng sp/ecified otheruise try the purchaser, shall Oe
bullt on a iirm as f) in bection .'-..:
foundation, which will not sufer undue
differen-tial setflement.
The foundation may take several Th€ arrangement and details of the floor is as Froo.
. Flat forms and may be: 3.15 to 3.17. shown in Figures -'? -
. Floor plate joints , -: ^
Rise to the centre, allowing drainage to the periphery
of the fil inim
IANK Referring to Figure 3..17. At the ends of the cross joints
in the
. rectangularand sketch plates where three thickness
occu( the ^er_
Fall to the centre, allowlng drainage to a centre upper ptate shall be hammered down and welded as .CSS,
sump indjcated
. Fall in one plane lrom one side ofthe tank to the other,
al_
in detail 'A or 'B'.
Floor
owing drainage to the low point atthe periphery ofthe The ends of the joints jn the sketch plates under the
tank bottom -he |n
--: B.itsn and American tank Codes give recommendations course.of shell plating shall be joggted anO wetOeO
tor a mini_
':' ihe construction of tank foundationsln Appendix A a;; Ap: mum drstance of '150 mm as shown in Figure 3..16
to ensure a :.veen
::"trix B of each Code respectively. flat surface on which to land the shell olatino.
3ralrng
--e iank floor is generally formed by a thin steel membrane, Welded joints arity o
::-s strng ofa number of plates welded together. Thjs mem_ 3.4.2.2
All lappedjoints in the rectangularand
:-a-eshas little inherent strength to resjst distortion when the Trrer-wetded on the top side only. Caresketch
must plates shall be futl
be taken Floor a
oaded and will conform to the shape of the underlying that the
_:2: on. weros are continuous to ensure that there will be no leak paths
- through the joints particularly at the weld pjck_up polnb. The floc
erwtse
STORAGE TANKS & EeUtpMENT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 70/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

ur-
i'n
*r-
the Jr
e'.]; l Jf,
o. -------,4\; L 60 360 50

Seclion E_E

-_T
top
se.tion S-S

::-_e 3.15 Typicalfloof arrangement for tanks up to and including '12.5 m di Flgure 3.18 Typicalfloof arrangement for tanks over '12.5 m diameter

Annutor

a 5ection Z-Z
,Alldimemions dre in m'limelres

Eqcking
:;,'e 3.16 Joggled outerjoints nder shell plaiing srr|p

Seciion F - F

All dimensions are in millim6tr€s

)t
o"torr g
Figure 3.19 Joints between annular plales

The arrangementand detailsof theflooris as shown in Figures

3.18 and 3.19. The detail shown in Figure 3.17 also applies to
this type of floor.
: ,:-.e 3.17 Joints in floof plates where lhree thicknesses occur Minimum thickness of annular plates
Floor plate minimum thickness The minimum thickness of the annular plates (excluding any
-le minimum thickness for the floor plating shall be 6 mm, ex- corrosion allowance) shall be:
:. Jding any corrosion allowance, which may be required. . 8 mm whenthe bottom course of shell plating is 19 mm thick
Yinimum lap in floor plates or less.
--e minimum lap in the floor plates shall be 5 x the plate thick- . 10 mm when the bottom course of shell plating is over 19
-ess i.e. 30 mm for 6 mm thick floor plates. mm and up to 32 mm thick.
Floor plate extension beyond shell . 12.5 mm when the bottom course ofshell plating is over 32
-re minimum extension of the floor plating beyond the shell mm thick.
: ating shall be 50 mm. In practice designers usually allow be- Tanks up to and including 12.5 m diameter, if required by the
:,', een 60 and 80 mm to allow for possible shrinkage in the floor
purchaser, may be provided with a ring of annular plates, and in
: ating during welding and also for any irregu larities in the circu- such cases the thickness ofthe annular plates shallnotbe less
aity of the shell plating during erection and welding. than 6 mm (excluding any corrosion allowance).
3.4.2.2 Tanks above 12.5 m diameter
Annular floor plate welding
Floor arrangement
The radial seams connecting the ends of the annular plates
-.e floors oftanks over 12.5 m diameter. unless soecified oth- shall be full penetration butt welds using backing strips as
.'wise by the purchaser, shall be as 2) in Section 3.4.1. shown in Figure 3.19.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 37

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 71/296
7/18/2019
3 Ambient tempercture storcge tank design
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

ts.) 6
JT

Tr

lt
fu
ts >tA ts =tL ts ( tL ts < bL
I
 
Figure 3.20 Leg lengths for shelflo floor welds

J
Group I Group tr Crclp Ifl Gm{p IIIA
As Rolled,
S€mikill€d
As Roll€d, A Roll€d, Kitled Nonnalized, Kill.d fl
Killed or Sernikilled

Mautul
A 283M C 2 A ISIMB 7 A 573M,400 A I3IMCS :r
A 285M C 2 A 36M 2,6 A5l6M-3m A573M,4{n r0
A I3IMA 2 G40.2 rM-260W A 5l6M-4t 5 A5l6M-380 r0
A 36M Cmd€ 250 5.E G40.2 r M-?60W 9 A5t6M4t5 l0
Cl"dc ?35 Gade 25{) G40.2IM-260W 9, r0
a
CEdc 25o Gradc 250 5,9. lo

Group Vl
Nonnalizcd or
Grolp IV Qoench€d ed Tempercd,
As Roled, Kilted As Ro[.d, KilLd Nomrlized, Kill€d Xilld Fulc-Crdn Practic. t.
Reduced Cirb6

A 57lM-450 A 662M C A
J73M4E5 IO A 13IM EH36
A 573M4IJ5 A573M4E5 ll A5t6M450 r0 A633MC ,.
g
A 5t6M-450 G40.2IM-300W 9. rr A516M485 IO A 633M D
a
A 5l6M-485 c40.2,M-350W 9. G4O2lM'3mW 9.I0 A 537M Clisr I
A 662M B 6,t0.21M-150w 9.10 A 537M Class 2
c40.2lM,]oow 9 A 678MA
".
Gzn-zlM 350W 9 A 678M A l3
E2'15 4,9 A 737M B
 r
El55 9 A 841 12,l3
Gtade775 5,9

Noles:
L MsI of rh. list€d roledal spccifcatios numbeF rcfer io ASTM spe.ific"tions (incloding Grad. or Class): tt'€re alr, how-
€v€r. som€ .xeFiors: C,10.2IM (including c€d.) is a CSA spc.ifiorid|: Gndes E 2?5 ard E 355 (inclrding Quany) atE r
contaired io ISO 63Ot and Gmd€ 37, CEde 41. atrd Grade 44 @ related to national $lrdards 2.2.5).
lsee
2. Must bc s€mikrlled or killed
3. Thickless < 20 trun.
4. Marinum megane* conrenr of 1.5%.
5. Tbictness 20 lnrn manm m wh€r onuolled-rolhd sle.l is used in pl.c. of no.maliz€d sc€l.
6. Megares. cont€ shall be 0-80-|-2% by bst analysis forthickrEs*s gnllerthar 20 |M,erceprlhar foreach |tdrcoon
of O0l % b€low dr speined carbon mar.inum. .n imre.se of 0-06Q mangatlese abo € thc sFcificd mriihum will be Fr-
miu€d up to lhe maxittlum of t.35%. Thickness€s < 20 nrn shall have a nlngmes. co e$tof0.&'1.?% by lEat analysis.
7. Thickrcss s 25 mrn-
E. Mu$ b€ kil€d.
9. Must be kill€d and made to fine-glain p@ti@.
l0- Mu$ be mrmalizcd.
i l. Mult have chenistry (h€al) modified ro a m&dmum calton conrent of 0-20% and a ilaximum mangoes€ cmt€nt of 1.60%
(s€ 2.2.6.4).
12. Prodrced by thc lhermo-rEchanical conuol process (TMCP).
13. S€e 3.7.4-6 for tcab on simulated t€si couDons fo{ mac.ial used in st Ess-reliered assemblies.

Figure 3.2'1 Sample from table 2-3a

38 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 72/296
 3 Ambtenl lemperatute sto.ogc z. ^
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Arnular floor plate material

SI Unib
--e material for the annular plates shall be of the same specifi- No6in.l Flelc
:.=: on with respectto strength and impact requlrements as that Thictness ofFirst
Hldr6rllic TLet SrEss in Fir$r Sb€ll Coor
-':ne lower course of shell plating. She[ Cflrie
(man, < t90 s2t0 s230 s254
{rnular floor plate width
tslg 6 5 7 9
--? minimum width of the annular plates shall be 500 mm and l9<rs25 6 'l l0 1l
:-: fequirements shown in Section E-E of Figure 3.'18 shallalso E<ts3Z69t2ta
:E'Itet. 32<,<38 8 ll t4 l'l
38<r<45 9 l3 16 19
-ap of inner floor plating on to annular plates
--: rectangular plates and sketch plates forming the inner area
:':re floor shall be lapped
over the annular plates by at least 60
* and
- welded on the top side only with a full fillet weld. (See
:;rre 3.18, Section E-E.)
Figure 3.22 Annularfloor plale thickness
Fran API 650, table 3-1

l:tachment of the lower course of shell plating to the floor

^ 4.9. D. (H 0.3)
: ating
t
--: following requirements applyto all sizes oftank.
--: attachmentofthe lowercourse ofshellplating to the annu- where
:- -:oor plates, or in the case oftanks up to and including 12.5 m
: = 1leter, the outer floor sketch plates, shall be by a continuous
D = nominal tank diameter (m)
' :: weld on both sides of the shell plating. H = height from bottom of course under consider-
--: leg length ofeach filletweld shallbe equalto the thickness
ation to the top of the shell, including the top
angle, if any; to the bottom of any overflow that
:':"e annular plate or sketch plate, except that where the lower limits the tank filling height; or to any other
:: -.se shell plating thickness is less than the annular, or sketch
level specified by the purchaser, restricted by
: ::e thickness, then the following weld leg length shall apply
an internal floating roof, or controlled to allow
: r shellplating which is 5 mm thick, theweld leg length shallbe for seismic wave action (m)

::'shell t = nominal plate thickness (including any corre

plating which is 6 mm or thicker, the weld leg length sion allowance) for the bottom shell course
:-a be 8 mm. (mm)
--:se requirements are shown pictorially in Figure 3.20. The above thickness are a minimum and exclude any corrosion
allowance.
: 4.3 American Code requirements
Annular floor plate width
--: American Code does not classify the floor design bythe di- Annular floor plates shall have a radial width of at least 600 mm
: -3:er ofthe tankin the waythat the Brjtish Code does. The cri- measured between the inside face of the shell and any
--: which determines whether or not a ring ofsegmental annu- lap-welded joint in the remainder of the inner floor plating.
:''oor plates is required is based on the value of the allowable
..-=ss in the material of the bottom course of shell plating. However a greater radial width is required when dictated by the
following calculation;
--- Code collects the various grades of similar quality steels
-::
groups ranging from Group I to croup Vl, the complete ljst- 215. tb
-:s given in Tables 2-3a and 2-3b in the Code and a sample
r - .. is given in Figure 3.2'1.
The detailed analysisofthe width ofannularplates is dealtwith
: 1.3.1 Annular floor Dlates in Section 3.4.3.
-en the bottom shell course is designed using the allowable
The annular plate must also project at least 50 mm outside the
::=ss for materials in Group lV, lVA, V orVl, then butlwelded
outer face of the shell.
:--.rlar bottom plates shall be used.
-:n the bottom shell course Annular floor plate welding
is designed using the allowable
:--:ss materials in Group lV lVA, V orVl and the maximum
-: rrctforstress Floor annular plate radialjoints shall be butt-welded by having
: 'Sd' (see equation3.34) for the bottom course is their parallel edges prepared for butlwelding with either,
::> than or equal to 160 Nimm, (23,200 lbf/inr), or, the maxi- square, or V grooves. lf square grooves are used, the root
- --r hydrostatic test stress'St'(see equation 3.35) for the bot- opening shall not be less than 6 mm. The butt weld shall be
: -
course is less than or equal to 172Nlmm2 (24,900lbf lin2]l, made by tack welding a backing strip at least 3 mm thick to the
-:- lap-welded floor plates may be used instead of underside of the annular plate such that it is centralised under
: ---,velded annular plates. the joint. A metal spacer shall be used to maintain the root gap
l.:nular floor plate thickness between the adjoining plate edges to prevent shrinkage during
welding, although other methods may be employed at the
-:.e annular plates are used their thickness is determjned purchaser's approval.
tub," 3-1 of the Code and thjs is reproduced in Figure
:'ar, Spacing of ioints
-- rydrostatic test stress in the bottom course ofthe shell olat- Three plate lap joints in the inner floor plating must be at teast
-.= s found from: 300 mm from each other, from the tank shell, from butt-welded

annular
the floorjoints
innerplate and from joints between annular plates and
plating.

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 39

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 73/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
lemperatue storage lank design
3 Amb;eFl

Inner floor plating Nominal thickness of the shett ptate Minihum size offiltet wetd
The inner floor plating, which is lapped on to the inner edge of (mh,
the annular plates, shall conform to the requirements given be- 5
low for "Floors formed from lap-welded plates only". >5to20 6
3.4.3.2 Floors formed from lap-welded plates only >20\a32 8

Without annular plates '32to45 tO

Where it is found that annular plates are not required, then all
lap-welded floors can be employed. 3.4.3.4 Annular plates >12.5 mm thick

Minimum thickness of lapped floor plates The following requiremenb shall be observed:
The minimum thickness lor all floor plates is 6 mm, excluding The attachment welds shall be sized so that eiiher the leqs of
any corrosion allowance, which may be required. the fillet welds. or the groove depth plus the leg ofthe fi et,lor a
combined weld, is of a size equalto the annular plate thickness,
Minimum width of floor Dlates but shall not exceed the shell plate thickness. See Fjgure 3.23.
Unless otherwise agreed by the purchaser, all rectangular and 3.4.3.5 Shell-to-floor plate welds consideration for spe-
sketch plates shall have a minimum width of 1800 mm and cific materials -
should be reasonably rectangular and square-edged.
Shell-to-floor fillet welds for shellmaterials in croups lV lVA, V
Minimum lao or Vl shall be made with a minimum of two passes.
The overlap in lapped floor joints shall be a minimum of 5 x the 3.4.3.6 Tank floors which require special consideration
floor plate thickness.
The floor arrangements shown in Figures 3. 15 and 3.18 work
Three plate laps well for the range of shapes listed above. They may be:
Three plate laps in
tank floors
each other, from thetank shell, shall be at least 300
from butt-welded mm plate
annular from .. Flat
joints and from joints between annular plates and the inner Rise to the centre, allowing drainage to the peripheryof the
floor. IAN K

Note: The lapping of two inner floor plates on to the . Fall to the centre, allowing drainage to a centre sump
butlwelded annular ring does not constitute a three . Fall in one plane from one side of the tank to the other. al-
olate lao.
lowing drainage to the low point at the periphery ofthe tank
Floor projection
The floor slope required to give a smallfall or rise in the founda-
The lap-welded floor plates shall project at least 25 mm beyond tion to the centre ofa tank can be accommodated by the lapped
the outside edge ofthe outerweld attaching the shellto the floor rectangular floor plates, as they will "scissor" at the edges to
plating. give a varying lap width down the length of the plate. However
Welded joints when the slope is more acute the "scissor" effect becomes
more pronounced due to the conical form of the floor In these
Lapped floor plates are to be welded on the top side only, with a
cases the solution is to make the floor out of sector shaped
continuous to fillet
ing welding,full ensure on alljoints.
weldthat Care must be taken, dur-
no leak paths oetal plates.
are left through the
joints, particularly at the weld pick-up poinb. Also, if annular plates are required, these will theoretically take
on a conicalform, but as these plates are relatively narrow and
Joints under the shell plating
if they are made in shorterthan the normallength, then in most
The ends of the joints in the sketch plates under the bottom cases they will be found to accept the foundation shape and will
course of shell plating shall be joggled and welded for a mini- not require to be developed, or rolled to a conical shape. For
mum distance of 150 mm as shown in Figure 3.16, to ensufe a large diameierfloors it may be found more economical, in terms
flat surface on which to land the shell plating. of area of plate used, to make the floor petals in two pieces. lf
Attachment of the lower course of shell plating to the floor this is the case, then as an aid to erection and welding, the
plating for all tanks pieces forming one petal should be butt-welded together to
form a flat plate thus avoiding another lap joint in the floor.
This attachment shall be by continuous fillet welds on each side
of the shell plating.
The requirements ofthe American Code are more detailed than
the British Code.
The American Code applies two sets of requirements, one for
lapped floor plates or annular plates which are equal to or less
than '1 2.5 mm thick, the other for an n ular plates which are more
than 12.5 mm thick.
3.4.3.3 Lapped floor plates, or
annular plates >12.5 mm thick
The following requirements shall be observed:
1 ) The size of the fillet welds shall not be less than the thinner
'\
ofthe two plates beingjoined (i.e. the floor or annular plate
under the shell, and the shell plate).
2) The maximum size of the weld allowed is 12.5 mm. A - Filtet$.U si&,linii.d to 13 mts oarinln
A+ a =Thinnerof sh€lloramutarfl6rpbtethickness
3) The minimum size of weld shall not be less than that Gr@ve weld B h.y €rce€d fill€t sie A onty uhe. th€ annutar I@r plale is lhicker rhar 25 mn

shown in the followino bble:

Figure 3.23 Deiaii ofdouble flletgroove weld for annular floor plates wilh a
nominalih ckness > 12 5 mm

40 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 74/296
 3 Ambient tempeaturc storqe 8* qr
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Section 'B - B'

The adjoining trpp€d petal pletes are joggled al ih€

oqter.nd ior at le€st 150 mfi. similar to Figurc 4.16

:SUre 3.24 Floor plate anangementfor steeper

stoping floo6

-re outer ends ofthe lap joints in the petal plates should bejog- The lap atthe outer end ofthe petal plates is reversed. That is to
j ed to give a smooth transition on to the face of the annular say the annular plates lie on top of the petial plates. This is to
:,ates. prevent the retention of water at the lap joint.

:lgure 3.24 shows the arrangement of such a floor. Care has to be taken to ensure that there is continuity of the
3.4.3.7 Floor arrangement for tanks requiring optimum backing strip for the butt joints between the annular plates, as
drainage this strip comes up against the outer edge of the petal plates.
-}e presence of water in some stored products is highly unde- This joint between the petal plates and the annular plates can
sr'.able. However as most petrochemical products are not mjs-
be madeas a butt-weldedjoint on to backing strips thus giving a
f,ble in water and the fact that they are generally lighter than smooth transition atthejoint. The welding sequence and proce-
rater, any moisture in suspension in the liquid, tends to gravi- dure for this approach needs careful consideration to avoid
:te to the bottom of the tank. locked-in welding stresses, which can lead to distortion of the
f,ne of the best ways to collect this water is to have a steeper plates.
sloping cone down floor, with a central collecting sump from
f,hich a suction drainpipe can be bken. This latter type offloor construction is often favoured for tanks
storing aviation fuel where it is of paramount importance to
To ensure thatthe droplets of water d rain to the sump it is impor- have "dry" fuel. Water in aircraft fuel lines at hiqh altitude will
ant for the surface of the floor to be smooth, with no lap joints, freeze thus cutting offthe supplyto the enginesriith disastrous
liscontinuities or pockeb for the water to lodge in. results, as airliners are not known to glide too well
-ihe
arangement of such a floor is similar to that shown in Fig- To keep the fuel clean, these tanks are very often inlemally
Jre 3.24with certain alterations to the construction as follows:
lined with some form of epoxy coating. Also it is a common fea-
The radial lap welds between the inner floor petals is accep ture to make the relatively small-bore drain line from the sump
able butthere must be nodistortion due to weldingwhich would out of a stainless steel material, because the successful inter-
allow the floorjoint to lift in places thus forming pockets where nal coating a small-bore pipe is difficult. The problem with doing
ryater could lodge. this is that if at some time the coating ofthe bottom of the sump
is damaged or it perishes thus exposing the carbon steel plate.
A means of preventing this, is to design the foundation as a
an electrolytic cell can be set up between the two dissimilar
solid concrete plinth into whjch are set radial steel members at
metals in the aqueous solution in the sump causing the ca.bon
ie joint lines of the petal plates, the flanges of these members steel plate to erode and eventually perforate causing a leak_
f,eing flush with the conicalsurface ofthe foundation. The radial
edges of the petal plates are welded to the flanges (either by This problem can be overcome by making the ma.jor pan of lhe
apping or by buft welding, using the flange as a backing strip) vertical section of the drainpipe in a fibreglass or composite
and hence the conical shape is mainbined. pipe material, which is compatible with the fuel. The connection

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 41

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 75/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

between the stainless and composite pipes may be screwed or ?,

sleeved and clamped.
Se@ndary lank bottom ':-
3.4.4 Environmental considerations

The effects of a leaking tank floor can take a long time to be-
come evident and during this time a great deal of pollution to the
surrounding substrata and watercourses can take place.
Nowadays the protection of the environment is of paramount
importance, and therefore steps must be taken to contain any
product leakage from storage tanks, which contain noxious or
toxic products.
Fioufe 3.25 ExamDle ofdouble bottom with leak detection
It is fairly common for aged tanks to suffer corrosion of the bot-
tom plates, which can result in a hole in the bottom, allowing the
release of the stored product. lt can take a long time for such a :5
leakto manifest itself and during this time a great deal of pollu-
tion ofthe foundation, as well as the substrata and adjacent wa-
tercourses can occur, resulting in a serious ground con-
tamination problem.
In order to minimise, or prevent this occurrence, several con-
struction methods have been devised and these are given in
detail in API 650 Appendix I and in EEMUA 159 and 183.

A few of the methods are outlined:

A) The tank is constructed with a double bottom, which has
leak detection points situated between double plating as
Fiqure 3.26 Vaiation on double boltom conslruction
shown in Figure 3.25.
The space between the double bottom is shown filled with pea
gravel but other materials may be used, i.e. structural sections
or steel reinforcement in bar or mat form as shown in Figures
3.26 and 3.27 . However it is important to ensure that the filling
material gives adequate support to the upper tank bottom
plates.
The drain oipes can be used as follows:
. As a visual indication of any leakage.
. For inserting a hydrocarbon sensor.
. For holding a vacuum in the interspace. The loss ofvacuum
indicates a leak. Figure 3,27 Further variation on double boltom construction
In the event of a leakage, the disadvantage of the double bot-
tom is twofold.
- 1 ) Dealing with the contaminated interspace in the confine-

ments ofthe tank and withoutany hotwork being allowed.

2) lf the tank needs to be jacked vertically off its fou ndation
at anytime, then the additionalweight of the double bottom
construction makes this difficult.
B) Two further examples of double bottoms (taken from the
draft form of prEN '14015 -1: 2000) are show in Figures
3.26 and 3.27 .
c) A membrane is introduced in the foundation between the
tank bottom and the underlying substrate as shown in Fig-
Fioure 3.28 Use of membrane in foundation
ure 3.28.
D) The tank is supported off a grillage on a concrete raft foun-
dation as shown in Figure 3.29.
This arrangement is often used for acid storage tanks or
tanks storing very toxic or noxious products where an early
visual indication of a leaking bottom can be detected and
dealt with without delay.
The spacing between the support beams, together with
the height ofthe tank and the density ofthe stofed product,
will dictate the required thickness for the bottom plates.
This thickness is very often more than the minimum Code
requirements and in manyinstances thickness such
the is
that lap-welded construction is impractical and the plates
have to be butt-welded. Figurc 3.29 Concrete raft foundation

42 STOMGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 76/296
 3 Ambient temperature stotage tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

carried by the girder, and the allowable design stress is 103.42

3.5 Wind and vacuum stiffening
Ni mm'?(15,000 lbflin2), which is increased by 25% because the
::rihe case ofclosed, flxed roof tanks, the wind load is only ex- load is caused by the wind, then, by referring to formulae by
E-al, whereas in open top or external floating roof tanks the Roark & Young, the required section modulus for the girder can
r'^o also acts on the inner surface which can cause the effect be shown to approximate to equation 3.22 above.
:t. vacuum load. The roofofa fixed roof tank assists in keeping
:E shell rigid and the wind forces are transmitted to the bottom 3.5.1.1 Refining the design technique
:t ---'re tank as axialstresses as mentioned eadier. Open top and The above design procedure has been challenged over the
:r:emalfloating roof tanks do not have the benefit ofthis shell years by a number ofacademics (e.9. Adams, Morton, Zick and
-q,:ity and therefore a circumferential primary wind girder is Mccrath) and the use of more analytical computer methods
:r: /ided at or near the top of the shell to give it the necessary have enabled the design technique to be refined.
;:-ess (see Figure 3.30). This girder is normally attached to Morton found, for instance, that taking the example of an 84 m
:€ externalsurface ofthe shelland in many cases is also used
platform. diameter x 12.5 m high tank subjected to a 100 mph wind
= an access and maintenance speed, current practice using equation 3.22 suggests a primary
girder having a section modulus of 2610 cm3 which can be
3 5.1 Primary wind girders shown to equate to a girder as shown in Figure 3.3'1, "Detail E",
with a width dimension'b'of 1050 mm.
r€.oowledgement is given to the late Professor A. S. Tooth,
>:'essor of Mechanical Engineering at University of Strath- Using a method based on design against plastic folding of the
r'::e, Glasgow for most of the theory that follows. tank, which allows the determination of the girder dimensions
for a given wind speed of 50 misec. (111 .8 mph)it can be shown
--€ equation to determine the section modulus ior the primary
that a girder width of 432 mm is adequate, this is less than half
r'-d girder is by:
that predicted by equation 3.22.
z = 0.58 D'? .H (cm3) equ3.22
Further research conflrmed that a modest girder section pro-
duced a dramatic increase in the buckling pressurc and that
r-ere D and H are in metres. subseouent incremental increases in the dimension 'b'of the
--. equation is simplistic to say the least and was first pub- girder produced a very small increase in the buckling
rs.ed in the early API tank Codes but is still used today as the pressures.
-s's of primary girder design.
Generally it has been found that for large diameter open top
.:€rerallyit is thought that the equation is an approximation for- and externalfloating roof tanks, say over 60 metres in diameter,
-- ated ata time whentanks under construction were less than equation 3.22 is over-conservative and that at, or over this di-
:i: Tetres in diameter. The equation is based on a wind speed ameter the girders calculate out to be unnecessarily wide. Ac-
r13.7 m/s (100 mph) although otherwind speeds may be used cordingly, the present Code states thatfortanks over 60 metres
:, Tultiplying the equation by (V/43.7)'zfor Sl units, or (Vi100)'? in diameter shall, for girder calculation purposes, be consid-
x. mperial units. ered to be of this diameter when determining the section
--e equation may be derived, in Sl units, using the above wind modulus of the primary girder
together with the dynamic wind pressure from equation However, as mentioned earlier, these primary girders are often
=eed
:'7.The horizontalwindload, usingtheierms Dand H can be used as access pladorms and therefore. although a narrow
:c?ined from equation 3.18, using a Cr value of 0.6.
girderamay be found by design this may be increased
mm.to
width
r:suming that the girder is loaded by a uniform pressure in
form platform having a minimum width to Code of 600
3::Jss the tank d ameter and is supported by tangential sheaf,
For tanks where the primary girder is located 600 mm or more
r,: that the oressure load on the toD 25% ofthe shell has to be below the top of the shell the Code requires that the shell be
provided with a top curb angle of the following dimensions:
For a top course thickness of 5 mm, the angle shall be 60 x
60x5mm
For a top course thickness of 6 mm or more, the angle
shall be 80 x 80 x 6 mm.
3.5.1.2 Design example
Using the principal dimensions tor the tank in the earlierdesign
illustration in Figure 3.8, but in this case assuming it is a exter-
nal floating roof tank, and using a design wind speed of 46
m/sec, then:
D = 30mdiameter
H = 16 mhioh

= 46 m/s
From equation 3.22:
The section modulus for the primary girder is:

- rd,ai
Z =0.058 30'?16. -" =884.5 cm3
\44.7 )

Referring to Figure 3.31 which is taken from BS 2654 it can be

seen thata "Detail E" type girder willbe sufficient and this has a
horizontal web dimension 'b' of 500 mm when attached to a
':--e 3.30 Pdmarywind gnder shell having a thickness of I mm.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 43

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 77/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

-lr
{rl
F
{
-rE
d
qt
GOX 60X 5 4.84 4.17
-Ii
bd
€0x 60x 6 5.50 5.84
Sx 6ox 8 7.13 7.8 -31
,0x 70x 9.70 e90
80x 8ox 12.68 tz92
-f-O
@x anx 6 23.35 vt's tct
70x ?0x 6 3i.84 ll.2{
80r 80x 6
gox 6 41.fit  |3,/|3
90x 6250 54.$ 452
gox $x 8 35.86 47.?4
t@x tox I 66.80 42.41 Tbc
-s
lsl
r'|c
I t5f 50x € bbe
t
Y 60x I
t6x g
2a.a
29.t0
68.t0
25.1e
31.06
7t3t
crd|
?gxl0 70.26 83.4t rbG
76X S
75Xt0
gL84
r06.38
95.29
112m
Er
?5xt0 r38.r2 143,t0 BS 2
90x t0 t53.00 t61.a6  Hh
rit
a eqr
ktt
drs
178 x ?6 120.84 kdml r7250 176.62 FSSJ
N x ,6l?,8rkalml 2rs.s 2,43p
229 X t8 {28.6 ks/rn} ?art8 26&66 -r€|]
hei
54 x 76 118.29 k3 tnl 36.62 3r3.94
i[en
361
t4 X ggA9 t35.t4
3(l x l(lt
tdml
l4lJS *tlrnl ag|la
52t,30 {t2.ao
5:t4.61
li08.rg rg/h) 53e.E 6to.a
qr

ds€[
E

341.&t 51451 L
4n22 r'3.ot
314.75 67t rE
ar5.{6 88649
7lr.R 802.18 t
a24.4l 82za
*rG.56 r0a9l}e R
r63.ao fiq).50
1175.t2 t3t7.40 The ir
flBso
t{5.91 lr|lt'ts
t66rt trEfis
323, u
t673.4:l t?5s34
l7163. r917.ot pfessu
t3dt'63 ?o79.$
rt8.t3 22{4.04
ilence
2t70.'A 2421.24
ItE res

l-le
.t p.r unit aqrn E|sn In prrlrld|rrt. $hn .f,[o rts e.
6

Dkr€idont ia in nlllhatr |. unllla otha ri:a rtatad.

Thb eq
He

Figure 3.31 Wnd girder sections t

From BS 2654
tni
44 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 78/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

This type of girder is normally shop-fabricated in several sec- Note: The coutse thicknesses are to be t-e aa--aaaa:- :,.
: onsand is made offolded plate. In this case there would prob- nesses if a corros,on altowance 1as 3ee- -..t t-: : t: : : .
ably be 12 sections (the same number as the number of shell the tank purchaser.
ates per course). The external flange of the girder sections
3:: -:
3
The total height of the equivalent shell. HE. s founr:_.
.vould be polygonalwith the inner edgeofthe web matching the
-adius of the tank shell. together the equivalent heights of each course .e.

his being the case, then to ensure the desired section

HE = IHe
'nodulus, the minimum width of the web will be 500 mm at the
3.5.2.2 Number of girders required
lentre ofthe section, which will increase, reaching a maximum
.vidth at each end of the section, which by geometry will be The dynamic wind pressure on the shell is obtained Jfcn- :-:
British Standard CP3, Chapter Part 2, Wind Loads. pa.3-
'ound to be 1047
:s a platform mmthe
then this example.
for minimum widthlfthe girder istoto 600
increases be used
mm V as:
graph 6, and in Sl units this is given
naking the maximum width 1151 mm atthe extremities of each q = 0.613.Vs'? eqL, 3 2a
section.
where;
3.5.2 Secondary wind girders q = dynamic wind pressure (N/mr)

3.5.2.1 Equivalent shell method Vs = design wind speed (m/sec)

The shell of a storage tank is susceptible to buckling under the The design vacuum in the tank Va must be added to this, whefe
nfluence of wind pressure and internal vacuum, especially Va is in mbar and the equation becomes:
.vnen rn a near empty or empty condition. Accordingly the De- q = 0.613 Vs'? + 100.Va equ3.27
sign Code recognises this and requires an analysjs of the shell
:o be made in order to ensure that it is stable under these By equating the actual pressufe q in equation 3.26 with the
aonditions. pressure q'to cause buckling in equation 3.23 it is possible to

The fact that the shell is made up of courses of diminishing determine a value for the maximum permitted spacing L of the
circumferential secondary wind girde(s) on the equivalent
:hickness, makes analysis difficult, so the method adopted in
shell.
BS 2654 converts the multi-thickness shell into a equivalent
shell having a thickness equal to that of the top course, with the Noie: L is given the notation Hp in BS 2654.
reight reduced in such a way that the stability ofthe actual shell
s equal to that of the equivalent she... 0.6.13.vs, 1oo.va_0.8ofjl. 1, rl,
'.rr'ork presented by Saunders and Windenberg (Reference 3.3)   t_v l',* Rr "qus.za
shows an approximate relationship for the uniform external Then
pressure q'at which elastic buckling occurs in a shoft tube L,
/r'ith ends held circular, or along tube held circular at intervals L. o8?7 E 1 '* t^'
Their relationships have been simplified by Roark and may be l-rp-, .
written as: 0.613 Vs'+100 Va) 1-v' Rr, "ou3.zg

q-. 0.807.E/ 'r Taking E = 2.07 x 1011 N/m2, v = 0.3 and expressjng t in mm then
-1" \to ro,
, \'_v ,l/ -,
L R2 equ3.23 the equation becomes:

wnere:
16,016 I tt J',
-'= (0.or vs'r equ 3.30
1oo vu,;loll
E = modulus of elasticity for steel (N/mm2)
L = maximum length of shell (m)
By multiplying the top and bottom of the equation by 5.e the re-
sult approximates to the form given in BS 2654 as:
v = poisson's ratio for steel
t 95,OOOltmin' 2
= constant shell thickness (m) -'j |
(3.563 Vs'+5B0.Va)\ D' ,
equ 3.31
R = radius of shell (m)
The individual shell course heights are derived using the di- BS 2654 further simplifies this equation into two equations. The
mensional analysis method and in conjunction with equation first equation being given the constant value K thus:
3.23, with R constant in the equation, an equivalent buckling 95,000
pressure q'is tl .
achieved when L ." (s.so:.vs'*sao.va.; equ 3.32
Hence an equivalent height of each course can be found from
the resulting equation; BS 2654 stipulates nominal values for Va in equation 3.32 and
these are as follows:
, .25
,, .llmtnt
rle=nl .
\t,/_ equ3.24 5 mbar for open top tanks irrespective of the design wind
speed.
This equation is used in BS 2654 where: . 5 mbar for non-pressure, fixed roof tanks.
He = equivalent stable height of each course at . 0 8.5 mbar for all other fixed roof ranxs.
thickness t min (m)
The second equation then becomes:
h = actual height ofeach course in turn below the
- 1^
primary rjng (m)
sHo KJ
tmif 'I'
l D'l
ecL 3.33
t = thickness of each course in turn (mm)
t min = thickness of the top course (mm) Which isthe maximum permiited heightof the unstifiened srel

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 45

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 79/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
s A^ bi. lJ ls p94 9 9899 i9 9
For any given tank, the results given by equation 3.25 and Determine how many secondary wind girders are required, 1:.
equation 3.31 are compared and if Hp > HE then the shell is suf- their size and their position on the shell.
ficiently stable and does not require any secondary wind
girders. Vs = 60 m/sec and

lf Hp < HE then one or more secondary wind girders are re- Va = 5 mbar
qurred. Then from equation 3.32: :'_e
For instance if Hp < HE < 2Hp then one secondarywind gjrder is ,, 95,000 ::-
requrred. ^=-=o,u.ll
.563 60' + 580 5
This girder is positioned at HE/2 down from the primary wind and from equation 3.33:
girder, or in the case of a fixed roof tank, down from the top of
the shell. | r:_
'tts \'z
'
Hp =6.041. | =3.203 m
lf 2Hp < HE < 3Hp then two secondary wind girders are re- le6'l
quired, and are positioned at HE/3 and HE/2 down from the pri-
mary girder, or top of the shell, as applicable. The total height ofthe equivalent shell HE is found as follows:

The comparison between Hp and HE is continued and hence Heforeach course is given byequation 3.24 and is tabulated as
the number of girders is established for each given tank. follows:
.i )_
In the event that multiple girders are found to be required, and h (m) t (mh) He {m)
this can happen on large tanks having a heavy shell corrosion 1 1.375 12.4 1.375
allowance, then consideration can be given to increasing the
upper course thickness in order to reduce the number of gird-
2 2.375 12.4 2.375 -::.
ers. This then becomes an exercise prudent l 2 375 14.0 r:l
with construction costing to arrive atcombining
the most economicdesign
shell 2 375 18.9 0.763 :::._
oesrgn. 5 2.375 2J.7 0.433 :€"=
For the method described above to be valid, the secondary 6 2 375 24.6 0.271 :.:.-
wind girders must be located on shell courses having the same 2 375 33.4 0 184
thickness as the top course. lf this is not the case then adjust- 8 2.375 t8.3 0.131
ment to the position(s) has to be made by converting back the ':,-_
equivalent course heighb to their actual values.
Alsothe Code requires thatthe girders must be at least 150 mm As 2Hp < HE < 3Ho ie. 6.406 < 7.147 < 9.609
clear of the hodzontal weld seams, but any adjustment for this
Then two secondarywind girders are required and these are lo-
must ensure that the maximum permitted height of the unstiff-
ened shell, Hp is not exceeded.
cated on the equivalent shell at % HE and /, HE which is
2.382 m and 4.765 m down from the primary girder.
Again, Nilorton found through his research, that secondarywind
Both rings are more than 150 mm away from a horizontial we,:
girders are required on the
shellwhen
uniform external pressure caused underthewind
by sufficient influence ofa
pressure seam and in this respect their position is acceptable. But it ca-
be seen that when positioning the rings on to the actual she
and internal vacuum. However. his research showed that the
the top ring is on a course of minimum thickness but the lowe'
use of quite small ring sections produced a dramatic stiffening ring as on the third course down which is 12.4 mm thick.
effect on a unreinforced shell. And that by increasing the size of
the section did not significantly increase the buckling strength This lower ring will have to be repositioned on the 12.4 mm thic.
of the shell. course by converting back the equivalent shell course heigl"'
He, to its actual value. This is accomplished by taking the se:,
BS 2654 does not require the designer to calculate the section tion of the thicker course, measured from its top edge, down ::
modulus for the secondary wind girders but instead tabulates the position of the girder and multiplying it by the reciprocal :'
the required angle ring girder section size against the tank di- the thickness as shown in equation 3.24 to the power 2.5.
ameter in question and these are given in Table 3 of the Code
which is shown in Fioure 3.32. This is performed as follows:
The section of the 14.0 mm course in this case =
Angle ring gird€r (othe. shapEs may b€
p.ovided having an equjvalent sectlo. 4.765 -(1.375 + 2.375) = 1 .015 m
modulus) {mm)
100x65x4 - = 1.492 m
x|\12.0
1A O\25

20<D<=36 125x75 \8
'
This is adiusted to 1.015
)

16<D<=48 150x90x10 Then the new position for the girder measured down from'.-E -:rs,
48<O 240 x10O x 12 primary girder is:
1.37 5 + 2.37 5 + 1.492 = 5.242 m
Figure 3.32 Dimensions for shellcircumferenlialsecondary wind giderc
The complete mathematical eouation can be shown as:
It will be shown later in Section 3.6.7 that the American Code
has a different approach to sizing secondary wind girder sec- , | 14.O \2 5 a. _,:
tions. 14.7 65 - (1 .37 5 - 2.37 5) [  x y1.2.0
,^; )
3.5.2.3 Worked example +( 1.37 5 + 2.37 5\ = 5.242 m
An external floating rooftank 96 m diameter and 19 m high hav-
ln this position the girder is also more than 150 mm clear o::-E
ing eight,
23.7, 2.375 m wide
18.9,14.0,12.0 coursesmm
and'12.0 of thickness: 38.3, 33.4,
is to be designed for a 28.6,
wind adjacent horizontal weld seams.
speed of 60 m/sec. The primary girder is positioned at 1 m from The spacing between girders on the equivalent shell is, 2.j.::
the too of the shell. m, 2.860 m and 1.905 m, which total 7.147 m (HE). These s:a:.

46http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT
80/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambtent temperau'rc sro,age :a'. :: :

rgs are all less than the maximum permitted spacing of 3.203 3.5.3.2 Shell-to-bottom connection
r (Hp) and are therefore acceptable. The stresses in the tank shell have been dealt with ear ier and
:rom Figure 3.32 it is seen that the size of the angle ring girders further analysis is given later in Section 3.6, which deals wlth
s to be 200 x 200 x 12. the "variable design point" method for shell design.
-he girders are located preferably on the outside of the tank The amount of radial groMh and the shape of the expanded
:.rell but can be attached to the inside surface undercertain cir- shell can be best illustrated by modelling the area using a finite
:Jmstances, for example: element analysis computer program and this can also include
the effect of any external piping loads which are transmitted to
ir To prevent a discontinuity in the insulation and cladding
the shell via the shell nozzles.
when the shell is to be thermally insulated.

: To prevent interference with a shell mounted spiral roof As mentioned above, the radial expansion of the shell is re-
access statrcase. strained at its junction with the bottom plating and it has been
found in practice that the full theoretical hoop stress in the shell
-1e disadvantages of internal girders are that:
is not realised until a point which is about JD t above the floor
= They hamper the internal cleaning of the hnk shell. joint. This is illustrated later in Figure 3.40.
: An internal floating cover cannot be inshlled in the tank. The rotation of the shell{o-bottom joint induces stresses in the
bottom plating and the tank Codes give rules, which dictate the
3.5.3 Vertical bending of the shell thickness and width requirements for the bottom plates, which
are immediately under the shell. However, there are no specific
,i hen a tank is being filled with product, the shell willexpand ra- design procedures given in the Codes for this critical area of
:3lly due to the natural elasticity of shell plate material. This bottom plating and whilst this Chapter is devoted to the design
^ atural expansion is restrained at the point where the shell is of the shell, it is difficult to divorce this area of bottom plating
relded to the bottom plating as shown in Figure 3.33 and this from the shell because the shell-to-bottom joint is very rigid and
r;nnection is therefore subjected to rotation. rotates as a unit when the tank is under hvdrostatic load. This is
:3fore analysing what occurs under this circumstance it is nec- demonstrated in Figure 3.34.
::sary initially to take the simplistic approach in order to estab- The section ofthe floor adjacent to the shell can be considered
-i,r whatform the shell is trying to adopt under load. From basic to be a horizontal projection ofthe shell itselfand this section of
:- grneering principles: the bottom iherefore requires special consideration with regard
to the stresses caused by the rotation and this analysis is
' :.rng s modulus:
included here.
- Stress
Generally it is the larger diameter tanks which need detailed
Strain consideration in this area and it is found that the Codes require
_
en: that these tanks are provided with a ring of annular floor plates
which are butt welded together thus giving a smooth surface
upon which the shell sits.
The expansion of the shell is restrained to practically zero at the
welded joint between the shell{o-bottom plates and hence the
shelltends to rotate in the outward direction about ihis joint. The
welded connection of the shell to the bottom is very rigid and
therefore as the shell rotates, the botiom plate also rotaies
which causes it to lift off the foundation for a distance inside the
tank, until the pressure of the product acting on the floor, bal
ances the lifting effect, this is depicted in Figure 3.34.
This action causes high bending stresses in the bottom plate
and in the toe of the internal fillet weld, which are cyclic, due to
:;,-e 3.33 Shell-to-bottom connection under load the continual filling and emptying of the tank, and thus this area
is subjected to low cycle fatigue.
Stress
Straln = The API 650 Code recognises this potential problem and speci-
E
fies a design fatigue stress of 75,000 /in'z (517 N/mm'?) based
-
--en change in tank diameter = Original diameter x Strain.

: 5.3.1 Example

-:rsider the tank in the shell design illustration in Figure 3.8.

--e tank is 30 m diameter, with a bottom course thickness of
-:.6 mm and a shell design stress of 183.333 N/mm2 at a point
: - I mm from the bottom ofthe course (H - 0.3). The tank is as-
: --ned to be full of product with a SG of 1.0.

-:< ng E to be 207,000 N/mm'? for carbon steel, then the Strain

"" """ = 0.000885666

207000

--: change in tank diameter is 0.000885666 x 30,000 = 26.57

-.- or 13.29 mm on the radius. Figure 3.34 Rotation ofthe shell-to-bottom connecUon

STOR,AGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 47

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 81/296
7/18/2019
3Ambient temperature storage tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

upon 1300 cycles, which corresponds to one, filling/emptying

cycle per week over 25 years.
3.5.3.3 Rotation and stress analysis
H. Kroon formulated a method for analysing the rotation and
stresses at thejoint ( Reference 3.4) based on the following de-
sign conditions:
. The annular plate is considered to be a simply supported
beam of unit width.

. The foundation is infinitely rigid (there is no vertical deflec-

tion).
. The length ofthe beam is the length required to reduce the
rotation at the inside end to zero.
. The rotation ofthe shellis equalto the roiation ofthe bottom
at the joint.
. Radial displacement is zero.
. The design fatigue stress is 75,0001100 lbs/in2.
. The tank is at ambient temperature. Fw . si2e of ftll.i weld per APl, PaE 3.15.7

. The size ofthe fillet welds at the joint are as per the require- a : Tb + Fw +Tst2

ments ofAPl 650 Clause 3.1.5.7 e : Tb + Fw rTs

. Elastic analysis. The use ofelastic analysis for stresses be- P1 = Weightot3hell and Podon olrcolsupported by 3hell
yond the yield strength assumes complete elastic action af- Po : Llqlld Pte3sure
ter a few repetitions of the stress cycle, which will increase P2 = PorFw
the yield strength but leave a certain amount of permanent
deformation.
3.5.3.4 Beam analysis
Figure 3.35 Annular plate loading diagram
The beam is analysed by superposition of the rotation due to
each load acting on the beam. The rotations are determined by
the double integration method.
Referring to Figures 3.35 and 3.36. The unknowns Mc, Ra, Rb,
L, and 0c can be solved from the following equations:

Mc moment in shell due to load and ec.

(1)
(2) e =
(3) 0c = e shell

(4) Ra + Rb = P1 + Pr+h^/l -a\

(5) IMb
The example given later which demonstrates the use of H.
Kroon's theory is given in lmperial units, the reason for this be-
ing that the theory is linked to the American API 650 Code,
which at the time was exclusively expressed in lmperial units. @
However for the benefit of those not familiar with these units,
the metric equivalents have been added. See Figure 3.37.

size of fillet weld, as per API 650 clause @

3.1.5.7
Tb+Fw+Ts/2
Tb=2Fw+Ts
\9/
P1 weight of shell and portion of roof supported by
the shell
Po liquid pressure
P2 PoxFw @
Mc= {-4(P1 )[al(L'? a''1 + 2e3a -3e"aL + a"L]

-4(P2)e(L -eXL'z -2e'? +eL)

-(Po)(L -e)'?(2el'z -4e3 +13 +e2L))

{4(-13 -2e3 +3e'?L)l Figure 3.36 Superposilion of loads

48 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 82/296
 3 A.bi"rt t .F^tun S b*@
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Example of a Tank bottom annular plate analysis using a ''Exc6l" spreadsheet

with the '6olv6r' method for evaluating the equations.

Tank diameter *D= 98.43 feet = 30 m

Tank radius R: 49.215 feet : 15 m
Design liqukl level
*SG=
629.952 inches = 16 m
Specific gravity of stored produc{ 0.9
Thickness ol bottom shell course 0.496 inches : 12.60 mm
Thicknese ot bottom annular plate 0.3150 inches = 8.00 mm
Leg l€ngth of shell-to-bottom fillet weld
*E=
0.3150 inches = 8.00 mm
Modulus of elasticity 29000000 lbs/inch" = 200000 N/mm,
Weight of shell + portion of roof supported by the shell 97.63 lbs/inch = 17.134 N/mm
Length of annular plate beam (found by iteration) 13.80185 inches = 350.567 mm
Design fatigue stress Sfat.<=75,000,o.k. S.fat = 43893.79 lbs,/inch, = 3m.716 N /mm,
Characteristic length 0.075103 l/inch. = 0.002957 1/mm
Moment of inertia otshell plate 0.011174 inch = 4651.117 mm
Moment of inertia of bottom annular plate 0.002862 inch = 1191.362 mm
Unrestfained radial expansion atlhe bottom f- 0.496442 inches. = 12.610 mm
Part length ol bottom annular plate 0.87796 inches. = 22.300 mm
Part length ot bottom annular plate 1.44092 inches. = 36.60 mm
Uquid pressure at the bottom 20.473/.2lb6 I inch2= 0.1412 N/mm,
Weuht of shell + portion of roof supported by shel 97.63 lbe,/ inch = 17.1342 N / mm
Liquid pressure on inside filletweld P2= 6.44831 lbs / inch = 1.1317 N/mm
Moment in shell 1075.127 inll&lin.= 4784.442 mm.N/mm
Rotatlon ofshell €ls= -0.01438 radians +l
Rotation C1 gcl = {.0034'13radians I
Rotation C2 radians |
-0.00037 6s mu6t = ec with
Rotation C3 {.024643 radians I opposite sjgn.
Rotation C4 9c4 = 0.042807 radians I OK
Rotation at C 0.01438 radians #
Rotation at 81 8b1 = 0.002303 radians
Rohion at 82
Rotation at 83 8b3 =
0.00025 radians
0.026335 radians
Rotation at 94 0b4 = 4.028888 radians
Rotation at B eb= 0.00000 radians eb = 0, OK
Reac'tion at A
Readion at B
288.4169 lbs/ inch = 50.61748
Rb= 68.73185 lbs/ inch = 12.0625'1
Momenl in bottom annular at toe of inside et weld f Md= 714.5033 in.-lb6/in.= 3179.096 mm.N/mm
Hor2ontal iorce at bottom of shell 216.9575 lb6/inch= 38.07627 N/mm
Shear stress in fillet weld
:=
9745.074 lbsrfinch, 67.20741 Ntmm2
Min, width of annular plate (inside shell to tapjoint) (L-e+Fw)= 12.67589 inches. 321.9675 mm

The minimum width oithe annular plate to Apl 650 cl. 3-5.2 is the greater of
the length given by:
390.Tb , , which is
17.87273 inches, or24 inches
{ H.SG y/'
Forthis case the API 650 min. width is: 24 inches = 600 mm

The API rninimun Equi€rFnt al 6@ ffin is €rv coru€rvarive In dfs case compaGd wih €[ h€o€licar t€qutrcneds to H. Kroods

' Manually Inp|dted fi)(ed dsia

- Manualt Inputie<l vari€bb d.ta

Figure 3,37An exampl€ ofH. Kroon's method for tenK bottom annutar Date analvsis

STORAGE TAI{KS & EOUIPflEI{T 49

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 83/296
3
7/18/2019
Ambient tempenture storage tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Moment Mc the shell: sc2 h

The equation forthe rotation ofthe shelland moment Mc can be ffiu"t'z(L-e)-8e3(L-e) E
found in Het6nyi's "Beams on Elastic Foundations", formula Th
22c, (Reference 3.5). The equation is as follows: -aeL(L -e)(zr -e) 1_.

-l\rc = 2(LXEXIsXr,yo + 0o) 0c3 (Po)(L-et'?, ^ T}

wnere:
2#(rb)Li (7e'L -4e" -L" -2eL' ) 1)
ft-;\ 8nr{r- -e)3
2,
I R'Ts' " =o.e-
*it(1-u=).", 7, 24qrb)L2
xL
=1ry
JRTs
ec = 0cl + 0c2 + 0c3 + 0c4 = -0 shell 3.5
Yo Q
E xTb ' wnere: ttp
Y = PoxR2 e shell = Mc /- v\ l,OL (fr
xTs-(scXH-x)R'?
E xTs
E z(r)(Q(ts) l'' ri exru tcr
tr
ls = , rs- TOI u U.3 --+ lS ts- Horizontal force at bottom of shell: t 5u
=
't211-u, | 10.92 The horizontal force 'Q" acting at the bottom ofthe shell is cal- ffE
\ _,/

-. culated bythe substitution ofvalues in the equation for"eshell' fi

o0 = I_e shett and the transposition of the equation which then gives: rr{
H nll
eshel= Mc I"*- M"*uI'l BS2
T.. |
z().XEXrs) H Exrb
-,.,=i-t:----^, "...y.IQL \,|=F-
^ It+llExTs
L 2).R' I
liEls
6et
Note: The term (y/H) has been added - to correct the equation XTb E XTS] @
LE \172
for the triangular shape of the pressure diagram.
Rotation at point B: Reaction force Ra: trA
rE€
The reaction force Ra acting at the outer end ofthe beam, can
(Found by the double integration method.)
be calculated from:
irdl
lEs
=
'bl
9{. ri
T}E
air?t"<u-a2)+ze3a-3e2aL+a3L] -o. trat, -q.t"o 6I
sb2 = (p2pl_e).,
L--Ze-+eL ^,
*" _ {rrlr, rtEl
L
6E(rb)L' P
Reaction force Rb:
0b3 = (PoXr- G
ef (zeL' -4e3
24E(rb)L2
+ L3 + e2L) The reaction force Rb acting at the inner end ofthe beam, cal TlrE
be calculated from:
dl
oM = ze3 rserL)
no = (et) +(ez)+(Po)(L e)-Ra
fttl
^_P-(*,
6E(rb)1',\ a[ rl
Moment Md:
0b = 0b1+ 0b2+ 0b3+ 0M =0 The bending moment Md in the annular plate acting atthe toed -n
the intemal flllet weld, can be calculated from: -d
The moment of inertia Ib for the annular plate is given as:
-rl
Th3
Md=Mc-(Ra)e+(Pl)(e a) nrt
tzll-v') fr
Combined stross in annular plate: qEr
Maximum combined stress due to moment Md and horizor d Qtt€
f{ force Q is: :an
when u
' = 0.3 then Ib = '10.92
The sum of the values 0b1+ 0b2 r 0b3 + 0b4 is equatedto zero,
=-+---SUTaI
(rb) (rb), ^..
o 6(Md) LO
KA
and by transposition of formulae the value Mc is found to be:
d
Where Sfat is the design fatigue stress > 75,000 lbsiin2. ht
Mc = {-4(p1)[aL(L, -a2;+2e3a-3e2aL +a3L1
Shear stress in fillet weld: bt
-4(P2)e(L -eXL'? -2e'? +eL) Era
Maximum shear force acting on each fillet weld is:
-(PoXL -e)'?(2el'?-4e3 +L3 +e?L11 -c
rbl€
.:{4(-L3 -2e3 +3e2l)l -+ Shear slress r = E
0.7071 x (Fw)
Rotation at point C:
Solution of equations:
(Found by the double integration method.) IE
0c1 = Figure 3.37, is an example of H. Kroon's theory where all h rs
jLl -1,rt"2(L-a)-12L2(e
. a)2 Be1 equalions are solved using a "Excel" spreadsheettogethert tfi
24E(rb)r'
= for a'solvef'
the given function, which calculates the unknown
required target value, allowing also for any vari&
cE} lou
ctr
(L -a)+aL(e a)'z(ze + a) -+ar(r -"X21 -") straints which may apply. tE
50 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 84/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient lemperaturc storage tan < aasa-
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

ln the following example, the thickness of the annular plate 'Tb' The allowable design stresses are defined as:
s targeted at 8 mm.
Sd, which is used in one shell thickness formula, based on the
The variables are the fatigue stress'Sfat'and the beam length working parameters of the tank, including any corrosion allow-
L, ance, which is required to be added to the computed thickness.
The constraints are: Unlike BS 2654, API 650 tanks are designed for a product spe-
1) The rotation atthe shell'As'must be equalto, but opposite cific gravity (SG), which is specified by the tank purchaser. The
in sign to the rotation at point'C'which is '0C. drawbacktothis philosophy is thatthe iank should not be used
for storing products with higher SGs, unless a lower maximum
2) The rotation at point'B', which is'0b, must be zero.
filling height is first calculated. lt is therefore very important for

3.5.4 APt 650 the tank ownerto

to obviate keep alltank
a tank being records on hand in order
design over-stressed.
inadvertently

,Jp to now the British approach to tank shell design in accor-

St, is used in the other shell thickness formula based on the hy-
lance with BS 2654 has been discussed. As mentioned earlier drostatic testing ofthe tank and in this case the corrosion allow-
:heAmerican CodeAPl650 differsfrom the British Code in cer- ance is excluded from the formula.
?in aspects and these difierences are now outlined. For any chosen shell material:
3.5.4.1 General Sd is found to be the lesser of % of the minimum yield
The API 650 Code in its basic form is used for the design of stress, or % of the ultimate tensile stress.
?nks having (for fixed rooftanks) an internal pressure approxi- St is found to be the lesser oI ya of the minimum yield
Tating to atmospheric pressure, orfor a pressure not exceed- stress, or % of the ultimate tensile stress.
19, that which equates to the weight of the roof plates. Unlike
For convenience the API 650 Code includes the stress values
3S 2654 then, API 650 does not have the tank pressure catego-
for a popular range ofsteels in Table 3-2 which is reproduced in
'res (non-pressure, low-pressure and high-pressure). How-
Figure 3-38.
:ver, reference
rrocedures to Appendix F ofthe Code reveals that there are
for designing tanks with pressures up to 2% lbf/in2 The tlvo shell design formulas are derived using exactly the
172 mbat\. same principles as the BS 2654 formula but they are simplified
because there is no internal pressure to consider in the tank
r Appendix F, the additional pressure in the space above the vaDour sDace.
stored product is converted into an additional head of product
and this is then added to the design head for use in computing Referring to equation 3.7 and ignoring the term p and combin-
:re shell thickness. ing the constants 98 and 20, the design shell course thickness
-:he in mm is given as:
term 'H'in the following equations 3.34 and 3.35 then be-
Smes 4.9. D(H 0.3). G
td= ' Sd +CA equ 3.34
rr'here:

P = additional pressure (kPa) [1 kPa = 10 mbar] And the hydrostatic test shell thickness in mm is given as:

G = 4.9. p(H 0.3)

design specific gravity
tr equ 3.35
St
-he effect of this additional pressure on the design of the
-oof-to-shellcompression zone is dealtwith laterin Section 3.8. The above equations are given in API 650 together with their
{s in BS 2654 there is no provision in API 650 for designing for equivalents in US customary lmperial units (feet, inches and
an internal vacuum condition, but tanks which meet the mini- Ibs/in2), as below:
rum requirements ofthe Code are considered capable of with- 2.6.DtH -l).c +CA
sianding a partialvacuum ofone inch head ofwatergauge (2% td = -:----
roar).
,Vith regard to temperature limitations, API 650 applies only to 2.6. p(H -1)
?nks in non-refrigerated service that have a maximum operat- r-
Tg st
temperature of 90'C (200'F). Howeverthere js provision in
{ppendix N.4 ofthe Code, which allows tanks to be designed up where:
:tr a maximum temperature of 260'C (500"F).
-nis Appendix gives guidance on the desjgn of flxed rooftanks
td = design shell thickness, in mm (inches)

ope€ting temperatures above (200'F) tt = hydrostatic test shell thickness, in mm (inches)

'cr
-edin9 260'C (500'F). 90'C but not ex- D = nominal tank diameter, in m (feet)
-hrough the use ofa iable ofyield strength reduction factors for
:1ree bands of material yield strengths, against four tempera-
H = height from bottom of course under consider-
ation to the top ofthe shell, includjng the top
:-rre ranges, the Appendix shows how the allowable stress lev-
angle, if any, to the bottom of any overflow that
:is are reduced for the various parts ofthe tank. The Appendix
limits the tank filling height; or to any other
a so recognises the need to consider the effect of liquid head
level specilied by the purchaser, restricted by
.nd temperature cycles on the shell-to-bottom joint and gives a
an internal floating roof, or controlled to allow
:rocedure for dealing with these aspecb.
for seismic wave action, in m (feet)
3.5.4.2 Shell design stresses
G = design specific gravity ofthe liquid to be
{Pl 650 has a different approach in setting allowable shell de- stored, as specified by the purchaser
-iign stresses, in that, unlike BS 2654, which uses 2/3 ofthe ma-
:erial minimum yield stress for the allowable design stress, Apl CA = corrosion allowance, in mm (inches), as speci-
450 considers both the yield and the ultimate tensile stress of fied by the purchaser
:1e chosen shell material and uses two formulas for determin- allowable stress for the design condition, in
19 the final design shell thickness. Sd = N/mm, (lbs/inr)

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 5,I

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 85/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storcge tank design

30
:

v
:.
Midmum Minimum Prcduct Hydro$atc 'x
..8
lat€ Yield StEngrtb Tensile SlrEnSlh D€sign Sdessl/ Test Slress S,
Specificadoo rade MPa (psi) MPa (psi) MPa{psi) MPa (psi) :-
ASTM Sp€cincations -rc
A283M C 205 (300m) 380 (5-5.000) 137 (20.000) r54 (?2.5{10) :€
A 285M 205 (30,000) 380 (55.(m) 137 (20.000) 154(22.50O)
7
A I]IM A. B, CS 235 (34.000) 400 (58.0m) l5l e2.700) 17l (21.9m) =
A 36M ?50 (36,000) 100 (58.0m) 160 (L m) 17l (2:1.900)
-
3,5
A I3IM EH ]6 360 (51.000) 190' (7 r .fin ) 196 (28.44O) 2l0 (30.{00)

A5?3M 400 2?0 (32.0m) 400 (58,fln) r47 (21,3m) I65 (24.m0)
ifl
A5?3M 450 240135,m0) 4s0 (65.m)) 160 (23300) r80(263m)
J'(
A 573M 4E5 290 (42.m0) 485 00,00.) 193 (28.000) 208 (30.000)

A 5I6M 380 205(3O,m) 380 (55.0m) 137 (m.00o) 154(2.500)

A 5I6M 415 2m (32,m) 415 (60.0m) r.r7 (213m) 165 (24.000) :-
A5I6M 450 240 (35,0m) 450 (65.0m) r60 (23300) r80(26.100) T{
485 (70.m0) es.Xn) rq5 (28.5m)
_"
A 5I6M 185 260 (38.000) 173

A 662M B 275 (40.000) 150 (65.0m) lE0 (26.000) r93 (27.90)

A 662M c 295 (43.000) 485r (70.(mr) r94(28.0m) ?08 (30.0m) -.t

A 53?M I 345 (50,0m) 485 {70.(nF) r94 (28.(n0) :08 (30.0m)

A 537M 2 415 (60,000) 55tF (8O.0m) 220 (32.000) 236 (34.300)

A 63]M C,D 345 ($.0m) J85 (?0.000 ) l9.r (28.000) ?08 (3o.ooo)

A 678M 34s (50.(m) 485 00.000.) l9r e8.000) 208 (30.000) ar

A 6?8M B 415 (60.0m) 5s0i (80.0mr) 220 (32.0m) 36 (34.1m) t
A ?37M B 345 (50,m0) 485 (70.m01 194 (28,000) 208 (3o.ooo) 'E
(28.(m) 20E (30.0m)
AE4IM 345 (y).m) 485 (70.0m.) r94
CSA SDecificalions
G40.2tM 2SW 260 (37.7m) + l0 (59.500) l6J (t.8m) 176 c5.5m)
c40.2 tM lmw 3{n (43.5m) ,{50165.300) r80(26.r00) r9l (28.m0)
G40.2lM l5uwT 350 (50.8m) J80r (69.6m4) 192 (??.900) 106(:9.8m)
G40.21M 350W 350 (5O.8m) 150(65im) 180 €6.1m) r93(2E.000)

llational Stlndards
235 {34.000) 365 (52.600) 137 (20000) 154 {::.5m)
251) 250 (36.0m) 10o (58.3m) r57 (21.7m) 17t (25.000
215 275 (40.000) ,r30 (62.600) r?2 (25.fin) t8{ (26.800)

lSO 610

EZ75 c,D 265 (38.400) 425 (61,900) r70 (2.r.7m) r82 (36.5m)

E 355 c,D 345 (50.(m) .000.1

490p (? l 196 (28.400) 210(30..tm)
-'€
t€
By Ngre€nent bel{een lhe purchrser rtrd the nrntrfact||r€r th€ t€nsil€ strenstb offtes€ nat€rials may b€ ircreffed lo 515 MP, (?5'000 psi) --e
nirinun ard 620 MP (90,000 psi) na{inin land t0 58s MPs (85,000 psi) minimum ard 690 MP, {100,000 psi) naxinun for ASTMA
s37M, Cliss 2, trd A 678M, crad€Bl. When thi i done, th€ allollrble stressca sb,ll be d€termin€d as strted in 3,6.2,1 ard 3.6.2.2.

Figure 3.38 Stress values fora popular range of sleels

Fron API 650, table 3-2

52 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 86/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

St = allowable stress for the hydrostatic test condi- 3.5.4.4 Shell plate thicknesses
iion, in N/mm, (lbs/in2)
Similarly as for BS 2654, API 650 also specifies minimum allow-
As is the case in BS 2654, API 650 also stipulates that the nomi- able shell plate thickness for the "as constructed" tank and
nal diameter shall be taken as the centreline diameter of the these afe given in the table below.
bottom shell course plates, unless otherwise specified bV the
The API 650 Code quotes lmperial and metric equivalents
purchaser.
throughout its text but only the metric ierms are given here.
An exception to this rule may be requested when ordering a
tank, which is to have a floating roof, as it can be considered Minimum allowable shell plaie
Nominal tank diameler (m)
preferable to have a shell with a smooth internal surface for the
roof seal to act against. For these tanks, the diameter may < 15
measured to the inside surface of each course of shell plating,be
thus avoiding steps between adjacent courses.
6 to 60 a
However, the "one-foot" method in the API 650 Code can only
be used for designing tank shells up to 60m in diameter. Larger
tanks have to be designed using an alternative method known
Then for the shell design above the minimum course thickness
as the "variable design point" method, which is described in
for the 30 m diameter tank is 6 mm and therefore the minimum
Section 3.6.
final course thickness will be:
3.5.4.3 Use of shell design formulae
12.6, 11.O,9.4,7.8,6.2,6.0,6.0 and 6.0 mm.
The use of the shell design formulae can be demonstrated as
follows, using the fixed roof tank depicted earlier in the tank The comparable shell ihicknesses for the tank designed to BS
2654 (Tank shell design jllustration in Figure 3.8) were found to
shelldesign illustration in Figure 3.8, constructed in steel speci-
fication BS EN 10025 5275. be:

From Figure 3.38, underthe heading "National Standards", the 12.6, 11.O, 9.4, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0. 8.0 and 8.0 mm.
Grade 275 Steel has a minimum yield strength of 275 N/mm2 For this particular tank, the only significant difference being in
and a minimum tensile strength of 430 N/mm, the minimum allowable shell plate thicknesses, this being 6 mm
The product design stress js the lesset oI x 27 5 = 1 83.333 for the API Code and 8 mm for the BS Code.
/a
N/mm2 and 2s. x 430 = 172 N/mm2. in this cise 172 N/mm2 Comparison between the above table and Figure 3.7 for BS
The hydrostatic test stress is the lesser of 3/.
x 275 = 206.25 2654 shows that the American Code is not quite so stringent as
N/mm, and % x CSO = 184.29 N/mm2, in this case 184.29 the British Code as is demonstrated below:
N/mm2
Minimum allowable shetl plate
The tank is 30 m diameter and 16 m high, in eight equal width Nominaltank diameter D (m)

courses. BS 26554 APt650

The stored pfoduct has a specific gravity (SG) of 0.9. < 15

The course thickness is determined using equations 3.34 and 15io<30 15io<36
3.35 as follows:
 
td=4.9. DrH -0.3t.' c +CA 60 10

Sd
> 100
03)
tt_4e.p(H
St Whereas the American Code allows a minimum shell plate
For the bottom course: thicknessof6 fortanks upto 36 m in diameter, the British Code
limits the diameter for this thickness to under 30 m.
td-4.9.30116
t
0.31.0.9
r 0-12.08mm Also the American Code allows all tanks above 60 m in diame-
ter to have a minimum thickness of '10 mm. The British Code
specifies a further two sjze categories having minimum thick-
4.9.30r16-0.3'l
tt =
- 134
--- =12.54 mm nesses of 12 mm and 14 mm.
The maximum shellthickness allowed in the American Code is
The greater ofthese two values is taken to be the thickness for 45 mm, which is more than the 40 mm maximum in the British
the bottom course i.e. 12.54 mm. Code.
The calculation can be tabulated as follows: 3.5.4.5 Choosing BS or API shell thickness design meth-
ods
The logical question which comes to mind when considerinq
the BS and API methods for shetl rhicknesses is - which one ii
most advantageous from a commercial point of view? i.e. which
gives the thinner shell for a given material?
This question is not easily answered, because of the effect of
the following variables in the equations;
. Specific cravity (SG) of the stored product.
. Any corrosion allowance (CA) which might be required.
. The varying ratio of minimum yield strength to minimum ten-
sile strength of the range of steels used for the desiqn of
shells.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUTPMENT 53

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 87/296
3
7/18/2019
Ambient tempercturc stonge tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

For SG = 1.0 and CA = I mm.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm ) :-

A.P.l. Values. Final API B.S, Thickest

Courses ld' 'tt' thickness Based on: thickness resutL
Btm. 15.74 13.47 15.7 4 Sd 15.7 4 Same
2
3
13.86
1 1.98
11.75
10.04
13.86
11.98
Sd
Sd
13.86
'11 .98
Same
Same
4 10.11 8.32 10.1'l Sd 10.11 Same
5 8.23 6.61 8.23 Sd 8.23 Same
6 6.35 4.89 6.35 Sd 6.35 Same
7 4.48 3.18 4.48 4.48 Same
8 2.6 1.46 2.6 Sd 2.6 Same

thks. Allowed mm mm

For sG = 1.5 and cA = 1mm.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm ):-

A.P.l. Values. FinalAPl B.S. Thickest

Courses 'td' 'tt' thickness Based on: thickness result.
Btm. 23j 13.47 23.1 sd 23.1 Same
2 20.29 11.75 20.29 Sd 20.29 Same
3 17.47 10.04 17.47 Sd 17.47 Same
4 14.66 8.32 14.66 Sd 14.66 Same
5 11.84 6.61 11.84 11.84 Same
6 9.03 4.89 9.03 Sd 9.03 Same
7 6.21 3.18 6.21 Sd 6.21 Same
8 3.4 1.46 3.4 Sd 3.4 Same

. thks. cooe : 6mm 8mm

For SG = 0.8 and GA = I mm.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm ):-

A.P.l. Values. FinalAPl B.S. Thickest

Courses td' 'tt' thickness Based on: thickness result.
Btm. 12.79 13.47 13.47 St 15.7 4 BS
2 11.29 11.75 11.75 St 13.86 BS
'10.04 1 BS
3 9.79 10.04 St
St
1.98
10.11 BS
8.29 8.32
5 6.78 oot 6.78 sd 8.23
t) 5.28 4.89 5.28 Sd 6.35 tJD

7 3.78 3.18 3.78 Sd 4.48 BS

8 2_28 1.46 2.28 Sd 2.6 BS

hks. code : - mm mm

Figure 3.39 Calculalion of compa son of BS and API shells

_ page 't

54 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 88/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient temperaturc storage tdnk design
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

For SG = 1.0 and CA = nil.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm ):-

A.P.l. Values. Final API B.S. Thickest

Courses td' tt' thickness Based on: thickness result.
Btm. 14.7 4 't3.47 14.74 Sd 14.74 Same
't 1.75 12.86 Sd 12.86 Same
3 12.56
10.98 10.04 10.98 Sd 10,98 Same
4 9.11 8.32 9.11 sd 9.11 Same
5 7.23 6.61 7.23 Sd 7.23 Same
5.35 4.89 5.35 5.35 Same
7 3.48 3.18 3.48 3.48 Same
8 '1.6 1.46 1.6 sd 1.6 Same

Min. 6mm mm

For SG = 1.5 and cA = nil.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm )

A.P.l- Values. FinalAPl B.S. Thickest

Courses td' tt' thickness Based on: thickness result.
Btm. 72.1 13.47 2..1 sd 22.1 Same
19.29 11.75 19.29 Sd 19.29 Same
16.47 10.04 16.47 sd 16.47 Same
4 13.66 8.32 13.66 sd '13.66 Sam€
5 10.84 6.61 10.84 Sd 10.84 Same
8.03 4.89 8.03 Sd 8.03 Same
7 5.21 3.18 5.21 sd 5.21 Same
d 2.4 1.46 2.4 sd 2.4 Same

thks. Allowed mm mm

For SG = 0.8 and CA = nil.

Shell thicknesses in ( mm ) -
A.P.l. Values. Final API B.S. Thickest
Courses 'td' 'tr thickness Based on: thickness resu|I.
Btm. 11.79 13.47 13.47 St 't4.74 BS
2 '10.29 11.75 11.75 st 12.86 BS

10.04 St 10.98 BS
4 8.79 '10.04
7.29 8.32 8.32 St 9.11 BS
5 5.78 6.61 6.61 5I 7.23 BS
o 4.28 4.89 4.89 si 5.35 BS
7 2.75 3.'18 3.18 st 3.48 BS
8 1.28 1.46 1.46 st 1.6

Min. th code : - mm mm

Figure 3,39 Calculation of compadson ofBS and APlsholls_ p€g€ 2

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 55

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 89/296
 3 7/18/2019
Ambient temperature storage tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

The many differing strength ratios which apply to the last vari_ and for the BS Code, S = 156.667 N/mmr,
able factor, when taken jn conjunction with varying SGs and
CAs, make a generalised conclusion diffjcult. Then taking each ofthe six above conditions in turn. a set of re- a4
sults are obtained which are presented in Figure 3.39. s
However, it is found that comparisons can be made based on r-
the premise that ifthe minimum tensile strength is taken hypo_ :o
theticallyto be '166.66yo or more, of the minimum yield strength, 3.6 The "variable design point,, method
fora given material, then the allowable design stress,sd'foithe
One very significant djfference between the British and Ameri-
API equation 3.34 and 'S'for the BS equation 3.7 will have the
can Codes, is the alternatjve shell design method to the
same value and these will determine the shell thicknesses as :€
"one-foot'method which is included in theAmerican Code. This
'St', ,S'.
by deflnition will always be greater than'Sd,or method is called the "variable design point,'method.
Then under these conditions the following is found for various
The American Code specifies that this method mav onlv be
combinations of SG and CA:
used when the purchaser has not specified that the ..one-ioot-
^o
-ic
When SG = 1.0 and CA = O method be used and when the followino is true:
then BS & API thicknesses are eoual.
L 1000 :n
When SG > 1.0 and CA = 0 H6 equ 3.36 '7
then BS & API thicknesses are eoual.
where:
When SG < '1.0 and CA = O
then the BS thickness is > than the Apl thickness. L = (500. D. t)Z (mm)
When SG = 1.0 and CA > O
then the BS & API thicknesses are equal. D = tank diameter (mm)
When SG > 1.0 and CA > 0 t = bottom-course shellthickness (mm) awa
then the BS & API thicknesses are equal. J
jve

When SG < 1.0 and CA > 0 H = maximum design liquid level (m) clos
The above condition is found to be satisfied for most tank sizes
then the BS thickness is > than the Apl thickness. Figu
with the possible exception of certain tanks, which have larqe
3.5.4.6 Worked examples n Fi
diameter to height ratios.
'tam
The following worked examples demonshate the validity ofthe Alsothe Code specifies that this method must be used fortanks sign
above statements: larger than 60 m in diameter
The
Taking the 30 m diameterx '16 m high tank used in eadier exam- in th
ples, which has 8 x 2 m wide shellcourses, and using the steel 3.6.1 "Variable design point,' method development ano
specification ASTM 4131 Gr. B which has a minimum yield note
strength of 235 N/mm2 and a minimum tensile strenqth of4OO The "vaiable design point" method normally provides a reduc_ junc
N/mm2. tion in shell course thicknesses and total material weight, brr: junct
The ratio of UTs^field = 170.213%. more important is its potentialto permit construction of laloerdi-
The
ameter tanks within the maximum plate thickness limibtion.
This is more than 166.66% and stzes
ments for this exercise. therefore satisfies the require_ The following work, developed by the late professorA.S. Too0-
Professor of Mechanical Engineering, University of Strath_
sd = 156.667 N/mmr, St = 171Y29 N/mm' clyde. clasgow explains how the method evolved.

The e
Diaheter of i.nk -
I neate
220 n (07 m)
From
there
t92 ential
Fsnl and
E
stress
3
consi
dition
a mru
3 i0lb rl#r1000
55.2 68,t N/mm, shell.
used
loadin
8 than,
Assun
stress
c - wrth radlal growth and approa
posed
into AF
Bottom colrse t - 1.'l22ihs.
ln this,
which
tained
12 14 ,16 18 20
42.7 96.5
22 24
110,3 124.1 137,9 151,7 i65,5
26 28 30 32 edges
170,a 193.1 206.8 220.0
self-eq
slEin qa e measurcme"is takei d a Average clrcumler€n .t stress pressu
the "de
Figure 3.40 Disttibulion of circumferential stresses in a tank 220 ft (67 m) diameter and s6 ft (17.1
m) high with different base boundary condkrons mum fo

56 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 90/296
 3 Ambient temperature storcge tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

::k and Mccrath analysed a number of large tanks, which 3,6.2 The bottom shell course
.:€ designed using the "one-foot" method. The analysis used
s f,ased on a computer program developed by Kalnins lnthis, To explain the "variable design point'method, starting with the
]-e basic shell equations are solved by a step-by-step integra- bottom shell course, it is assumed that the junction of the verti-
:,:- method. A number of comparisons are made to examine calshelland base connection is "pin-jointed" -that is, there is no
:-. influence of different base restraints and of different allow- rotational restraint and no radial growth allowed at the base
:: e design stresses and tank size. junction. The fixing moment is thus zero and a horizontalforce
Q is required to susiain the no radial growth condition.
:ecause the theory was formulated some time ago when the
r.-:erican tank Code was written using lmperial units, the the- The value ofthis force can be obtained from shellanalysis, the
:,-. is similarly in the same units. However, the equations of the procedure being as follows:
.:*ed examole atthe end ofthe Section have been converted The hydraulic head produces a linear variation of the radial
.:3 the now more acceptable metric units. pressure in the vessel. This is maximum at the base and zero at
- lirre 3.40 provides a plot showing the distribution of the cir- the liquid level. The value of this pressure is th, where Y is the
:-lferential stress in a tank 220 ft (67 m) diameter and 56 ft specificweightofthe liquid in N/m3 and h is the height offluid.
'-.1 m) high, for three different restraints:
A = no rotational restraint and no radialgrowth i.e. a hinge.
B = allows radial growth but no robtional restraint
C = allows radial growth but with robtional restraint
' s noted that the differences in these three cases are small,
:Aay from the edge. The two strain gauge values presented
:,e a measureof confidence intheanalytical method,showing
:,:se agreement with curve C.
: ;Jre3.41 providesresultsof theanalysisforthesametankas
The circumferential stress oadue to the hydraulic head is:
r :igure 3.40 but with three differentvalues of allowable stress,
-;-nely: 17,850, 23,000, and 30,000 lbf/in'z. The tanks are de- ", =r'n
=t(H-D equ 3.37

:.;ned using the API "one-foot" method.

The free radial displacement ofthe cylinder at any height x, de-
--e variation in the stress levels is noted. The maximum stress pends upon the values ofthe circumferential stress 6€and axial
'-.he bottom courses is reasonably close to the design stress stress ox
:-d in upper courses is less than the design stress. lt is also
-'::ed that the location of the maximum stress at each course t,
W =;(oo -vo.)
 -ction occurs at approximately one foot, or higher, above the
r-_cttOn.
where
--e final comparison, shown in Figure 3.42 is for two different v = Poisson's ratio
:,zes of tanks:
For this treatment the axialstress is ignored. Thus the free base
1) 280 ft (85.3 m) diameter and 64 ft (19.5 m) high. radial displacement from equation 3.37 is:
2) 120 ft (36.6 m) diameter and 48 ft (14 6 m) high
W=r oe = _
.tHr2
equ 3.38
--e effects are similarto Figure 3.41, though the smallertank is
-Earer to the design stress.
To restrain this radialgrowth to zero, the bottom plateweld must
:-om the plots contained in Figures 3.40 and 3.41 it is clear that
exert a horizontalforce Q perunit length ofcircumference in the
:-ere is some variation in the magnitude ofthe actual circumfer- inward direction. The deflection at the cylinder end due to Q is
:-tial stress in different courses ofthe tank. The bottom course given by:
=-d occasionally the second course are the most highly
::essed. This is unfortunate sincethe bottom course is usually Qr3
equ 3.39
::nsidered to be the most vulnerable course in the tank. In ad- 2KB"
: :on it may have piping attached, resulting in the possibility of
::hrust and/or bending moment, being superimposed on the where:
-.-ell. lt would therefore be desirable, if the design procedure x = et,'r[rz(r-")]
-sed produced a shell which, when subject to the hydrostatic
':ading, had a stress in the bottom course which was lower and
:-an, or of similar magnitude to that of the upper courses.
:ssuming that most designers would prefer the maximum - -r.\2
'
g'=e(r
-.-:ess in each shell course to be the same value, an alternative "';1
- 1

\Ll '/
:oproach to calculate approximate plate thicknesses was pro-
:osed by Zick and lvlccrath in 1968. lt was later incorporated The membrane displacement (equation 3.38) and the edge
-:o API 650, but not into BS 2654. bending displacement (equation 3.39) must be equal.
^ this, the location ofthe "design point' on each shell course, at . Qr3 _ yHrz
rnich the hydrostatic pressure is to be considered can be ob- zKp" Et1
the radial and rotational movement of the plate
=ined from joint. ynr
-ges at each The movements are those caused by the ^ equ 3.40
-:elf-equilibrating forces and moments and by the hydrostatic 29
::essure. The aim is to find the point in the shell course called
ae "design poinf', where the stresses are close to the maxF This force produces a mid-surface circumferential stress. At a
':um for that course. location x from the cylinder end this is:

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 57

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 91/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

Diameter of Tank - 220 i (67 m)

De.iqn slrcss in lbs/in'{lumm2) =

\2.4) 8

-a
(4.88) 16

.g
l7.t) 24

(9.75) 32

112.21 tro

(,{.6) a8

cdr.. *a h rfdrd l(|l|m)

o7.1) 6a
16 t8 20 22 21 26 2A

110,3 124,1 1 7,9 151,7 165.5 179.3 193.1 220.6 231.4 Nlmft?
Avefag€ clrcumlerentlal sf€ss

Figure 3.41 Actual slresses by analysis in a tank designed by the "onejoot' method, with API stress limits

Dianete. or tlnk = 280 n

-.
tt m.a.rqtl.nl.120n { €.6r } - | ::r
ocsrln s t6r66 a lF I nr (N/ffilf l= 17,€gc
:ri
0 -
--.............. Top @E1hk . In ircrE E (
0.x/5 (9.5)
Fn l

****"*?.Si \2.411

i (484)
org fi<s in. (

ml,:;1)
61r
T.p @Ea f r3. ln : i.t+'€ & i mm )
\- 0.25 (6.4)
Qql a o.3)

ift*6e M

ffi{rF}-=>
( )
0162 0s.1)
(s.75)
t4 86) 1e
Ith @u'E hts in .- a

i"t.':xti"llli-**'"' rdE&(ml \
i.73) 24
,402 (10.2)
\ )
0.9.{€ (21.0)
& (122)

3rd coLdh thr - ** .^j'r- irirE&(M)

" ^,
o5a2/j' 8t I 111 (2'.o)
(a 75) 32 ) {r1.8}

z1d cou€.tnks. ir i- hcrr.s & ( mm ) Inc]*&(mm)

0.@ 1.335 (33.9)
\124.o
{17.3)
\ (i7r)
Bdtrncolsthra h : iEhFE (mln )
\ 8o0om d.efi* n: ifr+t & ( m |.-..-
0 e82 {^"} }
1.&,9_---r I
I
i
(14.a) 10
6 t0 't2fift1€A2AA2A 30 32 Sa lbc/in,r1om
56.2 QI 965 tto.3 12a.1 t3/9 151,7 16A5 1193 1SO.1 2GE 2206 234.1 N lFn'

Average clrcurnleretllal st'ess

Figure3.42Actualstressesbyanalysisinsmallertanksdesignedbythe'onejootmethod'withAPlstresslimits

58 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 92/296
 3 Ambient tempe@turc storcge tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

^ OB -"^ Bx tained. The value which provides the numericalvalue given in

't1 z e.cos: |
oa=
APl650 is a heightofx equalto 1.4949Ji;, which givesthe fol-
:'om equation 3.40 lowing equation:

yHr -o. Bx Y r-7- n fa

'l-v'llx 't .4949-E
oo=r. e''cos] equ 3.41 B"=1i31
'r y wllt, r
" - 1.9216
--e total mid-surface circumferential stress at any location x Substituting this into equation 3.42:
-trm the end is given by combining equations 3.37 and 3.41

oo = I cospr*111H-x1 equ 3.42

o" 11"
"- t,t'
su ro
66s1.1.92161,I 11 {xr.4949.fi,
-y
tr "'r,, I rt '
-: jllustratethe behaviour of equations 3.37, 3.41 and 3.42 a
-.c€ciflc examDle is considered: ",=fr.osos-r 1ryF.
- this the tank diameter D = 76 m, the height H = 25 m and the
:- ckness of the bottom course t1 = 40 mm. Putting oo = Sd = Allowable design stress and rearranging:
--e distribution of the circumferential mid-surface stress in a . t1r ,, ^-^^. YHr 1 4949 ft1
zlk in this case full of water is shown in Figure 3.43 for the vd
:-'ee equations. The following poinb are worthy of note.
' The stress due to the edge bending (equation 3.41) is Noting that the thickness te is the thickness obtained from the
compressive at the base and dies awayJairly rapidly hydraulic loading, i.e.
reaching a turning valueata heightof 1.83,/rt,= 2266 tt
vHD
t^=-=- vHr
equ 3.43
from the base.
-"d
: The stress
and due to the hydraulic head (equation 3.37) is
tensile linear.
. h = t.osos 'a'a la . \
r'+v+v
/rt^
: The combined stress (equation 3.42) is tensile and has a to H l"to
maximum at a height of 2040 mm. When the edge bending
and hydraulic head stresses are combined thgposition of From equation 3.43:
the maximum stress is always less that 1 .83 Jrt, as shown
by the plot of Figure 3.43 (in metric units). i, = 1.0503 1.4949
l*, t,
l]:
\

1e value of the height x at which the maximum occurs, de- to l/sdH lto l

:ends on the geometry ofthe tank. The value used in equation

: 42 to derive the equation presented in API 650 (that is equa- Substituting the nomenclature and dimensions of API 650:
:on 3.47) is uncertain to the author. -_.-
lne can but surmise that a number of actual tanks were ana-
t, _r.osoe_r.+9+s-'62 1q6p) ir
',.sed using the exact shell theory and an average value ob- to 12'S"12H \/r,

100 -5o o +5o

Crcuniare{ iel mid - surfiac4 sbess in N / mrii

:gLre 3 43 The variation of crrcumferentral mid-surface siress In a lank, 76 m diameter and 25 m high. with a botlom course lhickness of40 mm

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 59

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 93/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

Ir = 1.0503 -'l .4949 x

l;n,
0.329i;;
1.3751[, t1 equ 3.48

then the second course t2 should be the same thickness as the

bottom course t1.
lr=.r.osos-0.+srsS
to H
EE
l/ sd
lto
equ 3.44 2) The influence of the second course is negligibie when
h1=2.625nF '\ equ 3.49
This is a quadratic equation in t1lto. lt could have been used in
this form in the Standard. However, it was simplified into a linear o/ When ---iL lies between 1.375 and 2.625 a linear varia-
form. lt would appear that this was done be examining a num- {r'Ir
ber of vessels of different diameteE, heights and allowable tion is introduced, and this is as follows:
stress design values and solv'ng the quadratic equation 3.44
exactly. lfthis is done it is found that the (tr/to) values are in the
range of 1 to 0.87. 2.625{a
Itwould appear that the lowest value was taken, one presumes
for conservatism.
Putting this in equation 3.44: "rittt
rt, _ -1.{Jb{J3
^-^^ ^.^.^D /HG E^
0.491E- r-v'0.E7
to HlSd 1.37si ;

r'l i iEa"n l"-

lr.rn
^r^a ^ equ 3.45 ri - t2a
+ u1t e
(2.625 - 1.37 5).\E (2.625 - o.)Jttl
Afurtherfactor of 1,01 was introduced to eouation 3.45 to com-
Densate for a oossible loss due to a thinner second cou6e: . . 12.625 a\
..t,=(t1 _tra)-
.
\ ^ t;-iF
- t-
/'"
to=r.06t-0.463"HlSd
equ 3.46
/ ^\
r" =(r1 -tr")l 2.1---*
Putting t0 = 2.6 HD modified form ofthe previous basic \ t.z? )
|

/aoa
eouation 3.46 is obtained as follows: when the height of first course is equal to:

t. f r.oor o +og
P /Hcl 2,9 qc , ca equ 3.47
.,'^ft, i.e. o =h, i fi
I H\jsol sd the thickness is:

where: t, = t," + to = t,". tt, -tr"{z.r--fi-l equ 3.i:

D nominaltank diameter (ft)
H =
= height from bottom of shell to top angle (ft) where: :*
G = design specific gravity of liquid h1 = height of the bottom shell course (inches) E€
= allowable design stress for calculating plate
thickness (lbfi in'?)
12 = final thickness of the second shell course
(inches)
r-
--€
tr = thickness (inches) Iz^ = thickness of the second shell course calcu-
-sr
lated in the manner described for the upper
CA = corrosion allowances (inches)
shell courses (and given in Section 3.6.4)
:Et1
:a'
Equation 3.47 combines the circumferential stress due to the (inches)
hydraulic head (which is tensile), with the compressive cir- -_E
cumferential stress caused bythe radial edge restraining force 3.6.4 The upper courses
atthe base oithe shell. lt also incorporates a modification to al-
low for the effect of the second course. lt becomes conservative
For the upper courses the "design point" required to proi,r :i-:r€
the height of the bottom course
wien (where is greater lhan 2.625 the maximum stress is obtained by examining the expans'Jr
Jr.t1, r, isthe tank radius, in inches). In such cases, the
and rotation ofthe girth joint. For a design where the thickr:=
bottom course thickness need not exceed the thickness calcu- ofeach course is determined bya common stress, the thec'-=-
lated by the "one-foot" method. cal location ofthe "design point'is at a variable distance a:,rc -.ts
the bottom ofthe course in question and this is examined as rJ- 3
3.6.3 The second course IoWS:

The elastic movement of the upper shell courses at a q:n:r rg

The second course is more complicated because the restraint girth joint are shown in Figure 3.44. The dotted lines are the:r- rft
ofthe tank bottom raises the location ofthe maximum stress in sition the shellwould adopt if itwas allowed to expand free ,. -r-
the bottom course of larger tanks, to the vicinity of the girth joint
ncl
der hydrostatic loading i.e. "unrestrained radial groMh". lt =
=-
between the first t\ivo courses. lt is dependent u pon the height of sumed that a uniform radial load is applied at the lowerec:E r
the bottom course and the value of the bottom course. the upper course moving the unrestrained shell to point 2
There are three empirically based equations which govern the Point 3 is the point where the deflection curye crosses ths '-r
calculation ofthe second course thickness and these are given
as follows: deflection curveinatFigure
same as given a distance oe and wThis
ot'l.22Jr'Iu.
3.43 since value
decay
-.
-
in er3il
1) lf the height of the bottom cou rse is less than or equal to me same way:

60 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 94/296
 7/18/2019 3 Ambient
Guide to Storage Tanks and tenpe@turc storage tank design
Equipment

Varisblo design Point

o.er.c
,/ [t
r",n'-
| E.i II

-../\
Min. height of /€
wh€n L- 1.0;c = 0; )(2
io

0.61Viru-. fU 4 .-l
LE]U J

joinl
:9u€ courses at a tvpical girth
3.44 Elastic movement of upper shell

9f P
ur, =
2KB'
"-o''"o. r
-he deflection w is zero when cosll = 0' i e'

r
Bv r. . rr -;--\r
rr
r E
| 2=:andX-^;
2p z
i/3(1 ")
I(
t=_
1rr a^^]a
^ 2 1.2854
the mid-point be-
leferring to Figure 3.44' point f .is taken as
point 2 and point 3 The deflection at this
.r""n in'"
"ni
fi--po;idff;; oiztlt'i tt'" o"n"cton at the end (point either side of poini 2 in Figure 3 44
Figure 3.45 Portion of cylinder on
2J.
_he can be approximated by From Figure 3.44
average deflection 6-" at point.2
-.,-nJ in'"-:t"""ut" urea""
method this it is assumed that a
ln .nr2 ^rhr2 -
side of point 2 at the girth
joint' c l_L = r-L - b:ve
ii[" u,[" JtJ"i on either Et. EL
s involved as shown in Figure 3 45
3 53 gives:
-he effective cylinder length = fi + 6 Substituting for 3""" from equation

issume that the hydraulic pressure at

girth point 2 is.constant
a -1-1
I I*.11t I>l
'-
t") I
equ 3.54
;;il; length
;tr""G;vlinder Thus the pressure times the " I' r,,+\/r+/+\l
lr+(tIrur'vlrr\r,l
:rcjected area:
equ 3.51 if
ru(fi*"fq) .,t
-nis pressure is resisted bY:
equ352
t
s(t""E.t-[tr,-)
.nere S is the stress in the vessel'
- - [r*"Rl
11+ KJK l
52 must be equal:
{eplying equilibrium' equations 3 51 and 3 -.,R(K-1)
-1d therefore: ^- 1+ KJK
equ 3.55

.=rn,,t[f[rL{nL The location ofthe design point above

the girth joint' for the up-
vatue obtained from the resulting
LJrL + J", i"rti".l" in" ow"esi
expressions:

,-.?*lffil
equ 3.53 three equ 3.56
X''+0.61rfi+0 32Ch,

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

61

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 95/296
7/18/2019
3 Ambient tempeature s-torcge tank design Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Dlanerter of tant = 220 tt (62 ml

e.u) a
K.-';#?ti 0.sr5 (9.5) 0.375 {9.5)
(2.14)

-*"$*- 0.37s (9.5)

***ru;\
(4.8€) 16

b)
(1.86)

srn.co,'B.hrr.hi. t: ( .'a \:
E

; f/ 3)
rn rlera{ mm )0. 7e{r7.2) 'i
)
..\rr$ C/.3)
=
E
a (s.75)
[ldr6t(mm)0-932{23.7)
I
,rr,Lr\ "*tt.rS (8.75)

(12.21 4)
Ml6 &( mm ) t.154 (29.3) I
I
,**l) \ ,r*,r5.S,
(rz.2t

?n.t coula lhkr :.

ll
(2S.8\l
ln  .r75
[1d|.. & ( ) 1.56a (39.7) ,.r*or.aj{
01.€) 18
'tlm
\ (14.6)

Botom cou € thkr hiiici6itl''ml I'

n$]ljkttl t.sr
y.-sL-." 1.048 (?6.€)
o7.t 50
10 12 1jf t6 18 20 A 21 26 28 30 32 3,1b6lHx1000
68.9 a?t 96.5 110.3 12d1 137.9 151.7 1€5.5 170.3 193.1 N.A 20.A ?U-a N,
'il'nf
Av.nge clrcr|mf6red.t strsrt

Figure 3.46 Aclualstesses by analysis in a tank designed byihe "variable design poinf method (fullline) and the "one-foof method (chain dotted line)

qrrrGrolTn .l$n ( $.3n I

O..isn tr..- lrb6 rif ( li f |nflf ) t
I
I
 It
I'rk3.h:-kEt &(|d) a
I

cqrc.lhk in r (
o.qEtht* hc'|6 iddr &('lm )
\'.\-
lh :- C ( mm l

tz() a f
I
o
0.78 (r7.8) 5
({88' 16
T
o
(7.3' 2a tz
cou thk . h :. lnclr.& I rml s
1 06 (26.9) 2
\e.75) p 5
d'|'-oeh '
'T.ilruj,'\ 1,388 (3S.3) I
112.4 4
coufi6ll1l(a. h I i'Et|€e ( ftln

(r1.o ,€
6 610 12 ta 16 18 20 Z.21 8A $32 3a b./f xlm
/r1.4 55.2 .*g 82.7 gS.5 110.3 12a1 1?7.9 15.t.7 1€6.5 t793 t93.1 zGO U).A ruA Nlwrf
Av.Es. clrcumt r.ntd sb.ss

Figure-3.47 Aclualsiresses by analysis in smallerand in larger tanks designed by the'v€riable design poinl" method (futttin€) and the'one-foof method (chain dot-
Ieo nnel

62 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 96/296
 destgn
3 Ambient tempercturc storage tank
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

equ 3.57 3.6.6 Comparison of the thickness

results
Xz = Ch"
forthe same tank butthis
equ 3.58 Bv repeating the previous calculation
\ =1.22Jrt, ii." I"tg ii;1"""-foot"
made
method' a comparison can be
between the two results'
3'5'4 2:
joint Using the "one-foot" method from Section
thickness of the upper course at the performed using the prop-
(inches) For simplicity the catculation will be
erties tor tne "high strength' steel only'
joint
thickness of the lower course at the
Sd 193 N/mm2 and St = 208 N mm'z
(inches) Then = respectively:
heioht from the bottom of course under
conslo- So equations 3.34 and 3 35 become
nu
to ttt" top ungle or to the bottom
of the
4.9.D(H 0.3) t:+'.,n
^ ^"
"r"iion
overflow (inches) '-rl= '
sd

^- V^(^
r, equ 3.59
4.9 D(H
\ -0.3)-
1+ KJK ft-
St
ryhere:
For the bottom course:
t.
v -:t 0.3) 0.9
t +,, .4.9.60(18-
193
_1.0-25.27 mm

*he expresslon for C in API 650 is given as

_
4.9 60(18-0.3) mm
a_ Ko 5(k - '
1) ff* 208 =25.02
' -,
k to be the thickness for
(1+ The qreater ofthese two values is taken
the b;ttom course i e. 25 27'
3 59'
.hich gives the same numerical value as equation follows:
The calculation can be tiabulated as

3.6.5 Detailed "variable design point" method cal'

culation

-1e preceding calculations require an estimated thickness for

r8.66 1910 19.1
le upPer course tu. 3 2.25 19.10
161
16 01 15.48 16.01
10 95
obtained by the 2.25
-lis can be achieved by using the thickness
';;;;i':;;th;; aleo usins the thickness,or the 5 225 8.7

previously calculated' the value c can be o0-

"quaiion 2.25 645
ii"t
"*L. "oro", iiii. xl, X2 and X3 can be calculated The lowest
=i""i.
il;;;;;il;' i" then used to derive an improved value ror
i in a modified version of equation 3 36:
in mm' isasfollows:
2 6'D(FL-X/12)G The comparison between the thicknesses'
tx +cA (lmperial units)
Shell 3 5 6 7 8
Bim
-':is first value of tx is used to repeat the steps previously de- 9.9 9.0 8.0 404,843
the suc- 222 16,1 13.0
*riiuO,'*tiitr't"t" only a small difference between 25.3 19.1

r"..iu" vatues otx." lnv;riably only three iterations are neces-

25.3 214 1a.5 15.4 12.4 8.0 8.0 394,190

:ary to satisfy convergence' 0.5 10,653

0 0.8 0.6 0.7
the upper
--e result of using the method is a tank where
thinner than those obtained with the The saving in terms ofweight of steelfor
the tank is 10'653 kg
::ne+oot' metnoo.
"figl'ttly
when analysed using the Kalnins.program' in i"uort o't tn" "uutiable design point" method
=rrt"."l*
i.i u"o furcCi"ttt found thatthe maximum values ofthe actual
- see Fisures 3 46 time' th s less
;;;;;il;;llwiththe design stresses Also the thinner plate gives savings in welding
-o
in each course have a
s-.i2. in"t i. ttt" maximum stresses ;;il;i;il jiant a-nd weloing consumables are utilised
srrilar magnitude. with the shell designed to
A further comparison is now made,
# resulting thicknesses arefound to
--rs reiterative method is somewhat labourious and was very fie, zoiz and the
"i"in"J
t-" for designers prior to the advent of modern be (in mm):
"onau*ing *hich-is ideally suited for programming the 2A.O,24.5,21.1, 17 7, 14 3,10 9, 10 0 and
10 0
=^ort"i""t*"","
calculations.
-ove The weiohtofthis shell is 454.450 kg which is 60'260
kg heavier
: . .i av of illustration Figure example of the
3 48 shows a typical i;;;'il;;h;i;;"'sned to the APl 650 variable desisn point'
;';ithi; metnod ot iatcutation and is reproduced in its en-
ilil;;, ;;;;r,6d7 ks heavier than the API 650 "one-foot"
the minimum allowable thickness for the
rr"ty on pages 64-75. r"inoO. Ho*"u"t'
grateful to the late Professor AS Tooth' Pro- il;;;;;;;;;ii#;;k"s desisned to BS 2654 is 10 mm instead
shell
--e authors
==tJJ
are
l,l"ct'an]cal Engineering, Strathclyde University' to re-
;f"#;il u""ount" toilg,srz kg of the additional
weight.
:rsuce these calculations in full'
STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 63

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 97/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempenture storage tank design

Desion of Storaqe Tank Shell platino to A.P.l. 650. 1oth. edition Nov 1998 + Add.1. tvlar 2OOO.

Client: A.Another.
Site: Europe.
Contract No. C m1
Calc. No. C 001 /001
Tanksize: 60m dia. x 18m high.
Calculation in accordance with the 'Variable - design - point,' method (clause 3.6.4. ofApl 650)

metnc imperial
Variables: D = 60m '196.86 fr
H= 18m
G= 0.9
1mm 0.0394 ins
50= 193 N/mm' 27W lbfin'
St= 208 N/mm'z 30168 lb/in"
No. of courses = A
Height oi each course = 2.25 m 7.38 ft

The first set ofcalculations will be made using a ,high'shength steel.

Material specification :- A.S.T.M. A573M Gr.4Bs

Checkthat L/ H =<'lO0O/6 where L = ( sOO.D.toi

D is the tankdia. in m.
t is the bottom course shellthickness.
The bottom course shell thickness has not yet been established, but for
for The Variable point method not to be applicable for a tank of the above
dimensions, it can be calculated that the bottom course would have to be
> 300 mm thick and surely this will not be the case.
Calculations are worked simultaneously for both the 'design, & ,test' conditions.

For the Bottom course :

From Clause 3.6.3.2. Find values for "tpd" and 'tpt".

tpd = 4.9xD(H-0.3)xc +CA

sd
tpt = 4.9xD(H-0.3)
st
tpd = 25.27 mm
rpr = 25.02 mm

[a.gu.o.c I
From Clause 3.6.4.4. rd=fi.06-
[ -r- Dv/HGl
o.o6e6
sal [---s- .J
*ca

ttt=fi.0a- o.oogoo fn I ft.gn.ol

[ " VstJ I sJ
tld = 25.50 mm
tlt = 25.73 mm
Lesser of'tpd' & tld' = 25.27 mm Lesser of tpt'&'tlt' E.O2mm
The greater of these two latter figures is :
- 25.27 ins. =
@
The validity of using the Variable Point method can now be checked as required by Clause 3.6.4.1
o.5
Checklhat L/H =<1000/6 when L = ( 5OO.D.I) = 871.21 and H= 18
L/H= 48.40 As this is <= 10m / 6, the variable point method may be used

Figure 3.48 flfusbation of the use of the "vadable design point' method catculation - page 1

64 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 98/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient temperaturc storcge tank design
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

For the Second course :

=
h1 2250 mm Width of bottom course
= 30000 mm. NominalTank radius
|
Used for ratio, h1 1fr--lTl
{t1d-c.a)= 24.27 mm Btm course thks less CA Use lor "t2a" (design)
t1d = 2527 mm. Total Btm course thks
t1t= 25o2mm Lesser of tpt' & 'tlt' Used ior ratio' h1 '\tr t1
Ratio for't1d' , h1 : 2.637 Ratio for'tlt" 2.597
F(tld-"-) v-+:-rxtlt
as follows :-
'Design' case-
Ratio't'1d'is >=2.625, then, i2 = i2a. This isfound by trial for the
il"ii.'ilt;i"tl.ezS Out <2.625,then,t2 = t2a + (tl -t2a\121- {h1/1 25G't1)'s 5I and t2a for the
'Test'condition is found as follows :-

Calculate the Second course 'Test' thickness bv trial

tud = lgl _gll G+ cA = 22.18 mm

sd
tut = 4.9xD(H-0.3) = 21.84 mm
'lst. Trial St
p""i" iri"n"k course No. 2
Ffi u"_._"r " *1 . ro' b"* nd

-d"r "2i t iS' f: tuB*"" = 1 .1456 x1t = 846.624

113't.416 xZ= 1102.742
Cd = 0.072 = x2d Ct = 0.0700
H (m)= 1,5.75 xd3= 995.217 H(m)= xt3 = 9A7.476
Use lowest value of'xd' 859 662 mm Use lowest value of t'= 846.628 mm
0860m 0.847 m

tdx= 4.9x0( H-x/1000)G+CA= 2t.41 mm

Sd
ttx = 91 qltfqlq00 ) 21 .07 mm
2nd. Trial. St
fi;;=t plye.3Jelration usino new ydfsil%;u' & Btm cl,i:-tl#s: rErj
?:siqn
& rest
tut = ttx = 21.07

1.188 x1t = 934.163

0.086 x2d= 1344 77O 0.089 x2t =
xt3 =
1403.867
969.850
15.75
H (m)= 15.75 xd3 = 977.853
Use lowest value of'xd' 920.533 mm se lowest value of'xt'= 934.163 mm
= 0.921 m - 0.934 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - X/1OOO )G +CA = 21 33 mm

ttx= 1]LD(Sd: 1@0) 20.94 mm =

3rd. Trial. St
bove calculation usino new values for 'tu' & Btm cqur9e hl<'s fol Dgsion
& Test'
FdE-t 21.33 tut=t&= 2094
@ I[:-ZEI- tud=tdx=
nd vur,r.s_ofl x1 " ro r boll rest & on"kt
Fi
"2i t di f: ia=0.:Hi"ondili = 1.195 x'lt = 948 581

Cd = 0.088 = x2d 13A1.527 0.092 xzi= 1453.381

H (m1= 15.750 xd3 = 975 946 15.750 xt3 = 966 998
Use lowest value of'xd' 930.062 mm e lowest value of'xt'= 948.581 mm
= 0930m = 0 949 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H-x/'1000)G+cA= 21.32 mm. = t2a

Sd
ttx = t.e_I_9j_l_: 1q00 ) 20.92 mm. =t2a. Usetocalc value oft2for the'Test'case
St 21.32 mm. =
2'l 4 mm

Tesf t2 = t2a + (t1-t2a\12.1- h1/ 1 25( r . tl )i8.5 21.06 mm.

For the Third cou6e.

lslll]s tLd = 21 .32 mm. tLt = 20.92 mm.

I,I -D.]LH-:U1I o + cn = 19.'10 mm

Sd
4.9xD(H-0.3) 18.66 mm
St

point" method calculatiot't -page2

=e-.e 3.48lllostration of the use ofthe variable design

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 65

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 99/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Anbient lemperatue storage lank design

Find values of " xl . x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditionq Course No. 3
Kd = 1.116 x1d = 705.270
Kt = 1.121 x1t = 710.091
0.056 761.111
Ct = 0.059 x2t = 7s2.872
H (m)= 13.5 xd3 = 923.42a H (m)= 13.5 xt3 = 912.745
Use lowest value ot'xd'= 7115.270 nm Use lowest value of'xt'= 710.091 mm
0.705 m 0.710 m

tdx = 4 9 x D( H - x/'1000 )G +CA = 854mm

sd
1 41 : 1900)
ttx= 18.08 mm
St
21 .32 mm . tLt =
z C-I sl tld =
tud = 18.54 mm. tut =
20 92 mm
18.08 mm
Find values of " x1 . x2, & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditionq
Kd = 1.150 x1d = 765.610 Kt = 1.128 x1t = 717.124
0.072 x2d= 970 421 0.062 xA= 837.188
13.5 xd3 = 909.895 H (m)= '13.5 xt3 = 898.455
Use lowest value of'xd' 765 610 mm Use lowest value of \t'= 717.128 nm
= 0.766 m O.717 rn

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - 11000 )G +CA = 'l846mm

Sd
ttx = 4glg( :14900 ) = 18.07 mm
St
3rd. Trial tLd= 2132 mm tLt= 2092 mm

Find values of"

tud
=
x1 . x2. & x3 " for both
18 46
mm & Test
the Desion =
tut conditionq18 07 mm
- fA = t.lSS xld = 774.A1 -
Kt = 1 133 727.162
868.932
Cd = 0.074 x2d = 1oo2.749 0.064
13.5
H (m 1= 13.5 xd3 = 907.863 H (m)= xt3 = 898.208
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 774 811 mm Use lowest value of 'xt'= 727 .162 mm
0.727 m
= 0775 m

tdx = 4.9xD( H-x/1000)G+CA= 1845 mm

llx= = 18.05 mm

I Thrrd course thickness = 16 c mm I

For the Fourth course.

1st. Trial tld = 18.446036 mm. tLt = 18.05 mm

tud = lLtryDl-BjL3) G+ cA 16.01 mm

Sd
4.9xD(H-0.3) 15.48 mm
St
Find values of " x1 . x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test.conditionq -
course No. 4
Kd = 1.152 xld 685 = 382
Kt = 1.166 x1t = 702.O74
0.073 xzd = 820.622 ct = 0.080 895.052
H (m)= 11 25 xd3= 845.565 H(m)= 11.25 xt3 = a31 .322

Use lowest value of ld'= 685 382 mm Use lowest value of'xt'= 7O2.o78 mm
0.702 m
= 0.685 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +cA = 15.48 mm

Sd
14.91 mm
ttx = {g4t:14900
St
)

2nd. Trial tLd =

tud =
18.45 mm. ilt =
'15.48 mm. tut =
18.05 mm
14 91 mm
Find values of" x1, x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditionq -
Kd = 1 191 xld = 742-52A Kt = 1.166 x1t = 693.570
Cd = 0.091 = 1021.186
xzd Ct = 0.079 xA= 892.536
831.498 H (m 1= 11 .25
H (m)= 11.25 xd3 = xt3 = 815.9'17
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 742528mm Use lowest value of 'xt'= 693.570 mm
0.694 m
= 0.743 m

td, = 4 9 x D( H - )d',1000 )G +CA = 15.41 mm

Sd
ttx = 19l9ll-:- 1 90 ) 14.92 mm
St

- page 3
Figure 3.48 lllustration of the use of the'variable design point" method calculation

66 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 100/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc sforage tank design

3rd. Trial tLd = 18.45 mm. tLt = 18.05 mm

tuo = 15.41 mm. tut = 14.92 mm
Find values of " xl . x2. & x3 " ior both the Desiqn & Test conditions.
Kd = 1 .197 xld = 751.227 Ki = x1t1.172 = 703.433
Cd = 0.093 x2d = 1051.662 Ct = 0.082 x21= 922.442
H (m)= 11.250 xd3= 829.391 H(m)= 11.250
xt3 = 816.246
Use lowest value of ld'= 751.227 mm Use lowest value of'xt'= 703.433 mm
= 0.751 m = 0.703 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 15.39 mm

Sd
ttx = 4.9x0(H-11000)
4.9x0{H-11000) '14.91 mm

Fourth course thickness = 15.4 mm

For the Fiffh course.

1st. Trial tld = 15.393654 mm. tlt = '14.91 mm

tud= 4.9xD(H-0.3)G+CA = 12.93 mm

Sd
tut= 4.9xD(H-0.3) = 12.30 mm
St
Find values of " xl . x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions. Course No. 5
Kd= 1 .191 640.609 =Kt 1.212 =
x1t 658.774
0.091 x2d = 814.771 ct = 0.100 x21= 900.847
H (m)= xd3 759.764 H (m)= 741.007
9.00 =
'xd'= 9.00value ofxt3= ..3.113
Use lowest value of
=
640.609 mm
0.641 m
use lowest 5(t
= il'
tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +cA = 12.46 mm
Sd
ttx= {:9x l _ 1990) 11.79 mm
St
2no tr|at ILo = 15.39 mm.
tLt = 14.91 mm
tud = 12.46 m'r,.
tut = 1 1.79 mm
Find values of " 11 . x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditions
Kd= 1 .235 690.469 Kt = 1.'196 x1t = 630.703
0.110 x2d =
992.221 Ct = 0.093 x? = 837.244
H (m)= 9.00 xd3 = 7 45.916 H(m )= 9.00 xt3 = 725.567
Use lowest value o{'xd'= 690 469 mm use Jowest value of t = ..3.13i
= 0.690 m ilr
tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +cA = 12.39 mm
Sd
ttx= {:q)( 1 : 1990) 11.83 mm
St
3rd. Trial tLd = 15.39 mm. 14.91 mm
tLt =
IUO = 12.39 mm. tut =
11.83 mm
Find values of " x1 . x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd= 1.242 697.973 Kt= 1 x1t .203 = 639.782
0.113 x2d = 1018.874Ct = 0.096 xz= 863.715
H (m)= 9.00 xd3 = 743.867 H (m 1= xt3 9.00 = 726.787
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 697.973 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 639.782 mm
0.698 m = 0.640 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - /1000 )G +CA = 12.38 mm

ttx= t$ jl:st Sd1990) 11 .82 mm

Fifth course thickness = 12.4 mm

For the Sixth course.

'lst. Trial tld = 12.38 mm. tlt = 11.82 mm

tud = _4€: f_H_.]X c+cn = 9.84 mm

Sd
4.9xD(H-0.3) 9.12 mm
st

:gure 3-48lllustraiion oflhe use ofthe"va abledesign point method calculalion - page 4

STORAGE TANKS & ESUIPMENT 67

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 101/296
IL
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempenture stonge tank design

Find values of " x1. x2, & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions. Course No. 6
Kd = 1.258 x1d = 590.692
Kt = 1.296 xlt = 613.197
Cd= o.120 x2d = 810.054 0.136 A= 919.316
  (m)= 6.7s xd3 = 662.950 H (m)= 6.75 xt3 = 638.032
Use lowest \€lue of ld'= 590.692 mm ljse lowest value of lt'= 613.197 mm
0.591 m = 0.613 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - /1m0 )G +CA = 9.44 mm

sd
ttx = %_U_:14 .00 ) 8.67 mm
'< St
2nd.Ttial tld =
{ '12.38 tLt =mm. 11.82 mm
IUO = 9.44 mm.
tut = 8.67 mm
Find values of" x'l. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd = 1.3'11 x1d =
632.2ffi Kt= I .251 x1t = 554.1'19
d= o.142 x2d = 961.166 H (m)= o.117 x?I= 790.453
H (m1= 6.75 xd3 = 6,t9.39() H (m)=.xr3= 6.75 622..38
Use lowest value of'xd'=
632.268 mm Use lowesl value of lt'= 5e1.119 mm
= 0.632 m 0.564 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - /1m0 )G +CA = 9.39 mm

sd
ttx = {€: {_l_:_.rll .00 ) 8.74 mm
st
3rd. Trial tLd= '12.3819497 mm. tlt = 'l'1.82 mm

tud
= " for
Find values of " x1 . x2. & €
9.38731523
mm.& Test
both the Desion
tut
=conditions.8.74 mm
Kd= 't.319 xld = Kt= 1.259 xlt = 572.417
0.146 x2d = 983.370 O.12O 2t= 812.505
H (m)= 6.75 xd3 = 647.424 H (m)= 6.75 xt3 = 624.A2
Use lowest value of 'xd'-- 638.392 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 572.417 mm
0.538 m = O.872 m

tdx =  $ l _:_4 9lc +ca = e.38 mm

Sd
[Ix= t.e"sjrjlql .00) = 8.73 mm
St

For the Seventh course.

ffi
'lst. Trial tLd = 9.38 mm. tLt = 8.73 mm

tud = _ Lllr_Lltl_:..lqll G+ cA = 6.76 mm

50
tut = 4.9xD(H-0.3) =
5.94 mm
St
Find values of" x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions. Course No. 7
Kd= 1.388 x1d = 524.fi6 Kt = 1.471
x'1t = 552.414
Cd = 0.173 2d = 7AO.2O Ct = 0.205 x2l= 923.080
H (m1= 4.50 xd3 = 549.331 H (m)= 4.50
xt3 = 514.858
Use lowest Yalue ofld'= 524.336 mm use lowest value of rt = u,1.ff3
ilt
= 0.524 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1ffi )G +CA = 6.45 mm

sd
tu= t x D-l n:_4_qoo) = 5.63 mm
st
2nd.
Trial tLd =
tud =
9.38
6.45
mm.
mm.
tLt =
tut =
8.73 mm
SbJmm

Kd= 1.454 xld = 554.646 Kt= '1.354 xlt = 480.858

0.'199 Pd= 894.697 0.160 2t = 719.064
H (m1= 4.50 xd3 = 536.685 H (m1= 4.50 xt3 = 501.516
Use lowest value of'xd'= 536.695 mm Use lowest value of t'= 480.858 mm
= 0.537 m = 0.481 m

Iqx = G+CA= 6.43 mm

ttx = 4.9xD(H-x/10m) 5.68 mm

st
3rd. Trial tLd = 9.38 mm. tlt = 6/Jmm
tud = 6.43 mm. td = 5.68 mm

Figure 3.48 lllustration ofthe use ofthe'varlable deslgn point'method calculation -page 5

68 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 102/296
 3 Ambient temperature sto@ge tank destgn
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

1.357 x1t = 483.988

0.200 v2d = 901.157 ct = 0.161 1A= 725.5W
H (m)= 4.fi xd3 = 535 980 H (m1= 450 xt3 = 503.650
Use lowest value of'xd'= 535 980 mm Use lowest value of tt= 483.988 m m
0.484 m
= 0.536 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H-x/1000)G+CA= 6.43 mm

sd
ttx = {.9,( _l_Ujlq1qoo ) = 5.68 mm
st
Seventh course thickness
= 6.5 mm

Esllbellshlb-qrse
ls _IrEl tLd = 6.43 mm. tlt = 5.68 mm

tud = LjL_0.]_LL:..lq1IG + cA = 3.67 mm

sd
tut= 4.9xD(H-0.3) = 2.76 mm
St
Find values of " xl. x2. & x3 " for JCgt-conditionq.. Course No 8
both the Desion q
T 't.lsz
x1d= 418.356 Kt= 2059 x1t= 452.1&
Cd = 0.300
x2d = 674 548 Ct = 0 384 xzt = 864.873
H(;)= 2.
xd3 = 4o5.oo1 H(m1= 2'25 xt3= 350.816
Use lowest value of'xd'= 405.001 mm Use lowest value oflt'= 350.816 mm
0.351 m
= 0.405 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/'1000 )G +CA = 3.53 mm

50
tb( = l.e )( _L l_:49.00 ) = 2.68 mm
St
2 C=.I&LI tld = 6.43 mm. tLt = 5.68 mm
luo = 3.53 mm. tut = 2 68 mm

1.608 x1t = 355.842

0.321 x2d = 72.386 Ct = 0.254 x? = 571.O45
H (m)= 2.25 xd3 = 396.986 H (m1= 2.% xt3 = 346.215
Use lowest value of'xd'= 396.986 mm Use lowest value of 5d'= 346.215 mm
0.346 m
= 0.397 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 354mm

50
$j,(4qm ) 2.69 mm
tb( = 1.9_I s
St
=
3rd-I e tld
= 6.i13 mm.
tLt = 5 68 mm
tud = 3.54 mm.
tut = 2.69 mm
Find values of " x'l. x2. & x3 " ior both the Desion & Test oonditionq.
Kd = 1.A17 x1d = 4m'7& Kt = 1.603 x1t = 354.837
Cd= 0.319 x2d = 718.683 Ct = O. 2 2t=
H (m 1= 2.250 xd3 = 397.603 H(m)= 2.250 xt3 = 346.6?t
Use lowest value of ld'= 397.603 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 346.634 m m
0.347 m
= 0398m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/10m )G +cA = 354mm

Sd
ttx = 1.9: Pl_ : 1q00 ) = 2.69 mm
st
Eighth course thickness
= 3.6 mm

A summary of course thicknesses is given at the end ofthis set of calculations'

Theuppercoursesoflencalculatetobethinnerthantheminimuma||owab|eShellcoursethickness
for the particular diameter of tank under GorFideration, thereiore a second set of
calculations is
produc€d using a 'bw strength' steel and this ofren resulb in a more financially economical design
tor one or more ofthe upper cou6es.

page 6
Figure 3.48 lllustralion of lhe uss of the 'variable deslgn poinf method calculation -

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPiIENT 69

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 103/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temparature stonge bnk design

A second set ofcalculations is now made using a ,low,s{rength steel.

For the Bottom course :

First find "tpd', & ,tpt".

metric imoerial
Variables : 60m 196.86 fr
H 18m 59.058 t
0.9 0.9
'l mm 0.0394 ins
sd 137 N/mm, 19870 lb/in'
st 154 N/mm'
No. of courses = I a
Height of each course = 2.Xm 7.3{l.215 i.

Material Specification i A.S.T.M. A 2e3 cr.C

Calculaiions are worked simultaneously for both the 'design' & test, conditions.
From Clause 3.6.3.2. tpd= 4.9xD(tt._Oj)xc +CA

rpt = 4.9xD(H_0.3)
st
IPo = 35.19 mm
lpt = 33.79 mm
From Clause 3.6.4.4. *=[*' '"fi",-l-t=-J r,"*fc-] .cA

ttt=lioo- -o.oom o lrr I lon"nl

fid=
[ "-JEIJ L'=E-J
35.08 mm
33.70 mm
Lesser of tpd, & ,tld, = 35.08 mm Lesser of ,tpt, & , t, = 33.70 mm
The sreater of twg -3sffinali;s.
LBottom course thjckness =
For the Second :
coursehl
= 2250 mm, Width of boftom course.
= 3Om0 mm. NominalTank radius.
r
(t1d-c.a.)= 34.08 mrn. Btm. course thks. less CA. Use ior ,,t2a,, (design) Used for ratio h1 +rr-T1-
t1d = 35.08 mm. Total Btm. course thks.
tlt = 33.70 mm. Lesser of tpt, & tt'. Used ior ratio h1 +{r-TT-
Ratio for't1d', h1 : 2.23 Ratio for,tlt, h1 : 2.24
\F"(t1d-"".)
Ratio 't1d' is > l .375 btn <2.625, then, t2 = t2a + (t1 - t2arl2.1 - ,
{h1/1 .25(r.t1)no.s}l and t2a for the Design' condition
is found as folbws :-
Ratio tlt' is>1.375 but <2.625, then, t2 = t2a + (t1 - t2a)[2.1 - {h1/1.25(r.t1)no.s}] and t2a for the ' Test'
condition
is iound asfollows :-

Calculate the Second course Test,thickness by trial

tud 4.9xD(H-0.3)c+CA = 30.84 mrn

= 4.9xD(H-_93)Sd
tut=
---- St-- = 29.50 mm
1st. Trial
Find vallr,eF of' x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditiona. Course No. 2
Kd= 1.1st x,td= 920.469 Kt= xlt= 919.s23
Cd = 0.066 ed = 1042.&qi Ct = O.Om xA= 1080.352
H(m)= 15.75 xd3 = 1173.84 H(m)=-tllz 15.75 xt3 = j147.62O
Use lowest value of ld,= 920.469 mm Use lowest \€lue of xt,= 9,19.b23 mm
0.920 m 0.920 m

tdx = 9.t :qC _:4 qIG +cA = 29.64 mm

sd
tt' = {.e x_Q_l_uj 1900 ) 28.31 mm \
St

Figure 3.48 fffustration of lhe use of the ryariable deslgn poinf method c€lculallon _ page 7

70 STORAGE TANKS & ESUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 104/296
 3 Ambient temperature sforage ,a,rk de.*''
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

2nd. Trial.
above calculation usino new values for 'tu' & Btm. course thk's. for Desiqn & Test.
=
tld 36.08 33.70 tud=tdx= 29.64 tut=th= 2431
of" xl. x2, & x3'for both the Test & Desion conditions.
Find values
-ReoeatKd = 1.'183 xld = 1014.799 Kt = 1.190 x'lt= 1017.352
Cd= 0.087 f,d, = 1373.657 Ct = 0.@0 2t= 142'3W
H (m1= 15.75
't5.75 \ xd3=
xd3 = 11ul.4bg
1'150.459 H (m)= 15.75 xt3 = 1124.375
Use lowest value of ld'= 1o14.799 mm U€e lowest value of lt'= 1017.352 mm
= 'l .015 m = 1.017 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/10m )G +CA = 29.4€ mm

b( = =
28.13 mm
3rd. Trial. St
Reoeat above calculation usino new values for 'tu' & Btm. course thk's. for Desiqn & Test.
35.08 33.70 tud = tdx = 29.46
tut = tb( = 28.'t3

Kd = 1.191 x1d = 1029.598 Kt = 1.198 xlt = 1033.308

0.091 x2d = 14X.434 Ct= 0.094 x?I= 1478.055
xd3 = 1146.918 H (m)= 15.75 xt3 = 112().661
se rowest varue of td ,oT:333 Use lowest value of 1d'= 1033.4)8 mm
ilr 'L033 m

tdx = 9lt9l _:4_9@)G +cA = 29.43 mm. = t2a. Use to calc. value of t2 br the'Design' ca€e
so
tu = 19IP..li_ __ 1990 ) 4.10 mm. = t2a. Use to calc. value oit2 for the'Test' case
s+
'Design' t2 = t2a + (t1-l2a\ 12.1- h1/1-25(r.tl )^0.5
29.43
mm.31.381
= 29.5 mm.
0K
'Tesf t2 = t2a + (t1-t2a) P.1- h1 / 1.25( r . tl )/S.5 29-832 mm.
3'1.381

second course thickness = 31.4 mm.

Forthe Third course.
'lst. Trial tLd = 31-38 mm. tLt = 29.83 mm

tud= 4.9 x D ( H - 0.3 ) G + CA = 26.49 mm

so
tut = 4€_ _Ql_uj =3 ) = X2mm
St
Course No. 3
Kd= 't.'tu x1d = 9?2..642 Kt= I.144 xlt= 907.971
0.088 x2d 11e3.773 Ct= 0.087 xA= 1179.957
H (m 1= 13.50 xd3 = 1087.669 H (m)= '13.50 xt3 = 1060.769
Use lowest value of ld'= 92.d42 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 907.971 mm
= 0.923 m = 0.908 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 25.29 mm

sd
tb(= 1 ,(ryF|j_I4gm) = 24.04 mm
ST
2nd. Trial tLd = 31.38 tltmm. =
29.83 mm
tud = .29 mm.
tut = 24.04.mm
Find values of" x1. )4. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd= 1.241 x1d = 1017.683 l(= 1.180 x1t= AA7.251
0.113 x2d= 1519.795 ct = 0.085 xA= 1153.829
H (m1= xd3 = 1(b2.@8 H (m)= xt3 13.50 = 1036.052
Use lowest \ralue of
.xd'=1017.683 mm use lowe.'l value of x= ttl:#l
= 1-0'18 m
il.
tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 25.11 mm
sd
tu= {€r{st tt:_Xll9o) = 24.08 mm

3rd. Trial 31.38 mm. tlt = 29.83 mm

tud = 25.11 mm. tut = 24.08 mm

Figure 3,48 lllustralion of the use of the "vadable deaign point meihod calculation - pege 8

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 7'l

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 105/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambienttempercturc storage tank design

Find values of " x1 . x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd= 1.250 = xld 1032.709 Kt= 1.188 xlt = 904.445
o.1'17 = x2d 1572.787 0.089 x2r= 1206.227
H (m;= 13.50 = xd3 1058.835 H (m)= 13.50 xt3 = 1036.904
Use lowest value of'xd'= 1032.709 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 904.445 mm
= 1.033 m = 0.904 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 25.08 mm

Sd

ttx = t9] 9jj:14

St .00 )
= 24.05 mm
Third course thickness = 25.1 mm

For the Fourth course.

1st. Trial tld = 25.0791621 m'Il.. tLt = 24.05 mm

tud = 4.9xD(H-0.3)c+cA = 22.15 mm

sd
tut = .9xD(H-0.3) = 20.90 mm
st
Find values of" xl. x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Iest conditions. Course No. 4
Kd= 1.132 727.111 Kt = x1t 1.150 = 742.A36
Cd = 0.064 x2d = 714.354 Ct = 0.072 xzr= 811.765
H (m)= 11.25 xd3 = 994.476 H(m)= xt3 11.25 = 966.142
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 718.354 mm Use towest vatue of ,xt
0.718 m
= ,^t:.ify
dx = 4.9xD(H-x/1000 |G +CA = 21 .34 mm
Sd
ttx= 1q_9_LE_l 90) : zuub mm
St
2nd. Trial iLd = 25.08 tlt = mm.24.05 mm
tud = 21 .34 mm tut . 20.06 mm =
Find values of" x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditions.
Kd= 1.175 x1d = 744.732 Kt= x1t 1.127 = 693.797
0.084 xzd 939.524 = 0.061 \z= 689.359
H (m)= 11.25 xd3 = 976.168 H (m)= xt3 11.25 = 946.404
Use lowest value of 'xd'= Use lowest value of'xt'= 689.359 mm
0.789 m = 0.689 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H-x/1000)G+CA= 21 .20 mm

Sd
ttx = 1 4] : 19.00 ) 20.16 mm
St
3rd. Trial tld = 25.08 mm. tlt = 24.05 mm
tud = 21.20 mm. tut = 20.16 mm
Find values of " x1 . x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd= 1 .183 799.419 Kt= 1 xl t .134 = 707 .094
0.087 x2d = 977.746 0.065 x2r= 727.153
H (m1= 11.250 xd3 = 973.054 H (m;= xt3 11.250 = 948.809
Use lowest value of'xd'= 799.419 mm Use lowest value of tt'= 707.094 mm
= 0.799 m = 0.707 m

tdx = lqr Q( -:l: qq)G +cA = 21.18 mm

sd

tu= {st n: t<4190 )

1.9 ,< 20.13 mm

For the Fifrh course.

1st. Trial tLd = 21.18 mm. tLt = 20.13 mm

_49: 1H:U c+cn = 17.80 mm

Sd
tut = 4.9xD(H-0.3) '16.61 mm
st

Figure 3.48 lllustration ofthe use ofthe "va able design poinf'method calculation -page I

72 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 106/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempentue &otqe d( &i,
 
Find values of" x1. x2, & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions. Course No. 5
Kd = 1.'190 x1d = 705.429 Kt = 1.212 x1t = 71A325
0.090 Pd= 811.349 Ct = 0.100 x?t= a99.172
H (m)= 9.00 xd3 = 89'l.595 H (m)= 9.00 xt3 = 861.179
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 705.429 mm use rowest varue of n= tt3.i?3
0.705 m Ir
tdx = 4.9 x D( H - /1000 )G'+CA = 17.Q mm
sd
ttx = 1.9 ><_Ql_E_:.. 19.00 ) : 15.81 mm
st
2nd. Trial tld = 21.18 tLt mm. = 20.13 mm
tud = 17.02 tutmm. = '15.81 mm
Find values of" x1. x2. & x3 " ior both the Desion & Test clnditions.
Kd = 1.245 x1d = 764.989 Kt = 1.183 x1i = 670.26
0.114 fld = 1024/# 0.087 {2t = 741.644
H (m1= 9.00 xd3 = 471.767 9.00 xt3 = 840.m
value of ld'= value of d'= value of'xd'= 764.989 mm Use lowest value oi )d'= 670.236 m m
0.765 m 0.670 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - /10m )G +CA = 16.90 mm

Sd
ttx= 19rQ_1 _: 1990) 15.90 mm
st
3rd. Trial tld = 21.18 tLtmm. = 20.13 mm
tud = 16.90 mm.
tut = 15.90 mm
Find values of " x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd= 1 .253 x1d = 774.044 Kt = x1t = 1.191 68't.867
Cd= 0.1 18 nd =
1061.363 0.090 AI= 814.185
H (m)= 9.00 xd3 = 868.816 H (m)= 9.m 842.656
Use lowesl value of 'xd'= 774.044 nm Use lowest value of tt'= 681.867 mm
0.774 m 0.682 m

tdx = 4.9 x DaH - x/1000 )c +CA = 16.89 mm

sd
ttx= 19rQ_( _ 19_00) = 15.88 mm
St

Forthe Sixth cou6e.

lFih@
1st. Trial tld = 16.89 ins. tLt = '15.88 ins.

tud= 4.9xD(H-0.3)G+CA
Sd
= 13.46 mm
tut = 4.9xD(H-0.3) = 12.31 mm
st
Find values of" xl.,. & x3 " for boththe Desion & Test conditions. CourseNo. 6
Kd= 1.2fi x1d= 643.947 Kl= 1.290 x,tt= 659.023
0.119 xzd = 801.117 0.133 xA= 900.845
H (m1= 6.75 xd3 = 775.179 6.75 xt3 = 741.fi4
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 6i13.947 mm Use lowest value of lt'= 659.023 mm
0.644 m 0.659 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )c +CA = 12.79 mm

Sd
ttx= t€4_l _:..14 .00) 11.63 mm
St
2nd. Trial tLd 16.89 tLt mm
tud =
= 12.79 mm.
tut == 15.88 mm
11.63
Find values of " x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Test conditions.
Kd = 1.320 x1d = 693.500 K= x1t = 1.241
0.146 2d =
986.244 x2t= 0.113 761.5V2
H (m)= xd3 = 755.804 H (m)= 6.750 xt3 = 720.572
Use lowest value oi 'xd'= 693.500 mm Use lowest value of lt'= ouJ,Yob mm
0.694 m 0.6M m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 12.70 mm

sd
ttx = 19.t q.1xj_x4qm ) = 11.73 mm
St

Figure 3.48 flfuslration of the use ofthe'variable design point'method calculalion - page 10

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 73

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 107/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc storage tank design

3rd. Tfial tld = 16.89 mm. = tLt 15.88 mm

tud = 12.70 mm. = td 11.73 mm
Find values of" xl. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Te€t conditions.
Kd = '1.330
x1d = 700.905 Kt = xlt 'l. 'l = 5'14.333
0.150 fld= 1013.811 0.117 A= 788.819
6.75 xd3 = 752.972 H (m)= xt3 6.75 = 7n.821
Use lowest value of 'xd'= 700.905 mm Use lowest value of X'= 614.333 mm
0.701 m = 0.614 m

tdx = 4,9 x D( H - )'/1000 )G +CA = 12.68 mm

sd
tk= 4.9xD(H-x/1000) = 11.71 mm
st
Sixth course thickness = 12.7 mm

For the Seventh course.

1st. Trial tld = 12.68 ins. tlt = '11.71 ins.

tud= 4.9 x D ( H - 0.3 ) G + CA = 9.l l mm

sd
tut= 4.9xD(H-0.3) = 8.02 mm
St
Find values of" x1. x2. & x3 " for both the Desion & Tesl conditions. Course No. 7
Kd = 1.N2 x1d = 570.944 l( = .461 xlt = 1 589.208
Cd = 0.175 x2d = 7A7 .54A Ct = O.2O'l xA = 906.3,16

H (m)= 4.50
Use lowest xd3= 637.A57
value of'xd'=
H
570.944 mm (m)= Use lowest
4.50value ofxt3ld'=
= 598.35/1
589.208 mm
= 0.571 m = 0.589 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 8.59 mm

sd
ttx = {€ t<_Ql_l_t4 ,00 ) 7.47 mm
st
2nd. Trial tLd = '12.68 tlt = mm- 1'1.71 mm
tud = 8.59 tut = mm. 7.47 mm
Find values of " x1. ,.
& x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditions.
Kd= 1.477 x1d = 608.169 Kt= x1t '1.364 = 524.595
O.2O7 x2d 912.921= 0.164 x?t= 737.507
H (m)= 4.50 xd3 = 619.nO H (m1= xt3 4.50 = 52.386
Use lowest value of d'= 608.169 mm Use lolYest value of lf= 524.695 mm
m
0.608
= 0.525 m
tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1@0 )G +CA = 9.52 mm
5d
ttx= 1.9t<_Pl_E_::lllgo) = 7.59 mm
st
3rd. Trial tLd = '12.68 tLt = mm. 11.71 mm
tud = 8.52 tut = mm. 7.59 mm
Find values of" x'|. x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn & Test conditions.
Kd= '1.489 x1d = 613.i181 Kt= xlt 1.375 = 533.6@
o.212 x2d 953.578= x2t 0.168 = 758.139
H (m)= 4.50 xd3 616.672= H (m1= xt3 4.50 = 592jn
Use lotYest value of td'= 613.481 mm Use lolvest value of lt'= 533.669 mm
0.613 m = 0.534 m

tdx = 4.9 x D( H - x/1000 )G +CA = 8.51 mm

Sd
ttx= {$_Pl_E_:14 .oo) =
St
Seventh course thickness = 8.6 mm

For the Eiqhth course.

1st. Trial tLd = 8.51 mm. tLt = 7.57 mm

tud = l9lQ.( _:..lUllc + cn = 4.77 mm

tut = 4.9xD(H-0.3) 3.72 mm

st

Figure 3.48 llluslralion of the use of the "variable design poinf melhod calculation - page 11

74 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 108/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

No' I
Find values of" x1. x2 , Course 2034
& x3 " for both the Desiqn gJes-t-conditionq
Kt = x1t = 476.a45
Kd= ''7a5 xlo:----83'696 o 378 xz,=
il = 0.310 x2d = 696.980 ct = 850.595

H(;)= 2.25 xd3= 461325 H(m)= 225 xt3= 407.714

use lowest value of 'xd'= 453.696 mm Use lowest value of'xt'= 407.71o mm
0.408 m
= 0.454 m

tdx = 1g t _ p9q)G+cA = 447mm

Sd
3.52 mm
rux = tg41 _:lg1q00 )

h{ttal tld
= 8.51 St tlt mm. = 7.57 mm
tud = 4.47 tut mm. =
3.52 mm
Find values of " x1 . x2. & x3 " for both.the Desion &
Tqit-conditionq,.
903 ,'to-= Kt 822 = 1694 xlt = 401.126
Kd = 1 47o
7i33a} = o 282 xZ = 634.316
Cd = 0.344 =
x2d Ct
225
Hrm\=
\"r/- 2.25 xd3= 446.728 H(m)= xt3= 396.290
'l u=. toi"lt uutu" oiro'= 446728 mm use lowest value of lt'= 396.290 mm
0.396 m
= 0447 rn

4.48 mm

ttx= 49xD(H-x/'1000) = 354mm

Jrd. r|al
I 8.51 mm. tLt = 7 57 mm
tud = 4.48 mm. tut = 3.54 mm
x2. & x3 " for both the Desiqn &-Tegt-conditionq
1 689
Find values of " x1 . ,
Kd = .898 x1dl-- 470 027
1
Kt =
280
x1t = 400.574

Cd = 0.342 x2d = 769771 Ct = o x2l = 630.676

H(;)= 2.25 xd3= 447 4oo H(m)= 225 xt3 = 397.516

447.400 mm of'rt'= 397.516 mm
Use lowest value of'xd'=
Use lowest value
0.398 m
= O 447 m

4.9 x D( H-x/1000)G+CA= 4.48 mm

tdx =
sd
3.54 mm
rtx = L Ql :14q00 )
st

Summary of calculated oourse ihicknesses

The minimum nominal Shell thickness for

a Tank of 60 m. dia. is 8mm
--------| ---
Course No. Calc. thks. Actualthks. Material.
lmm) (mm) A.S.T.M.
25.3 25.3 A 573M Gr.4a5
A 283 Gr.c
2 21 .4 21 .4 A 573M Gr.485
A 283 Gr.C
3 18.5 '18.5 A 573N4 Gr.485
A 283 Gr.C
4 15.4 A 573M Gr.485
A 283 Gr.c
5 12.4 A 573lvl Gr.485
A 283 Gr.C
6 9.4 9.4 A 573M Gr.485
A 283 Gr.C
7 8 A 573N4 Gr.485
I 8 A 573M Gr.485

and Steel speciflcations :-

Final selection of Shell thicknesses
Course No. Thickness Steelgrade
tmml A.S.T.M.
1 A 573M Gr.485
2 A 573M Gr.485
3 18.5 A 573M Gr.485
4 '15.4 A 573M Gr.485
5 12.4 A 573M Gr.485
6 9.4 A 5731V Gr.485
7 8 A 573M Gr.485
The weight of the shell is 394190 kg
I 8 A 283 Gr.C
:

poinf'method calculatian'page 12
Figure 3.48lllusttation ofthe use ofthe "va able design

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 75

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 109/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

3.6.7 Shell stiffening wind girders The equivalent API formula is intended to apply to tanks with e
- ther open tops or closed tops and is based on the following fac-
Having dealt with the differences in approach to designing shell tors taken from R.V McGrath's Stabilitv of API 650 Standard
thickness beiween the British and American Codes, the Ameri- Tank Shells, (Reference 3.6\.
can approach to shell stiffening requirements is now a A design wind velocity (V) of 160 km/h (100 mph) which
considered. imposes a dynamic pressure of 1 .23 kPa (25.6 lbf/ftr). The
3.6.7.1 Primary wind girders to API 650 velocity is increased by 10% for either a height above
ground or a gust factor; thus the pressure is increased to
The background for the requirements of primary wind girders to 1.48 kPa (31 lbf/ftr). An additional 0.24 kPa (5 tbflftr) is
the API 650 Code are the same as for the BS Code and these added to account for inward drag associated with
have already been given in Section 3.5.1. open-top tanks or for internal vacuum associated with
closed-top tanks. Atotalof 1.72 kPa (3h lbflftr) is obtained.
The API Code refers to top wind girders rather than primary
wind girders and the formula for the required section modulus For the purposes of this Standard, this pressure is in-
for the girder is the same as the BS formula except that it is Ore- tended to be the result of a 160 km/h (100 mph) fastest
sented in a slightly different format, as follows: mile velocity at approximately I m (30 ft) above ground. H1
may be modified for other wind velocities, as specified by
the purchaser, by multiplying the right side ofthe equation
equ.3.60 by [(V,/ V),], where V, =1 60 km/h (100 mph). When a de-
17
sign wind pressure, rather than a wind velocity, is specified
where; by the purchaser, the preceding increase factors should
be added to the purchaser's specified wind pressure un-
Z= required section modulus (cm3)
less they are contained within the design wind pressufe
D= nominal tank diameter (m) specified by the purchaser

heighi oftank shell (m) including any freeboard The wind beingshell, whichover the theoretical
Hz= b buckling pressure
mode ofthe tank uniform
provided above the maximum filling height as a eliminates the need
guide for a floating roof for a shape factor for the wind loading.

The consiant lTequates to 0.058 used in the BS formula (see

c The modified US l\,4odel Basin formula for the critical uni-
form external pressure on thin-wall tubes free fiom end
equation 3.22 ). loadings, subjectto the total pressure specified in ltem a.
The formula is based on a wind speed of 100 mph and therefore d Other factors specified bythe purchaser. When otherfac-
must be modified for any other wind speed by multiplying the tors are specified by the purchaser that are greater than
' the factors in ltems a - c, the total load on the shell shall be
right hand side of the equation
' LY-
OU
| 100, modified accofdingly and H, shall be increased by the ratio
of 1.72 kPa (36 lbfiftr) to the modified total pressure.
where: The resulting API formula is given as:
V = design wind speed (mph) f.----
H. = 9.47r ll I equ 3.61
In Sl units this
--17 ) where V is in m/sec.
becomest\/\2
' \D i
\44
which is the same as:
For tank diameters over 60 m, the section modulus required by
equation 3.22 may be reduced by agreement beh,,r'een the pur- g 471
/,i-r:
-;.' \ 'z
H, - in the BS format.
chaser and the manufactufer, but the modulus may not be less
than that required for a tank diameter of 60 m.
t D' .l

As is the case for ihe BS Code, API requires that when the top where;
wind girder is located more than 600 mrn below the top of the Hr = ihe vertical distance (m) between the interme
shell, the tank shall be provided with a 60 x 60 x 5 mm top curb diate wind girder and the top angle of the shell
angle for shells with a top course thickness of 5 mm and a 80 x or top wjnd girder of an open top tank
80 x 6 mm angie for top courses more than 5 mm thick.
t = the "as ordered" thickness (mm), unless other-
3.6.7.2 Secondary wind girders to API 650 wise specified, of the top shell course
Again, the theory behind the design of secondary wind girders
(referred to as intermediate wind girders in the API Code) is the D
Note:
= nominaltank diameter (m)
This implies that, unless directed otherwise by the pur-
same as that given in Section 3.5.2 for the BS Code. However
there are differences in the presentation ofthe formulae and the chaser, the tank designer can use the total, "as built"
nomenclature used, as follows: thickness of the top course in calculation without de-
ducting from it any corrosion allowance which may
In the BS Code the maximum height of the unstiffened shell is have been included in the course thickness. The BS
given in equation 3.33 as: Code requires any corrosion allowance to be deducted
1n lrom the top course thickness for this calculation.
, .
np = xl
tt'I" I
-
For wind speeds other than 100 mph, H1, is modified by multi-
lD", / 100 \2
plying the right ha nd side of equation3.61 by|
*J
whereVis
wnere:
the design wind speed in mph.
K = 95,000
t447\2
3.563Vs + 580 Va For Sl units this becomes - where V is in m/sec.
\ v,/
Vs = the design wind speed (m/sec)
To compare equations 3.33 and 31.61, consider a tank de-
Va = the design vacuum (mbar) signed for a wind speed of 100 mph (44.7 mls). Theminimum

76 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 110/296
 3 Ambient tempercturc storage tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

value for the partial internalvacuum used in the design of sec- tank shell may be included in the calculation and the portion al-
ondary wind girders to the BS Code is that quoted in the Code lowed is given by:
ior open top, or non-pressure tanks, Va = 5 mbar.
1 3.4l5 x t equ 3.63
Then from equation 3.32
95,000 where
=9.482
3.563x44.7'+580x5 D = nominal tank diameter (m)
This result is very similar to the constant of9.47 derived for use t = shellthickness (mm) at the point of attachment
in the API formula given in equation 3.61.
The use in the API Code of equation 3.62 for determining the
The orincioal difference between the Codes, is that lhe BS
Code increases the value used for internal vacuum Va for section size for intermediate wind girders usually results in
larger section sizes than that required by Table 3 of the BS
ligh-pressure tanks (56 moar) to 8.5 mbar. Whereas no in-
Code.
crease is required when designing for higher pressures when
applying Appendix F of the API Cod€ Comparisons between BS and API wind girder section require-
Applying the increased value of 8.5 mbar to equation 3.32 ments are given in Figure 3.49 for a range of tank diameters
gives: and minimum course thicknesses.
95,000
=7 .884 Intermediate (secondary) girde6 to the APlCode
3.563 x44.7 + 580 x 8.5
This has the eifect, for a given set of tank design parameters' to
decrease the minimum allowable spacing of the girders on a
high-pressure tank designed to the BS Code by 16 75olo over
the API requirements. Hence, depending upon the geometry of
the tank, this could lead to an increase in the number of wind
gliders required for the BS tank.
Section 3.5.2 showed how a tank shell of varying course thick-
nesses. designed to the BS Code, was transposed to a equiva-
lent height shell having a constant thickness equal to the thick-
ness of the top course.
The API Code follows exactly the same mathematical route in
determining the equivalent, (or "transposed shell" as it is re-
ferred to in the API Code). Also the method for the determina-
tion of the number and positioning of the girders is the same as
r6-q oo14- -''--_ o84400 I8o
for the BS Code. - -j

However, whereas the BS Code tabulates the required section I 8r9 7t 1.015 263 00J
Pateo oerc
734.510 38 32
for the secondary wind girders against ranges of tank diarne-
ters. the API Code requires the section modulus of the section 747 838 Pl"t" 9'd"'b zor e2o 37.62

to be calculated using the same equation as that used for the

top girders (equation 3.60), except that the value for H is differ- u'l9'o fo ruu uuo ,t,t
"
ent. For Intermediate wind girders to the API Code:

equ 3.62 Intermediate (secondary) 9irders to the Bs code

17

where:
D = tank diameter (m) 64.7

Hr = vertical distance (m) between the intermediate x75xB 953

wind girder and the top angle of ihe shell, or x75x8 95.3
the top wind girder of an open top tank (see
125x75x8 95.3
equation 3.61)
150x90x10 1739
of 100 mph.
Again, equation 3.62 is based on a wind speed 150 x 9-o x lo 173.9
For other wind speeds the right hand side of the equation is I 19o49r lq
150x90x10 1739
r \/ t2 2AAx1A0a12
multiplied
' by
' | 100,
-- I where V is the required design wind 314.4

\ 200x100x12
speed. 204x100x12
/ \/ \2
Figure 3.49 Comparisons betlveen BS and API wlnd glfdef section require-
For Sl units this becomes ,,"; where V is in m/sec.
\++.r )
The required section modulus for intermediate wind gifders is Note: Typical dimensions for plate girders made from formed
based on the properties of chosen steel sections, which are ai- plate are given in Figure 3.3'1.
tached to the shell. Normally rolled steel angles or channels are The minimum thickness requirements for the top courses alter
used but for larger girders, polygonal sections formed from at differing tank diameters in each Code, so, in orderto keep the
folded plate are often used. (See Figures 3.30 and 3.31.) comparisons on the same basis, tank diameters have been se-

When lected tofallinto

the section moduluswhat
steel section(s)3.62,
by equation is to satisfy ofthe
determining given required
a portion of the gories, namely, 6two
mm and top course
I mm, minimum
for both thickness cate-
Codes.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 77

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 111/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank deslgn

3.6.7.3 Comparison between British and American sec- HF

These girders are ideally spaced at apart = 1.929 m.
ondary wind girder requirements --
The differing secondary wind girder requirements, between the Thefirstgirder, when positioned 1.929 m downfrom the primary
British and American Codes, can be compared by designing a girder, is on a course of minimum thickness and is not within
tank shell to both Codes using the same overall dimensions 150 mm ofa horizonial girth weld. This position js acceptable.
and design parameters.
The second girder is positioned 1.929 m below the flrst, i.e. at
Take the British tank design illustration in Section 3.5.2.3. Here 3.858 m belowthe primarygirderand in this position it is on the
itwas demonstrated that the shell required two secondarywind 14.1 mm thick course, which is not a course of minimum thick-
ness and is girth
kgim). each being an angle section of 200 x
1OO also only
girders, x 12 (27.3 counts its position must108 mm below a
be adjusted. seam. On both

Designing the shell to the American Code, and using the same Adjust the position for being on a course thicker than the mini-
design parameters (i.e. external floating rooftank 96 m diame- mum as follows:
terand 19 m high having eight2.375 m widecourses), the shell
{3.s58 - (1.375'- -.","rr
li.l
2.375}} *^ttz.d]
I l"
is to be designed for a wind speed of 60 m/sec and the primary
girder is 1 m down from the top of the shell.

Note: The shell, being over 60 m diameter, is designed to the +(1.375+2.375\ =3.912 m below the primary girder
"variable design point" method.
Also, due to the lower allowable stress for the American Code,
which is based on the ultimate tensile stress of the shell mate-
rial, rather than the minimum yield stress in the case ofthe Brit-
ish Code, the lower courses are thicker than those to the British

Code, whereas two upper courses are to the minimum al-

nominalthe

7:hI
lowable thickness for construction purooses to the
American Code. (.e. 10 mm to APl, and 12 mm to BS).

h {m) He (m) iF
LJ75 10.0 1.375

2 2.375 10.0 2.375

3 2.375 1.006

2.375 19.2 0.465

5 2.375 24.T o.248

6 2.375 2A.A 0.169

7 2.375 39.2 0.078

8 2.375 40.7 .071

5.747

However, as the stiffening requirements are being compared,

rather than the differences in the shell thickness requirements,
the upper two courses willbe keptatthe same thickness as that
for the BS Code. The data used will therefore be as follows;

h (m) i(mm) He lm)

1.375 12.O 1.375

2 2.375 12.0 2 375

3 2.375 1.006

2.375 19.2 0465

5 2.375 24.7 0.244

6 2.375 24.8 0.169

T 2.375 39.2 0 078

I 2.375 40.7 .071

5.787

The maximum spacing for stiffeners on the shell from equation

3.61 is;

\ =9.47x'12

ne \ 79,7

r'lj
Figure 3.50 Typical stitrening ring sections iortank shells
Therefore two secondary wind girders are required. Fron API 650, figure 3-20

78 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 112/296
 3 Ambient temperaturc stotage tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

il

Coh{D 4 Colum 5 Colunn 6

Colu@ 2
Cohen I sheU Thicloess {ms (i'r)l
Mcbber Size
II 5 t34e) 6(lil) 8 (540)

Top Atrgle: Figt& 3-20, Ddail a

64x64x6.4 21/2x2r/2x114 6.86 t0.4D 7.01(0.42)

64x64x1.9 2tl2x2\/2x51rc 8.30(0.51) 8.48 (0,52)
76x76><9.5 3x3x3/8 13.80(0.89) 14.10 (0.91)

C\nt) Anglcr Figue 3-20, Detlil b

&x&x6.4 2tl2x2\12xrl4 2?.00.6D 28.3 (r.72)

Ux64x7I 2tl2x2tlxxlrc 3r.l (1.89) 32.8 Q.M'
'16x16x6.4 3x3x\14 38.1 (2.32) 39.9 (248)
76x76x9.5 3x3x3/s 43.0 (2.78) 52.6 (3.35)
1(,x$tx6,4 s',t.6 (3.s' 71.4 (4.41)

102x102x9.5 65.6(4.17) 8r.4(5.82)

OneAnglei Figue 3-20, D€bil c (Sce NoE)

&x 64x5.4 2rl2x2\lzxtl4 28.s (r.68) 29.6(r.79) 31.3 0.87) 32.1(r.93J 33.4 (2.00)
gxgt7.9 2\lxx2r/2x51ft 33.10.98) As (2.t3' 365 Q.23' 38.1 Q.32) 395 (2.44)
60-8 (3.73) 64.2€.89) 66.6 (4.00) 67.7 (4.10)
It)2x76x63 4x3x1l4 58.3 (1.50)
lO2x76 x7 9 4x3x5/16 7r.6(4.4s)
68.3 (4.14) 76.2(4.6) 19.4 (4.82) 80.8 (4.95)

127 x76x1.9 5x3x5/16 90.? (5.53) 9s2(5.96) 102.0(625) 105.0 (6.47) 108.0 (6.64)

127 x89 x1.9 5x3tl2t516 101.0(6.13) 106.0 (6.60) 113.0 (6.92) 118.0(7.16) r20.0(7.35)
12? x 89 x9.5 5x3%x3/8 r 16.0(?.02) 122-0(7.6r) 131.0 (8.01) 137.0t8.33) 140.0(8.58)

$2x'02x9,5 6x4x3/8 150.0 f9.@) 169.000.56) 182.0(ll.l5) 191.0 01.59) 194.0 o 1.93)
'IUo Angler: Figr.Ee l-20, Ddril d (S€€ No.e)

r02x76x7.9 4x3x5/rc 186 01J7) 19r (1r.78) 200(r220) ?0t (t2.53\ 2r0 02.81)
2n 233 (t4.rE) 242 (14.&) 245 (t4.95)
l02x76t9.5 4x3x3lB 21603.06) 1J3.61\
262 (16.23) 2ts (16.u) 285 0734) 289 (t7.74)
121x.16x'|.9 5x3x5/16 2s405.48)
x16x9.5 5x3x3/s 2% (18.00) 305 (18-8e) 321(19.64) 333 (2026) 338(20.?7)
127
279 (16.9s) 287 (t7.7O) 100(18.31) 310 O8,82) 314 (19.23)
127 x89 x7.9 5x3t/2x51rc
325 (t9;75J 334(20.63) 350 (21.39) 363 (22.01) 368 Q2.A'
127x89x9.5 5x3t12xtl8
(31.55)
152 x 102x9.5 6x4x318 456Qt.74) 468 (28.92) 489 (29.95) 507 (30.82) 514
ForEed PLre: Figue 3-20, Detail e

b=250 b= l0
- 34t(23.29) 3',ts Q4.63\ 39 (25.61' 39 (26,34'
b-300 b= 12 421(29.21) 473 (31.07) 496(32.36) 505 (33.33)

b=350 b-14
- 519(35.49) 577 (37.88) 606 (39.53) 618 (40.78)

b=4m b* t6 615 (42.06) 687 (4507) '123 (41.t0) 731(48.6t)

7r7 (48.97\ 8t2 (52.62' 846 (55.07) 864 (56.9)
b=450 b= l8
8U (56.2r\ (6032) 976 (63.43) 996 (65.73)
b=500 b =20
b=550 937 (63.80) lo49 (6E.78) llll (72.1E) 1135 (74.89)

b=600 b=24 t0s4(7t.n\ ll81(??.39) 1252 (81.30) 1280 (84.45)

b=650 b=26 r r?6 (79-9) l3l7 (86.35) 1399 (90.?9) t432 (944r)

b-700 b=28 1304 (88.58) 1459 (95.66) l55l (r00.6s) r589004.77)

b- 750 b-30 t436(91.52' 1607005.31) l ?09 (t | 0.88) l7s2 01sJ2)
b=8m l5?3(106.78) 175901s.30) 1873 02 r.47) r92t 026.66\
b- 850 b=1,4 1716 (116.39) r9r7 (t25.64> 2U1(132.4\ 2096038.17)
b= 9m b=36 1864(126.33) 2080036.32) 2218 043.73) 2n6 Q50.07)
b=950 b=38 2016036.60) zA8(t41.3s)
2174(t41.211 2421(l58.tl)
2398 (155.40)
258/' (167.42'
2463 (162.34'
2654 (t74-99)
b = 1000 b=40
Nor, fn" roti* roa,tl f- D€tails e and d arE bas€d on lhe lonSpr hg b€ing locdcd hctrizootsly (Frpedislar to lh sheu)
l|Aetr eglca wi6 lm6td lcgs ar€ u €d.

Figure 3.51 Section moduliof stiffening ring sections fortank shells (Values given in cm3 (in3)
Fron API 650, table 3-20

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 79

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 113/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc storage tank design

This position puts the girder '162 mm below the girth seam and
therefore further adjustment is not required.
3.7 Compression area for fixed roof tanks
The spacing between the girders on the transposed shell is: 3.7.1 Effect of internal pressure
1.929 m, 1.983 m and '1 .875 m = 5.787 m. These spacings are
all less than Hj at 2.787 m and therefore are acceptable. All closed tanks which are subjected to an internal pressure
The section sizes for the girders have now to be calculated. which is in excess ofthe weight ofthe roof plates, try to adopt a
spherical form, wherebythe meridional and latitudinal stresses
From equation 3.62 the section modulus is calculated as fol-
lows:
at any given point in the containment parts would tend to
equalrse.
For the upper secondary girderthe value for H1 is 1.929 m, and By way of illustration, the effect on a vertical cylindrical cone
D2 H, / v \'? roof storage tank is shown in an exaggerated form in Figure
-- 17 144.7 ) 3.52.
Two critical areas of distortion become aDoarent:
qro
^Yl"":i r AA
qA2
-"" 17 xl "al
r2
_1884cm3 1) The shell-to-bottom joint.
\44.7 ) 2) The shell-to-roof joint.

Section type and size The distortion ofthe shell-to-bottom joint has already been dis-
cussed in Section 3.5.3 and the shell-to-roofjoint is now consid-
Figure 3.50 shows typical stiffening ring sections and is taken ered.
from Table 3-30 ofAPl 650 and typical values of section for var-
ious types of ring sections. The action ofthe pressure on the underside ofthe roofcauses a
compressive force to be induced in the shell-to-roof ioint as
shown in Figure 3.53.
From equation 3.63 the participating portion ofthe shellplating The area in the vicinity of this connectjon needs to be strong
which can be included in the calculation for the girder is:
enough to withsiand the compressive force in orderto preventa
13.4^,t61 = 13.4.t86 x 12 =45s mm buckling failure taking place as shown in Figure 3.54.

Referring to Figure 3.50, a Detail 'e'type girder is required.

The table in Figure 3.51 does not have a shelt thickness of 12

mm listed but at 11 mmthenearestZvaluetolSS4cm3isl92l
cm3 indicating that a minimum girder width of about 32 inches
(813 mm) is required.
A detailed calculation gives an actual minimum width of 770
mm, giving a Z value of 1890 cm3.
Forthe lowersecondary girder the value for H1 is 1 .983 m, and

-- D2.H. / v t2
17 \44.7 )
96' x 1.983 / 60
x 12
- rvJ/ cml
17 \44.7 )
The participating portion of shell is found to be 493 for the 14. 1
mm plate, and the required Z value is 1937 cm3 indicating that a
Detail 'e' type girder with a similar width to that for the upper
girder is required.
Adetailed calculation again shows that a minimum width of 770
mm, gives a Z value of 1940cm3forthe 14.1 mm plate.
Both girders will have the same minimum cross section and it is
found that ifthe girders are made in sections to match the num-
ber of shell plates there will be 32 polygonal sections per girder
and these will each weigh an average of 50.64 kg/m of tank cir-
cumference. Figure 3.52 Diagrammaic illustration of a pressurised tank

Conclusion
The British design requires two girders each out of 200 x 100 x
12 x 27.3 kglm angle, giving a toial net weight of 16,467 kg.
The American design again requires two girders but of a much
largersection madefrom 6 mm folded plate having an average
fabricated weight of 50.64 kg/m giving a total net weight of
30,545 kg, which is 85% more than the British design.
Referring back to Morton's research in Section 3.5.2.2, it ap-
pears that the British Code has heeded his advice, which sug-
gests thatfairly small section girders give adequate stiffness to
a shell, whereas the American Code seems not to have done
so. Figure 3.53 Compressive force at shell-to-roof ioint

80 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 114/296
 3 Ambient tempercture storage tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

PR N/rm circ.
=2tan0
it becomes a
As this force is acting on area t x L (1 mm x 1 mm),
pressure

p= PR N/mm equ 3.64

2tan0
To find the circumferential (hoop) stress in the ring of
diameter
2R and length L, Proceed as follows:
The load on the elemental horizontal strip at axis
XX= pressure x area
equ 3.65
=Px2RxL
joint due to intemalpressure
Figure 3.54 An example ofa failed shell-to_roof The force in the ring resisting this load at axis
Couftesy of EEMUA
XX=stressxarea
equ 3.66
3.7.2 Derivation of the required compression zone =scx2(txL)
area where Sc is the stress

The compression areawhich is required is derived as follows:

The load acting normal to the underside of the roof
= p. n.R'? (N)

The circumference of the shell

=2. r.R (mm)
Then the vertical force in the shell
r'Rz R (N/mmcirc.)
-p2.n.R-P2

given
The load given by equation 3.65 must equate to the force
in equation 3.66 and therefore.
Scx2xtxL=Px2RxL
Substituting equation 3.64 for P;
oR
The horizontal component of this vertical force is found as: sc x2 xtxL = _r_xzKxL
ztanu
Where 0 is the angle between the roof and the horizontal, atthe
oolnt where the roof meets the shell Then:
p.R2 .L

s 5C.lanU
The cross-sectional area Afor the ring
N/mmcirc.
-gB-
2tane
but as both t and L are both 1 mm, then:
Consider an elemental ring ofthe tank shell having a thickness t equ 3.67
acting at -'
of 1 mm and a length L of i mm and resolve theforces Sc.tan 0
axis XX.
Consider a unit cube of this ring, then the force F acting 3.7.2.1 Effect of roof slope on cross-sectional area
It can be seen from equation 3 67 that for a given tank radius
and Dressure, the lowerthe slope ofthe roof, the lowerthe
value
for tan 0 and in consequence a higher value for the compres-
sion zone area is required. This is an important factor when
de-
signing "frangible" roofjoints, which is discussed in Section 3 8'

3.7.3 Compression zones

3.7.3.1 Compression zone area to BS Code

ln the BS Code the units which apply to equation 3 67 are:

= area to be provided within the compresslon

zone (mm2)

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 81

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 115/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

p = internal pressure in the roof space less the 0 = slope of the roof from the horizontal (degrees)
weight of the roof plates (mbar)
3.7.3.3 BS and APlCode differences of allowable compres-
R = radius ofthe tank shell (m) sive stress
Sc = allowable compressive stress (N/mm2) Due to the difference in the values used for the allowable com-
pressive stress S, (120 N/mm2 in the BS Code and 137.5
e = the angle between the roof and the horizontal,
N/mm2 in the API Code), the compression area required to the
at the point where the roof meets the shell (de
BS Code is 14.6% greaterthan that req uired to the API Code.
grees)
Note: The BS Code states that, unless otherwise specified,
the value for Sc shall be taken as 120 N/mm'. 3.7.4 Providing the required compression area
p in mbar must be converted to Ni mm2 by multiplying by 0.0001 The roof{o-shell compression zone is made up of three basic
and R is converted from metres to millimetres. The equation components:
then becomes:
1) A participating area of the roof plating
pxO.OOOIxR2 x 10002
^ 2) A participating area of the shell plating
2xScxtan0
3) lf required, the above areas can be augmented by adding
50pR'? steel sections at the roof-to-shell junction
^ Sc.tan 0
equ 3.68
In the case of 1) and 2) these areas may be increased by thick-
ening upthe plating in thearea localto the joint. Additionalsteel
That is how the equation is shown in the BS Code. sections, when added into the compression zone, must fall
Note: The weightofthe roof plates in mbar, must be deducted within the participating area of the shell plating. The areas
from the internal pressure in order to arrive at the cor- which are considered to comprise the compression zone are il-

mm thickness of 1 us lustrated in Figures 3.55,3.56 and 3.57.

rect value for p for in equation 3.68. The weight of 1
m' of carbon steel late is 7.85 kg, or
3.7.4.1 For the BS Code
77N which equates to 0.77 mbar and so a more conve-
nient way to write the equation for carbon steeltanks is: The requirements to the BS Code are given in figure 7 of the
so(p 0.77tr) code and illustrated in Figure 3.55:
A :-"
R'?

5C €nu
' equ 3.69
where:
3.7.3.2 Compression zone area to API Code Rr = the radius of curvature of the roof at the point
The basic American API 650 Code does not cater for pressur- where it meets the shell (m) (for conical roofs
ised tanks but merely stipulates minimum curb angle require- R, = R/sin 0)
ments for various sizes of tanks and these are given in Section R
3.7.9.1, Figure 3.59.
= the radius ofthe tank shell (m)

However Appendix F of this Code caters for pressurised tanks

t = the thickness of the shell in the compression
zone (mm)
and gives requirements for roof-to-shell compression zones.
Appendix F follows the same theory as that for the BS Code but L = the thickness of a stiffening section (mm)
in the API Code the tank diameter D in metres is used instead of t, = the thickness ofthe roof plate in the compres-
the radius and the internal pressure p is expressed in kilopas- sion zone (mm)
cals (kPa) instead of mbar, and as 1 kPa = 0.001 N/mm2 the
equation in the API Code becomes:
Wr. = the participating length of roof plating in the ef-
fective compression area (mm)
,2
px0.001 x(u, 1000)
x 125.p.D2 W" = the participating length of shell plating inthe
a_ -_--- -.1
2xscxtan0 Sc tano effective compression area (mm)

The API Code uses a value of 137.5 N/mm'? (20,000 lbs/in'?) for 3.7.4.2 For the API Code
Sc and the equation reduces to: The requirements to the API code are given in figure F-2 of Ap-
pendix F of the Code and illustrated in Figure 3.56:
pu-
" 'l.1.tan 0
equ 3.70
wnere:

The value used for p is the internal pressure less the weight of t" = thickness of angle leg
the roof plates expressed in kPa and the API Code deems that tb
1 mm thickness of 1 m2 of carbon steel plate weighs 0.08 kPa,
= thickness of bar

then the formula becomes: t" = thickness of shell plate

. D'?(p o.o8 th)

equ 3.71
th = thickness of roof Plate
1 1. tan e ts thickness of thickened plate in shell
This is how the equation is shown in the API Code. maximum width of participating shell
where: 5
0.6(R"t")0
A = area to be provided within the compression
zone (mm'?) maximum width of participating roof

p = internal pressure in the roof space (kPa) 0.3(Rrth)0s of 300 mm (12 in),

D = diameter of the tank shell (m) whichever is less

th = thickness ofthe roof plates (mm) " inside radius of tank shell

82 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 116/296
 3 Ambtent tempe@lure slorcge tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

R.r

l/,=0.6 {i^n-ooont
_il
--T-

: gure 3.55 Shelfto-roof compression ateas to BS 2654

-.on BS 2654, fiSure 7

R2 = length of the normal tothe roof, measured 3.7.7 Calculating the compression zone area
from the vertical centreline of the tank

_R When applying the above theory the designer will calculate the
Wh, and W" participating plate lengths and hence the available
@o area as (Wh x tr) + (W" x t). This is then compared with the re-
Note: All dimensions and thicknesses are in millimetres and quired area from either equation 3.68 or 3.71 depending upon
(inches). which Code is being used. lfthere is a deficiency, consideration
may be given to redressing this deficiency by adding in one or
-urther examples for increasing the area in the roof-to-shell
more steel sections or thickened plates at tie joint as shown in
aompression zone are given in Figure 3.57. Figures 3.55, 3.56 and 3.57.
Thickened plates may be used for elther the roof or the shell
3.7.5 Establishing the compression area section or for boih together, depending upon the amouni of ad-
dit onal area, which is fequired. When adopting this method it
The formulae for calculating the values W,, and We for the vari- must be remembered that the participating length of the com-
ous roof{o-shell connections are arrived at empirlcally through pression area Wh and/or W. has to be recalcuLated using the
research carried out by R. Perono, (Reference 3.71. new thicker plate chosen for the roof and/or shell sect on and
The increase in pressure in the roof space causes an upward ihis greater value is then multiplied by the thicker plate thus giv-
Ing a larger compressron area.
deflection ofthe roof plating. Perono assumed the shape ofthis
deflection to be parabolic in the region close to the shell and de-
duced that the length concerned was proportional to 3.7.8 Practical considerations

0.6vFadrL,s of ttre platrng x thrckn

The most suitable method for providing the fequired area for a
particular application is found by trying various combinations of
and this is the value adopted by the BS Code for W6. Although
the available steel sections. For additional area requiremenis
the same theory does not apply to the shell, the BS Code uses
of up to say 9000 mm2, angle sections can be used. Beyond this
the same equation for the participating length of the shell plal
then horizontally disposed plate stiffeners and/or thickened
n9 W"'
shell and roof plate sections have to be considered.

3.7.6 API limitations for the length of the roof com- If thickened sections of shell or roof plate are decided upon,
then it should be borne in mind, that from a practical and com-
Pression area
mercial point
thickened shellofplate
view it is considered
section cheaper
than roof section. toisproduce
This because,a
It is Interesting to note that the BS Code uses a single factor of unless flat bar can be sourced, the development of the cone
0.6 forWh the length ofthe roof compression area shown in Fig- frustum from rectangular plate is wasteful in terms of material.
ure 3.55, whereas in Figure 3.56 for the API Code, a factor of Also the labour involved in marking off, cutting and rolling the
0.3, (with a maximum allowablevalue of 300 mm), is used when conical section, is more than that required for the cylindrical
angle sections are used to supplement the compression area. shell section. This is demonstrated later in Section 3.7.'10.3.
Where roof compression plates are used, then the factor used
is 0.6 but the maximum length allowable for Wh in these in-
stances is: 3.7.9 Minimum curb angle requirements

o.elF"{ For small diameter, or non-pressure tanks, (to the BS Code),

the calculated compression area may be so small that it can be
where: catered for by the allowable compression areas of the shell and
roof plating alone. Therefore it can be argued that for these
R" = inside radius of the shell
cases there is no need to introduce additionalarea at thejoint in
tu = thickness of the roof compression plate the form of a curb anqle.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 83

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 117/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3Ambient tempemture storcge tank design

All€r||dile ;.
n2

\- N€|,rdui3
\ I'l€t tel.xb olsEle ot englo
4 - 0.6(40pr
lr6x.

2l.nd

2t,6 ztrra|a'x

I
0.6(8"1.)45 msx

Ddg Dcrdl h

Figure 3.56 Roof- to-shell compression areas to API 650

Frcn API 650, Apqendix F

84 STORAGE TANKS & ESUIP'IIENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 118/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient temperaturc storcge tank design
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Figure 3.57 The use of two angte secrions or rwo thickened roof and shellplates to increase ihe area n in" rooftol]rl"rr"olnpr"""ion ton"

From a practical point of view, both the BS and API Codes take 3.7.9 3 Effect of internal pressure and tank diameter on re'
the view that for construction purposes, (unless there are spe- quired compression area
cial circumstances which are given in Section 3 7 9 2), then Forthe BS Code, the effect ofthe varying internal design pres-
tanks must be provided with a top curb angle of a certain mini sure for a ranqe of iank diameters is demonstrated in Figure
mum srze. 3.61, for the following tank design parameters.
The reason for this is to:
a) l\.4aintain shell circularity during construction
b) Give a landing for the roof plating
c) Give a landing for the roof handrail stanchions (where Jit-
ted) in? 5 5
Roofslopel L
3.7.9.1 Minimum curb angle sizes for fixed roof tanks rano= 0.2 02 0.2

In the BS Code, the minimum size of curb angle which shall be 9i1s l ll: l 0 rs6l
fltted to the tank shall be that derived from equation 3 68 or as 12A 124 120
given in Table 4 of the Code (Figure 3.58) whichevef is the
greater. From equation 3.68:
Mininum size curb angle (mm) 50pR2
'
A reoutreq
Sc tan 0
6ol 9l9
60x60xB From Figure 3.55, the available roof plate area
=wn.t = o.6u/i ooo. n, . t xg equ3 72

The available shell plate area

Figure 3.58 L4inimum size of curb angle from BS 2654

=w".t=0.6",/iooo+txt equ 3.73

The corresponding requirements to the APl650 Code are given

From Figure 3.65 it can be seen howthe compression zone/re-
quirements increase dramatically over the range of tank diame-
in clause 3.1.5.9 of the Code and are shown in Figure 3.59.
ters, when moving from a non-pressure through to a high- pres-
Minidum size culb angle (mm) sure ratino. This is because, in equation 3.68 the pressure
50x50x5 increases bya factorot ta.zg i.e.52 linearly whilst Lhe value
,11._18 50,50^6
for the tank radius is being squared.
80x80x10

Figure 3.59 Corresponding requirements API 650 for minimum curb angle
3.7.9,2 Cases where minimum curb angle requirements do
not apply
The stipulations given in Figures 3.58 and 3.59 do not apply to
the following:
a) Open top tanks.
b) Tanks having self-supportlng roofs to API 650
- these are
governed by specific requirements given in clauses 3.10.5 1.751 sR<31
and 3.10.6 ofAPl 650 which can result in roof-to-shell con-
nections as 'detail a' of Figure 3.55 or'detail h' of Figure
3.56.
For the API Code only. Tanks < m diameter which
c) -
have the top angle formed by =
flangingI the top edge of the
shell as shown in Figure 3.60. Figure 3.60 Top edge of shell flanged io form a landing for the roof plales

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 85

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 119/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storcge tank design

Addlional 4ea rcqdr€d

provid.d bY aFas Wi e Wc
H.P.

977 0 0 0
30 135 435
1197 o 0 o
6 6a 303 978
1382 0 o 356
I 122 538 1734 5

5 1545 0 1171
l0 190 841 2716
1726 0 0 2516
125 297 11314 4244 5
0 403€
15 424 1893 6111 6 2076 0
2242 0 334 6076
'17.5 542 2576 $14 6
2397 0 964 6468
2D ?60 3365 10865 6

6 2542 1716 11209

225 962 4258 13750

6 2679 0 2574 14296

25 1188 5257 16976

6 2410 0 355t 17734

27.5 1438 6361 20541
3518 0 4052 2@21
30 1711 7570 24445 8

I 3690 0 54TO 25989

33 2070 9160 29579
3S54 0 31347
36 10901 3520',t a

4011 0 8743 37301

2491 '12-194 41313 8
4163 0 10675 43750
42 3353 r 4838 47913 a
506S3
3850 17033 55002 I 4309 0 12725

4450 0 14930 5A130

48 4380 19340 62580

21474 4547 354 't7291 66060

5l 4945
4720 424 19403 744e3
54 5543 24526 79203

Figure 3.61 Vary ng internaldesign pressure for a range oflank diameters

Hence, large diameter, high-pressure tanks require to be The area of this section is 544 x 34 = l8'496 mm2
heavily stiffened at the roof{o-shell joint to prevent compres- Then the total roof compression area =
sive failure in this area. Figure 3.62 shows the results from Fig- 44,132 + 1a,496 = 62,628 mm2
ure 3.61 in graph form.
3.7.10.2 Shell comPression area
The effect of imposing a mandatory requirement for the provi-
sion of a minimum size of curb angle is shown in Figure 3 63' From Figure 3.55

Figure 3.78 shows that for the full range of non-pressure tanks wh = 6.6"i1goo.R t
selected, the minimum curb angle requirement satisfies the de-
sign area required for the compression zone for all the tanks' = 0.6' ao x 27 x 34
However this is not the case for all the low and high-pressure = 575 mm
tanks and most of these will have to be provided with sections
having larger cross-sectional areas. The sheil compression area = 575 x 34 = 19,550 mm.
The total of the roof and shell compression areas available
3.7.10 Design example
= 62,628 + 19,550

Consider the 54 m diameter, high-pressure tank designed to

= 82,178 mm2
BS 2654, deiails of which are shown in Figure 3 63.
This is acceptable, although 2,975 mm2 more than required By
The requifed roof-to-shell compression area is 79203 mm'?
reducing the roof plate outstand beyond the shellto 457 mm re-
The range of angle sizes which are readily available are not duces the area by (544 - 457) x 34 = 2,958.
large enough to satisfy the area which is required and so the
This then gives a total compression area of 79,220 mm2' which
use of thickened roof and shell plates will be employed.
is acceptable.
By a trial and error method. a suitable arrangement can be
found by using the maximum allowable roof and shell lengths 3.7.10.3 Rationalising the calculation
together with a plate thickness of 34 mm' which will satisfy the The above example is based on using the maximum allowable
totral area requirement. For ease of calculation the same thick- participating lengths for Wh and W" in the roof and shell area
ness plate has been used here for both the roof and shell plate calculations. Using the maximum value for Wr. resulted in a
areas, but they can be of different thicknesses if so desired' plate thickness of 34 mm being the ideal thickness to suit the
"stan-
3.7.10.1 Roof comPression area calculated lengths. But 34 mm is not considered to be a
dard" thickness and 35 mm thick platewould be more appropn-
From Figure 3.55
ate. Repeating the above calculations for 35 mm plate and us-
'1000. R1 q ing appiopriately chosen valuesforWh and Wc, the resultgiven
in Figure 3.64 is obtained.
0.6 loo x 3.7.10.4 Economy of design
0r 961 x 34.....-

The net weight of the comPonents ls:

= 1 ,298 mm
for the shell 29,703 kg
The compression area is therefore 1298x34= 44,132 mm2 for the roof 77,241 kg
The maximum allowable outstand of the roof plate beyond the
Total net weight 106,984 kg
shell is 16.twhich in this case is 16 x 34 = 544 mm.

86 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 120/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

issuming that the components are to be cut from standard 18 standard plates 10 m x2.5 m x 35 mm whichweigh 123,638
: ate sizes then: kg. The plate scrapped in this case being 46,357 kg. or 37.5%'
which is high and costly.
-.re amount of plate required to cut the shell plate sections, as-
From this exercise it can be appreciated that the designer
sJming the ring to be in 18 pieces (the same as the numberof
should tryto design the roofcomponentto suit standard flat bar
s.rell plates per course), would be:
sizes or, if cutting from plate, attemptto minimise the amount ot
a standard Dlates 10 m x 2 m x 35 mm which weigh 32'970 kg' scrap plate which is Produced.
-he plate thus scrapped is 3,267 kg. or 10%, which is generally
A further means of economy, is to maximise the area put into
3cceotable. the shell component, where material wastage is lower. leaving
-he amount of plate required to cut the developed roof plate a minimum balance ofarea to be catered for bythe roofcompo-
sections, assuming again that the ring would be in 18 pieces' nent. However there is a potential danger of inducing second-
,vould be: ary bending stresses in the compression zone due to the cen-

f
g
zmo

6t* ____J
:g sm@

IgE3m
4s@

8
;g 2@@ --(
F.oo*
*ffi, t0 12-5 15 17.5 20 225 25 27.5 g 3 36
T||* di|m.t.r (n)

.-. Tar*
- - - NoD,Drgssrt€ Tar* Lorr-Fs3s[€
Tank
Figure 3.62 Comparison of rcof-to-shell compression alea requlremenls
-Hilr-p{r3su€
13 th. min, sizs clrb 3ufRcient?
Mln. cufi 3lzo io Cod. [email protected] by mio. d4 cu.b

(m) L,P.

30 135 435 5 60x60x6 691 16S

303 974 5 691 l88a

6a

122 538 1738 5 60x60x6 691 2073

2716 5 60x60x6 2236

l0 190 841

12.5 297 1314 4244 5 60x60x8 903 2631

424 1893 6111 6 903 2979

15
6 60x60x8 903 3145
'17.5 582 2574 831S
3365 10855 6 60x60x8 903 33@
20 760

22.5 962 4258 13750 6 80x80t10 1510 4052

6 80x40x10 1510 4189 No

25 1184 5257 16976

6361 20541 6 1510 4320

27.5 1138

30 1711 7570 24445 I 80xB0i 10 1510 5028

2070 9160 29579 I 80x80x10 1510 5200

35201 8 80x60x 1o 1510 5364

36 2464 10901

12794 41313 a 100x100x12 2270 6241

39 2491

14838 4791X 100 x 100 )( 12 2270 6433

3353

45 3450 17033 55002 100r'100i12 2270 6579

4380 19380 62580 100x 100 x 12 2270 6720

4B

21474 7t&47 150x 150x10 2530 7517

51 4945

5543 24524 79203 a 150x150x10 2930 7650

Figure 3.63 Toial compression zone areas, including minimum curb angle sizes

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 87

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 121/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

llmbent tempercturc storage lank design

More specific guidance is given for tanks having dome roofs

and self-supporting cone roofs, i.e. roofs without internal sup-
porting structures. In these cases clause F7 states thatthe par-
ticipating compression area shall be in accordance with clause
3.12.4 of the API Standard 620, "Design and Construction of
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Slorage Tanks "
Except thatthe allowable compressive stress stated in API 620,
shall be increased from 105 N/mm2 (15,000 lbs/in'z) to 140
N/mm' (20,000 lbs/in'?)
3.7.11.3 Guidance on the positioning the centroid of area
Having mentioned API 620, which incidentally, allows design
pressures up to 1035 mbar (15 lbs/in'?). This Code gives guid-
ance on the positioning ofthe centroid of the compression zone
area in clause 3.12.5.2 which sbtes that:
"The additional area shall be arranged so that the centroid of
the cross-sectional area of the composite corner of the com-
pression region lies ideally in the horizontal plane ofthe cornel
formed by the two members. In no case shall the centroid be off
the plane by more than '1 .5 times the average thickness of the
Fioure 3.64 Roof io-shell compression zone design for a 54 m dlameief
hlgh-pfessure tank
two members intersecting at the corner."
Presumably this somewhat stricter rule has been applied in API
Lroid of the cross sectional area being lowered as shown in
620 because of the possibility of much g reate r forces being evi-
Figure 3.65b. dent at the roof-to-shell junction due to higher allowable tank
operating pressures to this Code. Nevertheless this guidance
3.7.11 Positioning the centroid of area can be used to good effect for all tanks.
This guidance is shown pictorially in Figure 3 66.
BS 2654 and API 650 do not give any detailed guidance or caF
culations for the positioning of the centroid of area
3.7. 1 2 Cost-effective design
3.7.11.1 The BS Code
The BSI Code states that: 'lf a horizontal girder is required to The way in which any additional cross-sectional area is built
provide additional cross-sectional area, this girder shall be into the roof-to-shell compression zone can be a test ofthe tank
placed as close to thejunction as possible and at a distance al- designer's skill. This is particularly the case for large diameter'
ways less than the effective shell length for compression area high-pressure tanks, where the designer needs to accomplish
W";'. The arrangement referred to here, is shown typically in the task of providing large amounts of additional area to satisfy
Figure 3.56 details (g) & (i) the Code requirements, together with the most cost-efiective
3.7.11.2 The API code Appendix F method of doing this to satisfy the tank purchaser's budget.
Aooendix F oftheAPl Code, shows in Figure 3.56 detail'b'and
'ci ihat the roof plate connection point on to the horizontal leg of
the curb angle shall be between the position of the vertical neu-
tral axis of the angle and the heel of the angle

Figufe 3.65b Comptession zone with the shell thickness much gfeater than
Figurc 3.65a Compfesslon zone having roof and shell plates of ihe same
the roof

88 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 122/296
 3 Ambient temperature storcge tank design
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

The section of shell lapPed

behind the angle incteases
Thecentrord ol lh€ composll€ sh€lland rool the available cross-section
area shaLlnol be oulsidelhrs snaded area area in length w

Figure 3.67a Typical roofioini

'AA- 1he horizonlal Plane of the i
bv the roof and shellmembers
Hand.ai I stanc h ions, plaform supporling brackets

x; the maximum oflplane allowance = 1.5 (tr + 0 / 2 or stiffeneB of any kind musl not be welded acros

: ure 3.66 ldeal location fot the cenaoid ofthe compresslon zone area to API
:2-0. (For information onlv, not mandaiory to the BS 2654 and API 690 Codes)
"^-"'-;\
3.8 Frangible roof joint, or weak R@f plat6 not connected
to the roof supporling structur€
roof-to-shell joint
3.8.1 lntroduction

mix-
'ixed roof tanks which store volatile products will have a
:ufe of product vapour and air in the space between the surface Figure 3.67b Typical frangible foof ioint
of the product and the tank roof. This mixture may be in the
'lammable range and, due to malfunction, externalfire or inter- result in failure ofthe joini. This possibility must be prevented by
-al explosion. there may be a sudden increase in pressure designing the roof-to-shelljoint to fail before the shell-to-bottom
,vithin the tank which the normal vent devices and emergency
joint does. This is accomplished by considering the point at
are unable to cope with. Consequently tl^e tank rray be which the pressure in the tank is such that the floor is just about
',ents to li11 off its foundatLon.
damaged and this can result in failufe of either the shell-to-bo
iom joint or the roof-to-shell joint.
ln either case such failures are disastrous but the failure of the
3.8.3 The maximum compression zone area allow-
shell-to-bottom joint can be particularly horrendous due to the able
felease of the stored product over the surrounding area caus-
Lng the attendant ecological and environmental problems. For a roof connection to be considered frangible, the maxlmum
compression zone area allowable must be determined.
Of the two types of failure, the roof-to-shell failure is to be pre-
ferred. as this will normally create sufficient free-venting area to The roof plating is assumed to act as a membrane and any
allow the release of the tank over-pressurisation without any bending effects are ignored, as are any changes in geomeiry,
oss of stored product. To increase the likelihood of a preferen- also th; angle between the slope of the roof and the horizontal
tial roof-to-shell failu re, some fixed roof tanks can be provided 0, is assumed to remain at its design value.
with a weak rooflo-shell connection, known as a "frangible roof Considering Figure 3.68.
joint . A typical arrangement of this type of joint is showl in
Figure 3.67b. P = internal Pressure
T = membrane force in roof Plating
3.8.2 Frangible roof joint theory Wr = weight of roof plating

pressure in
Assuming a empty coneatmospheric
above roof tank, then, as the a point willthe
pressure, be
tank increases
feached when the upward force on the roof plating willequalthe
downward load due to the weight of the roof plating As ihe
pressure increases further, the roof plating will tift oif its support
structure and this further increase in pressure is withstood by
lensile membrane forces 'T' in the roof plating (see Figure
3.68). These forces exert a pull at the shell-to-roofiunctlon and
so induce compressive forces in this area
A point will be reached when the upward force due to further in-
crease in pressure, willovercome the downward load duetothe
weight of the shell and support structure, and at this pressure'
the floor plating at the tank periphery will start to lift ofi the tank
foundation, as illustrated earlier in Figure 3.52

The floor being allowed to lift off the foundation' can result in
high stresses being set up in the shellto-bottom jointwhich can Figure 3 68 Tensile membrane fotces

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 89

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 123/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempercturc storcge tank design

Ws = weight of shell and roof support structure The size and quality ofthis weld is therefore an important factor
which is carried by the shell of the frangible joint. However there does not appear to have
been very much research done in this area, and this could be
R = tank radius
due to difflculties in making meaningful analytical studies ofthe
€ = angle of the roof slope to the horizontal influence and behaviour of such welds when subjected to this
type of failure mechanism.
Wr and Ws shall have any corrosion deducted.
The Codes do however require that the peripheral roof plate
Note: The above condition assumes that the tank is empty,
weld be kept as small as Dossible and in no case shall it be
but the theory is equally valid if the tank contains liquid.
larger than 5 mm. From a practical point of view making the
is
When this which
the liquid, the case, then the load
is considered to bedue to the weightof
effective, (i.e. say weld size any less than this, can be detrimental in the long term,
within 750 mm of the shell), is added to that of the shell because experience has shown that in time, this weld suffers
and framing. from the effects ofcorrosion wastage which can eventuallylead
to vapour leaks at the joint.
' However, it is normal practice to design for the worst
condition, which in this case, is when the tank is empty,
thus giving a lesser value for the allowable area for the 3.8.5 Formula as expressed in BS 2654
compression zone for the frangible condition.
Hencethe upliftforce on the roof plates is given byp r'R2 and
A is expressed in mm2

this force is resisted bythe weightofthe shelland support struc- Ws is given the notation 'T' and is the weight of the
ture Ws. shell, shell stiffening and roof framework suF
ported by the shell but excluding the roof
Then: plates, expressed in kilograms.
p.7r.R2 = Ws equ 3.74 Sc is expressed in N/mm2 and curb failure is as-
It has already been determined in equation 3.68, that the re- sumed to occur at 220 N/mm2, so this flgure is
quired compression area at the shell-to-roof junction is given built into the equation.
by: 0 is the slope of the roof at its point of connec-
n.R2 tion to the shell in degrees.
A=---l--:-::
2 Sc.tan 0 The formula then becomes:
And transposing for p: Tx9.807 Tx7.07x10-s
equ3.77
O=-2.A Sc tan e
equ 3.75
e
2 xT x2zo.lan tan e
'R' Which is as it is shown in Appendix F of BS 2654.
Substituting for p in equation 3.74 then: 3.8.5.1 Additional requirements to BS 2654
2 ASctan0 -,
_xn.K_=vvs ... In addition to the restriction in cross-sectional area for the
R roof-to-shell zone for the frangible condition, the Code requires
that the following conditions shall also be met, as described in
nence: Sections 3.8.4.1 and 3.8.4.2:
^ws
2 r.Sc tan 0
equ 3.76 . The slope of the roof plating at its connection to the shell
shall not be more than 1 in 5.
The area A thus found. is the maximum that can be allowed for . The peripheral roof plating-to-shell connection weld shall
ihe shell-to-roof compression zone to be considered as a fran- not be more than 5 mm.
gible joint.
3.8.6 Formula as expressed in API 650
3.8.4 Other factors affecting the frangible roof con-
nection A is expressed in mm2

3.8.4.1 Roof slope Ws is given the notation W and is the weight of the
shell, shell stiffening and roof framework sup-
ln Section 3.7.2.1 itwas demonstrated that as the roofslope be- ported by the shell but excluding the roof
comes shallower, the value of 6 decreases and hence the re- plates,
quired cross sectionalarea increases. Taken to the extreme, as expressed in Newtons
0 tends to 0', then the required cross-sectional tends to infinity. Sc is expressed in N/mm'?and cufu failure is as-
sumed to occur at 221 Nimm2, (32,000 lbiin')
Therefore itcan be seen thata shallow slope favours the frangi- so this figure is built into the equation
ble condition. Both the British and American codes recognise
this and put a limit on the maximum roof slope allowed for a roof 0 is the slope of the roof at its point of connec-
to be considered frangible. These limits are given in Sections tion to the shell in degrees
3.8.5.1 and 3.8.6.1. The formula then becomes:
3.8.4.2 Size of weld at the roof plate-to-shell connection
During the failure process of a frangible roof, the normal se-
^WW
^= 2r"x221 1390 xta" o
equ 3.78

quence of events is for the roof to deform, and undergo elastic ^ane=
Which is as it is shown in clause 3.10.2.5.3 of API 650.
buckling.
3.8.6.'l Additional requirements to API 650
l\4any creases will appear at the periphery as a reduction in di-
ameter occurs and the compression zone will buckle and col- ln additlon to the restriction in cross-sectional area for the
lapse. This causes the peripheral roof plate weld to tear away roof-to-shell zone for the frangible condition, the Code requires
from its shell mounting and hence the excessive internal pres- that the following conditions shall also be met, as described
sure is relieved. above in Sections 3.8.4.1 and 3.8.4.2:

90 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 124/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient tempercturc storage tank destgn
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

the amount of additional area which may have to be pro-

. The slope of the roof plating at its connection to the shell
vided by a curb angle.
shall not be more than 1 in 6.
. The peripheral roof plating-to-shell connection weld shall
2r Durinq the erection ofthe tank. lapping the angle directly
up ag;inst the top of the shell plating is a simpler erection
not be more than 5 mm procedure.
In Case A.1 , the area available from the roof and shell plating is'
3.8.7 Difference between Codes
on its own, more than enough to satisfy the amount requlred
from equation 3.67 and therefore only the minimum size of an-
The orincipal difference between the British and the American gle from Figure 3.58 will be fitted to the tank, in this case a 80 x
Codes isthat BS 2654 allows the slightly steeper roof slope of 1
80 x 10 angle. Thetotalarea provided in the compresslonzone
I in 5, against 1 in 6 to API 650. isfoundto be5028 mm2. This is more than the allowable area of
The different constants used in equations 3.77 and 3'78 ate 4811 mm2, and the roofjoint is therefore considered not to be
due to the tank weight being expressed in kilograms in BS 2654 frangible.
and in Newtons in API 650.
Case A2
The maximum allowable cross-sectional area in millimetres
Case 42 allows for the vertical leg of the curb angle to be butt
calculated by either equation is found to be the same for a given
welded directly on to the top ofthe shell plating as shown in Fig-
set of design parameters.
ure 3.67b This is a more difficult erection task than that for a
lapped curb angle but can be advantageous when a frangible
3.8.8 Conflict of design interests roof ioint is required, because the area of the shell-to-roof com-
presiion zone is reduced due to the lesser area of shell plating
During the initial tank design stage, the shell{o-roof joint will being within the zone.
have been designed to suit the internal service pressure re-
quirement, as detailed in Section 3 7. The most appropnate Aoain. it can be seen that the area provided by the shell and
roof is more than enough to satisfy the requirement of equation
method of providing the required cross-sectional area in the 3.64, and in this instance, the minimum size curb angle is butt
roof-to-shelljointwill have been established and hence the tank welded. rather than lap welded to the shell' thus reducing the
will be capable of withstanding the compressive forces which area availablefrom the shellbythedepth ofthe angle i.e B0x8
will develop in this area during normal operation of the bnk'
= 640 mm2.
However, it may be necessaryto ensure' that in the event of an
This is enough to reduce the total available compression zone
accidental over-pressurisation in the tank' it would be desirable
area to a flgure which is less than the maximum allowed for a
for the shell-to-roofjoint to fail This may not always be possible
frangible joint and therefore the roofjoint is frangible
because the compression area built into the tank to satisfy the
operating pressure may be more than that allowed for a frangi-
CaseAl _ CaseA2
ble roofjoint, within the strictures of the Code
Pressle T5ombar 75dbar
The likelihood of this conflict occurring and the possible means
by which it can be overcome, will become evident ffom the fol- compresson zo.e a@a requned ior ,,7jj nn2 1711mn,
lowing Sections.
Crrodna,e aoo"oo orlreo olrpt _cp-^ao60rosler Brr-*Flopo.oshel
3.8.8.1 "Service" and "Emergency" design conditions wh a.d Wc area mm?
35i8 2878 mm'?
The maximum cross-sectional area at the compresslon zone
red -1807 '1167
which is allowable by equations 377 and 3.78 for the tank
Additonalarea rea

emergency condition, may be found to be less than that re- L se ected curb a.gle size I 8ox80x10RsA 80x80xl0Rsa
quired to satisfy resistance ofthe internal pressure for the ser- Selected curb ang|e afea 1510 mm'? 1510 mmz
vice condition calculated by equations 3.68 or 3 71. ..rr.* I .,r.
'*
When this occurs the tank is deemed not to have a frangible ls totalarea provLded suilicient?
roofjoint, but this situation may be overcome by providing the 136089 kg
13608s kg
tankwith anchor bolts or straps attached to the lowershellarea
ofthe tank and secured to a peripheral concrete foundation ring lr,,laximum area a lowed iorirangible

beam.
ls lhe oofto nl ffang ble?

3.8.9 Examples of frangible and non-frangible roof

joints designed for an operating pressure of20 mbar
3.8.9.2 Tank
Cases Bl and 82
Using the tank shell design illustration given in Section 3 3 2 9,
and issuming a roof slope of 1 in 5, and a roof plate to curb an- At this higher pressure the required compresslon zone area
gle weld of 5 mm, then further calculations give the following has significantly increased from 1711 mm2 to 7570 mm'?.
information:
Following what was learned from case 42, the selected curb
3.8.9.1 Tank designed for an operating pressure of 7'5 angle size of 150 x 150 x 18 for Case 81, is butt-welded to the
mDar tank shell as shown in Figure 3.67b However, it can be seen
Case Al that in doing this, the loss of shell area leaves a deficit of 152
mm, (7570-7418) in the area required for operation, and this is
Case 41 allows for the curb angte to be lapped on to the top of
not acceptable.
ihe shell, as shown in Figure 3 67a. This arrangement ls gener-
ally adopted for two main reasons; Case 82 is calculated in the same way as Case B1 except that
the larger angle size of 200 x 200 x 16 is used and the conse-
1) The available area of the compression zone which is re- quent increase in the cross-sectional area ofthe angle gives an
quired for the tank operating pressure is increased, be-
cause the top of the shell plating behind the angle is also acceDtable totalarea forthe compression zone required forop-
included in the zone. This is advantageous as it minimises erational purposes.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 91

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 125/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc storage tank design

For both Cases 81 and 82 however the area of the compres- tank foundation. Three methods of anchorage are illustrated in
sion zone is far in excess ofthe maximum allowed for a frangi- Figures 3.69 (a), (b) and (c).
ble roofjoint. 3.8.10.1 Ensuring a frangible roof connection using an-
cnorage
CAeBz
case B1
Apart from the frangibility consideration, anchorage may also
_ 20.00 mbar be required due to the following conditions;
Compression zone area reqlired for . The operating pressure causing uplifr ofthe tank.

Curbangle lapPed or butted to shell?

--l . The overturning effect on the tank of the prevailing wind
2318 mm': 1918 mm2 . Instability of the tank caused by seismic action.
Add tronalarea requ red 5252.32 5652 These instances are discussed in Section 3.9 and Chapter 15
 :r*t"djy9j q:l 1 i50 x 150 x 18 RSA ,oqr?oirI r$ or26, butfornoW the means of designing anchorageto ensure
a frangible roofjoint will be considered as follows:
Selected curb angre area s100 mm'
3.8.1 0.2 Determining anchorage requirements
Ls lotal area Pmvide suffclenl? Where a roofis deemed notto befrangible. then the pressure at
140426 kg
which it would fail has to be determined. This is done by trans-
I19634lg
posing equation 3.69 or 3.71 depending upon which code is be-

. o*ulL ing used, and thus determining a failure pressure p

[,lax dum area alowed lorlrangble
joni

lslhe roof lointfrangble? t- Takino the case for the British Code then from equation 3 69:
Jc t1n J*s.77 equ 3.79
o=4 1r-

Case 83 Failure is considered to occur at a compressive stress Sc of 220

From the previous Cases B1 and 82 it was found thai for this
oarticular tank size and its attendant design parameters there N/mm'z.
was no advantage in butt-welding the curb angle to the shell Hence failure Pressure
Case 83 therefore is based on lap welding the curb angle as A:tan o+0.77.tr
shown in Figure 3.67a. lt can be seen from the results that in do-
o=44
ing this the inclusion ofthe additionalarea oftheshell plate be-
hi;d the curb angle atlows a smaller angle size of 150 x 150 x 15 Remember that in the British Code p is in mbar.
to be used, and the combination gives an adequate overall total Similarly, for the American Code, from equation 3.71.
area in the comPresslon zone.
1.1 A tanoro.o8.th
o=
'D"
Forthe American Code, failure is considered to occur at a com-
pressive stress of 221 N/mm2.
Compress on zone area required ior ope€tion
The constant 1.1 in equation 3.71 is calculated using a allow-
-t' -
Curb ang e lapped orbltted lo shelt t
able stress of 137.5 N/mm' e.g. 1.1

This has to be recalculated using thefailure compressive stress

150 | 150 x 15 RsA

125 'r,
of 221 N/mm/ and the new constant is '1
Failure pressure is therefore
ls lotalarea Prov de sufiicieot?
1.77.# t"n o
equ 3.80
p= * o.os. r'.

[,lax m m area a lowed for irang ble]oini

American Code p is in kilopascals (1 kPa =10 mbar)
s lh€ rooiioinlfrang ble?
In the
-
3.8.10.3 Worked examPle

However, as before in the previous cases, this area is wellin ex- Consider the tank depicted in Section 3 3.2.9.
cess of that allowable for a frangible roofjoint. This tank is 30 m diameter, has a roofslope of 1: 5, a roof plate
thickness of 5 mm and compression zone details as given in
3.8,10 Tank anchorage a means to frangibility Section 3.8.9.2 for Case 83.
- Anchorage is io be provided using bolb
The tank in Case 83 meets the Code requirement for having Using the BS Code for this example, then the failure pressure
sufficient cross-sectional area in the roof-to-shell compression will be:
zone for operating conditions But under an emergency over
pressure condition, this area is too great to ensure that the 4.44 x7818 x0.2 ^ -- XO.
;ooflo-shell joint is frangible and therefore may not fail under
- 1s'
=U./a

this extreme condition. This could cause the shell-to-floor rim of

the fank to lift off the foundation and the resulting distortion in = 34.43 mbar
this area could cause this joint to fail rather than the
joint. = 3.443 kNi m'?
roof-to-shell This pressure acting on the roofofthe emptytankwillproduce a
This occurrence can be prevented by anchoring the tank to a
suitably designed concrete ring beam which forms a part ofthe
uplift of:

92 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 126/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperaturc storcge tank desryn

UP=" R'P
'rlll
ttll
{ | I ll =nx152 x3.443
lrn caseswheElheanchorborbarc
= 2433.71 kN
The weight of the tank shell, stiffening and roof structufe given
in case 83 is 139041 kg which equates to 1363 55 kN
Then the net uplift = 2433.71 -1363.55 = 1070 16 kN
The BS Code requires anchors to be spaced around the tank
circumference at a minimum of 1 m and a maximum of 3 m
In this case a 3 m spacing will be used and hence the number of
bolts required is;
30xn ^,.^
3

This is rounded up to 32.

However, as there are 12 plates per shell course, then 36 an-
chors will be selected, giving 3 per plate and thus clashes be-
tween anchor brackets and vertical shell course butt welds will
be avoided.
Figufe 3.69a Anchotage using bolts The load per bolt due to the over-pressurisation uplift will be
1070 16
36 :zg.t3 ttt
The BS Code also requires anchors to have a minimum cross-
sectional area of 500 mm2. This equates to a bolt core diameter
of 25.33 mm and hence a overall bolt diameter of 30 mm will be
selected, which has an actuat core stress area of 561 mm'? (this
excludes any corrosion which may be required).
The stress in each bolt due to the over-pressurisation uplift will
be
29.73 x 1000
561

= 53.0 N/mm'?

The BS Code states that the allowable tensile stress in the an-
chorage shall not exceed 50% of the specified yield strength, or
33.33% of the minimum tensile strength of the anchorage ma-
terial, whichever is the lowesi.
Taking medium strength steel having a minimum tensile
strength of 430 N/mm'? and yield of 255 N/mm2 for this diameter
of bolt, then the allowable tensile stress would be 127.5 N/mm'?.
Figure 3.69b Anchorage using siraps The selected bolt size is therefore acceptable.
3.8.10.4 Further design check
From above it can be seen that the tank can be subjected to a
pressure greater than its design pressure i.e. 34.58 mbar in-
stead of 20 mbar The original tank design must therefore be
checked to ensure that the allowable stress in the shell (equa-
tion 3.7) is not exceeded. This is accomplished by transposing
S, the allowable stress and t in equation 3.7.
3.8.1 0.5 Other anchorage considerations
The anchorage design here is only catering for the uplift due to
over-pressurisation and it must be borne in mind that this may
have to be combined with any anchorage requirements which
may be found to be necessary to stabilise an overturning mo-
ment on the tank due to wind loading which is dealt with in
Section 3.9.

3.8.11 API 650 Code anchor requirements

-
3.8.11.1 Minimum bolt diameter
The minimum anchor bolt diameter should not be less than 25
mm, plus a corrosion allowance of at least 6 mm, giving a mini-
FigLre 3.69c Combinalion usrrg slrap ard bolld'lchotage mum diameter of 31 mm. This is similar to that given in the BS

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 93

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 127/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature storage tank design

Code at 30 mm, exceptthat in the case ofthe BS Code any cor- 3.9.3 Spacing of anchors
rosion allowance is added to 30 mm.
The allowable spacing of anchors to the British and American
3.8.11.2 Spacing of anchors Codes are given earlier in Sections 3.8 10.3 and 3.8.11.2 re-
TheAPlCodedoes notspecifya minimum spacing for anchors spectively.
but states a maximum spacing of 3 m
3.9.4 Worked examPle
3.8.11.3 Allowable stresses in anchors
Table F-1 ofAppendix F ofAPl 650 gives the allowable stresses Following a worked example is a good wayto illustrate how an-
ofthe previous
and this is reproduced in Figure 3.70. chorageisisapplied.
applied to a tank, and also how some
theory
3.8.12 Further guidance on frangible roofs Some of the previous data is used:
Using the tank design data from BS 2654' in Section 3 3 2 9'
3.8.12.1 EEMUA exceptthat the internalservice pressure will be increased from
7.5 mbar to 56 mbar in order to ensure that anchorage will be
EENiIUA (The Engineering Equipment and Materials Users As- required. This is shown in Figure 3.72.
sociation) publication No. 180, gives very usefuladvice on the
subject, (Reference 3.8).

One ofthe aspects covered, is an alternative method ofensur-

ing a frangible joint in the tank shell near to the top of the tank
AloqrbL s s a Rn( o{
and this is shown in Figure 3.71. Ar+* Box tturdr
This method could also be used to convert an existing non-fran- 0b{/e:,
joint.
gible roof tank, to have a frangible 105 t5.m
Note: Care must be exercised in using this method to ensure lrlo 20.m
T.nl d.siEn F6$c PIB *tu d'
that the frangible shell-to-roof .ioint will fail before the
20m
shelllo-bottom joint. the shell joint or the anchorage A t4{l

thorough finite element analysis should be undertaK€n F tul. Frrs@ {fM F 6) x t Jb

to make certain that the fillet weld between the angles
fails before any other area of the tank. rs.c Altctdir E fd ssn d6i rcC.rfte'Is
bF.. di; dd'to.. dE GfdtiE li4o'd sriSrr d b. E
tods {Ell d b s .6.d to l (lE ft 'Ela lo'4 Trt
t ilot FBioa ti.It . eblh&d 6i a_hil lhi:taga
3.9 Tank anchorage further consider- 'Midsur sF.itu $ ttcd

ations
- Yi.ld

Figure 3.70 Allowabl€ design stresses in anchors

Fron API 65A. bble F'1
3.9.1 Wind loading and internal service pressure

The British, American and European Codes all address this

subject. Fixed roof tanks shall be provided with anchorage if,
dueto one of the following conditions, there may be a tendency
forthe shell and the bottom plate, close to the shell, to lift offthe
foundation:

. Uplift on an empty tank due to internal design pressure,

counteracted by the effeciive weight of the roof and shell'

. Uplift due to internal design pressure in combination with

wind loading, counteracted by the effective weight of the
roof and shell, plus the effective weight of product, consid-
ered bythe tankoperator, to be always present in the tank

(This last condition is at the sole discretion ofthe tank oper-

ator.)
Note: The tank weights referred to are the weighb after de-
ducting any corrosion allowances.

3.9,2 Anchorage attachment

The principle point of attachment of the anchorage shall be on

the tank shell plating and not the bottom plating and should be
so designed to accommodate any tank movement due to ther-
mal changes and hydrostatic pressure Stresses induced into
the shell djue to the anchorage shall be kept to a minimum Ex-
amples oftank anchoring methods are shown earlier in Figures
3.69 (a), (b) and (c).

The allowable stresses to the British, American and EN Codes

are given earlier in Sections 3.8.10 3and3 811 3andinFigure Figure 3.71 Frangiblejoini in a tank shell
3.70.

94 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 128/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient temperaturc storage tank deslgn
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Tank oiameter o = 3oooo m shel : 12 Pl.les perco 6e

Tank Helght H= 16.000 m
specilicgravivw = 0900 1 00 to beused lorsheLldosgn
lnier.alpress. p = 56 oO m bar lnl€malvtc 6 00 m baf
co(osion allowances ' shellplates 0 00 mm
Floorplales o 00 mm
RoofPlales 000 mm
shellanlles o0o mm.Tota = 0.00 mooffeachnanqelhks The total equivalent stable height of the shell HE = 12 388 m
Desgn temperalurc I Max. 90 00 "c
lllin. 0 0o "c 3.9.4.3 Maximum unstiffened height of the shell
sreeltype l Bs EN 10025 5275
Minimum Yield Stress 275 000 N/mf,z for'l <= 16mm This is obtained from Section 3 5.2, equation 3.33 which gives:
Desgnsless = 133.333 Nh.ri(23xmLn YLeld)
_
sheLlhickness D/20 s{9sw (H _o 3)+ p}+ca ignoe p il =< 7 5 m bar ) t'1"-.1^
I'
'
(
Ho=Kl
The code requres a mln thickdess 3 00 mm i D' l

alsls lligsI9 But first a value for K must be obtained from equation 3 32
where
1 2.000
183 333
13 05
11.5
,.
N=--
95,000
;
2 2 000
3 2 000 9.84 9.9 (3.563.Vs'+580
- Va)
424 33
5 2 000 143 333 6.63
503 30 95,000
,-
6 183.333
2 000 i33 333 3.42 Kr - - r.YVo
(3.563 x 44.16' 580 x 8.5)
7
2.000

Then:
'rhe w€ight otthe sh€ll = 1 10 631 kg
This shellca culat on dernonslrales how the lomula produces verv lh n uPpefcources
The Code require. a mininum th ckness of 8 mm tor thjs tank diameler
'
no=z.ssal
81
l'30'l
] =earr'
Figure 3.72 Tank shell deslgn daia illustration Comparing the maximum height of unstiffened shell allowable
Hp = 8.81i m, to the eq u ivalent stable height of the shellHE =
Note: The shell thicknesses have increased slightly from 1i.388 m it can be seen thatas 8.811 m<12388m<2x8811
those shown in Figure 3 8, this is due to the increase in m, then one secondary wind girder is required and the Code re-
internal pressure, from 7.5 mbar to 56 mbar' quires this to be positioned at HE/2 = 6.194 m down from the top
3.9.4.'l Completion of tank design of the shell.
'12.388 - 8 811
The tank design has to be completed in order to obtain a tank However, ihe girder may be positioned at a point
position the
weight. This is required in order to be able to perform the an- = 3.577 m down lrom the top of the shell as in this
chorage calculation. maximum permitted spacing of 8 811 m is still maintained.
girder calculation is an argumentfor placing the girder(s) as close to ihe top
3.9.4.2 Shell wind of the tank as possible because it has been found in practice
There
In this example the tank site is located in Liverpool, England
that the upper courses tend to suffer more internal corrosion
and from Section 3.3.3 and Figure 3.10, the basicwind speed is
iound to be 46 m/sec. This is due to the wetting and drying cycle inthe upperarea due
to product movements in and out of the tank. Hence the
Also the topography factors from Section 3.3.3, Figure 3.11 and girder(s) offer stiffness in the area where it is most needed
3.12 a.e:
In any event the girder(s) shall not be within 150 mm of a shell
s1=1.0 s2=0.96 S3=1 .0 girth weld.
The design wind speed Vs is therefore 46 x 0 96 = 44.1 6 m/sec 3.9.4.4 Section size for the secondary wind girder
Referring back to Section 3.5.2, equation 3.24 gives the equiv- From Figure 3.32, for a 30 m diameter tank the section size
alent stable height of each shell course: shall be a 125 x 75 x 8 mm angle.
. . ..2.5
1 I The toe ofthe longer leg ofthe angle is welded to eitherthe in-
re = n( tefnal or external surface of the shell. The normal preference is
\ r.l This leaves a smooth internal
For the bottom course: surface, ittothemakes
to attach which external
forsurface.
easier tank cleaning and also allows
rr r25 for the future fitting of an internal floating cover if, due to change
He=2,0 II =0.538m of stored produce, this is found necessary
\ 13.1'
The weight of this wind girder is 1,150 kg
The calculation forthe fullshellcan be shown in tabularform as
3.9.4.5 Shell-to-roof compression zone
iollows:
From equation 3.69 the required area in this zone is:
Heisht (F) (Po.77 tr) R'?
A_50
2.4 13.1 0.853 Sc tan 0
2 2.0 115 0.807 The minimum allowable roof plate thickness to the Code is 5
2A 9.9 '1.174 mm (to which any corrosion allowance has to be added).
2.0 8.3 1.424 The normal roof slope for a cone roof tank is 1 : 5 and this will be
2.4 8.0 2.000 useo nere.
For this tank

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 95

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 129/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperature stonge tank design

50 x (0.77 x 51} x 15'? Also the code allows the participating roof plate to overhang
^ {56 the shell by 16.t which in this case is 16 x 16 = 256 mm
^= .2o*t2
By it is found that the roof plate dimensions of Wh
trialand error
=24,445 mm2 = TOOm plus a shell overhang of 210 mm, give a roof plate area
of (700 + 210) x 18 =16380 mm'?.
3.9.4.6 Participating roof and shell plate area
Using the allowable shell length of 294 mm x 16 mm, then the
From Figure 3.55, in Section 3.7.4.1, the participating roofplate area for the shell section is 4704 mm2.
length: The total area is therefore 16,380 + 4.704 = 21,084 mm7 and
1000. R1 . this meets the requirement.
t
R, is the roof plate radius at the point where it meets the shell
Also it can he found that the centroid of the two plate sections
lies 7.64 mm above the corner formed by the two participating
and is given by: plates.
R 15 = 26.+gs .
=
sin 0 0.196
From Section 3.7.11 the maximum distance for the position of
the centroid of area, either above or below the corner is:
Then: 1.5 (tr + t) /2 = 25.5 mm
wh = o.6.,raoo 'r 76.485 'x 5 = 371 mm The chosen arrangement satisfies this requirement.
The area of this length of roof plating: The weight of this composite section is 15,594 kg
=Wh =371 x5=1885mm2 The compression zone will be constructed as shown in Figure
3.73.
Similarly the participating shell plate length:
3.9.4.7 Roof plating
wc=o.o"/ioooR t
The roof olate thickness was selected as 5 mm, which is the
ln this case the radius of the shell: minimum to the Code, and, as is normalforthis type of roof, the
lapped joints between the plates are welded on the top side
R = 15 m
on ly.
Then:
The suitability of this thickness and joint type has to be proved
wc-o.oJtooo x ts xa - 207.85 mm in accordance with equation 5.3 in Chapter 5 The reason for
this is that, as the roof plating is only attached to the tank at its
The area of this length of shell plating: periphery then, under pressure it can lift off its support structure
= Wc.t =207.85 x 8 = 1662.8 mm2 and act as a membrane and so its suitabilityin this condition has
to be verified.
The total participating area:
From equation 5.3 in Chapter 5, the thickness of the roof plate
= wh + Wc = 1885 + 1662.8 =3547 .8 mm2 to resist pressure:
The additional area required at the junction: P Rr
L=
'
= A-(Wh + Wc) 10 S u
= 24 ,445 3547 .8 = 2O ,897 .2 mm2 where:

Tocomplywith the Code, this additionalarea must liewithinthe p = 56 mbar

participating roof and shell lengths of: R1 = 76.485
Wh = 371 mm and We = 207.85 mm. S = 18.33 N/mm2
The additional area is too large to be provided by any combina- 0.35 for a single side-welded lap joint
tion ofthe largestangle sizeswhich are commonly available to
=
us. The alternative therefore, is to use thickened roofand shell I nen
plates within the compression zone
Following the same method used inthedesign example in Sec-
tion 3.7.10.1 , the following result is obtained.
Corroded area required 20,897 .2 mm2
Try tr = 18 mm
and t = 16 mm
c.a. = 0mm
Roof slope 'l in 5
Tank diameter = 30m
Roof radius = 76.486 m
(tr - c.a.) = 18 mm
( - c.a.) = 16 mm

Recalculate:
wh = 0.6^'iaoo;t6385 )( 18 =704 mm

and
wc = 0.0.,/tooo x Ls x '16 = zg+ n' Figure 3,73 Compression zone construction

96 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 130/296
7/18/2019 3 Ambient tempetature storage tank destT
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

56 x 76.485 Fs=0.7x1195.4x30x16
t -b.b6mm
10x183.33x0.35
- Fs =401,654 N
The roof plating is not acceptable at 5 mm thick, with single
lap-welded joints. Three solutions to this situation are possible:
The wind force normal to the roof from equation 3.21:

1) Lose 7 mm roof plating (which is a non-standard thick Fr =CI q /zD.h

ness, therefore 8 mm would probably be selected.)
Fr =0.7 x 1 195.4 x(30/2) x3
2) Weld the underside as well as the top side of the lap welds
This would increase the joint efficiency factor p to 0.5. The Fr = 37,655.1 N
required design thickness would then reduce to 4.67 mm
and then 5 mm plate would be accepbble. The resulting wind moment on the tank is found from equation
3.19:
However, welding the underside laps on such a large area of
roof would be an expensive and labourious bsk. Mw = [Fs H/zl+ [Fr{h +ni JU
3) Re-design the roof as an umbrella roofwhen the roof ra-
dius can be selected to accept 5 mm plate. N/rw .1401,654.4x16/2j- [37.655.1 (16 | 3/3)]
ln oractice solution 3) would be the most favourable option, but
for the ourposes of this exercise we will continue with the cone Mw = 3,853,371.9 N or 3,853.37 kNm
roof and select to use I mm plate. A further effect of this deci-
Whilst it is not specifically mentioned in BS 2654, it is advisable
sion is to increase the weight on the roof structure by about 17
to apply a factor of safety to the tank overturning moment. Guid-
tonnes (24 kg/ m'?) and hence the design of the structure will
ance on this is given in BS 449: Part 2 "The use of structural
have to cater for this additional load.
steel in building". Clause 10b oithis Code states "When consid-
The weight ofthe 8 mm roof plating is found to be 45,270 kg. ering wind loads, the restoring moment shall not be less than
3.9.4.8 Roof structure 1.4 times the overturning moment due to dead loads and wind
loads, nor less than '1.2 times the overturning moment due to
The various types of roof structures are dealt with in Chapter 5,
the combined effects of dead, imposed and wind loads". There-
where it will be seen that they are designed to structural engF
fore a factor of 1.4 will be used.
neering standards, which are not exhaustively dealt with in the
iank standards. For the tank in question, the structure will be of The value for Mw used in the anchorage calculation then in-
the internal truss type and from previous experience it is found creases to 3,853.37 x 1.4 = 5,394.72 kNm.
that the net weight of such a structure is in the region of 31,000 The counteracting righting moment on the tank is given by mul-
kg, after allowing for the thickerthan usual roof plating at 8 mm. tiplying the effective weight of the tank W less ihe uplift on the
3.9.4.9 Anchorage calculation roof due to the wind passing over it, which is usually taken as
0.6 x q x area, by the moment afm measured betlveen the polar
Enough information is now available to calculate the effective
axis of the tank and the tank shell.
weight Ga of the tank for the anchorage calculation and ihis js
summarised as follows: -^t
'. lw (u.bxqxarealxurrl
kg
The uplift in this case is 0.6 x 1195.4 x 21x 30'?= 507 kN
Shell 110,681
Wind girder 1 ,150 Mrr = (1997.6 507) x3012
Shell-to-roof
compressron zone 15,594
Mr, = 22 35n O*t
Roof structure 31,000 As lvlrj > lVlW anchorage is not required.
Roof plating 45,270 3.9.4.11 Overturning moment due to wind action while in
seryice
Ga = 203,695 = 1997.6 kN
The Code requires the tank stability to be checked when it is
Note: The floor weight is excluded from the effective tank empty, but subjected to its internal design pressure together
weight.
with the external wind load and this is performed as follows:
The forces aciing on the tank which can cause anchorage to be
The upthrust on the roof due to the internal pressure is:
required will now be considered.
3.9.4.10 Overturning moment due to wind action only uP=rl4D'P
Relerring to Section 3.3.3.4 for the theory used in CP3 : Chap- Up = n/4 x 30'zx 56 x 0.01
ier V : Part 2, the following is found;
Jsing equation 3.15, the design wind speed has been estab- Up = 3958.42 kN
ished as 44.16 m/sec.
The resultant downward load is:
From equation 3.17 the dynamic pressure:
ca - Up = 1,997.6 3,958.42 = -1 ,960.82
q = 0.613 V"'?
Then the r;ghting moment for this case:
g=0.613x44.16'? Mr, = (Ga Up)D /2

9=1195.4N/m, lvlr, = 1,960.82 x 30 /2

The tank height to diameter ratio =16/30 = 0.533; and from Fig-
l\,4r, = -29,412.3 kNm
Jre 3.12 the coefficient Cr= 0.7.
The wind moment Mw is the same as before for this condition
The wind force normalto the shellfrom equation 3.20: and hence for this case M12 < Mw and therefore anchorage is
Fs =Cf q.D H requrred.

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 97

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 131/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient temperalurc storage tank design

4M
Note: There is provision in the Code forthe tank user to stipu- Load/anchor =
DN
late that ihere will always be a certain amount of prod-
uct in the tank at all times whilst the tank is in service
For such cases the applicable weight of this product The force W resisting this load is thatdue to the shell, shellstiff-
eninq and that part of the roof structure and plating which is
can be added to the weight ofthe tank to counteract the
the shell. (all after the deduction of any corrosion
uothrust due to the internal pressure This, in some supp;rted by'minus
allowance), p, the simultaneous uplift from operating
cases, can negate the requirementfor anchorage to be
Provided. conditions such as the internal pressure on the roof'

3.9.4.12 Design of the anchorage This uplift may in certain cases be more than the weight of the
To determine the load induced in the anchorage by the over- tank and in such cases the load is added to the load due to the :_
overturning moment.
turning moment, consider the following approach
From the fundamental theory of bending it is known that: Then:

v=l W=(w p) and the load Per bolt =

-
ly
where: The load in each anchor is therefore is

M = in this case the wind overturning moment

.' D,N equ 3.83
N
| = moment of inertia of the cross-section of the
tank This is the expression, which appears in API 650, clause
3.111 .3 for anchorage, except that D is shown as the anchor
cir-
f = stress in cross-section
cle diameter.
maximum distance from the axis of the section
v = to the outer fibres. in this case the radius r of Adopting the nomenclature used in Section 3 9 4 10 and 11'
the tank shell then equation 3.83 can be written:

It is also known that: . 4 Mw (Ga UP) equ 3.84

s- D.N N
I = Z the modulus of the cross-section.
v The BS Code does not give a method for calculating the an-
and therefore: chorage loading but leav;sthis to the individual designer to for-
mulate.
.M equ 3.81
z The BS Code does stipulate that the spacing oi anchors shall
be between 1 and 3 metres (see Section 3.8.10 3) and also
that
Also: the minimum cross-sectional area ofan anchor shall not be
less
than 500 mm2, excluding any corrosion allowance'
51rgss =lY:l er 1=l
afea A such thatthere are
convenientto
It is often
number on arrange
each the
shell anchors
plate. in this way clashes be-
The cross-sectional area of a thin cylinder is given as: an equal
h,\,/een anchor positions and vertical course welds can be
A=n D t avoided.

For the 30 m diameter tank in question, the maximum

numDer
where:
94 and the minimum 32 As there are 12 plates per
of anchors is
D = diameter of the iank
course, then 36 anchors will be selected, giving 3
per shell
t = shell ihickness plate.

Then: Assume the use ofanchorbolts as shown in Figure 3 69 (a) and

a pitch circle diameter of 30.32 m.
-L equ 3.82
' nDt From equation 3.80 the load per bolt

Equations 3.81 and 3.82 can now be equated: . 4 x5,994J2 (-1,960 82)

Z n.D f - 30.32
"= 74.2 x
36
kN / bolt
36

By definition, Z, the section modulus for a thin walled

cylinder is an-
Selected from the worked example in Section 3 8 10 3 is an
given by: lhor bolt material having a minimum tensile strength of 430
NUmmi and a minimum yield strength of 255 N/mm2
and hence
r.f .t = .D2 t an allowabletensile stress of 127.5 N/mm2 based on 50%
ofthe
yield strength.
Then: core stress
A bolt diameter of 36 mm will be selected, having a
M L ^- 4'M area of 817 mm2 and this excludes a corrosion allowance
r/4D'zt nDt nD't n.D.T
The tensile stress in the anchor bolts will be:
Hence:
74.24 x 1000 ,99.97
, 4,M
417
111n'.n,'z

D
ac-
This actual stress is less than 127.5 N/mmz and is therefore
L is thetotal load in all the anchors, so ifthe number of anchors
ceptable.
is N, then the load in each anchor is.

98 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 132/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempercturc stotage tank design

3.9.4.13 Check for frangibility These pressures can be adjusted for other wind velocities by
multiplying them by (Vi 160)'?for Sl units, or (V/100)'zfor lmperial
lf the tank were required to have a frangible roofjoint, then the
units, whereV is the wind speed in km / h or mph respectively.
calculation given in Section 3.8.10.3 would be based on the an-
ticipated roof failure pressure and performed as follows: The value lViW the overturning wind moment, is then calculated
using the above figures.
From Section 3.9.4.6 the total area ofthe compression zone is
21 ,084 mm2. The American Code chooses a safety factor of 1 .5 ( it was 1.4
for the British Code) and therefore for an unanchored tank:
From Section 3.9.4.7 the roof plating is 8 mm thick
1.5 Mw must be less than orjust equalto the effective weightof
From Section 3.9.4.9 the effective weight ofthe tank (excluding thetankWxD/2.
the roof plates) is 158,425 kg = 1553.64 kN. This is actually shown in the Code as:
From equation 3.79
rr,r*.=?f
w DJ
Asc tano ^--.
O=-+U.It.tl
' 50. R'
3\ 2 )
The load in each anchor tb is found from equation 3.79 except
21,Oa4 x220 x0.2 that it is presented in the Code as:
+ 0.77 x8
50x15 ., 4.M W
= 88.62 millibar or 8.862 kN/m'?
d.N N
The upthrust on the roof: where:

Up=nx15'?x8.862 d = diameter of the anchor circle (m)

6,264.18 kN
=
The net uplift on the roof is:
3.10 Tanks produced in stainless steel ma-
terials
6,264.18 - 1,553.64 = 4,710.54 kN. The BS and API Codes are written around the use of carbon
steel materials. However for many years the petrochemical in-
The tank is to have 36 off36 mm diameter bolts, each having a
dustry has required tanks made in stainless steel materials. Ac-
core cross-sectional diameter of 817 mm2. cordingly designers have used the existing Codes and adapted
The load in each bolt: them for stainless steel materials.
471nqt Stainless steel does not strain under load in the same way that
= " 36'- = 13085 kN carbon sieel does, as it does not have a distinct yield point. The
alternative is to use the value of the 'proof stress" as the yield
The stress in each bolt: stress and usually ihe value for the 1 % proof stress is used.
130 85 x looo ln 1998 API 650 introduced Appendix S into the Code and this
- 160.16 N/mm'?
glves recommendations for designing tanks in austenitic stain-
817
This is greater than the allowable stress of 127.5 N/mm'? and is less sieel grades 304,3041, 316, 3161, 317 and 3171.
therefore unacceptable. The Appendix gives many recommendations, the important
ones being in the following areas:
Try using 42 mm diameter bolts with a core cross-sectional
atea of 1112 mmz. Lists ofacceptable materials to be usedforplates and struc-
tural sections, piping, forgings and bolting materials.
The stress in each bolt:
is very similarto that given in the
-
130 qq x 1000
- 117.67 N/mm, and this is acceptabte
Design information
main body of the Code
- This
but for the shell desig n it includes the
1112 use of a joint efficiency, the value of which is dependant
It can be seen then, that whilstthe tank anchorage of 36 off 36 upon the level of radiographic inspection ofthe shell welds.
mm diameter bolts was acceptable for wind and service load- Tables for the allowable stresses and "yield stresses" for
ing, for the frangible roof condition the bolt diameter had to be tank shells at various design temperatures for the range of
increased to 42 mm. steel grades covered by the Code.

Alternatively,
there the number
was a desire of bolts
to maintain could
a bolt have been
diameter increased
of 36 mm. if A table giving values for the modulus of elasticity of stain-
less steel over a range of temperatures.
As mentioned in Section 3.8.10.4 the stress in the shell plating
A list of other Appendices which require modification when
must be checked at the roof failure pressure.
used for austenitic stainless steels.
3.9.4.14 Wind loading to API 650
The BS Code does not yet give advice on the use of stainless
The American Code uses a different method to establish the steels for tank construction.
wind loading on a tank. The EuroDean code orEN 14015 -1 does include references to
In clause 3.11 .1 of the Code, specific wind pressures are pub- he use of stainless steel and these can be briefly summarised
lished, based on a wind speed of 100 mph, (160 km/h) and as follows;
these are: . A list of acceptable austeniticand austenitic-ferritic steels to
1.4 kPa (30 lbf/ft2) on vertical plane surfaces. EN 10088 -1 is given
0.86 kPa (18 lbflft'?) on projected areas of cylindrical surfaces. . The allowable stress levels have to be determined by the
0.72 kPa (15 lbflft') on projected areas of conical and double designer from EN '10088 -1
curved surfaces. . l\,'linimum floor plate thicknesses are given as:

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 99

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 133/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
3 Ambient tempercture storage tank design
to en-
freelv drain to the centre sump lt is therefore important
Lap-welded floors 5 mm pfut". oo not distort during welding and the use of
(compared to 6 mm for carbon steel) "ur"iniiin" as shown in Figure 3 75'
strongbacks is essential
Butt-welded floors 3 mm
(compared to 5 mm for carbon steel))
. The minimum allowable nominal shell thicknesses are
given as:

2 5
D<6
5

5
l0 to. 15

5 6
15to<30
6 8
30to<45
By agr€emenl bebv€en the
puahaser and the @ntEctq

Figure 3.74 Semi-buried tanks under con$ruclon

Minimum roof Plate thickness 3 mm
Courtesy of McTaY
(compared to 5 mm for carbon steel)
Minimum thickness of structural roof members 3 mm
(compared to 5 mm for carbon steel)
Shell nozzle barrel thicknesses:

3.5 5

5 5.5
> 50.= 75
>75 <= 100
7.5

T 8.5

> 150 <= 200 I 10.5

> 200 I 12.5

Figure 3.75 The use ofstrongbacks du ng welding to stop plate distortion

coudesy of McTaY
. Roof nozzle barrel thicknesses:

n.b. ofnozl€ {mm) I stainless steel{mm}

paint system
Figure 3.76 The tank shell is coated with bitumen-based
Cauftesy of Whessoe
3.11 Semi-buried tanks for the storage of
aviation fuel
Standard
An interesting design ofstorage tank has becomethe
of lviation fuel at most military air bases and
i"iir''"
"t-"g"
some commercial airports
These are vertical cylindrical tanks which are cased in rein-
ioii"o Lither fully or semi-buried lnthecaseof
mititarv "on"t"t" "no
estautisnments' the reason is based on security from
aerial or ground attack. A series ofthese
tanks under consuuc-
tion is shown in Figure 3.74
reln-
The tanks are supported on a cone down to the centre
torndation with a slope of 1:25 and a central
ioi""J
"on"t"t" The bottom is usually butt-weloeo anq
bottom
around 12 liquid
mmoutlet.
thick lt is important to ensure that there are no
in order to Figure 3.77 The tank is clad in reinfolced concrete
ioiJs tet*een tne loor plating and the foundation
giu" u fiit for the suppbrt columns Also' the floor must CouftesY of Whessoe
""uting

1OO STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 134/296
 1 Ambent |FrnpetatLttP 'otdge
tat t\ de tgn
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

./8 - rp rd r. rs lao r'r ' o' pd ol ra e

is then par
'esY af Whessae constructed on top of the tank The whole structure
buried and grassed over to make rts pres-
tially, or completely
ence less obvious. This is shown in Figure 3 80

in diameter
These tanks are made of carbon steel, up to 33 m
with an appropriate epoxy based
fn"lnt"inui"utfu""s are lined
puint ly"tu. for reasons of product cleanliness as shown in

Figure 3.81.

3.12 References
3.1 A Review of the Develapment of Fracture Safe Des/gns
anclCodes for Oiland LPG St'orageTanks' H C Cotton'
: i -'e 3 79 The lank rool s c ad in relnforced concr-6te
Consultant and J. B Denham, BP International Ltd
: .lesY oi Wlressoe
3.2 Farmulasfor Stress and Siraln, by R J RoarkandW C
Young, PUblished bY N'4ccraw Hlll

3.3 TG,lrct,p' tn lhe Arne i'on Sor'el, or f ncrin'e >

t,ne t3 '5 lA- 1911 h t Sa '.lder'a.ld A"Va:l-
Windenbefg

3.4 Sheifto-Base Joint Design //lspection & Repair' l',

iioon, Pnp"t pr"t"nted aithe Storage Tank Design and
inspectiori Seminar, Un versity College Stockton' UK'
1999.
Beams an Elastic Foundations' M , The University
of
3.5
wi"niqnn pt""" and Oxford Universlty Press,
'1946

(This ieference is contained within the H Kfoonpapef)

:Jre 3 80 The whole structure s padially orcompletely buteo
'
: : .,ilesy of lvhessoe 3.6 Stabilitv of APt Standard 65A Tank Shei/s, R V
ti,,tcC rain,
proceeaings of the American Petroleum Insti-
-'re tanks' bottoms were originally designed to resist an exter- tute, Section lll- Refinin9
,,-o,ess.rre arisingfron the grourd wateror around
I n head
l-.nce ihe t2 mrn rhickness; otlt ior later tank5 lhis -equire- 3.7 Franaibilite, etude sur la rupture eventuelle dun reser-
voi;yinctrique \,eircal a lon conQue soLtmis a une
e-iuuas removed (allhough the 12 n'n thicl'1es5 was mdir surpiesslon provoquee par une deflagration
:lned). accidentelle, R. Perono, SNCT Publjcations, (crrca
-1e tank shells are butt-welded and the tank roof is flat sup- 1980).
,.rtrJ bv int"rnulcolumns Following construction ofthe metal- for
. outt". tn" tank shell is coated with a biturnen-based paint (T g-
3.8 Guide for designers and
fixed roaf
users on frangible
storage tanks' EEI\,4UA (The roofjoints
Englneenng
. . siem. see f iq.r'e l. /6 and s clad ;n reinlort ed conc'eie and L4aterials Users Association) publica-
.:es 3.2/ anci.z8; as is lr^e tanl' rool {F;gure 3 79\' lr so'ne Eqripr"nt
tion No. 180, '1996
,uil" u combined pump house and control room is
"on"r"t"

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 101

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 135/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

102 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 136/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

4 Nozzle design and the effect of

applied loading
low elevation in the boftom course of the
The majority of piplng systems connect into a tank at a
connect to thin-walled' larse
$;i;ieii"d. iil"'J"""ig'n of these efie;ai piping svstems,which
proutem in the analysis of the interface
diameter, cvlindrical vertcat storage t-aniG iJn p-osl a

uetween in6 piping system and the shell nozzles'

the radial deflection and
The designer must consider the stiffness of the tankproduct.and
shell
head,-pressure and uniform or
meridionalrotation oftne snett nozzreiesulting from the pipins desisner and
;#;;li;i#;;;iure-oetween tne sie'tiandttre uottom. rne work ofihe
;#"#'tift;i;;;; il"i iL Jnsure that the pipins roads imposed on the shell
"ooroinai"Jto
nozzles by the piping are within safe limits'
Thischapterelaboratesonthemethodofana|ysisgiveninAppendixPofAP|650.
Contents:
4.1 Nozzle design
4.1 .1 The scope of the nozzles analysed
4.1.1.1 The loading on the nozzle
4-1.1.2 Definition of stiffness coefiicients
4.1.1.3 Shell deflection and rotation
4.1.1.4 Determination of toads on the nozle
4.1.2 The assessment of nozzle loadings
API 650 approach
4.1.2.'l Determination of allowable loads according to the
4.1.2.2 Construction of the nomograms
4.1.2.3 Determination of allowable loads
4.1.3 Concluding comments
4.1.4 Method of analysis examPle
4.1.4.1 The Problem
4.1.4.2 The solution
4.1.4.3 The stiffness coefiicients for the nozzle-tank mnnection
centreline
4.1.4.4 Unrestrained shell deflection and rotation at the nozzle
4.1.5 Assessment of the nozzle loading example
4.1.5.1 Determination of the non-dimensional quantities
4.1.5.2 Construction of the load nomograms
4.2 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 103

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 137/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
4 Nazzle design and the ellect of applied loading

4.1 Nozzle design ever only to be applied to tanks whose diameter is larger than
36 m.
Grateful acknowledgment is given to the late Professor A. S.
Tooth, Professor of Mechanical Engineering at University of The approach, by Billimoris and Hagstrom, (Reference 4.1)
Strathclyde, GlasgoW' forthe following elaboration ofthe appli- was incorporated into API 650 Appendix P in November 1988.
cation of the theory The purpose of the method is to provide local stiffness coeffi-
cients for the nozzle-shell connection that can be used in the
l\y'any large diameter cylindrical tanks are constructed with low design ofthe piping system. The restraint ofthe nozzle connec-
entry nozzles in the shell close to the base plate - illustrated in tion can be simulated by including these coefficients in anycon-
Figure 4.1. The location of these enables bulk liquid storage ventional piping flexibility analysis program. Then from a com-
systems to make use of gravity feed for discharge. In view of
patibility analysis the value ofthe loads on
can be determined system,
this. and oftheir smalldiameter comDared to the tank diameter of the piping
the nozzle and, thereafter evaluated to see
and the fact that the tank radius/wall thickness (Ryt) ratio is if they can be safely carried by the bnk.
large, it is not possible to make use of the chads provided in BS
5500 and WRC Bulletin 107 (or WRC 297) to determine the
4.1.1 The scope of the nozzles analysed
stiffness coefficients for the nozzles when subjected to local
loading. The above references are primarily designed for the
Two types of reinforced nozzle connections are considered in
analysis of pressure vessels, rather than storage vessels, and
API 650. These are:
are limited to vessel geometries within the range appropriate
for high pressure service. . Reinforcing in the nozzle only by an increase in the noz-
To cope with this, a simplification is often made when carrying zle wallthickness, in which case the tank is not reinforced by
out an overall pipework analysis, in which the tank is assumed a oad olate or insert.
to be a rigid anchor However, ignoring the local flexibility of the . Reinforcing of the shell by means of a pad plate or an in-
nozzle-shell connection in the piping flexibility analysis can re- sert plate. The width ofthe reinforcing zone on each side of
sult in a significant overestimation of the rigidity of the piping the nozzle centre-line is prescribed as 2a and the thickness
system and of the "end reactions" at the pipe-to-nozzle junc- of the reinforcing plate is assumed equal to the tank thick-
tion. This can often lead to unnecessary redesign of the piping ness.
system and the nozzle-shell attachment to handle the higher
For both types of nozzle connections, the distance from the
loads, which are predicted by the analysis.
tank bottom L, (see Figure 4.52), is described in ierms of L/2a.
The API 650 Code Appendix P addresses this problem, Two cases are examined. viz.. L/2a = 1.0 and 1.5L.
wherebythe localstiffness coefflcients can be obtained. These
Curves for determining the stiffness coefficients are given for
are given for a range of Ryt values, nozzle radius/shell radius ra-
Ryt ratios from 300 to 3000 and a/R ratios from 0.005 to 0.04.
tio values (a/R), and ratios ofdistance from the base/nozzle di-
For intermediate values of R/t and a/R, the stress values can be
ameter (L/2a), which are appropriate for these large storage
found by interpolation from the curves. lt is considered that the
vessels. The nozzle restraints can thus be more accurately
ranges of the ratios R/t and a/R given in the Code should ade-
modelled and included in any conventional piping analysis pro-
quately encompass the majority of low{ype fittings. Other val-
gram, to determine the actual loads on the nozzle and from
ues of L/2a can be approximated.
ihese the resultino stresses in the vessel. The method is how-

wFF (+)

RAOIAL LOAD Fi

or = tan'(14/R/L)

LONGITUOINAL MOIiIEI,IT [f

Fr--t- AL =MJKL

wiM = (-L) tan (01)

Fgure 4 1 API 650 nomenclature for piping loads and deformation on nozzle logether wiih thtee types ofloading

104 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 138/296
7/18/2019 4 Nozzte desiqn
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
and lhe eftect of apphed :(E:':

Appt.d f@ ro [email protected] ow F* = K* x W^. equ 4.1

v___* 4=K.x{ egu 4.2

equ 4.3
14=Kcxoc

SX)*
:gurc 4.2 Oiagrammaiic presentation of pressure load distributions
where:

&Kc
n, Ku

Wnr =
= stiffnesscoefficients

radial deflection of the tank at the nozzle con-

nection
4.1.1.1 The loading on the nozzle
0L = rotation ofthe tank meridian in a vertical plane
Jnder the most general movement of the piping system' the
at the nozzle connectlon
'ozzle willbe subjectto three forces and three moments acting
'r and about the orthogonal axes However, only one
force and
causing shell defor-
B.
" = rotation in the horizontal plane at the nozzle
:,vo moments are con;idered signi{lcant in connection due to a circumferential moment
-'ratrons.
-hese three types of loading are shown in Figure 4 1; they are: Roinlorcoment on shell

:re radialthrust FR, longitudinal moment ML' applied in a verti-

;al plane through the centre of the nozzle, and circumferential Llz. :1.O
-roment Mc, ap;lied in a horizontal plane through the centre of E
::re nozzte.
E 1x l0+
-he above nozzle loadingswere modelled assuming the nozzle E
E
?dial load was uniformly distributed over an equivalent square 3 lR = o.oos
shell. That is the hole' the nozzle penetration I
:atch uncut .9
:nd theof the
nozzle geometry are ignored. The moment loadings 1x t03
,rere assumed to apply a triangular interface pressure load to
6 ,R
:'e square patch of the uncut shell. These distributions are \
tl
:rown diagrammatically on Figure 4 2.
I
-N
NOTE: This simplified approach, by which the nozzle local 1x l0<
loading istransferred to the uncutvessel, isthat used in
WRC dulletin 107 and BS 5500 However, in the WRC
.E \. Tt
= 0.{X
Bulletin 297 a more rigorous approach is adopted
whereby the actual nozzie and shell are analysed' that
8
lx10{ II
is to say the shell is Penetrated.
R It
r addition to the deformations due to piping loads therewillbe
-ee-body deflections and rotrations of the tank shell'
{.1.1.2 Definition of stiffness coeffiGients 1x10{

s€f;EFssE R
-he relationship between the elastic deformation of the tank g
shell nozzle connection and the external loads are expressed
:n Figure 4.1 in the following linear form: ror ronsirudinar momeni: Reinrorcement In noz-
:'8Y,:%f X"iil[ZT-:i."fcient

Reinlorcement on shell Reintorcement on sheu

L12. Llza 1.0

1x 104 1x l0+
E a lR = o.Ns
P I
q= 0.005
= {
s J 1x10{
1rl0{ I 6
G
I
0.r t2

"\
1xt0< i\. { 1x10'
{
Ilt
6
d
lx10+
tr
0.1 A
E
.9
s
2
1x 10+
Ph
I tFl-
tlt I = 0.04

1x l0+
s sf;EFESE R
I x10'
s € E EFseE
- jure 4.3 Stiffnesscoefficientfor 6dial load: Reinforcemenion shell Fiourc 4.5 Stiffness coefficient for citcumfetential moment: Reinfofcemenl on
_2a = 1.4) sh;ll{u2a = 1.0)

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 105

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 139/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
4 Nozzle design and the effect of applied loading

F. = radial thrust and the external piping loads can be expressed as follows:

ML = longitudinal moment
w"'' - l" -Lt""ll I . * luorn equation 4.67) equ4.6
Mc = circumferential moment KR \Kr,/
ln relation to the equations 4.l to4.3, itshould be noted that ra-
dialdeflections and meridian rotations arise from both the radial q -S t"n'li I , (from equation4.68) equl.l
thrust FR and the longitudinal moment ML. The resultant com-
' K. lLKo J

patibility equations are given in Section 4.1.1 .4, equations 4.6

to 4.8. which make this point clear. In API 650 there is no dis- e" equ 4.8
tinction betlveen the displacements caused by the individual
nozzle forces and the resuliant displacements caused by all ef-
=9 ^c
Wn , 0r and 0c are the resultant radial deflection (in mm) and ro-
fects, the same symbol is used for both.
tation (in radians) of the tank at the nozzle opening resulting
Acomputer program based upon the work of Kalnins was used fromthepiping loads Fn, Mrand Mc and the product head, pres-
to derive these stiffness coefficients, which are given in the sure and uniform or differential temperature betvveen the tank
code in non-dimensional form. As indicated in Section 4.1.1, shell and the tank bottom.
two values ofthe ratio, distance from the base/nozzle diameter,
ln the above equationsthe deflections W and 0 can be obtained
are examined i.e. L/2a = 1 .0 and 1 .5, and the two types of rein-
from equations 4.4 and 4.5. The resultant deflection and rota-
forced local geometry were considered.
tions on the left-hand side of equations 4.6 to 4.8 must be equal
ln all. the Code presents twelve charts. For illustration typical to those from the connecting piping system, which can be ob-
values of stiffness coefficients are given in Figures 4 3, 4 4 and tained from a pipe work analysis. The problem, therefore, co-
4.5 for radial load, longitudinalmoment and circumferential mo- mes down to the solution of three simultaneous equations,
ment{or the case of U2a = 1 .0, and forthe reinforcement on the where the unknowns are the three piping loads, Fn, Mr and Mc
shell case. The problem, therefore, is solved.
4.1.1.3 Shell deflection and rotation The assessment ofthese Ioads as given in API 650 are outlined
The product in the tank produces both radial and rotational in Section 4.1.2 and in Section 4.1.4 the details ofthe approach
groMh. They are given by the following: in Appendix P is shown by means of an example

Radial groMh of the shell

4.1.2 The assessment of nozzle loadings
The unrestrained outward radial growth ofthe shell at the cen-
tre ofthe nozzle resulting from the product head andiorthe ther- 4.1.2.1 Determination of allowable loads according to the
mal exoansion can be determined as follows: API 650 approach
9.8X1O6GHR'
ft o'"o.lpr-f ll* ,,nor API 650 Appendix P provides a linear interaction diagram to es-
I " \ |-1 /l tablish an allowable load criterion for any "lowtype" nozzle con-
equ4 4 tlguration when several loads acttogether The hoop stress due
to the product head is taken into considefation in formulating
Rotation of the shell the criteria. When the nozzle loads are acting to produce ten-
The unrestrained rotation ofthe tank at the centre ofthe nozzle
resulting from the product head can be determined as follows; Two.tntds ol lne requrred rernlorced a.ea must be located
w'thrn a- 0.5 (Ft )"' oi the oo€nrng centedine \
9.8 x 1o 6G.H R2
(l o" u'("o"1n u)+si(P L)))
equ 4.5

where:
G = design specific gravity ofthe liquid
H = maximum allowable tank filling height (mrn)
R = nominal tank radius (mm)
E = modulus of elasticity (NIPa)

tL = tank thickness at the nozzle (mm)

= vertical distance from the nozzle centreline to
tank bottom (mm)

0 = 2j5
chara"t"1stic parameter =1 ttlmml
JRt
o = coetficient of thermal expansion ofthetank
material, [(mm/ mm -'C)]

AT = temperature differential ('c)

Note: The phrase "unrestrained" in the above two expres-
sions takes account ofthe vessel base restraint, which
implies zero radialmovement and thefreedom to rotate
like a "hinge", but not the restraint caused by the pipe 0.2 0-3 0.5 1.0

WOTK. L - a/lRtj"3 - \a/Rll4/t Jo'

4,1.1,4 Determination of loads on the nozzle
Figure 4 6 The coefficienls YF and YL
The relationship between the elastic deformation of the nozzle

106 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 140/296
 4 Nozzte design and the eflect of applied loading
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

r*r{rb ol tF caied
'rule'"ddM8 '\
rs . + 06 (Rl l .r tu.9ttl.

r-.ttqtt-=tt|F,/fI t\t-

Figure 4.7 Obtaining coefficient Yc

hoop tensile and Mc are proportional to the quantities:
sion in the areas ofthe tank shellwhich experience
stresses due to product head, the criteria for allowable
nozzle r /rr \ r /r,,t \
reactions act I I h I _1 l\ Jano a lllj lrespectively,
f""0" "L
i" ti" t"t"
rir.ttictive than
direction their these
and when effect nozzle
is mitigated by the 2YF lFpJ' a\ [ Fp
I aYc \. FP ]

product"pJ""it
head. where:
particular elevation
The stresses due to the product head at a
o"if't" t"n["n"] ut" related to the distance from the tank bot- ^ -Jnt
of a
i"t. ittr", it is possible to express their effect in terms possible to lor
non-Oi."n"ion"iOi"tiance from the bottom lt is also
non-dlmen-
Fp
' = p n a2, the pressure end load on the nozzle
ine efect otthe nozzle loads in terms of a ih" pt"""uie due to design product head at the
""oress
sional lenqth by normalising the reaction' using
the pressure nozzle centreline
ofthe nozzle as the normalrs-
toice on tnie crols-sectionalarea
ing divisor.
Y'. Y'- = the coetficients which indicate the effect ofthe
& i.- nozzle loads on the shell-nozzle junction and
maxl-
Homoqrams have been constructed by Iimiting the.total obtained from Figures 4 6 and 4 7
membrane stress due to the prooucr
mum ;alculated hoop
;";; ;;J ih" nozzle loads to 110% of the design .allowable   fE) i" ,n" non-dimensional quantity plotted on the
stress. Also the maximum calculated surface stress (l e mem- 2Y, IFp] = abscissa of the "allowable load" nomogram
the allow-
Oi"ne anO oenOing) has been limited to three times
O".ion t"rnUiine stress. (This latter limitation impliesthat ^ /.r\ "" 1r,r)
I'Flat" plotted on the ordlnate: one
"lf"
ti,"-tir""J in tni" r"gion is secondary which is somewhat optF -Ll'uLlanoaYc \ Fp ,
.Lti" there iill also be a primary bending element.as
aYL
lFe I
moment
"in"uallowable load parameters have been adjusted In
well). The nomogram for each combination of radial load and
Consis-
.""""*n"r"tn" o"nding siress isthe governing factor' musr oe 4.1.2.2 Construction of the nomograms
tent units for the various parameters in the approach
used throughout. The following steps are set out in API 650:
1. Determine the non-dimenslonal quantities Xo/rR'
In view of the multiple possibilities and because the piping anaF
graphical proce- r;/.,Fi for the nozzle conflguration'
vsis usuallv involvis several loading cases' a x"/Jnt ano
Oure, using nomograms is suggested Despite the complexlty
paper with
eittiioris and Hagstrom (Reference 4'1\havete- 2. Lav out two sets of orthogonal axes on graph
oiitre toaoinq as indicated above and snown In
tor eacn ordinate and abscissa
duced the approach to the use of only two nomograms
Figures 4.8 and 4.9.
nozzle configuntion. bound-
FR' Mt 3. Construct four boundaries Ior Figure 4 8 and two
The non-dimensionat stresses due to the piping loads

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 107

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 141/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
4 Nozzle design and the effect of applied loading

lI I aYLl lM t lFp)

1.0- 0'/.fJlttJF)
&F
i -r roi]oo.j o.zs.r"/rn,r"'r,

1.0
- wrrchs@r rs grsa€r

O'F
t
Ll'
tl.
tL | 2Y.,) tFa F.\
..F,.4
A
H;*
fF. t-

[1.0-
t1.o-0.75 x^/(Fr)451,
Figure 4.10 Determination ofallowable loads from nomogram: FR and lVlL

1.0

Figure 4.8 Consaucilon ofnomogram for b1, b2, c1, c2boundary

(@ntrcsh.r C @@h)

Figure 4.11 Determination ofth allowable loads from nomogram: FR and I\,{c
tL l2Y.tIFalFc)
-1.0 -0.5 1.0

Figure 4.9 Construclion of nomogram for bl, ca boundary 4.1.3 Concluding comments

aries for Figure 4.9. Boundaries b1 and b2 are constructed The method set out in API 650 orovides a method for determin-
as lines at 45' angles between the abscissa and the ordi- ing the stiffness characteristics ofthe tank shell-to-nozzlejunc-
nate. Boundaries cj, c2, and ca are constructed as lines at
tion, which can be used ln a thorough piping analysis to deter-
45'angles passing through the calculated values indi-
mine the piping loads.
cated on Figures 4.8 and 4.9. The shift in the 45" lines re-
flects the points made earlier concerning the necessity of Having determined the piping loads, their magnitudes can be
restricting the tensile stresses when they are additive. assessed by means of an interaction diagram set out in API
650. The ordinates of two nomograms are normalised with re-
4.1.2.3 Determination of allowable loads spect to the end pressure on the nozzle. Design limitations con-
sistent with the various piping loads are built into these dia-
grams to provide the required design safety.
1. From the values ofthe localnozzle loading FR, ML and l\.4c,
and the other parameters, the following quantities can be Note: Such an analysis is not provided in BS 2654. lt could
obtained: well be that this reflects a degree of uncertainty as to
the validity, or value, ofthe newer methods of analysis.
Perhaos further assessment of these methods is re-
r
2YF
f
El r rIFp,
lFp./ aY
t'luno
r( tLl
aYc FpJ ourred.

4.1.4 Method of analysis example

2. protthepointcor.,""nonoinoto
r"L[[),i, The example given in API 650 Appendix P is used to illustrate
[H.l""tn"
nomogram constructed as shown in Figure 4.8, redrawn in the method of analysis to determine the forces which arise on a
Figure 4.10. 610 mm (24") nozzle located near the bottom of the tank when
connected to a simple pipework layout.

3. Plot the point corresponding to ^f. l'j l. +lrlt lonthe

4.1.4.1 The Droblem
zYF \iPl aY_ ro\ / This is oresented as follows:
nomogram constructed as shown in Figure 4.9, redrawn in
Atank is 79.24 m (260 ft) in diameter and 19.506 m (64 ft) high,
Figure 4.11.
and its bottom course is 33.78 mm (1.33 in) thick. The tank has
For the piping loads to be acceptable both points must lie a low type nozzle with an outside diameter of 610 mm in accor-
4. withinthe boundaries ofthe nomograms shown in Figures dance with API 650, and the nozzle centreline is 630 mm
4.10 and 4.11. (24.75 in) up from the bottom plate, with reinforcement on the

108 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 142/296
7/18/2019 4 Nozzle
Guide to Storage Tanks and design an
Equipment J uE efrect d # ffi4

r. = (s.o x ro')(t98620 x 6103)

| = 13.6 x 10-'g mm -N/radian

For the circumferential moment from Figure 4.15
K"
= =5.0*10,
42.)"
L=830mn
r" = (s.o x ro')(1e8620 x6103)

Kc =22.6 x 10{mm -N /radian

Unrestrained shell deflectlon and rotation at the nozzle

centreline
Flgure 4.12 Low lype nozzle with reinforcement in nozzle neck only The product in the tank (hydrostatic head and temperature dif-
Frcm API 650, Appendix P, figure P-6 ferential) produces both radial and rotational displacement.
The unrestrained values of these are givsn by equations 4.4
and 4.5 in terms of the iank geometry the tank material con-
opening (neck) only (see Figure 4.12).
stants, lhe height and specific gravity of the liquid contenb,
Determine the end conditions W, e, KR, KL and Kc) foruse in a shown as follows:
piping analysis and hence determine the value of the radial
ttrrusi Fn, the longitudinal moment Ms and the circumferential
moment Mc.
9.8 x 1ojc.H.R'?
E.t (''-"'*[u.,i))+c,.n lr
wnere: 9.8 x 1o-6c.H.R2
0= -o"''1"o'1o t) + sin(o'r-)f
305 mm [f
630 mm
And p = characteristic Parameter
H= '19,506 mm 1.285 1.285
=uuu| | t
AT 93-21 =72"Q JR.t
J39624 x 33.78
R= 79.2412 x 1000 = 39,624 mm thus
33-78 mm p.L =0.00111 x 630 =0.7rad
E= 198,620 N / mm2 Substituting into equation 4.4:
1.0 9.8 x 10-6 x 1.0 x 19500 x39624'z
198620 x33.78
ct - 0.0000012 mm l"C
4.1.4.2 The solution /, e. coso.7). _19506:J
A?n \
[(i_e
In the Jirst instance API 650 Appendix P is used to determine +(12 x 10 x39624 x72)
the stifiness coeffcients and the unrestrained shell deflection
and rotation at the nozle resulting from the hydrostatic head
and the temoerature difierential. Thereafter these values are
w =44.73 x (1-(o.ae66 x 0.7648) -o.o3?3)+34.23
used in a pipework analysis to determine the thrust and mo-
ments atthe nozzle. An assessment is made, usingthe method W =60.53 mm (APlgives59.7 mm, using roundedvalues)
given in Appendix P, to determine the acceptability of the de- Substituting into equation 4.5:
sign.
The stiff ness coeffi cients: ^ 9.8 x 1o-6G.H.R2
o=- E.t
For the nozzle-tank connection
M (f -0."-tr(.* 1n L) + sin(e'L)))
= 39624 / 33.78 = 1173

a/R=305/39624=0.008 98 x 10-6 10 x 19506 x396242

e=
'198620 x 33.78
u2a = 630 / 610 ", 1 .0

For the radial load from Figure 4.13

( 1 -o.oollt x0.4966 (cos 0.7+sin 0.7)l
\ 19506
 ^,
EI2al
= 3.t *to' 0 =44.73 x
- (o.oot t't x o.+soo x (o.zo+e r o.o++z))}
610) {o.oooosrzz
K* = (3.1fl0'X1e862o x
0 =44.73 x-0.0007254

KR =37559 N /mm e= -0.032 radians (as given in API) = 1.833 degrees

For the longitudinal moment from Figure 4.14
4.1,5 Assessment of the nozzle loading example
Kt = =3.0 r 10'
42.)" As indicated in Section 4.1.2, using the approach in API 650

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 109

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 143/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
4 Nozzle design and the effect of applied loading

Appendix P provides an interaction diagram to establish the al-

i.o-0.75 -1.0 o.7s l. ) -o.oo 93'
lowable loads. The background to the criteria and detiails ofthe
method of construction of the nomograms has already been
VRt \ J39624 x 33.781
given. The example given here uses the method and plots the
1 o-0.75 L -1.0 o.7s [ 930 ) =o.sg
four cases on the resulting nomograms.
VRt t J39624 x 33.781
4.1.5.1 Determination of the non-dimensional quantities
The ordinates and abscissa ofthese nomograms can be found
From the nozzle illustrated in Figure 4.12 the following values using the radial load Fp , associated with the pressure head at
can be found: the nozzle. In this case this is equal to:

XA = 935 mm at the top of the nozzle Fp = pra'z = (gsooxl .o)C e.2 0.630),{0.305)'? = 53,200N
Xe = 325 mm at the bottom of the nozzle

Xc = 630 mm at the centre line of the nozzle

Using these the following non-dimensional quantities are as fol- Rsinforcement on oponlng (neck) only
IOWS:

xa 935 E U2a 't.0

JRt J39624 x 33.78
E
1x10{
x. 325 3
JRt J39624 x 33.78
P
= 0.005

x- 630 '6 txl03

Rt J39624 x 33.78
==-=u.54 5.0 x

x
I {

,a305 :
/.- -u,zo
R

-- "/39624 x 33.78
"/Rt 1x 10i I I

From Figures 4.6 and 4.7, the values of Yr, Yr and Yc can be E
.c \
found. 6
Yr = 7.8 'l x 106
t t.o
\:
Yr ='1.9 R t
E
Yc = 15.0
1x10.
4.'1.5.2 Construction of the load nomograms
From these values a nomogram can be constructed.
vlrq\ Figure 4.14 Stiffness coefficientfor longiludinal momenl: Reinlorcement in
'i.o, 0.7s ^B - 1.0 -0.75
JRt |\'J39624""x 33.78,/I - o.zs nozzle neck only (L/2a = 1.0)

From API 654, figure P-2H

Reinforcement on opening (neck) only

R€inforcement on opening (neck) only

UZa = r.o i
u2a = 1.0 -

1x10{
1x102 / R = 0.005
E

1x10j
f = 0.005 P
1x 103

5x t04
3.1x104
a/R=0-
x10l ll
1x 10+
g 'l

\
I
'| x l05 I I x 105
T...
/F t.& D.(X

R t l/t I

I
1x105
1x104
3 8 I I3838 rF

Figure 4.13 Stifiness coefficient f or radial load: Reinforcement in nozzle neck Figure 4.15 Stiffness coefiicieni for circumfercntjal moment: Reinforcemenl in
only (U2a = 1.0) nozzle neck only (U2a = 1.0)
From API 650, figute P-2G From API 650, tigure P-21

110 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 144/296
7/18/2019
4 Nozzle design an
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
l uE tu d 1# W
(tension at 'C' controls)
+
2YF
| =+^ l -T_ =1.22xro*r"
+I
IFPJ (2X2.0) \53,200'
I
For the condition Mc = 0 and FR =0

4 fS) = -g= [_9-^^^) = zos " r o*r,4 ^ l"t l=2.05x10"M.=0.4

2YL \FPJ (305X7.8) \53'2oo.l
a YL l.FpJ
and hen@
-Lf$l==93-. (--V" l=r ozxro*r,,r"
2Yc I J (305X15) \53,200'
FP -"
M = AA , =195x10" N.mm
The limiting nozzle loads can now be established. (tension at 'A controls)
For the condition ML = 0 and Mc = 0 A summary of the limiting nozzle loadings are:
fF*) =r.zzr.,o 6E <=0.4
2 ^YF IFPJ Fn,* =328,000 N (tension at'A controls)
and hence i4.- = 550 x 106 N.mm (tension at 'C' controls)
n/ j 'A controls)
F.^* = 328000N (tension at
=
Tffi it.- = 195 x 105 N.mm (tension at'A controls)
For the condition ML = 0 and FR =0
r [% ]=r.oz x 1o-s tr/. <=0.5s 4-2 References
a.YC I Fp J
4.1 &iffness Coefficients and Allowable Loads for Nozzles
and hence in Flat Boftom gorage Tanks, H. D. Billimoris and J.
o5q Hagstrom, ASME Jn Pres Vos Techn 100 (4), 1978 p.
q'-=f;;fu=550x10" N mm
389.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 111

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 145/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 146/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

The design of fixed roofs for atmospheric storage tanks has not undergone any radical change
for a considerable period of iime. Designs are based almost entirely on the practices and
experiences oftank users in the petrochemical industry over manyyears and the design rules
which are laid down in the various Codes.
The most influential and widely used tank Code is American API 650. This Code was first
published as API 12C in 1936 and since the early 60s the design rules for tank roofs have not
changed significantly.
The British Standard for atmospheric storage tanks BS 2654 has taken a different approach to
theAmerican Code in manyareas ofiank design, but in terms oftank roofdesign, it has followed
the API rules almost exactly. The design of floating roofs is discussed in Chapter 6.

Contents:
5.1 The design of tank roofs
5.1.1 Basic types
5.'1.2 Differences behveen fixed and floating roofs
5.2 Fixed roofs
5.2.1 Design basis
5.2.1.1 Design loadings
5.2.1.2 Design methods
5.2.1.3 Code requirements
5.3 Various forms of fixed roofs
5.4 Roofs with no supporting structure
5.4.1 Cone roofs
5.4.2 Dome roofs
5.5 Roofs with supporting structures, suppofted from the tank shell
5.5.1 Cone roofs
5.5-1-1 Radial rafter type
5.5.1.2 Design example
5.5.1.3 Central crown ring
5.5.1.4 Trussed frame type
5.5.1.5 Design example
5.5. 1.6 Externally-framed roof
5.5.2 Dome roofs
5.5.2.1 Radial rafter type
5.5.2.2 Externally-framed type
5.5.3 Other types
5.5.3.1 Geodesic dome roofs
5.6 Column-supported roofs
5-6.'1 Column selection

5.7 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 113

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 147/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 Ihe 9:'g of ta

5.1 The design of tank roofs

This is an area of design which has been effectively fossilised
for some 40 years. This is perhaps largely because the existing
designs work well giving little incentive for innovation and that
the savings to be made are modest in comparison with the per-
ceived risks of new and untried designs being used.
Tank roofs perform the basicfunction ofkeeping the elements-
and possibly the occasional bird out of the stored product,
and, with varying degrees of success, keeping product vapours
out of the atmosphere. The various types of roofs are outlined
Detow.

5.'1,1 Basic types

There are two main types of tank roof and these are illustrated
in Figure 5.1.
. The first type is the fixed roof
. The second type is the floating roof
Both fixed and floating roofs are available in a number ofdiffer-
ent forms. Fixed roofs are discussed in this Chapter and float-

ing roofs are discussed in Chapter 6.

5.'l.2 Differences between fixed and floating roofs

One of the disadvantages of the fixed roof tan k, especially with

the more volatile products, is the loss of product vapour which
occurs for two reasons. '"'.'".,'*'"";,
Firstly, the diurnal changes in atmospheric temperature cause Figure 5.1 Types of lank roof
"breathing losses".

Secondly, the import and export of product to and from the tank cluded here and would be applied by the designer as directed
causes "filling" losses. by the tank purchaser, on a job-by-job basis.
5.2.1.1 Design loadings
The emission of large volumes of product vapour into the atmo-
sphere is both costly and environmentally undesirable. This a) An external superimposed load ofa minimum of 1.2 kN/m'?
problem is largely solved by the floating rooftank where the roof (25 lb/in").
sits on the surface of the product and moves up and down as In the case of the American Code, this load is deemed to
product is imported and exported and thus the majority of the include dead load plus a uniform live load.
vapours are contained under the roof.
For the Briiish Code, this load is the sum of either internal
There is also a hybrid of these two main types of roof and that is vacuum and snow load. or. internalvacuum and live load.
where an internal floating cover, which is of a much lighter con- This loading generally dictates the thickness of the roof
struction than the normalfloating foof, is fitted within a fixed roof sheeting for roofs without supporting structures, and dic-
tank. This internal cover may be fltted io the tank when it is first tates the nature ofthe supporting structure for roofs which
built, or it may be retro-fitted at a later daie since the compo- have such structures.
nents for these types of cover are designed to fit through a stan-
dard 24" (610 mm) shell manhole.
bl lnternalDressure. The British Code states that this can be
between 7.5 and 56 mbar
These internal covers are used for the following reasons: It is usual to specify a modest design pressure, but in spe-
a) Where a tank service is changed to the storage of a more cial circumstances, higher pressures can be used (see
volatile product. Chapter 4, Section 4.3.2.8). As the pressure increases,
so does its influence not only on the thickness of the shell
b) Where changes to either environmental or safety consid- and roof plating, but also on the size of the compression
erations require the reduction of vapour emissions. area at the roof-to-shell junction (see Chapter 4, Section
c) Where the vapours of a highly volatile product have to be 3.7) and on the requirements for anchorage to prevent
contained and also there is a need to ensure thatthe prod- tank uplift (see Chapter 3, Section 3.8.10 and 3.9).
uct is kept dry and not contaminated with rainwater. The American Code is based on the tank operating at at-
mospheric pressure, or that internal pressure which
equates to the weight ofthe %6" (4.76 mm) roof plates i.e.4
5.2 Fixed roofs mbar. The exception to this is covered by Appendix F of
the Code which gives the requirements fortanks operating
5.2.1 Design basis at up lo 2Y.lbslin'.g (172 mbat).
c) Exceptiona loadings. These may includethe possibilityof
The basic design parameters are laid down in the most widely an internal explosion or sudden overpressure due to ab-
used Codes BS 2654, API 650 and the proposed European normal causes. For such cases it is usualto specify a fran-
Code prEN 140'15. There are other national and company spe- gible shell-to-roof joint which fails preferentially to relieve
cific Standards, which may partially supersede or augment the high internal pressure, whilst continuing to contain the
parts ofthese tank Codes, but they are too numerous to be an- stored product. (see Chapter 3, Section 3.8).

114 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 148/296
 5 The design of tank roafs Jixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

5.2.1.2 Design methods ted, by agreement between the tank purchaser and the
manufacturer, provided that this can be justified by special
a) Roof plating procedure tests simulating the actual conflguration io be
Aoart from exceptional circumstances, the minimum roof used on site.
sheet thickness allowable is specified in the Codes.
. Cross bracing shall be provided in the plane of the roof in at
The British Code requires a minimum thickness of 5 mm, least in two bays, i.e. betlveen tvvo pairs of adiacent ratters,
whilst the American Code calls for %6" (4 76 mm). on all roofs more than 15 metres in diameter' Sets of bracing
Apparently these minimum thicknesses are based on shall be equi-spaced around the tank circumference
N.E.PA. 78 Lightning Protection Code which states " - . Vertical bracing on trussed roof structures only shallbe pro-
steel sheet less than %6" (4.76mm) in thickness may be
vided in an approximate vertical plane between trusses as
punctured by severe strikes and shall not be relied upon follows:
as protection for direct lightning strikes".
For roofs more than 15 metres diameter 1 nng
b) Roof framing
For roofs more ihan 25 metres diameter 2 rings.
The British Code refers to the Structural Steel design -
Code BS 449. These ring(s) shall be at the end of the trusses which are
The American Code contains its own rules taken from vari- near to the tank shell.
ous publications (References 5.3, 5 4 and 5 5)- From the American Code
5.2.1.3 Code requirements . Root plates shall be attached to the top angle of the tank by
The rules for designing and detailing tank roofs are covered a continuous fillet weld on the top side only Figure 3-3Ain
fully in both the British and American Codes and these should the Code showsthe roofplates lapsto bethe same configu-
be followed carefully during the design process Some of the ration as tiles on the roof of a building. i.e. opposite to the
major requirements are given here as follows: British Code.
From the British Code internal and external structural members shall have a
. All
minimum nominal thickness of 4 3 mm (0.17") in any com-
. The spacing of roof plate supporting members for cone roof
ponent. The method of providing a corrosion allowance, if
tanks shall be such that the span between them does not
any, for the structural members shall be a matter of agree-
exceed 2 metres where one edge of the panel is supported
ment bet\, r'een the purchaser and the manufacturer
by the top curb angle. Where this support is not present. the
span shall not exceed '1.7 metres . The minimum thickness ofany structuralmember, including
. For dome roofs this spacing may be increased as agreed any corrosion allowance on the exposed side or sides, shall
not be less Lhan 6mm (0.25"), for columns kneebracesand
between the tank purchaser and the manufacturef.
beams or stiffeners which by design normally resist axial
. The roof plating shall be continuously welded to the shell compressive forces, or 4.3 mm (0.17") fof any other struc-
curD an9le. tural member.
. For tanks exceeding 12.5 metres diameter, roof plates shall . Roof plates ol supported cone roofs shall not be attached to
not be aitached to the roof supporting structure the supporting members.
. The roof plates are normally lapped by a minimum of 25mm the plates may be stiffened by sec-
and fillet-welded on the top side only. The laps should be ar- . tions types to
For allwelded of the
roofs,
plates but may not be stiffened by sec-
ranged such that the lower edge of the uppermost plate ls tions welded to the supporiing rafters or girders
beneath the upper edge ofthe lower plate (the opposite way
to that of tiles on the roof of a building) in order to minimise . When the purchaser specifies lateral loads that will be im-
the possibility of moisture due to condensation on the un- posed on ihe roofsupporting columns (when used)' the col-
derside of the plates entering the internal lap joint. umns must be proportioned to meet the requirements for
combined axial compression and bending as specified in
Note; The American Code shows the laps the opposite wayto
the Code.
this, presumably to allow the roof to shed rain water.
Depending upon the stored product it may be some- . The slope of supported cone roofs shall be 19 mm in 300
times necessary for the lap joint to be welded on both mm (%" in '12") or greater if specified by the purchasef.
sides or made as a butijoint.
Note: This slope of 1 in '16 is fairly flat and is usually used for
. The slope of cone roofs is generally 1 :5 or for column-sup- column-supported roofs. Roofs which are supported by
ported roofs 1;16. The radil of domed roofs is generally be- radial rafters or trusses and without internal columns,
tv,r'een 0.8D and 1.5D, where D is the tank diameter' normally have a slope of 1 in 6 (the maximum allowable
to this Code for a frangible roof). This is because the
. The minimum thickness for structural sections shall be steeper slope favours the production of a more eco-
5mm (excluding any corrosion allowance) but this does not nomical rafter or truss design.
apply to the webs of rolled steel joists channels or
packings, or to structures where special provisions against . Main roofsupporting members of column-su pported roofs,
corrosion have been made. which are in contact with the roof plates, (excluding radial
rafters carrying dead loads only) shall be considered as re-
. Roof plate joints are considered to have the following joint ceiving no lateral support from the roof plates and shall be
efficiencies: laterally braced, if necessa ry by other acceptable methods
1.0 for butt-welded ioints. Radial rafters carrying dead loads plus live loads, which are
in contaci with the roof plates applying the live loading to the
0.35 for lapped joints with fillet welds on one side.
rafters. may be considered as receiving adeqdate lateral
0.5 for lapped joints with fillet welds on both sides suppo( frorn the friction between the roof plates and the
. compression flanges ofthe rafters, with the following excep-
The allowable stress shall be taken as % of the minimum
tlons;
specified yield strength of thejoint
roof plate material. In special
circumstances, increases in efficiency may be permit- - a) Trusses and open web joints used as rafters.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 115

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 149/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

- b) Rafters with a nominal depth greaterthan 375mm. The American Code is more specific and says that the slope
shall be within the range of 9.5" to 37' which is (1 in 6, to 1 in
- c) Rafrers with a slope greater than 'l in6.
1.333).
. Rafrers for suppoded cone roofs shall be spaced so that in
5.4.1.2 Thickness of roof plating This is
the outer ring, their centres are not morethan 0.6r metres = thicknes
1.885 metres (2rft = 6.283ft) apart, measured along the cir-
The Brjtish Code states that the minimum thickness of roof plat-
ing shall be 5 mm, excluding any corrosion allowance. The roo
cumference ofthe iank. Spacing on inner rings shall not be sure du
greaterthan 1.7 metres (5%ft). When specified bythe pur- TheAmerican Code statesthat self-supporting cone roofs shall ferring t
chaser, for tanks located in areas subject to earthquakes, have a minimum thickness of 5 mm (216") and a maximum of sphere
19mm (%") diameter tie rods (or their equivalent) shall be
placed between the rafters in the outer rings. These tie rods
12.5 mm (%") excluding any corrosion allowance. The buc
5.4.1.3 Self-supporting cone (or membrane roofl
may be omitted if l-sections or H-sections are used as raf-
ters. The design loadings for self-supporting cone roofs are sus-
tained entirely bythe roofsheeting itself, withoutany supporting
. Self-supporting cone roofs shallhave a minimum thickness structure. Generally this type of roof is confined to smaller
of 5 mm (%d') and a maximum of 12.5 mm (%") exctuding tanks, up to say 8 metres diameter. wnere:
any conosion allowance.
The lack of an internal structure makes the roof ideal for: q
. The slope of self-supporting roofs shall be within the range
of 9.5'to37' which is (1: 6to 1: 1.333). The method of cal-
. Tanks which require the application of an internal lining, fd
culating the required thickness for a self-supporting cone where a internal structure would hamperthe lining process.
E
roof is described later in Section 5.4.1.4. . Tanks where a high internal corrosion allowance is speci-
. The requirements for roofs in the draft form of European fied, thus avoiding the requirementfor a support structure in tro

Code for prEN 14015 - 1, are basically the same as that very thick steel sections.

given in BS 2654. . Tanks where siainless steel roof materials are required. Using a
There is a limited range of stainless steelsections which are
available and therefore a membrane roofobviatesthe need
5.3 Various forms of fixed roofs for any support structure.
Figure 5.2 summarises the various types offixed roofs in com-
5.4.1.4 British Code Design requirements
mon use. - This ex
Equations 5.1 and 5.4 for the thickness of a self-supporting allow f
cone roof, are based on work done by the late Professor A.S. The B
5.4 Roofs with no supporting structure Tooth, see Reference 5. t and are derived as follows: equatic
The membrane stress for a conical roof under internal pressure This th
5.4.1 Cone roofs occurs in the circumferential direction at the roof-to-shell iunc- pressu
tion and is given by:
The British Code states that the slope of the roof shall comply pe
with the requirements specified by the purchaser or shall be - or^
1in5. k.sino
Reana
and therefore:
p.r"
Roofs with no supoortino structures \c -.T.n.stn u equ 5.1
a ) Cone roofs
where: where
i ) Self supporting cone
ii ) Folded plate petal type f = membrane stress (N/mm,) Pe

p = internal pressure (mbar) ro

b ) Dome roofs
rs = radius oftank shell (m) E
i ) Simple dome
t," = thickness of cone roof plating (m) Writin
ii ) Umbrella type
0 = the slope of the roof measured from the hori-
\"
zontal (degrees)
Roofs with suDDortino slructures joint efilciency. For self-supporting roofs the
n =
a ) Cone roofs BS Code only allows butt-welded roof joints k
where q = 1.0, or double lap-welded joints
i) Radial rafter type whereq=05 For a
ii ) Trussed frame type joins
iii ) Extemally framed type To exDress eouation 5.1 in terms ofthe radius ofthe cone roof
'r"' at the point where it meets the shell, instead of the shell ra-
dius 'r"', it can be seen from Figure 5.3 that:
b ) Dome roofs

i) Radial rafter type

sin 6=-: Subs
rc
AS:
ii ) Extemally framed type
iii ) Other types Substituting for'sin e' in equation 5.1 then:
L
3 Column-suoported roofs
. pr"
equ 5.2
.q
'" f
This equation has to be adjusted to accept the varying units as The
Figure 5.2 Va ous types of Uxed roofs follows: equa

116 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 150/296
 5 The design of tank roofs - fixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

. Dr^ 103 pr.

I=" equ 5.3
"" td.t.r 1o.f .rl
This is the equation which is given in the British Code for the
thickrress of unsupported cone roofs.
The roof must also be checked to withstand the external pres-
sure duetothe roofloading andvacuum. This isachieved byre-
ferring to the classical theory for buckling pressure for a perfect
sphere and adapting this for the cone roof.
The buckling pressure for a perfect sphere is
2 E.\o' equ 5.4 Figure 5.3 Equation 5.1 dedvation
,'2
dome roofs simply by inserting the relevantvalue forthe roof ra-
where: dius.
q' = the buckling pressure (mbar) 5.4.1.5 American Code Design requirements
-
rd = the radius ofthe sphere (m) Self-supporting cone roofs shallhave a minimum thickness of5
E mm (%6") and a maximum of '12.5 mm (%") excluding anycorro-
= Young's Modulus (N/mm'z)
sion allowance.
t,a = the thickness of the roof plate (m)
The slope of self-supporting roofs shall be within the range of
v = Poisson's ratio 9.5'to 37" which is (1 :6 to 1 : 1.333).
Using a value of0.3 for Poisson's ratio the equation becomes: The API 650 Code is based on tanks working at atmospheric
with cone
1.21.E.U2 pressure section
in which self-supporting
9. = equ 5.5 and the
roofs (Section 3.10.5, deals therefore,
the Code) only deals with
rd the calculation for external pressure considerations. For cases
-jg
wheretianks have to be designedfor internal pressures, the de-
This expression only applies to a perfect sphere and does not
signer is required to refer to Appendix F, Clause F.7.3 of the
allow for imperfections in fabrication or for a factor of safety.
Code, which in turn refers to API 620 for such designs.
The British Code applied a factor of approximately 20 to
equation 5.5. For external pressures the theory for buckling given above in
equation 5.7 applies, exceptthat in the American Code the fol-
This then gives an equation for the safe allowable external
lowing values are assumed:
pressure'Pe':
. Thevalueof Young's Modulus E =29x 106 lbiin"(200,000
e. _ 0.0625. E. d'? equ 5.6 N/mm')
fo'
. The external roof loading is taken as, a live load of 25 lb/ftl
Rearranging this equation for trd we obhin: (1.2 kN/m') plus a dead load of 20 lb/ft'? (approximately
of (12.5 mm) roof
I P*'
t =,t/ffi=+'. 1.0 kN/m'),
plating - thewhich is thethickness
maximum self-weight %"
allowed.
Also the American Code uses the tank diameter ratherthan the
wnere:: roof radius in its equation.

Pe = allowable safe external pressure (kN/m'?)

rd = spherical radius ofthe dome (m)
E = Young's Modulus (N/mm'?)
AS:
Writing the equation for these unib gives:
t. =Dl2
td =4 1000 rd
ano:
Pe =2.2 kNf m2 and E = 200,000 kN/m'?

k=4ordF equ 5.7 Then equation 5.8 becomes:

Fora cone roofiank'rd'is the radius atthe pointwhere the roof , 4O.O r1o.Z2
joinsthe shell and is giventhe notation'rc'andfrom Figure5.3: '' =
2€in o12oo,ooo
r-
'"-sinO *\"- 0.20976.D
Substituting for'rd'in equation 5.7 gives 't"'for cone rooftanks "ine
AS: .D
k" = equ 5.9
4.8 sin
,'" =ao.r. @
o_

equ 5.8
singl/ e wnere:
t," shall not be iessthan 5 mm, excluding corrosion allowance. D is in metres

The form of this equation given in the British Code is that of t.can onlybe a minimum of 5mm, and a maximum of 12.5 mm,
corrosion allowance.
eouation 5.7. as in this form it can be used for both cone and excluding

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 117

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 151/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

thickness requirements, but the thickness of the roof plates

shallnot be less than 5 mm(/;')when so designed bythe man-
ufacturer, subject to the approval of the purchase/'.
This means lhat a membrane roofwhose thickness calculates
to be morethan the maximum allowableof 12.5 mm (y."\ can be
re-designed by other means to allow for the inclusion of stiffen-
ers which are welded to the roof plates. Because storage tanks
are generally designed for small intemal pressures, the thick-
ness ofthe unsupported roof is usuallydetermined bythe exter-
nal, rather than the internal Dressure to which the tank is sub.
jected.
5.4.1.6 Folded plate type cone roof
This type of construction was originally devised by the Shell In-
Equation 5.9 is given in the American Code.
ternational Petroleum Company and is included in its lank De-
Note: When the sum ofthe live and dead loads exceeds 2.2 sign and Engineeing Practice Manual.
kN/m'?, the minimum thickness shall be increased by For this type of roof, illustrated in Figure 5.4, one edge of each
the following ratio: ofthe radial roof plate panels is flanged into the form of a chan-
live load +dead load nel section to form an integral supporting structure. This type of
roof construction is limited by the British Code to tanks up to
12.5 metres diameter.
The American Code also states that: "Self-supporting plate
- are stiffened byroofs,
to the American Code, whose roof plates sec- Normally
where the interiorsurface
a smooth folds are internal,
is required for specific
butforthe cases
application of
tions welded to the plates need not conform to the minimum an internal lining, the petals can be externalto the tank.

1E:-,..re
q:-6"**y;tr '--1 | ,,

w-"--
{
".*,ono-^
Temporary erec{lon bolt - r€fiove bsfore
lank 90€3 into service

Roof blate-to-shell connection Sec{ion B - B

:l

Part plan ot radial .oof plates

Figure 5.4 Folded plale type cone roof design

118 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 152/296
 5 The design of tank roofs - frxed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

DESIGN FOR A FOLDED PLATE PETAL CONE ROOF,

DESIGNED TO Bss 4,10 & 'FoRMULAS FOR STRESS
&''STRAIN" sth EDITION BY ROARK & YOUNG.

TANK DIA, 12.5 m

ROOF SLOPE 1in? 1in5

No. oF PETALS 32

MAT'I. TYPE BS EN 10025 5275

YIELD or 1% PRooF STRESS 275 Nlmm2

PTATE THKS. 5mm

CORR. ALLOWANCE 0mm
DESTGN PLATE THKS. ( SEE FOLDED SECTION BELOW ) 5mm
O.D. OF ROOF PLATING : 12500 + ( 2x 25mm) LAPS OVER SHELL 12550 mm

SLOPE LENGTH OF CON E ROOF (lncl. 25mm lap over Shell) 6399 mm

LENGTH OF FOLDED SECTION 5701 mm

FLANGE IVDTH OF FOLDED PLATE 75 mm
WEB DEPTH OF FOLDED PLATE 150 mm
OVERALL O.D. OF CENTRE CROIAN PLATE '1344 mm

O.D. OF CRO\AN RING WEB PLATE 850 mm

GAP BETWEEN LOWER RAFTER FLANGES 59.5 mm O.K;
HEIGHT OF CROVVN RING WEB PLATE 125 mm
THKS. OF CROW{ RING PLATING 10 mm
DESIGN THKS. OF CRO\'IN PLATING 10 mm
SUPERIMPOSED LOAD 1.2 ld'Um'
INSULATIoN ( IFANY) (0.25kN/m' ) 0lf.l/m2

TOTAL LOAD = ROOF PLATING 48-51 kN

+ ROOF FOLDS 15.80 kN (Conoded)
+ CROVIN RING 2.33 kN

+ |NSULc,T|ON 0kN
+ S'MPOSED LOAD '147.26 kN

TOTAL LOAD 213.91 kN

LOAD PER PETAL "Q" 213.91KN / 32 PETALS 6.58 kN

REACTIoN AT CROI N " Rb" = 1&d'4" 2.23 kN

CoMPN. lN FOLD "P':Rb / dn thda 11.37 kN

Figure 5.5 Design example br blded platE petal cone roof - page ,

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPiIENT 119

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 153/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

SECTION OF FOLDED ROOF PETAL

EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTHS

C.S.A, OF FOLD 'A" 1450 mm2
SECOND M.O.A. OF FOLD '1" s087083.3 mm4
SECTION MODULUS '|z"=lly 87827.8 mm3

RAD of GYRATIoN "Rx){' 59.2 mm

SLENDERNESS RATIO " L/tuo(" = 6399/59.2= 108.0
RATIO "D/T" 30
MAX BENDING MNT. = 0.128.Q*L kNm
2
MAX. BENDING STRESS Fbc: B.M./Z 80.7 Nlmm
ALL'BL BEND'G STRESS "Pbc" N/mm'? 117 BS 449 Table 3a
2
MAX. COI\iPRESStVE STRESS Fc=PrrA Nlmm
ALL'BL COMPR. STRESS "PC' N/rnm' BS 449 Table 17a
Fbc/Pbc + Fc/Pc =< 1.0 0.8 ACCEPT
DEFLEcTIoN =( 0.01304*q"L^3Y E* I 2t.7 ACCEPT
ALLOWABLE DEFLn. From Table 5 BS 5950: Part 1 = L I 200 mm

CROWN RING DESIGN FROM :

ROARK sth EDITION TABLE 17-7

2 x.c =ANGLE B'TWEEN RAFTERS 1 '1 .25 DEGREES
oc = 1/2 ANGLE B'TWEEN RAFTERS 5.(lI5 UE(jKEE:'
1/a = 380/2Pf Alpha 't0.'t86 RADTANS
'llsin d 10.242
'lffan d: 10.153
HORIZ. LOAD ON RING 'H"= P cois 0 11.14S kN

Figure 5.5 Design example for folded plate petal cone rcol - page 2

'I20 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 154/296
 5 The design of tank roofs - fixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

TYPICAL DETAIL OF CRO \4{ RING.

-
ffir
o.D. OF cRo\AN RING WEB = 850 /
O.D. OF CROWN PLATE =

PROPERTIES OF RING :

RADIUS OF RING 'R' 425 mm

WIDTH oF RING 16*THICKNESS 160 mm

=
C.S.A. OF THIS ANNULAR RING '4" 1600 mm2

SECOND M.O,A.ON AXIS 'XX' PERP.TO "H" 3413333.33 mm'

sEcTloN MODULUS Z=lly 42666.67 mm'

MOMENT BETWEEN FORCES ''H" iS :

Mo=H"R/2('llsin .c - 1/.c) 54782.23 Nmm

COMPRESSIoN lN RING is:
No = H/z{1/sin 56866.15 N
"c)
.1.2g N/mm 2
Mo lZ =
No/A =
35.54 N/mm2

TOTAL COMP. STRESS IN RING iS :

Mo/Z+No/A= 36.83 N/mm'

ALLOWABLE STRESS = 2/3 of YIELD = 1g3.33 N/mm2
COMP. STRESS < ALLOWABLE ? YES ACCEPT

MOMENT AT FORCES "H" iS :

[,li=H*Rl2(1i"c - 1/ tan "c) 77572.00 Nmm

TENSION IN RING iS:
Ni= H/2(t/tan .c) 58592.33 N
2
MilZ= 1.82 N/mm

Ni/A= N/mm I

ToTAL TENSILE STRESS lN RING is:

2
Mi/Z + Ni /A= 37.15 N/mm
2
ALLOWABLE STRESS = 2/3 OfYIELD 183.33 N/mm

TENSILE STRESS < ALLOWABLE ? YES ACCEPT

THE DESIGN OF THE ROOF IS ACCEPTED

Figure 5.5 Design example for folded plate petal cone roof - page 3

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 121

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 155/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

A design example for this type of roof is given in Figure 5.5. td = thickness of the domed roof plating (mm)
(not less than 5mm excluding corrosion allov.
5.4.2 Dome roofs ance)
Pe = allowable safe external pressure (kN/m,)
The British Code states that the spherical radius of such roofs
should be within the range of 0.8 xtank diameterto 1 .5 x tank d rd = spherical radius ofthe dome (m)
ameter. However, the Code does allow the tank purchaser to (generally 0.8.D to 1.5.D)
specify a radius to suit his requirements. The American Code is E = Young's Modulus (N/mm,)
slightly different, and gives the range as 0.8 x tank diameter
(unless otherwise specified by the purchaser) up to a maximum 5.4.2.4 American Code - Design requirements
of 1.2 x tank diameter. Equation 5.7 is used to give the thickness for an unsupporte:
5.4.2.1 Simple dome dome roof and as previously for the cone roof, the Americ€-
Code builds the following consbnt values into the equation:
This involves the use of spherically-pressed plates, which are
expensive to produce. This type of roof is usually confined to . The value ofYoung's Modulus
small, high pressure tanks, or for tanks where internal linings, E = 29 x '10 lb/in' (200,000 N/mm,)
and an internal corrosion allowance or stainless steel materials
are required.
. The external roof loading is taken as, a live load of25 lb/t.
(1.2 kN/m'z) plus a dead load of20lbfft, (approximatety 1.:
5.4.2.2 Umbrella dome kN/m'?), which is the self-weightof %" (12.5 mm) roof platin3
This is a cheaperversion ofthe simple dome and again is gen- - the maximum thickness allowed.
erally used only on small diameter tanks. The roof petal plates Equation 5.7 then becomes:
in this case are rolled in the radial direction only and when they
are assembled the appearance ofthe roofis Iike thatofan um-
=40 ro
brella - hence the name. (See Figure 5.6.) la
5.4.2.3 British Code Design requirements
- .rr
The membrane stress in a spherical shell is given by the stan-
dard expression: " 2.4

p ro This equation is given in the American Code.

f= equ5.10
As for the unsupported cone roof, the following applies to un-
supported dome roofs:
where:
When the sum of the live and dead loads exceeds 2.2 kN/m,.
P internal pressure (mbar) the minimum thickness shall be increased bythe following ratio:

fd spherical radius (m)

td = thickness of the domed roof plating (mm)

Rearranging for trd then: The American Code also states that:

' -Ph equ 5.11

"Self-supporting roofs, whose roof plates are stiffened by sec-
tions welded to the plates, need not conlorm to the minimum
As wasthe case for the selfsupported cone roof, the Code uses thickness requirements, but the thickness of the roof plates
shallnot be less than 5 mm (/*")when so designed bythe man-
the same joint efficiencies n as follows:
ufacturer, subject to the approval of the purchaser."
n = 1.0 for butfwelded joints
Observations on the unsupported cone and dome roof
= 0.35 for lapped joints with fillet welds on one thickness equations
stde. 1) By comparing equation 5.3 for the cone roof
= 0.5 for lapped joints with flllet welds on both
rt" - Pr"
S dCS 1o.f .t1
Rationalising the units, the equation becomes:
wlth equation 5.12 for the domed roof
pxrox103
1t x2 xf xn . P r,r

. ph
'" zo. t. n
-" 20. f.1
equ 5.'12 itcan be seen that for a given roof construction, roof radius and
internal pressure then the thickness of a cone roof is twice that
This is the form ofequation which is found in the British Code for for a dome roof.
the thickness of a spherjcal roof under pressure.
2) By comparing the expression for the stress in a cylinder 5
The roof must also be checked to withstand the external pres- from equation 4.6 f
sure due to the roofloading and vacuum and by reference to the
previous equations 5.4, 5.5, 5.6 and 5.7, which are all based on
. DXD
the theory for a domed roof , it can be seen from equation 5.7 2xI
that:
with the expression for the stress in a spherical roof from 2
10 Pe equation 5.10
to =40 ro E
. Pr"
where:

122 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 156/296
 5 The design of tank toofs - frxed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Root olat€a rcllod in

thi8 direc{on only

Figure 5.6 Umbrella type domg roof

then it can be seen, that for a @nstant thickness shell and 5.5.1.1 Radial rafter type
spherical roof, and hence equating 't'and'tid'
pxD_pxrd This type of roof is supported by a radial rafter framework com-
posed of structural sections. lt is illustrated in plan form in Fig-
2xl 2xI ure 5.7.
and for this condition then, D = rd
These structures are usually confined to tanks with diameters
Then fora dome roofthickness to be the same as that ofthe top
less than 15 metres.
course ofshell plating, the radius of the dome is equalto the di-
ameter of the tank.
5.5.t.2 Design example
The American Code adopted this approach for setting the limits
for the maximum and minimum radiifordomed roofs but allows One method of designing such a structure using the British
a t20% variation thus giving the range for roof radii to be: Codes is as follo\ /s:
ro = 0.8.D to 1.2.D
Assume a bnk diameter of 12.5 m
which has been given earlier.
No. of main rafters R1 = 8
5.5 Roofs wlth supporting structures, supported
from the tank shell No. of secondary rafters R2 = 16

5.5.1 Cone roofg

Superimposed load = 1200 N/m'z

The usual slope for this type of roof is 1 in 5 for the Britjsh Code Dead load (structure and roof plating) = 740 N/m'?
and 1 in 6 for the tunerican Code. Ljnless the internal pressure (Derived from experience)
dictates otheMise it is usualforthe roof plating to be smm (/;')
thickand is single lapweldedonthe topside. The Codes do not Total loading = 1940 N/m'?
permit the roof plating to be attached to the supporting frame-
work. Roof slope is 1 in 5.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPiIENT 123

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 157/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

Section A.A

:-E

af,
te

:-7--Tl^
-
a
Se
>a
S
0 0.5 m

Pad plan ofroof{raming

one bay ot elght R

T
F
&

Figu€ 5.7 Plan arrangement oi radial rafter type cone roof structure

124 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 158/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 5 The design of tank rcoE - fixed

The 102 x 51 R.S.C. as selected is therefore accephble.

Purlin:
P = Ra+ (Yz xArea Ex 1940)
= 4403.8+(0.245x1940)
= 4879.1 N

=--
LA79 1
Rc=Rd =2439.55N

Bending moment
M=2439.55 x 0.58 = 1414.94Nm
Try using a 102 x 51 R.S.C.
From the Section tables Zxx = 40.89cm3
The loading diagram is configured as shown. Bending stress
The Purlin length is such that the main rafters at this point are
_ _ 14'14.94 x'103
= 34.60N/mm,
1.7m apart.
Z 40.89 x 10'
The roof load is apportioned to the structural members byspli
From BS 449Table 2 the allowablebending stress is 180 N/mm
ting the surface of the roof into panels. This is at the discretion
of each individualdesigner and in this case, the method shown The 102 x 51 R.S.C. as selected is therefore acceptable.
above has been adopted. These areas are calculated using Main rafrer R1:
geometrical methods and in this case are found to be:
The loading diagram for this rafrer is as follows:
Area A 1 x 4-50 = 4.50m2
B 2 x 4.54 = 9.08m2
C 2 x 0.045 = 0.09m'
D 1 x 0.82 = O.82 m'

E 2 x 0.245 = 0.49m'z
F I x 0.36 - 0.36 m,
15.34 m2
Check the sector area = /u x nl4 x'12.52 = 15-34 m'z O.K.
Secondary rafrer R2:
Plan length of rafter is found to be 4.18 m
Slope length of rafter is
tan g = 5 =0.2 = 11.31' and sin 0 = 0.1961
xaft = 4.2lsm
^@lE Pl = (2 x P) + (Area C x 1940)
Load on rafter = (2 x 4879.1) + (0.09 x 1940) 9932.80 N
= (/z xAreaB x 1940) = 4.54 x 1940 = 8807.6 N 1940=
Reactions at ends of rafter Ra and Rb P2 =Area
Q1 Fi 0.36x 1940 698.40 N
= Area Ax 1940 = 4.50 x 't940 8730.00 N
= 88076i2 = 4403.8 N
Q2 = Area D x 1940 = 0.82 x 1940 1590.80 N
Bending moment in rafrer
20952.0 N
^. W.L 8807.6 x 4.263=+oJ3.35
,^- Nm
88 Taking momenb about Re

Try using a 102 x 51 R.S.C. (Ql x 1.672) + (Pl x 3.344) +

From the Section tables Zxx = 40.89cm3
(Q2x4.4545) +(P2x5.565) = Rf x 5.565

Bending stress (8730 x L672) + (9932.8 x 3.344) +

M 4693.35 x 103 .,, -^ .,rr / mm2 (1590.8x 4.4545) + (698.4x5.565)= Rfx5.565
= r r+.ro
Z 40.89 x 10'
1459.66 + 33215.28+7086.22 + 3886.60 = Rfx 5.565
From
'180
BS 449 Table 2 the allowable bendino stress is
N/mm2 58784.66= Rfx5.565

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPIIENT 125

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 159/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

qATA' AA
Rf = ::j-:--:-:: = 10563.3 N c
c.coc
TerE
Re =20952.0 -10563.3 = 10388.7N Design the Crowo Ring using Roark sth Edition
Note: The compressive stress transmitted to the shell by this "Formulas for Stress and Strain" - Table 17-7
load shall be minimised by mounting the rafrer fixing Number of l\rain rafrers conneqted to the Crown nng :8 From
bracket on to a doubler plate welded to the shell.
170
The maximum bending moment is at position p1.
The
Taking moments about P1 TIE
(Re x 3.344) - (Q1 x '1 .672) Ek
(E€IO
(10388.7 x 3.344) - (8730 x 1.672) 7&
srnF
= 34739.8'l-14596.56 ail
= 20143.25 Nm The
.Errts
The compressive force C in the rafter is found as follows:
ti-s,r
C = Rflsin 0
Ttis
= 10563.3/0.1961 5,10
TEXI
= 53862.47 N
ctcu
Try a 203 x 76 R.S.C. s-p9
From the Section tables: Th€
Yite
C.S.A. = 3034 mm,
z = 192 x 10s mm3

= 80.2 mm
D/T = 18.2
Maximum slope length of rafrer between fixing poinb
L =3.344m x .rEl5 = 3.41m
L 3410 .^
=,to
r- 80.2

From BS 449, the allowable stresses are:

From Table 3a the allowable bending stress
2xc = AnSle Belw€€n Rane6 45.00 degf€
pbc = 180 N/mm, a = 1i2 Aigle Benven Rari.B 22.50 degr€
2.55 |ldiffi
From Table l7a the allowable compressive stress 2.61
2.41
pc = 148 N/mm, fbdz. L@d on RlrB'Ff = C x ..s 6 52.42 |d

The actual bending stress c.sA. ol corod6d qoM Ring A - 44&.@ mB?
Posilion ot Yyy .xb froh ou 6r fa@ of nng = 40.51 mm
.. M --:-j-j:j=:ii
fbc= 20143.25 x1O3
l: Mom€nt of Inonta n Axis ltro" c€nkoki Itry= 7zlEl,0l6,10 m'

Z = 192 x'l0r = 104.91N/mm, zw=

83_49 mm
83675.e1 mf
tW- 41.25 nm
The actual compressive stress Radius ol6oro<l€d Crorn Ring R= 645.00 mni

c 47 ilomnt b€t0*n Fo@E "tf b 'l'lb'

l/b: (HxR/4x(i/3h c - 1/q) 1205697€9 N

fc=c.s.a. =99qq2
3034 = 177sN6m' Compeion tr Rjng is'No'= Haz (1/:tn a) 6912.66 N
14,41 Nmml
':: + must 15.64 M|nni
pDc -"
BS 449 states that not be more than 1.0 Tot l Comp, Slllss ln Rhg = MdZ + No/A - 3O.@ N/mif
pc Alldable Design Stlgs = 1e3.330 lgnnf
1il,441 ls ToblCoftp- stsss< AlloMble D€slgn Str€$? Y6 acc6pt
'l 1775
I + MA=058+0.12=07< 1.0 O.K.
180 irom€n at Forc$'|r ls 'Mf
Mi= (Hx Rl A x (1/AhtE - l/ bn -) ?3275.81 N
To3bn in Rit€ is'Nr= E2(1/ t n c) 6375934 N
The 203 x 76 R.S.C. as selected is therefore accephble. Matz. 2E.@ lvrn|lf
Bracing 81: Total T€clon in Rlng = M'Z + NUA :
AIl. rabl6 O6ign SI|B = 143.3 lvmrn'
The load Bl in the bracing is found using Lami's theorem: ls Tobl Tensih Str€€s -< Allomb. D6i r Sb.$?
I}E desisn or f|€ Arown flE b a@d€d
sin675'
B1=Cx Itri. c@del6 oE & ign of ii. .oof .t ucilB
sin45"

B't = 5J862.41 x o'9238 = 70369.sg r\

o.7071
Try using a 80 x 80 xSAngle. Figure 5.8 Crown ring design example using Roark s method

126 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 160/296
 5 The design of tank raofs lixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

C.S.A. = 1230 mm"

€nsile stress in the bracing
70369 33
= =
p7r.'
57.2
1230

=rom BS 449 Table 19 the allowable iensile stress is

i 70 N/mm'
Ihe 80 x 80 x 8 Angle is thefefore acceptable.
-ihe
weight of this structure together with the 5 mm roof plating
,vorks out to be around
lead load of 640 N/m'of 8000kgorsay78500N.Thisgivesa
roof area. This is less than the figure of
740 N/m'assumed for design purposes and the design as-
sumption is therefore acceptable.
5.5.'1.3 Central crown ring
The design of the crown ring by Roark's method is illustrated
JSing the example set out in Figure 5.8.
5.5.1.4 Trussed frame type
This type of supporting structure, shown in Figures 5.9 and
5.'10. takes the form of a series of radial trusses, generally
made up from steel angle sections. Between these trusses are
circumferentially arranged members providing stability and
support for the roof plating. Figure 5.10 A 39 meife irussed i€me type struciure under conslrucllon
Coutlesy of l",lcTay
The British Code requiresthat verticalring bracing shallbe pro-
vided under the outer circumferential purlins. This shall be, one ring for roofs over 15 m and up to 25 m diameter and two rings
for roofs over 25 m diameter. Also it requires cross-bracing to
be provided in the plane ofthe roof surface, in at least tur'o bays,
between two pairs of adjacent trusses for roofs over 15 m diam-
eter. These sets of bracings have to be evenly spaced around
the tank circumference and afe to give torsional stability io the
stfucture.
The imporiance of the diagonal bracing members which occur
in most types of roof supporting structures whefe the frame-
work is wlthin the tank and not attached to the roof plating can-
not be overestimated. These rnembers are usually placed in
two or four bays equally spaced within the ffamework and are
often known as wind bracing. Their funct on is to provide the
siructure with some measure of torsional stabiliiy.
Figure 5.11 shows ihe collapsed roof framework of a tank of
some 40 m in diameter which was being constructed in the l\,4id-
dle Easi by Whessoe Heavy Engineering Ltd. The erection
foreman decided that he would construci the roofframework on
a central klng post, but would leave the wind bracing to be fitted
inio the structure at a later date. The king post was removed
and the roof collapsed. The spiral nature ofthe failure is clear to
see.
The roof did not fail immediately, which was fortunate as this
would have resulted in serious injuryto the operatives wiihin the
tank at the time that the central support was removed, but was

Figure 5.11 The collapsed toof ftamework

Figure 5.9 Trussed frame type rcoi Cauftesy af Whessae

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 127

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 161/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

The lower part of the trusses generally protrude down belowthe

level of the top of the tank shell and hence can become sub.
merged in the stored product. In certain circumstances, or for
some corrosive stored products, this may be an undesirable
feature.
5.5.1.5 Design example
These days there are computer-aided design packages avail-
able for structural designers to use, but for this example, the
tried and tested "hand-cranked" method is demonstrated.
The exercise willdemonstrate howthe sizes of the members oi
a 30 m diameter roof structure are calculated.
The arrangement of rafrers and purlins in one of 12 bays of the
structure is shown in Figure 5.13. The three intermediate raf-
Figure 5.12 A view fiom oubide the tank shell when the roof had failed ters per bayare supported attheirouter end bythe shelland by
Courtesy of Whessoe three purlins in the plane ofthe rool The rafters lie on top of the
purlins which in turn transmit the rafter loads to the main
kind enough to wait until they had gone for lunch. Figure 5.12 trusses. The load on the sections of rafrers is determined bydi-
shows a view from outside the tank shellwhichwasforced into a viding the roof sector into panels as shown in Figure 5.13, the
curious, but quite regular shape by the action of the main size ofthese panels is calculated using simple geometric meth-
trusses pulling inwards as the rooffailed. oos.
The American Code does not specifically mention these brac- The numbers in Figures 5.13, represent plan areas in m2
ing requirements, but nevertheless, it is generally thought to be
good practice to include them in roofs of this type. As before:
Superimposed load = 1200 N/m'?
This type of roof is commonly used within the range of 15 m to
60 m diameter. Dead load (structure and roof plating; = 749 Jrl7rz
(Derived from experience)
Total loading = 1940 N/m'?

/e?\el I

$$+Lo

t
c*dD

Figure 5.13 Arrangements of rafters and pudins Th

:1€
:r€
s
=h

sg
H

iJ

OU

Th
T
dr
Figure 5.14 Uniformly distribuled rafter loads and rafie. reactions

128 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 162/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

,t6€4

Spaca diagran of Ausg showiag appli€d loaos

Figure 5.15 Space diagram of truss showing apptied loads

Figure 5.'16 Force diagran

The panel areas can now be converted into loads which act on Draw a line parallelto the slope ofthe main kuss through .b'rep-
the various sectons ofthe rafiers and hence the reactions at resenting member 'b' - l.
their connections to the purlins and the shell can be estiab-
lished. Through point a draw a line parallel with the lower outer mem-
The uniformly distributed loads (U.D.L.S) on rafters and rafter ber'a'- 1. Where these two lines meet is point 1 and the scale
reactions are as shown length of these lines represenb the axial load canied bv mem-
in Figure 5.14. bers 'b'- '1 and 'a'- 1.
The loads transmitted to the main trusses can be worked out
from Figure 5.14 and are found to be as shown on the truss Through point I draw a vertjcal line representing member 1 - 2
space diagram in Figure 5.15. and through pointa drawa line parallelto member,a'-2. Where
Note: these two lines meetgives us point2 and hence the axialloads
The compressive stress transmitted to the shell bv the
load of 92,074 N shalt be minimised bv mountino the in members 1 - 2 and'a' - 2.
rafter fixing bracket on to a doubler plate welded t6 the
This procedure is continued until the diagram is completed as
shell.
shown.
Using BoWs notation method the truss space diagram is let-
tered Ato F and numbered 1 to 9 and a force diagram is pro- By scaling ofithe diagramthe axialloads in allthe members can
duced to a suihble scale. be found.
The force diagram in Figure 5.16 is produced as follows:
The same resulb could be found mathematically using gec.
The loads 'b' to 'c', 'c' to 'd', 'd' to 'e', 'e' to ,f, andf,a'
to are metrical methods but the force diagram gives a good pictorial
drawn to scale down the right-hand side of the diagram. appreciation of the magnitude of the loadings on the various
truss members.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 129

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 163/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

. i.e. 'd' - 5 and 'd' - 6 being the most heavily loaded and 4 - 5 The top boom of the truss I
being the least loaded. The most highly-loaded member in the top boom ofthe truss is t
The BoWs notation method also allows us to establish in which D5 or E5 both at 182,250 N. The length of these members is
direction the forces in the members are acling. 3059.4 mm
h
Take the connection of the outer purlin to the main truss, then Try a double angle section comprising 125 x 75 x 10 angles
from the force diagram. separated by a 10 mm thick connecting gusset plate.
Properties of the compound section:

C.S.A. 3820 mm'

lxx = = 604000 mma
lyy = 3593103 mma
Max Y xx = 82.7 mm
Z )c( = 73035 mm3
. Starting at 'b', follow round the points 'c', 3, 2, 1 and back to tW = 30.67mm
'b'.
D/t = 12.5
The direction ofthe load 'b'-'c'is verticallydownwards, then fol-
lowing round the diagram, the directions of the loads must fol-
\/
low this pattern and are found to be as shown here.
A
F
s
F

s
Compressive stress
This procedure is repeated at eachjoint and the load directions
are established as shown below. A
=182250 =47.7Y1^
3280 '
L 0.7 x 3059.4 .^
r 30.67

From BS 449 Table 17a - Allowable compressive stress

31<-" II t// '4

4J/ett
I, pc = 123 N/mm'?

\f.\ 7{
"l
Worst case U.D.L. on the top boom is on member 81 and is 2 x
5393 N

S = Stlur
Although this worst case U.D.L. does not coincide with the max- s
lcompreislon)
T=Tie (Tension) imum axial compressive load they will be mmbined here to L
prove that the chosen section for the top boom is adequate.
A
Bending moment
The axialload in each memberis given in Figure 5.17, showing
also if the member is a strut or a tie. t- w88
L 2 x5393-x3059'4
- =4,124,836 Nmm
Having found allthe loadings, then suitable section sizes forthe
members can be found using the requiremenE of BS 449. Bending stress

fbc- M - 4'124'836
For expediency, the numbers and sizes of bolts requiredforthe
=56.sN/mm'z
many and various connections in the trusswillnot be calculated
here because, although this is a fairly simple task it is quite
ZY. 73035
labourious. All connections will assume M20 bolB in 22 mm From BS 449 Table 3a -Allowable bending stress = '172 N/mm'
diameter holes.
 9 r IE ru"1 6" less than 1.0 for the selected member
B1 ,135,500
N Stlri 148250 N Tb 'l-2 72500 N strn
pc pbc S
section to be acceptable. L
178.750 N strn 133,5@ N Ir€ 2-3 50,0(n N Tlr
F
D5 1e2:50 N Shrt 174500 N lie 3-4 29.000 N Stri
182250 N stut 165500 t{ 119 +5 11250 N
17-I.I
't23 172 =0.ss.0.33 =0.72 < 1.0 Accept

F8 1€8.500 N Str, A9 147.000 r TE 5{ t82fo }| stu

lf by combining the two worst case loads acting on the top boom
67 21,0q1N 'ns
member, as shown above, the memberwas provedto be inade-
74 22.qn N Stld
&s s6,250 N TL quate, have
would then to
each of the members
be separately analysedmaking
using up
theirthe top.boom
own individ-
ual, axial and U.D.L.s. This can result in the selected section for
Figure 5.17 The axial load in each member the top boom being found to be adequate.

130 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 164/296
 Lr. 9 9:'s : P4@u
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

The normal practice is to have two sets of intermediate 10 mm pc=46N/mm'? fc<pcAccept

packers bolted through the vertical legs of the members, thus
affording the combined member additional rigidity to withstand Strut 7-8
axial load. These packers are equi-spaced betvveen the main L = 3470 mm
bolted connection points as shown:
Axial compressive load = 22,000 N
Compressive stress
22'ooo
fc = = 13.5p7rr'
1626

Lr 3470
21.3
,^^
From Table 3a - Allowable compressive stress
pc = 35N/mm'? fc<pc Accept
All the above struts are acceptable using two 70 x 70 x 6 Angles
back-to-back and separated by a 10 mm gusset plate.
All struts to be fitted with two equi-spaced bolted packers (as
Vertical struts stated above).
All struts to have double-bolted end connections. The bottom boom of the truss
For all struts try using two 70 x 70 x 6 Angles back-to-back and The maximum tensile load in this lower boom is '175,500 N
separated by a 10 mm gusset Plate.
Try using two 70 x 70 x 6 Angles backlo-back and separated by
gyration
From the Section tables the minimum radius of a 10 mm gusset plate.
r = 2.13 cm Gross C.S.A. of the compound section is
C.S.A. = '16.26 cm' 2 x 813 mm' = 1626 mm'?
Strut 1-2 Assume that the ties are bolted with M20 bolts in 22 mm
L = 1200 mm diameter holes.
Axial compressive load = 72,500 N From BS 449 the effective areas of the angle legs are as fol-
lows:
Compressive stress
72'5oo a2 the net area of the unconnected Leg is
fc = = 44.6 N/mm'? .r]'m'
1626 170 - 6 12) x 6= 402

L=-=vl:,
2100 ^^ a1 the net area of the connected leg is
402 - (22 x 6) = 27O mmz
| 21.3
From Table 3a - Allowable compressive stress Then
5al   x27O 1350
pc=84 N/mm' fc<pc Accept
5^1. (5x27o)+402 1752
= 0.77
^2
Strut 34 The effective C.S.A. for each angle is
L = 2557 mm
270 + (0.77 x 4O2) = 579.5 mm'
Axial compressive load = 29,000 N
and for the compound section is therefore '1159 mm'
Compressive stress
The maximum tensile stress in the tie
,o noo
fc = --'--- ='16117tt' 175'5oo
1626 = 1s1 .4 N/rr'
1159
L 2577 ..^ From Table 19 - the allowable stress is 170 N/mm'?
( 21.3
The compound section is therefore acceptable.
From Table 3a
- Allowable compresslve stress
Diagonal ties
pc = 62 N/mm'? fc<pc Accept
The most highly-loaded tie is 2-3 at 50,000 N
Strut 5-6 Try using two 50 x 50 x 6 Angles back{o-back and separated by
a '10 mm gusset plate.
L = 3013 mm
Axial compressive load = 18,250 N GrossC.S.A. of the compound section is2x569 mm'? = 1138
mm2
Compressive stress
Assume that the ties are bolted with M20 bolts in 22 mm
c= '"'-""
1A
'6n =11.2117rr2 diameter holes.
1626
From BS 449 the effective areas of the angle legs are as fol-
L 3013 ,," lows:
( 21.3 a2 the net area ofthe unconnected leg is
(5o 612) x6 =282 mm2
From Table 3a - Allowable compressive stress

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 13'1

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 165/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

al the net area of the connected leg is I

282 - (22 x 6) = 15o mm2 360

Then This factor is to ensure, among other reasons, thatthere willE

no damageto building finishes, which is not a concern whende-
5a1 5x150 _750 signing tank roof structures.
5a1+a2 (5 x 150) +282= 1032 =0.73
BS 5950: Part'l, Table 5 gives severalalternativesforallowab€
The effective C.S.A. for each angle is deflections. In particular it quotes L/360 for beams carryi.-c
plaster or other brittle finishes and also L/200 for all otis
150 + (0.73 x 282) = 355 mm'?
beams.
and for the compound section is therefore The U200 is a more realistic figure for tank roofstructures ar{
this is the factor which will be used.
2 x 355 = 7'10 mm2
Applying this to the above rafter, then the allowable deflectis
The maximum tensile stress in the tie
IS:

= ""'""- = 70 N/mm'z Yl::

710 = 17.0 mm
200
From Table 19 the allowablethe allowable stress is '170 N/mm,
Hence the chosen beam size is acceptable for the stress leve
The compound section is therefore acceptiable. and deflection.
CroYvn ring Purlin No. 4
The central crown ring is designed as for the previous example
using Roark's method. See Figure 5.18,

lntermediate rafters
The longest intermediate rafrer at 3408 mm, is the one at the
centre of the bay, running between the shell and Purlin No.4.
This rafter is also the most heavily-loaded, carrying a total
U.D.L of 1'l,477 N. The design forallthe intermediate lafters will
be based on this worst case.
Loading diagram
The maximum bending moment is given by

Design of diagonal bracing

9474+9330/2 = 14,139N
h

WL 11477 x3408
^^
= 4.9 x 106 Nmm
l,-'-
Try using a 127 x 64 R.S.C.
Z xx = 75.99 cm3
Load in diagonal bracing
lxx = 482.5 cma
tW = 1.88cm = 14,'139+sin 34.056 =25,248 N
D _ 13.8
Tryusing two 80 x 80 xO Angles back-to-backand separated by
t a 10 mm gusset plate.
Bending stress
rr /
^.-.^6
C.S.A.= 1870 mm'
rbc - +
Zo(= 75.99
-* x 10' -64.48 N/mm'?
=--: Min.r = 24.5 mm
L 3408 ^,- Compressive stress
r 13.8
2q
From Table 3a the allowable bending stress pbc is 89 N/mm'? c=--'-'AA- =13.5 N/mm',
1870
The stress in the beam is acceptiable.
Check for deflection. L 3794 ,-^
Deflection is given by | 24.5
5. W. L3 5 x 11477 x34083
From Table 17a - the allowable stress pc = 40 N/mm?
384. E 1 384 x 207,000 x482.5 x ld = 5.9 mm
The allowable deflection given in BS 449 is The member as selected is acceptable.

132 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 166/296
 5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Crown rlng
Central crown ring design using Roarks method

Fa-

Tank dia. 30.00 m

Number of rafler 12.00
Crown ring dia 1175.00 mm
Roof slope 1 in ? 5.00
ComDressive load in rater 168.50 kN
Design stress 183.33 N / mm2

2x < =Angle Between Rafters 30.00 degrees

c( = 1/2 Angle Between Raters 15.00 degrees
1/c( =360 / ( 2Pix o() 3-820 radhns
1/Sin G 3.864
1/Tan o( 3.732
Horiz. Load on Ring "H" = F8 x cos e 165.228 kN
Properties of Ring
C.S.A. of corroded Crown Ring A= 5950.00 mm'
Moment of Inerth on Axis thro' centroid I yy = 9684541.32 mm4
Section Modulus ZW = - 87,106.93 mm3

Radius of Gyration R yy = 40.34 mm

Ring
Radius of Crolrvn R - 561.b{J mm
Moment between Forces "H" is "Mo"
Mo=(HxR/2ix(1/sind - 1/o( ) 213425.88 N
Compression in Ring is "No"= H/2(l^iin c) 319195.68 N
Mo IZ= 24.42 N/mftf
No/A= 53.65 N/mrn'
Total Comp. stress in Ring = MotZ + No/A = 78.07 Nlmm'

ls Total Comp. Stress=<Allowable

AllowableDesign
DesignStress =
Slress? YesN/mm'
183.333 accept
Moment at Forc€s "H" is "Mi"
Mi = ( Hx R/2)x(1/ a - l/Tan .() 4255017.50 N
Tercion in Ring is "Ni"= Hl2ll Mn *) 308319.35 N
MirZ= t|{l.68 N/mm'
Ni/A= 51 .82 Nlnrn?
Total Tension in Ring = Mi/Z + NiiA = 100.50 N/mnf
Allowable Design Stress = 183.33 N/mrn'
ls Total Tengile Stress =< Allowable Design Stress Yes accept
The complele Roof Design is - acoepted

Figure 5.18 Centalcrown ring design calculation using Roark's m€thod

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 133

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 167/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

Beam of Purlin No. 4 L 3459 .,,

| 24.5
0443+6517/2 = 9702N

Bending moment
W.L 9.330 ______:_i
x 3.106 _-_.__
44 =7.244.745Nmm

Try using a '127 x 64 R.S.C.

z xx = /5.9c cm" From Table 17a - the allowable stress oc = 46 N/mm'z
lxx = 482.5 cma The member as selected is acceptable,
tYY = 188cm Beam of Purlin No. 3
n
:=134
t
Bending stress
it -T artrt'rtE
fbc - Zv
'' - "'I11IY
75,990
- 95.3 11/ttr

L 1580 ^.
r 18.8 Bending moment
From Table 3a -the allowable bending stress pbc is 148 N/mm,
.. W.L 6517 x2329 ^-^,
  c. r v+.523 Nmm
The stress in the beam is acceptable. 44
Check for deflection
Try using a 127 x 64 R.S.C.
Deflection is given by F

w.L3 9.330 x 3.'1063 Z xx = 75.99 cm3 T

+e i r- +e *207p00_:t;s2s * 1d
=583 mm
I xx = 482.5 cma
The allowable deflection is:
al nA rYY = 188cm I
:t:: =.15.5 mm n
200 :=138
Hence the chosen beam size is acceptable for the stress level t f
and deflection. T
Bending stress
Purlin No.3 tY

.. M 3.794.523 _^ ^ ..,
toc=-=--cu.U N/mm2
e

Zv. 75,990
I I tA6
r 18.8

FromTable 3a the allowable bending stress pbc is 175 N/mm,

The stress in the beam is acceptable.

Check ior deflection.

Deflection is given by:

Design of diagonal bracing.
w.L3 _ 6517 x 23293 .
Load in diagonal bracing = 9702 + sin 47.67 = 13,124 N _.1.7 mm
48.E.1 48 x207,000 x 482.5 x 1f
Try using two 80 x 80 x 6 Angles back-to-back a nd separated by
a 10 mm gusset plate.
The allowable deflection is
C.S.A. = '1870 mm'?
ta2a ,l ,l
Minimum r' = 24.5 mm :::: = .6 mm
200
Compressive stress
13'123 Hence the chosen beam size is acceptiabte tor tne stress tevel
fc= = 7.9p7..n'
1870 and deflection.

134 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 168/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 5 The design of tank rcots - frxed

Purlin No. 2

2716 N 5886 N 2716 N

6.716 x 1d
Rb - 5659 N
4.471x 1o

The maximum bending moment is atthe centre of purlin and is:

M = (5659 x 1553) -(2716 x 763) = 6,716,119 Nmm
Tryusinga127xMR.S.C.
Zxx = 75.99 cm3
Purlin No. 1
lxx = 482.5 cm4
rYY = 1.88 cm
6128 N

It =1sa I

Bending stress
l\, A 7.t A 110
tT-------T
l< mm j
1s53

fbc = +' "ij-j'rl--:

zn = 75,990 = 88.4 N/mm'?
Maximum bending moment

L 790 ., = WL - --; --- -2.38

.4- = 6'128x1553 ^-- x t06 N /mm
r 18-8
Try using a 102 x 5'l R.S.C.
FromTable 3a -the allowable bending stress pbc is 180 N/mm,
The stress in the beam is acceptable.
Z xx = 40.89 cm3
I xx = 2l7.7cma
Check for deflection.
As the beam is loaded symmetrically, Mohr's area method will rW = 1.48 cm
be used to determine the maximum deflection in the beam. :n 13.3
The deflection measured at Ra, from a tangent at the centre of t =
the deflected beam is equal to:
Bending stress
The first moment of area of the bending moment diagram be-
tween Ra andthe centre ofthe beam, divided bythe modulusof
M = -j:::i:-
..bc = -jj: 2.38x'106 -^ -..,
= 58.2 N/mm'z
elasticityand the second momentofarea ofthe beam section.

Of Delleclton
'lst m.o.a. of B.M.diao.(Ra to centre)
-\ / L 776.5 -^
= :- r 18.3

1st m.o.a.: From Table3a-the allowable bending stress pbc is 180 N/mm"
The stress in the beam is acceptable.
7qo
A=;x4.471x 10' x 527 =93.1 x 1010 The deflection in the beam

_w.L3 6128x1s533
B =763 x4.471 x106 x'1172 = 399.8 x 1010
48Et_ 48 x2O7,OOO x2O7.7 x'td -_""--
""""'
C='i:x2.245x1O8x1299 Allowable deflection is
z- ='111.3x1010
=/ .at mm
Total 'lst m.o.a. of B.M diag. 200
between Ra & C.L = 604.2 x 1010 N/mm, -
Hence the chosen beam size is acceptiable for the stress level
604'2x1010 and deflection.
Deflgct;sn= =6 1 mm
207,000 x482.5 x 1d Cross bracings
Allowable deflection is As mentioned eadier, the British Code requires that cross brac-
ing shallbe provided in the plane ofthis size of foof, to give the
3106
= 15.53 mt structure torsional stability. This bracing shall be in at least two
200 bays of the roof, between two pairs of adjacent rafters.

Hence the chosen beam size is acceptable for the stress level In practice, it has been found that designers have often pro-
and deflection. vided four sets of bracing in 30 metre diameter structures, as

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 135

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 169/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

5.19 Exlernally-framed cone rooi type arangemeni

Figure
this has the advantage of giving added rigidity to the structure 5.5.2 Dome roofs
during the construction of the roof.
5.5.2.1 Radial rafter type
The selection of the section size for these bracings usually re-
lies on the experience ofthe individual designer because there This structure consists of a seies of curved radial steel beam
are no specific loads to work with. Hence the length ofthe brac- sections connected to the shell attheirouter end and to a centre
ing is considered with regard to the sag which is likely to occur crown ring at the centre of the tank. A series of circumferential
due to self-weight, and a suitable angle section is normally cho- rings provide lateral supportfor the beams and cross bracing in
sen against this criteria. the plane ofthe roof is provided in some bays to give the struc-
ture torsional stability. This type of roof can be used in all sizes
Forthe structure designed above a bracing angle section of 70 of tank and has an advantage over the truss type of structure
x 70 x 6 has been chosen. when dealing with tanks over say 50 metres in diameter where
the truss type structure becomes quite massive.

The weight of the finished structure can be calculated and in There is a further advantage because, unlike the truss type
this case it is found to be 24,300 kg. Adding the weight of the structure, the domed structure is completely clear ofthe stored
roof plating, 29,000 kg, to this gives a total of 53,300 kg or product. Also, if an internalfloating cover is to be installed in the
522713 N which gives a overall dead load of 739.5 N/mm" tank, there is no loss of tiank capacity
which equates favourably to the flgure of 740 N/mm' used for
One disadvantage is that this type of roof is not frangible and
oesrgn purposes.
therefore if frangibility is a desirable feature then it can not be
useo.
This concludes the design forthe trussed frame type structure.
Details ofthis type of structure and an illustration showing a roof
5.5.1.6 Externally-framed roofs under construction are given in Figures 5.21 and 5.22 respec-
tively.
This type of supporting structure consists of a series of radial
Figure 5.23 (8 pages, attheend ofthis Chapter, pages 144-
steel sections. The roof oetal plate sections are welded to the '151), provides a typicaldesign calculation forthistype ofstruc-
underside of the lower flange of each beam. The arrangement
ture, using a 39 metre diameter tank as the basis.
is shown in Figure 5.19.
There are also software packages available such as STMD or
The design calculation for this type of structure based on a 15 ANYSIS which enable the complete roof structure to be mod-
metre diameter tank is given in Figure 5.20. elled.

136 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 170/296
 5 The design of tank rcofs - frxed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Tank diameter 15.00 m

Roofdiameter '15.062 m (incl, curb o/lap)
Roofslope 1in? 5.00
RoofHeight 1.506 m
Roofslope Lengh 7.680 m
Shell toD course ftickness 6.00 mm
Roof overlap on to Curb angle 2500
O.D. of central horizontalplate of Cro\Mr ring. (min.=32 500.00 mm
O.D. of central horizontal plate to i.d. of Cro\MI upstand 341.0m mm +100mm, OK
O.D. ofconical Cro\Ml ring. 1757 mm
O.D. of Cro$n ring
upsiand. 1189.00
Minimum hdght of cruvm ring upstand - (can behigher) 1S1
mm
mm
Max. depth of Rafter fxing bracket to suit selected Raft
161 mm
Thicloess of Raffer fixingbracket 1000 mm
Thicloess of Crown dating 10.00 mm
Flange width of Rafter (see below)
76.20 mm
Space between toes of adjacent Rafrers at Cro$m
195.719 mm (>100mm, OK)
Rafter overlap on to cro{yn Ring (usually =>100 mm)100 mm (>100mm, OK)
Gap between Rafter end & Croivn upstand (say 190 mm)
190 mm
Petal plate edge "overlap' ( from centre line of Rater ) 100 mm
Pdal plate edge 'underlap' ( from centre line of Rafter 50 mm

Section at radialjoint in Roof plate.

Underlap

Tan of RoofAngle 0.2000

Sin of RoofAflgle 0.1961
cos of RoofAngle 0.9806
RoofAngle Clheta)
'I 1 .310 degrces
Roofplate steelTlpe CS or SS ?
Roofplate Veld or'l% Proof Stress 275.m Nrtnm'?
Roqfplate design Stress = 2/3 x Yeld or'l% Prooi Stre 183.33
mm
Roof PlateAllo$ance
conosion Thks. on Roof plating. 5.00
0.00 mm
Roof Plate Design Thks. 5.00 mm
Weight of Roof Plating 69.290 kN unconoded
Weight of insulation 0.00 lN/m2
Weight due to InEllation 0.000 kN

No. of Beams 16.00

corosion alloiyance ofi each face of Rafier 0.000 mm
Total conosion allo$anc€ is therefore 0.000 mm
Unit tteight of Beams 23.82 kgitn unconoded
Weight of StructJre detailed above 25.738 kN
Weight of Cro\fin Ring 3.062 ldrl unconoded
Superimposed Load (normally 1.2d/inl 1.20 rdlr/m'?
Superimpo6ed Load 213.814 kt{
Total Load on Roof 'A 311.S04 kN
.,- P

Load per Rater 'Cf= Total Load/No. of Beams 19.494 KN

Vertical Load @ Roofcentre = 1/3 x 'Q' = 6.498 td{
Load dorvn axis of Rater = "P" = "Rb'/sin Theh 33.133 td

Figure 5.20 Design calculation for extemally-framed cone roof type - page t

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 137

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 171/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

Try using a Rafter Section: 203 x 76 x 23.82 kg/m R.S.C.

The relevant properties ofthe unconoded Rafters are as follotrs :-
Depth ofSection 203.20 mm
Flange widh 76.24 mm
Flange hicl{|ess 11.200 mm
Weight of Rafter 23.820 kg ,/ m
Cross sectional Area 'A" Uncoroded propertie 30.34 cm2
Moment of Inertia ixx 1950.00 cmo
Elastic Modulus '192.00
Radus of Gyration Zxx
Rxx cm3
8.O2 cm
Ratio D/T 18.20
Length of Rater L 6.884 m
Slendemess Ratio UR n(Beam restrained by roof plate) 85.8
Modulus of Elasticity'E" 207.000 kN/mm,
Max Bending Mnt. = BM =0.128x Qx L 17.177 kN.m
Max Bending Stress'frc" = BM /Z 89464 Nrtnm,
Max Compressive Stress ''fc" =P/A 10.921 N/mm,
Allo\aiable Bending Stress "pbc" {BS zt4g Tabtes 2 &3a)
'l5O.O N/mm,
Allo$able Comp. Stress "pc'(BS 449 Tabte 17a)
101.0 N/mm,
frcrhbc + ic,lpc must be =< 1.0 Actualvalue is :-- 0.705 ACCEPTABLE
Deiection = (0.013(Nx Qx L3) divided by ExI 20.54 mm
Allowable Deiection = L / 200 (BS 5950 : pt . Table 34.42 5)
ls Actual Deflection < Allowable Defection? ACCEPTABLE yES
Clsi,fl Rlng.

Efiedive regions of Ring = 16,a ', ' or,n" available dim€nsion lvfiichever
is the smaller. "ctual
UPstand = '|60 mm
Inne. conical sec.tion = 160 mm
Outer conical sec-tion = 160 mm
Load on Cro\rn Ring
'P'= 33.133 kN
Sec'tion Modulus of Ring "Z= 174.811 cm'
C.S.A. of Ring 'A' = 4837.858 mm,
Radius of Crovyn Ring "R'= 594.500 mm
From "Roark sth Edltion Table 17-7
Angle bet$/een Rafrers = 2xa 22.500 oegrees
1t2 " 11.250
'llTheta = ( 360 / 2x Pi.x o() 5.093 radrans
1,lsin a= 5.126
1ftan c< = 5.027
F€
Moment between Loads'P"= "Mo"=PxR/2(1/sin o( -1l.r) 323.761 kN.mm
Compression in Ring 'Ilo"= Pz(l/sin .() 84.918 kN.mm
MolZ= 't.852 N,/mm'? J
No /A= 17.553 N,/mm'?
Total Compressive Stress Mo/z + No/A = 19.405 Nlmm?
Allori/able Stress from earlier is N/mm'?
ls Total Comp.Stress < Allofable Stress ? YES ACCCEPTABLE
Moment under Load "P"= "Mi"= PxRz(l/c - l/tan ..) 646.273 kN.mm
Tension in Ring "Ni"= P/2(lltan .() 83.287 KN
MilZ= 3.697 N/rnm'?
Ni/A= 17.216 N/mm'?
Total Tensile Sfess Mi/Z + Ni /A = 20.913 N/mm'?
Allowable Stress ftom eariier is N/mm?
ls TotalTensile Stress < Allowable Stress ? YES ACCEPTABLE

THE ROOF AS DESIGNED IS THEREFORE ACCEPTED

Number ofplates required to cut Petal plates from is : - OTF

8
FE
igure 5-20 Design calculation for extematty-fiamed cone roof type -page 2
Co

,I38 STORAGE TANKS

& EQUIPMENT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 172/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

$
$---_r
N+
-_t\Jl--d-T

Part plan of roof framin9

section B-B
o6LilotentB ns

Figure 5.21 Details of rafler type dome roof

5.5.2.2 Externally-framed tYPe

This again consists ofa supporting structure composed ofa se-

ries of curved radial rafters. In this case the roof sheeting is at-
tached to the underside of the supporting rafters, This type of

which can haveidealfor

arrangement is a carboninternally-lined stainless steel tanks,
steel externalorstructure

The method of construction used here was to shop-fabricate

the sectors of roof plating with a radial beam alreadywelded to
each edge ofthe plate. The photograph shows the first four pet-
als in place and supported at the centre by a temporary klng
post. Every other petal plate sector was then lifted into position
and finally the gaps between the pre fabricated sectors were
plated in.

The design ofthis type of structure is similarto that ofthe inter-

nally domed structure but as the roof plates are welded to the
lowirflange of the radial rafters, the rafters are "tied" together
and hence there is no horizontial load transmitted to the shell
arrange-
Figure 5.22 Radial rafter dome roof under construction from the rafters and hence the reinforced curb angle
Counesy of Whessoe ment is not required.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 139

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 173/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank rcofs - fixed

t-^

Figure 5.26 Completed externa yjramed dome rooftank

Couftesy of Whessoe

Figure 5.24 shows a typical arrangement for this type of roof.

The rafters are laterally restrained by the roof plating but it is
usual to weld web stiffening plates into the rafters as ihown in
Section A- A of Figure 5.24 and the length of L for determining
the slenderness ratio forthe rafters is qreatest
supported distance on the rafter. taken as the un_

Figure 5.25 shows the initialstage of construction ofthis tvoe of

roof on a 44 metre diameter tank. Figure 5.26 shows a'com_
pleted 90 m diameter tank roof.

I
,
Figure 5.24 Externatty-framed dome roof type arrangemenl

Figure 5.27 90 m oiameter inlerna yjramed do^re roof ulder construcLion

F gure.5.25 hilial stage ol constr ucr,o1 ot exlerna yJrameo oome root ot a

Figure 5.28 90 m diameter interna y-framed dome roofcompteted and ready r
Coulesy of McTay to be air-lifted (note the stabilisation cabtes aitached to the centre ofthe flo;)
o

140 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 174/296
 5 The design of tank raofs - fixed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

# €b, .';.'a .'

Figufe 5.32 33 nr diameler geodesic dome roof be ng built alongs de a tank

Figure 5.29 A 90 m d ameler roof being a r-lifted to the iop ofthe tank

Fgure 5.30 A90 m diameter roofbeing secLfied nlo place

Figure 5 33 A 33 m diameier alumini m geodesic dome rcof be ng tfied nro

Figure 5.34 A 33 m aluminium geodesjc dome roof n posiiion on ihe iank

Figurc 5.31 A 90 m diameter roof in ts fina postof and ready for \,r,etding io ready for lhe final periphera f ashings 1o be put inio ptace
the shell compression plale

5.5.3 Other types main rafters. In particular for very large diameters say above B0
metres, Reference 5.2 should be consulted.
There are a number of methods available for designing domed

roofs and
deemed to in some
take instances
tensile circumferential rings are
the decreasing
loads, thus the load in the
For ease of constfuction, these very large diameter roofs are of-
ten constructed inside the shell on the floor of the tank, see Fig-

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 141

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 175/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design oftank rcofs - fixed

ures 5.26, and then lifted to the top of the tank under air pres- T
sure. The small gap between the rim ofthe completed roofand S
the shellis sealedwith a temporary flexible membrane which is rJ
secured to the roof rim. The pressure underthe roofwhich is re-
quired to Iift it is surprisingly small. c
Take a 90 m diameter roof having an all-up weight of 620 o

tonnes. The pressure equalling this weightoverthe area ofthe t

tank is equivalent to 9.6 mbar and this pressure can be deliv- T
ered by large volume fans attached to the shell manholes. The I€
roof is stabilised during its ascent by cables attached to the floor p
which pass through the crown ofthe roof and across the outer
F
surface to sheaves at the rim, finally these cables are anchored
at points above the rim ofthe shell. Figures 5.27, 5.29, 5.30 and
l
S
5.3'1 show a 90 m diameter roof constructed and lifted in this
way. F
5.5.3.1 Geodesic dome roofs s
This type of roof is a fully triangulated, spherical, space frame
F
structure, generally designed to be self-supporting from its pe-
ripherywith an integral peripheral tension ring to take the hod- e
zontalforces. They are usually constructed in reinforced plastic
d
or aluminium, Figure 5.32to 5.34showa 33 m diameterroof of
this type under construction and being lifred into position.
particularly
They are theircorrosion
tions where to waterproperties
suitedresistant and wastewater applica-
are a distinct ad- Figure 5.36 Column-supported cone roof lanks under construction
vantage, also these relatively lightweight structures lend them- Courtesv of Whessoe
selves to being retrofitted to existing tanks for the coniainment
of vapour, gasses and odours, as they can be erected along-
side a tank and lifted into position in one piece.
They are also used in the petrochemical industry again for the
containment of vapours or as weatherproof covers for floating
roof tanks containing moisture sensitive producb.

5.6 Golumn-supported roofs

As an alternative to providing a structure which is supported
only by the tank shell, the column-supported roof introduces a
series of vertical supporting columns. These are arranged in a
series of circumferential rings around a slngle centre 60lumn.
The rings of columns are circumferentially linked by girders
which in turn support radial rafters on which the roof plating is
laid. lt is usual to adopt a shallow conical shape (1 in 16) and in
theory there is no limit to the size ofthe tank roofwhich can be
constructed in this way and it is reported that a tank of 110
metres in diameter has been built.

Figure 5.37 Completed column-suppoded roof structure

The conshuction of this type of roof is shown in Figures 5.35,

5.36 and 5.37.

Clearly, careful thought has to be given in cases where there is

a possibilitythat the tankfoundation may be prone to differential
settlementdue to poor soil conditions, which can result in differ-
ential settlement of the columns, thus causing undesirable in-
crease stresses in the roof members and their connections.

Consideration has to be given to the possibility oflateral loading

ofthe columns due to the motion ofthe stored product when de-
signing for a seismic condition. The column bases should, un-
der all conditions, be restrained in position on the tankfloor. The
bases should not be attached to thefloor butshall be prevented
from moving bywelding angle cleats to the floorat the edges of
the column bases.

Figure 5.37 shows the rafters projecting beyond the support

Figure 5.35 Column-suppoded roof tanks underconsl.uction
beams, this is done to ensure that the maximum allowed spac-
Cawlesy of MB Engineering Services Ltd ing of 1.7m (5.5 ft) between the rafrers is mainiained.

142 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 176/296
 . .: - = - -
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
value for its radius of gyration but there is cie- re *::3-:: :: -:-
To provide torsional stability in the plane of the roof it is neces- la--
the struc- inq tubes because of the possibil ty of lnternal corrcs 3i
sarv to orovide cross bracing in at least two bays of
aq-e which cannot be detected, also tubes are often mo:e e:-
ture for ioofs exceeding 15m in diameter. These seis of bracing
p6nsive than other sections or combination of sections
should be spaced evenly around the tank circumference The
bracings are normally thin flat tie bars welded to the top flanges
ofthe iafters ormay be tie rods connected between the webs of
the rafters.
The shallow roof slope makes this type of roof unsuitable for
in-
ternal pressures much in excess of the self-weight of the roof
plating itself (usually 4 mbar).
designed to
For British
column-supported
Code then roofrecommendations
the structures which of
arethe Structural
the
Steel Code BS 449 shall aPPIY
For tanks designed to the American Code then the applicable
Structural Steel Codes which apply to the country in which the
tank is being built shall aPPIY il t[_|]
II

Fortanks which are built in America the AISC Code, (see Refer-
ence 5.3), shall be used together with the overriding require-
mentsof API 650 given in the Code, clause3 10 3 3 forslen-
ll l[-Lr
l

derness ratios and clause 3 10.3 4, for the allowable

comoression in columns. Figure 5.38 Examples ofothet sections used for columns in column_supponeo

The design of column-supported roofs is fairly straightfoMard

and may be aPProached as follows: Other sectionswhich have been usedareshownin Figure5 38'
resulting
a) loadsuo
Solit iothe
thearea of the radial
individual roof and Thesethe
apportion
rafrers rafters are
treated as simply supported beams with a U.D.L' 5.7 References
D) The qirders connecting the tops of the columns together 5.1 Structurat stabitity of the tank-code requiremenls, Pro-
take the point loads from the radial rafters, remembering fessor A.S. Tooth, Department of Mechanical Engineer-
that the girders support half the load from an inner ring of ing, University of Strathclyde
rafters, ilus half tfre load from an outer ring of rafters 5.2. Adesign philosophyfor large storage tank braced d-ome
Again the girders are considered as simply supported roofs,-The Structural Engineer, G. Thompson, G K'
beams with multi-Point loads Schleyer and Prof. A S. Tooth, 1987.
Half the load from each ofthe two adjacent girders in a cir-
5.3 Sgecifrcation for Structurat Steel Buildings Manual of
cumferential ring is carried by the connected column and Siee/ Construction, Atlowabte Sfress Design The
the design of the columns is subject to ihe applicable American lnsiitute of Steel Construction (AISC), (Noie
Structural Steel design Code.
that Chapter'N' on the use of plastic design in Part 5 A/-
/owable Stress Deslgn of this latter Specification is spe-

5.6.1 Golumn selection cifically not allowed )

The selection of the type of column section to be used excites
5.3 SteelPtate EngineeingDataSeries, Useful Information
- Design of Pt;te Structurcs, Volume Il , American lron &
the imagination inasmuch as the columns are usually quite tall Steel Institute (AlSl)
and herice the minimum radius of gyration through any axis of
the column must be as largeas possible in ordertoarrive at the 5.5 Minimum design loads for Buildings and other Struc-
oreatestvalue obtainable for Ur. The obvious answer ls to use tures, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) -
Sandard 7-93.
i tubular section for the columns, which of course has only one

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 143

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 177/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - lixed

Design for the radial Rafters of a Domed roof.

Design Codes :- BS 449
A.P.t.650 (A.P.l. 650 does not give all ofthe specific requirements for
Supported Dome or Umbrella Roofs therefore the guidance
given in Clause 3.10.2.7. applies to this design.)
Desiqn of Roof in the conoded condition.
lMate rial Specifi cation 305 x 165 x 40# Universal Beam to 8.S.4. in BS En 10025 5275 Material
Tank mean Diameter D 39m
Tank Height H 22^
Dome Roof Diameter DL 39
Dome Roof Radius RR58.5 m. RR/DL= OK l.bo
Numberof Rafters NMR 44
Super. load 1.2 ld{/rn"
Rafter \,\€ight 31 kg/m
Roof plate thickness 5mm
Roof plate conosion allowance 0mm
Other uniform roofload purlins 0.031 lN/rf
Crown ring 4.65 kN 0.004 kN/m,
Design load for roof TL 1.86 kN/nf
Radius to inner end of Rafte RU 1250 mm
Dia. to innerend of Rafter RD 2500 mm
into
For lateral restraint the Rafter is split 5 sections byfitting Purlins. (Actuallythere are
6 sections, but the outer one is not at the same
ome Roof Desiqn spacing as the others therefore is ignored here.)

1. Determine load applied by the structure Crown Ring.

PCL = RDr. pi . TL
4 . NIVR
:
Where RD = Diameter of Crown Ring. ( 2 x RU )
TL = Roof loading.
NMR = Number of main Rafters.

2. Determine geometery of any section.

RL = Rad. at outer end of Rafter

RU= "
" of"inner
RR = Rad. dome.

Fl = Angle subtended by RU Arcsine ( RU / RR )

F2 = Angle subtended by RL Arcsine ( RL / RR )
F3 = Angle subtended by section F2 - F1
F4= Rise in height of section {( 1 -cosF2) -( 1 -cos Ft )}. RR
Arc = Arc length RL to F4 F3 . RR

Figure 5.23 Design c€lculation for .adiat rafter dome roof type - page .t

144 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 178/296
 5 The design of tank rcofs - frxed
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

-.- 3. Load on Rafier6ection.

HTT
T_I
f
,,-^
nrF( +
|

=L

Where :

HTR = RU.2.pi.TL I
NMR
HTT = (RL- RU.2.pi.TL
NMR

4. Reactions at lo rer end of Rafter section.

Horizontal Reac{ion.
UTH = t ( HTR. ( RL - RU )'? / 2+( HTT. ( RL - RU )2/6 + PcL. ( RL - RU ) ] /F4

Vertical Reaction.
VTH = HTR . ( RL - RU )+(HTT. ( RL - RU) ) / 2 + PcL

5. Calculations at 50 No. intervals

XN = Present arc dislance from upper end of section.

F7=XN/RR
HD = Horizontal distance. { sin ( F1+F7 ).RR } - RU
F8 = Vertical distance at poir{ ( 1 - cos ( F1+F7 ) ) - ( 1 - cos F1 ) } . RR

6. Bending moment at the above intervals.

BM1 = -HTH,F8 THTT. HF+HTR HD2TPCL.HD
(RL-RU)r 2

7. Shear force at above intervals.

F10 = Vertical load at any point considered.
= HTT. HEF+ HTR. HD+ PCL
(RL-RU).2
SF= Shear load at point considered.
= F10. cos ( F1+F7 ) r(- HTH. sin ( F1+F7 ))
L Compression at above intervals.
@M = F10. sin (F1+F7 )+ HTH. cos(F1 + v)
9. Stress at above intervals.
f c= - COM /Area of Rafter
fb=
BM /Z of Rafter
Stress in topflange = f c+ f b
Stress in bottom flange = fc-fb

Figu€ 5.23 Design caldlation for radial rafter dome roof type - page 2

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 145

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 179/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

Design calculations.
L PCL = 0.2075058 kN

=
Fl 0.0213691 Rads.
=
F2 0.3398369 Rads.
=
F3 0.3184678 Rads.
=
F4 3.3323148 m
ARC = 18.630364 m

HTR= 0.3320092 kN/m

HTT= 4.8473347 kN/m

4. =
HTH 98.476427 kN ( Horiz. load at shett )
=
WH 50.498603 kN ( Vert. load at shell )

5. XN = 0.3726073 m ( inteNals at which calcs. are made along the Rafter.)

Depth mm lwdth mm lvvt.

lSect type
kg/m
Beam section to be used forthe Rafter :- 3OS | 165
| 40 u.B.|
(356 x 171 x 51 lg/m with a 1 mm c.a. off each face.)
Properties of Rafter :- c.s.a.= cm2 51.5 In< 8523 cm4
ZKX.= 581.2 cms I yy
' 763 cma
EYT= 29.9 ryy 3.85 cm

lsthe Rafter vvelded to the Roof plating ? NO ( i.e. Internal or extemal structure ? )
Purlin Section size is :- 90 x 90 x 10 R.S.A.
Thickness of Roof plating 5mm
Roof plating con. allowance 0mm
Roof plating design thicl(|es 5mm

Properties of Rafter incl platr c.s.a.= 67.75 cm2 | >u 11491.00 cma
( For extemal structures onl) Zxx= 605.82 cm3 D/T= 29.9
(yy 5.69 cm
For this case :-
Use bare Rafter properties only
c.s.a.= 51.5 cm2 | 8523.00 cma
Z:rx= 561.20 cm3 D/T= )o( ZY,J
tyY ?AE am
The value of '/ to be used is I yy = 3.85 cm ( for lateral restraint for the Beam )

Figur€ 5.23 DEsign calcul€lion for radlal lafier dom6 roof typ€- page 3

146 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 180/296
 5 The design a: ia" 'aa': '':-
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Cfoss sectional area = 5150 mm, Zr.( . 561200 mm. D/T= 29.9
Relevant value for'ryy'. 38.50 mm
Arc lenglh of Rafter = 18.630 m Calculations made at t- 50 intervals atonq Rafter

XN HD BM SF col\rl P fc fb Top Btm

arc (m) {kN.m) (kN) tkN) (N/mm') lN/n1m') lN/mm2) (N/mrn'?)
1 0.373 o.3/2 -0.798 -2.382 98 448 -19.116 -1 422 -20.539 -11.694
2 0.7 45 o.745 -1.770 -2.830 98.437 -19.114 -22.269 -15.959
3 1.118 1.117 -2.943 -3.241 98.426 -19.112 -5.172 -24.284 -13.940
4 1.490 1.490 ,4.181 -3.616 98.4'i5 -19 110 -7.451 -26.560 -'11.659
5 1 863 '1.862 -5.593 -3.954 98.405 -19 108 -9.966 -29.47 4 -9.142
6 2.236 2.234 98.398 ,19.'106 -12 693 -31.799 -6.413
7 2.608 -8.759 -4 520 98.392 -19.'105 -15 608 u.714 -3.497
8 2 981 2.977 -10.487 -4.7 49 98.390 -19 105 -18.688 -37.793 -o.417
I 3.353 3.349 -12.294 -4.941 98.392 -19.105 -21.907 -41.012 2.801
10 3.720 -14.165 -5.098 98.399 -19.107 -25.241 -44.348 6.135
11 4.099 4.091 -'16.088 -5.218 98.411 -19.109 -28.668 9.559
12 4.471 4.462 -'18.050 -5.303 98.429 -19.112 -32.163 ,51.275 13.050
13 4.444 4.833 -20.036 -5.352 98.454 -19117 -35.702 -54.819 '16.585
14 5.217 5.203 -22.034 98.486 -19.123 -39.262 -58.386 20.'139
15 5.589 5.574 -24.031 ,5 345 98.525 -19.131 -42.824 -61 951 23.689
16 5.962 5.944 -26.O13 -5 289 98 574 19.141 -46 353 65.493 27.212
17 6.313 -27.968 -5 199 98.632 -19 152 -49.836 -68.988 30.684
18 6.707 6.683 -29.883 -5 074 98.700 -1S.165 -53.248 -72.413 34.083
19 7.080 7.052 -31.745 -4.915 98.779 -19.180 -56.566 -75.746 37.386
20 7.452 7.420 -33.541 -4.722 98.868 -19 198 -59.767 -78.965 4A.570
21 7.825 7.7AA -35.260 -4.496 98.970 -19 218 -62.829 -42.o47 43.612
22 8.197 8.'156 -36.888 -4.237 99.084 -19.240 -65.730 -u.970 46.490
23 8.570 L524 38.413 -3.945 99.212 -19.264 -68.448 -87 712 49.183
8.943 8.891 -39.823 -3.620 99.353 -19.292 ,70.961 -x.253 51.669
25 9.315 9.258 -41.107 99.509 -19.322 -73.248 -92.570 53.926
26 9.688 L624 -42.251 -2.875 99.679 -'19.355 -75 287 -94.643 55.932
27 10.060 9.990 -43.245 -2.455 99.865 -'19.39'1 -77.055 -96.450 57.667
28 '10.433 10.356 -44.O77 -2.005 100.068 -19.431 -78.541 -97.971 59.110
10.806 10.721 -44.735 -1.523 1AO.287 -19.473 -79.714 -99.187 60.241
30 11.178 11 085 -45.249 -1 012 100.523 -19.519 -80.557 100.076 61.038
'1
1.551 11.449 -45.486 -0.471 140.777 19.568 -81.051 '100.6'19 6'1.483
11.923 11.812 -45.556
:: 12.296 12.175 -45.408
0.099
0.698
101 050
101 341
19.621
-19.678
-81.176
-80.913
100.797
100 591
61.555
61.235
34 12.669 12.538 -45.432 1.325 101.653 -19.738 80.243 -99.981 60.505
'i3.041 12.900 -44.417 1 981 10'1.984 -19 803 -98.950 59.344
;;l 13.414 13.261 -43.553 2 663 102 335 -19 871 -71 607
13.746 13.622 -42.429 3.372 102.708 -19.943 -75.605 -97.478
-95 548 57.736
55.662
ill 14.'159 13.982 -41.037 4.104 103.102 -20 020 -73.123 -93.143 53.103
14.532 14.341 -39 36s 4.869 '103.518 -24.101 -70.145 -90.245 50 044
131 14.904 14.704 -37.405 5.656 103.S57 -20.186 -66 652 -86 838 46.466
15.277 15.058 -35.147 6.467 104.419 -20.275 -62.629 -82.904 42.?83
15.650 15.416 -32 583 7 3A2 104.904 :20.370 -58 059 -78.429 37.639
iA 16.O22 15.772 -29.743 8.'161 105.413 :20.468 -52.927 -73.395 32.458
441 '16.395 16.128 -26.498 9.043 '105.946 :20.572 -47.216 -67.788 26.644
16.767 16.484 -22.960 9.948 '106.504 -20.680 -40.9'i3 -6'1.593 20 233
17.144 16.839 -19.082 10.874 107.087 -20.794 -34.OO2 -54.795 13.204
lil 17.513 17.193 -14.854 11.822 107.695 -20.912 -26.469 -47.380 5.557
481 17.885 17.546 -10.270 12.79Q 108.329 -21.035 -'18.300 ,39.334 -2.735
18.258 17.89e -5.321 13.778 108.990 -21.163 -9.481 -30.644 .11.682
;:l 18.630 18.250 0.000 14 745 149.677 -21297 0.000 -21.297 .r1?97

lvlaximum values are r - 677 21.297 81 176

109
Comp kN fc N/mm, tb N/mm,
Compare max. bending stresses against allowable to BS 449.
The Rafter is not welded to the roof plaiing, therefore the relevant value
of'ryy' is to be used based upon the effective lenglh between purlins.
Lengtfi of Raftef Lr = 18.360 m.
lheBeam is split irto- 5 sections by web stiffene.s or pudins
LS= L
L= 3.726 n
Ur= 97
Dfi = 29.9

Figure 5.23 Design calculation for radialraftef domercof type page4

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 147

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 181/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

Table 17a of BS if49 86 N/mm2

Table 3a oi BS 449 127 ll/mm2

Actual comp've. stress 21.297 Nlmm2

Actual bend'g stress tbc = 8'1.176 N/mm'?
fc/Pc+ fbc / pbc = 0.89 < '1, oK

10. Crown Ring design

From Roark sth edition Table 17 Ref. No. 7

Angle between Rafters 0.143 rads.

1/2 angla between Rafters 0"071 rads.
14.006
14.O18
'lltan - = 13.982

Selection of Crcwn Rino properties

Enter requirements Y or N
From Sheet'B' of this Prog.
From another source (give details):

Properties of Channel:
Size: 305 x '102 x l--ToTe--ltsrm
58.83 cm'
499.50 cm"
2.66 cm

Areas: Channel 58.83

Plate rings 72.00
Total
---JE6t6?",,

1st m.o.a. from back

of Channel: Channel 156.49
Plate rings 936.00
Total 1092.49 cm3

Weight of Crown dng = 332.69 kg Channel + 141.3 kg Top & Btm plates
473.99 kg which is 4.65 kN

Position of centroid of section = 1092.49 8.35 cm

130.83

Figure 5.23 Design calculation for radial rafrer dome roof Vpe - page 5

148 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 182/296
 5 The design of bnk o& - M
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

2nd m.o,a. about cer*roid of section:

Channel 2404.479 cma

l ggfurPlate B'D3= 1728 c'na

12

1 yy for plaie 2506,263 x 2 -' 5012.527 cm-

Totafznd m.o.a. = 2404.48 + 5012.59 = 7417 o1 cma

Y max = 16.65 cm
y mrn, = 8-35 cm

zw= 7417.01 - 4,L5.48 cm3

16.65

Cross sactional area A = 130.830 cm2

Section modulus Z = ,145.480 cm3
Total weight W = 474.0 kg or = 4_65 kN
Horizontal load = HTH = H = 98.476 kN

BM between loads on Ring = Mo = HxW2 (l/sin * - 1(1/- )= 732.853 kN.mm

Compression in Ring is = No = H/2 (l/sin e ) = 690.199 kN
MolZ= 2.086 5.602 N/mm'z
No/A = 15.493 Nlmmz
Total comp. stress in Ring = Mc/Z + No/A = 21.095 lvmmz
Allowable siress to BS ,149 = 180.000 N/mm'?
ls the actual sfess in the Ring acceptable? YES

BM at loads on Ring = Mi=HxFY2(1/--1^ane)= 1465.332 kN.m

Tension in ring is = Ni = H/2 (1/tane) = 688.440 kN
MilZ= 11-2OO N/mm'?
Ni/A = 15.454 N/mm2
Total tensile stress in Ring = Mi/Z + Ni/A = 26.654 N/mm'?
Allowable stress lo BS 449 = 180.000 N/mmz
ls the actual stress in the Ring acceplable? YES

Deflections in the Rino due to load from Rafters

Radial displac€ment al easi load point = Hx R3 lllsin*2 (n- + 'll2.sin€cos.e) - 1/-l
2xE xl
1/sin*2 = 196.491
1126= 0.0357
1/2.sin*.cos* = 0.036
14.006
E= 207000 N/mm2
6104.4 cma

Figure 5.23 Design calculalion for Edial raft€r dome roof type- page 6

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 149

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 183/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
5 The design of tank roofs - fixed

Radial displacement at each load ooint = 0.000062 mm (inwards)

Acceptable disolacement = Length between loads/200 0.892 mm
ls displacement acceptable? yES

Radial displacement between each load point = Hx R3 [2/- - l/sin* -[* x (cos-/sin*'?)
4xExl
Z*= 28.O1'l
COSE= 0.997
sin*2 = 0.005
* x (cos*/sin*2) = 13.994

Radial displacement between each load point = 0.000054 mm (outwards)

ls displacement acceptable? yES

Ibedesiorufthe is-acceplQd

In the above design method,

circumferential rings are therethe
to main are deemed
rafterssupport
give lateral cany but
to thetorafters all the
theyloadings and the
do not iake any
appreciable load. This means that the rafters exert an appreciable horizontal load at their
attachment point to the shell and the top ofthe shell must be reinforced to take this load.
From the above calculation this load is seen to be HTH at 98.47 kN and the necessary
reinforcement in this case is provided by a double angle arrangement which is designed
as follows:

Desion of a Rino. fcurb Ano iEnace

Desion based on Roa

Try two angles forming a box section

2OO t 2ao

200 x 200 x 24 R.S.A. and a 120 x 120 x 12 R.S.A.

'B'
120 r 120 x 12 RS.A

Number of equispaced loads acting on the Ring. 44

Horizontal Load on Crown Ring HTH = "H" = 98.476 kN (from Sht. 'A')
Radius of Ring "R" = 19500 mm
C.S.A of Ring '4" = 9660 mm2
Moment of Inertia of Ring "1" 3421.227 cm4
Section of Modulus of Ring "2" = 262.494 cm3

Figure 5.23 Design calculation for radial rafter dome roof tpe - page 7

150 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 184/296
 5 The des-go af tat r "aEia -
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment "ea

From "Roark sth Edition Table 17-7

= 8.18'1818 degrees
Angle between Rafters = 2 x€
= 4.090909 degrees
1/2 Angle between Rafters = e
1/Theta = (360/2xPi.x
' *) = 14.00563 radians
'llsin-= 14.01754
1/tan * = 13.98183
Moment between Loads "H" = "Mo" = H x R/2(1/sin *1/*) = 11432.5 kN.mm
Tension in Ring "No" = H/2(1/sin-) = 690.1987 kN.mm
MolZ= 43.55336 N/mm'?
NoiA = 71.44914 N/mm2
TotalTension Stress Mo/Z + No/A = I15.0025 N/mm'z
Allowable Stress from BS 449 is: 180 Nimm2
ls Total Tensile Str"ess < Allowable Stress? YES ACCEPTABLE
Moment under Load "H" = "Mi" = H x R/2( l/* - 1/tan*) 22859.17 kN.mm
Compression in Ring "Ni" = H/2(1/tan*) 688.,1402 kN
MitZ= 87.08452 N/mm'
Ni/A = 71.2671 N/mm?
Total ComDrehensive Stfess Mi/Z + Ni/A = 158.3516 N/mm'?
Allowable Stress from BS 449 is: 180 N/mm2
ls Total Comorehensive Stress < Allowable Stress? YES ACCEPTABLE

Deflections in the Rinq due to load from Rafrers

Radial displacement at each load point =

Hx R3 lllsin2*(112* +'1l2.sin€,.cos.*) - 1/*l

2xExl
=
1/sin*2 196.4915
112*= 0.0357
1/2.sin-cos.(= 0.035579
1l- = 14.00563
E
= 207000 N/mm2
| = 342'1.227 cma

Radial displacement at each load point = 0.417 mm (outwards)

Acceptable displac€ment = Length between Loads/200 = 13.923 mm
ls displacement acceptable? YES

Radial displacement between each load point =

Hx R3 [2/* - l/sin* - [* x(6os -/sin -'?)]l
4xExl
2l* = 28.01127
1/sin *= 14.01754
=
cos- 0.997452
sin*z = 0.005089
e x (cos* /sin42) = 13.99371

Radial displacem€nt betvveen each load point =

0.365265 mm (inwards)
ls displacement acceptable? YES

fte-desiotr otube Rinqis-accep d

Figure 5.23 Design calculation for radialEfter dome roof type - page I

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 151

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 185/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

152 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 186/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

6 The design of tank roofs - floating

A floating roof greatly reduces vapour losses due to changes in climatic conditions and during
tank filling operations. These losses are particularly significant where volatile organic
compounds are stored in tanks which are subject to high filling and emptying cycles. The two
types of floating roofs are discussed: the externalfloating roof and the internal floating roof and
variations on these. A review offloating roof accessories or equipment is made and examples oi
many appurtenances given.

Contents:
6.1 lntroduction
6.2 The principal of the floating roof
6.3 External floating roofs
6.3.1 Types of external floating roof
6.3.1.1 Single-deck pontoon type
6.3.1.2 Double-deck type
6.3.2 Other types of floating roof
6.3.2.1 BlPN,l roof
6.3.2.2 Buoy roof
6.3.3 Floating roof design example
6.4 Internal floating roofs
6.4.1 Types of internal floating roofs
6.4.1.1 Pan roof
6.4.1.2 Honeycomb roof
6.4.1.3 Pontoon and skin roof
6.5 External floating roof appurtenances
6.5. 1 Roof support legs
6.5.2 Guide pole
6.5.3 Roof seals
6.5.3.1 lvlechanical seals

6.5.3.2 Liquid-filled fabric seal

6.5.3.3 Resilient foam-filled seal
6.5.3.4 Compression plate type seals
6.5.4 Rim vents
6.5.5 Drain plugs
6.5.6 Fire fighting
6.5.6.1 Rim fire detection
6.5.7 Roof drains
6.5.7.1 Articulated piping system
6.5.7.2 Armoured flexible hose
6.5.7-3 Helical flexible hose
6.5.7-4 Drain design Codes
6.5.7-5 "The man who drained the floating roofs"
6.5.8 Syphon drains
6.5.9 Emergency drains
6.5.10 Bleeder vents
6.5.11 The gaugers platform
6.5.12 Rolling ladder
6.5.13 Deck manholes
6.5.14 Pontoon manholes
6.5.15 Sample/dip hatch
6.5.16 Foam dam
6.5. 1 7 Electrical continuity

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 153

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 187/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design oftank roofs - floating

6.1 Introduction
The realisation that a great deal of product was being lost by Air in
evaporation from fixed roof petroleum tanks lead research into
developing a roof which floated directly on the surface of the o)
product thus reducing these evaporation losses.
The development ofthis technology began shortly after the first
World War by Chicago Bridge & lron Company (CB & l), which
undertook full scale floating roof fire tests in the presence of o-
prominent leaders in the petroleum and insurance industries to
convince them that storing volatile products in floating roof 6.
tanks was a viable proposition. Night
TT
A series of tests were carried out in 1923, see Figure 6.1, Breathino losses
'Dt
wherebygasoline was poured on to a floating roof and its seals ln
and flttings, and was then ignited. The fire was readily extin- Vapour olt Air in m
guished without damage to tank or its contents ofgasoline, see
to
Figure 6.2. The original CB & | floating roofdesigns, and some
T
variant of them, have been in regular use ever since.
T
e
fn

ts

h
lmpod Export l
lmport / Export losses
d

Figure 6.3 The loss mechan;sms experienced in fxed rooflanks

6.2 The principal of the floating roof

The floating roof is a circular steel structure which is provided
Figure 6.1 CB & I Floaling Rooffire test in 1923 with built-in buoyancy allowing it to float on top of the stored
Coutlesy of product in a closed or open top tank. Due to the limits of accu-
racy in constructing large circular structures, the overalldiame-
ter of the floating roof is generally about 400 mm smaller than
the inside tank diameter thus allowing it to rise and fall on the
product without binding on the tank shell, ratherlike a piston ina
cylinder The gap between the outer rim ofthe roof and the in-
side of the tank shell is closed by means of a flexible sealing
system, of which there are many types available and these are
discussed later in Section 6.5. The sealalso serves to central-
ise the oosition of the roof in the tank.
There are two types of floating rooi
a) The external floating roof, where the roof sits on the
product in an open top tank and the roof is open to the ele-
ments.

b) The internal floating roof where the roof floats on the

product in a fixed rooftank. The roof and product in this ar-
rangement are protected from the ingress of rain and
snowand alsofrom the efiectofwind. Thistype of roof, be-
ing protected from the elements, is usuallyof much lighter
Figure 6.2 CB & | Floating Roof fire lesl for invited audience of peiroleum in- construction.
dustry leaders
- hats compulsory |

6.3 External floating roofs

The use of a floating roof also greatly reduces vapour losses
due to changes in climatic conditions and during tank filling op- The single-deck pontoon type and the double-deck type of roof
erations. These losses are particularlysignificantwherevolatile are the most commonly used type of designs, although there
organic compounds are stored in tanks which are subject to are other varianls available.
high filling and emptying cycles.
The design rules laid down in API 650, BS 2654 and the pro-
posed European Code prEN '14015-1 are essentially the same
and these are:
Figure 6.3 illustrates very simplistically the loss mechanisms a) The roof design shall be such that the roof will remain
experienced in fixed roof bnks. afloat on a product of specific gravity of 0.7 with two adja-

154 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 188/296
 6 The design of tank roofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

cent pontoon compartments punctured (additionally for is of much heavier construction (and hence more expensive)
the single-deck pontoon type roof only, that the centre butthis more rigid design allows better drainage from the top of
deck is also Dunctured). the roof, which usually has a minimum slope of 1:64 and the
b) The roof design shall be such that the roof will remain lower membrane is more likelyto stay in contactwith the stored
afloat on a product of speciflc gravity of 0.7 carrying a load product and hence there is less likelihood ofstatic vapour pock-
of 250 mm of rainfall overthe entire roof area with the pri- ets forming under the roof. Also, the air gap between the upper
mary roof drain considered inoperative. and lower plates has a insulating effect against solar heat
reaching the stored product which can be advantiageous when
6.3.'l Types of external floating roof storing volatile products in hot climates.
The rigidity ofthis type of roof mainly (although not completely)
problems.
6.3.1.1 Singledeck pontoon type overcomes wind-excited cracking
This type of roof, illustrated in Figure 6.4, derives its principal This type of roof is favoured for small tanks under, say 10
buoyancyfrom a outer annular pontoon which is divided radially metres in diameter, where ifthe single-deck pontoon type were
into liquid tight compartments. The centre deck is formed by a used, would only leave a very small centre deck area. lt is also
membrane of steel plates lap welded together (usually on the used for tanks above, say 65 metres in diameter, where the
top side only) and connected to the inner rim of the pontoons. more rigid construction mainly eliminates the drainage, under-
This centre deck is normally 5 mm ot %6" lhick. deck corrosion and deck cracking problems. The double-deck
roof has more buoyancy available compared with the sin-
This type of roof is used in tanks up to about 65 metres in diam- gle-deck type which is advantageous in satisfying the design
eter. Roofs that are larger than this have been known to suffer requirement in a) above, especially for large diameter roofs.
from wind-excited fatigue which can cause cracking in the
welded joints ofthe centre deck. (Attempts to prevent this by in- Figure 6.6 shows a double-deck floating roof under construc-
troducing stiffening on the underside ofthe deck has not always tion. The bottom deck has been laid, the circumferential and ra-
been entirely successful.) Also, because of the flexibility of a dial bulkheads fitted and the top deck stiffeners are in place
large centre deck, the naturalrise in the deckwhen floating can ready to receive the top deck plating
make drainage of rainwater from the deck a problem. Vapour
can also become trapped in the space thus formed under the
deck. which can oromote corrosion in this area.

Figure 6.6 Adouble-deck floating roofunder construction

Couiesy of McTay
Figure 6.4 Single-deck ponloon type rcof
Courtesy of Whessoe
6.3.2 Other types of floating roof
6.3.1.2 Double-deck type
This type of roof, shown in Figure 6.5, consists ofan upperand 6.3.2.1 BIPM roof
lower steel membrane (usually in smm plate) separated by a
The BIPM type of roof designed by Shell, the Netherlands, con-
series of circumferential bulkheads which are subdivided by ra-
sists of both annular pontoons and radial box girders which of-
dial bulkheads. The outer ring of the compartments so formed
fer additional buoyancy for the punctured condition. These box
are the main liquid tight buoyancyiorthe roof. This type of roof girders also stiffen the centre deck membrane. The design is il
lustrated in Figure 6.7.
This design was an attempt to prod uce a floating roofwhich was
stiffer than the single-deck pontoon type without incurring the
cost and weightpenalties associated withthe double-deck roof.
The reason for this initiative was in the main associated with the
need to produce an economic roof with good resistance to wind
induced fatigue problems. In this respect the design was suc-
cessful. However, other problems bedevilled this design as the
radial ribs were prone to buckling in service, which was thought
to be related to:
. The initial periphery to centre construction preset.
. Foundation settlement giving uneven support to the roof in
the landed condition.
Figure 6.5 Double-deck type roof
CouTesy of Whessoe . Changes in the stored product specific gravity.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 155

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 189/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
'lffi'l
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

and poor quality. The buoy roof allowed an increased leve :.

shop fabrication which was helpful in controlling quality, tir=
and cost. lt was usual to arrange for shop-fabricated uniis co --
sisting of the buoy, the supporting teg and the singte-deck ir_
mediately surrounding the buoy to be supplied to site whe.=
only the closing seams were required to be completed.
This design suffered from problems with wind-excited fatioL:
cracking. particularly around the buoy units where the stitfnes:
of the buoy and the deck were very different. Also problemai
was the draining of rainwater because the majority ofthe cenlr::
deck floated flat and consequenflythere was no naturalslope i:
the drainage sumps. Rain would accumulate on the roof awa.
from the drains, this then caused low points attracting more rai:
which formed non-draining ponds on the roof. In some cases
drainage channels were fabricated into ihe roofin an attemDt tc
alleviate the problem but this added more weight to the ioo.
t oVo" ot|'o"t of both annular ponloons and radial box
which was undesirable.
 ilog;"u "onsisting
Counesy af Whessae
A typical buoy roof is shown in Figure 6.8. lt is a 96 m diamete.
roof at the Phillips Seal Sands Facility for crude oil storage.
The resulting buckling of the ribs led to numerous failures in
service and the use ofthis design was discontinued and it is not
known if any roofs of this type are still in service.

6.3.2.2 Buoy roof

Of the two mandatory Code desjgn conditions a) and b) given in
earlier, it has been found through experience that for the sin-
gle-deck pontoon roof, the most onerous desiqn condition is
when the hryo adjacent pontoon compartments and the deck are
punctured. In this condition the flooded deck plating exerts ra-
dial loads on to the pontoons which cause compressive
stresses in the pontoon structure. Also, as the tank diameter in-
creases, the weight of the centre deck to be suDDorted in-
creases. and the buoyancy required from the peripheral pon-
toons increases.
The obvious answer may be to increase the width of the pon- Figure 6.8 Aiypical buoy roof
toon ring which will increase buoyancy and reduce the size of Caulesy of Phillips Petroleum Company

the centre
tively deck. and
thin upper However it has been established that the rela-
lower pontoon plates offer litfle resistance 6.3.3 Floating roof design
to the induced compressive stresses and theycan buckle at rel-
atively low stress levels. The area of the pontoons which offer
most resistance is found to be the inner and outer rim plates The design of a floating roof touches the frjnges of naval archi-
and a short section of the upper and lower pontoon plating im- tecture as well as that of structural engineering.
mediately adjacent to the rim plates. The remainder of the up- Where the Codes give guidance on designing say, secondary
per and lower plates therefore require stjfening by using wind girders or shell-to-roof connections, we are left to our own
structural sections, thus increasing the weight and cost of the devices with regard to the detail design offloating roofs. Hence,
roof. each tank designer has developed his own approach in orderto
The principal problem with the single-deck pontoon roof is the satisfy the requiremenb of the Code.
lack of buoyancy in the centre deck and in the earlv 1970s an One such approach is given for the design ofa single-deck roof,
American tank constructor produced a roof design which over- and is shown in Figure 6.9, "Design of a single-deck Floating
came this problem. lt was called it the "Buov roof'. This desion Roof for a Storage Tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and/
incorporates
a series
grid patternaon of liquid-tight buoyaniy units arranged'in
the top or BS 2654".
of the centre deck. These units
give
buoyancy to the centre deck when in the punctured condition.
They can be circular, square, rectangular, or of any shape to 6.4 Internal floating roofs
suit the width of the plates used to form the centre deck. Gener-
ally the deck support legs (described later) are housed through Internal floating roofs are used inside fixed rooftanks to reduce
the centre ofthe units, which has the advantage ofoffering stiff- vapour emission into the tank void above the product. Because
ening to the units concerned and vertical stiffness to the leqs this type of roof is not open to the elements, a much lighter form
themselves. ofconstruction in aluminium or plastic can be used. Also the rim
seals do not have to be as robust and are often made from
Afurther advantage ofthe buoy roof is that the cross-section of moulded flexible closed cell urethane foam in the form of a
the peripheral pontoons is dramatically reduced as it only hasto wiper seal where the tip of the seal is above the rim as the roof
provide enough buoyancy for itself and a short section of the descends and flips below the rim as the roof ascends.
centre deck plating immediately adjacent to it. The overall ad-
vantage ofthis type of roof design is for tanks having diameters The selection of construction materials for a Darticular service
condition has to be carefully considered especiallywhen
larger than, say, 65 metres. aluminium, where the unexpected introduction of corrosive using
This roof design appeared in the UK at a time when site con- traces in the product can cause serious damaqe to the roof
struction was beset by problems of labour militancy, high costs components.

156 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 190/296
 6 The design of tank roofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Dssign of a Single dBck Floating Roof for a Storaoe Tank

Design€d to A.P.l. 650 l ofr 6ditiin-[qqtl9ggApp€nqix]g'adl or
8.S.2654 : 1989 + amd 1997 Clause 9

Tank size: 35.00 m i/dia. x 15.00 rn high

Sp€cific gravity of Product

=0.70
The Code requirss tile Roof io be qesignod tor a specific gravity of :- 0.70
Howsv€r, ihis ccrnplete caloiation may be r€p€ated if necessary using
ths actual plodrjd s,g. in order to determine adual floatatiql levols.

Yeld stress ofstoelbeing ug€d =

.
275.00 N/mm,
Modulus of Elgsticity of thest€61 209000.00 Nlrnm2

Pontoon C€om€fry. ( Atl dim€nsions in 'mm' unl€as otherwise stated. )

s
h
e
I
34-60 m o / dia of Roof
I

aqoo x 12.00

Outer Rim 2200.oo Maintenance height o: Deck

m€asured at lnner Rim positioo.

Slops in Tankfloor 1in

fune up q[ cone dcurn ( loo}irq from ttF-Shg[ )?

WcishtoLEhaftS.Beof.

2e00 Co. mp€f $ent pEtes = x.:1.98 .x 5,00 x.7.85 ..=.110-95-2 kg.

Top ponioon plate=nx 17.5O2 x 15.462 x x 7.85 = e282.43 k9.

F.O0

Btm pontoon pl*e=.n x 11341x 15.302 x 5.OO x 7.gE + 8221.09 kg.

Innerdm=r - ruga-l#3#-.-2'9'09 x 0.4s x 20.00 x z.Bs = 67e6.22 ks.

ourerrim=n r re?o*g# 9 x o.BZ x s.oo x 7.ss = s889.94 ks.,

Seal mounting F.B. = n:x 34.56 x O.1O x 6.00 x 7.85 = 511-rt4 kg.

Erre 6.9 Deslgn of a singledeck floaling egt for a siorEOs br|k designed,io Apt 650 App€rdix C€nd/or.gs 2654 - pag6 t

STiORASE*AN KS,& EQITIIFI$ ENT 157

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 191/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

Bumper bars = 22.00 x 0.30 x 0.10 x 25.00 x 7.85 = 129.53 kg.

Pontoon legs in 3" sch. 80 PiDe '2 = 22.08 x 307O.OO x ts-+d = Szo.oo rg.

Pontoon log housings in 4. sch. 80 pipa = a"to.oo x n.qt = s22.7s ks.

T '
600.00 dia. Pontoon HatcfiEs. in
6.00 mm Plt. 50.00

I ooo.oo I

Weight = Neck = '13.32 Cover = 19.34

Total = 32-66 kg. x 22.00 = 718.53 kg.
Ponloon nozzles, fittings etc. S€y= 1000.00 kg
Weight of Rim Seal t
(based on
53.00 kg./ m. of Rim ci|t ) = 5701.05 kg.

- t x (go'oo' r2@ x 785 .zz'sa'.s

"*ff""fixl?H,*r 188#J "r88#.oo' =
Weight of Deck plates =

n7a * {so.oo - [tgpy'41'x s.oox 7.8s = 2828e.64ks.

Deck leg6 in 3" s.fr. 80 pipe.

No.orressrequd.=
## = .3.33olod',,
= 24.51

SaY = 26.00

Weight = 28.OO x 3327.@ x $.s= 1332.13 kg.

Deck leg housings in 4" sch.80 pip€ = 26.00 x 13OO.OO x 22.N - 757.12 W.

Deck nozzles, fittings etc. SaY = 1500.00 kg

Rollino ladder
Tank hgight = 15.00m + 2m Gaugors plaform,less dean - out height 14.80 m
Assume max. angle of hdder is 60., then length of laddef is :. 17.09 m
Allow a ladder weight of
50.00 kg /m acting on the Roof lh€n tadder w€ight is :. 854.48 kg.
The wbrst casg ecoentricity for thE ladder is at 8.76 m. from the Tank centre line.
( to bs used ior a lat6r calqiation. I

Summary ofwsightE:- Pontoon compon€nts i 3706,1.58

D€ck components t 33955.93
Totat wEight of Ftoating Roof qr'U = 71017.51 kg.

Volume of Ponioons.

0.31

0.45

0.11

t-|ta.-fb.lB bdhg roof for a storage tank designed to Apt 650 Appendix C and/or BS 2654 _ psge 2

f, Bq{rtPtlENT
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 192/296
 6 The design of tank rcofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Volums O 0.31 x 2_00

2.@
x x
93.27 IE 31.876 rn

Volume @ 0.45 x 2.W x 34.60 x ,r 92.174 m'

Volume @ 0.11 x 2.OO

2.@
x 93.27 x n 10.974 rf
135.024 mr

Operational fl oatation levets.

Flo€tation cleDlh of 5.00 mm thk. Csnfe Dsck, on water.

x 100O.OO = 39.25 mm

Floation deph of Pontoon wBighing 37061.58 t(g

Displacemert in water = SZOOL50 = 37.062 m r

1000.00

Floatation deDth 'd =

#%.*# =o127m

Dicplacemont in a producl having a density of 700_00 kg / m'

Floatation depth ot 5.@ mm thk Ded on a product of s.g. . O.7O

= 56.071 mm

Floation dgpth of Pontoon weighing 37061.S8 kg

DisplacamEnt in a product of s. g. . O.7O = = 52.945 m J

Tffi]63a
Flostiation deoth 'd'- = l2"oo
?'9€: 10 97a)
x ar.6o r; =u zuc m

mm for Pontoon
56.00 mm tor Dsck

DifiErencs in Pontoon & Oeck lEvels = 149.@ mm

SetDecket 149.00 mm up from inner comer of pontoon and
the underside of th€ Deck wi[ siill b6 ,wetted'.
Frs€board availabls abov€ Deck levgl and the top out€r comsr of the porioon =
450.@ - 149.m + 305.00 = 606.00 mm
The normal oparetional bvel for the Roof is :-
Weight of Roof 71012.S13 t(g
This aquates to a volume of produd of :- Z1O1t.S1g =. 101.4S4 m
700.00
Thsn th6 (bpth of floatation above the Deck i9 resolvgd as follolvs: -

101.454 = 10.97a + 92.174 x ffi + (n/4 x 30 .602x depth)

oeptn = 1{ 91:10.94:- ,o529. x 1000 = 81.532 mm

735.415

Figure 6.9 Design ofa singledeck floaflng rcoffor a stoEge tank d€signed to Apl 650 Appendix
C and/or BS 2654 _ page g

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 193/296
6 7/18/2019
The design of tank roofs - floating Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Produd lev€l
Deck level

Dsck to suppott 250mm ( 'l O' ) of rainwater.

Volume of rainvrEter collecisd over the area of the Tank

trl x 35.002 x o.a5 - 244.g77 m.

Volume to b6 displacad on a product dssity of 700.00 kg / m
214+-
700.00* =
71917:91
4oo.s63 rns
0.70

Assuming the Deck stays level.

With the Deck set at
149.00 mm from lo\ 16r inner corner of thg Ponloon.
thsn the max volums available is :- 10.s74 + (s2.'t74 x
ffi ) * to.tn * ,o.ofx o.ory = 6io.sos np

As the volume avsilable > lhan volume required, the calculation is acospted

The Roof must still float with tho Centre Deck & two Pontoon comoertments pundurcd.

volume availabl€ with t$o out of 22.@ compartrnenE purEtured = 1B5.a24 r = 122.75 m3
#f3
Minimum volume required to meet dEsign requirements = =101.454m3
##
As 122.75 > 101.45 Ayailable volume 3ufriciont .

Product liquid level above the Deck is found as follows :-

1O1.454 = (92.174 + 10.974 - part of Votume 20.oo

O) x
22.00
101.45 - 93.77 = Pt. vot.O x 4@
n.oo
Pt. vol.O = 8..{51 m3

Producl level above base of Section fi)

is lound by iteration using method givY
overleaf Enter a value hsre-l>

This gives a P€rt votume tor @ 8.487 m tI

lnls ts ctose enouon lo * 8.451 m to be acceptable.

'Fr€eboerd' of Pontoon abov6 the oroduci

lsvel for the pundured cordition i6 305.00 - 44.50 = 260.50 mm This b accaptabte

Levelof produd above thg Deck = 345.50 mm

Figure 6.9 Design of a single-deck floaling rooflor a storago tank d€signed to Apl 650 Appendix C and lor BS 2654 - page 4

160 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 194/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roofs - floating

Method to fird the levd by which a Single dedr Floating Roof sinks due to tlrb
compartm€nE being punctired_

The loss of buoyancy will cause the product to rlse in top seciion CD of lhe
Pontoon cross - seclion and hig ibration method determines that
6vel.
'$' denobs dimensions aubmatically inputed from the design sh€€t.

  lnput figure ( on Sheet A ) uilil the volur€ requir€d of 8.451 ms

\ is anived at ( from SlEet 'A .)
\ k-- zo00 $

T t -T|--.--..-
uouL fliJ | .,r*..,rr--.-------3#4'
lk+.sFW
i vi | ./ a/ ./ ,/ ,/1., \ \-.-

Volume 'a' = 7.854t 06 m3

Volume 'b' = 0.6{1209 m'
8.486895 m3

Check O16 sfassos end rbf,acdon in tE C€ntrd D€d( trd fie

edEuact dtha lnner Rim with a punctured Csntrg D€ck.

F* --.--.--|
F om Roark sth Edition "Fornulas for Sf€ss & Strain.
ChapFr 10.11
q.en4 =
[K1.(y/t)+l{2.(y/t) (1)
E.t^4 -
lI.€3= [K3. ( y/t]+ K4. (y/t)- t2)
E. tr
wher€ q = unit load of D6d( (N/lnrnr)
5.00 (7.85 _ 0,70) x 9.81x 10€= 0.000351
sfier€:- t=Deck date thks. (mm) 5.@
Thks. of lnn€r Rim plate (mm) 20.00
Wdth of D€ck mountirE iat bar ( mm ) 80.@
T= Ihks. of D6ck rnountng f,at bar ( mm )
. a-lEdius of Tank (mm)
12.O0
15300.00

poisson's ratio
(0.3) 0.30
E= Youngs tnodulus ( l'llmm1 209000.00
plab yiild sfiss8 ( Nfnrf) 275.OO
allo$able sbess = 213 x Yeld (N/mrfl '| 83.333

yb = bending str€ss (N/mff)

Fd = di€phEgm st1oss (Mrvn1
tr = tobl sfee8 Fb+pd

Flgure 6 9 DEsign of a singre-d€ck foating roof br a storage tank design€d to Apr 650 Appendix c and/or Bs 26s4 - page 5

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPIIENT .16,I

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
'a 195/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank rcofs - floating

Condition t
Fhed & Held. K1 =
5s * 5.86 l<2 =
z.o
2.86
(1 - vz; (1 *rt)

AttFcenfe l€= -J-=-

(1 -v) 2.8 K4= 0.98
Atiheedge K3= 1= 1.& K4= 0.48
( 1 -v')

Ecuation 61, 147124.32 = [K1.(y/t)+K2.(y/t)1- (1)

K1.( y /t ) = 5.86 (y/t)
K2.( y/t F = 2.86 (y/t)'
1471?432 5.86 6rft) 2.80 (y/t)
51,196.09 2.05 (yit) 1.00 (y/t)
51496.09 0.41 (y^) 0.01 (y/t)'
6437010.9 51.25 y 1.00 f
By lteraton
i Try'Y'= 6437010.92 9532.74 + 6434856.00
f 86,00 6437010.92 8{44388.74 D€cf€€86 valuo of'y'
6437010.98 9481.49 + 6331625.@
Try'Y'= 185.m 6487010.32 6341100.49 lncr€€8e vahJs ot' Y '
sag In Dec|(. 186.tt0

K3.(y/t)+K4.(y/tF
Equaion(2)=
$ff = st€s3 at cen1.e of D€ck

Fb at cefiu€ =
-fgrmar
2.37 N/mrlf(bn'dg.) 30.15 tfintnr (Diephr€gm)
32.52 tumff (tilal stsss)
Acc€ptable

ta(
eouariontzp
lfff K3.(y/t)+K4.(y/tf 1qr st.ess et €dg3 of D€ck

l'Umfif (Diaphr4m)
pb al edgp 3.65 tl/mfif 14'70
18.35 N/imf(b€ndlng) -
(total sfioss)

It is the diaphragm stress et the edge rdrich causes tfF tension at t|e out€r edgs
of the Deck and h€nce the str€ss in th€ lnner Rim.

Th€n rdialforce on Inn6r Rim =14.70 x5.00=73.51 N/mm.circ.

::::----l-r-
20.00
- rt,€ 24.34 N/mm Bending mnt. = 49.17 x 149.0o = 7326.67 N. mm

301.00
73.51 N / mm
49.17 N I mm
#
Section modulu8 ,=   r. D2
6 =
1 '
6.00
2o.oo2
= 66.67 ffin'

73n.67 N/mm'
Then b€nding sfess in Rim plete =
66.67
= 109.9)
Accoptable

Figure 6.9 Deslgn of a singlodeck floating roof foa 6 6torag6 tank deslgn€d to API 650 Appendix C end/or BS 2654 ' pago 6

162 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPiIENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 196/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roots - floating

Find Section Modulus of the Inn€r Rim using an area of 16 x thks. as the Section boundaries.

(16.t )
652.00
(16.r )

l=$x9:
--o* = 43i1666.67 mm

Z=lly = 43466.67 mmt

c.s.A. 13040.00 mm "
Check that the compressive stress in the Inner Rim is acceptable.
From Roark sth edition Table 17 Cas6 7 ( Formulas for circular rings )

Using load points at each mm of circumfrence, hence a very small angle between
lo€d points approximates to a u.d.l. acling on the lnner Rim.

2 x Alpha = angle between load pointr0.00'

Alpha: % angle between load points 0.001A72406"
=
0.00003268 rads.
1/Alpha = 360/2Pi x Alpha 30600.08429
'1lsin Alpha 30600.08429
1/Tan Alpha 30600.08428
Load / mm of Rim circumfrence 73.51 N/mm
No. of load ooints on the circum'fce 96133.00 ( one / mm of circ. )
Horiz. load on lnner Rim 'H' 0.074 kN / Load Point
Prooerties of the effeclive section of the lnner Rim
Rim diameter 30.60 m
Radius of lnner 'R'
Rim
C.S.A ofthe effective section 'A' 15300.00 mm
13040.00 mm ?

Section modulus Z li y(inptaneof load)

=
= 434666.667 mms
Moment between loads 'H' is :-
Mo = H x R /2(1/sin Alpha - 1/Alpha) 3.063 Nmm
Compression in Inn€r Rim is :-
No = H /2 (1/sin Alpha) 1124757.498 N
Mo lZ -- 0.00000705 N/mm2
No/A = 86.254 N/mm2
Total compressive stress in Inner Rim is :-
Mo/Z+No/A= 86.254 N/mm2
Allowable stress " 183.333 N/mm2
ls comp. stress < Allowsble stress ? Yes accept
Moment at loads 'H' is :-
Mi = H r R/ 2 (1/Alpha - 1/tan Alpha) 6.'126 Nmm
Tension in lnner Rim is :-
Ni = H/2 (1/tanAlpha) 1124757.498 N
MilZ= o.0o0o14og N/mm 2
NiiA= 86.254 N/mm'2
Total tsnsion in Inner Rim is :-
Mi/Z+Ni /A= 86.254 N/mm 2
Allowable stress = 183.333 N/mm2
ls tensile stress < Allowable stress ? Yes acc€pt
The stsossos are accepted

Figure 6.9 Design of a single-dock floating roof for a storage tank designed to API 650 Appendix C andlot BS 2654 - page 7

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 163

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 197/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - f,oating

Consider lhe effscl of two ounehjred pontoons and Cantre Deck

on the stability of the Flosting Roof.

k 34.@ m. dia.
F___=t.a 9-cqE'.g a
I
I
t- --j
Area of Pontoon = r. 14 x (34.6G - OO.602) = m4.Ez2 m2

0.57 rads.

Remaining Pontoon alr.ea= 2O4.8g2 * Sftu#@ = 186.211 m,

- - 2sinol2(R - r )' 2 sin a2]272 ( 17.3003 - 15.3m3 )

=
'-- -iTr€rrr = 3 x '186.211
1.610 m

Moment of Insrtia of remaining pontoon area :-

4n
ryr= (R-: t ) pn -(angoxrc)-sinA1

= (17.306 - 15.3004) [2 n - (32.7zfaox rE) - sin3z727l = (3at.OS)x (6.283 - 0.571 - 0.s41)

= 22480.08 ma

In = lly+(Ar€m. r Zr)
= 22480.08 + (186.2,t1x 1.6102) E [email protected] ma

U*lng morl6nt W€iSht of Rod ,W x Z

== 71.018
x
1.610
= 114.335 Tonn€s. m

Compss to adual scc€ntrtc bads i

D€ck= 33.101 x Ag.., x 15.300 = 46.g1 tqrnss.m

Por oons = .t.* " jrg* x 16.300 = 54.919 tonn€s. m

Ladder = 0.8511 x x =
8.755 7.i181 tofln€3. m
Tdal = 1(8.441 tonn€s. m
As 108.44 blrssthd| 114.38 Thc Roof tr O.K

Figure 6 9 Design of a singl+deck foating roof for a storage tank designed to AFI 6so Appendk c and/or Bs 26s4 - page 8

164 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 198/296
 6 The design of tank roofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Additional subm€rslon on FmcturEd side i

d,= ML, (R + z) +
- 114.335x (17.300 1.610) : nr?5.n
In '. 3.9. 22962.729 x O.7OO

gide
R€duced depth on oppcx3ito :-

o"= _l_E_:Z) = 114.335x{17.300-1.610) =

| )o( x s.g.
0.112 m
22962.729 \ O.70O

Nominel floatation dspth is 345.50 abov€ D€ck { ftom eerlief calcuhtion )

Ma)( submoision = 0.3i16 + 0.135 = 0.480 m

As thF ls < 0.606 (b. th€I€ is 'frEeboard" ot 0.126 tfie Roofldllio.t3.
Mh. subm€rsbn = 0.348 - 0.'112 =i 0.234 m
A IllA
Angb of Rod= ten< = O.O*'
ffi
Considor the influenco of 10' ( 254mm ) of ralnwst€r on the Ded(

Volum€ of rainfa ( fom pre\rious c€lqlhtbn ) :. 244.3n

Volurne of displaoement ( frcm pra/io6 calc.) i rt50.563

Area of total Roof= nl4 x y.602

= 940.247 m2
Area of D€ck only = dax s0.6002 = 735.415 m'

h'= height of rain\ at€rabove deck 244.?8 / 735.42 = O.33 m

0.61 1

depthl of submersion

Depth of gubmersion =
450.563 - 10.974 - [92.174x (0.149/0.450)]
940.25
450.563 - 10.974 - 30.520
= 0.435 m
940.247

Load due to ste€l Deck & rainwater = *955.932 +244376.639 = 278332.571

Upward iorce of produc*on u/s Deck 735.415 x 0.435 x 700.00 - 23%7.93

N€ft do nward forca 2785U.57 - 22gW;7.g34 73.92 k9lm'

= =
= 725.19 Nlm2
The Centre Deck deflects downwards due to the additional weight of water on the Deck.
This defledion is found from Roark sth Edition "Formulas for Strcss & Slrain" Chapte|l0.11 (page 406)

9.{ yrtl+re.(y/t)- (1)

E- t* = 1rr.1

ES = to.(y/t)+K4.{y/t
-- (2)

Figure 6.9 Design of a single-deck floating roof for a storage tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and/or BS 2654 - page 9

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 165

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 199/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

6 The desiqn of tank rcofs - floaling

Where q  = unit load of Deck (N/mm') -6

725 192 x 10- 0.00
5.00
wher6:- t = Deck Plate thks. (mm) 20.00
Thks. of Inn€r Rim Plate (mm)
80.00
\Mdth ot Deck mounting flat bar ( mm )
T = Thks. of Deck mounting flat bar ( mm ) 12.W
15300.00
a = radius of Tank (mm)

ooisson's ratio (03)

0.30
v=
[email protected]
E = youngs modulus ( Nlmrn')
275.OO
Dlat€ vield Etress ( N/mrn')
183.333
Ltt*.iote stress = Zn x Veld (N/mrn')

ub = b6nding stress (l'Umnf)

ijd = diaphragm stress (N/mnf)
P = total stress b+ud
Condition :- - ^^ 2.6 = 2.6
Fixed& HeH. K1 = ffi'= sae l(2= (1- v' )

At the
centre K3
= _-_e-
) . = 2.& K4= 0.98

Attheedse rc= +.ao K4 .= 0.4t

,t'Vy
Equation (1)' 304223.09 = [Kl (v/t) +rc.(v/iFl -
(1)

K1.{Y/t) = 586 (Y/t)

t<2.(vttf = 2.86 (Y/t)"
304223'w 5 86 (Y/t) 2.86 (y/t)'
106483.41 205 (Y/t) 1.00 (y/t)t
10&183.41 0'41 (Y/t) 0.01 (ylt)'
1*1c/.26 51 25 Y 1.00 t'

12095 13144256 00
'rss.u':- Try,y,= 8813156€51.3
31 +
13310425
Bv iteration
ev lncf,easo value of'v'
- is3ioiii.Sa
236.fit +
iiiiotis.eg iz1t5.ffi 13312053.00
of'v'
Try'y' = 237.00 i io4'; ag tggz+tgg o Dscreas€ value

Sag in Deck = 237'N

Equation (2)= = *4.(v/I)+K4 (v/tF -__ for max' stre$ at edse of Dock'
B#
ub aiJse = 4.65 l'umnr (bendin . 23'87 N/mrf (Diaphragm)
28 52 l't/mnr' (total gtress)
for max stress at cenirs ot Deck'
Equation (2)= = Xa (ylt\+K4'(y/tF
fff g.O2 N/mtrf (bn'dg.) -- (Diaphragm)
ub at centre = . 4e'95 N/mrf
51.97 N/mrf (total stress)
AccePtable
caus€s the tension at the outer edge
It is the diaphragm stress at the edge which
ot itre Oecti anO nence the siress in the Inner Rim'

Then radialforc€ on lnn€r Rim = 23.a7 x 5'@ = 11935 N/mm'circ'

= 732667 N mm
N/mm Bending mnt. = 49.17 X 149'00

301.
119.35 N / mm
149, 79.83 N / mm

lor BS m54 - page 10

storage tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and
Figure 6.9 Design of a singleieck ioating roof for a

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment
'166 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIP ENT 200/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank rcofs - lloating

x D2
B__-:a--
Seclion modulus = 1-::9-o
6.00
^2
= 66.67 mm 3

7326.67
hen bending stress in Rim plat€ = = 109.90 N /mm"
66.67 Accsptable
Find Seclion Modulus of lhe Inn6r Rim using an area of 1 6 x thks. as lhe Section boundaries.

l.aro.oo (16.1 )
652.00 412.ffi (16.1 )

r**
. BrD' 431666.67 mm
12 =
Z = lly = 43466.67 mmr
C,S.A = 13040.00 mmz
Check that the compressive stress in the lnner Rim is acceotabls.

From Roark sih edition Table 17 Cas€ 7 { Formulas for circular rings )

Using load points at e€ch mm of circumfren@, hen@ a very small angle b€tw€en
load points approximates to a u.d.l. ac{ing on the Innsr Rim.

2 x Alpha = angle betweon loadpoints

pointr 0.00374'
Alpha % angle between load
=
x Alpha
0.00187' : 0.00003268 rads.
1/Alpha = 360l2Pi 30600.08429
1/Sin Alpha 30600.0&t29
1/Tan Alpha 30600.08428
Load / mm of Rim circumfence 119.35 ll/mm
No. of load poinls on the circurnfrenc€ 96133.00 ( one / mm of circ. )
Horiz. load on lnner Rim 'H' 0.119 kN / Load Point
Prooertieg of th6 effedive s€ction of th6 Inner Rim
Rim diametor 30.60 m
Redius of lnner Rim'R' 15300.00 mm
C.S.A of the effec[ive section 'A 13040.00 mm'
S€c{ion modulus Z=
l/y(inplane 431666.667 mmr
Moment betwe€n lods'H' is :-
Mo = H x R /2 (1/sin Alpha - 1/Alpha) 4.973 Nmm
Compress'ron in lnn€r Rim is i
No=H/2(1/sinAlpha) 1826121.630 N
Mo/Z = 0.00001144 N/mm'
No/A = 140.040 l{/mm 2

Total compressivs glrsss in Inn€r Rim is :

MolZ+NolA= lrl{l.O40 lvmm :
Allo\ abl€ stress = 183.333 N/mm 2
ls comp. stress < Allo\i/abl6 sfess ? Yes accept

Figur€ 6.9 D€sign of a singledeck foatlng roof for a storag€ tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and lor BS 54- page 11

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 167

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 201/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

Moment at loads'H' is :-

Mi = H x R/2 (1/Alpha - 1/tan Alpha) 9.946 Nmm

Tension in lnner Rim is :-
Ni 1826121.629 N
MilZ=
=H/2(1/tanAlpha) 0.00002288 N/mm'z
Ni /A= 140.040 N/mm ?
Total tension in lnner Rim is :-
Mi/Z+Ni/A= 1/{l.0t0N/mm "
Allowable stress = 183.333 N/mm'?
ls tensile stress < Allowable stress ? Yes accept
Thc atresses are accePtod
The Deck'dishes' due to the weight of water as shown below:-

Solving the above geometry the radius of the'dished' Deck is 493.979 m

Vol. of dished Deck = fil3xb2 (3R- b) = 87.15 m"

244.377 - 87.154
Depth 'h' = 735.415
= 0.214 m

depth'd' 450.56 - 10.97- q0.520- 87.15

To find revised submersion = 940.247
= Q.342 m

Find nett load ac{ing on the Deck.

Weight of steel Deck = 33955.93 kg

kg
Weight of rain wate, = '#.* kS

Total upward force on Deck. = [e7.t54+ (735.415 x 0.342)]x 700.00 = 237258.37 l(g

Nett downward force = 278332.57 - 237258.371 = 41074.200 kg

This rep€sents a pressure of ss#i;w = b47.e1 N/m,

Figurc 6.9 Design of a singledeck tloating roof for a stoEge tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and lot Bs 2654 - page 12

168 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 202/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roofs - floating

Ch6ck again to ensure that the stressss in tlle lnnar Rim ar€ acceotable in this revised conditiol.

ftft = txr.tvrt)+r<:.(y/tft- (1)

[$ = r'c.tvr + K4. ( yrt )'l- (2)
\lvhere unit load of Deck (lvmrf )
547.905 x
1o6 0.00
where:- t = Deck plate thks. (mm) 5.CX)
Thks. of Inner Rim plate (mm) 20.00
Wdth of D€ck mounting flat bar ( mm ) 80.00
T= Thks. of D€cft mourning flat bar (mm ) 12.N
a* radius of Tank (mm) 15300.00

poisson's ratio ( 0.3 ) 0.30

E' youngs modulus ( Mmfif) 209000.00
275.O0
plate yi6ld streFs ( N/mrf)
alloureble stress = 2a x Yield (N/mrn:) 183.333

gb= bending stres6 (Nhrn'z)

diaphrqm str€ss (N/ffin')
p==
ucl dal sfess pb+Fd
Conditiofi t
5. = s.ao -25-.
= (1- v" ) =
Fh€d & H6ld. K1 = 1a2 2.s6
(1-v" )
At the centie l(3 =
11fo, = t'* K4 = o'ee

At the edg6 .:4:.=

l€= (1-v') 4.4O K4 = 0.4s

Equation (1). 229850.16 = 1K1.(y/t)+K2. (y/tFl- (1)

K1'(Y/t) = 5'86 (Y/t)
K2.( Y/ t F= 246 (Y/t)5
s.86 (v^) 2.86 (y/t)
229850.16
80451.58 2.05 (v^) 1.00 (y/t)3
80451.58 0.41 (v^) 0.01 (y/t)'
10056447 51.25 v 1.00 y'

By iteration i 10056447.11 11019.03 9938875.00

Try'y' 215,00 10056447.11 9949394.03 Incraase value of ' y '
1005&t47.11 11a70.28 10077696.@
Try'v' 2{6.00 10056447.11 10086766.3 D€crease value of ' y '
Sag |n Dsck 210.00

= (y/t)+ (I/tf
Equation {2)
es = l€. K4. stt€8s at edge of Deck.

-1e1to19.83 lvmfif (Diaphragm)

gb at edgs 4.24 lumm" (b€ndin
24.07 Nlmff (total sress)
Eouation 1e; = sbg" - l$, ( y/t) (Y/t f
+ K4. st.ees at centre of Declc

pb at cenbe = 2.75 N/mnf -1otto.

(bn'dg.) 40.66 N/mrf (Diaphragm)
= 43,41 N/mm. (lotalsbgss)
Acceptable

It is the diaphragm stress at the edge wtlich cau$€s th€ teneion at he outer edge
of thg DecI and hence the sgsss in the Inner Rim.

Figuro 6.9 Design of a single-deck floating roof for a storage tank designsd io API 650 Appendix C andlor BS A)54 ' page 13

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 169

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 203/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design ol tank rmfs - f,oating

Thsn radialforca on Inner Rim L= 19.E3 r 5.0o = 99.14 N/mm-cirr,

20.00 ,
:::=:I--r _
,

€ 32.83 N/mm Bending mnt. = 49.17 x 1/19.00 = 7326.67 N. mm

99.'14 N / mm
66.31 N / mm
€
x 20.00
t-Tm- t
Secton modulus ,= = 66.67 mm

Thon bending 3he33|n Rim Plate = ff - 109.90 N/mmz

Aceeltablo

Find Ssction ModulG of the Inner Rim using an ere€ of 1 6 x thks. as the Seciion boundad€s.

--T
l.oeo.oo (16.1 )
f _+12.00
(16.r )
1320.00
- --7--
r= BizD' = /t31666'67 mm

Z = lly = 43466.67 mm
C.S.A. = 13040.00 mm 2

Check lhat the comorassive strsss in the lnner Rim is accsptable.

From Roerk sth €dition Table 17 Cas€ 7 ( Formulae for oircular rings )

Using load poinb at each mm of circumfenc€, h6nc6 a very gmall angle between
load points approimates to a u.d.l. ac-ting on the lnn€r Rim.

2 x Alpha = angle betw€€n load pointt 0.0037448'1 '

Alph€ = % angle b€tiveen load points 0.001 872406 ' = 0.@003268 rads.
llAlpha = 3602Pi r Alpha 30600.08429
1/Sin Alpha 30600.08429
1/Tan Alpha 30600.08128
Load / mm of Rim ciiqJrnfi'\ence 99.14 N/mm
No. of loed points on the cirdrmfrenc€ 96133.00 ( one / mm of drc. )
Horiz. load on lnner Rim 'H'0.099 kN / Lo€d Point
Ploosrties of th6 efiectiv€ section ofth6 lnner Rim
Rim diam€ter 30.60 m
Radius of lnner Rim 'R' 15300.00 mm
C.S.A of fi€ efective €edion 'A 13040,@ mm "
S€dion modulus Z = l/y(inplane 434€66.667 mm
Moment betrvs€n loads 'H' is i
Mo = H x R/2 (U3in Alpha - 1/Alpha) 4.131 Nmm
Compression in Inner Rim is r
No=H/2(1/sinAlpha) 1516842.578 N
MolZ 0.00000950 N/mm 2:
=
No/A '116.322 N/mm r'
=

Figure 6.9 Design of a single-deck lloaling roof for e storage tank deslgned to API 650 Appendlx C and lor BS m54 - page 14

170 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 204/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank rcofs - f,oating

Total comoregsivo str€ss in lnner Rim is :-

Mo/Z+No/A= 114322 N/mm 2
Allowable slr€ss = 183.333 N/mm'
ls comp. stross < Allowable stress ? Yeg accept

i/bm€nt
Mi = H x at
R loads 'H' is - 1/ tan Alpha)
/2 (l/Alpha
Temion in lnner Rim is :-
t 8.262 Nmm

Ni =H/2(1/tanAlpha) 1516842.578 N
MitZ= 0.000019O1 N/mm'l
Ni/A= 116.322 lumm '
Total tonsion in lnner Rim is :-
Mi/Z+Ni/A= 116.322 N/mm "
Allo,vable stress = 183.333 Nlmm 2
ls tensile stress < Allorvable sbess ? Yes accept
The atrgasgs are acceptod

R€sultino state of floalation.

j,,o

Not6 that the normal oo€rational floatation lsvel here 82 mm

Dosion of tho suoporting l€gs.

Not6 that the legs are to b€ designed to carry only the woight of the roof and not the w€ight ot any
accumulaled rain water on the deck. To lhis snd it i5 important to ensure lhat when the tank is out of
ot s6rvic6, the drain bungs must bs removed from the deck io allow any rain water to drain io the tank
floor.

There arE two types of support l6gs.

9242 mm tor oulgr lsgs

3298 mm for inner l6gs

I
I

8 Inn€r deck legs arc on a 4.42 m. radius.

18 Ouler d6ct leg6 ar6 on a 10.00 m. rgdius.
11 Pontoon legs ar€ on a 16.46 m. radius.

Flgure 6.9 Deslgn of a singl+deck floaling roof for a storage tank designed to API 650 Appendix C and/or BS 2654 - pago t5

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 171

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 205/296
7/18/2019
6 The design of lank rcofs - floatinq Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

hner deck legs.

Area of deck supported by the inner legs is 7.21 m. rad. = 163.25 np

Areap€rtos t33f = 20.41 .rf

TotalwL of csntre deck = 9395S.9A ko. 333.@ kN
Load on one teg s33.oo 9.24 kN
= ( Ar€a ; #+
ofdeck) ' -" -' =
Add tive load of 1.2ktunf = 24.49 kN
Load on one leg = 33.73 kN
Use 3' nb. scfi 80 pipe. 88.9mm o.d. x 7_62mm rrvall = 73.66mm i_d. cc.s,a. i948mfii,
=
Lenglh of leg
3299 mm
fc=L/A = *72738 = 17.31 N / mrff
1948
g+-
Ltt = 28.96 = 113.88 From BS 449 Tabte 17a Aflowabte stress = 66.00 N/mrf
Actual stress is less than allowable, design accepted.

Outer deck leos.

Area of deck supported by the outer legs is that v/hich is
aN
12.07 m. rcd. 7.21 m. rad_ = ?94.76 .rF between i
Area p€rteg 294J0 = 16.39 6,

TotalM. of centre deck = 33955.93 kg. _^ 333.00 kN

Load on oneleg = ^^
333.00 x j:.jo-- 7.41 kN
( Area ofdeskl tro.ez
Add live load ot 1.2kN/m,
Load on one teg
= 19.65 kN
Use 3' nb. sch 80 pipe. 88.9mm
= 27.07 kN
o.d. x 7.62mm walt 7g.66mm
= i.d. cc.s.a. = 194gmrf
Length of leg3242 mm

fc=L/A= 27CE,5'37
- 13.89 N / mml
1948

Ltr= za.w
H 111.95 From BS 449 Table 17a Allowabte stress = 66.00 N/mm2

Actual stress is less than allowable, design acc€pted.

Pontoon legs.

Arsa of deck supported by th€ pontoon legs is that which is between :-

15.30 m. rad. and 12.07 m. rad. = 277.41 ftf,
the toad on this area is sse.OO x
ffi = lflS.at KN

Add live load of 1_2 kN / rnz = 332.89 kN

Add weight of pontoons 37061.58 kg 363.46 kN
Total load = 821.96 kN
No. of pontoon legs 11 Load per lss 821'96 74.72 kN
= = 11 -
Use 3" nb. sc+l 80 pipe. 88.9mm o.d. x 7.62mm wall= 73.66mm i.d. cc.s.a. .1948mrfl2
=
Length dleg 3091 mm
fc=L/A = 747?3=43 = 38.36 N / mrn2
1948
LIr= 309'1 = 106.73 From BS 449 Table 17a Allowable stress = 72.00 N I mnr,
28.96
Actual strers ts less than allowable, design acc€pted.

Figure 6 9 Design ola singre-deck floating roof for a storage tank designed to Apl650 Appendlx c and/or BS 26s4 - pags 76

172 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 206/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roofs - floating

lnternal roofs either float directly on the product, and therefore

there is no vapour space, or, the sealing membrane is carried
above the oroduct on oontoons and so there is a confined
vapour space. The likelihood of an explosion orfire in this space
is improbable as the saturated vapour will be too rich to support
combustion.
An important issue, which is relevant to the use of internalfloat-
ing roofs, is that the free space above the roof must be ade-
quately vented to prevent an accumulation of a potentially ex-
plosive weak vapour and air mixture, and this is usually
achieved by fitting large purpose made vent cowls around the
periphery of the tank roof, together with a vent at the crown of
the roof. These vents encourage the scouring of this space by
wind action.
The usage of capacity of the tank is governed by the limit of
travel of the roof within the tank. The lowest level is determined
by the roof not fouling any floor piping or shellflttings which pro-
trude into the tank. Also for maintenance purposes, personnel
will require access to the underside of the roof via the shell
mannore.
The upper limit is governed by the type of roof structure and/or
the depth of the shell brackets supporting the roof structure.
Large diameter tanks which have a truss type roof structure
which extends belowthe levelofthe top of the shellcan signifi
cantly reduce usable volume.

6.4.1 Types of internal floating roofs Prnoli loDrot, 600 mfr r 600 mm r 60 mr rhich

. Pan roof
. Honeycomb roof
. Pontoon and skin roof
6.4.1.1 Pan roof
The pan roof, shown diagrammatically in Figure6.10, consists
of a circular membrane with a vertical outer rim plate on to
which the rim gap seal is mounted. This type of roof is prone to
sinking because it does not have any closed buoyancy com-
partments. Leakage on to the roof can cause it to capsize and
sink. Hence, whilst cheap to construct, the operational disad-
vantage of this type of roof means that it is rarely, if ever used. C.os3 secton olPtna' rnd tinrninq
6.4.1.2 Honeycomb roof
The construction ofthis type of roof is shown diagrammatically Figure 6.11 A honeycomb type foof consiruction
in Figure 6.11. lt is made from panels of aluminium orplastic CauTesy af MB Engineering Services Lid
which consist of a upper and lowerskin separated by a matrix of
internal cells, or a plasticfoam. The panels are usually between
25 and 80mm thick and are connected together by purpose- A disadvantage in this form of construction is that punctured
made extruded sections. This type of roof can be prone to the panels which are contaminated with product make a drained
skin separating from the honeycomb but has the advantage of down, oufof-service tank, very difficult to gas free for mainte-
natural inherent buoyancy. lt can suffer being punctured with- nance purposes untilthe damaged panels are identified and re-
out loosing buoyancy, but the light construction can be dam- moved from the tank.
aged by turbulence due to slugs of air in the import pipeline.
6.4.1.3 Pontoon and skin roof
This roof is illustrated in Figure 6.12 and consists ofa number of
straight lengths of tubular aluminium pontoons. These pon-
toons are arranged in a ring around the periphery of the roof
with parallel rows of pontoons connecting from one side of the
ring to the other The rows of pontoons are connected together
by purpose-made aluminium extruded sections set at right an-
gles to the lines of pontoons the ends being joined to ihe outer
pontoon ring.

Attached to the matrix formed by these sections is a thin alu-

minium skin which forms the vapour barrier. The skin sits above
the product by about 150 to 200 mm and the gap is sealed at the
periphery of the roof by a vertical rim plate, the lower end of
which is immersed in the product. The peripheral rim gap is
igufe 6.'10 A pan roof shown diagrammatically sealed with a pfeformed flexible wiper seal.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT '173

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 207/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

Anti.rotation root irtling

gauge Piping
I Peripheril roof
v€nt/inspecllon hatch
I

t
St€p on
thiofhatcb

Oprbnal

Anti.rotalion
't18" g s.s
ground cables through fiting
bolted to
rim plate

Automatlcgaugo Rim pontoons

Anti-rolaton
lug"rvelded
to noor

Ult_a$all

Rim ponloons

and actuatorleg

Figure 6.12 The ponloon and skin roof - showing the normal appurtenances for an internal tloating roof
Courtesv of Ulthflote Comoratbn

These internaldecks are usually proprietary designs and so all

The required load bearing capacity for these roofs varies from design work for them is completed by the specific manufac-
Code to Code. The API Code has the most stringent require- turer They are usuallydesigned so that allthe component pads
ment, which requires the roof when iloating orwhen supported can be passed through a 24" (610mm ) diameter manhole. This
a load which is equivalentto
on its legs, tomen
at leasttwo be able to safely
walking carry
anywhereon the roof, (2200 N overan allows them to be retro fitted to existing bnks.
area of 0.1 m2), which translates to an isolated load of 22 kN
over 1m2. 6.5 External floating roof appurtenances
Similarlythe BS and European Codes require that at least three The diagram shown in Figure 6.13 shows the principle appurte-
men should be suooorted over an area of 3 m2 which is an nances which are required for the operation of a externalfloat-
equivalent isolated load of only 1 kN over 1m2. ing roof. The diagram depicts a single-deck roof but the princi-
ples are basically the same for all roofs.
The appurtenances provided on these type of roofs are also
shown in Figure 6.12.
6.5,1 Roof support legs
Ensuring electrical continuity between the deck and the tank is
very important in order to allow any charges of static electricity When the tank is empty, thefloating roofneeds to be supported
which are transmitted to the deck from the product to be re- atsome distance abovethe tankfloor. This is necessary sothat
leased safely. All conductive surfaces of the roof must be elec- the roof does not foul any heating coils, drain lines, shell-
shunts connected
trically and
in the seal (a bondedoffourto
minimum to the shell
APIeither by electrical
) or in the case of
mounted propeller mixers etc. Also access will be required via
the shell manholes for the maintenance personnel.
the BS or European Codes by multi-stranded flexible cables at-
The roof is therefore provided with support legs and these can
tached to the too surface of the deck and the tank roof or shell.
be seen in Figures 6.4, 6.5 and 6.7 and specifically in Figure
Two cables are required on ianks up to 20m diameter, and four
for largersizes. The European Code reconmends that the min-
6.14. The legs consist of two concentric tubes. The outer,
imum cross sectionalarea ofeach stranded cable should be 80
shorter tube, which is normally of 100 mm n.b. schedule 80
pipe, forms a housing which is welded into the roof. The inner
mm'. Care must be taken to ensure that the cables do not snag
tube, which forms the suppo( leg is normally of 80 mm n.b.
on any ofthe rooffittings during the operation ofthe roof and it
schedule 80 pipe and is secured to the housing with a steel pin
may be that spring loaded cable reels can be used to keep the
cables tensioned at all times.
which passes through both tubes.
The selection ofthe pipe sizesabove givesa radialclearance of
The fullCode design requirements can befound in thefollowing
4 mm between the tubes which is large enough to prevent the
publications:
assembly seizing up due to corrosion or the ing ress of detritus.
BS 2654 Aooendix E The legs normally have two pin location holes, one giving a leg

API 650 Appendix H length for operational conditions and the other allowing a lon-
ger leg which is used when the tank is coming out of service.
prEN 14015 -1 2000 Annex C This additional length increases headroom under the roof for

174 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 208/296
 6 The design oftank roofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

I RoqfdFin .,
2 Rolling ladder
3 Roling l.dder . r$EY
4 Gaugers plalfom 12 Arlond. bl€.der vent
5 4.c6. to gaug6B plaform
6 Suppon bgs
7 RlmEnr
I Dock mnhole
Figure 6.13 Pfincipalfloating roof appurtenances

tanks up to 60 metres in diamete( and one leg per 26 square

metres for tanks larger than 60 metres in diameter. Astructural
design check isthe made on the legsto ensure that they are ca-
pable of carrying the required loads.

The centre deck legs are located as near as possible on

eoui-soaced radii between the tank centre and the inner rim of
the pontoon.

The concentric tube construction of the legs allows product

vapour to escape through the annular space between the leg
and its housing and also through the leg location pin holes. This
can be prevented by covering each leg with a non-permeable
fabric tube, closed off at the top and tightly clamped around the
leg housing at the bottom. They are known in the tank industry
as "leg socks".

6.5.2 Guide pole

Figure 6.14 The undercide of a floating roof showing the support legs and in-
ternal DiDewo|k
Couftesy of McTay Avertical guide pole is situated about one metre inside the tank
shell and its purpose is to prevent the floating rooffrom rotating
maintenance personnel. The adjustment of the leg pin position in the tank. The pole is usually made from 300 to 450 mm n.b.
is made manually, while the roof is floating, and hence it is rec- pipe. The lower end is connected to the tank floor (or lower
ommended that the leg size is limited to 80 mm n.b. as a larger shell) and at the top to the gaugers platform, which is an exten-
size would be too heavy to handle. sion to the tank top access stair. Only one of the connections
Where the leg housings arewelded into single-decks which are can be rigid and it is normalforthis to be the lowerone, the top
lap-welded on the top side only, it is recommended to stitch- of the pole passing through a large diameter ring at platform
weldthe underside lapsto give added strength inthe area ofthe levelwhich has three adjusting screws for plumbing the pole.
housing connection.
The pole passes through a trunking in the roof pontoons, the
The area of the floor on which the legs land is normally rein- top cover of which is fitted with rollers to prevent lateral move-
forced with afullywelded doubler plate which distributes the leg ment ofthe roof in the trunking. Radial movement ofthe roof is
loads into the floor plating. Also the boftom of each leg should not restrained here as this is provided by the roof seal system
be notched to allow producttrapped in the leg during service, to which tends to centralisethe roofin thetank. Excessive escape
drain out as the tank is drained down of vapour from the radial elongated slot in the cover of the
trunking is limited by the use ofa brass plate, which is a snug fit
The support requirements for a single-deck pontoon type roof
on the pole but is allowed to slide radially across the coverofthe
require careful consideration, as this type of roof is not as rigid
trunking, thus sealing the slot in the cover.
as the double-deck type.
An initial calculation for the numberofsupport legs required for The guide pole is very often used to house level-indicating
a single-deck roof can be approximated as follows : equipment. To ensure that the product level in the pole is the
same as the level in the tank, slots are cut in the pole to allow
For the pontoon support legs, allow one leg per 6 metres of
the liquid levels to equalise. This has the disadvantiage in that
tank circumference.
the slots allow the escape of vapour into the atmosphere, al-
The number
allowing one of
legcentre
per 34deck
square can beofroughly
legsmetres centre calculated by
deck area for though
certina this
typemay be minimised bythe use of a tubularfabric
sealing system on the oubide ofthe pole. con-

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 175

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 209/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

6.5.3 Roof seals tres and the open top of these creases is capped to preven:
vapour emission. The creases, as well as allowing the seal rinE
The gap behveen the inside ofthe tank shelland the outer rim of to conform to the shape ofthe shell, also act as stiffeners where
the floating roof is normally about 200 mm. This gap is provided the thrust from the pantograph mechanisms is transmitted tc
to ensure that the roof will notjam aga;nst the shell during oper- the seal ring.
ation. One of the disadvantages of this type of seal is that the
To preventthe escape ofvapourfrom this gap and to minimise U-shaped fabric seal can collect rainwater, shell corrosion
the amount of rain entering the product here, a sealing system products and any waxy residue deposited on the shell. To mini-
is requlred. This sealing sysiem has to be flexible enough to al- mise this, a second ring of short overlapping plates called a
lowfor any irregularities in the construction of the roof and shell weather shield can be attached to the pontoon rim and rest
when the roof is travelling up and down and for any radial or lat- againstthe shell at about 60'. This weathershield helps to shed
eral movement of the roof due to wind or other action. rainwater and any detritus from the seal. With regard to waxy
deposits on the shell, the upper edge of the ring of seal plates
When floating roofs were first devised, they were fitted with just
can be formed to act as a scraper on the shell to remove any
one primary sealing system but recent legislation, which limits waxy producb.
vapour emissions, has meant that a secondary seal is now re- I
quired to be mounted above the primary To ensure the dispersal of any static or lightning, a series ofthin
flexible stainless steel shunts are connected between the bolt
Many types of primary seal have been devised over the years
rings ofthe roofand the sealring thus giving electrical continu-
sincefloating roofs weredeveloped and a selection ofthese are ity between the roof and the shell.
discussed below together with the more recently developed
compression plate type of primary and secondary seal. 6.5.3.2 Liquid-filled fabric seal

6.5.3.1 Mechanical seals The liquid-filled fabric seal, see Figure 6.16, consists of a petro-
leum and abrasion resistant synthetic rubber type tube filled
This type ofseal has been in use for many years and its robust
construction gives years of maintenance free service, Figure with
tioned in to
200 the250
rim mm
space andofis sealing
depth liquid.
supported This
at its tubeend
lower is posi-
by a
6.15 illustrates such a seal. bottom ring on a hanger system.

Fgure 6.16 Llquid-filled fab cseal

Figure 6.15 Mechanical seal Couftesy of Chicago Bridge & lron Conpany (CB & 1)

Coutlesy of Chicago Bidge & lron Company (CB & I)

The sealing liquid ensures close contact of the tube on the tank
The seal consists of a ring of thin galvanised or stainless steel shelland the outer rim ofthe floating roof. The liquid may be fuel
plates, each about 4 metres long and 1.2 metres deep, bolted oil or the same liquid as that stored in the tank. In non-freezing
together with sealing strips and countersunk bolts. climates water may be used as the sealing liquid. The sealing
This ring of sealing plates is kept in close contact with the shell liquid makes the tube take up whatever rim space is available
by a series of weighted or spring-loaded pantograph mecha- around the circumference and automatically compensates for
nisms mounted on the outer rim of the pontoons. The lower discontinuities in the shell or roof rim profile. The fixed diameter
edge of the plates is immersed in the product and the upper flexible bottom ring is supported by a hanger system which in-
edge is roughly level with the top rim of the pontoons. The gap corporates bumper bars to limit the minimum rim gap and pre-
between the plates and the pontoons is sealed by a flexible vents pinching ofthe tube material. This flexible ring has a fixed
U-shaped fabric which is connected to the top of the ring of circumference and therefore automatically aligns to any dis-
plates and to the pontoon rim by clamp bars and bolb. continuities in the major or minor axes ofthe tank and roof. The
usual rim space range is plus or minus l00 mm on a nominal
Vapour can escape howeverwhere irreguladties in the shape of rim gap of 200 mm.
the shell allow gaps between the plates and the shell. To allevi-
6.5.3.3 Resilient foam-filled seal
ate this problem the seal ring can be made to accommodate
such changes in shape by the introduction of flexure points in This type of seal, shown in Figure 6.17, is similar to the liq-
the seal plates. These flexure points are formed by vertical uid-filled seal except that the tube is filled with pre-formed
shallow V-shaoed creases in the olates at about 560 mm cen- blocks of resilient urethane foam, ratherthan a liquid and there-

176 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 210/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roofs - floating

advantage ofthis type of seal is that it can be fitted from above

the roofwithout the tank having to be taken out of service. This
type of seal is illustrated in Figure 6.18.
Primary seals
The success of compression plate secondary seals led manu-
facturers to develop this type of design as a primary seal also.
The technology, geometry materials ofconstruction and the fix-
ing method is the same as that of the secondary seal, the main
difference being thatthe primary seal deflects downwardssuch

thatthetip
liouid.
ofthe sealis usuallyjust above the levelofthe stored

This type of p mary seal is very often fitted in conjunction with

its counterpart secondaryseal. lt is used for newtanks and also
as the replacement system for the older type of exisling seals
when it becomes due for retirement. As mentioned earlier, an
advantage of these seals is that they can be iitted from above
the floating roof. See Figure 6.19.
Seals incorporating foam dams
An effective way to contain and deal with a potential fire in the
rim space ofa floating roof tank is to provide a foam dam at the
outer rim of the roof. This short vertical steel wall ensures that
Figure 6-17 Resilient foam-filled seal
Couiesy ot Chicago Btdge & lrcn Company (CB & l)

fore does not require a bottom hangersupport system. The re-

silient foam blocks ensure a good contact of the tube on the
shell and roof outer rim gap of 200 mm. The seal allows varia-
tions of t '100 mm in the rim space and excessive pinching of
the seal tube is prevented by limiting bumper bars mounted on
the lower edge of the outer rim of the roof.
Advantages of thls type of seal are that when it is mounted just
above the liquid level in the rim gap, any small tears or abra-
sions in the tube will not cause a serious collapse of the seal.
Also, when replacement is finally necessary this may be done
entirely from above the roof.
6.5.3.4 Compression plate type seals

In terms of the timescale of the evolution of floating roofs, the

compression plate type ofseal is a more recent innovation and
these are described as follows.
Secondary seals
Demanding environmental requirements required seal manu-
facturers to develop seals which would significantly reduce
even furtherthe vapourorodourlossesfromfloating roof tanks. Figure 6.18 Compression plate lype secondary seal
Itwasfound that even properly maintained primary seals, oper- Courtesy of McTay
ating in geometrically accurate tiank shells, permitted vapour
losses from the rim gap due to the swirling, scouring action of
the wind within the tank. To counter this, independently
mounted spring action compression plate secondary seals,
formed from thin galvanised steel or stainless steelsheet, were
mounted above the primary seal thus excluding the wind from
the rim gap.
The number and size ofthe plates are custom-made to suitthe
profile of the shell, roof and the rim gap and the bolting pitch is
made to suit the existing vertical or horizontal seal mounting
ring on the outer rim ofthe roof. The spring action, due to the in-
duced compression in the plates ensures a close seal between
the abrasion resistant polymer seal tip and the shell. The tip is
bolted to the edge ofthe plate and thejoints between adjacent
lengths of tip are overlapped with a scarfed joint and bonded
with an adhesive compound.
Thejoints between adjacent compression plates are bolted and
sealed with a sofr gasketand allow relative movement between
the plates whilst preserving an impervious seal. In some cases
plates
the
flexible are not
vapour bolted andissealed,
barrierfabric but instead
fitted behind a continuous
the plates attached Figure 6- 19 Compression plate type primary and secondary seals
to the seal tip and the seal mounting ring on the roof. Afurther CouTesy of McTay

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 177

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 211/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs - floating

as the top-injected fire fighting foam spills down the inside face Several sets of foam generating and injection equipment are
ofthe shell, the foam dam contains and concentrates the foam provided, equi-spaced around the tank periphery on extensis,
within the rim space and does not allow it spillout overthe sur- plales set above and bolted to the shell top curb angle. Thb
face ofthe roof. Some ofthe olderfloating rooftanks were not equipment consists ofa foam generatorand pourer The equilF
provided with foam dams and a further refinement, which can ment is fed by piping from a fire fighting point in a safe positim
be included when fitting the compression plate type ofseals, is outside the tank bund area.
the inclusion ofa purpose-made foam dam. The design is such
During a fire, a measured amount ofa proprieiary foam making
that no hotwork is required to fit itas it bolts on to the sealfixing
compound is injected into the fire water system leading to the
ring. Again, the tank does not have to be taken out of service to
foam generating points on the tank. The foam generators are
have this refinement See Figure
fitted. 6.20. designed to draw air into the mixture, causing the foam to ex-
pand as it is injected into the tank via the pourer, which is a
downward facing cowling on the inside ofthe extension plate.
This pourer injects the foam on to the internal surface ofthe ex-
tension plate and hence on to the tank shell, causing it to flow
down the shell and collect and spread around the rim space.
The foam is contained and concenAaled within the area ofthe
rim space by a vertical metal foam dam attached to the upper
pontoon plates close tothe seal. This dam isset higherthan the
upper tip ofthe sealand thus the complete seal area becomes
flooded with foam and the fire thus extinguished. A typical ar-
rangement of the equipment on the tank is shown in Figure
6.21.

ootDL $d,ith i'n $.1Fdmds

Figure 6.20 Compression platetype primary and secondary sealswith a foam

Cowiesy of McTay

6.5.4 Rim vents

Depending upon how a tank receives product, there are in-

*'I
stances where entrained vapour may be released into the tank
from the filling pipeline. This surge of vapour would seek re-
lease from the tank via the rim gap and the resulting build-up of
pressure could cause damage to the sealing fabric. To prevent
this, a venttube may be fltted between the outer rim and the up-
per deck ofthe pontoon where eithera pressure reliefvalve or a
free vent is fitted.

6.5.5 Drain plugs

At least one screwed drain plug is fitted flush to the deck of the
roof and this is oDened when thetank is drained down and out of Figue 6.21 Foam fire fighting system
service. The open drain allows rainwaterto d€in from the sur- Courtesy of Angus Fire
face of the roof on to the tank floor and thus relieves the roof
support legs of any additional load. 6.5.6.1 Rim fire detection

6.5.6 Fire fighting The fire fighting equipment can betriggered to operate bya de-
tection system which is in the rim space. This can take the form
Fires in floating roof tanks are usually limited to the area be- of a small bore Dlastic tube which runs around the whole cir-
tween the shelland the rim ofthe floating roof i.e. the rim space. cumference of the rim area.
However, fires in this area arefairly rare, becausethe available
sources of ignition are generally limited to that of a lightning This tube is connected into a more substantial piping system in
strike, or a discharge of static electricity between the roof and both flexible and hard piping, which is connected into a fire fight-
the shell. The latter is virtually eliminated by the earthing sys- ing alarm or initiation control unit on the gaugers platform. The
temswhichare incorDorated into the tiank structure and seals. rim tubing is subjected to an internal pressure and in the event
ofa fire, the tubing melts releasing the pressure thus triggering
Nevertheless fire tighting systems are provided on tanks and an alarm and/or actuating the fire fighting system.
one such system is designed to deliver a flame smothering ex-
panded quickly
foam
tinguishes the mixture
fire. into the tank rim space which ex- Another method is to have a series oftensioned wireswith fus-
ible links ananged around the rim space. Again, in the event of
Such a system may be set up in the following way: a fire a fused link would cause the alarm to be raised.

178 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 212/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 6 The design of tank roofs - floating

6.5.7 Roof drains The hose system is outlined in Figure 6.23, and Figure 6.24
shows a tubular frame welded to the tank floor which is de-
The rainfall which accumulates on the surface of the floating signed to guide the hose away from the leg landing area.
roof is drained to one or more sumps set into the low points of 6.5.7.3 Helical flexible hose
the top roof membrane. The sump is diained through a closed
The helical hose (see Figure 6.25), is a refinement of the
pipework or hose system which operates within the tank. The
straight hose as it is designed to take up the form of a helical
uppel end is connected into the side ofthe sump and the lower
spring, the idea being that it mainiains a constiant repeatable
end to a low level shell nozzle and gate valve. To prevent the
lay-down pattern on the tank floor, expanding and contracting
roof from being flooded with product in the event of a failure in
with the rise and fall of the roof.
the drain system, a non-return valve is fitted to the outletwithin
me sump. Hoses can
service and of course sustain
if punctured the storeddue
allow damage to malfunctions
product in
into the drain
The pipework system has to be flexible to allow for the move-
system.
ment of the roof and this can be accommodated by using the
following: The gate valve on the drain nozzle at the shell ofthe tank is al-
ways kept closed exceptwhen draining water from the roof and
6.5.7.1 Articulated piping system
it is important to regularly monitorthe roof for the accumulation
This type ofdrain uses a solid steel piping system with a series ofwater, which must be drained off leaving the system dry es-
ofarticulated knucklejoints, see Figure 6.22- lt is ofrugged con-
struction but can suffer from seizure ofthe articulatedjoints due
to the slow movementofthe roof or lengthy periods ofinactivity
due to the roof being stationary This can result in the joints be-
ing strained causing them to fail and allowing product into the
drain system.
However, a variation of this type of joint has been devised

lengthsteel
whereby bracket, pivoting in one plane and
housing aashort
two-piece
of armoured flexible hose connected to
the face of each bracket, is used as the flexible joint.
6.5,7.2 Armoured flexible hose
This type of system eliminates the need for articulated joinb,
but it has been known for the hose to snag on internal tank fit-
tings orfor it to be trapped under a roofsupport leg as the roof Figure 6.23 An armoured iexible hose
orounds on the tank floor.

Figure 6.24 Alubularframe welded to the tank floor

Couftesy of McTay

Figure 6.25 Helicalflexible hose

igure 6.22 Arliculated pipe drainage system forfloating roof tanks Courtesy of McTay

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 179

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 213/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
6 The design of tank roofs lloaw

At this particular refinery the roof drainage was achieved by an

employee who, armed with a bicycle, would cycle from tank to
tank. He would climb the radial or circumferential tank stairway
and look down at the floating roof. lf accumulated rainwaterwas
present, he would descend and drain the water into the site
drains using the external valve. During his visit to the tank he
would check to see that no oil was present in the drained water.
indicating the beginnings of an internaldrain problem. He would
also look to see if the roof drain sump outlet was clear and not

blocked
bund wasbynotsundry
beingdebris or seagulls'
undermined by thenests and that
local rabbit the tank
population.
In addition to performing a useful purpose and having a pleas-
ant outdoor life, the combination of cycling several miles each
day and climbing several hundred feet up tank stairways kept
our friend as fit as a butcher's dog.
Sadly this idyllic state of affairs was not to be allowed to con-
tinue. New management, equipped with the cost cutting gene
Figufe 6 26 Cofnectons to ihe roofsump and the steetouttet piping to the were installed. The tank drain man and his bicycle were seen as
being rather old-fashioned and were removed from the payroll.
Half-hearted attempts to use clever drainage valves which
could discriminate between rainwater and oil, and conse-
pecially in cold conditions, when damage to the system can oc- quently allow the tank drain valves to remain constantly open,
cur due to freezing within the system. were made but this is an expensive and problematic area and
was consequently soon forgotten.
The drain valve must never be left open when unattended, as
this could lead to the tank bund being flooded with product in the Some little time later, one of the tanks came to the attention of
event of a failure of the drain system within the bnk. the facility management. lt was exhibiting contradictory symp-
Figure 6.26 shows the connections to the roof sump and the toms. The rolling ladder was inclined at an angle which indi-
cated that the tank was emptywhereas the Ievel indication sys-
steel outlet piping to the tank shell.
tem indicated that the tank was full. lt was decided that the
6.5.7.4 Drain design Codes rolling laddercould not lie whilstthe levelindication could, as in
The design Codes require that at least one roof drain shall be the past it had occasionally failed to register the correct situa-
provided as follows: tion.
API Code Without examining the tank further, filling was commenced.
Product soon poured overthe top ofthe tank shell and began to
The drain diameter should be:
accumulate within the bund. Because of the lack of oersonnel
at least 3" (80 mm) diameter, fortanks < = 36 m diameter. around the site, this situation continued for some time. Eventu-
ally the problem was spotted and the filling stopped. At this
at least 4" (100 mm) diameter for tanks > 36 m diameter.
BS Code stage the following situation existed:
. The bund was half full of an expensive and now useless
The drain diameter should be: prod uct
75 mm diameter, for tanks < = 30 m diameter. . This product had to be removed at considerable cost
100 mm diameter, for tanks > 30 m diameter. . The ground within the bund was saturated with product and
150 mm diameter, for tanks > 60 m diameter. required exoensive treatment
European Code . The floating roof had sunk some time earlier under the
The drain diameter should be; weight of undrained rainwater

75 mm diameter, for tanks < 30 m diameter. . The tank had to be emptied, cleaned and repaired

100 mm diameter, for tanks 30 to 60 m diameter. For allowing an effectively open-topped tank containing a vola-
tile product to pollute the atmosphere for an unknown period of
150 mm diameter, for tanks > 60 m diameter. time and for allowing a considerable spill to occur, a fine and a
6.5.7.5 "The man who drained the floating roofs" serious finger wagging was dealt to the company by the Health
and Safety Executive
- A cautionary tale: All of which made the savings due to the elimination of the tank
Alarge refinery located in the UK, which shall remain nameless,
had a large number of floating roof tanks storing crude oil and drain man and his bike seem rather a poor deall
refined products. It was not all bad news however, the tank level gauging system
It is necessary to remove the accumulated rainwaterfrom float-
was undamaged and spot-on accurate.
ing rooftanks as they are only designed to support 10 inches of
water whilst floating. To achieve this the roofs are fitted with 6.5.8 Syphon drains
drains which take the rainwaterfrom a sump or series of sumps
on the floating roof down through the product to a lower shell This system automatically drains water from the roof mem-
outlet connection which is fitted with an external drain valve. brane and discharges it directly into the product where it gravi-
This valve was always kept closed because of concern at that tates to the bottom of the tank, to be collected in the floor sump.
time, about the possibility of failure of the roof drain, within the lntroducing water into the product may not always be desirable
product liquid. ln this circumstance an open drain valve would and this disadvantage has to be weighed against the advan-
mean that the tank would dump most of its contents into the tage of rainwater being automatically removed from the roof
bu nd. without the need for anV manual operations.

1BO STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 214/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 215/296
7/18/2019
6 The design of tank rools - floatina Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

under the roof to escape when the tank is being refilled, avoid_ platform itselfis accessedfrom the grade levelvia a
Ing a pressure under the roof. spiralstair-
case which follows the external contour of the shell, or from a
The valve is a simple device consisting of a short vertical straight radial staircase, orin some cases from an interconnect-
trunking which forms a valve seating and this is welded to a cor_ ing platform from an adjacent tank.
respondin9 aperture in the deck. Through the centre, and sup_
ported off of this trunking, passes a vertical guide tube 6.5.12 Rolling ladder
which
nouses a push rod on to which is attached a disc which forms
the valve lid. The length ofthe push rod is such that as the tank The rolling ladder is the means ofaccess on to the floating roof
is emptied, the rod contacts the floor plating before the from the gaugers platform. lt is shown in Figure 6.29.
roof sup_
pon
neathlegs
theland the valve opens. freelyventing the space be_
andSimilarly,
deck. The upper end ofthe ladder is attached to the gaugers platform
on refilling the tank th; valve closes by hinged brackets. The lowerend is proviOed wjttian axlewitn
aner aI the atr beneath the roof has been expelled and the roof
a wheel at each side of the ladder The wheels run on a steel
floats. The diagrammatic sketch in Flgure 6.28 showsthe oper_
track mounted on a runway structure supported off the roof so
ation of the valve.
that, as the roof moves up and down, the hinged ladder can
However, this type of simple valve is not environmenially take up a varying angle as required.
friendly because, once open, it remains open, thus allowino va'_ The first ladders which were produced only had round rungs for
pours to escape when the roof is landed and drained down.
The treads as these were accessible at whatever angle the |tdder
alternative is to use pressure and vacuum valves, which will
onty open when there is a differential pressure across them and
willtherefore remain closed afterdrain down. Also the pressure
and vacuum valve will allow the release of vapour from under
the roof formed by solar means or imported slugs of vapour
from the filling line, whilst in service.

6.5.11 The gaugers platform

The gaugers platform is a relatively smallaccess area ofabout

Toursquare metres, usually elevated about 2 metres above the
top curb angle of the shell. The platform overhangs the shell to
allow the guide pole to pass through it so that a;cess can be
gained to the guide pole. which usually houses the product level
indicating equipment ora dip hatch. Also the platform is used as
an attachment for the rolling tadder which gives access to the
Ttoaltno rool.

tne pltform is supported off a stiffened section of the top Figure 6.29 Typical rolling taddefwith self-levellinq treads
course ofshell plating bya fairly substantial steel structure. The Courtesy of McTay Engineeing

Figure 6.30 The iocalion ofsome oflhe common appurtenances found on a floatino
roof
Cou4esy of McTay

182 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 216/296
 6 The design af tank roofs - floating
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

happened to be at, but these proved to be unsafe for personnel

venturing on to the roof. A much safer system was devised
which uses individually hinged stair treads having brackets on
their underside which are pinned to a common tie bar linking
them all together. This tie bar is fixed to a static bracket at the
gaugers platform in such a waythat, atwhatever angle the lad-
der may assume, the treads are always level.
Some tank operators nowexclude the use of rolling ladders, be-
cause there have been reports ofaccidents to personnelon the
roof created by certain products gassing off and causing pools
of harmful vapourto collect on the roof. Alternatively, they insist
on gas detection being carried out prior to allowing personnel
on the roof.
Figure 6.31 Typical dip hatch fitting
6.5.13 Deck manholes Couftesy of Endrcss+Hauser Systens & Gauging Ltd

One or more of these square or circular manholes are provided

in the deck of the roof to allow access to the underside of the
roof from the top, when maintenance work is required whilst the
tank is out of service. Without such access maintenance per-
sonnel working on the roof, who were required to work on the
underside, would only be able to gain access by the circuitous
route involving ascending the steep rolling ladder, descending
the external staircase and entering the tank via the shell
mannote.

6.5.14 Pontoon manholes

Each pontoon of a floating roof is a separate buoyancy com-

partment and must be periodically checked to ensure that it is
dry and free from leaks. Hence each compartment has its own
inspection manhole.
These manholes are generally of light construction consisting
of a short circular coaming welded to the top plate of the com-
partment, the closure being a loose flat lid with a down-turned Flgure 6.32 Pos tion offoam darn in retation lo the seatassembty
lip which fits over the coaming to keep out the rain. The lid is fit-
ted with a handle for easy access to the compartment. gjve drainage for rainwater which could accumulate in the
space between the seal and the dam.
Figure 6.30 shows the location of some of the common aoour-

tenances found on a floating rool 6.5.17 Electrical continuity

6.5.15 Sample/dip hatch
In the event of a lightning strike on the tank, or a build-up of
The sample/dip hatch is fitted either to a nozzle which proiects static electricity within the tank due to product movements,
through one ofthe pontoons or it isfitted tothe top ofthe g;uge there needsto be a secure electrical bond between the roofand
pole. lt is illustrated in Figure 6.31 and may be used as follows : the tank to make certain that any electrical charge is conducted
directly to earth, thus ensuring that a spark can not be created
. To measure the depth ofproduct in the tank using a dip tape. between the roof and the tank which could cause a flre. The
This may be done as a check on the correct functionino of means of providing this continuity may be by :
the automatic level gauge.
. Providing thin flexible stainless steel shunt strips between
. To take a sample of the tank conren6. the top ofthe steel sealing ring of a mechanical seal and the
. To take the temperature ofthe tank contents. seal connection ring on the floating roof.
A long length offlexible cable attached to the gaugers plat-
6.5.16 Foam dam form and to the top of the roof pontoons. The length of the
cable in this case makes it prone to snagging on other roof
This topic was discussed earlier in Section 6.5.9.3. in coniunc- fittings so positioning of the attachment points requires
tion with primary and secondary compression plate type iloat- careful consideration.
ing roof seals. However, the normal construction for a foam
dam consists of a short vertical plate in 3 mm steel, which is Avariation ofthe above method is to bond the gaugers plaf
weldedto thetop pontoon plateata short distance from the seal form to the top of the rolling ladder structure with a short
assembly, see Figure 6.32. To give effective fire protection, the length of flexible cable. A position some way down the lad-
height of the dam plate must be above the tip ofthe roof seal so der structure is then chosen as a attachment point Jor an-
that the injected foam will completely cover the seal. other cable, the other end of which is bonded to the floatino
roof structure. This second cable is much shorter than that
The plate is given rigidity by vertical angle stiffeners at regular above, and by careful selection of the attachment points.
intervals around its circumference. Also, small slots are cut in the lay down path of this cable can be fairly accurately pre-
the lower edge of the dam plate at itsjunction to the pontoon. to dicted.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT ,183

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 217/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

184 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 218/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

7 Tankfittings and ancillary

equipment for ambient temperature
tanks
This Chapterdeals with the design ofthe various nozzles, manholes and other appufienances
that are required for the operation of the tank. Also, consideration is given to the access
requirements to the tankforthe operating personnel, and also to various fire fighting methods.

Contents:
7.1 Tank nozzles
7.1.1 BS 2654 requirements for shell nozzles
7.1 .1.1 Nozzles 80 mm outside diameter and above
7.1 .1.2 Flush type clean-out doors
7.1 .1.3 Nozzles less than 80 mm outside diameter
7. 1.2API 650 requirements for shell nozzles
7.1.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements for shell nozzles
7.2 Spacing of welds around connections
7 .2.1 BS 2654 requirements
7.2.2 API 650 requirements
7.2.3 Flush type clean-out doors
7.2.4 Eurcpean Code prEN 14015 requirements
7.3 Shell manholes
7.3.1 BS 2654 requirements
7.3.2 API 650 requirements
7.3.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements
7.4 Roof nozzles
7.4.1 BS 2654 requirements
7.4.2 API 650 requirements

7.4.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements

7.5 Roof manholes
7.5.1 BS 2654 requirements
7.5.2 API 650 requirements
7.5.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements
7,6 Floor sumps
7.6.1 BS 2654 requirements
7.6.2 API 650 requirements
7.6.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements
7.7 Contents measuring systems
7.7.1 Tank dipping
7.7.2 Level indicators
7.7.2.1 Float, board and target system
7.7.2.2 Automatic tank gauge
7.7.3 Temperature measurement
7.7.4 High accuracy servo tank gauge
7.7.5 High accuracy radar tank gauge
7.8 Tank venting
7.8.1 Free vents
7.8.2 Pressure and vacuum (P & V) valves
7.8.3 Emergency vents
7.8.4 FIame arrestor
7.9 Tank access
7.9.1 Spiral staircase

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 185

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 219/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fiftings and ancillary equipment tur ambient temperaturc tanks

7.9.2 Radialstaircase
7.9.3 Horizontal platforms
7.9.4 Vertical ladders
7,10 Fire protection systems
7.10.1 Foam systems
7.10.1.1 Base injection
7.10.1.2 Top foam pourers

7.10. 1.3 Rimseal foam pourers

7.10.1.4 Foam cannons
7.11 Water coolihg systems
7.'11. 1 Special case - Floating roof tanks
7.'l 1.2 Tank cooling methods
7.11.2.'l Water spray and deluge sprinkler systems
7.11.2,2 Fixed and trailer-mounted water cannons

186 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 220/296
 7 Tank fittings and ancillary equipment for ambient tempenture tanks
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

7.1 Tank nozzles

7,1,1 BS 2654 requirements for shell nozzles

7.1.1.1 Nozzles 80 mm outside diameter and above

The BS Code requires shell manholes and shell nozzles of 80
mm outside diameter and above to be governed by the follow-
Ing rules:
Minimum wallthickness for various outside diameters shall be
as shown in Figure 7.1.

lrln.wall $iclo65s {lnm)

7.5

>10Olo=< 150 8.5

10.5 Frgure 7.2 Thickened insen plate

>2@ '12.5

Figure 7.1 Liinimum wallihicknesses for various outside diamelers

Fron BS 2654. table 5

With regard to shell manholes, the Code gives details of a stan-

dard manhole in Figure I of the Code but stipulates that this is
only suitable for tank heights up to 25 m. Tank heights are rarely
above this height, but if this is the case then the components of
the manhole and reinforcement would require analysis to en-
sure their suitability for the increase in pressure above a 25 m
neao.
The hole which is cut into the shell to accept the manhole or
nozzle obviously weakens the shell in this area and therefore a
means of providing reinforcementto compensate forthis weak-
ness is reouired. The Code requires that the cross-sectional
area of this reinforcement, measured in the vertical plane con-
taining the axis ofthe manhole or nozzle shall not be less than: Figure 7.3 Thickened insert plale

0.75 xd xt equ7.1

where

d = diameter of the hole cut in the shell plate (mm)

t = thickness ofthe shell plate (mm)
Reinforcement is provided by -The area replacement method.
The reinforcement may be provided by any one or any combF
nation of the following three area replacement methods. Note
that a corrosion allowance on any surface should be excluded
from the computation of reinforcement required.
a) The addition of a thickened insert plate as in Figures 7.2
and 7.3 or a circular reinforcing plate as in Figure 7.4.
The limit of the reinforcement is such that: 'do', the effective di-
ameter of the reinforcement, is between 1.5.d and 2.d. A
non-circular reinforcing plate may be used provided the mini-
mum with. Also, where nozzles are
close requirements
to the bottom are complied
ofthe tank, a "tombstone"-shaped reinforc-
ing plate shown in Figure 7,3 may be used as long as the Code
rules are complied with. Figure 7.4 Acircular reinforcing plate

b) The Drovision of a thickened nozzle or manhole barrel. As an alternative to the area replacement methods, the rein-
The portion ofthe barrelwhich may be considered as reinforce- forcement can be made by the provision of a thickened nozzle
ment is that lying within the shell plate thickness and within a barrel protruding on both sides of the shell plating as shown in
distance four times the barrel thickness from the shellplate sur- Figure 7.6. This method was devised by R.T. Rose (see Refer-
face, unless the barrelthickness is reduced within this distance, ence 7.1) and and was first introduced into the BS Code in the
when the limit is the point at which the reduction begins. Figure 1973 edition.
7.5 illustrates this method.
c) The provision of a shell plate thickerthan that required by The method limits a stress concentration factor I'to a maximum
the shell thickness formula or given in the Table of mini- value of 2 and this is derived from the graph shown in Figure 7.7
mum shell plate thicknesses, (whichever is relevantto the where a replacementfactor'y', based on the ratio of nozzle wall
tank under consideration). The additional thickness being thickness to the mean radius of the nozzle, is plotted against
used as all or a Dart of the reouired reinforcement. the ratio of the outer to inner radii of the nozzle wall.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 187

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 221/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fiftings and ancillary equipment for ambient tempercturc tanks

Figure 7.5 Provislon of a thickened nozzle of manhole baffel

0.{ 06
Replacement factor Y

y=1.5sv/#,+
wherc
I is the shell platethickness {in mm)
lD is the nozle body thickness {in mm)

;:'"'" rh asthe mean radilfor branch bodies (in mm)

Alldimensions a.e in millimetres

F gure 7.6 Provision of a thickened nozzle barrelprotruding on bolh sides of
the shell plaUng
Figure 7.7 Plol ofslress concentration factor v replacement factor
This method is usefulwhere space beneath a nozzle deniesthe
of service for maintenance.
use of a reinforcing plate.
A cautionary tale
The Code
welding gives specific
of nozzles
requirements with
into shells and these vary regardtotoshell
according
the A large UK-based refinery was fed by pipeline with oil and gas
and nozzle wallthickness and materialstrength. For nozzles 80 from the North Sea. The crude oilwas stored in a number of96
mm outside diameter and above, the barrel ofthe nozzle is set m diameter floating roof tanks. Each of these tanks was fifted
through the shell, albeit in some instances it may be flush with with three product mixers of the Plenty propeller type, fitted in
the inside face oJthe shell i.e. for floating rooftanks, to prevent connections in the bottom cou rse ofthe tank shell. The function
fouling the roof rim and seal. of these mixers was to keep the product stirred up and to
prevent the relatively high wax content from settling out of the
All nozzle welds must have a clearance of 100 mm from any
crude oil and accumulating on the tank bottoms. During the
other adjacent weld. The clearance is measured from the toes
early years of operation of these tanks the mixers were used
of fillet welds and from the centre line of butt welds.
regularly as envisaged by the tank designers and no problems
For shell mountings having openings of 300 mm or larger, occurred.
welded into shell plates thicker than 20 mm, then all lap or fillet
At a certain point in time, the terminal owners decided to in-
welds connecting the barrel or reinforcing plate to the shell and
stitute a review to see if operating costs could be reduced. This
all butt welds incorporating plates thicker than 40 mm at the
prepared edges, shall be post weld heat-treated in accordance taskwas a group fitted with the financial gene, but sadly
given to equivalent
not its technical The collective "beady eye" even-
with the Code requiremenb.
tually fell upon the high power consumption and consequent
Cautionary note - There have been accidents, especially on cost ofrunning the tank mixers. ltwas decided to make savings
older tanks, where cast iron valves have been used on shell by the simple expedient of not running the tank mixers at all. All
nozzles and the bodies of these have failed due to overstress- went well for a while.
ing or freezing. Cast steel valves should always be used in
The roof then began to show an increasing disinclination to
these instances to obviate this problem.
behave properly at low product levels. The centre deck would
7.1.1.2 Flush type clean-out doors be flat, but the outer perimeter was uneven and at a hlgher
level. This was again overcome by increasing the minimum
Some stored products contain entrained sediment, whichtends
product level for tank operation. All was again well until the day
to settle out ofsuspension during a lengthy storage period. This
that oil began to appear from beneath the tank annular plate.
sediment builds up, generally in an uneven pattern, on the floor
This indicated a leak in the tank bottom plating and the flow of
ofthe tank and when landing a floating roof on its support legs it
oil into the local bund was such that it could not be ignored.
can cause twisting ofthe deck due to the legs landing on the un-
even surface. This is a particular problem with large floating So this meant that the tank would have to be emptied, cleaned
roof tanks storing crude oil coming directly from the field, as and repaired. Sadly the floating roof showed serious signs of
these tanks spend manyyears in service before beingtaken out distress as the liquid level was lowered and an investigation

188 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 222/296
 7 Tank fittings and ancillary equipment for ambient temperaturc tanks
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Fis No 28a Fig No 28b Fig No 29 Fig No 30

IVax UTS ot blr. @ur$ shell plating (Nhm'z) 460 460 >460

lvin. btm. cours width Io a@mnodde fulldoot height (mml 1830 600 1930 600

Md. size ol door openino Wx H (mm) 915'x 1230 30O" x 1230 915'x 1230 100" r 1230

[,lax. thl's. oi btm couEe (aF) 18,5 14.5 37 3T

Md. rhks. ol lnsed plar6 (mm) 40 37 37

Max. thks. ol roinforcins plare{mm) 40 4A

Fisurc Nos 28a & 28b €€ limited to lsnks havins € bonom shellcou6e no lhicke.lhaD 18.5 mm, $+'6reas Fig'r€ Nos 29 & 30 which inorPorats reinroaing Plales in thek d€sign, en be
us€d on shell plaiins up 10 37 mm tbick

'For Figur€s ?8a & 29 the h€ight of th€ doo. opening is: lhe hEighl of th€ bottom shsll coLrrs€, or 915 mm, whichevs is lhe small€r

- For Figur€s 28b A 30 rhe hoighr of the door op€ning is limir€d ro 3008m forshellplat€ steels having a minimum u.I s. no€ than 460 N/mm1

Figure 7.8 Principalparameterc for each of the fourtypes of door

through roof leg fitting holes revealed an accumulation of waxy

material of uneven thickness up to 2.0 m deep in places on the
tank bottom. This was of sufncient load bearing capacity to
locally support the weight of the floating roof. The original mix-
ers had their Drooellers embedded in the wax and could not be
started. l\,4uch time was spent in agitated "navel gazing" until a
suitable specialist was found with a solution to the problem.

This involved the connection to the partially-filled tank ofa huge

pump which re-circulated the oil and eventually forced the wax
back into solution so that it could be removed from the tank and
disposed of. This process took months to complete and con-
siderable sums of money, many times morc that the cost sav-
ings so eagerly seized on earlier. The remaining tanks were in-
vestigated and all found to be suffering from substantial wax
accumulations which required the same expensive and
time-consuming treatment
To assist in the disoosalofthe sediment once the tank has been
taken out of service, the tank may have built into the shell, one
or more large clean-out doors.
These flanged doors have can have openings, roughly one Figufe 7.9 Flush type clean-out doof wlth plaie reinforcemenl, slze of openlng
metre square, (although there are height limitations as 915 mm x1230 mm
shown in Figure 7.8) with the bottom edge flush with the- tank
floor plating thus making for an easier internal cleaning
operation.
The large size of the opening being in the highly-stressed
bottom course of shell plating causes complicated stress pat-
ierns and therefore has to be carefully designed to ensure that
the strength of the shell is not compromised.
The tank Codes recognise this and in the BS Code there are
fully detailed arrangements for four different types of Flush
clean-out doors for the designer to choose from. All of these
designs involve the door being fitted into a shell insert plate and
allthese assemblies have to be postweld healtreated on com-
pletion of fabrication.

The table in Figure 7.8 shows the principal parametersfor each

of the four types of door, these are identified by the figure num-
bers as used in BS 2654.
lllustrations of two flush type clean-out doors are shown in
Figures 7.9 and 7.10.
A smaller, simpler and less expensive type of clean-out aid is s.thon a_c
the combined water draw-ofi and clean-out sump. This fitting is
basicallyformed by a half-section of 6'10 mm diameter pipe 980
mm long attached beneath a 460 mm x 5'10 mm hole cut in the Figure 7.10 Flush lype clean-out doorwith plate reinforcement, size ofopen-
ing 300 mm x 1230 mm
outer region of the floor plating. The external opening of the
sump is closed with a 'D'shaped flange and cover, see Figure the tank during maintenance operations. One disadvaniage is
7.11. that this sump can become blocked with excessive sludge and
hence, its use as a waterdraw-off point when in service, is lost.
This fitting is used as a water draw-off sump during normaltank
operations, with a nozzle and valve fitted at the low point on the The Code states that "the fillet weld to the underside of the bof
cover and as a clean-out opening when removing sludge from tom sketch plate or annular plate shall be deposited in the flat

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT ,I89

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 223/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fittinqs and ancillary equipmenl for ambienl temperalute tanks

NOTE. A gr.tingd.v b.lnt€d ro Awarning is given with respect to shell nozzles, which are close
th..udD arr sl.ty pre.urio. to the bottom ofthe tank. Such nozzles can rotate with the vertF
cal bending of the shell under hydrostatic loading and con-
nected piping can cause a restraint on the nozzle giving rise to
additional stresses in the nozzle and shell. Attention is drawn to
Aooendix'P'of the Code which deals with this problem but it
must be remembered that this theory can only be applied to
tanks over 36 m in diameter.
There is only an upper limitforthe outside diameterof reinforc-
ing plates and this is twice the diameter of the hole cut in the
shell. (The BS Code is between 1 .5 and 2.0 times the diameter
of the hole in the shell plating.)
The means of providing reinforcement together with complete
details for the fabrication and welding of nozzles in sizes from
'l%" (38 mm) nominalbore, to48" (1219 mm)nominalbore are
given in severaltables and diagrams in the Code, togetherwith
explanatory clauses.
Fig u re 7- 1 1 Comb ned water draw'off a nd clean-out sump
Similardetailed information is also given for four shell manhole
position, the bottom plate being reversed for this purpose be-
diameters: 500 mm, 600 mm, 750 mm and 900 mm.
tore final positioning on the tank foundation.' However. on the
sketch of the sump in the Code these welds are denoted "site There is a proviso in the Code regarding the portion ofthe barrel
welds". lt is normal practice to perform these welds in the shop which can be considered as acting as reinforcement ln cases
when they can be checked for soundness before going to site. where the strength ofthe barrel material is slightly less than that
portion
Accordingly these welds are denoted as "shop welds" in Figure ofthe
ered asshell plate material,
reinforcement then the Whereofthe
is reduced. barrelconsid-
the strength of the
7.11.
barrel material is much lessthan thatofthe shellplate material'
7.1.1.3 Nozzles less than 80 mm outside diameter then the barrel can not be considered as contributing to the
Additional reinforcement is not required for nozzles less than reinforcement of the nozzle.
80 mm outside diameter provided thatthe thickness ofthe bar- The Code addresses instances where there may be a cluster of
rel is not less than that as shown in Figure 7.12. nozzles ctose together in one area of the shell and shows how
these should be spaced within one large reinforcing plate.

Min.'/vall thicknor. {m.n}

7.1.3 European Code requirements for shell noz'
5.0 zles
5.5

The prEN 14015-1 requirements are the same as given in the

Figure 7.12 Barrcl ih icknesses BS 2654 Code with the addition of the table of nozzle body
From BS 2654, table 5 thickness requirements that include given
minimum thickness for
stainless steel nozzles and these are in Figure 7 13
These nozzles do not have to be set through the shell but may
be set on the shellsurface provided thatthe plates are checked
close to the opening to ensure that no injurious laminations are Mln.wall thickno$ (mm)
present. lt is important that the welded joint to the shell has
sound root penetration. In the event of any doubt as to the
soundness of the root, it should be back-gouged and
5.0

back-welded. The internal bead of sound joints welded from 6.0

one side only are to be ground smooth and flush with the inside 70
bore. >150lo=<?oo 8.0

90
'2@
7.'1.2 API650 requirements for shell nozzles
Figure 7.13 Table of nozzle bodythickness requnemenls

The API requirements are similar but not the same as the BS re-
quirements. Only nozzles above 50 mm bore are required to 7.2 Spacing of welds around connections
have added reinforcement.
The minimum cross-section of reinforcement shall be calcu- 7.2.1 BS 2654 requirements
lated as follows:
The BS Code requires that the distance between the toes ofad-
d xt equT .2
jacentfillet welds or between the toes offillet welds and the cen-
tre line ofadjacent buttwelds or between the centre lines ofad-
where jacent butt welds, shall not be less than 100 mm.
d = diameter of the hole cut in the shell plate (mm) Welds to nozzle bodies shall not be closer to any weld which
t = thickness of the shell plate (mm) has been post weld heat-treated than:

Note: Only 75% of this value is required to the BS Code. 2.5,8 \ equ 7.3

However, the calculated minimum required design shell thick-

ness may be used in equation 7.2, instead ofthe nominal mini- where
mum shell plate thickness. (On smallertanks the calculated de- tp = wall thickness of the nozzle (mm)
sign thickness is often less than the nominal shell plate
thickness.) r = inside radius of the nozzle (mm)

190 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 224/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks
7 Tank and
fiftings andEquipment
ancillary equipmentfor ambie.: ::-:: : , : -:-.is

Sh6[ vsrtical

Botqn 9bts8 or anndsr plal6

Not:
R-MH{{ = Rrinfofc.d opening (marhoL o( norzlc urith dia$ond rnrle rcinforchg phje, sce nguE 34A and j-5).
LTR-N = [p"' fyF R€inbleed Op.oilg&@k *,i& ronbEtorc rfuF rcirfqri'|g plala scc FigurE f,-s, Dclail s lld b).
R.N Rchfo* d opaning (narnhob or no@zle with circ.r or reinforcing plui" or thickcrid itrscd Ftric, see Figt'n 3-s).
s-N l,IorBehford Qcning (m$hob or trolrtc it|scrted ir6 rh slE[ pcr lhr rftrmaie n€ck det{it of FiguE 348).

Variatrks ncfarE E Mioirnon Dirncnsior Bctwccn [&ld Tocs or \ rld Cencrtirte (IX3]
Shrll, Condirim hl|gnFfi A (2) B (2) c (2) D (4) E (2) F (5) G (5)
Nunbet
r < 12.5 nuB A 3.1.3.2 150 nun (6 in,) 75 mm (3 i$.) ?5 mr (3 iD,)
(t3t12m.l w ktd e'2tl2l Ot Z'lZl
o 3.7.3.3 ?5 nun t3 in.)
PWHT nr 2l lrt
75 mrn (3 in.)
for S-N
3.7-3.3 Tabl.
.3,7.3.4 Etct14r
.3.7.1.4 8t
t> l2J mtn 3,7.3.1.a 8Wq EW o{
(r> V3 io) WcLdcd 250tlm{10 in.) 25() mrn {10 in.

EW6
t50 mrn (6 in.)
SlYor
250 mm (lO in.)
3.7J.3 75 mtn (3 in.)
ior S-N
3.?.3.3 Table 3{ 8t orll. r
8t
. 3.?.3.4
,> 12.5 fin F\trHT 3.7.32 150 mir (5 irl.) 75 nult (3 h.) 75 tnn (3 in.)
It> tll'l'Jl.\ <r lt)2r or 2I llt
J.t.5,t 75 (3 in.)
''lm2tl1t
ot
?5 mrn (3 b.)
for S-N
Trble 16
.
. 3.7. .4
1.7.3.4 E ql/2r 8r
Nqtes:
l. If t$ro ftquirensfs & givrn, ih midmsm Fscing is the gr€st r value, crce$ for dincr|sit'n "f*. Se r|otE 5,
  t - drll rhickrrs. 8ly lW = 6 titler thc lqScsr wcld tizc for
$|c l&gcrr fof rcinforEins pldc or or i[6e.r plst€ Frit$crj' (6[€* or butr-wcld)
wetd (6lle*
Fridlery wcld
fiom tlrc l,oc of ftc Friphcry wcld o tlE ccrt rlinc of thr ltEll b{ru-wcld,
kr hts
l.. &r tetks dcEign€d
dcaist€d tofo Afp.ndif,
AoDcndir A,A. s.c As.X.
AJ.2. Spochg
SDrElnc = 2ll"
2llt ,r toe o rle
rrp ro of sdjsrat wclds.
roe o
4. D = spscing di$tolc. crteblishcd by mirimum clevltiql hr l0 typc reinlorrcd qenings &ortl Ta6lc 3{, coluno 9.
5- Emhss6r oprbn io sllo$ ste cDcNlil8s to bc loclrcd in hsizoniai qrvcrtical shJl Uu-wchs. Sce Fisut
3-6.
t = tltcll thicktrcss, r = .ldius ofopc[in& Minis m rFcing fordifiRsim ,. i6 the lcrsorof &or ll r.-

Figufe 7.14 Minlmum weld fequifemenis for opentngs in she s

Frcm API 65A, figure 3-22

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 19'1

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 225/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fittings and ancillary equipment for ambient temperaturc tanks

7.2.2 API 650 requirements 7.3 Shell manholes

The API Code is more detailed in its aoDroach and the actual
wording in clause 3.7.3. should be consulted. Basically the re- 7.3.1 BS 2654 requirements
quirements are as follows:
The BS Code gives a detailed sketch for a 600 mm diameter
For non stress-relieved welds on shell plates thicker than 12.5
shell manhole which is suitable for alltanks up to 25 m high. The
mm (%"), the minimum spacing between the outer weld of a
only part which has to be designed is the shell reinforcement re-
nozzle, or nozzle assembly and the centreline of an adjacent
quirements, to suit the thickness of shell to which the manhole
shell butt weld shall be the gfeater of eight times the size of the
outer weld, or 250 mm (10"). is to be attached. This isdonetothesame rules as forshellnoz-
zles in Section 7.1.1.
Where the shellplate is equalto orlessthan 12.5 mm (%"), this
spacing may be reduced to 150 mm (6") from vertical shell butt To ease the removal ofthe heavy manhole cover to gain access
welds and the greatet of75 mm (3"\ ot 2y2 times the shellthick- to the tank, a swing davit is often fifted in a cup type bracket
ness from horizontal shell butt welds. The spacing between the fixed, to one side of the manhole barrel.
outer welds of adjacent nozzles shall be the greater of 75 mm
(3"), or 2% times the shell thickness. 7.3.2 API 650 reouirements
Where stress relieving of the periphery weld has been per-
formed prior to welding of the adjacent shelljoint, the minimum The API Code is much more deiailed and caters for shell man-
spacing shall be 150 mm (6") from vertical shell butt welds and hole sizes of 500 mm. 600 mm. 750 mm and 900 mm diameter.
the greater of75 mm (3") ot 2y2 times the shell thickness from
horizontal shell butt welds. The spacing between the outer A general design sketch is given together with sketches of
welds of adjacent nozzles shall be the greater of 75 mm (3"), or welded joint options. Tabulated data is also given for the follow-
2% times the shell thickness. ing:

The Code contains a useful reference table in figure 3-22 which . Cover plate and bolting flange thicknessfor eight ascending
gives a pictorial representation of the application of the above design liquid levels up to a maximum of 23 m.
rules. This is shown in Figure 7.14.
. Manhole neck thickness based on shell and reinforcing
In certain instances it may be found that a nozzle has to be plate thickness ranging from 5 mm to 40 mm.
close to or even intersects a shell butt weld and the Code will al-
low this under rules given in figure 3-6. Where a shelljoint is in- . Bolt circle and cover plate diameters for the four sizes of
tersected, then 100% radiographic inspectjon of the weld is re- mannote.
quired for a distance of 1.5 times the diameter ofthe opening in
Instead of a circular reinforcing plate, there is also an option al-
the shell, measured each side of the centreline of the opening,
lowing a six sided reinforcing plate the sides of which are at 45"
except that the part of the shell joint which is being removed
to the horizontal centre line of the manhole.
need not be radiographed.

7.2.3 Flush type clean-out doors 7.3.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements

The API Code is more flexible in its approach to the design of The requirements given in this Code are the same as those in
flush type clean-out doors. the BS Code.
The maximum size for the door opening is dependant on the
grade of shell material being used (similar to the BS Code) but
7.4 Roof nozzles
has more size options together with tabulated plate thlckness
and dimensional details. Formulae are given to calculate the re-
quired amount of reinforcement above the opening and to de- 7.4.'l BS 2654 requirements
termine the thickness of the bottom reinforcing plate. Various
methods are given to stiffen or support the bottom reinforcing The BS Code shows a sketch of a typical roof nozzle together
plate under differing foundation support conditions and the de- with tabulated dimensions for nozzle sizes from 25 mm to 300
signer is alerted to the requirement to allow for the rotation, due mm diameter.
to shell bulging, of these low connections when they have
oiDework attached to them. The duty of roof nozzles is not very arduous and their integrity
does not pose a serious threat to the soundness of the tank.
Roof nozzles are therefore lighter in construction than shell
7.2.4 European Code requirements
nozzles. The reinforcement ofthe aperture in the roof plating for
all nozzle sizes is 150 mm larger than the aperture in the roof
prEN 14015- 1 uses the same requirements as those for the BS plating and in all cases is made from 6 mm thick plate. Welding
Code but includes a further condition fot nozzle openings in of the nozzle on the underside of the roof is not required. All
shell plates which intersect with shell butt welds. Where this welded joints on the nozzle are 6 mm fillet welds, regardless of
condition occurs then the the size of the nozzle.
tangent to the opening in the
shell at the centre line of the The Code recommends that the necks of nozzles used for vent-
shell butt weld must be be- ing should be trimmed flush with the underside of the roof line.
tween 45" and 90' to the This is to ensure that vapour is not trapped by the neck which
centreline ofthe butt weld as would otherwise protrude below the roof line. The polar axis of
shown. q = 45" to 90' roof nozzles should always be vertical.

Although not mentioned in the Code it is generallythought to be

good practice to use flat-faced flanged roof nozzles with full
face gaskets for roof vents and other fittings which may be of
cast iron or aluminium construction.

192 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 226/296
7/18/2019 I r",t Tanks
Guide to Storage lt g: and
3 9 Equipment
" 9 ll9 : 19ryrn t9 19n 98 lelj ks

7 "4.2 API 650 requirements components would be welded together.

The Code also mentions thatthe manhole covers can be ofthe
The requirements to the American Code are very similar to muliiple bolt type or hinged.
those of the BS Code with the following main exceptions;
'1) Larger diameter reinforcing plates are required for noz-
zles greater than 100 mm in diameter.
7.6 Floor sumps
2) There is the option not to provide reinforcing plates for
7.6.1 BS 2654 requirements
nozzles up to 150 mm diameter.
3) The weld between the reinforcing plate and the roof plat- The BS Code offers three types of drain sumps. These sumps
ing is a 5 mm fillet weld instead of a 6 mm fillet weld. may be situated at the centre of the floor or at the periphery, de-
pending on the chosen floor slope. They are:
7.4.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements . The combined water draw-off and clean-out sump (see Fig-
ute 7.11, can only be fitted at the periphery.)
The European Code is the same as the BS Code with the ex-
ception thatthe reinforcing plate thickness shall be the sameas
. The circular-fabricated sump, (Figure 7.15)
the roof plate thickness. also the fillet weld between the two . The spherically-dished sump, (Figure 7.16)
plates shall be the same as the roof plate thickness.
The bottom of all sumps must be adequately supported by the
underlying tank foundation io ensure that they do not "hang" off
7.5 Roof manholes the floor aperture and cause stress in the flange connecting the
sump to the floor plating.
7.5.1 BS 2654 requirements The fabricated sump tends to be more popular with tank fabri-
cators because difficulties can be encountered in trying to
The BS Code is very sparse in its guidance on roof manholes.
this guidance being as follows:
obtain pressings
type. However, the correct
theofspherical dimensions
sump {orofthe
is made out onespherical
piece of
plate and therefore has no potential to leak. The fabricated
"The roof manholes shall have a minimum inside diameter of
sump welds must be subjected to rigorous inspection to ensure
500 mm. They shall be suiiable for attachment by welding to the
that they are truly sound.
tank roof sheets.
The manhole covers shall be either as specified by the pur-
chaser or of the multiple-bolt fixed or hinged type."
Because of the vagueness of the requirements, designers gen-
erally turn to the more detailed information given in the Ameri-
can Code. 63s hol€
O
From a practical point of view it is important to avoid the use of
ASA 150 lb covers and flanges for roof manholes because of
their excessive weight.

7.5.2 API 650 requirements

This Code gives a detailed illustration and tabular information

for the design of roof manholes 500 mm and 600 mm in diame-
ter. They are of relatively light construction being in 6 mm plate.
The provision of a reinforcing plate is optional.
This Code also gives full details for h/vo types of rectangular roof
openings, one with a bolted cover and one with a hinged cover
with one locking point. Both types are limited to a maximum
opening size of 1800 mm x 900 mm, the provision of reinforcing F gure 7.15 Circular-fabr cated s mp
plates is optional and they are intended for use on fixed steel
roofs only (not floating roofs).
Again these rectangular openings are of light construction,
necks and optional reinforcing plates being 6 mm thick, the the
cover plates 5 mm thick and the flange of the bolted type being
-jR--
Alternotiv€ \\\
detdil
10 mm thick.
The bolted type is limited to tanks having a maximum iniernal
pressure equal to the weight of the roof plates and the hinged
type is for use on non-pressure ianks only.

7.5.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements

@ 710 hot e
This Code follows the BS Code but is more specific as it gives bollom p lote
dimensions for 500 mm and 600 mm diameter manholes but
@ 900
does not specify steel thickness.
The illustfation in the Code shows the neck and bolting ftange
as jf being rolled from one plate, this is unlikely io be the pre-
'e'red method of consiruction and it is more likely that the two Figure 7.16 Spherically d shed sump

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 193

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 227/296
 /"r*;i:
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fittings and ancillary equipment for ambient tempercturc tanks

7.6.2 API 650 requirements liquid is read from the tape at the pointwherethe tape changes
from being dry to wet. There is an art in obtaining a correct dip
The API Code offers details for four sizes of sumo each based by this method because of the following factors:
on the size ofthe drain line. . Care must be taken to ensure that the weight only just
Brief details taken from the tabulated data in the Code are touches the tank bottom, as allowing further tape into the
shown in Fioure 7.17. tankwillgive a false increased reading in the dip depth. With
experience, tank dipping personnel learn tofeelforthe tank
bottom and can obtain reliable repeatable results.
oidtnotor or .unp {mm)

. Judging the point where the tape changes from dry to wet
may be fairly easy when dipping a tank containing, say mo-
50 610 300
lasses, but not so easy with light distillate products. Com-
80 910 450
pounds have been developed which can be applied to the
r00 1220 6@ tape in the area where the expected level is thought to be
150 1520 900 and these show more clearly wherethe dryto wet point is on
the tape, hence resulting in a more accurate reading.
Figure 7.17 Details for four sizes of sump based on size of drain line
There are several types of rooi nozzle dip hatches on the mar-
ket and a selection is shown in Figure 7.19.
the
It can be seen that these sumps are somewhat larger lhan
BS Code sumps, especially those for the larger sized drain
lines.
The fabrication detail for these sumps is shown in Figure 7.18,
which is reDroduced. from the Code.

The API Code gives positions forthe sumps measured from the
shell of the tank which indicate that they are close to the shell
but, if required, they may be placed anywhere in the floorto suit
the floor drainage requiremenb.

7.6.3 European Code prEN 14015 requirements

The sump requirements here are the same as those for the BS
Code.

7.7 Contents measuring systems

It is important for a tank operator to know how much product a
tank is holding at any particular time to enable the planning of
import and export requirements. There are a number of ways of
doing this and some ofthese are described in the following Sec-
trons.

7.7.1 Tank dipping

The most primitive method, which has been in use for many
years, is the dipping method whefeby a weighted tape measure
Figure 7.19 Different types of roof nozzle dip hatches
is dropped through a hatch in the tank roof. When the weight
Couiesy of Endress+Hauser Systems & Gauging Ltcl
touches the tank bottom. the taoe is withdrawn and the level of

l"r&

iF
iNN
1..%d ffi
ll
N N t t**-**
{
D.rcb . -.4 ffi* "*
{alt a|6 acc€ptabl€}

-va
** D.i.ll b
4
l) |.ll c
.J
D.lrll (l
iloi.: Th€ €.€clion Ploc€drs sndl incrrda t 6 ic{('ii€ si69e (a) a hor€ sl|ailb€ od in n'€ botuft pbb o. a stlnp shal b€ pE..d jn dr6
tin(bibn b€lore lotlrn plec€raerl; (b) N rt€at e$ntoo shali b€ mad€ to €onftm ro lhe $€p6 ol |h6 d6vDt 9r,rT. lro Ejr,llp shal be pul
in pb{€, and lti€ txrnaim sidl b€ compactsd arctrd fl€ sl''p att€r placeft6nt and (c) lhs sirp sfi6ll b€ ii€ld6d o t€ bolbm.
Figure 7.18 APlWater draw-off sump

194 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 228/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage
7 Tank Tanks
fiftings and Equipment
and ancillary equipment for ambient tempercturc tanks

7.7 ,2 Level indicators

There are a number of proprietary mechanisms on the market,

which are capable of constantly monitoring the level of product
in the tank, and a few of these are as follows:
7.7.2-1 Float, board and target system
This method is notveryaccurate but itgivesa good indication of
where the liquid level is in a bnk.
A graduated board is attached to the tank shell over the full
height of the tank. Afloatslts on the productand is kept in place
by two guide wireswhich pass through eyes one on each side of
the float. The guide wires are stretched taut between the floor
and roof of the tan k and a flexible stranded wire attached to the
float is led over the top ofthe tank by pulleys. lt is led to a target
pointer, which is guided to move up and down the graduated
board as the level of the product changes. lt is important to re-
member however, that when the target is at the bottom of the
graduated board, the tank is full (and not empty, as logic may
seem it to be) and vice versa.
The illustration in Figure 7.20 shows the workings ofthis type of
lever gauge.
7 -7.2.2 Aulomalic tank gauge
This system is a vast improvement
on the above board and tar-
get arrangement and operates as follows:
Figurc 7.21 Aulomalc tank gauge
The float is guided between guide wires as in the above exam-
Couftesy of Endress+Hauser Systens & Gauging Ltd
ple but in this case a flexible tape is attached to the float and this
tape is fed through small-bore piping and pulley elbows sup- the gauge head allows the tape to coil and uncoil as the product
ported off the roof and shell of the tank and is led to a gauge level changes and a serjes of pulleys and sprockets in the
head near the base of the tank. A springloaded mechanism in gauge head are connected to a drum which gives a visible read-
out in metres and millimetres in a window on the gauge head.
This type of gauge is illustrated in Figve7.21 and can have a
transmitter atlached enabling the level signal to be sent to a
central control room and hence all the tanks on an installation
can be monitored in this way.

7.7.3 Temperature measurement

Afurther refinement, which can be incorporated into the auto-

matic tank gauge system, is the ability to read the average tem-
perature of the product jn the tank. This is accomplished by
housing equally spaced individual thermocouples in a perfo-
rated verticaltube positioned near the level gauge. The gauge
mechanism is programmed to switch in only those thermo-cou-
ples, which are submerged in the product, and the signals from
these are automatically averaged out and read on a monitor in
the control room.
This facility is useful to operators as it enables volumetric ad-
justments to be made to their product inventory to allowfor tem-
perature variations.

7.7.4 High accuracy servo tank gauge

This type of gauge is based on the principle of liquid displace-

ment. lt is illustrated in FigLIe 7 .22.
A displacer js suspended from a stainless steel wire. which is
stored on a grooved drum housed in the gauge enclosure. A
highly sensitive torque-measuring device continuously mea-
sures the effective weight of the displacer, which, under steady
state level conditions, is half-immersed in the liquid. Should the
level change, the displacer undergoes an apparent change of
weight. The gauge microprocessor senses the change in
weight and causes a servomotor to rotate the measurinq drum
until balance is restored.
Figure 7.20 Floai, board and target levet gauge Density is determined by measuring the effective weight of the
Coutesy af Mothewell Control Systems Ltd displacer when completely immersed. Sample readings, re-

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 195

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 229/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fiftings and ancillary equipment for ambient temperature tanks

The radio wave signal is emitted from the rod antenna and radi-
ates outwards "seeing" all the tank internals. The reflected ra-
dio wave is then collected by the same antenna and the gauge
compares the difference in freq uency between the outward and
return radio waves. The frequency difference is proportional to
the distance travelled. This frequency difference then under-
goes a number of processes including Fourier transform tech-
niques and peak location algorithms which are then used to dig-
itally locate the peak frequency corresponding to the product
level
reflection
displayed liquidwhich
on a from thedisplay
crysbl liquid level is then calculated and
inside the unit.
Having established the levelof product in the tank, this has then
to be translated into a capacity and this is done by reference to
the tank's calibration table whereby capacities can be read offa
table in I mm level increments.
Each tank, on completion is calibrated by a specialist company.
The earliest form of calibration was by the "strapping method".
This method, amongst others, is governed by rules set down by
the lnstitute of Petroleum, see Reference 7.2.
This method involved the circumference of the tank being
strapped with a measuring tape at many points over its height,
enabling the diameterofthe tank to be calculated at each level
and hence the capacity relating to each measurement, estab-
lished. The volume at the bottom section ofthe tank which often
Figure 7.22 High accuracy servo tank gauge contains drain pipework, heating coils etc. (known as dead-
Courtesy of Motherwel Cantrol Systems Ltd wood), can be found byfilling itwith water, which is metered into
corded at configurable intervals as the displacer, travels down the tank and recorded against corresponding depths.
through the liquid, provide density profiling. l\.4ore modern laser measuring methods are used nowadays
Water interface level and tank base measurement are achieved which operate from inside the tank, they are much less labour
by recording the point at which the gauge recognises the effec-
intensive and give very accurate diameter measurements over
tive displacerweight in waterand at the tank base respectively. the height of the tank.
Her Majesty's Customs offlcials take a great deal of interest in
7.7.5 High accuracy radar tank gauge correct tank calibration, level measurement and the recording
of tank capacities as the movement of many petroleum prod-
This type ofgauge, (see Figure 7.23), achieves level measure- ucts incurs the payment of duty.
ment by measuring the time of flight for a radio wave to travel

from the radar gauge to the liquid surface and back again.
Normallythe gauge is mounted at the top of the tank with its an-
7.8 Tank venting
This subject is dealtwith in detail in Chapter 8 sojusta briefde-
tenna pointing down towards the surface ofthe stored product. scription of the vent fittings is given here.

7.8.1 Free vents

CERT|FIED fiCREASED
AS
SAfETY TO ALIOIV ACCESS These are provided on non-pressure tanks and allowthe tank to
breathe due to product movements in and out of the tank and
for diurnal effects. An illustration is shown in Figwe 7.24.
Sometimes the free vent fitting incorporates a dip hatch, en-
abling one roof nozzle to be used for two purposes.

RADAR GAUGE
'9OOd 'AI{X
HOI'9ING 19 C€RTIFIED

IEIiPER T1IRE BI'LB

Figure 7.23 High accuracy radariank gauge Figure 7.24 Ffee vent & dip hatch
CouTesy of Mothewell Control Systems Ltd Coutlesy of Whessae Varec

196 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 230/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage
7 Tank Tanks
fittings and Equipment
and ancillary equipment for ambient temperature tanks

7.8.2 Pressure and vacuum (p & V) valves flexible seal ring on the underside ofthe weighted cover These
units are available in sizes ranging from 250 mm to 600 mm di_
These are used fortanks operating underan internal pressure. ameter and an example is shown in Figure 7.26. The larger
The vent opens onlywhen the set internal pressure is exceeded sizes can also be used as roof manhotes.
- for insiance, when product is impo(ed to the tank. On the vac_
uum side, the valve opens when the set internal vacuum is ex- 7.8.4 Flame Arrestor
ceeded, as is the case when product is exported from the tank.
The illustrations jn Figure 7.25, show a valve which uses FIame arrestors prevent flashback through an open tank vent
weighted pallets as the valve opeEting mechanism, other and may be fitted between the vent nozzle and the vent fittino.
types of valve use a spring-loaded method. They prevent the passage offlames into the tank bv a tube bank
made up ofa core of numerous narrow passages. Aphotograph
and diagrammatic vjew are shown in Figurc 7 .27.
There is some doubt as to the worthiness of these units and
negative viewson theiruse on storagetanks is expressed in the
API 2000 and API 2210 publications. Some of the vlews ex_
pressed are as follows:
The simultaneous occurrence ofan ignition source in the vi_
cinity ofthe vent and the release from the vent of a mixture
capable of transmitting flame is considered to be highly un_
likely.
Flame arresters are not considered necessary for use in
conjunction with P & V valves venting to atmosphere be_
cause flame speeds are less than vapour velocities across
theseatsofP&Vvalves.
Friction loss through the flame arrester reduces the flow
rate through the vent fitting.
. Ine narrow vapour passages of the flame arrester can
block up and thus cause pressure or vacuum related dam_
age to the tank envelope.

r{E-

-qy

Figure 7.25 Pressure and vacuum reliefvalve

Couftesy of Tyco Valves & Contrcts

7.8.3 Emergency vents

The purpose of an emergency vent is to release a sudden rise

in intemal pressure which is beyond the capacity ofthe normal
vents.. Their use.is dependant upon the type of product being
stored in the tank and whether or not the tank has a franqibl6
roof. A sudden rise in pressure may be caused by events iuch
as an externalfire, a burst heating tube ora exothermic reaction
in the tank.
The emergency vent consists of a base unit with a wejghted
hinged cover. The seal between the base unit and the cover is
maintained by the knife-edged rim of the base unit acting on a

r gure /.zrj Emergency venl Figure 7.27 A typicalflame arrestor

Cauiesy of Tyco Vatves & Controls
Counesy of Tyco Valves & Controls

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT ,I97

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 231/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tankfiftings and ancillary equipment for ambient temperature tanks

7.9 Tank access

For safety reasons a tank should have two means of egress
from the roof. For a single tank, which is not interconnected with
another, then the second means ofaccess is usually by a verti-
cal-caged ladder.
The BS 2654, API 650 and prEN 14015-'l Codes all specify
similar design requirements for access ways but in using these
the designer must also be aware of any local and/or client re-
quirements issues.
and safety
Whilstthere are some differences between the tank Codes, the
principal requirements are as follows:
. Minimum clear width of a staircase, platform or walkway
shall be 600 mm.
Minimum height to the top handrail of a horizontal platform
or walkway shall be 1070 mm.
Minimum depth of a stair tread shall be 200 mm.
lvlaximum slope for a staircase 45' (50' in API)
Handrailing is required on the inside stringer ofa spiral stair-
case where the gap between the stringer and the tank shell
exceeds 200 mm.
The normal "going" and "rise" for treads of a spiral stair-
cases is 200 mm.
The maximum vertical rise between intermediate platforms
of a staircase is 6 m.
. API requires the design to be based on a concentrated
moving load of 4450N, whereas the BS Code requirement Figure 7.28 Handrail construclion
is for the design to be based on a load of 2400 N/m2 plus
wind load. Thereafter the erector/welder climbs up the staircase and
weldsthe subsequent treads in place as heascends (using
. Handrailing is to be capable of taking a load of 1000 N the appropriate safety equipment).
(890N to API) in any direction.
There are long-term disadvantages with this type of staircase,
. Treads which are welded to the shell are prohibited by the and these are:
BS and European Code for shell thicknesses over 12.5 mm
(Yield 275 . Being welded directly to the shell makes corroded treads
on steel having a UTS greater than 460N/mm2
N/mm'z) difficult to replace (galvanised treads cannot be used be-
cause of the health risk in welding on to a galvanised sur-
. Vertical ladders over 4m high shall be fitted with safety face).
cages. BS 4211 allows a maximum height between interme-
diate platforms of 9m but it is normal to limit this to 6m on
. Where tank shells are thermally insulated, there are numer-
tanks. ous penetrations in the cladding where the dogleg supports
and treads pass through and offer a path forthe rain to get in
Four means of accessing tanks will be considered: and cause corrosion on the shell.
. Spiral staircase . The tread replacement issue can be solved by using bolt on
. Radial staircase treads where a short length ofdrilled angle bar is welded toe
on to the shell to which the tread is bolted. Similarly at the
. Horizontal olatform outertread support a short length ofdrilled flat bar is welded
. Vertical ladder to the support to carry the tread.
. Because ofthe shortcomings ofthe weld on staircase, most
7.9.1 Spiral staircase spiral staircases today are constructed with a inner and
outer stringer and bolted galvanised treads. The stringers
Probably the most common means ofaccess is the spiral stair- are suooorted off brackets welded to the shell but the limita-
case. This staircase follows the contour of the tank shell as it tions in the Codes regarding the welding of permanent at-
rises from ground level to the roof ofthe tank. The construction tachments to shells must be observed.
ofthe staircase can take severalforms and the traditional one is . The double stringer spiral staircase is to be preferred for
that which is shown in BS 2654, figure 25, details of which are thermally insulated tanks because ofthe smallernumberof
shown in Figure 7.28. penetrations in the cladding.
This type of staircase is simple to fabricate and erect Erection
Figwe 7.29 shows a double stringer spiral staircase being
on the tank is as follows;
erected on a new tank and Figure 7.30 shows a completed
. Obtain an accurate height ofthe tank and assuming the rise staircase.
of each tread is to be 200 mm then a calculation will estab-
lish the position for the lowest tread on the tank 7.9.2 Radial staircase

. The first eight or so treads can be welded to the shell to-

gether with the 25 mm square bar supports (known in the This type of staircase is often used to access large diameter
tank business as "dog leg" supports) from ground level. tanks, which have large bunded areas. The staircase com-

198 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 232/296
7/18/2019 fittingsand
7 TankTanks
Guide to Storage and Equipment
ancillary equipment for ambient tgmpercture tanks

Figure 7.31 Radialslalrcase on rooflank

Figure 7.29 A double stringer sptatslaircase being erecled

CoutTesy of McTay

Fig re 7.32 Horizontal platforms

Couftesy of Royal Vapak

dial staircase for access from the bund area.

The platforms have to allow for movement of the tanks due to

product and wind load and foundation set ement. One end of
the platform is therefore fixed to hinged brackets on one tank,
which allow vertical movement; the other end is restrained lat-
erally butallowed to slide ln the horizontal direction to allowfor
tank movement. Safety chains are connected loosely between
this end of the platform and the adjacent tank to prevent the
platform falling in the event that there is excessive movement
between the tanks.

7.9.4 Vertical ladders

Tank operators do not favour vertical ladders as a main means

of access to a tank roof because they are tiring to climb and re-
quire the full use of alllimbs during the ascent, hence the carry_
Figure 7.30 Double si.inger spiralstaircase ing of any sundry equipment is difficult. However, as a second-
Coulesy of Royal Vopak
ary means of escape from a tank roof under emergency
conditions when the primary route is blocked or othenrise un-
mences at the bund wall and progressively rises via the inter- available, then they are most welcome. Such a means of
mediate platforms to the tank roof. Support for the staircase is access is shown in Figure 7.33.
usually by 'A frames under each intermediate platform. Figure
7.31 shows a typical arrangement on a floating roof bnk. Self-closing safety gates should be provided at the top of each
ladder section to prevent personnel inadvedenfly stepping into
the open space at the top of the ladder and sustaining a ;asty
7.9.3 Horizontal platforms
accident. When twoormore people are following each other it is
recommended to allow the ladder section to be cleared by one
This form of access, shown in Figure 7.32, is favoured on person before the next one starts their ascent or descent. This
multi-tank installations where the tanks are ljnked together by
platforms and prevents any boot detritus, equipment or person from falling on
onlythe extremity tanks each have a spiralor ra- to the person below

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 199

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 233/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7Tank fittings and ancillary equipmentfor ambignt tempemturc tanks

' Fo* enffi aE plac€d 6xt mat lo th6 bntr in .fth a position th*, tn lha €wnt of
6 tir€, toam c€n bs spEygd on to th€ tank tom s safe di.tanc€. This hdnod is nor
r€comh€.tdBd as lhs pdma.y fqn of prcl€ction tof tank os ,8 m in diam€t€f

Figu.e 7.34 Pdncipal foam systems

determined application rate at the base of the tank, above the

bottom water layer. The foam rises through the stored product
to form an extinguishing blanketat the surface. The rising foam
causes rotational currents, which carry cold product to the
burning surface, which can aid extinction.
The concept of base injection only became possible with the
development of fluoro protein type foam concentrates, which
have high resistance to product contamination and good fluid-
Additionallythe finished foam must have excellent burnback
ity.
resistance (the ability of a foam blanket to resist direct flame
and heat impingement) and stability.
Figure 7.33 Vertical ladder
The system requirements are:
Cowlesy of Royal Vopak
a) A pressurised supply of fresh or sea water
b) Suitable foam concentrate induction equipment to pro-
7.10 Fire protection systems duce a 3% solution of foam concentrate

As one can readily understand, the planning for the prevention c) Foam concentrate storage facilities
offire, especially in petrochemical installations, is high on their d) H;gh back pressure foam generators (HBpGs)
managements' priolity list, as the consequences of an inferno e) Non-return valve
can have disastrous results, not only to the installation but to
the surrounding area and environment. f) Bursting disc (where a non-return valve is not considered
sufficiently secure to prevent leakage of product back
The subject isInstitute
Association, well-documented in the National Fire Protection along the foam line)
of Petroleum and British Standard Codes. g) lsolation gate valve on the tank (normally lefr open)
References 7. 3lo 7.6 provide useful information on this impor-
tant issue. h) Suitable interconnecting pipe work and valving

For the purposes ofthis Section the protection of storage tanks Systems may be fullyfixed with all components permanently in-
by the use offoam and waterwill be considered. stalled, or alternatively semi-fixed, using portable HBpGs for
connection to suitable tank inlets or product lines.

7.10.1 Foam systems The number and diameteroffoam inlets willdeoend on the tank
diameter and the type of stored product.
The foam methods considered to be the most widely used and Figure 7.35 may be used as a guide for the number of inleb.
regarded to give an acceptable overall level of protection are The minimum foam application rate is 4.1 litresimin/m, (0.1
referred to in this Section. The design guidelines are to be gpmift2) and this rate will decide the size of the foam inleb.
found in References 7.3 to 7.6.
Inlets must be positioned above anywaterlayer in the iank and
The foam fire fighting
ing concentrate system
into the works by
fire fighting introducing
water main. Thisfoam
a mak-
produces mayterminate flush with the tank wallor be fitted with stubs pro-
truding into the tank. The latter may discharge horizontally or
a solution, which is fed to a foam generator, and the resulting may be angled vertically. Discharge downwards should be
foam is directed to the fire. avoided, particularly if the foam can enter a water bottom or im-
For fixed roof, floating roof and Internal floating roof storage
tanks there are three principal foam systems available and Fla3h loint r >37.0' c
theseare;base injection, top foam pouring andfoam cannons. uD o 24 1 1

These systems are categorised in Figure 7.34. >24 10 36 2 1

7.10.1.1 Base injection >36 o 42 3 2

>42|o 4A 2
Base injection systems (also known as sub-surface foam injec-
>48 lo 54 5 2
tion systems) are suitable for use on fixed roof tanks containing
liquid hydrocarbons with the exception of Class 1A hydrocar- >54 io 60 6 3
bon liquids or alcohols, esters, ketones, aldehydes, anhy- >60 ona addltionEl inlet 465m' oI 6xp&ed pmdud 697mr df €xpos€d produd

drides, or other products requiring the use of alcohol-resistant

foams. In operation, specialised equipment designed to oper-
ate against a back pressure introduces aspirated foam at a pre- Figure 7.35 Number and diameleroffoam inlels

2OO STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 234/296
7/18/2019 Wte t9tr1 9j3 t
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

pinge on the base of the tank. Where more than one inlet is re- escaping via the foam pipework)
quired, they should be spaced equally around the tank shell, us- fl Foam oourer
ing either separate inlets, or alternatively a single inlet feeding
into an internal manifold with outlet oiges towards the tank Normally each ofthe fixed tank shell units are supplied by indi-
circumference. vidual lines from a safe area outside the tank bund but they can
be supplied by one line to the tank which splits at a manifold to
Correct design will take into account pressure losses in the fol- feed each unit.
lowrng areas:
The number offoam inlets is as shown in Figure 7.35 and this,
a) Friction loss in pipe work, fittings and valves together with a minimum foam application rate of 4.1
b) The maximum static head of the stored product litres/min/m'? (0.1 gpm/ft2) willdetermine the size of the foam in-
lets. The foam solution flow ihrough each inlet should be simi-
c) Pressure loss through the foam induction equipment and lar. By dividing the total minimum foam solution application rate
foam generators
by the minimum number of inlets required, the flow rate per
Features of the base injection system include: pourer unit is established.
a) Rapid response with minimum demand on resources, wa- Certain low boiling point flammable stored products, gasohols
ter supply, foam compound and manpower and high viscosity heated liquids may require higher or, in cer-
b) Desig n application rates of foam are achieved with 'l 00% iain circumstances, lower application rates than that stated
of the foam reaching the surface of the stored product. here. These should, in all instances, be determined by test.
c) High resistance of the system componenis to damage Design notes
during tank explosion or fire. lf two or more inlets are required they should deliverthe foam at
d) Circulation of cold product dissipates hot product layers the same rate to the surface of the tank and that they are ar-
near the burning surface and aids extinction. ranged at equal spacing around the shell.
Aschematic ofa base injection system is shown in Figure 7.36. All pipe work, valving and riser systems should be designed to
give equal flow rates from each pourel
The selection of HBPGS and foam concentrate requirements approximaiely
are by reference to data produced by the manufacturers of the Tests have shown thatfoam willtraveleffectively across at least
proprietary equipment and foam concentrates. 30 m of exposed burning product surface. Thus on very large
tanks, it may be necessary to increase the number of pourer
7.10.1.2 Top foam pourers
units above the minimum recommended number.
Top foam pouring systems are used to protect fixed roof tanks
The foam inlets to the tank should be 300 mm above the maxi-
and fixed rooftanks fitted with internal covers. ln each case the
mum designed product storage level.
systems are designed on the basis that the fire risk comprises
the total surface area of the stored product. Cautionary note
The sysiem operates by introducing a foam concentfate into a ln the event of an exploslon in a tank causing ruptures at the
fire water feed line outside the tank bund area. This line is led to roof{o-shell joint and distortion in the upper shell plating, if this
a foam generator, foam box and pourer all of which are is in the area of any of the foam units, these units may be ren-
mounted in line at the top of the tank shell. When inliiated, the dered ineffective.
foam solution is propelled to the tank where the foam generaior Protection of bitumen storage tanks
aerates
bursting the
discsolution and delivers the resulting foam thfough a For fixed protection on bitumen tanks the only suitable systems
in the foam box. A pourer unit immediately inside
the tank shell and connected to the foam box, directs the foam
are inert gas or steam injection into the vapour space. Water
down the shell to form a blanket which extinguishes the burning
must not be used as this is likely to result in a hazardous, un-
prooucl controllable froth-over or a steam explosion owing to the vapori-
sation ofthe water at the high storage temperatures used for bi-
The system requirements are: tumen. For further information refer to Reference 7.6.
a) A pressurised supply of fresh or seawater lllustrations and examples of top foam pourers are shown in
b) Suitable foam concentrate induction equipment to pro- Figures 7.37 to 7.39.
duce the required percentage offoam concentrate in wa- 7.10.1.3 Rimseal foam pourers
ter
The basis ofthis system has already been described in Chapter
c) Foam concentrate storage facilities 6, Section 6.5.6.
d) Foam generator (immediately under the foam box) The concept of a rimseal protection system is based on the as-
e) Foam box with bursting disc (this prevents tank vapours sumption that, in the event of a fire, the fire will be contained in

FOAM BLANKET

BURSTING DISC GATE

Figure 7.36 Base lnjeclion sysiem schematic

Counesy of Angus Fire

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 201

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 235/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
I l3 ltl 9:3 4 flf@yg Jp : 9 blent temperaturc tanks

the seal area between the foam dam and the tank shell and the
system design is based on treating only this annular area. This
means that if a fire should occur it must be detected earlv and
tackled rapidly before the roof becomes damaged and ailows
the fire to spread
surface area. Should- often to the extent of engulfing the entire
a situation arise in which th-e flre does
spread to the whole exposed surface area then a rimseal oro_
tection mechanism alone (as dictated by design of the system)
is unlikely to achieve extinguishment. lf this ii perceivjd as a

system designed to provide total coverage ofthe roof area. -

possibility, ihen consideration should be given to a top pouring

The minimum recommended foam solution application rate for

nmseal systems is 12.2 litreslminl m2.
Figure 7.37 Top foam pourer schematic
Couftesy of Angus Fie The minimum number of rimseal foam pourers is dictated bv
the height of the foam dam and is as follows:
. For a 300 mm high foam dam the maximum spacing be_
tween foam pourers should be j2.2 m.
. For 600 mm high foam dams this can be increased to a
maximum of 24.4 m.
7.10,1.4 Foam cannons
Fixer and trailer-mounted foam cannons are suitable for pro_
tecting all types ofvertical storage tanks and though subject to
performance limitations they can be used as the primary pro_
tection system to protect tanks up to 1g m in diameter.'l-iow_
ever, they are often better suited and more commonly installed
as €rther a secondary fixed foam system or to tackle spill fires
with the added benefit of being able to be used for tank coolinq.
A foam cannon in operation is shown in Figure 7.40.
The single most important considerataon when proposing foam
cannons as the primary system is that, to be effective, ex_
panded finished foam must first be delivered to the seat of the
fire. As, in most systems, the foam cannons will be close to
ground level, the foam produced willfirst be required to reach
up and over the tank shell. This requirement may prove difficult
to achieve because of:

a) The height of the tank

b) The distance between a tank and the cannon position

Fgurc 7.38 Top foam pourer unil

c) The prevailjng weather conditions

Courtesy of Angus Fire

d) The fire updraught
e) The high probability that a partial rupture of a fixed roof
tank may only leave a small aperture through which the
expanded foam can be targeted
Afurther problem exists in that expanded foam is applied force-
fully to the surface of the burning product, which leads to in_
creased contamination of the foam. The effects of this mav be
reduced by directing the foam stream onto the inside of the iank
shell and allowing it to run down onto the su rface ofthe product.
However, in a live fire situation this may prove impossible
achreve. to
System deslgn criteria
In all primary protection systems using foam cannons it is as-
sumed that all the calculated foam solution requirement actu-
ally reaches the area to be protected. As has alreadV been ex-
plained. to achieve the minimum foam solution reouired.
consideration must also be given to the potential foam solution
losses that will occur due to access and windage problems.
Enough equipment must therefore be available to ensure that
under all conditions the minimum application rate is beinq
achieved. This will. in most circumstances, result in consider_
able over-capacity in terms ofequipment resource. This is often
of the order of 2:1

The minimum specific design requirements can be summa_

flsed as:
Figure 7.39 Foam pourcr and water detuge pipework (al cenlre oftank)
a) The mjnimum foam solution application rate should be 6.5

202 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 236/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks
7 Tank and
fittings Equipment
and ancillary equipment far ambEr: :e-a+-2.--i -a-. :

rate of water is 10 litres/min/m2 of vertical tank surface - :e--

tact with the fire.
For the calculation of water requirements, the area sholro €
assumed to be that based on a nominal half of the veftca
height ofthe tank. Water should not be applied to the tank roo.
but foam may be used at a rate of 6.5 litres/min/m2. based ol.
tank cross-sectional area.
This rate may reduce to 4 litres/min/m2 for tanks equipped with
fixed foam pourers.

7.11,2 Tank cooling methods

The methods by which tanks may be cooled can be summa-

rised as follows:
7.11.2.1 Water spray and deluge sprinkler systems
This is the most efficient method ofdelivering water, evenly dis-
Figure 7.40 Afoam cannon in operation - 15,000 tiire/min offoam sotr.jlion tributed and at the correct application rate, to the outside roof
Courtesy of Angus Firc and shell of the storage tank.
There are two principal ways of accomplishing this:
litres/min/m2 for all types of foam concentrates on ianks
containing liquid hydrocarbons. 1) Using concentric rings of piping supported about 300 mm
above the roof. These rings are fitted with spray nozzles,
b) The minimum foam solution application rate may have to
which give an overlapping spraypattern to coveithewhole
be increasedto tackle specjalrisks i.e. gasohols, Class 1A
hydrocarbons, etc. roof one
with waterring
withspray The shell
atthe topisofand
similarly protected, usually
about 600 mm clearof
c) Greater minlmum foam solution application rates may theshell. Spray nozzles fitted to this ring and angled down
also be required for hot fuels afrer a prolonged pre_burn. slightly are arranged to spraywateroverthe whole cjrcum_
d) Foam cannons should not be considered as primary pro_
tection mechanisms on vertical fixed roof storaqe tanks
over 18 m diameter.
e) The minimum foam solution discharge duration time
should be:

-
-
Crude petroleum and hydrocarbons wjth flash ooints
below 37.8'C - 65 mins.
Hydrocarbons with flash points between 37.g.C and
&
ry..
93.3'C - 50 mins.
-*.'-* )J\
/.-'\\ @aJ
7.11 Water cooling systems i/\\
The. individual tank design, layout and piping system for any
particular installation will be a function both ofthe phvsicalfac_
\w-
tors like terrain. site elevation, drainage, etc. and oi the govern-
ing Standards regarding permissible tank spacings and posi_
tion within the installation.
Despite taking all reasonable precautions as demanded bv
these considerations, a fire in an individual storaqe tank wiil
generate signlficant radiated heat, which can damioe and/or
ignite adjacent tanks which would not otherwise be d]recflv in-
volved. A deep-seated fire in even the smallest diameter iank
can create major problems unless cooling wateris applied to its
close neighbours.
Tank cooling is therefore recommended as essential to com_
plete the protection ofa particular installation and the followino Figure 7.41 Walerdeluge system with conicatdiffuser
guidelines are given in the part 19 of the lp Code. (Referenci
7.5).
Tanks within two tank diameters distance downwind of a tank
fire, or one tank diameterdistance in other directions, should be
protected by application of water spray at minimum recom-
mended rate of 2 litres/min/m2.

7.11.1 Special case - Floating roof tanks

With rimsealfires in floating roofianks, the shellwhich is heated

from the fire may be cooled with waterwhilst attempts are made
to achieve and maintain an effectivefoam blanket, and to avoid
re-ignition from hot surfaces. The recommended application Figurc 7.42 Delail of sptash. plate

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 203

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 237/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
7 Tank fiftings and ancillary equipment for ambient tempenlurc tanks

hydraulic detection system

7.11.2.2 Fixed and trailer-mounted water cannons
Both static and oscillating water cannons are a cost-effective
means of delivering water to cool slorage tanks and the num-
ber, capacity, position and deployment will ultimately depend
upon individual site requiremenb. However, access problems
and local water supply considerations must be taken into ac-
count when @nsidering their introduction.

7.12 References
Figure 7.43 Roof deluge system using a coronet
7 .1 Reinforcement of Manholes, R. T. Rose, British Wetding
Courtesy of McTay Joumal, October 1961.
ference and run down the shell. 7.2 Tank Calibration, Sect'on 1, The Institute of petroleum,
2) The deluge system consisb of a single water main being Petroleum Measurement Manual, part ll.
led to the crown ofthe iank roof where the water is directed
vertically on to the roof and ls evenly spread overthe roof
7 .3 NFPA 1 1 &andard for Low -, Medium -, and High - Ex-
pansion Foam, 2002 Edition.
by a conicalnozzle atthe end ofthe ouflet pipe or by a cor-
onet attached to the roof plating, (shown schematicaly in 7.4 NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustibte Liquids Code.
Figures 7.41 and 7.43). 7-S BS 5306 Seclion 6.7: 1988 Specification follow axpan-
As the waterstreams down the roof it is directed on to the shell sion Foam systems.
by splash plates fitted to the curb angle at the pedphery of the 7.6 lP Model Code of Safe Practice: part 19, Fire precau-
shell. These
directed plates
against are angled so that as the water hits them it is
and tions at Petroleum Refineries and Bulk Storage lnstalla-
runs down the shell. See Figure 2.42. tions.
These systems can be fed from a waterdeluge valve, which is 7.7 Bitumen, lnstitute of Petroleum Code of Safe practice,
automatically triggered, by some form of electric, pneumatic or Paft 11.

204 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 238/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

8 Tank venting of ambient temperature

tanks
This Chapteris confined to the venting ofambienttanks. The venting oflowtemperaturetanks is
dealt with in Chapter 20.

The requirementrs
are discusssd the various
andofexamples tank Codes
of suitable and devices
venting of the most
are influential venting
provided with Code API
infonnation on 2000
their
installation and relief capacity calculation methods.

Contents:
8.1 lntroduction.
8.2 The tank design Code requirements
8.2.1 APt 650
8.2.2 BS 2654
8.2.3 DrEN 14015
8.2.3.1 The evaluation of venting requlrements of prEN 14015
8-2.4 APt 2000

8.2.4.1 The evaluation ofventing requirements ofAPl 2000

8.2.4.2 Means of venting
8.2.4.3 Pressure limitations
8.2.4.4 Relief valve installation
8.3 Typical relief valve equipment

8.4 References

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 205

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 239/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
8 Tank venting of ambient tempera ure .€,n^s

8.1 Introduction caal andsafety reasons. lt is interesting just how the different
ambient tank design Codes address this subiect.
It is probable that tank ventjng problems have brouoht more
storage tanks to griefthan any other single cause. Tale-s of such
lartures abound. The draining of the hydrostatic test water 8.2.1 APt 650
whilst failing to allow for any, or at least sufficient air to re_enter
the tank is a particular classic. The draining of the test water is This Standard lReference g. ?) is curiously
relaxed reoardino
often done at the end ofthe tank test and o;e ofthe last activi- this issue. lt is only in Appendix F (Design oftanksfor sna inl
ties ofthe day is to open the tank drain valve before leaving the ternal pressures) that there is any mention of the subject.
site and allowing the bnk to empty overnight.
The efforts of the tank to express jts displeasure at being sub_ F.2.'1 suggests that vents shall be sized and set so that at their
rated capacity, the internal pressure under any normal operaf
jected to unacceptable levels of internal vacuum (or ing conditions exceeds neither the internal design pressure.
in m-odern
parlance, internal negative pressure) via sundry creaks and nor the maximum design pressure (this latter is the pressu re for
groans, followed by early elastic shape changes, are thus non-anchored tanks limited by uptift at the base ofthe tank shell
played to an absent audience, and the following riorning as described in the earlier Chapter on bnk design).
brings
a serious surprise. The tank which has been the subjeciof se-v_
F7.7 (which is for anchored tanks with desjgn pressures up to
eral months concentrated effort to bring to completion is now in
2.5 lb/in,) states that venting shall be supplied by the purchaser
a crumpled heap. Replacement, or repair costs are added to bv
In accordance with Apl Standard 2000. The manufacturer
Iiquidated damages to fu(her rub the embarrassed contractor's shall
provide a suitable tank connection. The vents shall be
nose in this unfoftunate situation which could so easily have checked
during or after the testing of the tank.
been avoided.
This.suggests that the tank purchaser is responsible for per-
The author's experience sadly involves such incidents. In one
forming the ventsizing calcutations, providing the equipment
case tne vacuum vent was propped open with a piece of wood
necessaryand informing the tank manufactureras to whatcon_
which
ing in fell out during
a total the night
roof failure. causing the valve to close, result_ nection sizes are required. ln the author's view, this is an unsat_
In another case, a suitable vacuum isfactory situation as many tank purchasers do not have the
valve was installed, but complete with its transit packing still in
technical abilities to undertake this responsibilitv or a clear un_
place. This had the effect of jamming the valve closedl
derstanding of the importance of getting it right.
Storage tanks, despite their apparent size and robustness, are
in reality quite fragile structures and require to be keot within 8.2.2 BS 2654
their design pressure and vacuum envelope. Comparatively
small excursions from this safe territory can bring about dra_ This Standard provides the option forthe venting requirements
matrc consequences.
to be specified by the purchaser, or to be determined (presum_
To ensure that fixed roof tanks are maintained in their safety ably by the tank manufacturer) in accordance with a sei of rules
zone, provtston must be made to allow the tank to vent to atmo- which are provided. These rules fall jnto two parts, the general
sphere. This is usually achieved by the pfovision ofopen vents, rules which are summarised below and the more speciic rules
pressure reliefvalves. vacuum reliefvalves and as an extreme wh ich lead to the calculation of req uired venting rates for partic_
form of pressure relief, a frangible roof arrangement. The de_ ular tanks and lead to vent sizing. This latter set of rules are ba_
sign and details of frangible roofs is covered in ChaDter 4. sically a metric version ofApl 2OOO, and as such do not warrant
Bursting discs are not popular for this service. The performance repetition in this Section.
ofbursting discs at the low pressures required by storage tanks The general rules include:
is not good. The differences between the maximum ind the
minimum anticipated bursting pressures is large and would re_ . The venting system provided shall caterfor the followino:
surt In unnecessary venting and disc replacement. The Derfor_
mance of bursting discs improves as the design pressure
a) Normal vacuum relief
increases, but this is of litfle use to the tank designer.
b) Normal pressure relief
Events to which fixed roof tanks can be subiected to reouire
them to need venting provisions include: c) Emergency pressure relief (this latter shall be
specified in accordance with BS 2654 unless
. Liquid movement into or out of the tank causinq disregarded at the purchasels discretion)
outbreathing or inbreathing of air. product vapours. a mix_
ture of air and product vapours or In some crrcumstances . Where emergency pressure relief is required, it shallbe pro_
purge gas. videdbysuitableventsorbytheprovisionof afranqibleioof
. Thermal changes to the tank (often diurnal) necessitating loint.
inbreathing or outbreathing. . The numberand sizeofvents shallbe based on theventino
. The rupture of internal heating coils. capacity obtained from Appendix F (i.e. the metric Ap]
2000), and shall be sufficient to prevent any accumulatjon
. Outbreathing as a result of exposure of the outer surfaces of pressure or vacuum from exceeding the values given be_
of the tank to fire.
. Process-related events such as the import ofwarm Droduct. . Valves may be fitted with coarse mesh screens to prevent
off-specification product liquids or vapours and similar hao_ the ingress of birds. The use of fine mesh screens as anti
penings. flash protection is not recommended because of the possi-
bility of blockage, especially under winter conditions. Con_
sideration should be given to the possibility of corrosion
8.2 The tank design Code requirements when selecting the material for the wrre screen.

The protection of fixed roof storage tanks from the harmful ef_ . The set vacuum plus the accumulation to permit the valves
fects of excessive levels of internal pressure or vacuum is to achieve the required throughput shall not exceed va. This
clearly a matter of considerable importance for both commer- is the vacuum to be used for the design ofthe tank shellsec_

206 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 240/296
7/18/2019 B Tank venting of ambient tempercture tanks
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

ondary wind stiffening which has been the subject of earlier This list is most helpful, but for some reason omits to mention
Chapters. the accidental import of hot liquid. This is a particularly danger-
. ous condition, especjally where the tank contents are volatile or
The set pressure plus the accumulation to permit the valves
have a water heelwhich may suddenly boil.
to achieve the required throughput for normal pressure re-
lief shall not exceed the design pressure. It is interesting that venting resuliing from changes jn baromet-
ric pressure is omitted from this list.
. No specific rules are provided forthe emergency pressure
accumulation, but the following shall be considered: Having listed the venting components, this document then
goes on to describe how they may be evaluated. This section is
a) lf it is expected that the design pressure is to completely new and as such should represent the latest think-
be exceeded by the emergency pressure accu- ing on this subject. For this reason the specific requirements of
mulation, then it shall be verified that the this document are described in Section 8.2.3.1.
strength of the roof-to-shell junction is ade-
quate and whether tank anchorage is required. The document does make a number ofgeneral points, amongst
which are:
Note: This particularly applies to column,supported tank . Free vents can be applied to non pressure tanks.
roofs with low roof slopes and to small bnks.
. Pressure and vacuum relief valves must be used for
b) Account shall be taken ofthe differences which low-pressure, high-pressure and very high-pressu re tanks.
can occur between the opening and closing
pfessures (blowdown) of vents of different . The set pressure plus the accumulation to achieve the de-
types. sired flow capacity shall not exceed the tank design pres-
sure nor the tank design internal negative pressure.
. The Standard does not cater for protection against . lf very high emergency outbreathing rates are required,
overpressure caused by explosion within the tank, and them additional emergency vents shall be supplied or the
where such protection is required special consideration tank shall meet the requirements of Annex K (frangible
should be given to the design ofthe tank and the venting de- roof).
vices.
. Flow resistance due to connected pipework or possible
back pressures within the system shall be considered.
8.2.3 prEN 14015
. The pressure and vacuum settings of emergency relief
This draft Standard has departed from the usual practice offol- valves shall be such as to not operate during the normal re-
lowing the requirements of API 2000. Asubcommittee of Euro- lief valve operation.
pean venting specialists was set up to write the requirements . For the sizing ofthe emergency relief valve system, the flow
for venting systems which appears in Annex L. This Annex de- capacities ofthe normalpressure and vacuum reliefvalves
scribes the sources ofthe tank venting requirements as follows: can be taken into account.
. Normal pressure venting requirements resulting from the . When storing flammable liquids which can lead to an explo-
maximum anticipated rate of import of product to ihe tank. sive atmosphere within the tank, the venting system shall
. be capable of prevent;ng the transmission of flame into the
Normal pressure venting requirements resulting from the
maximum anticipated increase in tank surface temperature. tank. This
which presumably
are not universallymeans the of
approved usein of flame
some arrestors
circles, due
. Normal vacuum venting requirements resulting from the to their tendency to block up with certain products with the
maximum anticipated rate of export of product from the passage of time.
IAN K,
8.2.3.1 Evaluation of the venting requirements from
. Normal vacuum venting requirements resulting from the prEN 14015
maximum anticipated decrease in tank surface tempera- Normal outbreathing and inbreathing
ture.
This is otherwise known as the normal pressure and vacuum
. Emergency pressure venting requirements resulting from relief and is made up of liquid import or export and thermal
the exposure of the tank to an external fire. effects.
. Other emergency conditions. These are listed for both pres- Liquid movement outbreathing
sure and vacuum relieving systems and include: This falls into three categories dependent upon the liquid stor-
age temperature and the vapour pressure:
Malfunction of a gas blanketing system
For prod ucts stored below 40 'C or with a vaDour pressu re
- l,4alfunciion of a tank heating system regulation a) less than 50mbar
- Leakage of a tank heating system equ 8.1
- Exceeding the maximum allowable pumping capacity where:
due to incorrect connections within the pumping system
Uop = outbreathing requirement in normal m3/hrofair
- Chemical reactions
Upt = the maximum filling rate in m3/hr
- Poor pipe cleaning b) For spiked products (i.e. with methane) the maximum
Product transfer by pressurised gas venting capacity shall be increased by a factor of 1.7 to
take into account the gas evolved from spiked products
A sudden cool-down due to cold ljquid being sprayed during filling, hence:
into a hot and empty tank
U.o = 1.7Uor equ 8.2
l\4alfunction of a sprinkler system
For prod ucts stored above 40 'C or with a vapou r oressure
Excessive liquid flow out of the bnk c) greater than 50mbar, the outbreathinq shall be increased

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 207

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 241/296
7/18/2019
8 Tank venting of ambient tempercturc tanks Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

by the evaporation rate whjch shall be specified bythe pur-

chaser. ^,1
r" lt equ 8.6
Liquid movement inbreathing
4"
In this case:
wnere:
equ 8.3
wnere: h = heat transfer coefficient (WmrK)

U,o = the inbreathing requirement in normal m3/hr = thickness ofthe insulation (m)

Up" = the maximum ljquid export rate in m3/hr Note:

Lin
= thermat conductivity (WimK)
As an example, for an insulation thickness of 0..10
Thermal outbreathing m. a
thermal conductivity of 0.05
This falls into two categories: -W/mK and an inside heat
transter coefficient of 4Wlm,K. the reduction factor is
a) Tanks without thermal insulation catcutated to be 0.11
ii For a partially insulated tank the reduction factor shall
be
u", =0.25V_0rl 1-:1tnq l
I
equ 8.4
grven Dy:
L -l

where: +, =fu+.1,-*.] equ 8.7

APap = accumulation pressure in mbar gauge where:

Uor = thermal outbreathing in normal m3/hr of air
A = total area of the tank surface area (shell and
Vr tank volume in m3
= <5 mbarg or is unknown, use the bracketed roof) (mr)
Note 1; if aP"p Airp = insulated surface of the tank (mr)
term =1.0
Fora tankwithin an outer containment tank the reduction factor
Note 2:The 0.25 factor is valid for latitudes between 5g" and
shall be given by:
43'. North of 58. use 0.20 and south of aa" use O.Ci.
b) Tanks with thermal insulation R" = 0.25 + 0.75& equ 8.8
See below for the reduction factor for insulation or outer
containment tanks. where;
Thermal inbreathing
A. = tank surface area not inside the outer contain_
This falls into two categories: ment tank jn m, (probably part of the shell and
the tank roof)
a) Tanks without thermal insulatiorl
Emergency venting

L1-140AP""
u,, =cv-o71 I
equ 8.5 Inthe case ofan externalfire ora malfunction ofothersystems
+ pve such as a blanketing arrangement. outbreathing beyond
I
.tank_
the capability ofthe normal venting equipment provided miy
be
where: required. For this eventuality it is necessary to fit additi;nal
emergency venting equipment.
C = 3 for hexane and products with similar vapour
pressUres and/or stored at temperatures below Exposure ofthe external surfaces ofthe tank can give rise to
an
25 .C expansion of the gas volume within the tank (within a few min-
utes) and boiling of the tank contents (after several hours
C = 5 for products with vapour pressures higher
exposure).
than hexane and/or stored at temperatures
above 25 .C Where a frangible roof-to-shelljoint is not provided, emergency
vents must be supplied to cater for whichever ofthe following ii
Pvp = vapour pressure ofthe liquid at the highest
deemed to be appropriate:
temperature (mbar)
. The flow rate due to gas expansion shall given
APav= accumulation
negative vacuum (mbar gauge) (internal
pressure) be by:
Ur. = 15Vro h" equ 8.9
Urr = maximum thermal inbreathing requirement
(normal m3/hr of air) -1 hl equ 8.10
Note 1: lf the vapour pressure is unknown use C = 5
1.
Note 2:The factors C = 3 and 5 are valid for latitudes between
58'and 43'. North of 58" use 2.S and 4 and south of43"
use 4 and 6.5
.40
"f-"ot8 equ 8. 11
Note 3: lf Pup is unknown the bracketed term becomes 1.0
b) Tanks with thermal insulation or outer containment tanks where:
The thermai out or inbreathing is reduced when the tank is fully
suface area of the tank shell heated by the
or partially lnsulated, or fitted with an outer conbinment tank.
fire (m,)
For fully insulated tan ks the reduction factor shall be given
i by:
hi heat transfer coefficient (W/mrK)
Rni reduction factor for insulation if availaote

208 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 242/296
7/18/2019 9 E U9Jf
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment 9 9nbJ9 E yf .ef1 t

Note: Only a tank shell height of up to 9.0m above the bottom . Steam out. lf an un-insulated tank is filled with steam, the
corner is to be considered in calculating the surface condensing rate (particularly aided by rainfalt) may exceed
area. the venting capacity provided.
. The flow rate due to product boiling shall be given by: . Un-insulated tanks. A warning about such tanks in rain-
storm conditions, especiallywhen the vapour space is hot.
U,, = 4 x 1oa A..o
8'z Elr equ8.12
H" The Standard does not give rules for evaluating the ventjng re-
quirements caused by these events, but does at least list them
where: and state that they should be considered.

Hv heat of vaporisation of the product (kJ/kg)

8.2.4.1 lhe evaluation of the venting requirements of Apl
= 2000
M = molar weight of the product (kg/mol) API 2000 gives its formulae and tables in both English and met-
T = boiling temperature ofthe product ('K) ric units. Only the metric versions are given below
Note 1: For hexane (lV= 86 kg/mol, H" = 335 kJ/kg, T = 342 "K) Normal outbreathing (pressure) and inbreathing (vacuum)
and similar products where no insulation is fitted (i.e. As is the case for prEN 14015, these are the venting require-
1.0). this equation simplifies to: ments resulting from liquid movements and thermal effects.
Ure = 238\0 "' Liquid movement outbreathing
Note 2:The flow rate calculated for product boiling will always Requirements are given for liquids with flash points above and
covef the requirement for gas expansion. below 100'F:
a) Liquids with flash points above 100 "F (37.8 .C) or a nor
8.2.4 APt 2000 mal boiling point of 300 'F (148.9 "C): venting equivalent
to 1 .01 Nm3/hr per cubic metre/hour of the maximum filling
rate
API 2000 has been around for many years and is undoubtedly b) Liquids with flash points below 100 "F (37.8 'C) or a nor-
the grandfather of tank venting Codes. lt covers non-refriger-
ated tanks (i.e. ambient tanks) and refrigerated tanks up to de- mal boiling point of 300'F (148.9'C); venting equivalent
sign pressures of 15 lbiinr. to 2.02 Nm3/hr per cubic metre/hour of the maximum filling
rate
The following covers the Code requirements for non-refriger-
Note 1:An explanation of the basis of these requirements in
ated tanks only. given in Appendix A oi API 2000.
In common with the othertank Codes, Apl 20OO tists the usual Note 2;A warning about situations where the liquid js fed into a
main causes of venting being required as: tank at or near to its boiling point and higher venting
. Liquid movement into or out of the tanK. rates may be required is given.
Note 3:Table 1B shows these requirements in meiric units and
. Tank breathing due to weather changes (e.g. pressure and is shown in Fioure 8.1.
temperature changes).
. Fire exposure.

. Other circumstances resulting from equipment failure and (Nnp,hr ot Af per Cubic Meter per Hour of Liquid Ftow)
operating error. B. M€tric Unils

The Standard then lists and describes the "other circum-

stances" in some detail. In brief these are: tt*a *.Hj," rl@bl
Pressure transfer blow-off. This can occur at the end of fill- mT.bL2B ""|jlj*,
ing from trucks or similarwhere a surge ofvapour enters the
tank. A similar situation may occur after connected line pig- 149,C
Boniig Poirt < 0.94 2.t2
ging. ' uaE m tre Fd q eb8 poot ey b. us.d wnd boo r aqit lc, 6e 0a+ Ehr

Inert pads and purges. Usually related to failure of the pres-

sure regulating system.
Figure 8.1 Normal venting requiremenls
External heat transfer devices. This could be a heatedjack- Fron API 200A, bble 1B
eted tank where failure of a control valve or a temperature
sensang element has occurred. Liquid movement inbreathing
lnternal heat transfer devices. The venting provided should be equivalent to 0.94 Nm3/hr per
Vent treatment system. This could be the failure of a system cubic metre/hour of emptying rate.
designed to collect and dispose of vented producb.
Thermal outbreathing
Utility failure.
Change in temperature of the input stream to a tank Requirements are given for liquids with high and tow flash
points and boiling pointsl
Chemical reactions. Usually associated with the inadver-
tent import of an incompatible materialwhich reacts with the a) For liquids with flash points above 100 .F (37.8 "C) or a
stored product. normal boiling point above 300 'F (148.9 "C): venting at
Liquid overfilling least that shown in column 2 of Table 28 (Figure 8.2).

Atmospheric pressure b) For liquids with flash points below 100 .F (37.8 .C) or a
changes normal boiling point below 300 "F (148.9 .C): venting at
Control valve failure least that shown in column 4 of Table 28.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 209

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 243/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 244/296
7/18/2019 I Tank venting of ambient tempenture tanks
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

(squaEEetrrs) (Nn3ih) (tqu{ErDetE$) (Nh3rr)

zEF.- 913
ffi
I A721
t2r7 45 22
5 t52l 50 9895
6 1,825 60 10,971
'l 2,130 't0 11,971
8 \434 80 12'911
\7J8 90 13,801
1t 3.347 110 15,461
130 15,?51
r5 4.563 150 t6532
t7 5,172 t'75 17,416
t9 5J80 2M tE'.20
6217 230 1q102
25 6,684 2@ 19910
n 1.4t1 >2#
'l1E wited uE{ of I tark or 3rom8e r.cslcl lhall
be calorlated s follows:
Spbale 8Dd Sph roid5-1 r w€tled .t€ is cqusl b 55 p.rcctrt of tlIE toirl surfa.e 6r€3 or $e surface alea to r beight of 30 feet (9.14 sEtars)
above 8lde, whidci€r k gr€lt r.
Hdizonbllbtr&t-Tbc wcded Ee i cqurl tt 75 petce ofthe totrl surfacE aftr or $€ $rface erEa b a ho8ht of 30 feet (9.14 roeteis) above
8rrdc, whicbcvs i grcster.
V.nicd lsl'flll|e w€s.d 2de{ is €qual i,o tbe total swfscc &re{ of tbe vciticrl rtall to 6 beight of 30 feet (9.14 Eeter ) rbove grade. For a vu,
tical h$k s€tiDg o tlc Eroun4 drc arca of thc grouDd plrtcs i Dor ro bc itrclu&d as wetted afta- For a vcrrical rsnk supporrld above 8rade, a
pqtioo of th€ rte. of the totrom is o bc iaclud.d rs additioEal wetr.d surfec€. The pntion of tt€ botrom lri{ exposed to s ffrE dcpends oo rlle
diin|€t r ad clqruion oflbe tanl sbo\E glsde. Eogineqing judgtrtrt fu to be used i.o e\€luating tbe portion of the dta rrpos.d to fire.
DFoq wctr€d surfaccs largcr th'r
18m squarE f€lt (2-60 squaE netsr6), s€€ S€.tiotrs 4,3,3,2.2 6d 4.3.32.3.
Nol€:

thbL 3 3nd t|c cdslaits ll07 rtd 2O8l i Equtions 2A &d 28 rEsFcti €ly \^€E &ri\€d ftom Equarioo 1 ed FigurE B-1 by usile lhe tatent
iEsr of \Bporizado of bexale (144 BTU pcr poud or 33.9m J&g) ar atmorptsic Fessure ald thc moleo.dar weiBht of hqarc (86. t7) ald
asrulllirg a €por t mpcrallte of 60'F (15.6'C). This Eethod will Fovide res'tls widin au ac.€ptable abglec of acauzc-y for mary f,uid hav,
iDg sirnilE pmpertics (scc Appctrdix B).

Figure 8.4 Emergency venting requked for fire exposure versus wetted surface afea (mehic unils)
Frcn API 2000, table 38

Tanr hrigi/Conf gurarion hsulatiotrCooductance lffuluionThickEat

(wadmz'K) (crn) F Facto.

Bae nelal taok 0 I_0

hsulated tarl3 12;7 2.5 03b
lt.4 5 o.lib
3-8
10
15
0.0?5b
o.o5b
2.8 20 0.03?5b
25 0.03b
1.9 30 o.m5b
CoDcrE& tant d fireproottrt mie c)
*-
(s€e
Warer-lpplicatioD f..ilitiesd 1,0
D€pressuling andcmptyiDg faciliticsc _ 1.0
UudergmDrd rtqage n
Edth'covErEd rbr.ge above giade -
O.t
Lppoondnert away froln lanlf o.5
N
Tbe..illd.arion +aI rcsbr didlodg ||cnjby fte-dghting cquitrlcnt, rbrll bc Eotcomh$tibl€, and shalt nol decompo{€ at tqnperatrnes up io
ffin"F (53?,8"C). Thc tt .r is .tiPonsiblr to derer[dle if ttre insulatiotr will relist dislodgEnr by dre availsbL f&-fighrirg cquipEeDr.
If rhe
insulatioa does oot 6ccr tltl96 diLri4 oo cr€dit for insutrtion shsl be tdr . Th conducta&. "lucs d€ brs.d oD i;daior,rltt tl. .rout
conductivig of 4 BTU pcr bottr pcr rqur& fmt F'F p.a iDoll of ftichrss (9 WatB per squarc nEl€r par 'C per centiEcter of dichess). " The
i5 yalue
squ.r€ mcEr F€. 'C per cetrtirdel€r of thiclsarr) fo. dle dlcrerl conductiviry i; u .d. Fr
Gipo$ible
urct pe._F for dctcr&idng ttc ac[rdl condudrtrcc of tbe il|lulation IrEEd. The conscrvrrivc value of4 BTU per hour squarc
E P€r incb of didocss (9 walts F
'Tbese F fa4o.5 dl balcd ots thc tb.f,tlal sbo\{tr and a ternpcratul ditrerEstisl of 1600T (888.e"q w*n r:sing a neat rnpur
value of 2l -coductancc-values
BTU Fr hollr pcr squrc foot (66,200 wattr per squatE rpreD in accedanoe with thc conditions assur*d in ApI Ricommnrted
'000
Praatice 52l. rfilrn &esc coDdiliolr do Dot exis , eDgi[cllilgjudgoert lhould be used io set ct a diferrtrt F factor or to provide
ot €r means
f0( Fot€.ting tbc bdk flsrE 6rE cxposur .
cusr tbe F faotor for atr cquivabDt ooDdqchce yElue
of i$DlarioD.
dun{br idcal cotditiotrs' warrr fitE5 covering
tbe Ectal surfac.s can abso(i most iocidcut radiadol Thc rEliability ol watr application depends
otr Ealy faclors. FtEzitrS \rathc(, huh trildr, clogSrd afsEms, urdepcodablc antcr supply, rtld irnk suface clnditiors cai gevent
rmiform
watet covtiage. B€c{usc of thcac ulc.f,tiitrties, o redrction in etrvirontn€nlrl faclols is .;;mr&udad; bowcier,
as stated prwiously, pmperly
eFplird war.. c8r b. vcry €fr€ciive,
pepgs-surgg deviccs nay bc u ad, tot uo ctrdit 6hall bc atlowcd in lizilg tl|e vcntirg device for fue er,posure.
tThc fo[lwirl8 ccoditiotrs most bc rlct A
llope of rot-Lss thrD I FrEcntawa] ftoItr or u"f sml *pmviael for ai lelst 50 feet (15 met rs)
low'rd_ttc imPounding rtE3; thc itoFouD{rg ared shal have a caFcity that is lot tcss th , $e c parity of &e lEgcst tan} that can
dain ioto iq
the &ailage lFbdl toutca ftotlt odler t'". .. to dtci irnpoubdiDs atlas sball not scrioully qpose tte taa ; aoa itrj;mpoudding
arla fm tbc t r1(
  ecl ss dtc iEpduding atE s for lt€ odrcr tants (whrtlEf, rEmot€ (r with dikes eourld r]re oder u*s) sbrl be locared so [at wher up area
is fi €d to ceplcity. i$ Uquid kvcl ir tro clos€r tha 50 i€et (15 rrercrs) to tl,e tanl.

Figure 8.5 Envkonmental faclors for non-refiigerated above-ground tanks (metric units)
Fron API 2000, table 48

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 211

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 245/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
9f9 9 9 oryllEllleJlp9trlur9 ta :

T = temperature of the relieving vapour ("K) 8.2.4.3 Pressure limitations

M = the molecular weight of the vapour Fortanks which are designed to Apl 650 Appendix F (Design of
An alternative simplercalculation method is given which gives a Tanks for Small Internal Pressures) the pressure relief devices
lesser degree of accuracy. shall be sized and set so that at the rated capacity ofthe device,
the internal pressure under any normal operating condition
8.2.4.2 Means of venting shall not exceed the internal design pressure or the maximum
API 2000 provides a considerable amount of sensible advice design pressure. Both of these pressures are specillcallv
regarding the types of relieving devices to be used and how defined in Appendix F of API 650.

these
advice should be installed
is repeated and
here. For
maintained. A small part of this
those who have a serious interest
For other API 650 tanks, the pressure relief devices selected
should limitthe pressure in the tanks to prevent excessive liftino
in this subject, the complete text of this Standard, together with
of the tank roof sheeting. For a tank with 3/ 16" thick roof sheets:
the companion Standards API Rp S20 and Apl Rp 521 should
this limits the pressure to 3.5 mbar
be studied in detail (References 8.5 and 8.6).
8.2.4.4 Relief valve installation
Normal venting
This Code provides much sensible advice on the qeneral de-
Normal venting for pressure and vacuum shall be accom-
plished by a pressure/vacuum (PV) valve or an open vent with tails of how relieving devices should be installedL Amongst
rnese are:
or without a flame arresting device as described below. Relief
devices fitted with a weight and a lever are not recommended. . Installation details shall provide direct access to the tank
. PV valves are recommended for petroleum products with a vapour space and not be capable of being sealed off by the
flash point below 100 'F (37.8 "C) and where the ftuid tem- liquid contents.
perature exceeds the flash point. A flame arrestor is not . Where block valves are installed between the reljeving de-
considered necessary
vapour velocities acrosswhere PV valves
the valve areconsidered
seat are used as the
to vices and the tank (for maintenance purposes), arrange-
ments shall be made to ensure that when one relievinq
exceed the flame speed. device is isolated, the remaining devices shall provide th;
. Open vents with flame arresting devices may be used for full relieving capacity. This in effect means the supply of a
the tanks described above. spare relieving device and a system to ensure that no more
than one relieving device can be isolated at anv one time.
. Open vents without flame arrestors may be used in the fol- Block valve interlocking is a commonly used solution to
lowtng cases: achieve this.
For tanks in which petroleum or petroleum prod ucts with . Inlet and outlet connections and details shall be carefully
aflash pointof 100 "F (37.8'C) orabove are stored, pro- considered to ensure that any pressure drops occurrjng do
vided the contents are not heated and the fluid remains not detract from the ability of the relieving arrangement to
below the flash point. provide the full relieving capacity required.
For heated tanks where the storage temperature of the . lf discharge pipework is fifted, itshall lead to a safe location.
petroleum or petroleum products is below the flash shall not sub.iect
point. the relieving
not discharge vapours devices spaces.
into enclosed to condensation and
For tanks of capacity less than 9.46 m3 used for any . For tanks located inside buildings, the venting system shall
product.
discharge outside the building and frangible roofjoints shall
- For tanks of capacity less than 477 m3 used for crude oil. not be used.

. ln the case ofviscous oils, such as cutback and penetrating . lf relieving systems from more than one tank discharqe into
grade asphalts, where the danger of pallet sticking or flame a common header. considerable care shall be exercised to
arrestor blocking exists, open vents without flame arrestors ensure that no problems arise from liquid traps, back pres-
may be used as an exception to the rules above. sures, throttling and unforeseen interactions between the
relieving systems from different connected tanks.
. In areas subject to strict emission regulations, open venis
may not be acceptable.
Emergency venting 8.3 Typical relief valve equipment
a
Tanks with frangible roofjoints do not requjre emergency vent-
ing devices. There are number
ing equipmeni ofwellknown
around manufacturers
the world. All oftankofreliev-
produce a range prod-
For other tanks the Code offers the following
advtce: ucts suitable for use with ambient storage tanks.
. Larger or additional open vents may be provided subject to Because ofthe low pressures associated with these tanks, it is
the same provjsions as given in Section on Normalventing. usualto use pressure reliefvalves which are dead weight-oper-
ated rather that the pilot-operated types which are more usual
. Larger or additional PV valves. at the higher design pressures associated withlowtemperature
. A gauge hatch which permits the cover to lift under abnor- tanks. The dead weight pressure relief valves are also much
mal internal pressure. cheaper than their pilot-operated equivalents. A typical dead
weight operated valve is shown in Figure 8.6.
. A manhole cover which lifts when subject to abnormal inter-
nat pressure. For vacuum relief the valves are also dead weight-operated
and a typical example is shown in Figure 8.7.
. Otherforms ofconstruction which can be proved to fulfilthe
requrred purpose. For reasons of economy in terms of reducing the number of

. A rupture disc device (unlikely to be suitable for the low tank roof to
common connections andpressure
combine the valves
isolation and (where
vacuum fitted),
valves it is
into a
pressures usually associated with ambient bnks). single item and a typical pressure and vacuum relief valve is
shown in Fiqure 8.8.

212 STORAGE TANKS & EQUTPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 246/296
7/18/2019 8 Tank venting of ambient tempetature tanks
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

Figure 8.6 Dead welghtoperated valve

Couiesy of Tyco Valves & Controls

Figure 8-7 Dead weighloperated vacuum reliefvalve

Courtesy of Tyco Valves & Controls

All types of relief valves are manufactured in a range of sizes to

suit the flow rates required. These typically range from 2" up to
12" NB.

For emergency relief (i.e. the externalfire exposure case) the

pressure reliefvalves described above may not have sufficient
capacity for the flow rates involved and valves specifically de-
signed for this higher flow regime are available. One such is
shown in Figure 8.9. These valves are commonly supplied in
sizes up to 24" NB and some are designed to fulfil a second use
as tank roof manways.

It is usual for the valve manufacturers to provide data concern-

ing the pressure/flow characteristics of each valve in their
range of products. This enables the tank designer to select the
number and sizes of the valves required for relieving duties.
ldeally this data should be derived from physical testing of the
valves. Atypical pressure/flow curve is shown as Figure 8.10. lt
is usual for these pressure/flow curves to be provided for air.

For pressure relief some adjustment must be made for the

characteristics of the oroduct vaoour. Some manufacturers
provide proprietary software which includes the pressure/ flow
data and can make appropriate allowances for different product
Figure 8.8 Typical pfessure and vacuum reliefvalves
vapours and for suction and exit losses to aid the designer
Coutlesy of Tyca Valves & Contrals
For tanks with fixed foofs storing certain products, often with in-
ternal floating roofs, it is common to require the space above
the liquid or internal roof to be blanketed with nitrogen gas. To
control the flow of this purge gas into the tank and ensure mini-
mum wastage, tank blanketing valves are available and an ex-
ample of these is illustrated in Figure 8.11.

8.4 References
8.1 Welded SteelTanks for Oil Storage, API 650 Tenth edi-
Fgure 8.9 Emergency vent and manhole cover flon, November'1988. The American Petroleum lnsti-
Coutlesy of Tyco Valves & Controls tute.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 213

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 247/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
8 Tank venting of ambient tempenturc tanks

Figuro 8.11 Pilot-opeEtod pre€sutE/vacuum valve

Coutl3sy of TW Valvss & Contgls

lic tanks for the storage of liquids at ambient tempen-

g
z + 6. a1012|
14015-1:2000
-
tures and above Pad 7.. Sfee, fanks. DIEN

Flgure 8.10 A typical pressure/flow c |ve 8.4 Venting Atmosphedcand Low-Pressure Slonge Tanks:
Non-reftigented and Refigeratecl, Apl2000, Fifth edi-
8.2 Btitish Standard Specification for Manufacture of vefti-
tion, April 1998, The American Petroloum Institute.
cal steel welded non+efrigercted storage tanks with 8.5 Slzing, Selection and lnstallation of Pressure Relieving
buft welded shells for the petroteum rndusqy, BS Devices in Refinedes, Paft 1 - Sizing and Selection, Apl
2654:1989, BSI London RP 520, The American Petroleum Institute
8.6 Guide for Pressure relieving Devices and Depressunls-
Specification for the desqn and manufacture of site
8.3 built, veftical, cylindical, flat-bottomed, welded, metal-
lng Sysfems, API RP 521, The American Petroteum In-
stitute

214 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 248/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

9 Non-vertical cylindrical tanks and

other types
This Chapter is a very brief review of some of the storage tanks which do not fit into the
'conventional" vertical cylindrical category. Some are very much proprietary designs and
products and some are more pressure vessel than storage tank.
More detail, either from suppliers of the first category, should not be difficult to obtain or from
literature covering pressure vessel design, such as European Pressure Equipment, which is
part of this series of reference books

Contents:
9.1 Rectangular tanks
9.2 Spherical tanks
9.3 Horizontal vessels
9.4 Bolted cylindrical tanks
9.5 Factory-manufactured tanks made from non-metallic materials

9,6 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 215

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 249/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
s N o n -,",J .9? 9 [3 13 : u ol 9

9.1 Rectangular tanks

Rectangular tanks are a common sight in towns, factories and
airfields around the UK and elsewhere. They are almost always
factory-manufactured in transportable modules to proprietary
designs and are commonly called Braithwaite Tanks. They are
restricted to quite modest capacities when compared to the ver-
tical cylindrical types. This has much to do with the fundamental
unsuitability of the rectangular form to liquid containment.
Whilst the conventional tank's shell is stressed by the liquid
contents in simple tension, the stressing ofa rectangulartank is
more complex. The liquid loading on the flat sides requires stiff-
ened panels and often internal bracing. lt is usual for the panels
to be supplied suitable for bolting together with sealing ofthese
joints. For water storage and for other products where cleanli-
ness is importani, the panels may have a factory-applied coaf
ing on both inner and outer surfaces. An advantage of these
tanks is that they are available "off the shelf' and do not require
particularly skilled labour for their erection. They can also be
easily dismantled and re-erected elsewhere.
It is usualfor such tanks to be suDDorted on elevated steel or
masonry structures which must be suitably designed for the
loadings.

9.2 Spherical tanks

Spheres fall more correctly into the field of pressure vessels.
However, they are such a common sight that they deserve a
Figure 9.1 Atyplcal sphericaltank under construction
brief mention. They are designed to pressure vessel Standards Cowtesy of Whessoe
such as ASN.4 E VIII, BS 5500 and EN 13445. The sphericalform
is well-suited to resist the internal pressures arising from the
product liquid and the vapour. For this reason, spheres were
very much in evidence for the land-based storage of products
such as LPG and this is discussed further in Chaoter 17. Spher-
ical tanks are also a common component of liquid gas carriers
and this is also covered in Chapter 17.
The support of spherical tanks is most commonly achieved by
legs which attach to the sphere at the lt is
the use
usual forof equatorrods
these legs to be braced together with diagonaltie
to provide the necessary lateral support to resist wind and seis-
mic loadings. Such a sphere is shown in Figure 9.1 together
with the arrangements for access to the iop of the vessel where
the pressure relief valves and the level insirumentation are lo-
cated. The liquid inlet and outlet connections are to be found in
the bottom cap of the sphere. To ensure that any leakage from
the sphere is contained, a local bund is usually provided and an
example of this is shown in Figure 9.2.
There have been some spectacular accidents in the past in-
volving spherical vessels storing volatile and inflammable prod-
ucts. Some ofthese have come about by the ignition of product
leakage, possibly coming from the bottom liquid connections,
not been ableto drain awayfrom the vesseland has
which has
consequently "cooked" the sphere to the point where the in-
creasing heat input causes the internal pressure to increase at
a rate that the pressure relief valve system cannot cope with,
leading to an explosive failure of the vessel.
Current thinking is to provide a bunding system from which the
leaking liquid can be rapidly removed to a spill containment pit
where a foam blanketing system can hopefully prevent or at
Figure 9.2 Sphefical tank wlth local bund
least minimise the effect of ignition. For reasons which are obvi- Cautesy of Whessoe
ous, the fireproofing of the supporting legs of spheres is a man-
datory requirement.
The safety problems, both realand perceived, which have been
The sphere illustrated in Figure 9.2 has external cladd ing, sug- associated with spherical vessels has caused them to be less
gesting that it is an insulated sphere, possibly for the storage of popular choice for certain owners and in certain geographic lo-
semi or fully refrigerated LPG. The application, maintenance, cations than was the case in times past.
longevity and repairof such insulation and associated cladding
systems for spherical vessels has caused many problems for A big sphere would be around 22 m in diameter which would
the owners of such vessels in the past. have a gross liquid capacity of some 5575 m3. Above this diam-

216 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 250/296
 9 Non-veftical cylindrical tanks and other types
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

eter, problems of plate thickness and site stress-relief tend to

Drovide a size limitation.
Asecond means of support for spherical vessels is to provide a
cylindrical skirt or a cup type of arrangement. This is commonly
known as the "Man type" ofsupport and is often considered as a
proprietary design, available only from certain designers and
suppliers.

9.3 Horizontal vessels

Above ground horizontal vessels have been used for many
years for the storage of modest quantities of various products.
These range in size from the simple 'gas pigs'for domestic gas
supply of around 0.5 m3 up to vessels for high pressure gas
storage orfor component parts ofmounded storage systems of
around 4000 m3 for each vessel.
Figurc 9.5 Mounded slorage tank system under construclion
The high pressure gas vessels were a common sight at major Courtesy of
gas works at one time in the UK. They were an early form of
peakshaving forthe gas network before the adventofthe liquid
natural gas tanks at strategic locations around the country for
the same purpose. These vessels were built in groups of six or
more and were upto 6 m in diameterand 100 m long, Theywere
constructed from factory-built units at the maximum transport-
able length, which were site-welded together and the closing
seams site stress relieved. An example ofsuch a facility during
construction is shown in Figure 9.3.
Asimilarfacilityfor the storage of liquid propane is shown in Fig-
ure 9.4. This consists of sixvessels, each 12 ft (3.66 m) in diam-
eter and 120 ft'(36.6 m) long.

Figure 9.6 IVlounded storage lank being laid on prepared sand beds

For safety reasons, such above ground facilities for the storage
of products such as LPG have become unpopular. The current
trend for the pressure storage of LPG is to use mounded stor-
age systems. Here horizontal pressure vessels are used which
are supported on a bed of sand or other suitable soil, and after
construction are backjilled and buried. This arrangement pro-
vides protection from fire and missile damage. This arrange-
ment also allowsforthe storage oJdifferent products or product
mixes in the separate vesselswhich is convenient for operators
of LPG terminals.
Figure 9.3 Site welding of high pressure gas vessels Guides tothe design ofmounded storage facilities are provided
Coulesy of whessoe by the UK Health and Safety Executive and the Engineering
Employers Materials Users Association, (EEMUA), (Refer-
ences 9.1 and 9.2). Figures 9.5 and 9.6 show a typical
mounded storage tank system under construction. In this in-
stance the vessels were 8 m in diameter and because ofthe re-
mote location of the site in the Philippines, were constructed in
modules from imported edge-prepared flat plate in a temporary
workshop on thejob site. These werethen laid on the prepared
sand bed and welded into the comDlete vessels.
In-ground horizontal cylindrical storage tanks are widely used
as garage forecourt tanks for the storage of the various motor
fuels. At one time these were simple steel tanks buried in the
ground. Problems of corrosion and subsequent leakage of the
products into the surrounding soil, and the escalating costs of
remedialworks and litigation has caused this area of activityto
be reconsidered and modern facilities have secondary contain-
ment, leak detection and anti-corrosion measures built into
them. An excellent book covering the Codes, regulations and
Figure 9.4 Liquid propane storage facilily design ofthese tanks from an American perspective is given in
Courlesy of lthessoe Reference 9.3.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 217

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 251/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
I Non-vettical cylindical tanks and other types

9.4 Bolted cylindrlcal tanks

As for the rectangulartanks described in Section 9.1, these are
made from factory-manufactured panels which are assembled
by bolting at the job site. They are restricted to modest capaci-
ties and have the advantiage of quick and cheap erection and
being re-useable. For water storage, theirdesign and construc-
tion in the USAis the subjectof the American Water Works As-
sociation Code, ANSUAWWA D103-97, (Reference 9.4\.

9,5 Factory-manufactured tanks made

from non-metallic materials
There are a number of manufacturers who sDecialise in the
manufacture ofl-anks made from Dlastic materials. These are
available in capacities up to 70 m3, diameters up to 3.5 m and
heights of 10 m. Many are available "off the shelf and made
from plastic materials which are tailored to the corrosive nature
of the particular product to be stored
Some ianks of this type come with built-in bunding anange-
ments and one such example is shown In Figure 9.7.
Figure 9.7 Non-metalllc lank with built-in bunding
Couftesy of Allibeft Buckhom UK Ltd
9.6 References
9.'l Mounded and buied LPG tanks, K. W. Blything, J. 9.3 Handbookof storage tank systems, W. B. Geyer, spon-
Gould, B. L. Prescott and R. G. J. Robinson, AEATech- sored by SteelTank Institute, Lake Zurich, lllinois, Mar-
nology, Health & Safety Executive, March 1996. cel Dekker. New York. ISBN 0824785894.
9.2 Guide for the design, construction and use of mounded
hoizonbl cylindical yesse/s forpressun'sed storage of 9-4 Standard for factory coated bolted steel tanks for water
LPG at ambient tempehtures, Publlication No. 190 : sforage, ANSUAWWA D103-97, AWWA Denver, Colo-
2000. EEMUA. London. €oo.

218 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 252/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

10 Material selection criteria for

ambient temperatu re tan ks
The basic rules of material selection are covered in this Chapter and a glimpse of a little ofthe
work and experience which lies behind the selection criteria is provided.
This is a big subjectand those whowish to practice or study in this area would be welladvised to
look to the various publications on this topic.

Contents:
10.1 General

10.2 Brittle fracture considerations

10.3 Design metal temperature
10.3.1 Minimum design metial temperature
10.3.2 Maximum design metal temperature
10.4 Requirements ofthe tank design codes
10.4.1 API 650 requirements
10.4.2 BS 2654 requirements
10.4.3 prEN 14015 requirements
10.5 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 219

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 253/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Material selection cdteia for ambient tempercture tanks

10.1 General ent temperatures is derived from the USAS 8.96.1, now pub-
fished as ASME 8.96.1 :1999, (Reference 70.6). Alternatively,
The development of the current material selection criteria for those interested could adaptand usethe guidance given in API
ambient temperature storage tanks is an interesting tale. The 620 Appendix Q (Reference 70.4 for service below tempera-
move from riveted to welded shells brought brittle fracture onto tures of -60 'F.
the scene in much the same way as the various failures of the
Liberty Ships focussed attention on the same phenomenon in
the ship building world. The paper byCotton and Denham (Ref- 1 0.2 Brittle fracture considerations
erence 10. t) follows the develooment of the rules for steel se-
lection from the early days ofwelded tanks up to around 1980. At the time that API 12 C was originally wriften, little or nothing
The first Code to provide rules for welded storage tanks was was known about the phenomenon of brittle fracture and the
factors which influenced it.
API 12C (Reference 70.2), first published about 1935. lt was
this Standard which was the industry Standard until the mid As storage tanks, particularlyfor oilbased products, increased
1950s and formed the basis for the subsequent Standards API in size, it was either a fortunate or an inspired decision of API
650 (Refercnce 1 0.3) a nd BS 2654 (Refe re nce 1 0.4) whtch are 12Cto limitthe maximum shellplate thicknessto 1.5" (40mm);
the design Codes for most tanks for ambient temperature ser- a figure which remains as the limit to this day in BS 2654, prEN
vice used today. The forthcoming European Code takes a route '14015 and for many materials in API 650 (in some cases a
which has been influenced by both ofthese Codes, but is prob- higherlimit of 1.75" (45 mm) is permitted). Plate thickness is an
ably more BS than API in its final draft form, prEN 14015 (Refer- important variable involved in the complex issue of brittle frac-
ence 10.5). ture avoidance in welded steel structures. As the knowledge
The vast majority of ambient tanks are constructed from carbon surrounding this subject expanded, it was considered indeed
and carbon manganese steels and the Codes concentrate their fortunate that this limit had been imposed.
attention on these materials. API 650, which it should be re- Early storage tanks were built in comparatively modest sizes
membered is written for tanks for the storage of petrochemical
products, does have rules for the design, material selection, using was
there an of
steels low strengths.
increasing demand for the
From early
tanks 1960scapacities,
of larger onwards,
fabrication and erection of storage tanks constructed from
driven by the increasing volumes of oil-based products being
stainless steels. These are given in Appendix S which is transported and stored around the world. Large tanks mean
discussed in Section 10.4.1.
that greater volumes can be stored on the same area of land,
BS 2654, which is also restricted to the petrochemical industry and many existing refineries and terminals were restrlcted in
products but isfrequently used forthe storage ofproducts such the amount of space available to them. This required the indus-
as water, wine and food related materials where cleanliness tryto leave the safe and wellunderstood territoryof smalltanks,
and product contamination are important, surprisingly has no thin shells, weak steels and lowjointfactors. The appearance of
rules for stainless steel tanks. This has not stopped the provi- BS 2654 : Part 3 (Reference 70-8) was an indication of this
sions of this Standard from having been used and adapted for change.
this area of activity.
The change to the use of stronger and thicker steels, higher
prEN 14015 includes rules for both carbon and carbon manga- joint factors and the increased consequences of a sudden fail-
nese steels and for stainless steels. lt was the original intention ure in the new larger tanks meant that the incomplete under-
Standard would be published in two parts, thefirst cov-
thatthis
ering steel (C, CMn and SS) tanks and the second covering alu- standing ofthe factors surrounding the subject of brittle fracture
needed to be addressed.
minium alloy tanks. This second part of the Code failed to ap-
pear due to a general lack of interest. There is little activity in This was reinforced by the sudden failure whilst under hydro-
this area of tank building and it was not possible to assemble a static test of a floating rooftank at the Esso Fawley Refinery in
committee with sufficient knowledge and interestto prepare the 1952 described ;n detail in Reference 70. 9. A photograph of
document. Asfaras the author is aware, the only set ofrules for this tank after the event is shown in Figure 10.1. The floating
the design of aluminium alloy storage tanks for service at ambi- roofis intact, butdumped on the ground some one quarterofa

Figure 10.1 The iloaling rooffailure at Fawley in 1952

220 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 254/296
7/18/2019 10 Material
Guide to Storage Tanks selection citeia for ambient temperature tanks
and Equipment

tank diameter laterally from its starting position, and the tank at temperatures which are determined bythe minimum temper-
shell is literally cast around the site in pieces. atures to be expected at the particular location where they are
to be constructed. Taking some credit for the thermal inertia of
In the UK this work involving the Wells Wide Plate Tests, the
thetankand its contents, thedesign metaltemperatures are not
Pellini Drop Weight Test, the introduction of the CTOD test and
based on the absolute minimum temperatures to be statistically
the study of the relationship between these and the more eco-
expected atthesite, butare chosen based ontheaverage mini-
nomical and convenient Charpy V-notch impact testing for ma-
mum daily temperatures conditions to be expected plus an al-
terial quality control, which is described in Reference 10.1.
lowanceforthe thermal inertia ofthe stored product. When the
l\y'uch of this work was sponsored by, and brought into a sem- tank is empty and will respond rapidly to the actual minimum
blance of order, by the Oil Companies lMaterials Association temperatures, thestresses arelowand it is argued thattheywill
which was made up of technical problems possible fracture.
Low Temperature
experts committee,
from companies such as Shell, lCl and BP togetherwith be insufficient to cause of brittle
the Welding Institute. This group took upon itself the task of re- The Codes describe the minimum design metaltemperature as
structuring the requirements for briitle fracture avoidance and follows:
presented its recommendations to BSl. This work gave rise to
the current requirements in BS 2654 where the Charpy V-notch . API 650 The design metaltemperature shall be assumed to
impact test temperature is different from the design tempera- be 8 "C (15 'F) above the lowest one day mean ambient
ture. This is an essential difference between the BS and API ap- temperature ofthe locality ofthe area where the tank is to be
proaches to material selection. installed. For mainland USA these are shown in Figure
10.2. For other areas of the world, suitable equivalent data
must be obtained.
10.3 The design metal temperature
. BS 2654 The design metal temperature shall be specified
1 0.3.1 Minimum temperatures by the purchaseron the basis ofthe official weather reports
over at least 30 years. The design metal temperature shall
The three design Codes all exclude from their scope the stor- be the lowerofthe lowestdaily mean temperature (one half
age of products which are refrigerated below ambient tempera- of the daily maximum iemperature plus the daily minimum
tures. lvlany tanks are insulated and store products which are temperature) plus 10 "C or the minimum temperature ofthe
above ambient temperature, hence they are not fully siressed tank contents.

Compiled lrom U.S. Wsah Burcauand

Mei6orologlcsl Div. Depr. ot Transport ol
Dominion ol canada Records p ro 1952-

Fgure 10.2 lsothermal lines of lowesl one-day mean temperatures ('F)

Fron API 650, figure 2-2

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 221

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 255/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Material selection citeda for ambient temperaturc tanks

For a storage tank constructed for service in the UK where

the shell temperature is controlled by ambient conditions,
the minimum design metal temperature shall not exceed 0
'C. For a storage tank constructed for use outside the UK
and where no long term data or weather reports are avail- 1S93
able, the design metal temperature shall be the lower ofthe
lowest daily mean temperature plus 5 'C and the minimum
temperature of the contents.
EN 10023,3
ln the interests of operational flexibility, the minimum design

temperature shall
fects of heated not take into
or insulated account the beneficial ef-
tanks.
. prEN 14015 The minimum design metaltemperature shall
be the minimum temperature of the contents or the temper-
atures given in Figure 10.3. The minimum design metal
temperature shall not be lower than -40 "C. Note that this
does allowsome advantage to be taken oftank insulation or
heating. 'i The maxhum rhickoess sharl be lhe lower ol lhai sp6llied ln rhis labre and Ihal d€tiv6d tom

NoTE cEv l@fr ladle analysls < O 421o. plales ihickq lhan 20 mm.

lowest one dat Mhlmum design m€tal l.npsratur.

Figure 10.4 Hoi rolled products fot use at elevated temperatures {> 100 "C)
Fron prEN 14015, kble 6.1.1-4
Wam€r$an orequalro-10'C

10.4 The requirements of the tank design

Codes
LOOMAT All ofthe tank design Codes provide quite specific rules for ma-
NOTE 1 LODJ,TAT is rhe row*r recoded averag€ tehpebture based ov€r any 24 hour pedod, terial selection. Certain Codes, in particularAPl 650, provide a
The ave€qe tempe€ture is half(mdihumremp€.al rc plus minimum I€mpeBtu€). considerable amountof information on the subjectand thevari-
NOTE ? The hlnihum design melal lehpemtlre td rhe Iank shall not lakB into ac@unt the ous subsidiary requirements which will need detailed study by
benelicial effect ot healing or nsulalion for d€sign m6lal t€mp€ntuf* wam* lhan or €qual b
those whowish to applythese rules for speciflc circumstances.
NOTE 3 Foi minimum desigi meia tenpe6tur6 berow 0"C, lhen lh€ beneicial eneci of What follows in this Section provides only some of the require-
insulalion or heatinq shallbe aEeed bulthed€sign m.iallomp€ralure should not be wemerthan
ments and highlights the main points involved. lt should be re-
membered thatthis isa bigger question than merely the choos-
Figure 10.3 Minlmum design metal tempetaiure based on LODI\,4AT ing of a suitable steel for the various parts of the tank. Site
Fron prEN 14015, table 5.2.2 welding is often carried out in far from ideal circumstances, at
locations, in poor weather, subject to
10.3.2 Maximum temperatures elevated
salt-ladenand exposed
winds to name but a few of the practical problems.
Weldability, welding processes, the need for preheat and the in-
fluence of hydrostatic testing need to be given due
The Codes aliow maximum design temperatures as follows: consideration.
By way of a slight diversion from the main subject, API 650 still
. APl650 The basic Code and material selection allows for allows the full height hydrostatic test to be side-stepped, albeit
operating temperatures up to 90 "C (200 "F) without modifi- with some nimble footworkto argue that "sufficient water to test
cation or qualification. For temperatures up to a maximum the tank is not available". This led to the catastrophic failure of
of 260 "C (500 'F), Appendix [.4 provides detailed rules for the Pittsburgh tank and the dumping of its contents into the
material selection and tank design at elevated tempera- river, an event which made the savings associated with hydro-
tures. static test avoidance look rather poor value to the tank erector
(or rather re-erector - as it was a cut down and relocated tank
. BS 2654 Where the operating temperature is over 150 "C, from another site), and equally to the tank owner.
consideration shallbe given tothe effect ofthat temperature
on the yield strength (of the chosen shell material). lf it is proposed to follow this route, originally perhaps devised
fortanks erected in desert locations where there really is nowa-
. ter. but where temperatures are such that brittlefracture is not a
prEN 14015 The maximum design metaltemperature shall
problem (remembering that not all deserts are hot), then it is
not exceed 300 'C. For design metal temperatures in ex-
recommended that material grades are adjusted by persons
cess of 100 'C, the elevated temperature yield stress val-
with sufficient expertise to compensate.
ues of steels shall be certified by the steel supplier.
Alternatively, steels complying with the table in Figure 10.4
shall be used. 10.4.1 API 650 requirements

Plate materials for bottom and roof plates and nominal API 650 understandably concentrates its efforts on the use of
thickness shell plates (providing they are 20% thicker than steels manufactured to American Standards.
required by design calculation)do not require elevated tem- It does provide guidance for the use ofsteels made to Canadian
perature yield stress values to be certified by the steel sup- (CSA) Standards, some ISO Standards and general rules for
plier. When the maximum design metal temperature the use of steels made to other national Standards.
exceeds 250 'C, steels which are proven toproof
be unaffected The steels are placed in eight categories in generally ascend-
by ageing shall be used. The method of shall be
agreed between the tank contractor and the steelsupplier' ing order of toughness. These are:

222 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 256/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Mateial selection criteria for ambient temperature tanks

I
Group CroupII Group III Group tlIA
Rolled,
As As Rolled, As Rolled, Killej Normalized, Killed
Sernfiled Kilied or Sedkilled Fine-Grain Pnctice Fine4nin Pmctice
Ma@rial Nor€s Maieriat Notes Malcrial Nores Marerial No0es
A283MC 2 At3rMB ? A s73M-400 Al3lMCS
A 285M C 2 A 36M 2.6 A 5t6M-380 A s73M-400 10
A l3lMA 2 G40.2IM-260W A5r6M-415 A5l6M-380 l0
A 36M 2,3 Gnde 250 5,8 C4o.2lM,260w 9 A 5l6M-415 r0
G|ade 235 3, s cnd€ 250 9, t0
Crade 250 6 5.9 C40.2IM-260W
crdde 250 5,9, l0

croup VI
Normaliz€d or
Group Iv GroupM Gtoupv Qoenchcd and TemperEd,
As Rolcd, Kiled Kiued
As Rolled, Killed
Normalized, Killed Fine-Grain Practice
Fine4rain hactice Fine-c|din hactice Fine-Crain Pmcdc€ Reduced Carbon

Malcdal Notes Material Notes Material Notes Mar€dal Noles

A573M'450 C
A 662M A 573M485 l0 A l3lM EH 36
A5?3M-4S5 A 5?3M-485 A516M450 l0 A633MC
A 5l6M-450 G4021M,300W 9, li A 5t6M48s l0 A 633M D
A5l6M-485 G40.2IM-350W 9,11 c402lM-300W 9, 10 A 53?Mclass 1

A662MB C40.2IM-350W 9, l0 A53TMClass 2 t3

G4O.2lM-300w 9 A 678MA
G40.2lM-35Ow 9 A678MB t3
Ens 4.9 A731MB
E355 9 a tdl
@275 5,9

Notas:
l. Most of l,he listed Elat rial specifcatio numben refcr to ASTM specifications (inctudirg Gnde or Claes)i ttEre sre, bow-
ctErt sorde a\ccptiols: G40.21M (including Grade) is a CSA specification: Grad€s E 275 aDd E 355 (inctuding Qualiry) are
coolaiB€d itr ISO 630; atrd Gnde 3?, Crade 41, and ctade 44 ar€ rElat€d ro national standards (see 22t.
2. Mlst b€ senikilcd or killed.
3- Thichess S 20 rnE.
. 4- Mzrimum DrangEoese contenr of 1.5%.
5. Thhtn€ss m rnm maximum when .ootrolled-mll€d steel is uscd in place of normalized st€el.
Margarrse conlent shall be 0.80-1.2% by tle{t aralysis fo lhicl$esses g€ater than 20 mltr, cxcepr thar for each r€ducrior
6. ofo.ol below lhe sPecifed carbon ma\imus a increase of 0.06% mrnganese above th€ spetifed maxinum $iill be per-
Di d uP io lh€ rnadmum of 1-35%. Thichesses S 20 mm shall have a m ganese content of0.8-1.2% by hear analysis.
7. TbbbEss <25 Bm-
8. Mustbe kiled
9. Must be kill€d atrd n1rde ro fne-gllill prratic€.
10. Must be norrnaliz€d
I I' Must hsv€ c$emistr, (heal) modifd o a rnaximum carbon content of 0.2o% and a rnaximom dranganese conr€nl ot 1.60%
(,n'2.2.6.q.
lzltoduc.d by the thermo{Dchad.al cotrtrol pocess CIMCP).
13. Sa. 3,7.4.6 for tasts on simulat4d tcst couDons for mrielial used in srlss-relio/ed asscmblies.

Figure 10-5 [,{ate algroups, Sl Unils

Fron API 650, table 2-3a

. Grouo I As rolled. semi-killed Plates more than 40 mm thick shall be of killed steel made to

.. croup r As rorted, kired or

Group lll As rolled, killed, fine grain
semi-kired
practice
li, ,,?liffi'ijffi: 3il,,X""X';;T:Xiffi$iii]'ij;il"rllil i";
heat treated shall be impact tested.

. Group lllA Normalised, killed, fine grain practice When the toug hness of the steel must be demonstrated, each
. Group lV As rolled, killed, 1ne grain practice
'
plate as heat treated shall be Charpy V-notch impact tested in
the longitudinal (or the transverse) direction, at or below the de-
. Group IVA As rolled, killed, fine grain practice sign metal temperature, to provide the energy values given in
. croupV Normalised, killed, finegrain practice Fig-ure 10.7. Each test shall consist of three specimens and the
averaqe ofthese shall equal or exceed the values given in the
. Group Vl Normalised or quenched and tempered, killed, Table. lf anyone specimen falls below two thirds of the specified
fine grain practice, reduced carbon minimum value, a further set of three specimensshall betaken
and each must equal or exceed the specified minimum value.
ThiS listing is shown in Figure 10.5.
Plates less than or equal to 40 mm thickness can be used at For thin plates where sub-size specimens must be taken, the
above the design metaltemperatures indicated by Figure 10.6,
or energy values shall be at least proportional to the values re-
without being impact tested. quired for full size specimens.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 223

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 257/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
1 0 Mateial selection citeia for ambient tempercture tanks

32 34
1_00 1r5 1.50
ThdlB, trctrdino 6ct6 aimE
ltlobs
r. fte GM4
ftLkNst6t€sstlsfB 12,5mm (r/2 hJ.
ll ard Gtrop v IrEs cotictt€ ai thjctaF6sss 125 (t, h.)
2. fte Gdp ttt arid cd.p tttA fm
cdiorb at
3, Themt dets in €6dr ldp EE
tst€d in Tabte 2-3,
4. Thrs figrrs b rFr sppncadE 1o conrb0€dJol€d dd* {s€€ 22J.4).
5. Us€ th€ GdD llA ad Grc(p VIA cllE t{ rtp and f€rE€ (se 2552d14 2.5-54-

Figure 10.6 Minimum pemissible design metal temperature for mate als used in tiank shells without impact testing
From API 650, figurc 2-1

Average lmpacr Value ofThree Specirnensb

lrngirudinal
Plarc Mate.ial, &d Thickress (?) in mm (in.) J n,rbf

GmupsI,lI,l ,,rd IIIA t8

r 5 tnaximum thickn€sses in 2 .2.2 tttough 2.25

Orolps ry,IvA,
and tcmpercd and
v, and \4 (cx@pt
TMCP) quenched 4| <44
<t 345 r< 1J
l5<tsl.75 48
41 30
35 34
27 20
25
45<r<50 t:t5<ts2 v4a41 30
50 <r< lm 2<ts4 685054/o
Cmup vl (queoched arld tempercd and IMCP) | <44 ,s lJ 4835:.4'25
40<t<45 I5 <r< 1.75 54 44 4t 30
45<r<50 135<t<2 6t 45 48 35
50 <rs lm 2<ts4 685054 .o
a) S€e Table 2-3.
b) Iderpohior is p.rmid€d to the neEEstjoul€ (fr-1b0.
Nob: Fbr plsle riflg naDges, the mjnirnun impall resr rcquircmcnrs for afi rhichess$ shal b€ rhole
fortS 40 n(lJ in.).

Figure 10.7 lvlinimum impacl test requkements for plates

From API 650, table 24

In addition to the requirements for plates, the Code provides . The materials shall be considered in three groups depend-
deiails of material selection rules for structural shapes, piping ent upon their minimum tensile strength:
and forgings, flanges and bolting.
Less than 485N/mm2 I requidng 20 J average
In fear ofbecoming tediously repetitive, it must be remembered -group
of three full size specimens
that this section of the Code is a minefield of detailed require-
ments for material selection and the advice of those familiar - Equal to or greater than 485N/mm2 but less than
550N/mm2 group 2 requiring 27 J average of three
with ib use would be well worth seeking. -
full size specimens
The requirementsforthe mechanical and toughness properties
of weld-metal and heat affected zone (HAz), are quite complex - Greater than 550 N/mm2
-
group 3 requiring 34 J aver-
age of three full size specimens
and are probably best left to those familiarwith this Code and its
various Drovisions. For plates thickerthan 40 mm, enhanced values are required.

In simple terms the following briefly summarises the require- API 650 allows plates to be ordered on an edge thickness or a
ments: weightbasis. The edgethickness ordered shallnot be lessthan
the computed design thickness orthe minimum perniltted thick-
. The welding procedures shall produce weldments with the ness. Similarly, the plate weight ordered shall be great enough
mechanical properties required by the design toprovideanedgethicknessnotlessthanthecomputeddesign

224 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 258/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Material selection criteria for ambient temperature tanks

thickness or the minimum permitted thickness. For plates or- ..-_.. Mn Cr+l\ilo+V Ni+Cu
equ 10.'l
dered on either basis, an under-run of not more than 0.01', is 5 15
permitted fof both computed and minimum permitted thickness
prares. The carbon equivalent based on the check analysis shall not
exceed 0.43% calculated using the following formula:

10.4.2 BS 2654 requirements ^- ^ lvln

equ 10.2
6

It should be remembered that BS 2654 has been the subject of

For steels with a minimum tensile strength greater than 420
standstill for a number of years now due to the work being car- N/mm'?, the phosphorus plus the sulphur shall not exceed
0.08%.
of the new European Code prEN
ried out in the preparationquotes
14015. This means that it materials to British Standards Steels shall be either aluminium treated with a minlmum alu-
which have been superceded by European Standards. For ex- minium/nitrogen ratio of 2:1 orhave a nitrogen content of less
ample, BS 4360 (Reference 70.70) has been replaced by EN than 0.01%.
I 0025 (Reference 1 0. 1 1 ).
The following impact properties are requifed:
Steels shall be made by the open hearth, electric furnace or one . For plate thicknesses not exceeding 13 mm in materials
ofthe basicoxygen processes. Semi- andfully-killed steels are with specified minimum tensile strengths up to and includ-
permitted, but Bessemer and rimming steel are excluded.
ing 490 Nimm2, impact tests are not required
The carbon equivalent based on the ladle analysis shall not ex- . l\4aterials with specified minimum tensile strengths less
ceed 0.43% for plates from 20 mm up to 25 mm thick and 0.42% than or equalto 430 N/mm2 , thickerthan 13 mm shall be im-
for plates thicker than 25 mm. The carbon equivalent is calcu- pacttested to show not less than 27 J at +20 "C oratthe test
lated using the following formula: temperature indicated in Figure 10.8, whichever is the
Saole S aoLe A
?0 I .10
Scote A -Hinimum design metol
lenpe|"olufe "[ {see 2.2 ) 60
Scut€ I - l'4inin lrl rolef fenpproture 35
durinq tesi o[ {see nolel
i : .: |: : : : | ; :: r i : : : . | :r:li:::l:: :::: /4 ',/ 1.: .i4
.;< /a r a
* 15 / .1 25 =

/1. /a:
/ 7-
ta, .

/ r' .l ,/:
I Z,
/::)a
::t: {,,1
') 4 /::
_t
l:-, r.1 Ilt 1r'.
+l ++
_-'Tt +
;
,=l F + +f
:r-; ::n: ;:::il E
.i.1:; it+
I ,l+ t
1r it :l
12.5

4t, i
4l ,/ li
ll rii
-30 -20 -10 0 *10

Chorpy V test iemperotufe oC

lrdiermed,ate values may be determined by inrerpotation.)

NOT€. Scale A on lhe ordinale is lo be used in delermining minimum Charpy V requiremenis for the thickn$5 and
hinim m design remperature concerned, For the pu.poses oI rhis nore, conversion of the measured impad vatue io the
27 J (or 41 J lor neelswirh rpecified minimum tensile srrengrh gresler rh3^ 430 N/mm:) vatue may ire hade on the
ba s
ol l 35 J per "c, such extrapolation being limited ro a maximum range ot 20 'c- For exampre, it rire acruat varue by ;5r
s 33 75 J at _20'C fo' a steel of specitied minimum rensite si,ensrh grearer than 4oo N/mm1,
the equivatenr len
remperarur€ tor ?7 J may be a$umed to be ,25 "C.
The .equlrements derjved from scale A r6ke into account an improvement in satetv wbich may be anricipared
as a resuli
of the hYdrostatic test. During rhe first hydrostaric lest the degree oi security again5 b.iille lrsct re hay be rarher tess
than on lubseqL,ent loading. Anention is drawn to tbe mo.e conservative requiremen s ot scate I when considerarion k
to be given to the se of this scale durinq hydrostaric tesring of tank she'ls constructed ot steels with specified
minimum
iensile slrengih grealer rhan 430 N/mm1. The applicarion of ,.ale B, or any arternarve plocedure
regardrng rhe preca riu,,
lo be raken du.inq warer testing lo sateguard th€ tank from brirrle iracrure, is lhe subject ol asreem;nr berween
the
purchaser and rhe manutacrurer (see 3,3{b)1.

: gure 10 8 [.4inimum Charpy V-notch impact requirements

Eron BS 2654: 1989, Figure 1

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 225

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 259/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Material selection citeria for ambient temperature tanks

lower. Three specimens shall be tested, the value taken be- 10.4.3 prEN 14015 requirements
ing the average ofthe three results. The minimum individual
value shall not be less than 70% of the specified minimum Ratherthan present basic requirements for the toughness/tem-
average varue. perature/steel strength combinations, prEN 140'15 gives spe-
Note: Provided the design metal temperature is +10'C or cific steel types taken from the various European steel Stan-
above, it is not necessaryto test materials with a speci- dardsfor particular circumstances. The steelStandards are EN
fied minimum yield strength not exceeding 300 N/mm', 10025, EN 10028 (Reference 10.12\, EN 10'113 (Reference
and less than 20 mm thick. 10.13) and EN 10210 (Reference 10.14\.
greater Steels shall be selected by the use of Figures 10.10 to 10.14.
. Materials
than with
430 Ni mm2specified
.and uominimum tensilethicker
to 490 N/mm2 strengths
than 13 mm lmpact testing shall be carried out in accordance with EN
shall be impact tested to show not less than 41 J at -5 'C or 10045-1 (Reference 10.1q. fhe TOok tule again applies to the
at the test temperature indicated in Figure 10.8, whichever minimum individual specimen value.
is the lowet Three specimens shall be tested, the value When the material is less than 10 mm thick, 10 mm x 5 mm
taken being the average of the three results. The minimum
specimens shall be taken which shall demonstrate 70% of the
individual value shall not be less than 70% of the specified
energy values specified for full sized specimens.
minimum average value.
. Materials with specified minimum tensile strengths greater
than 490 N/mm2 and of all thicknesses shall be impact
tested to show not less than 41 J at-15'C oratthe testtem-
perature indicated in Figure 10.8, whichever is the lower. 2 3

Three specimens shall be tested, the value taken being the

average ofthe three results. The minimum individualvalue

shall not be less than 70% of the specified minimum aver-

age value.
5

Note: The energy values apply to full size specimens For

sub-standard specimens, see the provisions of BS
4360. 6

It is a requirement of this Standard that annular plates shall be

of the same material specification in terms of strength and im-
pact requirements as the first course shell plates.
The approval of welding procedures and the mechanical and
toughness values required are again an area best left to those
experienced with this work. In very simple terms, tensile
strengths at least equalto that ofthe plate materialand Charpy
V-notch impact values of at least 27J at the same temperature
as required for the testing ofthe plate materialwillbe required.
t/t
For thickness requirements, the rules are slightly different from
those given in API 650.
For shell plates where the thickness is determined by minimum
thickness requirements, bottom, roof and annular plates, the
thickness (measured at any point more than 15 mm from the 010 30 40 50
plate edge) shall not be less than the specified thickness by
more than one halfofthe total plate thickness tolerance given in 7* D*ignneralt€hp@tur6
Figure 10.9. 1 SleellvPes l, Vand X
2 sl€eltyp.s Vl 5 St€€l ty?6 lll and Vlll

For shell plates (but, interestingly not, roof plates) where the 3 steeltypes lland xr 6 Steslt ts lv and lX

thickness has been determined by calculation, the edgethick-

Figure 10.10 l\,4inimum tempetaturc at which each type of steel can be used
ness (again measured at any point more than 15 mm awayfrom
Fron prEN 14015-1:2000, figute 6.1.1
the plate edge) shall not be less than the calculated thickness.

All dimensions 6re in millimetres

Over 2000 Ov.r2500 ov6r 3000 Over 3500

2000 includins 2500 includins 3O0O includi.s 3500

Under 5 0.80 1.00 1.00

51o under I 0.90 1,20 r.60 1.60
I to under 12.5 1.10 1.30 1.60 1.70 1.90
12.5 to under 25 1.10 1.30 1.60 1.70 1.90
1.10 1.60 't.70 1.90
40 10 under 80 1.20 1.70 1.90 2,10
80 to under 150 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.50

NOTE. See 19,3.2 whicn staies thai, unless otheMise specitied, the thicknesstoletanceshallbe halfrhe total
rhicknes5 toler:nce qiven iu table 8 over a.d under the specified thicknss,

Figure 10.9 Toial thickness tolerances for plates

Fran BS 4360:1979, table I

226 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 260/296
7/18/2019 10 Mateial
Guide to Storage Tanks selec$on uiteia for ambient temperaturc tanks
and Equipment

EN 10@5 sz6JR62 12
l9t6
6235 JO 1-5-12 30

s235JaCa 1-5-t2
s235J2G4 1-6-12
azIS J8 'l-12 12

a?5JO 1-t-12 30
5t5 J2cg 1-6-12
Sts J2G,, 1.4- 12

Oprb. I S.e r.ldn pr ..$ b b€ ftgori.d

oplon I C6r' ncr b.[. oary.t s 0.42 tr dibr rh&kd rhe 20 m
O cr 12 lr'Ea..ttor docunedad.n 6r b6 h 5@ddE wft EN 10204 C{r tt6 .xc€.[
6. uftd dlck'c Cda (aO Dor. lorbn, nflld hi.h6 6hdl pt.r€a)
 t 6doqln€nirdo.hBlt ln .ddse wlf| EN 1020a 16r |8r 2r

ig93 S?5 NL l -2ng 4

EN iofi:ra s?6 M 1-2'19.

ls3 €fl6 Mt l -2-1€r

o &nt si.dhalng p|lcolr b be r€robd

Otdorr 2 CE1/nM hdbodFr.30.42 6. thb6 hbq [n'z0|rn
O9 o 19. CtErDt n €.t tld b h. qri€d at m €sri pH. n|bt.rtEn 20 m
" thc fi6dn@ ni.la .a .i{l b. lh€ b|d d flt *.dn€d h 6 . t tb &d th.t dai.d run
Frsx.6.t.1.
'h.p.don docqEot d6.lEll b€ h ss .jrs slh EN tO2O4 Cdt 3.t a @dtu ncrtd fitckB
Dbb (as.oof, bonoh.nl' idntld tldcra dE[ ehEl *rF itedn rb fi.id b. h sntr|..
wilh EN 0204 T6| E@n zz

Figure 10.'l1 Hot rolled products s 275 N/mm, yi€ld slress

Frcm pEN 14.0111:2000, Eble 6.1.1-1

EN 10025
10
1086 s356 JO l-6-1? 16

s355 J2C3 1-5-6-12-20 40

s355 J2G4 1-6 ' &- 72"20 40

st55 K2G3 1.6-A - 12-20

9355 K2c4 't.5-6-i2-20 40

oplon r sr.6tndl€ prE@. b . Gpo.t d

Qlion 5 CEVAombdbd €l)/rk<o.rt2brdab6ttib€rrh atoh
Opdon 6 e, Cu, Mo. ND, tll ll .rd V io b€
'@id.d
otdon 12 tlp€.dion 4'crtrItrlrbn.tul € h acc.dan € wdr EN 1020:l clrr 3_t B d@€Dt
tor mmhi n{*rEr F&i65 (€.s.ru.r. botlq nltfisi fi*.€ . endt tt6b.)
iitr6 &dnn.'naton.n60 € h .ceo.daft. wlh EN 10204 T€6t r€ldt 2.2
opdo.r20 Cnapy lqrp.rr i.e b be @d.d or on ech lrib dc*6r trq 20 nm

Fl$|l 6,1.1

N tofi+2 s3561{ 1-2'1 h

t9€g €355l\|t t.2- t& ro
ErN rot13it S3s5ll rto

tp.E3 s355 t-& 't -?-r9a 40

optdrr godflddngpDcollb 3|lpo.t€d

oP{on 2 CEV ilrn lad. andlar 3 0.42 tu ptab .t€r il.. 20 nxn

OpUon 19. Chlpy Irnp€d tc.tio t'. ctri€tt od d och f,| b tl|htlr ts 20 nm
u IrE ma*Ntn *;rrr . .t€ b3 rha to*. ot thd .p€Cttsd h n$ blb dd th.t d€tn€d tdi
I lilt .don dochsn rlon d|al te h accDnb.E ridb Et{ t02 t Cd 3..t B €x.sor fo. nmird
It lc6 r lqE G,g. rcol, lobn ffinhar t ch. .n { rrd6) {hde deuB&ik n srlt bo h
.ccorda.. {ttl Et{ J0204 T.d t F(
'|d 21

Figure '10.12 Hot rolled producb > 275 f,l/mrn2 and s 355 trmrP yi6td stross
Fron pzEN 1401+1:2000, table 6.1.1-2

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 227

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 261/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
10 Material selection citeia for ambient temperature tanks

Steel desionation
Grade - Number
Austeniiic

X2CINilS-9 1.4307
X2CrNil9-11 '1.4306
X2CrNiNl8l0 1.4311
XsCrNilS-10 1.4301
Opr on 1 sr€elmaking p@ess io be cpon€ d XBCrNiS lE-9 1.4305
opiron
2 cEV frffi radre €ia ysrs < 0.4? ror prabs rhicker r[an 20 nn X6CrNiTil S-10 1.4541
opdon 19a chaay hpact te* b be caded our o each 9lale lric*er i|lan 20 mm X6crNiNbl S-10 1.4550
fte maximufr rhlckn6s shan be the rows ol ind roecified in Ihir rabl6 and Inat d€nved frqn
X1CrNi25-21
i )(2CrNiMo lT-12-2 1.4404
nspeclim dodneniation shall be in acoodance wth EN 10204 Ced 3.1 B €xept ror nomina
lhickn*s plares (e.9. rco( bonom.nd nomlnallhicknesr s h€ll p btas) wheG do@m€ nlalion shalrbe in X2CrNiMoNl T-11-2 1.4406
accodan€ u{h EN 10204 T4t Eoo.l 2.2.
X5CrNiMolT-12-2 1.4401
Xl CrNiMoN25-22-2 1.4466
X6CrNiMoTilT-12-2 1.4571
Figure 10.13 Hot rolled producis > 355 N/mm2 yield slress
X6CrNiMoNblT-12-2 1.4580
Fron prEN 14015-1:2004, hble 6.1.1-3
X2 CrN il\ro 1 7- 1 2-3 1.4432
X2CrNiN4oN17-13-3 1.4429
X2CrNil\4o17-13-3 1.4436
X2CrNiMol S-14-3 1.4435
X2CrNiMoNlS-124 1.4434
s275 JOH XzCrNiMoNl S-15-4 1.4r'.34
s275J2H X2CrNiMoNlT-13.5 1.4439
X'lNiCrMoCu3l -27-4 1.4563
5275 NLH Xl NiCrMoCu2S-20-5 1.4539
Xl CrNiMoCuN25-25-5 1.4537
Xl CrNiMoCuN20-18-7 1.4547
Xl CrNiMoCuN2S-20-7 1.4529

Austenitic-ferritic

X2CrNiN234 1.4362
Figure 10.14 Structural steel products
X2crNiMoN22-5-3 1.4462
fton prEN 14015-1:2000, table 6.1.2
X2CrNi[.4oCuN25-6-3 1.4507
X2CrNil\roN25-7-4 1.4410

X2CrNiMoCuWN25-74 1.4501
Stainless steels selecled from EN 10088-1
Figure 10.16 Stainless steeis for tank fabrication
Fron prEN 14015-1:2400, table 6.2.1
:13
. The approval procedure shall demonstrate that the yield
stress and tensile stress ofthe weldedjoint shallexceed the
Figure 10.15 Conditions for waiving impact testing minimum required values of the materials being joined.
Fron DiEN 14015-1:2000. table 6.1.6
. Vertical shellwelds shall be impact tested atthe test tem-
perature required for the plate material and shall show not
lmpact testing is not required for bottom plates otherthan annu-
less than the value required forthe thicker plate material be-
lar olates.
ing joined.
lmpact testing of annular plates in not required when the shell
. Horizontal shell welds shallbe impact tested at the test tem-
plate attached to them does not require impact testing. perature of the thicker plate being joined, or at -10 "C,
lmpact testing of shell plates and items aftached to them may
whichever is the least stringent, and show not less than
be waived according to the conditions provided in Figure '10.15.
27 J.
For stainless steels a number ofgeneral rules are provided and
a table ol acceptable austenitic steels is given in Figure 10.'1 6. The thickness requirements are similar to those of BS 2654.
Ferritic steels may be used up to a maximum thickness of Specifically they are:
10 mm. . The measured thickness at any point more than 25 mm
Information is also provided for the material selection of mount- from the edge of any nominal thickness bottom, shell, roof
ings, flanges, structural sections, pipes and welding con- or annular plate shall not be less than the specified thick-
SUMADIES. ness less one half of the total thickness specifled in EN
10029:Table 1: class D (Reference 10.14and Figure 10.17)
For materials which have been produced to specifications other
than the nominated European Standards, Annex F provides de- . The measured thlckness at any point more than 25 mm
tailed requirements for their selection and use. from the edge of shell and roof plates whose thickness has
The requirements for weld-metal and HAZ properties are again been calculated shall not be less than the calculated mini-
subjects requiring detailed study. The basic requirements can mum thickness (i.e to EN 10029: Table 1: class C - only
be summarised by: oositive tolerances).

228 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 262/296
7/18/2019 10 Mateial
Guide to Storage Tanks selection criteria for ambient temperature tanks
and Equipment

Toleranceson ih€ nomi.altnickn.ss (see ?1.1) M.ximum rhi.Lness dincrence nlin plst€

> il< 5 - 0,4 + 0,8 - 0,3 + 0,9 0.6 + 0,6 {J,9

0,4 ,0,3 -0 | 1,5 + 0,?t 0,9 0,9 1,0 1,0

> 8< 15 + 1,2 0,3 + 1,4 -0 + 7,7 lJ,85 + 0,rJb 0,9 1.0 1,0 1,1 t,t 1,2
> l5< 25 0,6 + l,lJ 0,3 + 1,6 -0 0,95 + 0,95 l,t) l,l 1.2 t.2 1,3
> 25< 40 0,8 0,3 + r,9 -0 1,1 + I,t 1,1 1,2 r,2 1,3 1,3 1,4
> 40< 80 + 2,5 + ?,8 - 1,4 + 1,.1 1,1 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6
+ 1.6 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,5 r,6
> 80<
: 150
150
< 250 0,3 + 3,3 ,0 + 3.6 - t,6
+ I,a 1,4 1.5 I,i l.?

F gure 10.17 Tolerances on thicknesses

Fran EN 10029:1991, table 6.2.1

with butt welded shells for the petroleum industry, BSI

LOnOOn.

10.5 prEN 14015-1: October 2000: Specification for the de-

sign and manufacture of site built, veftical, cylindrical,
flat-bottomed, above ground, welded, metallic tanks fol
the storage of liquids at ambient temperatures and
above - Paft 1: Stee/ tarks, CEN Brussels.
10.6 ASME B 96.1:1999 Specification for welded alu-
b) Calculated thickness plates
- storage tanks.
minium-alloy field-erected
(see 6.1.8.1) (see 6.1.8.2)
10.7 API 620: Tenth edition, Febuary 2002: Design and Con-
e - nomi.€lthickness (botlom, annular, shell or rool platet struction of Large, Welded, Low-pressure Storage
e" -caiculated m nimum ihickness oJ plale including any corosio. allowance
tanks: Appendix Q: Low-pressure Storage Tanks for
Liquefied Hydrocarbon Gases, API Washington.
I - total th ckness lolerance
10.8 BS 2654: Paft 3 :1968 Higher des/grn stresses, BSI
i minus % iotallhickness toierance
LOnOOn.
l: plus %lotalthlckness tol€ranc€
10.9 Why Starage Tanks Fail, F.J.Feely and l\il.S.Northup,
The Oil and Gas Journal, February 1954.
Figure 10.18 Plate th ckness tolefances 10.10 BS 4360:1979 - Specification for weldable structural
Fram prEN 14A15-1:200A, bble 6.1.8 slee/s.
'10.11 EN 14425: Hot rolled products of non alloy structural
This is illustrated in Figure 10.18, which t is hoped will clarify Technical
this matter. lt is curious just how often this apparently simple - steels delivery conditions: 1993.
matter is misunderstood or merely gets inio a muddle between
10.12 EN 10028-2: Flat products made of stee/s forpressure
vesse/ purposes-Paft 2: Non alloy and alloy steelswith
ihe various parties involved, particularly where corrosion allow-
2n^ac rra ennlia.l
specific elevated properties - 1993 and EN
10028-3:Flat products made from steel for pressure
vesse/ pn./rposes - Patl 3: Weldable fine grain steels
normalised - 1993.
10.5 References
'10.13 EN 10113-2: Hot ro ed products in weldable fine grain
10.1 A Review ofthe Developmentof Fracture Safe Designs structural steels- Paft2: Delivery conditionsfor normal-
and Codes for Oil and LPG Storage lanks, H.C.Cotton ised/normalised rolled sfee/s - 1993 and EN 10113-3:
and J.B.Denham. Hot rolled products in weldable fine grain structural
steel s - Paft 2 : Del ve ry cond tion s for thermo-mechan-
10.2 API 12 C Specification for Welded Oil Storage Tanks, ical rolled steels - 1993.
American Petroleum Institute (fifteen editions from
1936 to 1961). 10.14 EN 10210-1 Hot finished structural hollow sections of
10.3 APt 650: Tenth edition, November 1998: Welded Steel non-alloy and fine grain structural steels - Part
nical delivery conditions.
1 : Tech-
Tanks for Oil Storage, API Washington.
10.15 EN 10029:1991 - Specification for tolerances on di-
10.4 BS 2654: 1989: British Standard for the manufacture of mension, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3
veftical steel welded non-refrigerated storage tanks mm thick and above.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 229

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 263/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

230 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 264/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

11 Fabrication considerations for

ambient temperature tanks
Inthis Chaptersome ofthe more important aspects oftankfabrication are ouflined, togetherwith
advice on good practices which should be observed.

Contents:
11.1 Material reception
11.2 Stainless steel materials
11.3 Plate thickness tolerances
11.4 Plate fabrication

11.5 Roof structures

I 1.6 Tank appurtenances

11.7 Surface protection for plates and sections

11.8 Marking

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 23'I

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 265/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
11 Fabrication considerations for ambient tempercture tanks

11.1 Material reception be re-used for plate storage between marking, cutting and
rolling operations.
All materials received into the fabrication area or workshop
must be checked for conformitywith the requirements set out in
Some mills willsupply the platewith a plasticfilm fixed tooneor
the purchase order to the supplier in terms of quantity, quality, both sides of the plate, this only being removed after erection,
dimensions, surface finish, appearance, inspection documen- welding and weld pickling is completed at site. Care on the se-
tation, material certificates and where applicable, installation lection of the type of film and adhesive is important, as it has
and maintenance documentation etc been known for the adhesive to be very reluctant in releasing
the film, resulting in strips being left on the plate surface. Also, if
The steel plates and sections which willform the liquid contain- the adhesive is not completely removed from the steel, a tacky
lng elements of the tank must be carefully checked against the coating is lefr on the tank surface, which attracts atmospheric
millcertificates provided with the steelto ensure thatthe physi- grime and dust. There are excepted test methods available,
cal and chemical orooerties are in accordance with the steel which can detect carbon steel contamination of the stainless
specification that they were ordered against. lt is common prac- steel materials, and use of these can obviate embarrassing
tice for the purchaser's inspector (and any third party inspector, blemishes appearing on the tank during or after erection on site.
as appropriate) to inspect material prior to despatch from the
steel mill.
1 1.3 Plate thickness tolerances
In determining the allowable plate thickness tolerances the BS
11.2 Stainless steel materials
2654 Code groups tank plates into two categories as follows:
When fabricating in stainless steel materials within an area
where carbon steel materials are also fabricated, it is very im-
1 ) Shell plates whose thickness has been determined by ref-
erence to the table of "lvlinimum specified shell thickness"
portantto keep these materials separate from any carbon steel
given in the Code (i.e. shell plates for which the thickness
materials in order to prevent any surface contamination of the
by calculation, is less than the minimum allowed for a
stainless steel by carbon steel scale, filings, weld or grinding
splatter and swarf. given tank diameter).
Annular floor plates, floor plates and roof plates. These
The recommended course ofaction in such cases is to quaran- plates shall have a minimum thickness not less than the
tine an area of the workshop for use exclusively for stainless specified thickness less half the total tolerance given in
steel fabrication. The proposed fabrication area should be the table of BS EN 10029, class D.
cleaned of all carbon steel detritus and the floor sealed with a
In simpleterms these plates areallowedto bethinnerthan their
proprietary non-slip concrete sealant. A typical quarantined
specified thickness.
area is shown in Figure 11.'l . Care must be taken especially in
handling and placing plates, any plate grabs, handling equip- 2 ) For shell olates whose thickness have been determined
ment and lay down cradles should be faced in stainless steel, or by calculation and that are thicker than the "Minimum
in the case of cradle supports, these can be faced with timber. specified thickness", for a given tank diameter, the thick-
The plates should be covered when not being worked on to pre- ness of these plates shall not be less than the calculated
vent contamination by airborne particles. thickness, i.e. table 1 of BS EN 10029, class C.

When rolling shell plates to curvature, the rolls of the machine This meansthatthese plates can not be thinnerthanthe calcu-
lated thickness.
should be covered with
carbon steel particles from beingtemplate
strong impressed intoto
paper prevent
the surfaceany
of The API 650 Code has a simpler approach stating that all shell,
the plate. Failure to do this can result in rust streaking on the annular floor, floor and roof plates may have an underrun on
plateswhen they have been erected on site and this is verydiffi- calculated or minimum permitted thickness of not more than
cult, if not impossible and very expensive to, completely re- 0.25 mm.
move.
Fabrication personnel must be discouraged from walking on
1 1.4 Plate fabrication
the plates as boot marks are also hard to remove and are un-
sightly on the external surface ofthe tank. Stainless steel plates Floor and roof plates (which are generally, but not always, of
are often supplied from the mill on timber pallets and these may lapped construction) which are produced in a reversing mill, do
not require any edge preparation, as the mill production pro-
cess gives a square edgetothe plateswhich is suitable for flllet
welding. Plates produced by a strip mill will have rounded
edges making root penetration difficult during filletwelding and
in order to ensure a sound weld there are two alternatives;
a) Use two runs ofweld, the first to ensure root penetrataon
and the second as a capping run.
b) Trim the plate edges square thus giving a suitable weld
DreDaratlon.
Rectangular lap-welded roof plates which are laid on to a sup-
porting structure are flat plates, usually in the range of 1.5 m x
4.8 m to 2.0 m x 6.0 m, this is to allow these relatively small
plates to form naturally to the curvature of the roof.
Rectangular lap welded floor plates are generally supplied in
two size ranges, depending on the bnk diameter:
Tanks up to 12.5 m in diameter 1.5mx4.8m
Tanks > 12.5 m in diameter 2.0mx7.85m
Tanks > 12.5 m in diameter have a ring ofthicker annularfloor
Flgure 11.1 Quarantined area forstainless steel fabrlcation plates and the number of annular plates is usuallythe same as
Couftesy of McTay the number of shell olates oer course. This is in order to main-

232 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 266/296
7/18/2019 1l Fubrigution
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
"o,"id"ruti. q t

tain a constant spacing between the butt welds in the annulaf betier to have the plates slightly under-rolled (> tank radius)
plates and ihe first shell course vertical butt welds all around the than over-rolled (< tank radius) because undef-rolled plates will
tank. However, larger tanks having shell plates approaching generally pull in to the correct diameter whilst over-rolled plates
10 m long, may have two annular plates per shell plate. This is leave the completed course aftef erection taking a "gull wing" or
to allow narrowef annular plates to be used. scalloped appearance which is difficult to get rid of. Care must
be exercised to ensure that the plates are entered square-on to
Floor plates larger than those quoted above may be difficuli to
the rolls, as any slight offsetfrom square will result in a plate tak-
handle due to the flexibility of large, thin flat plates.
ing on a helical and not cy indrlcalform, which will make erec-
The shell plate length and width shall be cut to a tolerance of t2 tion of ihe plaie into the tank very dlfficult, if not impossible.
mm and the dlagonal measurements must not differ by more
Plywood templaies about 1 to 1% m long afe used to check the
than 3 mm.
radius ofthe shell plates as they afe being roLled to shape. N,4a-
The BS Code gives a standard range of tank diameters from 3 chines having veriically-mounted rather than horizon-
m to 'l'14 m, with capacitles against tank heights in one metre in- ially-mounted rolls tend io give a truer radlus because the hori-
tervals up to 25 m in height. This is useful for purchasers to zonially rolled plate naturally flattens itself due to its own weight
judge the size of a tank fequired for a certain capacity, but very and long plates have to have the ends supported by overhead
often it is the plot of land that is available for the tank which de- cranes when checking the radius.
cides the tank diameter, which can be any size and not neces-
Because of the way that most plate rolling machines are built,
sarily in line with the diameters stated in the table.
the extreme ends of the shell plates do not get rolled and are left
Recommended standard shell plate lengths are also given and wiih "flats" on them. To overcome ihis, the ends are pressed to a
these are quoted as a function of r and when applied to the pre-set radius priof to rolling.
standard diameters, give an equal number of plates per shell
The Codes do not insist on pre setting the ends of the shell
course. These plate lengths have generally been adopted by plates but this is generally known to give a beiter final shape to
tank constructors although slight "tweaking" is sometimes nec-
the tank (see peaking and banding in Chapter 12).
essary for tanks having out of the ordinary diameters.
plates
The standard BS code plate lengths are stated as follows: The API Code
diameter tanks does allow
to be left flatthe
andthinnef shell
for them the radius
to be pulledof into larger
during erection. The allowable limits are shown in the table be-
Shellplate length (m)
low (taken from API 650, clause 4.3.1.)

Nominal plate thickness (mm)

There are no recommended standard widths for shell plates but

the limiting factor is generally the widih which is available from
the mill. Common widths are 1.0 m, 1.5 m,2.0 m, 2.5 m and However, with the present day demands to produce good qual-
3.0 m. ity, good-looking tanks, without flats and wrinkles, most fabrica-
The factors, which have to be borne in mind when selecting tors roll all their shell plates.
shell plate sizes, are: Several Dlate mills have orovided themselves with fabrication
a) The weighi of the plate for handling by crane; in the fabri- facilities or they have teamed up with a localfabricator enabling
cation shop, on site and during transportation. them to offer edge prepared, rolled and surface finished plates
plates ready for direct delivery to site.
b) The width capacity ofthe fabrication shop machinery
Having folled the shell plates, it is advisable to ensure that they
c) Limitations on maximum width or weight for iransport pur-
do not loose theif shape during storage or transportation and to
poses. especially by road or rail.
stack ihem in purpose-made curved cradles, or if only one-off
d) Shell courses made in wide plates may require each ring short journeys by lorry are involved, then they should be
of the erection staging on the tank to be raised from its ini- chocked with baulks of timbef on the bed of the lorry. When
tial position and re-attached higher up the course to en- transporting by sea, it is worth employing a stevedoring com-
able completion of the vertical welds. pany which is expefienced in handling the export of large bun-
The API Code does not include guidance on the size of shell dLes of steel plates, as the consequences of their unfamiliarity
plates. can be disastrous, as is witnessed by ihe photographs in Fig-
plates ures 11.2 and 11.3.
Cutting is limited
welded bytoshearing, which
a thickness aremm
of 10 to be eventually
by the BS and butt-
API
Codes, except that by agreement with the purchaser, the API
code extends this to 16 mm. The limitation is imposed in order
to ensure a good clean joint surface for the subsequent
butt-welding.
Plates may be also be trimmed to size using oxy-acetylene cut-
ting equipment or by the use of a planning machine.
The weld edge preparation may also be completed using the
above methods and there is also a machine available which has
serrated clamping rollers allowing it to crawl along the edge of
the plate while machining the weld bevels as it progresses
along the plate. This machine has the advantage of being able
to work on both flat or curved plates.
Rolling of the shell plates to the correct curvature is important in
Figure 11.2 Shell plates stacked awaii ng shoi b asting and priming
order to obtain a good cylindrically shaped tank. Arguably it is

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 233

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 267/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
11Fab cation considerctions for ambient tempetature tanks

lf there are a number of nozzles requiring heat treatment then it

is advisable, if possible, to keep these together in one shell
plate.
Clean-out doors are completely shop-fabricated and PWHT
prior to being sent to site.
Allfabrications should be dimensionallvchecked before and af-
ter post weld heat treatment.

1 1.7
Surface protection for plates and sec-
tions
It is common practice to protect the surfaces of carbon steel
materials by shotblasting or pickling, to remove mill scale and
Figure'11.3 The same plales on the quay befofe loading on board priorto delivery then to prime with a suitable primer to prevent surface deterio-
to lhe docks ration. Pickling is rarely performed nowadays due to Health &
Safety requirements and the difficulty ofdisposing ofexhausted
These plates had to be returned to the fabrication shop for pickling fluids. This makes the final painting easier on site as
re-rolling, an expensive and frustrating experience all due to a onlysweep, or pencilblasting is required priorto applyingthefi-
lack of understanding of materials handling by the shipper nal paint system.
Care has to be taken to ensure that the shop-applied system is
11.5 Roof structures kept clear of those areas, which will be welded on site, and
these must be masked during the priming operation. Alterna-
After the various structural roof
structure have been fabricated,components comprising
the normal the is to
procedure tively,
used butinstead of masking upon
this willdepend the edges, a weldable primer can
whetherthis be
suits thefinal paint
erect one complete bay ofthe structure on the shop floor. This is system.
in order to check the radius ofthe structure, the chord lengths of
the purlins and the main shell attachment brackets. Any dis-
crepancies found in the structure are Jar more easily rectified on 11.8 Marking
the shop floor ratherthan at site wherethe structure may be be- To enable the various fabricated components to be assembled
ing erected at, say a height of 20 m. together correctly on site, each part has to be marked with a
unique numbering system which relates to a marking plan
made up in the drawing office or template loft. The marking plan
1 1.6 Tank appurtenances shallalso identitythe position that the markings must occupyon
Nozzles and manholes are normally pre-fabricated in the shop the various components. Hard stamping may be used but the
such thatthe flanges are welded to the barrels and the reinforc- symbols should not be less than 13 mm high and low stress
ing plates rolled to suit the tank radius but supplied loose. stamps with a minimum nose radius of 0.25 mm should be
Staircases which have stringers rolled to a helical shape, usu- used. Plates less than 6 mm thick should not be hard-stamped.
ally have one section of staircase bolted up with the treads. This Where hard stamping is used, the position of the marks is usu-
is temporarily erected in the fabrication yard, to allow the cylin- ally ringed in paint to identifywhere these small markings are on
drical radius and overall lift to be checked and also to ensure the components.
that the treads are truly horizontal. Markings in paint or ink should be at least 50 mm high and care
Nozzles which require to be postweld healtreated (PWHT)are must be taken to ensure that the composition of the marking
shop-welded into the relevant shell plate (or part shell plate) materials will be compatible with the materials being marked
and sent to the PWHT oven. lt is advisable to fit temporary stiff- and the product, which will be eventually stored in the hnk.
eners to the shell plate so that it keeps its shape and doesn't hell plate markings should be on the inside surface of the
warp whilst being heat-treated. prares.

234 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 268/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

12 Erection considerations for

ambient temperature tanks
Tank constructors are fortunate beings within the construction industry, in that they are not
usually responsible for the construction ofthe tank foundation and accordingly there is a clear
demarcation of responsibility between the civil contractor and the tank contractor. Everything
below the top finished surface of the foundation is the responsibility ofthe civil contractor and
eveMhing above the responsibility of the tank contractor.
This Chapter discusses the. various elements involved in the construction of the tank after
handover at the foundation.

Contents:
l2,l The foundation
12.1.'l Foundation tolerances
12.,1.1..1 BS 2654
12.'1.1.2 APt 650
12.1.1.3 DrEN 14015 - 1
12.2 Building a tank
'12.2.1 Laying the floor
'12.2.2 Erecting the shell by the traditional method
12.2.3 Tolerances
12.2.3.1 Radius tolerances
12.2.3.2 Peak and banding
1 2.2.3.3 Plate misalignment
12.3 Floating roofs
12.4 Wind damage
12.4.1 Safety measures against wind damage
12.5 Shell welding sequence
12.6 Joints in wind girders
12.7 The roof structure
12.7.1 Roof plating
12.7.2 Wdding sequence
12.8 Erecting the shell by the jacking method

12,9 Other forms of construction

1 2.9.1 Column-supported roofs

12.9.2 Pre-fabricated roof sectiorr

12.9.3 Air lifting a roof into position
'12.9.4 Floating roofs

12.10 Inspecting and testing the tank

12.1 0.1 Radiographic inspection
12.10.1.1 BS 2654
12.10.1.2 APt 650
12.10.1.3 DrEN 14015 -'l
12.10.2 Floor plate ioint testing
12.10.3 Shell-to-boftom joint testing
12.10.4 Fixed roof plate ioint testing
12.10.5 Floating roof testing
12.10.6 T6ting of shell nozzles and apertures
12.10.7 Hydrostatic tank testing

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 235

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 269/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
1 2 Ercction considerations for ambient tempenture tanks

ential across the base of 40 mm is three times that allowed by

12.1 The foundation
the BS and API Codes, when considering foundations without
The inspection of the foundation prior to its acceptance by the concrete ringwalls. Admittedlyan extreme case has been sited
tank contractor isthe first important decision to be made by him here but extreme cases do sometimes occur.
before commencement of erection and the following areas
The European Code does howevergo on to saythat"The toler-
should be checked carefully:
ance the erectoraccepts on the inclination orslope ofthe foun-
. The diameter ofthe foundation is large enough for the tank. dation shall be such as to enable the final vertical tolerances of
It has been known for a foundation to be constructed exactly the tankto be achieved". lfthis loose approach to allowabletol-
as the tank diameterwithoutallowanceforthe overlap of the erances is not tightened up in the Code, then it will surely lead
floor beyond the shell. to heated arguments between the civil and tank contractors on
. the hand-over of the foundation, as to what is accepbble.
The civil contractor has clearly marked the cardinal com-
pass points on the periphery and the centre point on the The surface of the foundation, other than the area under the
foundation. shell plating shall be to the following tolerances:
. The slope (if any) ofthe surface ofthe foundation matches The sag in the as built surface measured with a 3 m long
that of the tank floor design. straight edge shall not exceed 10 mm.
. The holes or cut-outs for the sump(s) are in the correct The difference between the design level and the as-built level
place. shall not exceed the following values :
The surface ofthe foundation meets the allowable leveltol- Difference in 'deslgn' to 'as-built' levels
erances given in the relevant Code. Diameter of tank 'D' lm)

The positions, dimensions and condition of any anchor 10

bolts, straps or pockets should be checked as acceptable. D>101o<=50 D / 1000

D>50 50
12.1.1 Foundation tolerances

The part of the foundation which supports the shell receives 12.2 Building a tank
most attention in the codes. This is because differentials in As with most construction tasks there is always more than one
level in this area can lead to the erection of a distorted shell. way of carrying out the various stages of the work to effect a
The Code requirements vary slightly and a summary is given successf ul comDletion.
below. Tolerances at the periphery ofthe foundation under the AIso method siatements, risk assessments, safety procedures
shell plating are as follows:
and numerous other forms of documentation have to be pro-
12.1.1.1 BS 2654 duced prior to opening up the site but these aspects will not be
The maximum differential in level betvveen any two points 10 m dealtwith here, otherwise Sforage lanks & Equipmentwillcon'
sume another tree I
apart measured along the periphery shall not be more than 6
mm with a maximum between any two points on the periphery The following sequence for the construction of storage tanks
of t 12 mm. has been used for many years and is offered here to give the
12.1.1.2 APt 650 reader a reasonable understanding of how a tank is built.

For foundations having a concrete ring wall:

12.2.1 Laying the floor
The maximum differential in level between anytwo points 9
m apart measured along the periphery shall not be more
Taking the case for a standard lap-welded floor, with orwithout
than t 3 mm with a maximum between anytwo points on the
peripheryoft6mm. annular plates, the process is as follows:
Using the foundation centre point, the outer radius of the
For foundations which do not have a concrete ring wall:
tank floor is scribed onto the surface of the foundation and
The maximum differential in level between any two points 3 the floor start mark given on the drawings is orientated from
m apart measured along the periphery shall not be more the cardinal points given by the civil contractor.
than l3 mm with a maximum between any two points on the
lfthe underside ofthe plates is to be painted (usually with a
periphery of r 13 mm.
bitumen solution) this should be applied as they are laid
formed by a concrete slab:
For foundations Annular plates must have the correct weld gaps and after
The area of the foundation measured 300 mm radially in- laying and tiack welding in position, each one must be
wards from the outside ofthe tank towards the centre (or the checked to ensure thatthe outer edges are the correct dis-
width ofthe annular ring offloor plates)shall comply with the tance from the centre of the foundation. They should be
requirements above for ringwalls. The remainder of the welded as soon as possible afrer laying. The annular butt
foundation shall be within t 13 mm ofthe design shape. joints should be pre-set by lifting and chocking them about
'150 mm above the foundation, this will minimise distortion
12.1.1.3 The European Code prEN 14015 - 1
during welding. They can be left in this position until the
The difference in level between anytwo points 5 m apart around completion of the required radiographic inspection.
the periphery of the tank shall not be greater than 0.1% of their
oerioheral dishnce.
The centre strake of the rectangular plates is laid, com-
mencing withthe centre plate being placed on the line of the
This is not as stringent as the BS and API Codes- Take tor ex- floor setting out line. The remaining plates in this strake are
ample a tank shell having a circumference of 80 m (25.5 m di- then laidfrom the centre outtothe periphery The strakes ei-
ameter). This gives 16 points around the peripheryat 5 m apart. ther side are laid in a similarwayand finally the outer sketch
There could be a constant fall between each of eight points plates are put in place. During the whole of this process,
(from 0" to 180') of 5 mm giving a totalfall across the base of 40 care has to be taken to ensure that the minimum laps are
mm. This presupposes that there will be a identical rise in level maintained betvveen the plates which is normally = > 5 x
over the remainlng section (180' to 360'). The maximum differ- plate thickness.

236 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 270/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks
12 and Equipment
Erection considerctions fot ambient temperaturc tanks

Figure 12.1 Laps in floor plates where three thicknesses occur

To avoid plate distortion, it is important to weld the plates in the

following sequence:
First weld the annular plate butt joinb.
Then, starting at the centre of the floor, weld the short trans-
verse lap joints working outwards each side ofthe centre to the
periphery of the floor.
Repeat this sequence for the strakes of plate each side of the
centre strake.
Similarly, repeat again on the strakes adjacent to those last
welded until all the transverse welds are completed.
The longitud inal joints are now welded, starting at the centre of
the floor and working outwards to the periphery from each side
ofthe floor centre line which js transverse to the setting out line.
Where three thicknesses occur in the floor lap joints the upper
plate is joggled, or cut and joggled as shown in Figlre 12.1. F gure12.5 D fferent types of erection equipment

The outer edge of floors which do not have annular plates, are 4) Flush off the joint with weld metal and g rind flush where the
joggled and welded (as illustrated diagrammatically in Figures shell passes over the joint, (see Figute 12.4).
12.2 to 12.4) according to the following procedure:
Care has to be taken when laying rectangular plates on conical
1) Tack weld the plates in position and weld a light pass 230 shaped foundations because the plate laps will "scissoi' g iving
mm long, welding towards the bnk centre (Figure 12.2). varying overlaps between adjacent plates and these laps have
2) Put a 200 mm wide joggle plate under the joint and ham- to be checked to ensure that the minimum lap dimension is
mer the joint to joggle the lower plate (heating the plate will complied with.
assist the process), (Figure '12.2).
The plates forming the lap joints have to be kept in close contact
3) Complete the welding in the area ofthejoggte, bywelding
while being welded and one way is to use concrete-filled oil
towards the centre of the tank, (see Figure 12.3).
drums which can be rolled along the joints while being
tack-welded. Other methods using different types of erection
equipment are shown in Figure 12.5.
\

ffi / ,
Lrsnt Pass On completion of the welding of the floor, the required number
of annular butt welds must be inspected by radiography and all
the weld seams vacuum box-tested for leaks by the method
given in Section 12.10.2. fhe erection of the shelt plating can
now commence.
Figure12.2 Jogglng and welding ofoutef floof edges

12.2.2 Erecting the shell by the traditional method

Stacks of shell plates are laid just outside the foundation area.
Each stack consists ofone plate from each shellcourse with the
*Po// inside surface uppermost and the bottom edge of the plates
f/,'t nearest to the foundation. The bottom course olate is on the too
of the stack, the second course next and so on. with the too
course plate being at the bottom of the stack. Timber choc<s
are put undereach end ofthe stack to preserve the plate curva-
Figure12.3 Welding in area ofjoggle
ture.

Blank erection nuts are accurately positioned and welded to the

Remove reinforcement
in way of the shell plate inside ofthe plates as they lieon the stacks. Each plate usualty
has six nuts along each horizontal edge and two on each vedj-
cal edge. The nuts are welded on three sides only , but the nuts
that are used as l;fting pojnts are welded all round. These nuts
are used to attach the plates of each course together and to
connect each course to the one above using key-plates and
Figure12.4 Flushing off joint carrot wedqes.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 237

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 271/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12 Ercction considentions for ambient tempemturc tanks

Figure12.6 Welding of blank ereclion nuts to the shell plates

Couftesy of McTay

Welding of blank erection nuts to the shell plates is shown in

Figure 12.6. (Plates were stacked in the tank in this case be-
cause of a shortage of storage space around the foundation.)
Clips which will be used to mount the tank erection staging on
are also positioned and welded to the inside face ofthe plates.

Figure 12.7 shows the positions of the various pieces of erec-

tion equipment.
The inside radiusofthe shellplates is scribed accuratelyonthe Figure 12.8 Key-plates and shims on a verticaljoint
Couftesy of McTay
floor plating. Two rings of blank nuts are welded to the floor
plates at 600 to 900 mm pitch along the line of the scribed ra-
use ofshim plates ofthat thickness and flatwedges. Key-plates
dius, the inside nuts set about 20 mm from the line to allowfor
and shims on a verticaljoint is shown in Figure '12.8.
wedging and the outside nuts the thickness of the bottom
course awayfrom the scribed line. These nuts are welded along
one long and one short side only. 12.2.2 Tolerances
The shellstart mark, forthe bottom course verticaljoints, given
on the tank drawings, is accurately marked on the floor and the After completing the erection ofthe first course it is checked for
first course of shell is lifred plate by plate into position. Ca.e compliance with the allowable Code tolerances.
must be taken to keep each plate ofthis first course vertical us-
There are slight differences between the Codes regarding the
ing angled stays welded to the plates and floor
Each plate is keyed to the adjoining plate using key-plates and magnitude of allowable erection tolerances and the erection
contractor must familiarise himself with those of the Code to
carrot wedges as shown in Figure 12.7. The required weld gap which the tank is being built. In particular, the European Code is
between plates, which is usually 3 or4 mm, is maintained bythe very detailed in this respect.

By way of example the BS Code requirements are quoted be-

12.2.2.1 Radius tolerance

The internalradius measured horizoniallyfrom the centre ofthe

tank at floor level shall not vary from the nominal internal radius
by more than:

Allowablo devlallon on radlus lmm)

<= 12.5

r25
L..id crb 46 |'y ns ml
So for a 30 m diametertank t19 mm on radius gives a 38 mm
tolerance on diameter.

The plates of the course must be vertical to within 1 in 200.

For, say a 2 m wide course this would allow out of verticality of

 10 mm.
This standard of verticality applies to each course erected and
also to the overall height of the shell.
12-2.2.2 Peaking and banding

There must be no significant change in the shape of the tank at

igure 12.7 Posltions ofvarious pieces of erection equipment
the joints between adjacent shell plates.

238 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 272/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks Etection
12and considerations for ambient temperaturc tanks
Equipment

For verticaljoints any deviation is termed "peaking" and this is Access staging for the erection personnel is erected on the in-
measured using a 1 m long horizontalsweep board madeto the side ofthe shell. The staging brackets are attached to ihe shell
correct radius of the tank. plates using clips which must be securelywelded to the shell by
For horizontal joints, the deviation is called "banding" and is welding along the top edge and 20 mm down one side, this, to
measured with a 1 m long verticalstraight edge sweep board. prevent the clips from being levered off the shell when moving
the staging brackets.
The maximum allowable deviation to the BS Code for horizontal
and verticaljoints is; Normally a three plank width of staging with handrails, stan-
chions and toe boards is erected and this staging is moved up
Plates < = 12.5 mm thick : 10 mm the tank as each course is erected. Typical access staging is
Plates > 12.5 mm < = 25 mm thick : 8 mm shown in Fioure 12.9.
Plates > 25 mm thick : 6 mm
12.2.2.3 Plate misal ignment
Plates which are joined by butt welding shall not be misaligned
by more than the following:
For completed vertical joints:
Plates < = 19 mm thick, 10% of the plate thickness,
or 1.5 mm whichever is the larger.
Plates > 19 mm thick, 10% ofthe plate thickness,
or 3 mm whichever is the larger.
For completed horizontal joints:
Plates < = 8 mm thick, 20% ofthe upper plate thickness,
or 1.5 mm whichever is the smaller. Figure 12.9 Access staging on the tank sheli
Couftesy af McTay
Plates > 8 mm thick, 20% ofthe upper plate thickness,
or 3 mm whichever is the smaller
12.4 Wind damage
The above misalignment tolerances assume that the centre
The one thing a tank contractor fears most is high winds, be-
lines of all course thicknesses are coincident with each other.
cause an uncompleted or partially erected and welded tank is
That is to say, the step in thickness between courses ofdifferent
very vulnerable to severe damage from high winds as the se-
thickness is the same on the inside of the tank as that on the
quence of photographs in Figure 12.10 demonstrates.
outside. However, for large diameter floating roof tanks it is of-
ten a requirement to have the inside face of all courses flush The tank in question was 22.5 m diameter x 16 m hiqh.
with each other in order to give a smooth surface for the roof
seal to act against. In these cases the step due to the difference
in thickness is all on the outside of the shell.

12.3 Floating roofs

For ease ofconstruction access, it is common practice fortank
erectors to build the floating roof on the floor of the tank afrer
one, or maybe two shell courses have been erected. Alterna-
tively the complete shell may be erected and an access ,,letter
box" is formed in the shell by leaving plates out of the bottom
ano secono courses.
On completion of the floating roof, the BS Code states that the
gap between the rim of the roof and the shell shall not exceed
Il3 mm from the nominal gap.
The Code goes on to say that at any other elevation otherthan
that which it was erected, the difference in gap should not ex-
ceed 150 mm, or such other value as may be agreed between
the purchaser and the manufacturer for a particular seal
design.
Having completed allthe above checks and the first course is
set correctly, it should be lightly tack-welded to the floor plates
to prevent any high winds from causing the shell to lift and
spring over the retaining nuts.
The positions of the manholes in the first course should be ori-
entated on the shelland the openings cutto facilitate the move-
ment of men and materials into and out of the tiank.
Each successive course is erected in turn on the orecedino
course, using the same key-plate and shim method for the vert;
cal and horizontal seams. The gap between the verticaljoints in
adjacent courses is normally /3 of a plate length. staggered
clockwise or anti-clockwise but the minimum gap should not be
less than 300 mm. The shell is completed byfitting the curb an-
gle or compression plate to the top course. Figure 12.10 Example ofsevere wjnd damage to a ranK

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 239

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 273/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12 Erection considerations for ambient tempercturc tanks

rank quYhg method

Figure 12.11 An effeclive method of guying a tank

(h adrar ianchion omir ror cl'ity )

'.d
Fgure 12.10 Example of severe wind damage 1o a lank (cantinued)

12.4.1 Safety measures against wind damage

. Never leave a uncompleted shell course at the end of the

working day even if it means working late to complete it.

. Guy-offthe tank during windyweather and when leaving the

tank overnight, as illustrated in Figure 12.1 1. An effective
method of guying a tank is by using 'Tirfor'wire tensioners
on guy wires which are connected to the shell by welded
cleats or clamps and into the ground with multi staked an- Figure 12.12 Clamp ng the ends of overlapping slaging boards
chor bars, or alternatively large concrete blocks may be
used as anchor points.

. The tank erection staging can be adapted to form a tempo- 12.5 Shell welding sequence
rary wind girder by clamping the ends of overlapping stag-
The following sequence is based on manualwelding although
ing boards as shown in Figure'12.12.
the principles are just the same when using automatic welding
. Temporary steel angle wind girders stitch-welded to the machines, except that when welding with the latter, the weld
.
shell will greatly assist in resisting buckling of the shell due seam is completely welded in one pass.
to high winds. These girders can be repositioned on the To ensure the minimum amount of distortion in the welded shell,
shell as erection progresses. there is a very simple rule which should be followed and this is;

. Erect the first three shell courses in the usual way and take . Fair up, tack, removing the shims and key plates as this
the safety precautions given above during this erection pe- work proceeds and then fully weld the vertical seams on two
riod. At this iuncture, cease erection and weld the vertical adjacent courses before fairing, tacking, removing the erec-
joints in the first two courses but only 75% of the third tion gear and welding the horizontal seam between them.
course, leaving the upper 25o/o free for fairing up to the lf this procedure is followed, and assuming the correct welding
fourth course when it is erected. The first fur'o horizontal procedure, electrodes and heat input is adhered to, then a
joints are then welded. This method makes the shell much good-shaped shell will be the result.
stiffer and more able to withstand high winds.
This sequence can be adhered to when following the "three
On completion ofthis partial welding, the shell erection recom- course" erection procedure described in the preceding para-
mences and the orocedure is repeated untilthe whole shell is graph and also when erecting by the 'lacking method" de-
erected. scribed later.

240 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 274/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks 12
and Equipment
Ercction considerations for ambient temperature tanks

However, where a shell has been completely erected using the

conventional erection aids, then for expediency, a variation of
the above ideal sequence is offen used as follows:
On completion of the erection of the whole shell, the shell
erectors will leave a complete ring of access staging on the
top course on the inside of the shell.
The welders commence welding the shell from the outside
using access staging which they erect as they proceed up
the tank. The sequence of welding is as described above,
i.e. weld two courses of vertical seams and then the hori-
zonial seam between them. However these welds are not
welded on the inside at this sboe.
. The welders arrive at the top of the shell having completed
all the external welding.
. These welds have now to be back-gouged from the inside
by pneumatic chipping, grinding or air arcing the root of the
welds to sound metal. This commences at the top of the
Figure 12.14 Compleled slructufe with king posi removed
tank, using the access staging already left in place by the
erectors. The welds are then cleaned down from the too to
the bottom of the tank.
Atemporary king post is erected on a load spreading grillage at
. The welders then complete the welds working from the bot- the centre of the tank floor and guyed-off to the periphery of the
tom to the top of the tank. floor using wires and 'Tirfor' tensioners. Vertical adjustment is
Using this sequence means that at the completion of the shell provided by two hydraulicjacks placed either sjde ofthe post on
welding, there are two rings of access staging at the top ofthe the grillage which act against lugs welded to the post. Ascaffold
tank, one on the inside and one on the outside. These may now tower as constructed around the king post to give personnel ac-
be used by the erectors whilst erecting the roof structure and cess to the top of the Dost.
plating. The centre bobbin of the structure is secured to the top of the
For manual metal arc welding, the British and American Codes post and the roof trusses are lifted and bolted into position. the
require that hydrogen-controlled electrodes be used for shell brackets being landed on previously marked positions on
courses constructed in the range of higher tensile steels and the inside ofthe shell and toggled in place with erection equip-
the Codespecific requirements should be referred to especially ment prior to finally welding the brackets to the shell. The com-
for courses over 12.5 mm thick. pleted structure, with the king post removed is shown in Figure
12.14.
The specific requirements regarding welding are extensjvely
covered in the Codes with regard to: weather conditions, pre- Variations of this procedure are as fo[ows:
heating, storage of electrodes, cleaning ofwelds, allowable un- . On the tank floor, erect two adjacent trusses to the centre
dercut, back gouging, weld repalrs etc., and the reader is ad-
vised to refer to the relevant sections of the Code for these bobbin
This and fit the
assembly is lifted usingsecondary
purlins, and tertiary
a mobile crane rafters.
and placed on
details. to the king post and the shell brackets connected to the
shell. This gives a fairly rigid framework to work off when fit-
12.6 Joints in wind girders ting the subsequent individual trusses etc.

The butt-welded joints between the sections of wind qjrder . Dispense with the king post and erect the complete struc-
should not run into the surface of the shell plating as thi; can ture on the floor of the tank leaving the shell brackets loose.
cause undesirable defects jn the surface of the shell. To pre- Using two or more mobile cranes, the complete structure is
vent this, "mouseholes" are cut at the joints as shown in Figure lifted to the correct level and secured to the top ofthe shell.
12.13. This js shown in Figure 12.15. The lift has to be carefully
monitored to ensure that all cranes take the same load and
that the structure is lifted evenly. The erection supervisor
12.7 The roof structure
Having completed the erection ofthe shell the roof structure is

now installed.
trussed describedthat
type asAssume the structure
earlier in Chapter in this case is a
5.

Figure 12.15 Four cranes lifting a 33 m diameier roof structure

igure l2 l3 Vousehole arjoint beMeen wi'ld g|oers Cauftesy af McTay

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 241

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 275/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
1 2 Erection considerations for ambient temperaturc tanks

allthe crane drivers in orderto

has to be in radio contact with
pass instructions to them as they cannot see how the lift is
progressing from their position outside the tiank. Also prob-
lems may be encountered in ensuring the liftforthis method
of erection.

12.7.1 Roof plating

The centre crown plate is laid firstfollowed bythe centre strake

across the tank diameter. This strake is laid from each side the
crown to the curb, all laps being a minimum of5 x the plate thick-
ness and towards the centre of the tank (opposite to the way
tiles lie on the roof of a building). All plates are tack-welded to-
gether, but not attached to the roof structure. The two strakes
adjacent to the centre strake are then laid in the same se-
quence and these strakes are also lapped towards the centre of Figure 12.16 Two 25 m ianks nea ng completion
the tank and tack-welded in position. This sequence is repeated Coutesy of McTay

untilthe whole roof is sheeted. The outer roof sketch plates are
flame cut to suit the curvature of the curb angle.
Some ofthese sketch plates may be temporarily removed to al-
low light into the tank while other opeEtions are being per-
formed inside the tank.

12.7.2 Welding sequence

The short transverse laps of the centre strake are welded flrst,
starting at the crown and working out towards the curb except
that the lap to the sketch plates is not welded yet.
This sequence is repeated on the two adjacent strakes to the
centre strake and so on until all the short transverse laps are
welded, with the exception of the outer sketch plates.
The longitudinal laps betweenthe centre strake and thetwo ad-
jacent strakes are then welded, starting at the crown and work-
ing towards the curb. The welding stops short of the outer
sketch plates. This sequence is continued until all longitudinal Figure 12.17 Arrangement of hydraulic climbingjacks
welds are complete except for the sketch plates and the weld
between the roof plating and the curb angle. weight ofthe tankwith it. The tiank is lifted in stages until it is high
The laps of the sketch plates are welded next, starting with enough for another course of shell to be erected beneath the
thosefurthest awayfrom the centre strake, and working around previous one, this can be between 1.5 to 2.5 metres.
clockwise and anti-clockwise to the outer ends of the centre
Thejacking posts are fixed to the tankflooron a load spreading
strake. Finally the periphery of the roof plating is welded to the
pad and secured in position by two raking struts set at45" each
curD angre.
side of the post, these also being fixed to the floor plating, as
The Dositions for the roof nozzles and fittings can now be shown in Figure'12.17.
marked off and the roof sheeting flame-cut to allow them to be
As each course is erected, the vertical joints are welded fol-
welded into position. Two tanks nearing completion are shown
lowed by the horizontal joint between the adjacent courses. lt
in Figure 12.16.
can be seen from Figures 1 2.1 8 and 1 2.1 9, that all the work is

12.8 Erecting the shell by the jacking

method
This method is gaining in popularity because it keeps the con-
struction activities at a lowerelevation and is therefore safer for
the construction personnel.
The foundation checks and the erection and welding ofthe floor
is as previously described but the shell is erected in a com-
pletely different way. Depending upon the overall height of the
jacks being used, the top two, or maybe three shellcourses are
erected and welded in the conventionalway and the roofstruc-
ture, sheeting and nozzles are completed.
The tank designer willhave calculated the number ofjacks that
are required giving due regard to the overall weight of the tank
shell (excluding the bottom course) the roofstructure, sheeting
and fittings and also taking consideration of the effect of high
wind loads on the tank.
The jacks consist of a vertical post which has a specially de- Figure 12.18 Tank being erected by thejacking method
signed hydraulic jack which climbs up the post carrying the Courtesy of lly'hessoe

242 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 276/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks12and Equipment
Erection considerations for ambient temperature tanks

Figure 12.19 Tank being erected by thejacking method

Coul$y of Whessae

carried out virtually at ground level and is therefore much safer

for the construction personnel.
Figure 12.21 A pre,fabricaied lop section being tifted into place
Caulesy of McTay

12.9 Other forms of construction periphery ofthe roof, to sealthe small gap between the roofand
shell. This seal is formed by a thin flexible membrane material.
1 2.9.1 Column-supported roots
A number of steel guide cables are fixed to the centre of the
Column-supported roofs have to have the columns guyed-off floor, led vertically through sealed apertures in the crown ofthe
correctlyduring erection as the partially erected roof is vulnera- roof and across the externalsurface ofthe roof plating to the pe-
ble to a spiral type of collapse. Figure 12.20 shows a partially riphery ofthe roofwhere they are led through pulleys and verti-
erected column-supported roof. cally to anchor frames above the top of the shell.
High efficiency electric fans are connected to the shell man-
12.9.2 Prc-fabricated roof section holesand these pressurisethe area underthe roofand cause jt
to lift within the shell. Only about 6 to 10 mbar air pressu re is re_
On smallertanks it is possible to completely erect the roofon to quired to move the roof, and as it rises, the friction between the
the top murse ofthe shell and then to lift this section on to the guide cables and the roof plating stabilise the roof and keep it
remaining shell. The vertical shell butts in the adjacent courses level during the lift. At the top of the tank, the roof comes up

are only welded for 75% of their length to allow for fairing up the underside
into positionthe
against
rarily toggled of compression area and is tempo_
when the two sections are joined. An example of a pre-fabri- ready for the final welding ofthjs lap
cated top section bejng lifted into place is shown jn Figure joint.
12.2't. Figwes 12.22 to 12.25 show the sequence of evenb.

12.9.3 Air lifting a roof into position 12.9.4 Floating roofs

Thjs method is used for large diameter dome roof tanks. The floating roof is built at some level above the tank floor and
The roof-to-shell compression area has to be ofthe tvpe which access to build it is gained either over the shell, by restricting
has a conical roofsection as shown in Chapter5, Section S.4.1. the erection of the shell to the bottom and mavbe the second
The roof structure and sheeting is completely constructed on
the floor of the tank and a temporary air tight seal is flxed to the

Figure 12.20 A partially erecied cotumn-suppoded roof Figwe 12.22 31 m diameterdome foof onder construction

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 243

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 277/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12 Erection considerctions for ambient temperature tanks

1 ) A set ofvertical square or round support pins are welded to

the tank floor in a grid formation on which the roof plates
are placed. The height of each pin is calculated to allowfor
any floor slope and the contour of the roof, the minimum
height being that amount by which the support leg hous-
ings protrude below the underside of the roof plating.
The roof is built on this matrix of pins and when complete,
wateris pumped intothe tankand the roofisfloated upto a
levelwhereby the support legs can be dropped into place
and pinned (usually in the high, maintenance position).
The water is then drained out and the support pins re-
moved and any drain lines, heating coils etc. can be fitted
to the floor area.
Aseries of illustrations showing parts ofthe erection sequence
are shown in Figures 12.26 to 12.32
Construction note: There is a variance between the Codes in
the requirements for the single side fillet welding of the bulk-
heads between pontoons to the inner and outer rim plates and
to the top and bottom pontoon plating, (see Figure 12.30).
The BS 2654 Code requires single side fillet welding to the in-
I'gure 12.23 31 m-diameter dome roof'eadv fo-lhe a tl;fl (guide cables can ner and outer rim plates and to the bottom pontoon plate but al-
De seen al me roor cenrrel
lows the joint between the bulkhead and the top plate to be left

unwelded.

Flgure 12.26 Laying lhe bottom deck of a 36 m diameier double deck floaung
F gfie 12.24 31 m diameter dome roof being airlifled inlo place

Figure 12.25 The dome roof being secured priorto finalwelding

course, or by leaving plates out ofthe bottom two courses ofthe

completed shellthus forming an access "letter box". The former
method is to be preferred as this affords easier crane operation
and direction by the banksman. Figure 12.27 Bulkheads and top deck stiffeners of a 36 m double deck lloating

Two erection methods are outlined as follows: Counesy of McTay

244 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 278/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12 Erection considetations fot ambient temperature tanks

FqLre 12.jll0noi"m-ler - rSl" deLk floa_ ng -oof. co -.]pla ao s.5 ppol

F gure 12.28 Top deck of 36 m d ameier double deck floatlng roof being f tted egs n posilior. eady Io be flo.led Lp lo il. ^o rPLlele\atiol

curely in place with scaffold poles and clips. The roof is

completely erected and welded on these supports and all
the roof support legs, nozzles, manholes eic., are fitted to
the roof. Once ihe legs are in place and pinned in position
the supports and scaffolding is removed from the tank
through the shell manholes, (see Figures 12.33 and
12.34).
When a single deck roof is constructed using this method, the
outer rim of the pontoons is usually supported off temporary
brackets welded io the shell.

, =- 1\ -""
-'F
Figure 12.29 20 m diametef slngle deck roof ponloons being erected on p ns
couftesy of-1McTay

F gure 1 2.32 20 m d ia meter slngle deck floating roof at lts correct elevation
(the org nal support p ns can now be removed)

Figure 12.30 20 m diameter s ngle deck roof ponioons being erected on p ns"

The European prEN Code in addition to the BS requirements

requires this topjointto be welded only on alternate bulkheads.

The API 650 Code requires all four edges to be single side fil-
let-welded.

A grid formation of vertically adjustable scaffold supports

2) (Acrows) are set to suit the final level of the underside of Flgure 12.33 A 45 m diameter s ngle deck roof supported off scatfold ng
the roof pontoons and deck. These supports are held se-

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 245

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 279/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12 Erection considetutions for ambient tenperaturc tanks

For each horizontaljoint type and thickness (based on the thin-

ner plate), one radiograph is required in the first 3 metres of
joint, followed by one radiograph in each additional60 metres.
Annular floor plate loints
Forjoints which have been welded from both sides, one radio-
graph is required on 10% of the totsl number of radial joints.
For single-sided butt joints made using a permanent backing
bar(the more usualmethod) then one radiograph is required on
joints.
50% of the total number of radial
12.10.'1.3 DrEN 14015 - 1
Shelljoints
Radiography to the European code ls presented in a similar
way to that ofthe BS Code in that there are three shellthickness
bands, but the amount of radiography is generally greaterthan
the BS Code within each band.
*oport system for a single deck type roorola 45 m di-
5H:[S|,1:;a*o "*OrO This Code also differentiates between steel yield strengths.
Courtesy of McTay Steels having yield strengths equalto or more than 355 N/mm',
require more radiography than those below this value. Also ul-
trasonic examination ofcertain welds is called for in this Code.
12.1 0 lnspection and testing the tank The Code also gives radiographic and dye penetrant examina-
tion requirements for stainless steel shell plates. These are
12.10.1 Radiographic inspection generally not as extensive as for carbon and carbon manga-
nese steels.

In the interest of brevity and the prevention of boredom, the ex- Annular floor plate ioints
act requirements of each of the BS, API and European Codes The Code gives an option to radiograph or ultrasonically exam-
are not reproduced here. The reader is advised to consult the ine the joints to the following extent:
relevant Code for the complete information as required.
One full length radiograph (400 mm) from the outer edge ofthe
Of the three Codes, the BS Code has the simplest approach plate or US examination over the full length of the joint. This
and a less demanding quantity of radiography than the other shall apply to one joint in four.
Codes.
However, for annular plates in steels having a yield stress = >
12.10.1.1 BS 2654 355 N/mm'? and > 10 mm, the requirements are as above but
shall apply to one joint in two.
Shelljoints
The requirements are set out as a perceniage of the overall 12.10.2 Floor plate joint testing
length of vertical and horizontal shelljoints in three thickness
Danos. On completion of the tank, the floor joints can be tested for
Annular floor plate ioints soundness by one or more of a number of methods :

The requirement for the annular floor plate butt joints is based . By the vacuum box method, see Figure 12.35, whereby a
on three thickness bands. open-bottomed box with a seal around the edge is placed
over a section ofthe floorjointwhich has been painted with
Forthe thickest plates, allthejoints require to be radiographed.
a soap solution. Avacuum is drawn in the boxwhich has a
For the mid range, half the number of joints require to be toughened glass top and any leak paths in thejointwillshow
radiographed. as bubbles due to air being sucked from under the floor
through the imperfection in the weld.
For the thinner plates, a q uarter of the number of joints req uire
to be radiographed with a minimum of four being required. The recommended vacuum varies between 210 and 350
mbar.
12.10.1.2 APt 650
. By pumping air underneath the floor at a pressure sufficient
The API Code has a different approach but the quantity of radi-
ography is generally more than that required by the BS Code. to lift the plates off the foundation. The pressure, which
should not be more than 7 mbar maximum is held by the
Shelljoints construction of a temporary dam of clay or other suitable
material around the periphery of the floor. Asoap solution is
The verticaljoints are divided into three thickness bands.
then applied to the internal floor joinG for the detection of
For the thickest band, thejoints have to be 100% radiographed, leaks.
plus all 'T'junctions have to be radiographed.
. By the use of a tracer gas and a suitable compatible detec-
For the mid thickness band, one radiograph is required in the ton The gas is pumped and trapped underthe floor in a simi-
first 3 metres ofjoint, followed by one radiograph in each addi- lar way to the previous method and the detector is passed
tional 30 metres, plus all 'T'joints have to be radiographed. over the joints and senses the escape of gas through any
leaks.
Also for the bottom course only in this band, two additional ra-
diographs are required, one of them being as close to the bot- . By the use of dye penetrant or magnetic particle examina-
tom as oossible. tion methods.

For the thinnest band, one radiograph is required in the first 3 The most common method favoufed by most tank contractors
metresofjoint, followed byone radiograph in each additional30 is the vacuum box method although this is often supplemented
metres. with a dye penetrant or magnetic particle examination.

246 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 280/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

However, the API Code furthef states rhai c., a:-::-:-: ::-
t\/een the purchaserand tl'e co'tracto.. rh" a j:, i :, :^ .,. -.
methods may be waived if the fo low ng examrnat cis :-: ::l
formed on the entire circumference of ihe weids:
'1) Visual examination of the initiai passes of the nre. a-:
outer welds.
2) Visual examination of the completed inner and o,te-
WEIOS,

3) Examine the completed inner and outef welds bv ejtner

liquidand
box penetrant. magnetic particle. or righr angle uac
soapy solution. -u-
12.10.4 Fixed roof plate joint testing

The most common and positive method is to pressurise the un-

derside of the roof space when the tank is full ofwater while un-
der hydrostatic test. For non-pressure tanks, the roof space is
pressurised with air to 4 mbar, when working to the Apl Code
and to 7.5 mbar to the BS Code. For low Dressure and hioh
pressure tanks to the BS Code. the air test pressure rs 3 mbir
above the design pressure. Asoapy solution is applied io all the
welded joints to check for any leakage.
The roof test pressure can be monitored using a simple water
Figure 12.35 Vacuum box and pump manometer 'U' tube made from clear plastic tubing clipped to a
vertical wooden board which can be temporarilV attached to the
roof handrailing near the top roof access platform. The tube is
12.10.3 Shell-to-bottom joint testing connected to a fitting on the nearest convenient blanked roof
nozzle. Note that '1 mbar = 1 cm of water gauge.
This applies to joints formed with a fillet weld both sides of the The air supply stop valve must be accessible at roof level and if
shell plating and they may be checked by one of the following there are no pressure & vacuum valves or emergency vents fit-
methods: ted to the roofthen an emergency quick release valve must be
fitted to one of the nozzles to enable any excessive build up of
. The BS Code is not specific in this area but internal weld is
air pressure to be released.
normally tested for leaks using a vacuum box in a similar
way to that described above for the floor plating. The box in Alternatively, the roof joints may be checked bythe vacuum box
this case has one side, as well as the bottom missinq and it method. This may be the preferred method where large vent
is forced into the corner formed by the floor and sh;ll and openings have been cut in the roof plating of tanks which are to
seals around the open edges of the box give a air tjght seal be fitted with internal floating covers. However, in these cases
to the tank. Soapy water applied to the corner weld prior to the roofjoints can be air pressure-tested prior to cutting the vent
placing the box shows if there are any leaks in the weld. apenures. In any event it may be argued that a minute leak path
in a roof weld does not matter where large vent openings are
The problem with this method is that the coniractor has to present in the roof anyway.
stock a numberofvacuum boxes to cover the ranoe of tank
shell diameters. The European Code will accept dye penetrant, vacuum box or
an arr pressure test as alternative ways oftesting roof joinb.
. By the use of dye penetrant or magnetjc particle examina-
tion methods.
12.10.5 Floating roof testing
Contractors usually perform a dye penetrant or magnetic
particle examination the first pass of the internal weld fol_ The centre deck plate, pontoon bottom plate and the rim Dlate
lowed by an examination by the vacuum box method. welded joints should be tested as follows:
. The API Code requires the first pass internal wetd to be BS and API Codes spraying with penetrating oil on the un-
thoroughly cleaned and examined both visually and by ei_ - by
derside and checking for evidence of leaks on the top sjde and

ther the orDye

method, penetrant.
by applying Magnetic particle, Vacuum
a penetrating
box
oil to the gap between
inside of rim plates.
European Code by the vacuum box method or bv dve
the shell and the floor. This latter alternative is not recom- -
penetrant examination.
mended because of the difficulty in removing the oil prior to
subsequent welding operations. When the weld is found to The fillet welds connecting the bulkheads between pontoons to
be sound, the inside and outside welds are completed and the inner and outer rim plates and to the pontoon bottom shall
visually examined for defecb. be examined for leaks using penetratjng oil (or in the Eu ropean
Code. the dye penetrant method) prior to the installation of the
. Alternatively, after completing the initial weld passes on the pontoon top plates. When continuously welded, the welds con_
inside and outside, they are thoroughly cleaned and vjsually necting the pontoon top plates shall be visuallv inspected for
examined. After completing the welds, the space between pinholes or defective welding. In the case of the European
them is pressurised with air to 103 kpa and tested with a Code these latterwelds must be inspected bythe dye penetrant
soapy solution for leaks. method.
This method is also included in the European Code for bo Compartments which are completely welded can be individu-
tom shell plates more than 30 mm thjck. The air pressure to ally tested with an air pressure of 7 mbar and a
be applied to the void between the welds in this case beinq applied to the welded joints under pressure whichsoaovhave
solution
not
30 kPa. been previously tested with penetrating oil. The BS and Apl

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 247

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 281/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
12Eu o, rutio, f.,
"on "id" "

Codes offerthis test procedure as an alternative to the one out- 3) Water used for testing a stainless steel tank must be
lined in the previous paragraph. chemically analysed to determine the pH value, chlorine
content and the presence of any other potentially corro-
However the European Code requires that both procedures sive elements.
above shall be carried out unless the design of the roof pre-
cludes a air pressure test in which case all welds shall be dye 4) When the test is conducted during cold weatherthen the
penetrant tested. test water temperature should be checked for suitability
against figure 1 of BS 2654.
The primary drain system shall be hydraulically tested prior to
the tank hydrotest and the roofdrain valves shall be kept open 5) The rate of fill, the number and duration of dwell periods
during the hydrotest and observed for leakage. during the test and the final period before emptying, is to

During the tank hydrotest, the lower deck, the lower pontoon be agreed survey
foundation with the foundation
must designer.
be established Also
priorto datum
theatest and
deck and all the submerged roof joints shall be observed for settlement surveys taken during the test programme.
leakage. Clause A.5 of 852654 gives very good guidance on this
tooic.
Also during the first filling with product the roof decking and
pontoon compartments shall be observed for leaks caused by 6) Establish the maximum tiank Jllling height.
the deeper immersion in the stored product which is likely to 7) The European Code contains advice on the hydrotesting
have a lower specific gravity than water of tanks which are designed to hold products with a s.g.
greater than 1.0, and this is as follows:
12.10.6 Testing of shell nozzles and apertures a) Construct a temporary extension of the shell to allow
the testwater levelto be increased above the design liquid
The welds attaching nozzle reinforcing plates to the tank are level. This extension should be high enough to create a
tested for leaks by pressurising the space between the shell overload of at least 10%.
plate and the reinforcing plate with air and applying a soapy so-
Authors note: This may be possible for open top tanks
lution to the welds to detect leaks. The reinforcing plate has a but would appear impractical for fixed roof tanks. Also it
hole drilled and tapped in it to take the pneumatic connection.
would seem impracticalfor products having a high specific
The BS Code states that pneumatic testing of reinforcing gravity. For instance sulphuric acid has a s.g. of 1.84. With
plates is not required unless specified by the purchaser but the inclusion of a 10% overload this would require a tem-
when it is specified it shall be done at a pressure of 1 bar. porary extension equal to the original height of the tank,
clearly impractical.
Not withstanding this statement, it is normal practice for a con-
tractor to pneumatically test the reinforcing plates prior to the b) The first filling with the high s.g. product should be un-
hydrostatic tank test. dertaken under careful supervision, observing the same
caution as would apply to the original hydrosiatic test. In
The API and the European Code require the reinforcing plates the case of tanks constructed of carbon and carbon man-
to be pneumatically tested. ganese steels, consideration should be given to using ma-
The BS and the European Code also require the nozzle welds terials with enhanced levels of notch ductility, i.e. use a
to be dye penetrant or magnetic particle tested. type of steel one or two types higher than would otherwise
be required.

12.10.7 Hydrostatic tank testing 8) Establish a water disposal point and the maximum allow-
able rate for the disposal ofthe water. Also check with the
To ensure that the tank is free from leaks, on completion of con- local authority for permission to dispose of rust contami-
struction it is filled with water to its design level. What must also nated watet
be appreciated is that in testing the tank in this way the founda- 9) When the tank is filled with water to the maximum height
tion is also being proved to take the load from the tank. There- and the roof air test is being performed, the operation of
fore it is vital that the foundation designer is consulted with re- any pressure & vacuum valves and emergency vents can
gard to the allowable rate of loading for the foundation to be tested.
prevent excessive settlement or slip failure. 10) Prior to emptying the tank, all roof nozzles and manholes
lvlost tanks in petrochemical service store products with a spe- which were closed off for the test must be opened up to
cific gravity, (s.9.), less than 1 .0 and hence the loading that the prevent a vacuum forming in the tank which could cause
tank experiences during the hydrotest will not be achieved in disastrous consequences.
service. This effectively assures a factor of safety during the Note: The European Code requires a testfortank stability un-
operation of the tank. der negative pressure and the following procedure is
Also the initial hydrotest causes plastic yielding in welds where adopted:
there are localised high stress concentrations. in the tank has been lowered to one
Afterthe liquid level
metre above the top ofthe draw-ofi nozzle, the tank sta-
The following matters have to be considered priorto commenc-
bility under negative pressure (depressurisation) shall
ing the hydrostatic test:
be tested.
1) Availability ofwater source on the bnk site.
Allthe openings shall be sealed off exceptforthe nega-
2) ls fresh orsaltwaterto be used (salt water has a s.g.of tive pressure valve (pressure/vacuum) and the water
1.03). level shall be reduced until the design vacuum is ob-
lf salt water is used, then the tank must be thoroughly tained.
hosed down with fresh water ater being emptied. Extreme care has to be exercised during this testto en-
A tank fitted with an aluminium or stainless steel internal sure that the design vacuum is not exceeded as this
floating roof must be tested with fresh water. could cause a tank collapse.

248 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 282/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

13 Foundations for ambient

temperature storage tanks
This Chapter includes a brief review of various consideralions relating to foundations for above
ground, vertical cylindrical storage tanks, taken in the main from the tank design Codes.
This is a specialist subject, and thosd who wishlo pursue it in more depth are advised to seek
more detailed materialfor further studv.

Contents:
13.1 Introduction
13.2 Design loadings
13.3 Foundation profiles
13,4 As-constructed foundation tolerances
13.4.1 API 650 requirements
'13.4.2 BS 2654 requirements
13.4.3 prEN 14015 requirements

13.5 Site investigations

13.6 Soil improvement
13.7 Settlement In service

13.8 Foundation types

13.9 Leak detection and prevention of ground contamination
13.10 A cautionary tale

13.11 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 249

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 283/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
13 Foundations for ambient temperaturc stomge tanks

toms in floating roof tanks, with the need to remove all of the
13.1 lntroduction tank contents quicklyfor tank decommissioning and for tank in-
This Chapter concentrates its efforts on the foundations for ternal cleaning operations.
conventional storage tanks, i.e. above ground, vertical cylindri-
Fortanks fitted with central drain connections, a slope down to
cal tanks for the storage of liquids at or above ambient
thetank centre sump ofa minimum of 1:120 is considered suit-
temperatures.
able. These tanks usually have a drain line running within the
It is clearly important that storage tanks are provided with suit- tank, from the central drain to a suitable connection as low as is
able foundations and there are numerous considerations which possible on the tank shell. This is considered a better arrange-
must be taken into account where tank foundations are mentthan running the drain line beneath the tank bottom to the
concerned: This has beenthe
tank periphery problems cause ofleakageand ground
in the past.
contamination
. The initial shape of the foundation is important to the tank
erector. A level foundation, especially in the area immedi- For tanks with one or more peripheral drains and sumps, the
ately beneath the tank shell, will make the tank erector's tank bottom must be coned up to the tank centre, and a slope of
task easier and helo to ensure that the finished shell is 1:120 is considered suitable. In setting out the as-built slope,
made to good shape tolerances. The various design Codes consideration must be given to the anticipated edge-to-centre
provide guidance as to acceptable foundation tolerances. settlement which will occur during hydrostatic testing and
operation.
. The behaviour of the foundation in the short term during
tank erection and hydrostatic testing, and during service for Tanks with a sloping bottom from one side to the other are quite
the life time of the tank is important. Excessive or uneven unusual, for reasons connected with the difficulties associated
settlement during erection or testing would clearly be an with the cutting and erection of the first course of shell plates
embarrassment in terms of cost, time and reputation to all Again a 'l:120 minimum slope taking account ofanticipated set-
concerned. Rectification of foundations which are inconve- tlement would be normal.
niently located beneath tanks is an expensive and time con-
suming business. The tank itself may suffer damage 13.4 As-constructed foundation tolerances
resulting from the settlement which will exacerbate the
proDlems. To assist in ensuring that a tank is constructed with a shell
shape as true as is possible, particularly important for floating
. Poor foundations may threaten the integrity of the tank. roof tanks to prevent roof jamming, it is important that a founda-
There have been numerous examples of storage tanks tion as close to the design profile as possible, especially around
which have su{fered sudden bottom failures as a result of the periphery ls provided. lt is quite usual that the foundation
foundation shortcomings. contractor and the tank contractor are different companies, ei-
. The initial and ongoing costs offoundations must be given ther both employed by the owner, or one as a subcontractor of
careful scrutiny. A"cheap and cheerful" foundation may ap- the other. The point in time when the foundation is handed over
pear less attractive when the costs and service outages as- from oneto the otheris often a sourceofa contractualand tech-
sociated with excessive settlement are made a part of the nical argument, so it is necessary that clear guidelines are pro-
financial equation. vided as to what is required. The various design Codes make
efforts to define what is required.
. The costs associated with ground contamination, particu-
larly by oil-based products are such that leak detection and
13.4.1 API 650 requirements
provisions to prevent ground contamination are now com-
mon, and in certain parts of the world mandatory
API 650 has much to say on this issue in its attempts to provide
clear definitions and it is probably worth repeating these in full.
13.2 Design loadings The Code divides tanks into those with foundations in a hori-
zontal plane (the vast majority) and those with sloping bases.
The loading on the foundations of storage tanks divide into
three separate areas. For the former:

. The central area of the base during operation is subject to . Where a concrete ring wall is provided under the shell, the
uniform loadings from the tank product and non-uniform top of the ringwallshall be level within t 3 mm (%") in any I
loadings arising from the influence of the seismic events on m (30 ft) of the circumference and : 6 mm (%") in the total
'15. Dur-
the contained liquid which are described in Chapter circumference measured from the average elevation
ing tank testing this area of the foundation is subjected to
loadings from the hydrostatic head of the test water' For col-
. Where a concrete ringwall is not provided, the foundation
umn-supported roofs, there are point loads associated with under the shell shall be level within t 3 mm (%") in any 3 m
the column feet which are a combination of the self-weight (10 ft) of the circumference and within :t 12 mm (y""1in lhe
ofthe columns plus the relevant parts ofthe roofloadings total circumference measured from the average elevation
. The areas of the foundation immediately beneath the tank . Where a concrete slab is provided, the first 0.3 m (1 ft)ofthe
shellare the su bject of line loadings arising from a combina- foundation (or width of the annular plate), measured from
tion of self-weight, insulation weight, wind, snow vacuum the outside ofthe tank shell radiallytowards the centre, shall
and seismic loadings. comply with the concrete ringwall requirements. The re-
mainder of the foundation shall be within : 13 mm (%") of
. Where the tanks are fitted with holding down bolts or straps,
the design shape. lt is not made clear if this latter require-
the foundation must be designed to resist the calculated up-
ment is to be applied to the complete perimeter onlyorto the
lifts arising from the various loadings. The derivation of
whole base slab area. lf it is the latter, then this seems an
these loadings is described in Chapter 4
onerous requirement for the foundation contractor'
For the sloped foundations the elevations around the circum-

13.3 Foundation profiles ference shall be calculated from the high

(measured) point and the actual
elevations shall notdeviate from the calculated flg-
It is usual for tanks to be fitted with drains for reasons assocl-
ated with the removalof unwanted impurities such aswaterbot- ures by more than the following:

250 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 284/296
7/18/2019 13 Foundations
Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment for ambient temperature storage tanks

. Where a concrete ring wall is provided I 3 mm (%") in any 9

Diameter of tank Difference
m (30 feet) ofthe circumference and i 6 mm (%") in the total
circumference D

. Where a concrete ringwall is not provided t 3 mm (%") in mm

any 3 m (10 feet) ofthe circumference and 12 mm (%") in D< 10 10

the total circumference
10<D<50 D / 1000
The Code states that the measurements shall be made prior to
the water test rather than prior to building the tank. lf this in- 50<D 50
cludes the foundation tolerances, which it appears to do, then
this is unhelpful in sorting out the possible differences between Fgure 13.1 Foundaton surface loefances
contractors and providing well-defined hand over criteria. Fram prEN 14415, table 16.2.3

13,4,2 BS 2654 requirements that the ability of the soil to bear the imposed loadings, the ne-
cessity for soil improvements and the anticipated settlements
BS 2654 does specifically address the handover of the founda- can be evaluated. [,4any storage tanks are constructed at
tion from one contractor to another and suggests that it is nor- coastal locations on poor estuarine soils with poor load bearing
mal for the owner to provide the foundation to the tank contrac- properties. In these situations it is often found necessary to en-
tor. lt states: hance the load bearing properties of the soil, or to modify the
tank proportions to decrease the imposed loadings.
The too of the foundation levels shall be checked at a handover
stage to the tank erector and the differences in level ofthe sur- Some storage tanks are built at sites where the nature of the
face of the tank foundation between any two points 10 m apart sub-soil is well known. In these cases much useful information
around the periphery of the tank shall not be greater than t 6 can be obtained by the study of the performance of similar
mm and the envelope of the peripheral surface levels shall lie structures on these sites.
within 12 mm above to 12 mm below the design levels. Where this information is not available, a geotechnical site in-
These are locally, and in some cases globally less demanding vestigation must be carried out. The tank design Codes provide
that the API reouirements. some guidance regarding this matter
It does suggest that forfloating rooftanks, for the reasons men- API 650 suggests that the necessary information should be ob-
tioned above, that tighter tolerances may be required. tained from soil borings, load tests, sampling, laboratory testing
and analysis carried out by suitably experienced persons or
13.4.3 prEN 14015 requirements companies, preferably familiar with similar structures in the
same area.
This drafr Standard also addresses the handover ofthe founda- BS 2654 suggests that a site investigation is carried out in ac-
tion tothe tankcontractor. lt requiresthat, before the erection of cordance with BS 5930 (Reference 73. t).
the tank, the erector shall ensure that the location, height,
shape, geometry horizontal plane or slope, surface finish and prEN 14015 suggests that wherever possible, storage tanks
cleanliness of the supporting foundation shall conform to the should be sited in areas where the subsoil conditions are homo-

following: geneous, and

bearing and have good
settlement. Priorcharacteristics respectand
in design
to the start of the of con-
load
. Peripheraltolerances struction of the foundation, a thorough geotechnical investiga-
The purchaser shall specify the datum height of the tion should be conducted to determine the stratigraphy and
foundation and its permissible variation physical properties of the soils underlying the site. lvleasure-
ments should include soil resistivity, conductivity and Iocal wa-
- The difference in level between any two points around
ter table depth and variability. In areas subject to seismic excita-
the foundation shall not be more than 24 mm
tjons, either the local building regulations should be consulted,
- The difference between any two points 5 m apart around orifthese do not provide sufficient data, then a Seismic Hazard
the periphery ofthe tank shall not be greater that 0.1% Assessment (SHA) should be conducted by persons or
of their oerioheral distance companies suitably experienced and skilled in this type ofwork.
The tolerance the erector accepts on the inclination or The Codes are agreed that certain sites should be avoided, or if
slope of the foundation shall be such as to enable the fi- they must be used, perhaps for economic reasons, then must
nal vertical tolerances of the tank to be achieved be subjected to special consideration. API 650 provides the

. Foundation surface tolerances most comorehensive list which is as follows:

. Sites on hillsides, where part of a tank may be on undis-
- The sag in the as built surface measured with a 3 m long
turbed ground or rock, and part may be on fill or another
template shall not exceed 10 mm
construction where the depth of fill is variable
- The difference between the design level and as bujlt
. Sites on swampy or filled ground, where the layers of muck
level shall not exceed the values given in Figure 13.1
or compressible vegetation are at or below the surface, or
This document also has some sensible advice on the provision where corrosive materials may have been deposited as fill
of detailed information for any holding-down devices which will
require accommodating in the foundation and for the dimen- . Sites underlain by soils, such as layers of plastic clay or or-
sional checking of anchor pocket positions and the anchor ganic clays, that may support heavy loads temporarily, but
installation. settle excessively over long periods of time
. Sites adjacent to water courses or deep excavations, where
1 3.5 Site investigations lateral stability of the ground is questionable

At any site where it is proposed to construct storage tanks, it is . Sites immediately adjacent to heavy structures that distrib-
necessary to have knowledge of the sub-surface conditions so ute some of their load to the sub soil under the tank sites,

STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT 251

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 285/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
13 Foundations for ambient tempercturc storcge tanks

thereby reducing the sub soils capacity to carry additional ward force exerted on the tank bottom corner by the bottom
loadings without excessive settlement plates. There are rules in the various design Codes to allow
. Sires wheretanks may be exposed to flood waters, possibly
these calculations to be made.
resulting in uplift, displacement or scour Clearly a tank with a coned up to the centre bottom is better
suited to cope with this form ofsettlement as it has to pass from
. Sited in regions of high seismicitythat may be susceptible to
the cone up, through flat to the cone down before serious ten-
liquefaction
sile stresses are imposed on the bottom plates. Some owners
. Sited with thin layers of soft clay soils that are directly be- have theirown rulesfor situations wherethis type ofsettlement
neath the tank bottom and can cause lateral ground stability is anticipated. In addition to the cone up preset, some of these
proprems involve an improved bottom plate joint (perhaps a two pass sin-
gle-sided llllet, a double-sided fillet or butt welding) and a
stiffening of the tank bottom corner
13.6 Soil improvement
Tilt, as long as it is pure tilt, is anotherform ofsettlement which
lf the subsoil is found to be inadequate for the imposed loads most tanks can accommodate without undue problems, with
withoutexcessive or uneven settlement, and the tank cannot be the exception of floating roof tanks where some binding may
relocated to another area where the soil conditions are better. occur.
then the Codes are agreed that one of a number of means of
soil improvement may be used: Differential settlement around the tank periphery is usually
problematic. Floating roof tanks change shape giving rise to
r Removal and replacement of unsatisfactory material by roof jamming at quite small settlements of this type, and fixed
suitable compacted fill rooftanks can be distressed by their attempts to bridge gaps. lt
. lmprovement of the soft or loose material by vibration, dy- is often difficult to separate the components due to tilt and differ-
namic compaction or pre-loading with an overburden of ential settlement from a set of bottom level readings. The
other material method given in API 653 (Reference 13.2) is useful and Figure
13.2 is taken from that document showing howthis is achieved.
. Sub-soil drainage with or without pre-loading
SpeciUc guidance as to what represents acceptable limits for
. Stabilization by chemical grout injection the different forms ofsettlement applied to the different types of
. tanks is not easy to find. The design Codes are not helpful. The
Provision of a reinforced concrete raft with or without sup-
poning piles tank maintenance and repaircodes are more forthcoming (Ref-
erences 13.2 and 13.3).
The design, specification and undertaking of these forms of
The hydrostatic testing ofthe tank is the point atwhich the foun-
foundation improvement should be left to those experienced in
dation design is first called upon to perform its intended duties.
this type of work.
BS 2654 includes some sensible advice regarding tank testing.
The testing of the first tank in a new area is critical and should
13.7 Settlement in service be carried out with caution and comprehensive settlement
The prime function of the tank foundatlon designer is to provide
a foundation at an economic cost, which will protect the tank
from excessive settlements during its construction, hydrostatic
test and service life. A conventional storage tank may be sub-
ject to a settlement which is made up of a combination of the
following:
. Globalsettlement. This isthe uniform downward settlement
of the completed structure
. Differentialsettlements:
Tilting of the tank across its diameter
Edge-to-centre settlement along a radial line to the tank
centre
Differential settlement around the tank periphery
Storage tanks have differing tolerances to these various differ-
entforms ofsettlement. The tolerance is also a function ofthe
tank type and geometry For tanks built on poor but uniform
soils wherethe main settlement is globalwith little accompany-
ing differential settlement, and the connecting pipework hasthe
necessary flexibility, settlements measured in meters have
been recorded without undue detrimental effects. There are
sites where this order of settlement is a part of the life cycle of 10 12 14 16 1a 20 22
the storage tanks. They are designed with permanent shell
jacking brackets, or suitably stiffened for lifting by other means
such as airbags. When these tanks have settled by an agreed
h
O4-ofrh.o rl€tcc{on td pol.r'l U,= od{tdano ed€nFd ot pohl '1i
amount, they are lifted and the foundation is refurbished at the sr= Ur- {& Ur-d r, U'+r), ror@mde (+) wlton abN..e. cl'€:
original elevation. s11- t4r(2uft+1t2
- t2l (-) u'en bdw aNs rorodrnpJei
4, =(+) 'os
The ability ofa tank to accommodate edge-to-centre settlement
can be calculated with some degree ofconfidence. This form of
settlement is almost invariably a downward movement of the
centre ofthe bottom relative to the tank shell. lts limiting value is Figure 13.2 Graphical represenlationof tankshell settlement
a function ofthe tensile stresses in the bottom plates and the in-
Frcn API 653, tigure B-3

252 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 286/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks 13
and Equipment
Foundations for ambient tempeftture storage tanks

measurement provisions. The testing of subsequent tanks in 13.8 Foundation types

the same area may be adjusted, dependent on the results of
this first test. The Codes are in agreement that a number of different types of
For tanks where the ground conditions are good and settle- tank foundation are acceptable. These are:
ments are anticipated to be modest, it is acceptable to half fill
the tank as quickly as is practicable before stopping and taking Earth foundations without a ringwall. A typical example is
settlement measurements. lt should then be filled to three quar- shown in Figure 13.3. The capping with sand bitumen is
ters full and then to the full height with pauses for settlements at something which both the British and the European Stan-
each Doint. The full water load should be maintained for 48 dards are keen, if not insistent on. API 650 makes no such
hours, and if no significant settlementtakes place, the tank can specific requirement. The plastic tubes are for early indica-
be emptied. tion of bottom leakage and to help to prevent foundation
washout problems. (See Section 13.10).
For tanks built on weak ground, a much more cautious test
method is proposed with slowfilling rates and frequent pauses, Earth foundations with a concrete ringwall. Atypical exam-
some prolonged, for settlement rates to slow or stop. Clearly in ple is shown in Figure 13.4. The ringwall is of reinforced
these situations, sufficient time must be allowed in the con- concrete and details are given in the Standard forthe design
struction programme for the extended test period. of this ringwall. Cautionary words are included in all of the
Standards regarding the possible problems of differential
settlement between the ringwall and the material within the
ringwall (usually compacted fill) and its effects on the local
suooort of the tank bottom.

Earth foundations with a crushed stone or gravel ringwall.

See Figure 13.5 for a typical example. lt is important that
the exposed shoulder is Drotected from erosion. lt should be
remembered that heavy rain falling on a storage tank can
result in a vigorous waterfall around the periphery of the
€nK.

A concrete slab foundation. Figure 13.6 shows a typical ex-

ample. This pafiicular example indicates a thin slab with a
thickened peripheral region. On occasions, the slab diame-
ter is increased to provide additional support to the tank.

A concrete slab foundation with supporting piles. Where

piles are not or cannot have their integrity proven by field
Figure 13.3 Typicallank ioundaiion wiihout a ingwall
From BS 2654, figure 35 testing, it is suggested thai the slab is designed to accom-
modate the failure of an individual oile.

-75 mm (3")mn or @npaccd. creansa.d

Remove a.y lnsuilabe maI€,a aod

rcplace wilh su able l l i lhan

f I
thooushry Mpacl till

Notesi
1. S4 8.42.3 br GquircrunE io. relnfoferent. is not posible. eler lo Acl 316 hr addiisat d@toDment
2. Thb top.r lhe c..crr€ nngell shall be srMlh a.d t€v6r.lhe
d*€ 6tr€ngh lharl be al bas120 MP€ (3000 tbtin.2) arEr 3 Flngwalls lial ex@ed 300 mfr (12 in) in widlh shall haE
2a days. Fatnbmnt rdier nL€t be siaggeEd end shal b3 Bba6 disr.ibuied on boh la@s
hpped io d@rop turl stre.gm h rh€ bo.d. r ,rE @.i.e ot ts 6 4. S€e 8.4.2.2 lor be p6nion ol ltE lank shell on |he nn ral1.

Figure 13.4 Example of tank fou ndation with concrete fingwall

From API 650, Appendix B, tigure B-1

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 253

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 287/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 288/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks13
and Equipment
Foundations lor ambent rcmpetdlurc s@tage ..a -:

y'.*)

zJ
\:r)
Figure 13.9 Reinforced concrete slab with leak deiection al1he oerimeter
Fron APl650 Appendix l, figure l-6

Flgure 13.13 Tanks supported by gr llage members

From AP|650 Appendix l, figure l-11

Pil€s (l Equitsdi Acl3so extended. This section of the Code provides guidance for bot-
lom plate thickness and grillage spacing.

Figure 13.10 Reinforced concrete slab with radlat grooves for teak detect on
Another useful document for those interested in this subject is
From APl650 Appendix l, figure 1-7 EEN,4UA Publicaiion No. 183, (Reference 13.4). This provides a
wealth ofsensible information on tank foundations, tank bottom
design, corrosion prevention, inspection techniques, Ieak de-
tection and sub-grade protection from pollution. lt includes a list
of interesting figure, which gives a simple
correlation betweenantank age and
references and
probability of bottom leak-
age, shown in Flgure 13.'14, based on a statistical analysis of
data from various oil companies.

13.10 A cautionary tale

The subject ofihis tale is a large floating rooftank on a major re-
finery site. The tank was constructed in the 1960s. The tank
D6h pipo wfih opt@l €t6€F.
Dleh.rg6 to l.6k dstecdon was constructed on a base similar to that shown in Figure 13.3
except that the plastic drain pipes were not fitted, which was
common practice in those days. The tank survived its hydro-
Frqure 13.l1 Typicaloraw ofl sumo arrangemenL static test and was put into service. After a brief period in ser-
From APl650 Appendix l, figure l-B vice and at a point when the tank was close to being full of prod-
uct (crude oil), a part of the periphery of the foundation pad
suddenly washed out and the tank discharged its contents into
bond.d lo &mp (Altenstiw the bunded area.

20t
b 15t

:"E 101
gJ
(

o
0 0 0 40
Tank Bottom Age (years)

Figure 13.12 Centre sudrp for downward-stoped boltom Figurc 13.14 Probabilities ofieakage from tank botloms ptotted agatnst age
Fron API 650 Appendix l, figute l-9 Frcm EEMUA Publicalion No. 183, figure 1

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 255

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 289/296
 7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
13 Foundations for ambient temperature stonge lanks

When the tiank was examined, it was found that a substantial focus attention on the design oftankfoundations and helped to
failure had occurred in the welded seams ofthe lap-weldedtank form the guidance that is found in the various Codes today.
bottom plating. The sequence of events was deduced to be as
follows:
. A small leak in the tank bottom plating occuned. This could
13.11 References
have been an original defect or had appearedduring the hy- 13j BS 5930:1999 - Code of practice for site investigations,
drostatic test or in oDeration BSI London
. The lackofdrain pioes meantthatthis leak went undiscov- 13.2 API 653:Second edition December 1995 plus Addanda
ered 1,2 and 3. Tank lnspection, Repair Alteration and Re-
. The pressure built up behind the tank pad shoulder until it consfrucrbn, API Washington
suddenly washed out locally 13.3 EEMUA 159 (1994) Userb guide to the maintenance
. The loss of support for the tank bottom in that area caused and inspection of above ground, veftical, cylinddcal,
the tank bottom plating to fail, and the tank contents were steel storage tanks, EEMUA London
discharged into the bund. 13.4 EEMUA 1 83 (1999) Guide fot the prevention of boftom
This was an expensive incident, especially when the cosb of leakage from veftical, cylinddcal, steel storage tanks,
Drevention would have been so modest. It did however serve to EEMUA London

256 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 290/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

14 Layout of ambient temperature tank

installations
The layout of a storage tank installation mustmeetwith good practiceand also the relevant legal
and local authority requirements.

The topics
Safety discussed
Executive in this Chapter are
publication 176, (seebased on the information
Reference set out in the UK's Health &
14.7). Following the guidance in this
document will normally ensure compliance with the law.

Contents:
14.1 Introduction
14.2 Above ground tanks
14.3 Fire walls
14.4 Separation distances for small tanks
14.5 Separation distances for groups of small tanks

14.6 Separation distances for large tanks

14.7 Separation from other dangerous substances
14.8 Storage of flammable liquids in buildings

14.9 Underground tanks

14.10 Further guidance
14,11 References

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 257

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 291/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
1 4 Layout of ambient temperaturc tank installations

14.1 lntroduction When selecting the location of a single or multi-tank installation,

consideration should be given to the distiance of the proposed
The guidance given in the HSE publication, Reference 14.1, storage from:
generally applies to flammable liquids with a flashpoint of55'C . the site boundary
or below. This includes all highlyflammable liquids (as defined
by the Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquefied Petroleum . on-site buildings, particularly those that are occupied
Gases Regulations 1972, see Reference 14.3) and all petro- . fixed ignitjon sources
leum soirit and Detroleum mixtures as defined in the Petroleum
(Consolidation Act) 1928 (Reference /4.4) and the Petroleum . storage or processing of other dangerous subsbnces

(N,fixtures) Order 1929, (Reference 74.5). lt includes all liquids road or rail ianker transfer facilities.
that are classified as flammable, highlyflammable or extremely .
Other factors to @nsider are:
flammable for supply according to CHIP: Chemicals (Hazard
Information and Packaging for Supply) Regulations . the position ofthe tanks (above ground or belowground);
199616-20, Reference 14.6
. the size and capacity ofthe tanks:
The guidance is also relevant to liquids with a flashpoint above . the design of the tanks (fixed rooforfloating roof).
55'C which are stored attemperatures above theirflashpoint.
Tanks should not be located:
The location and layout of a storage installation should be se- . under buildings
lected with care. The aims are to protect people and property
from the effects of a fire at the tank, and to protect the tank from
. on the roofs of buildings
fires which may occur elsewhere on site. As a rule, if the tem- . in positions raised high above ground level
perature ofa steellank is allowed to rise above 300 'C, then the
structure of the storage tiank will be adversely afiected and it
. on toD ofone another

may rupture. . above tunnels, culverb or sewers.

Tank locations inside buildings should be avoided. (See how-
Storage tanks may be located above ground, underground or in
ever Section 14.8.)
mounds. Each location has different advanhoes and disadvan-
tages.
14.2 Above ground tanks
. Storage atground level, in the open air, has advantages be-
Above tanks ground should be sited in a well-ventilated position
cause leaks are more readily detected and coniained, and
separated from the site boundary, occupied buildings, sources
any vapour produced will normally be dissipated by natural
ventilation. Examinations, modifications and repairs are of ignition, and process areas. Figure 14.1 shows a plan of a
typical layout for storage tanks with separation distances. The
also easier, and corrosion can be more readily identified
layout of tianks should alwaystake into accountthe accessibility
and controlled.
needed for the emergency services.
. Underground or mounded tanks give better fire protection The separation distances willdepend on variousfactors butpri-
and save space. But leakage, resulting from damage orcor- marily on the capacity of the iank. Advice on separation dis-
rosion, may be difiicult to detect. This could lead to ground tiances is given for "small" tanks, generally associated with
contiamination, environmental problems and possible fire small to medium chemical processes, and for "large" tanks as-
and explosion risks to nearby buildings and basemenb. sociated with refinery and other large-scale storage facilities.

KEY

d, e dd f Ee Section 43

Figure 14.1 Typical storage tanks layout plan

258 STORAGE TANKS & EOUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 292/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

The separation distances given are unlikely to give complete be good practice and have been widely accepteo a_, ^:-::--,
protection in the event of a fire or explosion involving the tank, The minimum separation dislance is the min mum disia.:: ::,
but should allow sufficient time for people to be evacuated, pro- tween any point on the iank and any bu ldlng. boundary. pf.,
vided there are good means of escape. They should also allow cess unit, or fixed source of ignition.
sufficient time for additional fire-fighting equipment and emer-
gency procedures to be mobilised.
14.5 Minimum separation distances for
Under certain circumstances, it may be necessary to increase
the separation distances or provide additional flre protection. groups of small tanks
Such circumstances mayfor example, be where there are prob- Small tanks may be placed together in groups. A tank is consid-
lems with: ered as part of a group if adjacent tanks are withjn the separa-

. the local water supply. tion distances given in Figure 14.2. The aggregate capaclty of
the group should be no more than 8000 m3 and the tanks should
. where the site is remote from extefnal helo (such as the fire be arranged so that they are all accessible for fire-fighting pur-
authority). poses.
. where the tank is close to a heavily populated area. The recommended minimum separation distances between in-
dividual tanks in a group are given in Figure 14.3. lf a serious
fire develops involving one tank in a group then it is unlikely that
14.3 Fire walls these between-tank separation distances will prevent damage
A fire wall may be used to give additional protection to small or even deslruction ofthe adjacenttanks. However, they should
tanks. They are not usually practicable or economic for larger allow sufficient time for emergency procedures to be imple-
lan Ks. mented and for people to be evacuated from areas threatened
Where a fire wall is installed, it should be at least the height of by the incident.
the tank, with a minimum height of 2 m, and should normally be For the purpose of determining separation distances from site
sited between 1 m and 3 m from the tank. lt may form part ofthe boundaries, buildings, process areas and fixed sources of igni-
bund wall or a building wall. Afire wall should normally be pro- tion, a group of small tanks may be regarded as one tank. The
vided on only one side ofa tank, to ensure adequate ventilation. minimum recommended separation distances for groups of
The wall should be long enough to ensure that the distance be- small tanks are given in Figurc 14.4. The minimum recom-
tween the tank and a building, boundary process plant or mended separation distance between adjacentgroups of small
source of ignition is at least the appropriate distance set out in tanks is 15 m.
Figute 14.2, measured around the ends of the wall.
To be effective a fire wall should: 14.6 Separation distances for large tanks
. have no holes in it "Large" tanks are considered to be tanks with a diameter larger
. have at least half-hour fire resistiance than 10 m.
. be weather-resistant The minimum recommended separation disiances for large
tanks are given in Figure 14.5.
. be sufficiently robust to withstand foreseeable accidenial
The information is based on the Institute of Petroleum N4odel
damage.
Code Of Sa{e Practice, part 19, (Reference
A reinforced concrete or masonry construction is recom- 14.2).
menoeo.
Loading/unloading bays for road tankers should be located
in a safe, well-ventilated position. The minimum recom- Tank size Recohmended separar'on distance
mended distance of a filling point from occupied buildings,
the site boundary and fixed sources of ignition is 10 m. Less rhan oreqlarto loo mr The m n mum required ior saie
construcl on and operal on

Greatef than 10mJ Equalio or greater than 2 m

14.4 Separation distances for small tanks butless than 10 m in d ameter

For the purposes of this guidance "small" tanks are considered Figure 14.3 l\,4inimum between-tank separation dlstances for groups ofsmatl
to be tanks with a diameter of less than 10 m. Figure 14.2 shows
the minimum recommended separation distances for single
small tanks. The distances are based on what is considered to

SepaEtion distance {m) Tolal capacity of the group (fr ) Separalion d'stance m

Less than oreqla to 3

Grealerlhan and less than orequailo 5 Greaterthan 3 and ess than or eqlalto 5
I
Greale.lhan 5 and ess rhan orequatro 6 Grcaterthan 15 and essthanorequa io 100
33 9
Greaterihan 100 and ess ihan or equalto 300 I
Greaterihan 33 and less lhan oreqoa to I
100 Greateflhan 300 and ess than ofeqla to 750

Greater than 100 and less than or equa 10 Grealer lhan 750 and less than or equa lo 8000 15
to 250
'Bulal east2 m from doors pla n-glazed windows, orother openngs ormeans of
15 escape. Also nol be ow any opening (inctlding buiidtrg eaves and meansoiescape)
lrom an upper floo., regardless of venicatdistance
' But at least2 m lrom doo6, plain-glazed windows, or oiher open ngs or means ot
escape. Also nol belowany openins (inclldng buildlns eaves aid meansofescape)
rrom an uppe. floor, regardless oivenicald stance.

Figure 14.4 I\,4inimum recommended separaUon d stances fof groups of smatl

igure 14.2 Minlmum separation dislances for small lanks tanks, from slte bounda es, elc

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 259

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 293/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment
14 Lavout of ambient tempeftture tank installations

Minimum separationfron any parl of the . a lightweight roofor other means of explosion relief. Where
this is not reasonably practicable an acceptable alternative
Between adjacenl fi rcd.oof lanks Equa to the smaller ol the lol ow ng: is to provide sufficient mechanical ventilation to remove
(a) the diameter ol the smaller tank flammable vapour released in the event of an incident;
(b) halllhe d amete. ollhe arger lank
(c)15 m . a high standard of natural ventilation, using high and
lowJevel openings in the walls (typically 2.5% of the total
BeNveen adjacenlnoatng rooi lanks 10 m forlanks upto and ncluding 45 m
wall and roof area) leading directly to the open air Alterna-
tively, permanent mechanical ventilation can be used,
15 m fortanks over 45 m d amerer equivalent to at least five air changes per hour;
The spacng s determned bylhe size of
. fire separation (by means of a partition of at least 30 min-
BeNveen anoallng rooi tank and a Equallo the smalerof the foLlowlngl
utes fire resistance) between the part of the building hous-
(a) ihe diamelerofihe smaller tank ing the tank and other parts of the building, or other
(b) ha llhe d ameter ot lhe larger lank buildings within 4 m; and adequate means of escape.
. adeouate means of escaoe.

Belween a group ofsmalltanks and any The tank should have the following features:
. effective means of preventing the spread ofleakage. Where
Between a lanka.d lhe site boundary,
any des gnated non-hazardous ar,aa,
appropriate the building walls may form part of the bund,
prccess area or any fxed solrce oi
15 m providing they are impervious, have suffcient strength and
doorways are fitted with kerbs, ramp6 or sills;

Figure 14.5 lMinimum separauon dlslances for larue lanks . vents which discharge to a safe place in the open air

Adequate means of cooling the tank surface in the event of fire

in the building may be needed In some cases this may be done
by the fire brigade using portable equipment, but in others a
fixed water installation may be necessary Adequate. drainage
is essential to avoid tank flotation and local floodinq.

14.9 Underground tanks

The minimum recommended separation distance from any un-
(flashpoint <32"C - 65'C) derground tank to any building line is at least 2 m, to avoid un-
dermining the building foundations. lt is advisable to increase
thisdistanceto 6 m fora basement or pit. to minimise the risk of
(flashpo nt <32"C 65'C) vapour accumulation.

Figure 14.6 lvlinimum recommended separaUon dlslance frorn LPG storage 14.10 Further guidance
Guidance on the layout of storage tank installations is also con-
tained in the publications listed below but HSE 176, (Reference
74.1)would seem to be the favoured document because ofvery
factthat the Health & Safety Inspectorate willreferto itfor guid-
14.6 Separation from other dangerous ance and as a basis of good practice.
substances Refining Safety Code, ModelCode of Safe Ptactice Paft3,fhe
Separation may also be used to prevent or delay the spread of lnstitute of Petroleum
fire to and from storage or process areas where other danger- European ModelCode of Safe Practice in the Storage and Han-
ous substances may be present in quantity. Figure 14.6 shows
dling of Petroleum Products. Paft 11: Design, Layout and Con-
the minimum recommended separation distances from LPG sfructlon, European Petroleum Organisations (European Tech-
storage. nical Co-oDeration)
Figure 14.2 may be used to estimate separation distances from
other hazardous subsiances. lf published guidance exists, for ets for su b sta n ce s a nd p re paration s da n g e rou s
S afety d ata s h e
for supply. Guidance on regulation 6 of the Chemicals (Hazard
the particular hazardous substance concerned, the recom- lnformation and Packaging for Supply) Regulations 1994. Ap-
mended minimum separation distance is the greater of the dis- proved Code of Pracfice, 162 HSE Books 1994, ISBN 0 7176
tances given in Figure 14.2 and the relevant guidance.
0859 X.
Approved supply list. lnformation approved for the classifica-
14.8 Storage of flammable liquids in build- tion and labelling of substances and preparations dangerous
ings for supply. CHIP 96 and 97, 176 HSE Books '1997, ISBN 071
761412 3.
Flammable liquids should not normally be stored in bulk tanks
in buildings. lf storage is required in buildingsthen onlythe min- Approved guide to the classification and labelling of sub-
imum amount should be stored and for the minimum time, pref- stances and preparations dangerous for supply. CHIP 971,
erably no more than that needed for one day or one shifr. 1100 HSE Books 1997, ISBN 071 760860 3.
Additional safety measures may be needed for the building. CHIP 2 for everyone, HSG126 HS Books 1995, ISBN 0 7176
These include: 0857 3.
. a single-storey and generally non-combustible construc- The storage of LPG at fixed instal/afions, HSG34 ME Books
tion; 1987, ISBN 011 883908 X (currently under revision).

260 STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 294/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and ol amM
Equipment
1 4 Layod
@te d trsa&E
Fire prccautions at petroleum refineries and bulk storaga instat- 14.3 The Highly Flammable Liquids and LiAueH Wn
lations: model code of safe practice paft /9, Institute of Petro- Gases Regulatbns 1972, Sl 1972t517, HrrSO lgta
leum, Wley 1993, ISBN 047 194328 2. tsBN 011 020917 6.
The k*ping of LPG in cylinders and similar containers CSA, 14.4 Petroleum (Consolidation) Act 1928 Chafrer 32,HW
HSE Books 1986, ISBN 071 760631 7 (currently under revi- '1928.
sion).
14.5 Petroleum (Mixtures) Order 1929, HMSO i929, |SBN
Code of practice for ventilation pinciples and designing for nat- 01 1 100031 9.
ural ventilation, BS 5925: 1991.
14-O The Chemicals (Hazard lnfonnation and packaging tor
SuppD Regulations 1994, 51 199413247, HMSO 1S94
14.11 References ISBN 011043877 as amended by The Chemicats
I and Packaging for Suppty)
14.1 Slorage of flammable liquids ir tanks, HSE 176, HSE (Hazard lnformation
Books 1998, ISBN 071 761470 0. (Amendment) Regulafions 7996, St 1996/1092, HMSO
1996, ISBN 0 1'1054570 2 and The Chemicals (Hazard
14,2 Fire precautions at Petroleum Reftneies and Butk s/.or- lnformation and Packaging for Suppty) (Ameidnent)
age lnstallations, Model Code of Safe Practice patt 19, Regulations t99Z Sl 1997/1460 HMSO 1997, |SBN
The Institute of Petroleum. 011 063750 X.

STORAGE TANKS & EQUIPMENT 261

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 295/296
7/18/2019 Guide to Storage Tanks and Equipment

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/guide-to-storage-tanks-and-equipment 296/296